H Te em T M) ln P Zu Un ph TW : "WA S MORET v EX "EE LS UMS ] 4 ce En D H i 1 "a i i : 4° IE pegas m. | MM to > uM eo I l "n i | u i | | an I I ir 1 * 7 1n N A i T Ri ie t n i "nu fI | I E Dj Y D» I | i) “ d m B i j^ 1 | » i " | Ao " i mom | , I u i 1 n i " ; I 2» U i 7 n (iu 1 | 1 I 1 LA i | 2 = Ayvygıı Im NOVA ACTA REGIAE SOCIETATIS D COLE NY IA RUM UPSALIENSIS. SERIE] TERTIAE. VOL. VII. FASCICULUS PRIOR. UPS A RIA E EXCUDIT ED. BERLING REG. ACAD. TYPOGRAPHUS. MDCCCLXIX. PRINTED IN SWEDEN AT |J h- m y OV | 34011 PITATIIIOZ AA [93 A ALTOVA BUN | M US À LT MA F 9, E n) arene oui NBSP SE a à | | ol ‘ub, En — HET der 3 à delete viue É à agli jon "ésdindosiud. sous I 4 ASE Q4 0. månen ädsivat a. De | aii b qp jared wd SUE. | eee gob " I . aa N 10 à ion ELLEN 0. M AOD BUJUOIORAT. 1 - mec '9 ITEM. — KH aren jante why bd Vi uis dig kso f $^ | IV. INDEX HUJUS FASCICULI: J.-E. ZETTERSTEDT: Musci et Hepaticæ Œlan- IET eevee Se on MN pagg. 1—47. A.-G. THEORELL: Description d’un Météoro- graphe enregistreur... , 1—18. Tab. I & II. V.-B. Wittrock: Anteckningar om Skandi- naviens Desmidiacéer . „ 1—28. , I. C.-E. Cons Distinction des Maxima et des Minima, ....... » 1—39. T. THORELL: On European Spiders. I. I. . . „ 1-108 , I. lüteratusen pn ee » I—XXIV. rFuowyrt lär E ety iw CPT LU" AUEUM 1 E » ac - DD »voitequbl to oan MD srt Kt SHO OE wu yf | ARE, B e Mer p Y TdsTSARINIS, "mm aiii vd i 3 ai iro] MEIN. » m 4 oc inia ib aiti a intrat Bless . oe ER pec wath. t. WEHT. » 3i L abe enint or (ibo à gro me oc Les PRES ET VENTES 4494. at ecran "TI init à i An. za fcu Un MUSCI ET HEPATICA ŒLANDIÆ AUCTORE Dr J. E. ZETTERSTEDT. (REG. SOCIETATI SCIENTIARUM UPSALIENSI TRADITUM DIE 5 Oct. 1868). UPSALIA EXCUDIT ED. BERLING REG. ACAD. TYPOGRAPHUS. MDCCCLXIX. attend. «tuu rint AG " ih ET Md TEL TA atum 7 " - fuum; Host rei ul nity Se. oll dA | Wey aut TR «X T - s Tandil Verger auta EET j nl ze drag I | ive te HARTEN 8 Dm TVR AO D wow Y Lt olHedl MORT UN Re | ai ine. -fa i thua nw aS «pium o N i | SLA 5 là ovi «2 [^ Ados ay WO. Bercy di TUENTUR ———— wur 4 gr je a a ih. v fh idest neo erben de 7 PM j hee") TC NET evan Muse T log email adr Tenit Tm. iem d M do mode as Mutui uv oll | taal i^ " M Nee es : oni Af] "n aur ero crap qain mens "n Ju ' ] radii, Abt oW BAe) ue unm dri d hy ihe, HUEY eerie Au baut à TM rn e idu aM ud 1 CONTE TM ELLE sd 740s pest aj p di, tår Hm u = 1 w^. Urs amena maris baltici insula, angusto tantum freto a Smolandia divulsa est. Vegetatio tamen longe alia quam in terra maxime vicina. Hæc differentia a diversa soli indole aperte pendet, jam observante Linnæo 2. Phanerogame ab illo et plurimis botanicis diligenter sunt investigate; Lichenes preecipue a Theol. Doctore Chr. Stenhammar. Hi cum Gotlandi- cis congruunt, multum vero recedunt a speciebus Sueciæ continentalis. Musci vero hactenus pene neglecti; solus Cel. Professor S. O. Lindberg 1865 per aliquot dies hanc insulam visit, at suas symbolas, 5 l. 6 speciebus excep- tis, haud divulgavit. Oelandia, si aream insule respicias, vegetationem muscorum sat pauperem praebet, nam numerus Muscorum et Hepaticarum cognitarum non excedit 250, e quibus 202 Bryacee (inter quas 119 acrocarpice et 83 cla- docarpice), 6 Sphagna et 42 Hepatice. Hujus paupertatis ratio in natura soli precipue queerenda est, nam montes et rupes granitoideze omnino de- sunt; rupes vero calcareze passim occurrentes umbra et madore carent, v. e. rupes inter Wickleby et Resmo atque rupes prope Borgholm meri- diem versus. Qua re musci rupestres in Oelandia pauciores sunt quam in ceteris provinciis Scandinaviæ meridionalis. Prseterea musci arborei non multi adsunt, et inter nostros muscos paludosos nonnulle species ceterum minime rare, v. c. Camptothecium nitens et Hypnum stramineum, plane desunt. Non mirum est Racomitrium lanuginosum, plantam apud nos vul- gatissimam, omnino deesse, quum hæc species numquam in calce occurrat; sed eo magis miratus sum, in Oelandia me non potuisse reperire Neckeram crispam, quæ saxa et rupes calcareas preecipue amat et frequenter viget in monte Thorsburg Gotlandiz et in strato caleareo montis Kinnekulle ad Mórkeklef. ? Linnés Öländska och Gottländska Resa p. 39. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 1 bo J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, Bryacee vulgares in Oelandia sunt cirea 40, dimidia pars acrocar- pice, dimidia cladocarpice; quarum pleræque per majorem partem Scandina- vie divulgatæ sunt, nonnullis exceptis, quæ solum calcareum amant, v. c. Encalypta streptocarpa. Duo tantum Sphagna magis dispersa sunt per Oelandiam, nulla vero species Hepaticarum, nisi Radula complanata, quee saltem in Oelandia media sat vulgaris est. Multi musei rari contra in Oelandia inveniuntur, inter quos septem species, nondum quantum scio ut seandinavieze memorate, scilicet Weissia amblyphylla, Campylopus torfaceus, Barbula inclinata, Bryum Jackii, Homalothecium Philippeanum, Rhynchoste- gium megapolitanum, Hypnum Sendtneri. Quattuor harum fructificantes re- pertæ sunt, tres tantum steriles. Weissia amblyphylla, Campylopus torfaceus et Rhynchostegium megapolitanum locis unicis parce reperte sunt, sed re- liquæ quattuor pluribus locis oecurrunt, preecipue Barbula inclinata, suis locis copiose observata. Inter 42 Hepaticas nulla species Scandinaviæ nova in- venitur. Sauteria hyalina in Hartm. Fl. non allata est, sed in Oelandia anno 1865 a professore S. Lindberg copiose collecta est et prseterea in Got- landia inventa. Reliqui musci rariores Oelandiæ quoad majorem partem in Gotlandia reperiuntur, v. c. Gymnostomum tenue, Anodus Donianus, Eucla- dium verticillatum, Barbula recurvifolia, Ihynchostegium. tenellum, Hypnum turgescens c. pl. et nonnulli intra Scandinaviæ fines tantummodo inventi sunt in Oelandia et Gotlandia, ut Trichostomum | mutabile, Funaria calcarea, Eurhynchium striatulum. Hee omnes calcicole sunt. Si Gotlandia accura- tius explorata, mihi non dubium est quin omnes fere rari musci Oelan- die -ibi invenientur, quamquam ZÆurhynchium Vaucheri, Eurh. crassiner- vium, Rhynchostegium murale c. pl. nondum in Gotlandia, quantum scio, collecti sint. Quum in præsenti nullam enumerationem completiorem musco- rum Gotlandiæ habeamus, non is Sum, qui comparationem specialem inter has duas insulas balticas exponam; sed partim explorationibus et cognitione nostri ævi de Gotlandia innixus, partimque cognitione mea speciali, excur- sionibus bryologicis per octo dies anno 1860 adeptà, affirmare audeo, Got- landiam etiam ditiorem muscis calcicolis esse quam Oelandiam. Non- nulli vero musci, qui in Oelandia tantum crescunt ad saxa erratica grani- toidea, ut Grimmia Schultzü, Gr. trichophylla, Gr. commutata, Dicranum longifolium, in Gotlandia fortasse omnino desunt. Si vegetationem respiciamus, optime mihi videtur Oelandiam dividere in tres partes, scilicet australem, mediam et borealem. —- OELANDIA AUSTRALIS porrigitur a promontorio Oelandie maxime meridionali usque ad partem meridionalem parcecie Thorslunda et ad fines septentrionales parceciarum Muscı ET HEPATICÆ OELANDIÆ. 3 Sandby et Gardby, sive septentrionem versus usque ad marginem borealem magni campi dieti "Sódra Alvaren". Qua in parte Oclandiæ paludes paucæ occurrunt, silve Coniferarum omnino desunt, silvæ frondiferæ 1, nemora tam raro occurrunt, ut excepto vasto nemore dicto "Ottenbylund", vix plus quam unica silva frondifera exstet, scilicet ad Kastlósa. Magnam aream occupat vastissimus et admirabilis campus dictus "Sódra Alvaren", qui sane floram pauperem præcipue quoad muscos alit, sed tamen speciebus nonnullis Oelan- diæ insignioribus eminet sive phanerogamas, sive muscos lichenesve respicia- mus. — OELANDIA MEDIA porrigitur a finibus meridionalibus parceciarum Thorslunda et Norra Möckleby ad Lundegärd et Vagnborga septentrionem versus, vel ad fines boreales pareciarum Köping et Egby. Que pars Oelandiæ silvis et frondiferis et Coniferarum gaudet. Nemora amcenissima inveniuntur ad Tveta, et precipue occidentem versus prope mare v. c. inter Stora Rór et Ràlla, ad Ekerum, ad Halltorp. Septentrionem versus palu- des sat vastze passim occurrunt, et campus latus ibi extenditur dietus ” Rep- plinge et Borgholms alvar"; meridiem versus neque paludes vastiores neque .campi "Alvar" dicti oecurrunt, quamquam campi ut ita dicam alvaroidei, in quibus petra calcarea humi strato tecta, plus minus lati inveniuntur in parceciis Thorslunda, Norra Móckleby et Algutsrum. — OELANDIA BOREALIS porrigitur a finibus australibus parceciarum Alböke et Lith usque ad promontorium insulæ septentrionale. Partem meridionalem magna ex parte occupat vastus et sterilis campus dictus "Norra Alvaren”; sed paræciæ Higby et Böda silvis ornatæ sunt, hæc silvis Coniferarum, illa silvis frondiferis, et præterea paludes sat vastæ ibi occurrunt. Paroecia Böda, quæ solo arenoso macro prædita est, maxima est inter parcecias Oelandize, partem insulæ maxime septentrionalem occupans. Si vegetationem museorum trium partium Oelandiæ comparamus, ad enumerationem sequentem pauca præmonere liceat. Pars australis» habet 126 Bryaceas, 4 Sphagna et 13 Hepaticas; media 179 Bryaceas, 4 Sphagna et 27 Hepaticas; borealis vero 120 Bryaceas, 6 Sphagna et 34 Hepaticas. Qua comparatione elucet, partem mediam specierum ditissimam atque austra- lem pauperrimam esse. Prseterea animadvertendum partem borealem a me minus accurate exploratam esse, quare mihi persuasissimum habeo, Brya- ceas quoque ibl numerosiores esse quam in parte australi. Ceterum Oelan- dia borealis Sphagnis et Hepaticis ditissima est, sive individua, sive nume- 9 Due species, sc. Phascum bryoides et Dicranum fuscescens var. € cirrhatum, e comparatione exclusæ sunt, quum mihi non cognitum sit, utrum in Oelandia me- dia, an in australi, vel in ambabus his partibus insule reperte sint. 4 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, rum specierum respicias. Plerique musci rariores in Oelandia media occur- runt, pauciores exclusive vel prsecipue pertinent ad partem australem; vix plures quam duo vel tres musci rari in parte boreali solummodo nascuntur. Species 90 inter Bryaceas communes sunt tribus partibus Oelandiæ, sed tantum 3 Sphagna et 9 Hepatice. Ordo Hepaticarum in Oelandia australi valde pauper est, nam 20 species hujus ordinis communes sunt cum reliquis regionibus. Quoniam pleræque Hepatice vigent et aluntur in silvis abieti- nis, quæ in Oelandia australi omnino desunt, causa hujus paupertatis facile elucet. Inter Bryaceas 9 species solummodo inventz sunt in Oelandia au- strali, 46 in Oelandia media et 10 in Oelandia boreali Inter Hepaticas unica species (Sauteria hyalina) in parte australi, 7 in parte media et 11 in parte boreali exclusive observatæ sunt. Hi numeri sine dubio in poste- rum permutandi sunt, quum tota Oelandia quoad vegetationem muscorum plenius explorata erit, sed ratio inter numeros vel ut ita dicam proportio sat immutata fortasse manebit. Oelandia media locis-inter se diversis et dissi- milibus magis gaudet quam ceteræ partes, quare præcipuam attentionem ad hane partem explorandam dedi. Minus temporis tribuere volui explorationi partis borealis, quum hæc pars quoad vegetationem magis congruat eum Suecia continentali, a qua Oelandia australis et media admodum aberrat. Si vegetationem muscorum in diversis locis respicere velis, facile elucet, muscos rupestres et arboreos non multos esse, sed plerosque ad ter- ram in silvis, in pratis, in campis vel in paludibus nasci. Sat multæ species aluntur ad terram calcaream vel ad petras calcareas, transitum quasi preebentes inter muscos rupestres et terrestres. Musci rupestres re vera pauciores sunt quam in tractibus montosis Sueciæ, quum omnes fere musci, qui nostras rupes vel saxa granitoidea or- nant, in Oelandia desint, paucis exceptis, qui lapidibus vel saxis erraticis granitoideis adherent, ubi vegetatio muscorum valde alia exstat quam in saxis vel petris caleareis. Ad saxa granitoidea solummodo crescunt Grim- mia Schultzü, Gr. trichophylla, Gr. Hartmanni, Gr. commutata, Hedwigia ciliata, Dicranum longifolium, Pterigynandrum filiforme, Antitrichia curtipen- dula, Jungermannia barbata. Hypnum cupressiforme longe copiosius est in saxis granitoideis quam in calce. Plerique musci Oelandiæ rariores na- scuntur in petris vel saxis calcareis; et quamquam hæc saxa non multas species alunt, ibi tamen vigent complures rarissimæ, plereeque tamen admodum parce, ut Gymnostomum tenue, Weissia amblyphylla, Anodus Donianus, Tri- chostomum mutabile, Funaria calcarea, Homalothecium Philippeanum, Eurhyn- chium striatulum, Rhynchostegium tenellum c. pl. In Oelandia tamen maxime singulares sunt magni et vasti campi steriles dicti "Alvaren", ubi stratum Musct ET HEPATICE OELANDLE. 5 calcareum 1. petræ calcareæ nune denudatæ, nune tenui strato humi obtectæ sunt. Qui campi alvarenses a parte insulæ maxime meridionali usque ad Horn paræciæ Higby passim extenduntur. Vegetatio muscorum certe pau- per est, sed una cum speciebus vulgaribus alvarensibus, ut Grimmia apo- carpa, Gr. pulvinata, Barbula tortuosa, Leptotricho flexicauli, Orthotricho cupulato c. pl., etiam oceurrunt nonnulle rare et insignes, ut Bryum Jack, Br. neodamense, Barbula inclinata, Eucladium verticillatum, Hypnum tur- gescens, Hypn. rugosum, Sauteria hyalina. Ultimi tres, qui prsecipue in alpinis gignuntur, sat clare ostendunt campos alvarenses natura quasi al- pind præditos esse; et ut exempla augeam, Gymnostomum curvirostrum, Catoscopium nigritum et Myurella julacea etiam in his campis aluntur ?. Latitudo Oelandiæ exigua et indoles geognostica explicant paucos tantum ri- vulos reperiri et hos plerumque parvulos. Ad saxa et lapides juxta rivulos vel in ipso alveo rivulorum oceurrunt nonnuli musei, ut Cinclidotus fontina- loides, Fontinalis antipyretica, Rhynchostegium rusciforme, Hypnum palustre, Hypn. filicinum. Musci arborei haud numerosi sunt et vulgo eædem species ac in Sue- cia media et meridionali, ut Orthotricha complura, Pylaisia, Radula, Frul- lania dilatata c. pl. Inter species minus vulgares afferam Barbulam lœvi- pilam, Orthotrichum Lyellü, Orth. diaphanum, Orth. fastigiatum, Amblyste- gium subtile, et ad truncos putridos Buxbaumiam indusiatam, Dicranum fla- gellare, Jungermanniam curvifoliam, Sphagnecetidem communem. Musci palustres et aquatici non admodum multi sunt et sat dissperse crescunt, quoniam rivuli tantum pauci inveniuntur et paludes vastiores fere desunt, excepta parte boreali, ubi paludes late et vastæ præcipue in paræ- cia Högby occurrunt. Complures musci paiustres uno in loco simul crescunt in Oelandia ac in peninsula Scandinaviæ, et non pauci conjunctim aluntur v. c. in puteis et fossis prope Trögstad, ut Aypnum giganteum, H. cuspi- datum, H. scorpioides, H. lycopodioides, H. Sendtneri, H. filicinum, H. ftui- tans, H. exannulatum, Amblystegium riparium var. longifolium. | Exceptis varietate nuperrime dicta Amblystegü riparü, Hypno elode et H. Sendtneri, vix ullus muscus palustris Oelandiæ invenitur, qui intra Scandinaviam rarior est, nisi ad muscos palustres adjicere velis nonnullos in puteis l. uliginosis camporum alvarensium crescentes, ut Æypnum turgestens, Bryum Jackii, ? Nonnulle quoque phanerogame et lichenes, qui in alpinis præcipue nascun- tur, in campis alvarensibus passim occurrunt, ut Viscaria alpina, Helianthemum elan- dicum, Oxytropis campestris, Poa alpina, Cladonia vermicularis, Cetraria nivalis, Ce- traria cucullata, Toninia squalida. 6 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, Br. neodamense. Musei palustres fere omnes fructu carent in Oelandia; sal- tem frustra quaesivi anno 1867. Æypnum aduncum legi cum setis, sed Hypnum fluitans, H. exannulatum, H. lycopodioides, H. Sendtneri, H. scor- pioides, H. elodes, forme crassiores Æypni stellati, IT. turgescens, H. gigan- teum, HI. cordifoliwn omnia tantum sterilia observata sunt. In silvis Oelandiæ frondiferis et Coniferarum vulgo crescunt ubique Dicranum scoparium, Hypnum cupressiforme, FH. Schreberi, Hylocomium splendens, Hyl. triquetrum, vel eædem species, quee una cum nonnullis aliis per totam Scandinaviam vulgatissimi musci. In pinetis macris et arenosis vegetatio est valde pauper, sive phanerogamas sive cryptogamas respicias, ut in Rälla-tall, in pineto prope templum Kôping et in partibus quibusdam silve maximæ "Bóda kronopark”; sed in densis silvis abietinis et in ne- moribus musei numerosiores sunt quam alibi in Oelandia. Simul cum quin- que speciebus nuper dictis hie occurrunt multze species plus minus vulgares, ut Dicranella cerviculata, Dicranum montanum, Dier. majus, Dier. undula- tum, Tetraphis pellucida, Webera nutans, Bryum capillare, Br. roseum, Au- lacomnium androgynum, Atrichum undulatum, Mnia et Polytricha complura, Thuidium tamariscinum, Brachythecium velutinum, Eurhynchium striatum, Plagiothecium silesiacum, Pl. denticulatum, Pl. silvaticum, Hypnun Crista castrensis, H. purum, Hylocomium squarrosum, Hyl. loreum, Sphagna Oelan- die omnia, plereeque Hepatice. Nihilo minus paucæ species rare ibi na- scuntur. Inter quas dus species apud nos rarissimæ, nempe Ahynchostegium megapolitanum in Ottenbylund et Campylopus torfaceus in silva abietina in- ter Saxnäs et Rühälla Alize species insignes sunt Dieranım flagellare, Buxbaumia indusiata, Plagiothecium undulatum, Hyloconium brevirostrum, Eurhynchium- Stokesü, Brachythecium reflexum. Ad terram camporum varii musci sane occurrunt, pauci vero rario- res, excepta fortasse una l. altera in terra argillaceo-calcarea. Vulgares musci terrestres sunt Ceratodon purpureus, Funaria hygrometrica, Bryum cespiticium. Multis quoque locis occurrunt. Barbula unguiculata, Barb. con- voluta, Didymodon rubellus e. pl. Ad littora maris una tantum species oc- currit huie loco singularis, sc. Pottia Heim, nisi ad hane categoriam etiam adnumerandum sit Dryum Muratti. Quod ad distributionem generum specierumque diversarum per Oelan- diam attinet, hoc, paucis præmissis, ad enumerationem insequentem refero. Permulti musci, exceptis palustribus, in Oelandia fructificant (saltem anno 1867), inter quos nonnulli alioquin fructus raro proferentes, ut Æncalypta streptocarpa, Aulacomnium androgynum et Mnium undulatum. | Exploratio- nibus futuris sine dubio numerus specierum fructificantium non parum auge- Musct ET HEPATICE OELANDLE. 7 bitur, quoniam per septem hebdomadas, per quas Oelandiam exploravi, præ- sentia et distributio specierum attentionem meam imprimis allexerunt. In silvis et nemoribus Oelandiæ abundanter fructificant musci, sed in paludibus apertis et in campis alvarensibus pauciores. Quædam genera, in peninsula Scandinaviæ numero specierum et speciminum superbientia, hie parce oc- currunt, imprimis species Aacomitrü. Hoc genus frequentià et numero specierum admodum luxuriat per maximam partem Scandinavie, sed in Oelandia cireumseriptum est ad duas species parce occurrentes, sc. Ra- conutrium heterostichum et Rac. canescens. Nulla Pogonati species in Oelandia reperta est et Polytricha multo parcius hie crescunt quam in plerisque aliis provinciis Sueciæ. Nonnulla genera contra muscorum c/a- docarpicorum in Oelandia letius vigent et numerosiora inveniuntur quam in ceteris provinciis Sueciæ. Ita genus Zurhynchü præbet 9 species, vel omnes scandinavicas, excepto Hurhynchio diversifolio in alpinis crescente, eujus dignitas specifica ceterum litigiosa sit. Hurhynchium striatulum et Eurh. Vaucheri non sine caussa inter rarissimos muscos Oelandiæ habentur. Genus Rhynchostegii præbet 5 species, vel omnes scandinavicas, excepto raro Rhynchostegio Teesdalit. Quattuor species œlandicæ hujus generis inter mu- scos Suecize rariores habentur. sc. Rhynchostegium megapolitanum, Rh. mu- rale, Rh. tenellum, Rh. depressum. Quod ad Sphagna attinet, magnas par- tes sane agunt mole individuorum in silvis parœæciarum maxime borealium Högby et Boda; sed alibi sat parce et disperse occurrunt. Sphagnum acu- tifolium et Sph. cymbifolium sole species generis sunt, que per Oelandiam frequentius disperse sunt; magne areæ tamen inveniuntur, ubi Sphagna om- nino deesse videntur, ut in toto campo vastissimo dieto "Sódra Alvaren" et in viciniis preedii Tveta. Hepatice vero partes exiguas vel ut ita dicam omnino subjectas gerunt quoad vegetationem (excepta fortasse silva vastis- sima dicta "Bóda kronopark"), et nulla species majores copias speciminum praebet. Jam antea diximus vix ullam speciem ZZepaticarum inter vulgatio- res haberi posse, nisi fortasse Radula complanata, que saltem in Oelandia media multis locis viget. Species generis Jungermanniæ sat pauce sunt, excepta sectione bicuspidum, cujus sectionis quinque species scandinavicæ omnes in Oelandia crescunt 9. Familia JMarchaentiacearum 4 l 5 species exhibet, inter quas tamen nulla vulgaris. > In Gotlandia quoque has duas species Æacomitrii solas inveni. > Jungermannia Francisci Hook. a prof. S. Lindberg in Hartm. Fl. sane al- lata est ut in monte Hunneberg crescens; sed specimina hoece loco leeta et ab ipso 8 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, Enumerationem muscorum Oelandiæ reddens, et ordinem et nomen- claturam secutus sum Synopseos muscorum europæorum a Schimper editæ quoad Muscos frondosos, et Synopsin Hepaticarum a Gottsche, Lindenberg et Nees von Esenbeck editam quoad Zfepaticas. Quoniam fere nihil antea de vegetatione muscorum Oelandiæ e prelo prodiit, explorationibus meis sestate 1867 institutis solummodo innixus sum. Quas explorationes sane tam amplectentes et accuratas institui quam potui, sed, aliis vitiis silentio præ- teritis, praecipue ineompletze sunt, si muscos vernales respicias, quia neces- sitate coactus non prius quam die 18 Junii in Oelandiam veni Ceterum ipse legi omnes infra enumeratas species, 6 exceptis; et quum plantam non legi in loco quodam natali, inventorem semper attuli. inventore mihi benigne communicata, ad Jungermanniam Francisci non pertinent. Gottsche dicitur hee specimina ad Jungermanniam plicatam referenda censere; mihi vero eadem pro forma Jungermannie inflate habenda videntur. Muscr ET HEPATICÆ OELANDIX. 9 MUS Oil. Fam. BRYACEA. SECTIO I MUSCI ACROCARPI. 1. Spherangium muticum (Schreb. -— Schimp. Syn. p. 13 — Acaulon muticum Br. eur. tab. 4. — Phascum muticum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 78. Ad terram in luco betulino prope Farjestaden parce — c. fr. — M *. 2. Phascum bryoides Dicks. — Schimp. Syn. p. 18. — Br. eur. tab. 6. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 77. Ad latera viarum Oelandiæ (S. O. Lindberg in Hartm. exsice. n. 361) — c. fr. Planta vernalis a me non lecta. In Oelandia australi et media verosimiliter occurrit. 9. Pleuridium alternifolium Schimp. Syn. p. 24 — Br. eur. tab. 10 —. Phascum acuminatum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 78. Ad terram in luco betulino prope Färjestaden una eum Spherangio mutico non parce — e. fr. — M. 4. Gymnostomum microstomum H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 34. — Hartm. Fl ed. 9, p. 76. — Hymenostomum microstomum Br. eur. tab. 16. Ad terram argillaceo-caleaream pluribus locis v. c. in Tveta-äs, inter Tveta et templum Thorslunda, Ekerum, Halltorp — c. fr. — M. 5. Gymnostomum tenue Schrad. — Schimp. Syn. p. 38. — Br. eur. tab. 30. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 76. Ad saxa calcarea valde rarum. In preruptis prope Kóping parcissime ste- rile lectum — M. > Litteree majores A. M. B. significant habitationem speciei in Oelandia australi, media, boreali. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 2 10 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, = 6. Gymnostomum rupestre Schwægr. — Schimp. Syn. p. 41. — Br. enr. tab. 33, 34. — Hartm. Wik ed. 9, p. 76. In fissuris rupium calcarearum. In præruptis prædii Horn non parce, at ste- rile — B. Planta variabilis, densis cæspitibus crescens, plerumque brunnea l. fusca. Forma virescens, inferne calee incrustata, a forma normali diserepat foliis paullulum latioribus, quæ tamen et texturá et figura eum foliis forme normalis exacte conveniunt. 7. Gymnostomum curvirostrum H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 43. Br. eur. tab. Hö, Bö — lalardgin, IME le I, jo Ms Ad petras caleareas in campis alvarensibus inter Tveta et templum Thors- lunda parce et sterile — M. 8. Weissia viridula (Dill) — Schimp. Syn. p. 50. — Br. eur. tab. 21, 22. — Hartm. F1. ed. 9, p. 74. Ad terram in Tveta-âs — c. fr. — M. Hee species multis loeis forsitan occurrit, quamquam facillime negligatur, præsertim quum capsule jam initio mensis Junii decidere solent. Die 20 Juni non- nullas setas restantes et paucas capsulas destruetas inveni. 9. Weissia cirrhata H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 56. — Br. eur. tab. 25. — Hartm. F1. ed. 9, p. 14. Ad saxa calcarea satis parce et sterilis, v. ec. Borgholms slottsbranter, Kö- pings branter, Horns sjôbranter, ubique parce — M. B. 10. Weissia amblyphylla n. spec. Laxe cæspitosa, uncialis et ultra, vire- scens. Caules ramosi, folia madida patentissima, sicca subtortilia 1. crispata, e basi latiori amplectente lingulata, obtusa, carinato-concava, margine integerrimo et reflexo, costa valida sub apice rotundato evanida. Fructus ignotus. Ad rupes ealeareas raro reperta in Horns sjóbranter una eum Weissia cirrhata et Gymnostomo rupestri. Quamquam hse planta tantummodo sterilis reperta, dubitare non lieet, quin inter omnes hactenus descriptas species ad Weissiam cirrhatam proxime accedat, quum habitu et structura foliorum plane conveniant. Differt tamen caulibus robustiori- bus, foliis latioribus lingulatis paullulum brevioribus et magis dissitis, apice obtuso instruetis. Folia Weissie cirrhate graciliora sunt et sensim lineari-lanceolata. Weissia amblyphylla, si formam foliorum respieias, ad Weissiam cirrhatam exacte se prebet, ut Weissia denticulata ad W. fugacem. 11. Dicranella cerviculata (H.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 72. — Dicranum cervi- culatum Br. eur. tab. 56. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 70. In terra humida silvarum, ad margines fossarum et pluribus locis, plerumque ditissime fructificans, v. e. Olands alunbruk, Saxnäs granskog, inter Saxnäs et Ro- bälla, Böda kronopark multis locis — c. fr. — A. M. D. Musci ET HEPATICÆ OELANDIÆ. 11 12. Dicranella varia (H.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 72. — Dicranum varium Br. eur. tab. 57, 58. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 70. * . . . 9 Iu terra nuda argillacea, ad margines fossarum multis locis v. c. Áhs alvar, Färjestaden, Ekerum, Böda kronopark — c. fr. — A. M. B. 19. Dicranella heteromalla (H.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 75. — Dieranum he- teromallum Br. enr. tab. 62. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 70. Ad margines fossarum in Ottenbylund non parce — c. fr. — A. 14. Dicranum montanum H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 81. — Br. eur. tab. 67. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 68. Ad truncos putridos abietum et ad terram silvarum pluribus locis, v. e. in silva inter Saxnäs et Rühälla, sed præcipue copiose diversis locis in Böda krono- park — M. B. 15. Dicranum flagellare H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 82. — Br. eur. tab. 68. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 68. Ad terram et ad truncos putridos silvarum pluribus loeis, v. c. in Ottenby- lund, in silva abietina inter Saxnäs et Rohiilla copiose at parce fructificans, in silvis paræciæ Högby, in Böda kronopark — ce. fr. — A. M. B. 16. Dicranum longifolium H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 84. — Br. eur. tab. 72. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 68. Ad saxa erratiea pluribus loeis, v. c. Resmo alvar, Gräborg, inter Stora Rör et Riilia, in quercetis inter Borgholm et arcem. Tantummodo in saxis granitoideis, numquam in petris ealeareis, lectum est. 17. Dicranum fuscescens var. € cirrhatum Schimp. Syn. p. 87. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 67. — Dicranum Mühlenbeckii var. brevifolium Lindb. in Hartm. exsice. n. 367. In campis caleareis sterilissimis Oelandiæ (S. ©. Lindberg 1. e.). Hee planta a Dicrano fuscescente typico aliquantulum discrepat, sed ad Di- cranum Mühlenbeckii, ut mihi videtur, vix referenda est. Distinguitur non solum fo- liis brevioribus minus erispatis, sed etiam tela basilari cellulosa minus laxa aliterque eonstrueta et foliis minus convoluto-tubulosis. In media et australi Oelandia for- tasse viget. 18. Dicranum scoparium (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 89. — Br. eur. tab. 74, 15. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 67. Hæc species maxime variabilis, ad terram et saxa crescens, per totam Oelan- diam ab Ottenby ad Böda vulgaris est — c. fr. — A. M. B. 19. Dicranum majus Turn. — Schimp. Syn. p. 96. — Br. eur. tab. 85. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 67. 12 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, In terra silvarum pluribus locis et copiose fructificans, v. e. in silva abietina inter Saxnäs et Röhälla, in silvis betulinis inter Stora Rör et Rälla, et multis locis in Bóda kronopark, ubi præcipue frequens et pulehrum viget in silva abietina dicta Bogateskogen — e. fr. — M. B. 20. Dicranum palustre Brid. — Schimp. Syn. p. 91. — Br. eur. tab. 79. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 66. In paludibus et uliginosis silvarum multis locis, v. e. Ottenbylund, Färjesta- den, Tveta, Müllstorp, Röhälla, Ismamtorpsborg, Stora Rór, Borgholm, Högby — c. fr. — A. M. B. 21. Dicranum Schraderi Schwægr. — Schimp. Syn. p. 92. — Br. eur. tab. 80. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 66. In uliginosis torfaceis Oelandiæ medi: pluribus loeis, v. ec. inter templum Thorslunda et Färjestaden, in silva abietina prædii Saxnäs, in paludibus prope tem- plum Glómminge meridiem versus — e. fr. — M. 29. Dicranum spurium H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 95. — Br. eur. tab. 81. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 67. In silvis siccis Coniferarum et tantummodo repertum in Büda kronopark, ubi tamen pluribus locis occurrit — e. fr. — B. ; 23. Dicranum undulatum Ehrh. — Schimp. Syn. p. 94. — Br. eur. tab. 82, 83. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 66. In terra uliginosa silvarum multis locis, copiose fructificans, v. c. Ottenby- lund, in silva abietina inter templum Thorslunda et Färjestaden, inter Saxnäs et Röhälla, Högby, Böda kronopark — e. fr. — A. M. B. 24. Campylopus torfaceus Schimp. Syn. p. 98. — Br. eur. tab. 91. In terra humida torfacea silvarum abiegnarum raro et tantummodo parce reper- tum inter Saxnäs et Röhälla una eum Dicranella cerviculata — e. fr. — M. 25. Leucobryum glaucum (L.) —- Schimp. Syn. p. 101. — Br. eur. tab. 97, 98. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 65. In terra uliginosa silvarum, in paludibus ete. multis loeis, v. e. Ottenbylund, infra templum Thorslunda, Färjestaden, Müllstorp, inter Saxnäs et Röhälla, inter Stora Ror et Rälla, in paludibus inter Trögstad et templum Köping, in pratis marinis inter Köping et Borgholm, Hógby, Büda kronopark copiose. — A. M. B. 26. Fissidens incurvus (W. M.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 104. — Br. eur. tab. 99. — Fissidens viridülus Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 13. Ad terram fossarum, v. c. Stora Rör — ec. fr. — M. 27. Fissidens Osmundioides H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 106. — Br. eur. tab. 103. — Hartm. FI. ed. 9, p. 12. In terra humida silve Böda kronopark, ubi repertus est in parte dicta Bo- gateskogen. — B. Muscr ET Heparica OELANDLE. 13 28. Fissidens taxifolius (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 108. — Br. eur. tab. 104. — Harim: VEL ved», "p. 72. Ad terram pluribus loeis, v. e. Färjestaden, Tveta, Borgholms slottsbranter, Horn. — M. B. 29. Fissidens Adianthoides (Dill) — Schimp. Syn. p. 108. — Br. eur. tab. 105. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 12. In umbrosis silvarum rupiumque et in uliginosis camporum alvarensium multis locis, v. e. Ahs alvar, Resmo alvar, Wieklebyberg, Gardby, Fiirjestaden, Tveta, Grä- borg, Runsten, inter Stora Rör et Rälla, Borgholms slottsbranter, Köpings branter, Högby, Böda kronopark in Bogateskogen — ce. fr. — A. M. BD. Loeis umbrosis passim eum fructu occurrit, sed in campis alvarensibus ubique sterilis est. 30. Anodus Donianus (E. B.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 112. — Br. eur. tab. 109. — Seligeria Doniana Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 75. In rupibus ealeareis prope templum Köping rarissime — c. fr. — M. 31. Pottia cavifolia (Dieks.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 122. — Br. eur. tab. 118. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 54. Ad terram infra Köpings branter parce — e. fr. — M. Heee species et Anacalypta lanceolata in Oelandia fortasse non rare sunt; sed jam tempore vernali fructificant, ut initio mensis Julii fragmenta tantum inve- nire potuerim. Crescentes inveni una eum Funaria calcarea, cujus capsule nondum mature erant. 32. .Pottia Heimii (H.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 125. — Br. eur. tab, 124. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 54. Ad terram inter lapides ete. in littore marino secundum totam Oelandiam mul- tis locis, v. c. Ottenby fyr, Färjestaden, Röhälla, Stora Rör, Borgholm, Böda hamn, ubique fructificans — c. fr. — A. M. B. Perpaucæ species muscorum solummodo ad littora maris vel prope salinas crescunt, inter quas Pottia Heimii numeranda est. In terra interiori Europe conti- nentalis perrara oecurrit, sed divulgata est secundum littora maris a Gallia occiden- tali usque ad Spitsbergen. In peninsula Seandinavie tantummodo reperta est juxta mare. Præcipue pulchra et copiosa viget ad Borgholm et ad Ottenby fyr. 33. Anacalypta Starkeana (H.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 126. — Br. eur. tab. 125% Wblarım. Ie p. 53: In campo alvarensi prope Karlevi (E. V. Ekstrand) — e. fr. — A. 34. Anacalypta lanceolata (Dicks.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 128. — Br. eur. tab. 127. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 53. In terra argillaeeo-calearea infra Köpings branter parce una eum Pottia cavi- folia et Funaria calcarea — e. fr. — M. 14 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, 95. Didymodon rubellus (Roth) — Schimp. Syn. p. 130. — Br. eur. tab. 185. — Trichostomum rubellum Hartm FI. ed. 9, p. 65. Ad terram et saxa calearea tam in campis alvarensibus, quam in rupibus et ad margines viarnm multis locis, v. e. Ottenbylund, Ahs alvar, Resmo alvar, Wickleby, Thorslunda, Färjestaden, Tveta, Möllstorp, Borgholms slottsbranter, Kó- pings branter, Horn — e. fr. — A. M. B. 36. Eucladium verticillatum (Turn. — Schimp. Syn. p. 134. — Br. eur. tab. 40. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 53. Ad petras et rupes calcareas rarum et sterile, v. c. Åhs alvar, inter Thors- lunda et Tveta, Kópings branter. — A. M. Color hujus plants satis variat, plerumque viridis, nonnumquam brunnescens. Folia rigida, sicca fere recta. 37. Distichium capillaceum (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 135. — Br. eur. 193. — artim ES ed. 9, 7269: Ad saxa ealearea, ad radiees arborum ete. pluribus locis, parce tamen, v. c. Gärdby ad radices, Köpings branter, ad margines viarum prope templum Köping — c. fr. — M. 38. Ceratodon purpureus (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 139. — Br. eur. tab. 189, 190. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 66. Ad terram, ad margines fossarum ete. vulgaris per totam Oelandiam ab Ot- tenby ad Böda — c. fr. — A. M. B. 39. Leptotrichum flexicaule (Schweegr.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 144. — Tricho- stomum flexicaule Br. eur. tab. 180. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p, 64. 7 Ad saxa calcarea et terram calcaream vulgare per totam fere Oelandiam ab Ahs alvar usque ad Hogby, et preecipue copiosum in campis alvarensibus, passim fructificans — e. fr. — A. M. B. Var. longifolium (Trichostomum longirostre Hartm. Fl. ed. 7, p. 380) passim occurrit, minus vulgare tamen quam forma typica semperque sterile. Hee varietas observata est in Ahs alvar, in campis inter Thorslunda et Tveta, et in Borgholms alvar. A0. Trichostomum rigidulum (Dicks. — Schimp. Syn. p. 148. — Br. eur. tab: 176. — "Hartm: El! ed97"p.^ 64: Ad terram et petras calcareas pluribus loeis, v. c. Wickleby, Tveta, Köpings branter, Horns alvar, nune una cum Barbula unguiculata, nune cum Barbula convo- luta et Leptotricho fleæicauli. — A. M. B. Al. Trichostomum mutabile Bruch. — Schimp. Syn. p. 150. — Br. eur. tab. 174. = Harim. Filed? 95 ep. 645 In fissuris rupium calcarearum parce repertum in Küpings branter una cum Trichostomo rigidulo. — M. Muscı ET HEPATICE OELANDLE. 15 Obs. Heee species rara, in Scandinavia sterilis tantum reperta, eopiosior vi- gere videtur in Gotlandia, ubi jam anno 1860 speeimina pulehra in monte Thors- burg legi, dein eodem loco et pluribus aliis a Doct. P. T. Cleve inventa est. Fru- stra vero in Oelandia quæsivi Trichostomum crispulum Bruch, quod pluribus loeis Gotlandiæ inveni, v. e. in Thorsburg, ad Etelhem et ad Kopparvik. Duobus locis praecedentibus formam inveni normalem, qualem in Pyrinæis legi et e Bavaria accepi, sed ad Kopparvik var. B brevifolium (Schimp. Syn. p. 151). 42. Barbula unguiculata (Dill) — Schimp. Syn. p. 167. — Br. eur. tab. 142, 143. — Tortula unguiculata Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 61. In terra ad margines fossarum ete. multis locis et fere vulgaris, parcius ta- men fruetifieans, v. €. Ottenby, Olands alunbruk, Wickleby, Thorslunda, Tveta, Glómminge, Borgholm, Köping, Horn, Böda — c. fr. — A. M. B. 48. Barbula recurvifolia Schimp. Coroll. Br. eur. et Syn. p. 170. — Tor- tula recurvifolia Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 62. Ad petras et rupes calcareas madidas pluribus locis, pareissime tamen, v. c. Tveta meridiem versus, Algutsrum in pineto prope Jordtorp, Köpings branter. — M. 44. Barbula convoluta H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 175. — Br. eur. tab. 154. — Tortula convoluta Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 62. Ad terram et petras caleareas multis locis et sæpe Didymodonti rubello as- sociata, pareius tamen fructificans, v. e. Ahs alvar, Resmo et Wickleby alvar, Wiekleby- berg, Gärdby, Thorslunda, Tveta às, Runsten, Ekerum, Trógstad, Kolstad, Borg- holms alvar, Borgholms slottsbranter, Köpings branter, Horns sjóbranter, Horns alvar, Bóda kronopark — c. fr. — A. M. B. 45. Barbula inclinata. Schwægr. — Schimp. Syn. p. 178. — Br. eur. tab. 150. Ad petras fere nudas calcareas Oelandiz australis vulgaris est in toto magno campo sterilissimo dicto "Sódra Alvaren" ab Ahs alvar usque ad Resmo, Wickleby, et Sandby. In Oelandia media et boreali passim occurrit, v. c. in campis alvarensi- bus inter Thorslunda et Algutsrum, in Horns alvar — c. fr. — A. M. B. Hæc species patrie nova, que inter vulgatiores museos alvarenses Oelandiæ numeranda est, raro in Alvaren fruetificare videtur. Unieam capsulam maturam in- veni in Åhs alvar. Eodem anno ac in Oelandia in territorio Sogn Norvegis reperta est a Stud. N. Wulfsberg. Mihi non dubium est, quin oceurrat pluribus locis Scan- dinavie v. c. in Gotlandia. 46. Barbula tortuosa (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 179. — Br. eur. tab. 151. — Tortula tortuosa Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 59. Ad rupes et petras calcareas vulgaris per totam fere Oelandiam ab Ahs alvar usque ad Högby — c. fr. — A. M. B. Hee species ut Barbula inclinata precipue copiose crescit in campis dictis Alvar, ubi tamen semper sterilis esse videtur. In loeis umbrosis non raro fructificat. 16 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, AT. Barbula fragilis Wils. — Schimp. Syn. p. 181. — Br. eur. suppl. tab. 639. — Tortula fragilis Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 61. Ad terram et petras ealeareas pluribus locis, parcius tamen, v. c. Resmo al- var, Tveta in campis meridiem et orientem versus, Müllstorp in pratis betulinis. — A. M. 48. Barbula murals (L. — Schimp. Syn. p. 185. — Br. eur. tab. 159. — Tortula muralis Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 61. Ad saxa calearea et muros pluribus locis, plerumque tamen parce, v. e. in rupibus inter Resmo et Wickleby sat copiose, Borgholms slott parce, Kópings bran- ter parce — e. fr. — A. M. 49. Barbula subulata (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 186. — Br. eur. tab. 160. — Tortula subulata Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 60. Ad terram pluribus locis, plerumque tamen parce, v. e. Färjestaden, Röhälla, Borgholm in pratis juxta mare meridiem versus, Képings branter, Dóda kronopark — c. fr. — M. B. 50. Barbula levipila Brid. — Schimp. Syn. p. 189. — Br. eur. tab. 164. — Tortula leevipila Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 60. In Fraxino ad Morbylilla parce. — A. 51. Barbula ruralis (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 191. — Br. eur. tab. 166. — Tortula ruralis Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 60. var. 8 rupestris Schimp. Syn. p. 192. — Tortula intermedia Wils. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 60. Ad terram et saxa vulgaris per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Büda, pas- sim fructificans. Ad arbores rarius occurrit — e. fr. — A. M. B. Var. B rupestris multo pareius occurrit ad petras et saxa calcarea et solum- modo sterilis, v. ¢. in campis prope Tveta, in Kópings branter. Heee species per totam Europam divulgata valde variabilis est, quamobrem bryologum Sehimper secutus sum non sistens var. B rupestrem ut speciem propriam, quamvis sine difficultate distinguas statura humiliore, foliis obscurioribus, densioribus, brevioribus, madidis patentibus haud recurvatis. 52. Cinclidotus fontinaloides (H.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 196. — Br. eur. tab. 277. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 27. Ad lapides in rivulis. Tantummodo prope Karlevi lectus a Prof. J. Lange, qui specimina benigne eommunieavit. — A. 53. Grimmia apocarpa (L. — Schimp. Syn. p. 200. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 55. — Schistidium apocarpum Br. eur. tab. 233, 234 2). > Grimmia gigantea Schimp. meo sensu ad genus Grimmie non pertineat, sed potius, ad genus Barbulæ referenda. Muscr ET HEPATICÆ OELANDLE. 1f Ad saxa et lapides, præcipue petras caleareas, vulgaris per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Bóda — e. fr. — A. M. B. Planta quam maxime variabilis, plerumque olivacea occurrit, foliis brevipilis, nonnumquam foliis longipilis I. omnino mutieis. Varietas maxime insignis (forma nigra Zett. Grimm. Scand. p. 53) est nigra foliis obtusis epiliferis. H:ee varietas, qv: ad petras ealeareas tantum viget et preecipue pulehra invenitur in "Sódra Alvaren ki multo pareius fructificat quam forma vulgaris. Intra Scandinaviæ fines formam nigram tantummodo observavi in Gotlandia et Oelandia. 54. Grimmia pulvinata (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 206. — Br. eur. tab. 239. — Harm. Els ed3795 p.t 55: Ad petras caleareas et muros vulgaris per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Bóda — c. fr. — A. M. B. 55. Grimmia Schultz; (Brid. Schimp. Syn. p. 208. — Grimmia funalis Br. eur. tab. 241. — Grimmia decipiens Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 56. Ad saxa granitoidea per campos dispersa sat raro, v. c. Resmo alvar, Glóm- minge — c. fr. — A. M. 56. Grimmia trichophylla Grev. — Schimp. Syn. p. 213. — Br. eur. tab. 244. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 55. Ad saxa granitoidea sat raro et tantum in parte boreali reperta, v. c. in Horns alvar, ad Bäck pareci® Högby et ad Jägmästarbostället parcecie Böda — c. fr. — B. 57. Grimmia Hartmanni Schimp. Syn. p. 214. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 56. Ad saxa et lapides granitoidea, precipue in nemoribus et betuletis, non- numquam vero in campis, multis locis v. e. Resmo alvar, Färjestaden, Tveta, Algutsrum, Stora Rör, infra Rälla, Borgholm pluribus locis in quercetis, Böda. — A. M. B. Hee species, sicut. Grimmia Schultzii, G. trichophylla et commutata, e saxis ealeareis omnino exclusa est, sed ad saxa 1. lapides erratica occurrit, que frequenter dispersa sunt per Oelandiam a parte meridionali usque ad septentrionem. 58. Grimmia commutata (Brid.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 219. — Br. eur. tab. 256. —- Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 57. Ad saxa granitoidea camporum alvarensium pluribus locis, plerumque tamen parce, v. e. Mórbylilla alvar, Resmo alvar, Borgholm. In campo dicto "Norra Alva- ren" verisimiliter oceurrit, quamquam ibi non observata — ce. fr. — A. M. Heee species in eampis tantum occurrit, quum Grimmia Hartmanni contra in nemoribus precipue viget, et per accidens in campos emigrat. 59. Racomitrium heterostichum (H.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 231. — Br. eur. tab. 265, 266. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 59. Ad saxa granitoidea pluribus loeis, plerumque vero parce et sterile, v. c. in campis prope Thorslunda et Tveta, Möllstorp in betuletis, Borgholms slottsbranter pareissime, Bäck parœciæ Higby, Böda kronopark — c. fr. — M. B. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Se. Ups. Ser. III. 3 18 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, 60. Racomitrrum canescens (Dill) — Schimp. Syn. p. 235. — Br. eur. tab. 270, 271. — Hartm. MINE 9, p. 58. In campis alvarensibus ad terram multis locis, at satis dispersum et sterile, v. €. Åhs alvar, Resmo alvar, Wickleby alvar, Tveta às, Trögstad pareei® Replinge, Borgholm och Borgahage. — A. M. ; Hee species ut præcedens valde variabilis est. In Åhs alvar occurrit forma folis brevissime piliferis, que habitu similis est Hedwigie ciliate. 61. Hedwigia ciliata (Dicks. — Schimp. Syn. p. 238. — Br. eur. tab. 272, 273. — Hedwigidium ciliatum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 54. Ad saxa granitoidea vulgaris per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Bóda — c. fr. — A. M. B. Ad saxa calcarea numsquam invenitur. Variat passim foliis fere epiliferis (var. subimberbis). 62. Ulota crispa (H.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 257. — Orthotrichum crispum Br. eur. tab. 228. — Hartm. Fl ed. 9, p. 49. Ad truneos arborum sat raro, sed solito copiosius fructificans, v. e. infra Borgholms slott ad ulmos et corylos pareissime, Böda kronopark in parte dieta Bogateskogen ad abietes et alnos copiose — e. fr. — M. B. Complura specimina in Bogateskogen leeta Ulote crispulæ sat similia erant; quum vero nulla differentia perspieua se præbeat inter hee specimina et alia, que ad Ulotam crispam manifeste pertineant, optimum esse credo omnia specimina Oe- landiea ad Ulotam crispam referre. In monte Omberg Ulotam crispulam tam pul- chram et insignem legi, ut antea eandem propriam speciem sistere existimaverim; sed specimina mea Oelandica formas medias inter Ulotas crispam et crispulam præ- bent, ut nune mihi difficile sit has duas species l. formas certe distinguere, 63. Orthotrichum cupulatum Hoffm. — Schimp. Syn. p. 260. — Br. eur. tab. 209. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 49. Ad saxa, precipue calcarea, in campis alvarensibus sat vulgare per totam fere Oelandiam ab Ottenby et Åhs alvar usque ad Högby et Horns alvar — e. fr. — A. M. B. 64. Orthotrichum anomalum H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 262. — Br. eur. tab. Qr = i8torur me IM Oi I, [Us Dil. Ad muros et saxa, precipue calcarea per totam fere Oelandiam ab Åhs alvar ad Högby et Horn. Præcipue copiosum inveni ad Högby et Horn. Var. brevisetum occurrit in Ahs alvar et ad Stora Rör — c. fr. — A. M. B. 65. Orthotrichum obtusifolium Schrad. — Schimp. Syn. p. 263. — Br. eur. tab. 208. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 49. Muscr ET HEPATICÆ OELANDIA. 19 Ad Tveta in Acere sat parce una cum Orthotricho lejocarpo. Sine dubio ere- seit pluribus loeis, sed facile negleetum propter exiguitatem. — M. 66. Orthotrichum pumilum Sw. — Schimp. Syn. p. 263. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 48. — Orthotrichum fallax Br. eur. tab. 211. Ad arbores pluribus locis, plerumque vero parce, v. e. Ottenby in horto, Mörbylilla, Skogsby, Thorslunda ad templum, Böda — c. fr. — A. M. B. 61. Orthotrichum affine Schrad. — Schimp. Syn. p. 265. — Br. eur. tab. 216. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 48. Ad arbores pluribus locis, v. e. Ottenbylund, Ahs, Wentlinge, Tveta, Stora Rör, Horn, Böda prope templum, Böda kronopark — c. fr. — A. M. B. 68. Orthotrichum fastigiatum Bruch. — Schimp. Syn. p. 266. — Br. eur. tab. 216. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 48. Ad arbores pluribus locis, v. c. Ottenby in horto copiose, Thorslunda prope templum — c. fr. — A. M. 69. Orthotrichum speciosum N. v. Es. — Schimp. Syn. p. 270. — Br. eur. tab. 217. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 48. Ad arbores sat vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Büda — e. fr. — A. M. B. 70. Orthotrichum rupestre Schleich. — Schimp. Syn. p. 210. — Br. eur. tab. 217. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 47. Ad muros, lapides et saxa granitoidea sat vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby et Abs alvar ad Böda — ec. fr. — A. M. B. 71. Orthotrichum stramineum Hornsch. — Schimp. Syn. p. 272. — Br. eur. tab. 218. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 49. Ad arbores pluribus loeis, precipue frequens ad Borgholm, v. c. in pratis juxta mare meridiem versus, Borgholms slottsbranter copiose, Kungsträdgärden etc. Ceterum passim dispersum per Oelandiam mediam v. e. Tveta, Runsten — c. fr. — M. 12. Orthotrichum diaphanum Schrad. — Schimp. Syn. p. 277. — Br. eur. tab. 219. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 47. Ad arbores satis parce, v. c. Mörbylilla in Fraxino una cum Barbula lavipila et Orthotricho pumilo, ad templum Thorslunda in Populo pyramidali una cum Bar- bula rurali et Orthotricho pumilo — c. fr. — A. M 43. Orthotrichum lejocarpum Br. eur. tab. 220. — Schimp. yn paige Earim il. ed. 9. p. At. Ad arbores parce, v. e. Tveta in Acere una cum Orthotricho pumilo — c. fr. — M. 20 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, 74. Orthotrichum Lyellii Hook et Tayl. — Schimp. Syn. p. 279. — Br. eur. tab. 221. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 47. Ad arbores raro et tantummodo repertum ad Ottenby in horto. — A. 75. Tetraphis pellucida. (Dill.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 228. — Br. eur. tab. 196. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 39. Ad terram et truncos putridos silvarum pluribus locis, v. c. in silvis Conife- rarum inter Saxnäs et Röhälla, in betuletis inter Stora rör et Rälla, in Bóda krono- park multis locis — c. fr. — M. B. 16. Encalypta vulgaris H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 286. — Br. eur. tab. 199. — Enealypta extinctoria Hartm. Fl. ed; 9, p. 53. Ad terram et saxa calearea multis locis ab Ahs alvar ad Horns sjübranter. Occurrit partim in eampis alvarensibus, v. c. Ahs, Resmo, Wickleby, Tveta; partim ad saxa calearea, ubi plerumque var. y pilifera Schimp. l. c. læte viget, v. e. Kü- pings branter, Borgholms slottsbranter, Horns sjóbranter — c. fr. — A. M. B. 77. Encalypta rhabdocarpa Schweegr. — Schimp. Syn. p. 287. — Br. eur. tab. 203. — Hartm. FL ed. 9, p- 52. | Ad petras et saxa calearea sat raro, v. e. Åhs alvar, Horns sjóbranter, utro- que loco valde parce — c. fr. — A. B. 78. Encalypta streptocarpa H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 292. — Br. eur. tab. 204. — Hartm. Bl. ed. 9, p. 52. Ad terram, petras et saxa calcarea sat vulgare per totam fere Oelandiam ab Ahs alvar ad Högby, parcissime tamen fructificans v. c. ad Tveta — c. fr. — A. M. B. 79. Funaria calearea Wg. — Schimp. Syn. p. 320. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 42. — Funaria Mühlenbergii Br. eur. tab. 303. Ad terram argillaceo-caleaream tantummodo reperta in Köpings branter par- cissime — c. fr. — M. 80. Funaria hygrometrica (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 323. — Br. eur. tab. 305. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 42. Ad terram vulgo dispersa per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Büda et more solito admodum variabilis — e. fr. — A. M. B. 81. Leptobryum pyriforme (L. — Schimp. Syn. p. 259. — Bryum pyri- forme Br. eur. tab. 355. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 39. Ad terram in silvis, ad margines viarum, in paludibus etc. multis locis, ple- rumque tamen parce, v. e. Alunbruket, in silva inter Saxnäs et Röhälla, Borgholms slottsbranter, ad margines viarum prope templum Köping, Horns sjóbranter, Boda kronopark — c. fr. — A. M. B. Muscı Er HEPATICE OELANDIX. 21 82. Webera nutans (Schreb. — Schimp. Syn. p. 334. — Bryum nutans Br. eur. tab. 347. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 37. Ad terram multis loeis et dispersa per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenbylund ad Bóda kronopark. In silvis Coniferarum præcipue frequens est, v. c. inter Saxnäs et Röhälla, Rälla-tall, Böda kronopark; occurrit quoque in silvis frondiferis v. e. Ottenby- lund, Färjestaden, Gräborg, Stora Rör, Rälla ete., et nonnumquam in paludibus, v. €. inter Trögstad et templum Köping una cum Sphagno acutifolio. Magnopere variabilis est. Forma quidam robusta sterilis oceurrit ad Alunbruket — e. fr. — A. M. B. 83. Webera cruda (Schreb. — Schimp. Syn. p. 337. — Bryum crudum Br. eur. tab. 348. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 38. Ad terram pluribus locis, plerumque tamen parce, v. e. Åhs alvar ad murum magnum, Tveta, Algutsrum, in paludibus ad Borgholms kungsgård — e. fr. — A. M. 84. Webera albicans (Wg.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 343. — Bryum Wahlen- bergii Br. eur. tab. 354. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 37. Ad terram humidam sat raro v. c. ad Tveta parcissime, Böda kronopark in parte dieta Bogateskogen parce. — M. B. 85. Brywn pendulum (Hornsch. — Schimp. Syn. p. 349. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 35. — Bryum cernuum Br. eur. tab. 331. Ad terram humidam pluribus locis, v. c. Ahs et Wentlinge alvar prope lacum Güljaren, inter Stora Rör et Rälla — e. fr. — A. M. 86. Bryum inclinatum. (Sw.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 350. — Br. eur. tab. 334. — Harim. bli ed. 9... p35. Ad terram et ligna putrida pluribus locis, v. c. Färjestaden, Saxnäs, Borg- holm — c. fr. — M. 87. Bryum Marattii Wils. — Schimp. Syn. p. 354. — Br. eur. suppl. tab. 640. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 36. Ad terram humidam juxta mare prope Borgholm meridiem versus parcissi- me. — M. Planta mea Oelandiea omnino congruit eum Gotlandica a Doct. Cleve lecta et communicata. Specimina perpauca juniora sterilia inveni una cum Pottia Heimü. 88. Bryum bimum Schreb. — Schimp. Syn. p. 357. — Br. eur. tab. 363. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 32. Ad terram uliginosam in pratis, in silvis, ad rivulos ete. multis locis, v. c. Ottenby, Näsby, Hulterstad, Wickleby, Tveta, Algutsrum, Röhälla, Stora Rör, Rälla, Borgholm, Kópings branter, Bóda kronopark, at parce fruetificans — c. fr. — A. M. B. 22 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, 89. Bryum pallescens Schleich. — Schimp. Syn. p. 32. — Br. eur. tab. 539, 560. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 32. Ad terram et rupes pluribus locis, plerumque tamen parce, v. c. Ottenbylund, Tveta, Borgholm, Horns sjóbranter una cum Preissia commutata, Böda kronopark in Bogateskogen — e. fr. — A. M. B. 90. Bryum cespiticium L. — Schimp. Syn. p. 367. — Br. eur. tab. 374, 375. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 33. i Ad muros, saxa, terram ete. sat vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Böda — c. fr. — A. M. B. 91. Bryum argenteum L. — Schimp. Syn. p. 369. — Br. eur. tab. 384. — Hans Sö 929.234 Ad terram sat parce, v. e. Strandtorps brun parecie Repplinge, Horn. Loco priori oceurrit var. y lanatum Schimp. Syn. p. 370. — M. B. 92. Bryum capillare (Dill) L. — Schimp. Syn. p. 370. — Br. eur. tab. 968, 369. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 34. Ad rupes ealeareas, ad terram, ligna putrida ete. multis loeis, plerumque ta- men sterile, v. e. Ottenby in horto, Ottenbylund, Tveta, Saxnäs in silva abietina, inter Saxnäs et Rühälla, inter Stora Rór et Rälla, Borgholms slottsbranter, Köpings branter, Horn, Bóda prope templum in alnis vetustis juxta rivulum, Böda kronopark in Bogateskogen. Var. B cuspidatum (Schimp. Syn. p. 311) quod multo pareius est, ereseit in Borgholms slottsbranter. Var. ¢ Ferchelii (Schimp. Syn. p. 372) ad petras et rupes calcareas pluribus locis lete viget, v. c. Resmo alvar, ad rupes inter Resmo et Wiekleby, Tveta, Köpings branter. Var. 9 cochlearifolium (Schimp. Syn. p. 372) oceurrit varietati Ferchelii immixtum in Kopings branter, et forma monstrosa hujus varietatis esse videtur. Perpauci sureuli varietatis cochlearifolii observati sunt — c. fr. — A. M. B. Planta eximie variabilis. Var. & Ferchelii quoad habitum a forma normali multo aberrat et formá foliorum diversà et colore obscuro olivaceo sine nitore. 98. Bryum pseudotriquetrum (H.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 375. — Br. eur. tab. 364. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 31. Ad terram humidam juxta rivulos pluribus loeis, v. e. Tveta, inter Stora Rör et Rilla, Borgholm — c. fr. — M. 94. Bryum Neodamense ltzigs. — K. Müll. Syn. muse. I, p. 258. — Bryum pseudotriquetrum var. 2 cavifolium Schimp. Syn. p. 376. — Hartm. Flited ois pe 32: Locis humidis in Alvaren, ubi petra calcarea obducta est tenui crustà humi, pluribus locis at dispersum et Siam pareius, v. e. Ahs alvar, Resmo alvar, in campis inter templum Thorslunda et Tveta, Horns alvar. — A. M. B. Muscı ET HEPATICE OELANDLE. 23 Specimina mea Oelandiea, que ad Bryum Neodamense Itzigs. pertinentia K. Müller declaravit, multo aberrant a Bryo pseudotriquetro, ut non dubitem eadem propriam speciem sistere. Bryum Neodamense Oelandieum quoad habitum multo discrepat a speciebus consanguineis, quum folia rotunda in parte caulis inferiori sparsa sedeant et tantummodo apieem versus erebriora exstent, ut planta mea sat similis est Mnio cuidam diminuto. Folia præcipue inferiora nonnumquam orbicu- laria, plerumque tamen elliptiea, tam apicem rotundum quam basin versus paullu- lum gracilescentia, obtusa muerone instrueta brevissimo, qui oculo nudo omnino invi- sibilis est, et nervo sub apice ipso desinente. Quoad texturam foliorum planta mea magis ad Bryum Jackii œlandieum quam ad Bryum pseudotriquetrum accedit, quum tota cellulosa sit subtilior, parietibus tenuioribus przedita quam in Bryo pseudotriquetro. 95. Bryum Jackii K. Müll. in Bot. Zeit. 1864, p. 348. Locis humidis in Alvaren et in campis alvaroideis multis locis, plerumque ta- men sterile, v. c. Ahs alvar, Hulterstad, Resmo alvar, Tveta in campis, Runsten, Glómminge, Borgholms alvar, Horns alvar c. fr. — A. M. B. Quamquam K. Müller in litteris declaravit specimina mea clandica ad suum Bruum Jackii pertinere, non sine dubitatione tamen et præcipue auetoritate citati bryologi innixus, hoe judieium affirmare audeo. Quoad habitum sane specimina mea similia sunt speciminibus originalibus e Pasterzé ad Heiligenblut Carinthiæ, a K. Müller benigne communicatis. Congruunt enim modo crescendi, colore rufo-brunneo et capsulis parvulis; sed planta mea differt foliis latioribus, nervo minus longe ex- currente et rete cellulari paullulum laxiore instructis. Planta œlandica sat similis est speciminibus tennibus Bryi pseudotriquetri, quocum maxime consanguinea mihi vide- tur; sed texturà foliorum ad Bryum Neodamense proxime accedit. Has questiones accuratius exquirere et dijudieare tempori futuro relinquo, prsesertim quum studium generis Bryi tam difficile et intricatum sit, ut errores facile committantur. Bryum Jackii certe planta alpigena est, que res tamen nullam rationem suffieientem exhibet contra identitatem mez plantze; nam plures musci alpicolæ in campis Oelandiæ dietis "Alvaren" reperti sunt, v. c. Hypnum turgescens, Hypnum rugosum , Sauteria hyalina. 96. Bryum pallens Sw. — Schimp. Syn. p. 376. — Br. eur. tab. 373. — nario: Wied. pe 32: Ad terram humidam juxta rivulos pluribus locis, at satis parce, v. e. Tveta, Borgholm, Köpings branter. — M. 97. Bryum roseum (Dill) — Schimp. Syn. p. 381. — Br. eur. tab. 365. — Hacım Bl. ed. 9 Pp, af. In umbrosis silvarum multis locis, plerumque tamen parce, v. e. Ottenbylund, Tveta, inter Saxnäs et Röhälla, Stora Rör, Rälla, Borgholm in quercetis juxta mare, Horn, Hógby, Büda kronopark. — A. M. B. 98. Mnium cuspidatum H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 386. — Br. eur. tab. 396, — Hartm. FL ed. 9, p. 29. 24 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, Locis umbrosis silvarum frondiferarum, ad saxa, ad radices arborum etc. sat vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Bóda — e. fr. — A. M. B. 99. Mnium affine Bland. — Schimp. Syn. p. 387. — Br. eur. tab. 397, 398, 399. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 29. Ad terram humidam, in paludibus ete. vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ot- tenby ad Bóda. — A. M. B. Forma foliis integerrimis (Mnium affine y rugicum Schimp. Syn. p. 388) par- eius oecurrit, v. e. Ottenbylund, Ahs alvar, Borgholm. 100. Mniwn undulatum (Dill) H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 389. — Br. eur. tab. 389. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 29. In umbrosis lucorum et silvarum frondiferarum multis locis at raro fructificans, v. €. Ottenbylund fructiferum, Ahs, Wickleby, Färjestaden, Tveta, Graborg, Alguts- rum, Röhälla, Stora Rör, Rälla, Borgholm, Köpings branter, Boda — c. fr. — A. M. B. 101. Mnium rostratum (Schrad.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 390. — Br. eur. tab. 395. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 29. In umbrosis humidis silvarum frondiferarum, sspe una eum Mnio cuspidato et Mnio undulato, pluribus locis, v. e. Tveta in lucis, Borgholms slottsbranter et plu- ribus loeis prope Borgholm, Köpings branter, Böda kronopark — e. fr. — M. N. 102. Mnium hornum (Dill) L. — Schimp. Syn. p. 391. — Br. eur. tab. 390. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 29. In umbrosis humidis silvarum et coniferarum et frondiferarum, ad radices ar- borum etc. multis locis, v. c. Ottenbylund, Åhs alvar prope murum magnum, Tveta, Möllstorp, Saxnäs, inter Saxnäs et Röhälla, inter Stora Rör et Rälla, Borgholm me- ridiem versus in pratis juxta mare, Böda multis locis — c. fr. — A. M. B. 103. Mnium serratum (Schrad.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 392. — Br. eur. tab. 391. — Hartm. F1 ed. 9, p. 30. In umbrosis humidis silvarum frondiferarum ad radices arborum sat raro et parce fructificans, v. e. Gardby juxta viam ad Tveta, in betuletis ad Graborg una cum Mnio stellari — e. fr. — M. 104. Mnium stellare H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 395. — Br. eur. tab. 401. — Hartm.; El ed: 9, ps 30: In umbrosis lucorum et silvarum frondiferarum pluribus locis, parce tamen, v. €. Tveta, Gräborg, Borgholms slottsbranter. — M. 105. Mnium punctatum L. — Schimp. Syn. p. 398. — Br. eur. tab. 387. — Hartm. IM, ed. 9, p. 28. In uliginosis juxta rivulos, non tamen in strato calcareo sed infra jugum Landtborgen, pluribus loeis plerumque vero parce, v. e. Ottenbylund, in silva abietina inter Saxnäs et Röhälla, inter Stora Rör et Rälla, Böda kronopark — ec. fr. — A. M. B. Muscr ET HEPATICE OELANDLE. 25 106. Catoscopium nigritum (H.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 405. — Br. eur. tab. 313.” Hartm. Fl ed. 9, p: 46. In uliginosis eamporum alvarensium et in paludibus calcareis pluribus locis plerumque tamen parce, v. c. in paludibus prope Tveta, Repplinge alvar, in paludi- bus inter Trögstad et templum Köping — c. fr. — M. 107. Aulacomnium androgynum (L. — Schimp. Syn. p. 411. — Br. eur. tab. 406. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 31. Ad terram, truncos putridos, radiees arborum ete. in silvis frondiferis et Co- niferarum pluribus locis, at raro fructificans, v. c. Ottenbylund magna copia et passim fructiferum, in silva iufra templum Thorslunda, Müllstorp in betuletis, in silva abietina inter Saxnäs et Rühälla, in silvis frondiferis inter Stora Rür et Rälla, in silvis prope Hornsjón septentrionem versus, Böda kronopark multis locis — c. fr. — A. M. B. 108. Aulacomnium palustre (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 412. — Br. eur. tab. 405. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 30. In paludibus et uliginosis silvarum pratorumque vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Böda, at parce fructificans — c. fr. — A. M. B. 109. Bartramia Oederi (Gunn) — Schimp. Syn. p. 420. — Br. eur. tab. 318. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 46. Ad rupes caleareas raro et tantum reperta in Köpings branter, ubi parce oc- eurrit — c. fr. — M. 110. Philonotis fontana (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 426. — Bartramia fontana Br. eur. tab. 324. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 46. Ad fontes et rivulos pluribus locis, v. e. Thorslunda, Glömminge, Köping, Bick parcecie Högby, Böda — M. B. 111. Philonotis calcarea Schimp. Syn. p. 427. — Bartramia calearea Br. eur. tab. 325. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 46. In paludibus caleareis et ad rivulos pluribus locis, v. c. Wickleby prope fon- tem infra Landtborgen, Stora Rör, infra Rälla et Ekerum, Borgholm — c. fr. — A. M. 112. Atrichum undulatum (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 433. — Br. eur. tab. 409, 410. — Catharinea undulata Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 45. - In umbrosis lueorum et silvarum multis loeis, v. c. Ottenbylund, Abs alvar juxta murum magnum, Färjestaden, Graborg, Müllstorp, Saxnäs, Rälla, Böda krono- park in Bogateskogen — c. fr. — A. M. B. 113. Polytrichum gracile Menz. — Schimp. Syn. p. 444. — Br. eur. tab. 421. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 44. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 4 26 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, In paludibus et uliginosis silvarum frondiferarum pluribus loeis, v. c. Ot- tenbylund, Färjestaden, Tveta, inter Stora Rór et Rälla, in paludibus inter Trögstad et Köping una eum Sphagno acutifolio, in paludibus prope templum Köping — c. fr. — A. M. 114. Polytrichum formosum H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 445. — Br. eur. tab. 420. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 44. In siccioribus silvarum multis locis, v. c. Ottenbylund, Algutsrum, in silva abietina inter Saxnäs et Röhälla, in silvis frondiferis inter Stora Rör et Rälla, Borg- holm meridiem versus in pratis juxta mare, Böda kronopark præcipue in silva abie- tina Bogateskogen — c. fr. — A. M. B. 115. Polytrichum piliferum Schreb. — Schimp. Syn. p. 446. — Br. eur. tab. 422. — Hartm. IN, ed. 9, p. 43. In pascuis arenosis macris, precipue in pinetis pluribus locis, v. e. Rälla- tall, in pineto prope templum Köping — e. fr. — M. 116. Polytrichum juniperinum H. —- Schimp. Syn. p. 447. — Br. eur. tab. 498. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 43. Ad terram macram humidam et in silvis et in campis alvarensibus, multis locis et inter affinia maxime divulgatum per Oelandiam, v. c. Ahs alvar, Resmo alvar, infra templum Thorslunda, Tveta, Gräborg, Müllstorp, inter Saxnäs et Röhälla, Borg- holm in pratis juxta mare, Högby, Bóda vulgare — e. fr. — M. B. 117. Polytrichum strictum. Menz. — Schimp. Syn. p. 448. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 43. — Polytrichum juniperinum var. 8 strictum Br. eur. tab. 424. : In paludibus et terra uliginosa pluribus locis, inter Thorslunda et Färjesta- den, Glémminge in paludibus meridiem versus, in paludibus inter Trögstad et tem- plum Köping una cum Sphagno acutifolio — c. fr. — M. 118. Polytrichum commune L. — Schimp. Syn. p. 448. — Br. eur. tab. 425. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 43. Ad terram humidam silvarum pluribus locis, v. c. Ottenbylund, in silva abie- tina inter templum Thorslunda et Färjestaden, Borgholm, Büda kronopark copiose — — e, fr. — A. M. B. 119. Buxbaumia indusiata Brid. — Schimp. Syn. p. 454. — Br. eur. tab. 498. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 45. Ad truncos putridos silvæ abietinæ inter Saxnäs et Röhälla parcissime — c. fr. — M. Muscı ET HEPATICÆ OELANDLE. 27 SECTIO I. MUSCI CLADOCARPI. 120. Fontinalis antipyretica L. — Schimp. Syn. p. 456. — Br. eur. tab. 429. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 26. Ad lapides in rivulis et in puteis, pluribus locis plerumque famen sterilis, v. c. Hulterstad in puteo copiose fructificans, Tveta, Müllstorp, Rühälla, Trögstad, inter Trógstad et Kolstad, Bergholm — ec. fr. — A. M. 121. Neckera complanata (L. — Schmp. Syn. p. 470. — Br. eur. tab. 444. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 25. Ad muros, rupes et truncos arborum pluribus locis, v. c. Tveta in muris sat copiose, infra Ekerum in Quereu, Borgholms slottsbranter sat parce. Var. B tenella (Sehimp. Syn. l. e.) occurrit in Köpings branter parcissime in fissuris rupium. — M. 122. Leucodon sciuroides (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 474. — Br. eur. tab. 468. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 26. Ad truneos arborum et ad saxa vulgaris per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Büda. — A. M. B. 123. Antitrichia curtipendula (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 476. — Br. eur. tab. 469. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 25. Ad saxa granitoidea, nonnumquam ad truncos arborum, multis locis præcipue in silvis frondiferis, v. e. Ottenbylund, Färjestaden; Tveta, Möllstorp, Runsten, Stora Rör, Borgholm in quercetis, Böda multis locis. — A. M. B. 124. Myurella julacea (Vill.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 484. — Br. eur. tab. 560. — Hypnum julaceum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 8. 5 Ad petras et saxa calcarea pluribus locis, semper tamen valde parce, v. c. Ahs alvar, Güsslunda alvar, Resmo alvar, Tveta in campis alvaroideis una cum Encalypta streptocarpa, Képings branter. — A. M. 125. Leskea polycarpa Ehrh. — Schimp. Syn. p. 486. — Br. eur. tab. 470. — Leskea paludosa Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 23. Ad radiees arborum juxta templum Thorslunda parcissime — e. fr. — M. 126. Leskea nervosa (Schwægr.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 487. — Br. eur. tab. 472. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 23. Ad saxa, rarius ad radiees arborum pluribus locis, v. c. Ahs alvar una cum Myurella julacea, Tveta, Borgholm in lapidibus ad rivulum, ad radices arborum in Kungsträdgärden, et in Borgholms slottsbranter. — A. M. 28 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, 127. Anomodon longifolius (Schleich.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 489. — Br. eur. tab. 474. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 25. Ad saxa et radices arborum pluribus locis Oelandiæ mediæ, v. c. Tveta in nemore juxta villam prsecipue pulcher, Algutsrum, Borgholms slottsbranter, Köpings branter, Lundegard. — M. 128. Anomodon viticulosus (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 490. — Br. eur. tab. 416. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 25. Ad muros, saxa ealearea et nonnumquam ad radices arborum, vulgaris per Oelandiam mediam a Tveta ad Borgholms slott et Köpings branter. In Oelandia quoque meridionali oecurrit v. c. ad rupes inter Resmo et Wickleby. Cum fructu raro legitur, sed fructiferum inveni juxta Tveta in nemore ad muros crescentem — c. fr. — A. M. 7 129. Pseudoleskea catenulata (Brid.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 492. — Br. eur. tab. 478. — Hypnum catenulatum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 8. Ad muros, saxa et petras calcareas multis locis, v. c. Resmo alvar, Wickle- byberg, Tveta, Algutsrum, Ismanstorpsborg, 'Prógstad, Kolstad, Köpings branter, Borgholms slott, Horn. Semper viget in ealee, nusquam ad saxa granitoidea. — A. M. B. | 130. Thuidium tamariscinum (H.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 498. — Br. eur. tab. 482, 483. — Hypnum tamariscinum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 5. In umbrosis lucorum et silvarum pluribus locis, v. e. Mollstorp, Saxuüs, inter Saxnäs et Rühälla, Stora Rör, Rälla, Borgholms slott, Böda kronopark in Bogate- skogen. — M. B. 131. Thuidium delicatulum (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 499. — Br. eur. tab. 484. — Hypnum delicatulum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 5. In silvis, in pratis et in campis alvarensibus vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Bóda. — A. M. B. 132. Thuidium abietinum (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 499. — Br. eur. tab. 485. Hypnum abietinum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 5. Ad saxa, in eampis alvarensibus et in pratis vulgare per totam fere Oelan- diam ab Ottenby ad Högby et Horn. — A. M. B. 133. Pterigynandrum filiforme (Timm.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 508. — Br. eur. tab. 466. — Leptohymenium filiforme Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 26. Ad saxa granitoidea pluribus locis, v. e. Resmo alvar, Kolstad, Borgholm. Nusquam in ealee observatum. — A. M. Variat tenuius 1. crassius (var. B heteropterum Schimp. Syn. 1. e.). Musci ET HEPATIC® OELANDIZ. 29 134. Chmacium dendroides (Dill) — Schimp. Syn. p. 517. — Br. eur. tab. 437. — Hartm. Fl ed. 9, p. 23. In locis humidis, ad muros ete. vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Büda. — A. M. B. 135. Pulaisia polyantha (Schreb. — Schimp. Syn. p. 518. — Br. eur. tab. 455. —- Leskea polyantha Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 22. Ad arbores frondiferas multis locis dispersa per totam fere Oelandiam ab Ottenbylund ad Higby et Horn — c. fr. — A. M. B. 136. JIsothecium murum (Dill) — Schimp. Syn. p. 521. — Br. eur. tab. 533. — Leskea curvata Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 22. " Ad saxa, lapides et radices arborum sat vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ahs alvar ad Böda — ec. fr. — A. M. B. 137. .Homalothecium sericeum (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 525. — Br. eur. tab. 456. — Leskea sericea Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 23. Ad muros, saxa et lapides vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Bóda. Planta eximie variabilis — c. fr. — A. M. B. 138. .Homalothecium Philippeanum (Spruce) -— Schimp. Syn. p. 526. — Br. eur. tab. 457. Ad saxa et petras caleareas pluribus locis, ubique tamen sterile, v. c. Resmo alvar, Wieklebyberg, Köpings branter sat eopiose. — A. M. Hee species sterilis non sine diflicultate distinguitur, quare sspe attentionem fugit. Fructificans facile dignoscitur capsulis erectis a Camptothecio lutescente, cui ha- bitu valde similis est. Planta quoque sterilis ab hoc Camptothecio distingui potest fo- liis densioribus, brevioribus, rigidioribus, magis plieatis, apiee latiore evidentius ser- rato et nervo crassiore longius apicem versus attingente instructis. Color plantæ aureo -nitens 1. rufo-aureus. Quoad modum crescendi et characteres Homalothecio sericeo proxima est, a quo tamen differt eolore magis saturato et apice foliorum minus elon- gato, perspieue latiore et rigidiore. Folia Camptothecii lutescentis et Homalothecii sericei in apicem longum fere piliformem sæpissime protracta sunt; sed folia Homalo- thecii Philippeani, prsecipue ramulina, apice sat lato evidenter serrato ornata sunt. 189. Camptothecium lutescens (Huds) — Schimp. Syn. p. 528. — Br. eur. tab. 558. — Hypnum lutescens Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 9. . Ad saxa et petras ealeareas siecas vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby et Ahs alvar ad Böda — e. fr. — A. M. B. 140. Brachythecium salebrosum (Hoffm.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 532. — Br. eur. tab. 549, 550. — Hypnum salebrosum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 11. Ad terram, saxa, radices arborum ete. sat vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Böda — ec. fr. — A. M. B. 39 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, Hee species valde variabilis est sieut pleræque species intricati generis Bra- chythecii. Queedam forme steriles non sine diffieultate distinguuntur a formis Bra- chythecii rutabuli. 141. Brachythecium glareosum Schimp. Syn. p. 533. — Br. eur. tab. 522. — Hypnum glareosum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 11. In umbrosis nonnumquam etiam in apricis ad terram, saxa et petras calca- reas, multis locis præcipue Oelandiæ mediæ, v. c. Resmo alvar, Wicklebyberg, Thors- lunda, Tveta, Glómminge, Kópings branter et præcipue copiose in Borgholms slotts- branter — c. fr. — A. M. 142. Brachythecium albicans (Neck) — Schimp. Syn. p. 534. — Br. eur. tab. 533. — Hypnum albicans Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 11. Ad terram, saxa ete. multis locis, v. c. Ahs alvar, Nüsby, Fürjestaden, Stora Rör, Borgholm, Köpings branter, Horn, Böda. — A. M. B. 143. Brachythecium velutinum (Dill.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 536. — Br. eur. tab. 538. — Hypnum velutinum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 10. Ad terram, radices arborum ete. sat vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Bóda — c. fr. — A. M. B. 144. Brachythecium refleeum (W. M.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 539. — Br. eur. tab. 539. — Hypnum reflexum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 10. Ad radices arborum raro. Béda kronopark in silva abietina Bogateskogen fructificans repertum — e. fr. — B. 145. Brachythecium rutabulum (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 542. — Br. eur, tab. 543, 544. — Hypnum rutabulum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 9. Ad saxa in lucis et nemoribus sat vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby- lund ad Böda kronopark — ce. fr. — A. M. B. 146. Brachythecium rivulare (Bruch.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 543. — Br. eur. tab. 546. — Hypnum rivulare Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 9. In uliginosis juxta rivulos, ad saxa ete. pluribus loeis, v. e. inter Stora Rör et Rälla, Borgholms slottsbranter — c. fr. — M. 147. Brachythecium populeum (H.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 544. — Br. eur. tab. 535, 536. — Hypnum populeum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 10, Ad saxa, lapides, radices arborum ete. multis loeis, v. c. Ottenbylund, Tveta? Stora Rör, Borgholms slottsbranter, Horn, Böda kronopark — c. fr. — A. M. B. 148. Brachythecium plumosum (Sw.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 545. — Br. eur. tab. 537. — Hypnum plumosum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 10. Ad saxa et petras humidas pluribus locis, at parcissime et sterile, v. c. Resmo alvar, Kópings branter ad rivulum prope templum. — A. M. Muscı ET HEPATICÆ OELANDLE. 31 149. Eurhynchium myosuroides (Dill). — Schimp. Syn. p. 549, — Isothe- cium myosuroides Br. eur. tab. 543. — Leskea myosuroides Hartm. Red p» 23. Tantummodo repertum in Böda kronopark ad lapides et radices arborum silvæ abietine Bogateskogen. — D. 150. Eurhynchium strigosum (Hoffm.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 550. — Br. eur. tab. 519, — Hypnum strigosum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 7. Ad terram, radices arborum et saxa parce, haetenus observatum cirea Borg- holm, v. e. in quercetis prope mare meridiem versus et in Köpings branter, quo loco posteriori var. p imbricatum (Schimp. Syn. |. e.) inventum est. — M. 151. .Eurhynchium striatulum (Spruce) — Schimp. Syn. p. 552. — Br. eur. tab. 522, — Hypnum striatulum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 7. Ad rupes ealeareas præcipue in latere inferiori saxorum, in fissuris spelun- earum rarissime, et tantum repertum in Köpings branter, ubi pluribus locis oceurrit, parce tamen, una eum Thamnio alopecuro. — M. Pleræque species generum Brachytheci et Hurhynchii valde variabiles sunt, quod facile observari potest in speciebus vulgatissimis, v. e. Brachythecio salebroso, Brachythecio rutabulo, Eurhynchio prelongo Quod ad genus Æurhynchii attinet, folia ejusdem speciminis admodum variant quoad formam, ut folia ramulina foliis caulinis dissimilia sint. Folia Hurhynchii striatuli variant in diversis ramulis et spe- eiminibus quoad longitudinem, sed congruunt omnino quoad formam ut ita dicam fundamentalem; nam omnia folia habent basin latam truncatam, ut forma foliorum sit triangulus æquicrurus plus minus elongatus. 152. Eurhynchium striatum (Sehreb.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 553. — Eurhyn- chium longirostre Br. eur. tab. 523. — Hypnum striatum Hartm. ied 10 NT Ad terram silvarum pluribus locis, v. c. Ottenbylund, Saxnäs in silva abie- tina, inter Stora Rór et Rälla, Boda kronopark pluribus loeis at præcipue in Bogate- Skogen — c. fr. — A. M. B. 153. Eurhynchium crassinervium (Tayl) — Schimp. Syn. p. 554. — Br. eur. tab. 529. — Hypnum crassinervium Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 7. Ad lapides et saxa parce repertum in Borgholms slottsbranter. — M. 154. Eurhynchium Vaucheri Schimp. Syn. p. 556. — Br. eur. tab. 530. — Hypnum Vaucheri Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 9. Ad lapides in Borgholms slottsbranter valde frequens, sed nusquam alibi ob- servatum — c. fr. — M. 155. Eurhynchium piliferum (Schreb. — Schimp. Syn. p. 557. — Br. eur. tab. 531. — Hypnum piliferum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 8. 32 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, Ad terram præcipue in locis umbrosis, nonnumquam ad lapides et radices arborum, multis loeis at raro fructificans, v. ec. Färjestaden, Tveta park, inter Stora Rör et Rälla, Borgholms slottsbranter et in quercetis infra arcem, Bóda kronopark — c. fr. — M. B. 156. Eurhynchium prelongum (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 559. — Br. eur. tab. 524 et 525 (partim). — Hypnum prælongum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 3. Ad terram sat vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenbylund ad Béda krono- park, sed præcipue vulgare cirea Borgholm, ubi etiam raro fructificat. — e. fr. — A. M. B. Valde variat nune erassius, foliis latis. caulem amplectentibus (forma major latifolia), nune tam tenue et gracile, ut ad Æurynchium pumilum accedat (forma minor), nune foliis distichis (forma disticha), que forma precipue in speluncis et sub saxis invenitur. 157. Eurhynchium Stokesü (Turn) — Schimp. Syn. p. 562. — Br. eur, tab. 526. — Hypnum Stokesii Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 3. Ad terram parce repertum in Ottenbylund. — A. 158. Rhynchostegium tenellum (Dicks.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 565. — Br. eur. tab. 508. — Hypnum tenellum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 12. In speluncis et fissuris rupium calearearum raro. In Landtborgen inter Resmo et Wiekleby valde parce; in Köpings branter pluribus locis — e. fr. — A. M. 159. Rhynchostegium depressum. (Bruch) — Schimp. Syn. p. 567, — Br. eur. tab. 512. — Hypnum depressum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 12. In umbrosis ad lapides et saxa in Borgholms slottsbranter parce. — M. 160. Rhynchostegium megapolitanum (Bland. — Schimp. Syn. p. 569. — Dr. eur. tab. 511. Ad terram raro et tantum repertum in Ottenbylund, ubi paueis loeis sat late viget — c. fr. — A. 161. Zhynchostegium murale (H.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 571. — Br. eur. tab. 514. — Hypnum murale Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 7. In umbrosis ad lapides et radices arborum raro et tantum repertum in Borg- holms slottsbranter parce — e. fr. — M. 162. Rhynchostegium rusciforme (Wels. — Schimp. Syn. p. 512. — Br. eur. tab. 515, 516. — Hypnum ruscifolium Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 6. Ad saxa humida raro et tantum inventum in Köpings branter ad rivulum prope templum, ubi copiose viget. — M. 163. Thamnium alopecurum (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 574 — Br. eur. tab. 518. — Hypnum alopecurum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 5. = Muscı ET Hepatica OELANDLE. 33 Parce repertum in Köpings branter ad latus inferius saxorum una eum Eu- rhynchio striatulo et Rhyncostegio tenello. — M. 164. Plagiothecium silesiacum (Sel) — Schimp. Syn. p. 581. — Br. eur. tab. 500. — Hypnum silesiacum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 2. Ad truneos et ligna putrida silvarum abietinarum pluribus locis 5 We (95 Inter Saxnäs et Rühälla, Dóda kronopark præcipue in Bogateskogen copiose et abundanter fructificans — e. fr. — M. B. 165. Plagiothecium denticulatum (Dill) — Schimp. Syn. p. 582. — Br. eur. tab. 501, 502. — Hypnum denticulatum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 2. In silvis et nemoribus ad ligna putrida et ad terram multis locis et disper- sum per totam Oelandiam, v. e. Ottenbylund, Tveta, Móllstorp, Saxniis in silva abie- tina inter Saxnäs et Röhälla, in betuletis inter Stora Rór et Rälla, Böda kronopark — ce. fr. — A. M. B. Heee species multum variat, et var. 6 tenellum et à densum (Schimp. Syn. p. 583) in Oelandia quoque oceurrunt. 166. Plagiothecium silvaticum (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 585. — Br. eur. tab. 503. — Hypnum silvaticum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 1. In umbrosis silvarum et nemorum ad terram pluribus locis, v. c. Ottenby- lund, Tveta, inter Stora Rör et Rälla, Böda kronopark pluribus locis et prsecipue pulehrum in Bogateskogen — c. fr. — A. M. B. Hæc species sieut præcedens variabilis est. Ad Tveta pauca specimina va- rietatis insignis 8 orthocladiwm (Schimp. Syn. l. c.) reperta sunt. 167. Plagiothecium undulatum (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 586. — Br. eur. tab. 506. — Hypnum undulatum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 1. Ad terram humidam silvarum abietinarum et frondiferarum raro, v. e. Ot- tenbylund, Böda kronopark in parte quadam silve Bogateskogen copiose — c. fr. — A. B. 168. Amblystegium subtile (H.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 589. — Br. eur. tab. 561. — Leskea subtilis Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 22. Ad radiees arborum in nemoribus Oelandiæ medi: pluribus locis, at plerum- que parce, v. e. Tveta, Algutsrum, Lundegärd, Kungsträdgärden ad Borgholm, fre- quenter in Borgholms slottsbranter — e. fr. — M. 169. Amblystegium serpens (L. — Schimp. Syn. p. 591. — Br. eur. tab. 564. — Hypnum serpens Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 12. Ad terram, radiees arborum, lapides ete. vulgo dispersum per totam Oelan- diam ab Ottenby ad Böda — ec. fr. — A. M. B. 170. Amblystegium riparium (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 597. — Br. eur. tab. 570, 571. — Hypnum riparium Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 3. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 5 34 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, Ad lapides, ligna putrida, in paludibus et terra bumida multis loeis, v. e. Hulterstad, Resmo alvar, Tveta, Repplinge, Trügstad, Kolstad, Borgholm, Bóda kronopark — e. fr. — A. M. B. Planta valde variabilis. Varietas insignis caulibus elongatis parum ramosis et foliis valde elongatis (var. € longifolium Schimp. Syn. p. 598) oceurrit pluribus locis una eum Fontinali antipyretica ad lapides in puteis, v. e. Hulterstad, Trög- stad, prope Kolstad. 171. Hypnum Sommerfeltii Myr. — Schimp. Syn. p. 600. — Br. eur. tab. 582. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 14. Ad radices arborum, lapides etc. pluribus locis, v. e. Ottenbylund, Färjesta- den, Tveta, Gräborg, Algutsrum, Borgholms slottsbranter, Köpings branter, Horns sjóbranter — e. fr. — A. M. B. 172. Hypnum elodes Spruce. — Schimp. Syn. p. 601. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 14. In humidis camporum alvarensium et in paludibus, multis loeis v. c. Ottenby- fyr, Ottenbylund, Ahs alvar, Güsslunda et Resmo alvar, Tveta, Algutsrum, Glóm- minge, Röhälla, in magno prato inter Ekerum et Halltorp, in paludibus inter Trög- stad et Köping, Borgholms alvar, in paludibus ealeareis prope Borgahage, Horns alvar — M. B. 173. Hypnum chrysophyllum Brid. — Schimp. Syn. p. 602. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 14. — Hypnum polymorphum Br. eur. tab. 583. Ad saxa, terram ete. multis loeis, v. e. Ottenby, Tveta, Graborg, Algutsrum, inter Stora Rór et Rälla, Borgholms slottsbranter, Kópings branter, Lundegárd, Bóda kronopark — A. M. B. 174. Hypnum stellatum Schreb. — Schimp. Syn. p. 603. — Br. eur. tab. 584. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 14. In paludibus et terra humida uliginosa multis locis, v. c. Ottenbylund, Ahs alvar, Grásgárd, Hulterstad, Gósslunda et Resmo alvar, Tveta, Algutsrum, Runsten, inter Stora Rör et Rälla, inter Trögstad et Köping, Borgholm, Horns alvar, Böda kronopark — c. fr. — A. M. B. Heee species sat varians et nonnumquam tam tenuis est quam Hypnwn chry- sophyllum. Hæc forma tenuior in Oelandia ssepius fructificat quam forme crassiores. Ultimo tempore nonnullæ species Hypno stellato arcte affines descriptæ sunt, que in Europa media repertæ, verosimiliter in Scandinavia quoque crescunt. 175. Hypnum polygamum Schimp. Syn. p. 604. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 15. — Amblystegium polygamum — Br. eur. tab. 572. In Áhs alvar prope Näsby parce repertum in humidis uliginosis. Probabili- ter pluribus loeis occurrit, quamquam facillime negligitur; nam quoad habitum persi- mile est formis tenuioribus Hypni stellati et Hypno chrysophyllo. — A. Muscı ET Heparica OELANDIZ. 35 176. Hypnum aduncum H. — Br. eur. suppl. fase. III et IV c. tab. I. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 17. — Hypnum Kneiffii Schimp. Syn. p. 605. — Amblystegium Kneiffii Br. eur. tab. 573. In paludibus et uliginosis humidis eamporum alvarensium multis loeis, v. e. Ottenbylund, Ahs alvar, Nüsby, Gräsgärd, Hulterstad, Resmo alvar, Tveta, Runsten, Röhälla, Trógstad, prope Kolstad, Borgholm, Köpings branter, Horn — e. setis — A. M. B. Hypnum aduncum hactenus fuit nomen in omnibus fere libris bryologicis oceurrens, quamvis alii auctores alias species hoc nomine signifieaverint. Apud omnes auctores veteres nomen sine dubio collectivum est; sed quum Schimper, aueto- ritate et speeiminibus originalibus Hedwigii innixus, nune deereverit hoe nomen trans- ferendum ad plantam ab ipso antea nominatam Hypnum .Kneiffü, optime est virum laudatum sequi. Bryologis Scandinaviæ tamen, qui longo tempore certam plantam (Hupnum intermedium Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 17) nomine Hypni adunci appellarunt, talis commutatio nominum minime grata est; nam nomenclatura, qui consuetudine longi temporis l. ut ita dieam usueapione fixa est, non sine gravissima caussa permutanda est. Quod si, ut exemplum afferam, omnia nomina Linnæi et aliorum, errore in scientiam introducta sed consuetudine et longo usu sancita et nullo modo æquivoca 1. eonfusionem afferentia, transmutare velles, magnum detrimentum cer- tissime scientiæ inferres. Nonnulli auctores sane existimare videntur talibus per- mutationibus se bene meritos fecisse erga scientiam, quamquam meo judicio va- riatio nominum hodierna sit umbra et portentum Botanices systematics. ^ Ni- hilo minus facile concedo veram acquisitionem esse, si nomen Hypni adunci in po- sterum consensu auctorum in certam plantam, ut nune fecit Schimper, transferatur, presertim quum magna perturbatio quoad Ayprum aduncum hactenus apud exteros regnaverit. 177. Hypnum Sendineri Schimp. Br. eur. suppl. fase. III et IV e. tabulis IL, II. — Hypnum aduneum var. e hamatum et © giganteum Br. eur. tab. 606 et Schimp. Syn. p. 607. In paludibus multis locis et sat dispersum per totam fere Oelandiam, v. €. Ottenbylund, Ahs alvar, Grüsgárd, Hulterstad, Resmo alvar, Wiekleby ad pe- dem jugi Landtborgen, Tveta, Algutsrum, Glómminge, inter Stora Ror et Rälla, Trögstad, inter Trögstad et Köping, Kolstad, Borgholm in paludibus infra arcem et prope Kungsgärden, Horns alvar. — A. M. B. Hujus speciei forme graciliores ad Hypnum intermedium Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 17 accedunt, sed crassiores Hypno lycopodioidi similiores sint. Inter formas cras- siores numeranda est varietas Wilsoni Schimp. Br. eur. suppl. I. e., qu: forma in Oelandia quoque occurrit. 178. Hypnum Lycopodioides Schweepr. — Schimp. Syn. p. 607. — Br. eur. tab. 613, 614. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 16. In paludibus, multis locis et sæpe una cum Hypno scorpioide, v. c. Ottenby- lund, Ahs alvar, Hulterstad, Resmo alvar, Tveta, inter Trégstad et Kóping, Borg- holm infra arcem et in pratis juxta mare meridiem versus, Horns alvar — A. M. B. 36 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, 179. Hypnum exannulatum Giimb. — Schimp. Syn. p. 608. — Br. eur. tab. 603. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 17. In paludibus, pluribus loeis v. e. Ottenbylund, Runsten, Trégstad, Kolstad. — A. M. 180. Hypnum fluitans (Dill) — Schimp. Syn. p. 609. — Br. eur. tab. 602. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 18. In paludibus et puteis, pluribus locis v. c. Ahs alvar, Hulterstad in puteo una cum Amblystegio ripario var. longifolio, Gösslunda alvar, Trögstad, Borgholm ad rivulum. — A. M. 181. Hypnum uncinatum H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 611. — Br. eur. tab. 600. — Hartm. FI. ed. 9, p. 16. Ad lapides, radices arborum et ligna putrida pluribus locis, plerumque tamen parce, v. e. Färjestaden, Saxnäs in silva abietina, Stora Rör, Borgholm in querce- tis, Böda kronopark ad truneos putridos in Bogateskogen copiose — ec. fr. — M. B. 182. ' Hypnum commutatum H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 613. — Br. eur. tab. 607. — Hartm. FI. ed. 9, p. 16. In solo calcareo ad rivulos et fontes raro et tantum repertum in terra uligi- nosa juxta fontem infra Rälla-tall una cum Trichocolea tomentella copiose — c. fr. — M. 183. Hypnum filieinum L. — Schimp. Syn. p. 614. — Br. eur. tab. 609. — Harms F1. ed. 9, p. 15. In humidis uliginosis, ut in paludibus, ad lapides, in rivulis et puteis cam- porum alvarensium etc. muitis loeis, v. c. Ottenbylund, Ahs alvar, Wickleby ad pe- dem jugi Landtborgen, Färjestaden, Graborg, Runsten, Rühälla, inter Stora Rör et Rälla, Trógstad, Kópings branter, Borgholm multis locis, Horns sjóbranter, Horns alvar — c. fr. — A. M. B. 184. Hypnum rugosum Ehrh. — Schimp. Syn. p. 615. — Br. eur. tab. 610. — Hartm. FI ed. 9, p. 16. Ad petras calcareas siccas in ”Södra Alvaren", v. c. Ottenby in petris jugi Landtborgen pareissime, Gösslunda et Resmo alvar parce. — A. 185. Hypnum incurvatum Schrad. — Schimp. Syn. p. 616. — Br. eur. tab. 585. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 19. Ad lapides et muros multis locis, v. c. Thorslunda, Tveta sat frequens, Gra- borg, Algutsrum, Borgholms slottsbranter copiose, Kópings branter, Horn, Béda — (fup — Als IE 186. Hypnum cupressiforme L. — Schimp. Syn. p. 625. — Br. eur. tab. 594, 595. — Hartm. FI. ed. 9, p. 20, Ad saxa, lapides, radices arborum ete. vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ot- tenby ad Bóda — e. fr. — A. M. B. Muscı ET HEPATICÆ OELANDLE. ET Planta ut solitum eximie variabilis. Var. julaceum (Zett. Muse. Kinnekull. p- 21) est forma valde insignis et occurrit passim in ” Södra Alvaren" ad petras calcareas. 187. Hypnum pratense Koch. — Schimp. Syn. p. 628. — Br. eur. tab. 611. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 19. Ad terram humidam raro et tantum repertum in Béda kronopark, ubi pareis- sime legi in silva abietina Bogateskogen. — B. Var. B hamatum Schimp. Syn. l. c., quod sat vulgare est per totam fere Scandinaviam, in Oelandia tamen deesse videtur. Hee varietas quoad habitum sat aberrat a forma typica Br. eur., quare a compluribus auctoribus, ut mihi videtur non sine ratione, specie distinguitur. 188. Hypnum molluscun H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 631. — Br. eur. tab. 598. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 15. Ad lapides, muros et petras calcareas multis loeis, precipue tamen in Oelandia media at raro fructificans, v. e. Ahs alvar, Tveta copiose, Gräborg, Alguts- rum, Ismantorpsborg, Stora Rór, Rälla, Repplinge alvar, Borgholms slottsbranter, Köpings branter, Horns sjübranter — ce. fr. — A. M. B. 189. Hypnum crista castrensis L. — Schimp. Syn. p. 632. — Br. eur. tab. 599. — Harim. Fl. ed. 9, p. 15. In umbrosis silvarum et frondiferarum et Coniferarum sat raro, v. c. Fürjesta- den, Böda kronopark in Bogateskogen — c. fr. — M. B. 190. Hypnum palustre L. — Schimp. Syn. p. 634. — Br. eur. tab. 574, 515. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 18. Tantummodo repertum in saxis caleareis juxta rivulum prope templum Kö- ping, ubi tamen eopiose viget una cum Rhynchostegio rusciformi — c. fr. — M. Folia forme Oelandice instructa sunt nervo crasso et firmo, apicem folii fere attingente. 191. Hypnum cordifolium H. — Schimp. Syn. p. 641. — Br. eur. tab. 615. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 3. In humidis uliginosis silvarum frondiferarum pluribus loeis, v. c. Ottenby- lund, in querceto juxta Strandtorp paræciæ Repplinge, Böda kronopark. — A. M. B. 192. .Hypnwm giganteum Schimp. Syn. p. 642. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 3. In paludibus et fossis etc. pluribus locis, v. e. Tveta juxta rivulum quendam, in fossis et puteis prope Trógstad, Borgholm in paludibus infra arcem. — M. 193. Hypnum cuspidatum L. — Schimp. Syn. p. 644. — Br. eur. tab. 619. — Hartm. FI. ed. 9, p. 3. In paludibus et locis uliginosis vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Böda — c. fr. — A. M. B. 38 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, 194. Hypnwn Schreberi Willd. — Schimp. Syn. p. 645. — Br. eur. tab. 620. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 4. In silvis et nemoribus vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Bóda — e. fr. — A. M. B. 195. Hypnum purum L. — Schimp. Syn. p. 646. — Br. eur. tab. 621. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 4. In silvis et nemoribus ad terram pluribus locis, v. e. Ottenbylund, Algutsrum in pineto prope Jordtorp, in silva abietina inter Saxtorp et Rohalla, Borgholm in quercetis pluribus loeis, in silvis prope Hornsjün septentrionem versus, Böda krono- park in Bogateskogen — A. M. B. 196. Hypnum turgescens Schimp. Syn. p. 648. — Hypnum molle * turgescens Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 6. — Hypnum turgescens 8 uliginosum Lindb. in Ofv. Kongl Vet. Akad. Fórh. vol XXIII, suppl. p. 539. — Hypnum ealeareum Lindb. in Hartm. exsicc. n. 388. In humidis uliginosis camporum alvarensium, præcipue in magno campo dieto "Sódra Alvaren" pluribus locis, v. e. Ahs alvar non parce, Güsslunda et Resmo al- var passim copiose, Sandby alvar, Repplinge alvar prope Trügstad parce. — A. M. Hee pulchra species in Hartm. Fl. commemorata est ut varietas 1. subspecies Hypni mollis, quod jam Doct. 8. Berggren in dissertatione academiea (Bidrag till Skandinaviens bryologi, Lund 1866, p. 5) reete monuit minime aptum esse. Speci- mina Oelandiea ad unguem quadrant cum descriptione Schimperiana in. Synopsi et cum speciminibus herjedalieis a Thedenio lectis. Planta crescit in paludosis calca- reis Oelandiæ una eum Hypno cuspidato, Lycopodioide, scorpioide, Sendtneri et aliis muscis paludosis, et teste Schimper in Synopsi iisdem locis Herjedaliz planta a C. J. Hartman primum reperta est. Ceterum quoad habitum et colorem sat variabilis. 197. Hypnum scorpioides (Dill) — Schimp. Syn. p. 650. — Br. eur. tab. 612. = Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 19. In paludibus et puteis, precipue in campis alvarensibus multis loeis et sæpe una eum subsimili Hypno Lycopodioide, v. c. Ahs alvar, Hulterstad, Gösslunda et Resmo alvar, Tveta, Algutsrum, Repplinge et Borgholms alvar, Trógstad, inter Trég- stad et Küping, Borgholm in paludibus infra arcem, Horns alvar. — A. M. B. 198. Æylocomium splendens (Dill) — Schimp. Syn. p. 652. — Br. eur. tab. 481. — Hypnum proliferum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 4. In silvis et nemoribus vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Bóda. — A. M. B. 199. Hylocomium brevirostrum (Ehrh.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 655. — Br. eur. tab. 493. — Hypnum brevirostre — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 13. In umbrosis raro et tantum repertum in Bóda kronopark ad lapides in Bogate- skogen unico loco, ubi tamen sat abandans. — B. Muscr ET HEPATICE OELANDLE. 39 200. HHylocomium squarrosum (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 656. — Br. eur. tab. 492. — Hypnum squarrosum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 14. Loeis humidis inter gramina in pratis silvatieis vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Böda — c. fr. — A. M. B. 201. Hylocomium triquetrum (L.) — Schimp. Syn. p. 657. — Br. eur. tab. 491. — Hypnum triquetrum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 13. In silvis et nemoribus vulgare per totam Oelandiam ab Ottenby ad Bóda — A. M. B. 202. Hylocomium loreum (Dill) — Schimp. Syn. p. 658. — Br. eur. tab. 490. — Hypnum loreum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 14. Ad terram et lapides raro et tantum inventum in Böda kronopark, ubi in silva abietina Bogateskogen paucis locis abundanter viget. — B. Faw. SPHAGNACEJE. 203. Sphagnum acutifolium Ehrh. — Schimp. Syn. p. 672. — Schimp. Monogr. p. 56, tab. 13, 14. — Hartm. FL ed. 9, p. 82. In paludibus et silvis vulgo dispersum per Oelandiam, v. e. Ottenbylund, in silva abietina infra Thorslunda, Möllstorp, Glómminge, in silva inter Saxnäs et Röhälla, inter Stora Rör et Rälla, copiose in paludibus inter Trögstad et Köping, in silvis parceciarum Högby et Böda multis locis — c. fr. — A. M. B. 204. Sphagnum fimbriatum Wils. — Schimp. Syn. p. 674. —- Schimp. Monogr. p. 59, tab. 15. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 81. In paludibus silvarum Coniferarum, sed multo minus dispersum quam prece- dens, v. e. in silva abietina inter Saxnäs et Röhälla, Böda kronopark copiosissime — c. fr. — M. B. 205. Sphagnum cuspidatum Ehrh. — Schimp. Syn. p. 675. — Schimp. Monogr. p. 60, tab. 16. — Sphagnum recurvum Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 83. In paludibus profundis et puteis silvarum, nonnumquam in aqua fluitans (forma submersa, plumosa) v. c. Ottenbylund, Bóda kronopark, ubi valde varians multis loeis copiose occurrit — A. B. 206. Sphagnum squarrosum Pers. — Schimp. Syn. p. 677. — Schimp. Monogr. p. 63, tab. 17. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 82. In paludibus silvarum pluribus loeis, plerumque tamen parce, v. c. Ottenby- lund, in silva abietina inter Saxnäs et Röhälla, Böda kronopark pluribus locis, sed precipue pulehrum in Bogateskogen — A. M. B. 40 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, 207. Sphagnum rigidum Schimp. Syn. p. 678. — Schimp. Monogr. p. 65, tab. 18. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 82. In paludibus silvarum et in uliginosis humidis juxta marginem silvarum Coni- ferarum Oelandie maxime borealis, ut in pareciis Högby et Böda. In Böda krono- park pluribus loeis occurrit et nonnumquam fruetifieat — c. fr. — B. 208. Sphagnum cymbifolium (Dill) — Schimp. Syn. p. 684. — Schimp. Monogr. p. 69, tab. 19. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 81. In paludibus silvarum et in terra humida uliginosa vulgo dispersum per Oelandiam, v. e. Ottenbylund, juxta silvam infra Thorslunda, Müllstorp, inter Saxnäs et Röhälla, Glömminge, Länglöth, inter Stora Rör et Rälla, vulgare in parceeiis Hógby et Bóda in silvis Coniferarum. — A. M. B. Muscr ET HEPATICE OELANDLE. 41 HEPATIC & Fam. JUNGERMANNIA CE X. 1. Alicularia scalaris (Schrad.) — Gottsche, Lind. et N. v. Es. Syn. Hep. p. 10. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. II. p. 448. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 84. — Jungermannia scalaris N. v. Es. Hep. eur. I, p. 281. In terra ad margines fossarum prope paludes inter Trógstad et templum Köping. — M. 2. Plagiochila Asplenioides (L.) — Syn. Hep. p. 49. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. III, p. 518. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 84 — Jungermannia asplenioides N. v. Es. Hep. eur. I, p. 161. Ad terram, lapides etc. multis loeis et ut solitum valde variabilis, v. e. Tveta, Graborg, inter Stora Rór et Rälla, Borgholms slottsbranter, Kópings branter, Büda kronopark, ubi preecipue pulehra et copiosa occurrit in Bogateskogen. — M. B. 3. Scapania irrigua (N. v. Es.) — Syn. Hep. p. 67. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 85. — Jungermannia irrigua N. v. Es. Hep. eur. I, p. 193. Ad terram humidam in Bóda kronopark. — B. 4. Scapania nemorosa (L. — Syn. Hep. p. 68. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 85. — Jungermannia nemorosa N. v. Es. Hep. eur. I, p. 203. In umbrosis humidis, ad ligna putrida etc. in Bóda kronopark, ubi non parce oceurrit in Bogateskogen. — B. 5. Scapania curta (Mart) — Syn. Hep. p. 69. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 85. — Jungermannia curta N. v. Es. Hep. eur. I, p. 214. Ad terram humidam in Bóda kronopark una eum Jungermannia catenulata et Lepidozia reptante. — B. Species quzdam generis Scapaniæ occurrit etiam in Resmo alvar; nam frag- menta Scapanie parvula, quæ ad Scapaniam curtam proxime accedere mihi videntur, in eolleetione muscorum fortuito apportata sunt, quamquam, nimis manca ut tute de- terminari potuerint. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 6 42 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, 6. Jungermannia exsecta Schmid. — Syn. Hep. p. 77. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. I, p. 247. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 87. Ad terram humidam et ligna putrida silvarum Coniferarum sat parce, v. c. in silva abietina inter Saxnäs et Röhälla, Böda kronopark. — M. B. 7. Jungermannia ventricosa Dicks. — Syn. Hep. p. 108. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. II, p. 62. — Hastm. FI. ed. 9, p. 91. Ad terram humidam in Böda kronopark pluribus locis et preecipue pulchra in Bogateskogen. — B. 8. Jungermannia porphyroleuca N. v. Es. — Syn. Hep. p. 109. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. II, p. 78. — Jungermannia ventricosa @ porphyro- leuca Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 91. Böda kronopark ad ligna putrida in Bogateskogen una cum Scapania nemorosa et Jungermannia trichophylla. — B. 9. Jungermannia incisa Schrad. — Syn. Hep. p. 118. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. II, p. 136. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 98. Ad terram et ligna putrida silvarum abietinarum, v. c. inter Saxnäs et Ró- hälla una cum Jungermannia exsecta et Lepidozia reptante, et Böda kronopark in Bogateskogen una cum eadem Lepidozia. — M. B. 10. Jungermannia minuta Dicks. — Syn. Hep. p. 120. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. I, p. 254. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 92. Pauci sureuli hujus speciei reperti sunt ad saxa granitoidea una cum Junger- mannia barbata var. attenuata in pineto prope Jordtorp paræciæ Algutsrum, ubi he dus Jungermannie, cæspitibus Grimmie Hartmanni immixte, observationem facile effugiunt. — M. 11. Jungermannia barbata Schreb. — Syn. Hep. p. 122. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur II, p. 155. — Hartm. F1. ed. 9, p. 92. Ad saxa granitoidea silvarum et nemorum multis locis, v. c. Tveta, Gråborg, Algutsrum, Möllstorp, inter Stora Rör et Rälla, Borgholm in querceto inter urbem et arcem, Böda kronopark. — M. B. In Synopsi Hepaticarnm complures conjunguntur forme inter se tam aberran- tes, ut non minori causa quam multe aliæ parum distinctæ species pro speciebus propriis habendz mihi videantur. In Oelandia tamen, excepto pineto prope Jordtorp, ubi paucos sureulos var. attenuate (Syn. Hep. l. c.) observavi, solummodo eam for- mam Jungermanniæ barbate inveni, que in Hartm. Fl. hoe nomen retinuit et in Synopsi Hepatiearum nominatur hee forma Jungermannia barbata var. Schreberi (1. e. p. 125). 12. Jungermannia divaricata E. B. — Syn. Hep. p. 135. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. II, p. 241. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 94. Muscı ET Heparica OELANDIZ. 43 Ad terram inter vegetabilia putrida raro et tantum parce repertum in Böda kronopark. — B. 13. Jungermannia catenulata Hüb. — Syn. Hep. p. 138. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. IT, p. 248. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 93. In umbrosis silvarum ad terram et ligna putrida pluribus loeis, v. c. in silva abietina inter Saxnäs et Röhälla, in silvis prope Horn septentrionem versus, Büda kronopark multis locis seeundum semitas. — M. B. 14. Jungermannia bicuspidata L. — Syn. Hep. p. 138. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. II, p. 351. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 93. Ad terram humidam et ligna putrida pluribus locis, v. e. in silva abietina in- ter Saxnäs et Rühälla una eum Jungermanniis incisa, trichophylla, catenulata et Le- pidozia reptante, ad margines fossarum prope paludes inter Trögstad et templum K6- ping una eum Alicularia scalari et Calypogeja Trichomane, Borgholms slottsbranter una cum Zophocolea minori, Böda kronopark multis locis copiose — c. fr. — M. B. 15. Jungermannia connivens Dicks. — Syn. Hep. p. 141. — N. v. Es. Hep eur. II, p. 283. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 94. In Bóda kronopark aliis Hepaticis immixta. — B. 16. Jungermannia curvifolia Dicks. — Syn. Hep. p. 142. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. 1l. p. 277. = Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 94. Boda kronopark ad ligna putrida in Bogateskogen una cum Sphagnecetide communi et Jungermannia bicuspidata sat parce at perianthio instrueta. — B. Forma, que in Oelandia invenitur, eadem est ac in peninsula Scandinaviæ, nempe var. B Baueri Syn. Hep. l. e. Quamquam hee species apud nos sat raro in- venitur, mihi non dubium est, quin in omnibus provinciis Sueciæ meridionalis oceur- rat, quamvis dispersa sit et plerumque paree suis in loeis crescat. In Smolandia legi ad Husquarna prope Jönköping et in monte Omberg Ostrogothiæ. 17. Jungermannia trichophylla L. — Syn. Hep. p. 145. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. II, p. 301. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 94. Ad ligna putrida et vegetabilia putrescentia in silvis abietinis, v. c. inter Sax- näs et Röhälla, Bóda kronopark in Bogateskogen. — M. B. 18. Sphagnecetis communis (Dicks) — Syn. Hep. p. 148. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 95. — Jungermannia Sphagni N. v. Es. Hep. eur. I, p. 294. In paludibus inter Sphagna et Dicranum Schraderi, ad terram humidam et ligna putrida pluribus locis, v. c. in paludibus prope templum Glómminge meridiem versus, Böda kronopark pluribus locis at præcipue in Bogateskogen — oc. fr. — M. B. 19. Lophocolea bidentata (L.) — Syn. Hep. p. 159, — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. II, p. 327. — Hartm. Fl ed. 9, p. 95. 44 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, In umbrosis ad terram humidam pluribus locis, v. e. Ottenbylund, Färjesta- den, Béda kronopark in Bogateskogen. — A. M. B. 20. Lophocolea minor N. v. Es. — Syn. Hep. p. 160. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. II, p. 330. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 95. Ad terram, saxa etc. pluribus locis, plerumque tamen parce, v. e. Tveta in silvis et nemoribus una cum Lophocolea heterophylla, Borgholms slottsbranter et in quereetis prope mare meridiem versus. — M. 21. Lophocolea heterophylla (Schrad.) — Syn, Hep. p. 164. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. II, p. 338. —- Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 95. Ad ligna putrida et vegetabilia putrescentia pluribus locis, v. e. Ottenbylund, Tveta, Gräborg, Böda kronopark in Bogateskogen — oc. fr. — A. M. B. 29, Chioscyphus pallescens (Schrad.) — Syn. Hep. p. 187. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. II, p. 369. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 96. In loeis aquosis, ad margines paludum ete., v. c. Ottenbylund, Bóda krono- park in Bogateskogen. — A. B. 23. Calypogeja Trichomanis (Scop. — Syn. Hep. p. 198. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. III, p. 8. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 96. In umbrosis ad terram humidam et ligna putrida pluribus locis, v. c. Ottenby- lund, inter Stora Rör et Rälla, ad margines fossarum prope paludes inter Trögstad et templum Köping, Böda kronopark multis locis. — A. M. B. 24. Lepidozia reptans (L.) — Syn. Hep. p. 205. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 97. — Herpetium reptans N. v. Es. Hep. eur. III, p. 31. Ad terram humidam et ligna putrida pluribus locis, v. e. in silva abietina inter Saxnäs et Röhälla copiose, in betuletis inter Stora Rör et Rälla, Boda krono- park frequenter — e. fr. — M. B. 25. Mastigobryum trilobatum (L.) — Syn. Hep. p. 230. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 97. — Herpetium trilobatum N. v. Es. Hep. eur. III, p. 49. In umbrosis silvarum ad lapides et terram sat raro, v. c. prope Horn septen- trionem versus parce, Bóda kronopark in Bogateskogen copiose in area sat magna. — B. 26. Trichocolea Tomentella (Ehrh. — Syn. Hep. p. 237. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. III, p. 105. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 97. In terra uliginosa raro et tantummodo repertum prope Rälla-tall juxta fontem quendam statim infra jugum arenosum pinis vestitum una cum Hypno commutato copiose. — M. 21. Ptilidium ciliare (L.) — Syn. Hep. p. 250. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. III, p. 117. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 98. Muscr ET HEPATICE OELANDLE. 45 Ad truneos arborum et lapides pluribus locis, v. e. Ottenbylund, Saxniis in silva abietina, Böda kronopark præcipue in Bogateskogen — ce. fr. — A. M. B. 28. Radula complanata (L.) — Syn. Hep. eur. p. 257. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. III, p. 146. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 98. Ad truneos arborum, nonnumquam ad saxa, sat vulgaris per Oelandiam me- diam a Tveta ad Lundegàrd. In Oelandia boreali etiam oceurrit, v. c. Horn et Böda prope templum — e. fr. — M. B. 29. Madotheca rivularis N. v. Es. — Syn. Hep. p. 278. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. III, p. 196. — Hartm: Fl. ed. 9, p. 98. In uliginosis ad saxa et lapides, raro ad radices arborum, pluribus locis Oelandiz mediæ, v. e. Tveta, Algutsrum, Södra Back parcecie Runsten ad radices arborum, Borgholms slottsbranter. — M. 30. Madotheca platyphylla (L.) — Syn. Hep. p. 278. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. III, p. 186. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 98. Ad muros et saxa pluribus loeis Oelandiæ medie, v. e. Tveta ad muros, Borgholms slott ad saxa et muros, Képings branter. — M. 31. Madotheca porella N. v. Es. — Syn. Hep. p. 281. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. III, p. 201. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 99. Ad saxa humida et ad lapides juxta rivulos. Specimina parvula hujus spe- ciei mihi benigne communicata sunt a Doctore N. J. Scheutz, que legit in Borg- holms alvar. 32. Frullania dilatata (L.) — Syn. Hep. p. 415. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. III, p. 217. — Hartm. F1. ed. 9, p. 99. Ad truncos arborum pluribus locis, v. c. Ottenbylund, Tveta, Borgholms slottsbranter et in quercetis prope Borgholm, Horn, Böda prope templum, Bóda krono- park in Bogateskogen — ce. fr. — A. M. B. 33. Frullania Tamarisci (L. — Syn. Hep. p. 438. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. IIT, p. 229. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 99. Ad truncos arborum et fruticum sat parce, v. e. Åhs alvar in Potentilla fru- ticosa raro, Böda kronopark ad arbores in Bogateskogen. — A. B. 94. Fossombronia pusilla (Schmid. — Syn. Hep. p. 467. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. III, p. 319. — Hartm. FI. ed. 9, p. 100. Ad terram humidam pluribus loeis in Böda kronopark. — B. 35. Pellia epiphylla (L.) — Syn. Hep. p. 488. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. III, p. 361. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 100. 46 J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, Ad terram humidam et margines fossarum pluribus locis, v. e. Ottenbylund, in silva abietina inter Saxnäs et Röhälla, in fossis prope paludes inter Trögstad et templum Köping, Borgholm inter Philonotidem fontanam, Böda kronopark prsecipue in Bogateskogen. — A. M. B. 36. Aneura palmata (H.) — Syn. Hep. p. 498. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. III, p. 459. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 100. Böda kronopark ad ligna putrida in Bogateskogen. — B. 37. Metzgeria furcata (L.) — Syn. Hep. p. 502. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. III, p. 485. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 101. Ad saxa, radices arborum ete. pluribus locis, v. c. Ottenbylund, Tveta, inter Saxnüs et Röhälla, Borgholms slottsbranter et in quercetis juxta mare meridiem ver- sus, Lundegärd, Böda kronopark in Bogateskogen. — A. M. B. Fam MARCHANTIACEÆ. 38. Marchantia polymorpha L. — Syn. Hep. p. 522. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. IV, p. 61. — Hartm. FI. ed. 9, p. 101. In loeis humidis uliginosis passim, at non vulgaris, v. c. Ottenby juxta mu- rum magnum, Gárdby, Borghulm, Köpings branter, Horns sjébranter, in fossa qua- dam prope Bäck parœciæ Högby maximá copia — c. fr. — A. M. B. 39. Preissia commutata (Lindenb. — Syn. Hep. p. 549. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. IV, p. 117. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 101. In fissuris rupium et in uliginosis eamporum alvarensium pluribus locis, v. e. Tveta in campis parce, Borgholms alvar parce, ad ripam lacus Hornsjón, Horns sjöhranter sat eopiose et ditissime fructifieans — oc. fr. — M. B. 40. Sauteria hyalina (Sommrtlt) — Lindb. in Ofv. K. Vet. Akad. Förh. vol. XXIII, 1866, suppl. p. 561. — Sauteria seriata Lindb. in Hedwi- gia V, p. 33. — Sauteria suecica Lindb. in G. et Rab. Hep. eur. n. 347. — Marchantia hyalina Sommrflt. Mag. for Naturv. XI, 1833, p. 234. In petris humidis calcareis magni campi dicti ”Södra Alvaren” pluribus lo- cis, v. c. Gósslunda alvar, Resmo alvar, Wickleby alvar — c. fr. — A. Hee species, que mense Majo anni 1865 cum fructu abundanter lecta est in "Sódra Alvaren" a prof. S. Lindberg, a me tantum sterilis inventa est, quum hos campos alvarenses fine mensis Junii et toto mense Julio iterum iterumque exploravi. Ubique pareius a me observata est, nam hee planta vernalis media estate jam semide- composita erat. Muscr ET HEPATICE OELANDLE. AT Obs. In Öfv. K. Vet. Akad. Förh. Le. a prof. Lindberg commemoratur nova Dwvalie species (Duvalia borealis), que ab illo inventa est ' in Oelandia una cum Sauteria hyalina. Quum hee planta, verisimiliter vernalis, mihi omnino ignota sit, nomen ejusdem solum afferre possum. 41. Reboulia hemispherica (L.)) — Syn. Hep. p. 548. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. IV, p. 203. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 102. Ad terram et saxa pluribus locis, v. c. Karlevi alvar (E. V. Ekstrand), Kö- pings branter non parce, Horns sjöbranter. In fissuris petrarum calearearum prope Ottenby sat parce viget varietas insignis pedunculis duplo longioribus (var. longiscapa) , que forma videtur proxime aecedere ad varietates extraeuropæas, peduneulis longis præditas et in Syn. Hep. p. 548 eommemoratas — e. fr. — A. M. B. Fam. RICCIACE A. 42. Riccia chrystallina L. — Syn. Hep. p. 607. — N. v. Es. Hep. eur. IV, p. 429. — Hartm. Fl. ed. 9, p. 103. Ad terram argillaceam. Jam a Linnæo observata prope Horn (Linné Ol. och Gottl. resa p. 154); Karlevi alvar (E. V. Ekstrand). — A. B. ) Non dubium est quin Linnæus sub hoe nomine non solum Rebouliam hemi- sphericam nostram sed etiam alias Marchantiacearum species conjunxerit; sed quum nomen specificum Linnæanum ad hane speciem consensu auctorum affixum sit, Lin- nsum ut auctorem nominis afferre mihi optime videtur. > ERBE. ANNE NAT ovy fe TE rt is Tal n ^4 “AY Em "m alte (ed tage) ra = Len, EN ré MODEL IE, | " Itt wer | MTM UT. D A » n et : QUE: a Mi nari ei vei dos MM Ele ee “Ua acd) sm Raving cet Ay’ ars a STR TETOSD Ad n | i ryt carp eio FOND TM faen agb 2l Nhe. A Fra ‘tan Ant Un D | TI AW Lun | A T, Em mw Te lin. Hw ua TTE Zt T. "TT erry "à dM. della m hus LE | tert Vip cay res Ae tres Jy TL LET Mm Yu ds inem mua rin ^ LORS NT uim rs y" "m I va AP M leah me vd. Wd. oim ' * 4 a P. PEG EXT TL BER y KE! " ETT mi À TP 5 i C e di E E u EL t Y cM DESCRIPTION D'UN METEOROGRAPHE ENREGISTREUR CONSTRUIT POUR L'OBSERVATOIRE D'UPSAL PAR Dr. A.-G. THEORELL. (Présentée à la Société Roy. des Sciences d'Upsal le 14 Nov. 1868.) UPSAL, W. Scauttz. 1868. i SURE ETO EE AAA TAM TUE Mf] ape An vy paste ah mage 9] Inu. LOF Dian Mr zn + mi y 9 4 pH "quy 22 dd 4 ME tic "n Hd mn: | ol, akut sk MINE er Sh KA Ioab u vin) alomieeve] ME esit Bie isd: Sat RE ah lgp bo vb. supo [fa anim leuk zum -eintebro! werd ont 78 quet rep pur ee! uns fa 4n etant ind fe 3108935 te | ae ati ty UR S uh “rite Ama ao egt zy P roe 5n M. | dv tn q he Toner tr] Ut aut BML Gait "T£ 1 CES vc Mb d UT iege ai d LES EE De sin | i " "B üt b ru ITA SIR HAINE ahs ^ aote nb. dd domui oh manum | Us et PORTRAIT faire E. i ime T » los & «tie hs SOL ^d 9b es | « sot ona duet lue PAT Ar dette aT 12^ Ale OY ees ! } I0 ) $9 mind. TID odd md 2l deg ——ÁÓPf > malt “wohn NV sehr attriliqqa EI 2 dete ^" INTRODUCTION. Hes que le besoin de matériaux d'observation plus détaillés et plus com- plets s'est présenté aux météorologistes comme la condition indispen- sable des progrès de la science, on s'est appliqué avec toujours plus d'ar- deur à la construction d'appareils enregistreurs comme le seul moyen de re- cueillir ces matériaux avec les ressources disponibles. Je prends la liberté de faire précéder le récit de mes efforts personnels dans cette direction, d'une esquisse critique de ce qui, de mon så, a été fait jusqu’ à present dans la méme voie, me bornant toutefois aux instruments ayant le méme but que le mien, savoir l'enregistrement des observations sur la pression atmosphé- rique, la température et l'humidité de lair. Pour la solution de ce problème, plusieurs projets plus ou moins pratiques ont été proposés et essayés avec des succès divers, sans qu'au- eune des constructions produites jusqu’ à present ait pu être considérée comme donnant des résultats de nature à la faire généralement adopter. La mé- thode en usage dans plusieurs observatoires anglais, de photographier, la colonne de mercure du baromètre et du thermomètre, comporte, à ce que Yon dit, une précision suffisante, mais elle doit être accompagnée de tant de peine et de frais, que, du moins à son état présent, elle ne peut guère recevoir d'application générale. Pour ce qui concerne les observations baro- métriques, on possède une grande variété d'appareils, et le probléme est aussi plus facile à leur égard. Le barométre dit à balance doit donner un enregistrement trés-exact. Dans les appareils destinés aux observations thermométriques, on a fait usage ou de thermomètres ordinaires à mercure ou de thermométres métalli- Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. Ill. 1 2 A-G. THEORELL, ques. L'enregistrement est assez facile avec ces derniers, soit que l'on em- ploie pour thermomètre, avec M. WILD, un ressort en spirale composé de deux métaux, ou, comme M. SECCHI et d'autres, un simple fil de métal. On doit toutefois objecter contre l'appareil de WILD en particulier, qu'il est d'une application difficile dans un climat rigoureux, ses parties les plus sen- sibles paraissant être trop peu protégées, vu que la boite où se trouve l'appareil communique avec l'air extérieur par une fente assez grande. Con- tre l'emploi des thermomètres métalliques en général pour les observations météorologiques, on a objecté avec raison que leur température ne dépend pas uniquement de la température de l'air, comme c'est au plus près le cas des thermomètres à mercure, mais encore de la chaleur rayonnante à laquelle ils peuvent être exposés. Il est au surplus impossible de se servir d'un thermomé- tre métallique pour la psychrométrie. Pour ces diverses raisons, on a consi- déré comme un desideratum de pouvoir, dans les appareils enregistreurs, faire usage de thermométres ordinaires à mercure, et, outre la méthode photogra- phique mentionnée ci-dessus, on a proposé deux moyens de parvenir au but. Le premier, c'est de suspendre le thermomètre sur des tranchants comme une balance ordinaire, son inclinaison, par suite du déplacement du centre de gravité d'aprés les variations de la colonne de mercure, devant servir à la dé- termination de la température. Cette méthode présente, comme on l'a re- marqué, de fortes objections: 1:0, elle ne peut étre employée que dans un climat trés-doux, car tout le mécanisme est en dehors, exposé de la sorte à des influences défavorables à sa durée; 2:0, elle ne peut s'appli- quer à la psychrométrie, vu que lon me peut maintenir continuellement le méme degré d'humidité sur la boule, dont la moindre différence à cet égard doit nécessairement modifier la pesanteur. Le second projet est celui d'employer, pour l'enregistrement, des courants électriques établis par le contact entre le mercure du thermomètre et un fil d'acier ou de platine descendant dans le tube. Le premier qui ait cherché à réaliser cette idée, est M. WHEATSTONE, lequel parait toutefois s'étre arrété à un projet détaillé de construetion, qui n'a jamais été exécuté. D'après ce projet, les fils de platine des- cendant dans les tubes des thermométres, sont, entre les observations, plongés en partie dans le mercure, et c'est l'interruption du courant, lorsque le fil est retiré, qui produit l'enregistrement. Un enregistrement thermométrique de cette espèce, qui a été vrai- ment mis en pratique, est celui du P. SEccur de Rome. Ce savant phy- sicien se sert de fils de platine. A chaque observation, le fil de platine parcourt le tube dans toute sa longueur, descendant dans le mercure et en METEOROGRAPHE ENREGISTREUR. 3 resortant ensuite, l'interruption et l'établissement du courant servant également à enregistrer. . Si, dans ees appareils, on réussit, par l'emploi de courants trés-faibles, à empécher la formation d'étincelles dans le mereure du thermométre, avec les inconvénients qui en résultent, il en reste cependant d'autres indubita- blement fort nuisibles à l'exactitude des observations. Il doit être, par exemple, impossible, pendant ce mouvement alternatif et répété du fil re- montant et descendant à travers la colonne de mercure d'empécher, que des gouttes de ce métal ne se fixent au fil ou aux parois du tube. Il se produit dela sorte, dans les variations de la colonne de mercure, un élément qui n'a aucune relation avec les variations de la température. Ensuite, la boule du thermo- métre doit nécessairement revétir des dimensions énormes, du moins avec lemploi de degrés d'une longueur ordinaire, le tube exigeant une capacité considérable pour que le fil n'expulse aucune partie du mercure, tout en étant assez épais pour avoir la stabilité nécessaire. Ce qui rend probable que ces circonstances donnent effectivement des indications peu süres, c'est que, dans les déterminations de la température, M. SECCHI n'a pas osé se confier à cette méthode, mais qu'il a eu recours au thermomètre métallique. Ce thermométre métallique de SECCHI enregistre sans doate sa température propre avec une exaetitude trés-grande, mais nous venons de voir quil faut se défier de lidentité de cette derniére avec la température de l'air. Pour ce qui con- cerne les observations psychrométriques, auxquelles M. SECCHI a appliqué la méthode indiquée plus haut, elles présupposent souvent, méme pour un faible degré dexactitude dans la détermination de l'humidité de l'air, l'ob- servation de différences si petites, quelles sont probablement inférieures aux erreurs d'observation du météorographe de SEccHI. C'est du moins le cas dans les climats plus froids, ot lon a, en hiver, les différences les plus minimes à apprécier. Aussi, dans ces régions, le psychrométre de SECCHI doit-il étre complétement inapplicable. DESCRIPTION DU MÉTÉOROGRAPHE. Au printemps de 1864, je fus chargé par M. le professeur EDLUND, de l'Académie Royale des Sciences de Stockholm, de construire, pour le compte de l'Académie, un appareil enregistreur pour les observations ther- mométriques et barométriques, construit sur les mémes bases que celui de WHEATSTONE, mais avec la modification que l'établissement du courant, et 4 A.-G THEORELL, non son interruption, devait fournir l'enregistrement, afin d'éviter les incon- vénients signalés ci-dessus de la construction WHEATSTONE. En outre, le fil conducteur provoquant l'établissement du courant, ne devait pas descendre dans le mercure, mais s'arréter dés qu'il l'avait atteint, et remonter ensuite. Ces conditions amenaient la nécessité d'une construction toute diffé- rente de celle proposée par M. WHEATSTONE. Pendant l'hiver de 1864— 65, je construisis, sur ces principes nouveaux, un instrument adapté tant au thermométre, qu'au psychrométre et au barométre, quoique le baromé- tre n'ait jamais été introduit dans l'appareil. Cet instrument, confectionné par M. LvrzH, fut installé à l'Observatoire de Stockholm, et y fonctionna jusqu'à ce qu'il fut dérangé par des curieux. Par la générosité d’un ami, M. O.-A. BRODIN, architecte naval à Gefle, je fus mis en état de construire un nouvel exemplaire, avec des modifications importantes, pour l'Exposition de l'Industrie à Stockholm, en 1866. L'attention dont il fut l'objet de la part du membre danois du jury pour les instruments physiques, M. le professeur C. HoLTEn de Copen- hague, amena la commande d'un instrument pour le compte de la Société des Sciences de Copenhague. Tout récemment, un nouvel exemplaire a été construit pour l'Obser- vatoire d'Upsal; c'est à ce dernier que se rapporte la description qui va suivre. Quoique cet instrument présente, à divers points de vue, des diffé- rences assez notables avec celui de Copenhague, elles ne sont toutefois pas de nature à exiger des dessins spéciaux pour les deux instruments. C'est pour cette raison que j'emploie iei les planches déjà gravées pour la descrip- tion de l'appareil de Copenhague, en signalant successivement les modifica- tions survenues. Elles ont au reste été principalement nécessitées par des exigences différentes dans le placement des thermomètres, ceux-ci étant, dans l'exemplaire de Copenhague, établis à 0",75 de distance de lédifiee où se trouve l'instrument, distance qui, en vue de circon- stances locales particulières, a été considérée insuffisante par M. Ru- BENSON, qui dirige les observations météorologiques d'Upsal. L’exécution des deux instruments, due au mécanicien de l'Académie des Sciences, M. SORENSEN, ne laisse rien à désirer tant au point de vue de l'exactitude quà celui de lélégance. Les thermométres et le baromètre sont du fabricant d'instruments météorologiques de l'Académie des Sciences, M. ADERMAN, à lhabileté supérieure duquel on doit d'avoir surmonté les dif- ficultés toutes particulières attachées à leur construction. Ils sont faits avec le soin le plus scrupuleux, et les thermométres permettent non-seule- METEOROGRAPHE ENREGISTREUR. 5 ment l'appréeiation de 20""* de degré, mais sont aussi parfaitement sûrs dans cette limite. Comme je l'ai signalé plus haut, ces appareils sont destinés aux observations thermométriques, psychrométriques et barométriques. Les plan- ches sont faites d'aprés des photographies. La fig. IV donne l'appareil dans son ensemble, les figures I, II et III reproduisent des parties diverses et différents côtés de la partie qui est dans l'intérieur de l'édifice. L'é- chelle de la fig. IV est d'environ ?/, de la grandeur naturelle. La notation des observations s'effectue par des électro-aimants, un pour ehaque instrument, aux armatures desquels sont fixés des poingons d'acier imprimant des marques sur un papier; le courant électrique qui produit laimantation, s'établit par la mise en contact d'un fil d'acier avec le mer- eure de linstrument qui doit être observé. Après avoir atteint le mer- eure, le fil d'acier s'arrête pour remonter ensuite, mais seulement après que le courant a été interrompu à un autre point du conduit, à l'effet de prévenir des étincelles dans le mercure de linstrument. L'électro-aimant est placé dans une communication telle avec le fil d'acier, que sa position, lorsquil imprime sa marque, dépend de la hauteur de la colonne de mer- eure dans l'instrument; on peut, de la sorte, déterminer la variation de l'instrument par la position relative des marques. De chacun des trois in- struments, une observation est fournie toutes les 10 minutes, (toutes les 15 minutes dans l'exemplaire de Copenhague). Les tubes des thermométres dont je fais usage, sont, afin de rendre possibles les mouvements du fil d'acier, ouverts et cylindriques, et d'un calibre suffisamment grand pour que les fils puissent se mouvoir facilement, tout en étant d'une épaisseur qui leur donne la stabilité nécessaire. Chaque degré de thermométre ayant une longueur d'environ trois millimétres, les boules doivent nécessairement présenter un volume peu ordinaire. Mais comme la forme des boules est celle d'un cylindre assez allongé, ces ther- momètres ont toutefois, comparés avec ceux employés à l'Observatoire d'Upsal, suivi, sans différence sensible, les variations de ces derniers méme quand la température de l'air variait le plus. Ils sont au reste de la construction actuellement la plus commune, avec un tube extérieur soudé à la boule et enfermant l'échelle et le tube du thermomètre. La fig. VI les représente sur une échelle mesurant un peu plus du tiers de la gran- deur naturelle. La circonstance que les thermométres sont ouverts, amène la néces- sité de les protéger soigneusement contre la poussiere et les influences 6 A.-G. THEORELL, extérieures de nature à exercer une action facheuse sur le mercure. Il faut, pour cette raison, les soustraire autant que possible à l'humidité et à l'aeide carbonique de l'air. Ces précautions sont tout aussi nécessaires à l'égard du fil d'acier, qui doit conserver sa surface métallique pour la netteté du contact galvanique. La possibilité du mouvement libre du fil dans le tube du thermomètre, exige également l'absence de toute humidité, du moins dans la saison froide, l'humidité pouvant immobiliser le fil par la congé- lation. Ces considérations m'ont fait adopter la construction suivante. Les thermomètres sont, à leur extrémité supérieure, enfermés dans une armoire de zinc, dont on a pu rendre la fermeture si hermétique, qu'elle résiste à plusieurs millimètres de pression. On introduit dans l'armoire des assiettes de verre contenant du chlorure de calcium et de la potasse eau- stique, purifiant complètement l'air intérieur d'humidité et d'acide earboni- que. Par ce moyen, les fils d’acier sont parfaitement protégés contre la rouille, de même que le mercure des thermomètres contre la poussière et l'humidité. Dans l'appareil de Copenhague, l'armoire de zinc signalée ci-dessus, est, comme lindique le dessin (JD, fig. IV), destinée à étre vissée à la muraille de la maison où l'appareil est installé. Les thermomètres sont enchässes environ à p, de sorte que les tubes descendent dans le prolongement vertieal G, et que les boules se trouvent en dedans de la jalousie en tôle Æ. Elles sont, par ce moyen, protégées contre la pluie et la neige, tout en étant plaeées assez librement pour que lair qui les entoure ne devienne pas stagnant. Pour la lecture des thermométres, un petit guichet est pratiqué au côté antérieur du prolongement G. Naturellement, l'armoire doit être placée au côté nord de la maison, et être en outre protégée par des écrans ou des jalousies contre le soleil du matin et le soleil du soir. Tout le reste de l'appareil se trouve dans l’intérieur de Ja maison; il est en outre complètement couvert d'une cage en verre, et protégé de la sorte contre la poussière et l'humidité. Il est placé sur une plaque de fonte 7, tres- solide, reposant sur trois vis calantes et destinée à être placée sur un piédestal en briques de manière à être protégée contre toute secousse. Cette plaque sert de support à la cage en verre signalée tout à l'heure. Le baromètre (F, fig. IV) est un baromètre à siphon de la con- struction ordinaire, et le fil d'acier qui lui appartient, descend dans l'extré- mité inférieure et ouverte du tube. Le barométre est, de méme que les thermométres, muni de fils de platine soudés dans le verre, destinés à provoquer le contact entre le mercure et l'un des póles de la pile élec- METEOROGRAPHE ENREGISTREUR. 7 trique. L'autre pôle se trouve, lors des observations, en contact avec le fil d’a- cier. Une seule et même pile sert aux trois instruments. Le papier sur lequel les électro-aimants impriment leurs marques, est tendu sur un cylindre vertical en zine A (ff. III et IV), recouvert de drap. Le long de ce cylindre, les électro-aimants (désignés sur la fig. III par 1, 2 et 3) sont verticalement mobiles sur des guides de fil d'acier, tendus sur un cadre A. Le cylindre est mis en mouvement par une horloge (f£ IL et IV), de telle sorte que chaque observation vient s'enregistrer à une di- stance d'environ 3 millimètres de la précédente. C'est ainsi que les observa- tions s'inscrivent pendant 24 heures sur le méme papier. On doit done changer de papier toutes les 24 heures, et pour cet effet, l'instrument est muni d'un cylindre de rechange. Les électro-aimants qui appartiennent aux thermomètres, communi- quent avec les fils d'acier descendant dans ces derniers, au moyen des deux leviers m et » (fig. IV), lesquels se meuvent dans des coussinets horizontaux hermétiques, dans la paroi postérieure de l'armoire D. Au bout de chacun de ces leviers entrant dans l'armoire, est suspendu le support auquel est fixé le fil d'acier; la suspension a lieu au moyen d'une pointe fixée sur le sup- port, et reposant sur une autre pointe horizontale au bout du levier, placée per- pendiculairement à la premiére et à l'axe longitudinal du levier. (La fig. V montre cet arrangement de deux côtés; a est le support, à le fil d'acier, c lextrémité du levier, et e une partie du conduit galvanique). La pesanteur du support fait descendre cette extrémité du levier, et l'autre s'appuie contre l'électro-aimant de telle facon qu'une pointe horizontale parfaitement identique à celle placée de lautre cóté, repose perpendiculairement contre une seconde pointe fixée à l'électro-aimant (Voir fig. IV). Les pointes de chacun de ces systémes étant toujours appuyées l'une contre l'autre, le levier, et avec lui le fil d'acier, doit naturellement entrer en mouvement dès que l'électro- aimant se meut. Les supports des fils d'acier passent, comme ceux des électro-aimants, entre des guides de fil d'acier verticaux, tendus sur un chassis. Or, comme l'électro-aimant et le support ne peuvent avoir qu'un mouvement vertical, et que les bras de levier sont égaux et sur la méme ligne droite, quand l’eleetro-aimant se meut de bas en haut, le fil d'acier se meut d'une égale quantité de haut en bas et vice-versa. La communication entre le fil d'acier qui descend dans le tube du baromètre et l'électro-aimant qui lui appartient, s'opère à peu prés de la méme maniére. La principale différence est que les bras de levier se trou- vent ici dans des rapports tels, que le mouvement de l'électro-aimant est quatre fois plus grand que celui du fil d'acier, et que tous les deux se meuvent daus 8 A.-G. THEORELL, la méme direction. Des mesures spéciales de précaution ont été prises en outre dans la construction de ce levier, afin de maintenir avec la plus grande précision possible le rapport susdit entre les mouvements de l'électro-aimant et ceux du fil d'acier dans les diverses positions du levier, une exactitude encore plus grande étant iei nécessaire que dans les observations thermo- métriques. (Ce levier est désigné par & dans la fig. IV. On y voit aussi le support du fil d'acier.) Dans l'intervalle des observations, l'extrémité inférieure du fil d'acier de chaque instrument se trouve toujours à une certaine distance au-dessus du mereure et les observations ont lieu par la mise en mouvement de l'électro-aimant toutes les 10 minutes: le fil d'acier descend dans le tube jusqu'à ce quil atteigne le mercure, ce qui provoque l'établissement du courant électrique. Le résultat en est que ce mouvement cesse et que l'électro-ai- mant imprime sa marque sur le papier. Le courant est immédiatement in- terrompu et lélectro-aimant se retire à une distance fixe. Aprés l'observa- tion, l'extrémité inférieure du fil d'acier se retrouve par conséquent au-dessus du mercure et cela toujours de la méme distance indépendamment de la hau- teur du mercure. Pour le fil d’acier du baromètre, cette distance répond à une variation de l'instrument d'environ 6 millimètres, et à 4 degrés à peu prés pour ceux des thermométres. Le fil conserve jusqu'à l'observation suivante la position prise par lui. Les fils d'acier appartenant aux thermométres, se mouvant toujours, comme nous lavons vu, de la méme quantité que les électro-aimants corres- pondants, la différence de hauteur entre deux marques imprimées sur le papier par lun de ces électro-aimants, doit donc toujours être égale à la différence de hauteur du mercure du thermomètre au moment où les marques furent faites. Il suffit done de connaître le degré de temperature au moment d'une observation quelconque, pour le pouvoir déterminer en- suite à ceux de toutes les autres. On se sert à cet effet d'une régle sur laquelle est graduée l'échelle thermométrique. Quand l'appareil a été en mouvement pendant 24 heures, on enléve le cylindre que l'on place sur un chevalet destiné à cet usage; on fixe la régle entre deux vis calantes, de sorte que son limbe gradué s'appuie contre le cylindre, et on l'agence de manière que la première marque par exemple du cylindre coincide avec le degré de l'échelle constaté au moment où la première ob- servation fut marquée. Comme l'on a noté le temps de cette premiére observation, on connaît immédiatement le temps de chacune des observations suivantes. On tourne le cylindre et on lit sur l'échelle chaeune des marques subséquentes. L’échelle est graduée en 5""*5 de degré, et lon peut, avec METEOROGRAPHE ENREGISTREUR. 9 une grande facilité, apprécier jusqu'aux 20""*, La lecture des observations barométriques marquées a lieu de la méme manière, à la seule exception prés que sur la régle, comme sur l'échelle méme du barométre, se trouve un vernier pour rendre possible une détermination rigoureuse. A ses deux niveaux, le tube du barométre présente exactement le méme calibre, et le niveau inférieur donne par conséquent la moitié de la variation. Comme c'est la variation du niveau inférieur qui est observée, et que le mouvement de l'électro-aimant est quadruple de celui du fil d'acier, les marques produites sur le cylindre représentent la double variation de l'état du baromètre. L’é- chelle barométrique de la règle a, pour cette raison, des divisions doubles de celles du barométre méme, et la lecture se fait avec une grande facilité. Je passe maintenant à la description du mécanisme qui fait mouvoir les électro-aimants de la maniére signalée plus haut. Les électro-aimants 1, 2 et 3 sont suspendus au moyen de cordes à boyau et de contre-poids, chacun au-dessus de lune des trois roues «,, a, a, (ff. I et III). Chaque roue a son tourillon spécial. Les tourillons sont forés pour laisser passer larbre 6, auquel ils peuvent étre embrayés au moyen des trois roues à manchon c, c, c. Deux de celles-ci sont tou- jours désembrayées, tandis que la troisième est embrayée, et des roues a,, a, a, deux sont par conséquent toujours dégagées de l'arbre 5, et la troisième entraînée par lui, dans quelque direction que son mouvement ait lieu; dès que lune des roues a,, @,, a,, se meut, son électro-aimant est forcé de se mouvoir avec elle. C'est done, on le voit, par la rotation de cet arbre, que sont produits les mouvements des électro-aimants signalés ci-dessus. Le dit arbre est à son tour mis en rotation par les deux rouages B et C (fig. I), desquels le premier est toujours embrayé à l'arbre, mais le second seulement quand il est en mouvement. La roue à manchon d sert à embrayer et à désembrayer ce rouage. Les deux rouages sont munis d'enrayoir à leur aile. Le premier ou B transmet au fil d'acier le mouvement de descente, et le second, C, le mouvement opposé. A la régulation des mouvements de ces rouages servent le levier ho- rizontal f, mobile autour d'un axe vertical g, et un électro-aimant, placé au-dessus de B et désigné par e sur la fig. I. Le fil conducteur de cet électro-aimant participe toujours au conduit électrique dés que le courant est établi. Entre les observations, le levier est, au moyen d'une petite agrafe i (fig. ID, croché au bord du cadran, et il est mis en liberté par laiguille des minutes. Cette aiguille ayant 6 bras équidistants l'un de l'autre (l'appareil de Copenhague en a 4), cela a lieu toutes les 10 minutes. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 2 10 A-G. THEORELL, Un ressort met alors en mouvement le levier f, qui saisit l'enrayoir du rouage D et l'accroche à l'armature de l'électro-aimant e. Le rouage 5 entre donc en mouvement et il doit se mouvoir aussi longtemps que larmature conserve sa position. La roue à manchon c, est alors embrayée et l'élec- tro-aimant 1 doit done prendre part au mouvement de ce rouage, de méme que le fil d'acier du baromètre. Ainsi que nous l'avons vu, le courant électrique s'établit dès que ce fil atteint le mercure, et comme le fil con- ducteur de l'électro-aimant e se trouve aussi dans le conduit, cet aimant se magnétise et attire son armature, ce qui améne, comme nous lavons vu, l'arrêt du rouage B. En méme temps, l'électro-aimant 1 imprime sa marque (les électro-aimants 2 et 3 étant en repos) et l'observation baromé- trique est faite. Comme l'on peut admettre que l'aile du rouage ne fait qu'une demi- révolution du moment où le courant a été établi, et comme il en fait 10,000, chaque fois que la premiére roue, et, avec elle, la roue a, faisant mouvoir l’eleetro-aimant en fait une; comme en outre, cette dernière roue présente un diamètre de 70"" à peine, le mouvement de l'électro-aimant, dés que le courant a été établi, ne peut guére étre de plus de 0,01""; enfin, comme, d'après ce qui a été dit plus haut, la vitesse du fil d'acier ne comporte que le quart de celle de l'électro-aimant, il suit de tout cela que le mouvement du fil d'acier peut étre censé s'arréter au moment méme de l'établissement du contact. Toutefois lenrayoir du rouage est muni d'une disposition spéciale amenant linterruption du courant dés que l'armature est attirée par l'aimant. Avec lenrayoir se meut un petit balancier auquel est fixé un fil d'acier, qui, lorsque lenrayoir vient s'acerocher à l'armature, plonge dans un godet contenant du mercure, placé à côté du rouage B. (Ce petit mécanisme se voit le mieux dans la fig. II, où le godet est désigné par r) Tant ce fil d'aeier que le mercure constituent des parties du conduit électrique. Quand l'enrayoir reprend sa position, le fil d'acier resort du mercure, et le courant doit done nécessairement s'interrompre aussitót que l'armature est attirée par l'aimant. Mais outre l'arrét du rouage B et Vinterruption du courant, l'attrac- tion de l'armature par l'aimant e a encore un autre effet. L'armature qui se trouve, par un fil de métal (voir fig. I), en relation avec l'enrayoir du rouage C, le dégage à la même occasion. Cet enrayoir s'accrochant alors à une petite languette verticale, le rouage C entre en mouvement et se meut aussi longtemps que la languette conserve sa position. Nous avons dit précédemment que ce rouage produit la rotation de l'arbre 4 dans la direction opposée. Mais il doit être à cet effet embrayé METEOROGRAPHE ENREGISTREUR. 11 à larbre, pour en être désembrayé dès que son mouvement cesse. Le rouage C exécute lui-même cette double opération, sur quoi il s'arrête aussi de lui-même. Préalablement, toutefois, il a mis le rouage B en mouvement, après avoir modifié la position des roues à manchon ¢,, c, et c,, de telle sorte que c, est embrayée et c désembrayée, et que, par conséquent, c'est l'électro-aimant 2 qui prend part cette fois au mouvement du rouage B. Tous ces déplacements sont produits par deux des arbres du rouage C, dont l'un fait un tour entier et l'autre un tiers de tour à chaque fois que le rouage est en mouvement. Au premier arbre, lequel, de même que le second, dépasse la platine du rouage, est fixé un petit croc, auquel, aussi souvent que le rouage est en repos, est accrochée la roue à manchon d, au moyen du levier £ (fig. D. Dès que le rouage entre en mouvement et que le eroe s'est tourné d'un angle trés-minime, cette roue à manchon s'embraye, et l'arbre à prend part au mouvement du rouage. Le second des arbres susdits du rouage C porte une roue, x, munie de trois pointes horizontales. Cette roue se trouve de méme en dehors de la platine du rouage. Pendant le mouvement du rouage, l'une des pointes en vient saisir une autre vertieale, plaeée à l'extrémité du levier f mentionné plus haut, et lentraine avec elle jusqu à ce que les deux pointes se sont làchées. Le levier, une fois dégagé, est mis en mouvement par son ressort tout comme lorsqu'il fut décroché par l'aiguille des minutes. A ce mouvement, il saisit la languette à laquelle était croché lenrayoir du rouage C. La languette lâche lenrayoir et le rouage s'arrête. Avant que cela n'ait lieu, cependant, le croc du premier arbre a fait sa révolution et relevé de nouveau la roue à man- chon d, et de méme, en engrenant daus une roue dentelée placée à l'ex- trémité de l'arbre horizontal «, il a fait faire à celle-ci un 15*" de tour, suffisant pour que trois roues, v,, v,, v, fixées à l'arbre et servant à régler les roues à manchon c, c, c, désembrayent la roue « et embrayent c. Mais leffet du mouvement du levier f ne se borne pas à arréter le rouage C, car, de la méme maniére que lorsque ce levier fut décroché par l'aiguille des minutes, il dégage aussi maintenant le rouage B. Tout est de nouveau dans le méme état que la première fois où le rouage B fut mis en activité, à la seule différence prés que c'est maintenant lélectro-aimant 2 qui prend part au mouvement, et avec lui le fil d'acier de l'un des ther- momètres; il leur est alors communiqué exactement les mêmes mouvements que ceux imprimés précédemment à l'électro-aimant 1 et au fil d'acier du barométre. Dés que la méme chose s'est répétée aussi avec l'électro-aimant 3 et le fil d'acier du second thermomètre, l'appareil s'arréte, par suite de ce que 12 A.-G. THEORELL, celle des pointes de la roue x alors agissante, étant située plus au bord que les autres, écarte le levier f à une distance suffisante, pour que le pe- tit crochet 2 soit raccroché au bord du cadran, et tout se trouve alors dans le méme état qu'avant que ce crochet ne fût dégagé par l'aiguille. Dix minutes après, naturellement, les mêmes mouvements se répètent. Comme l'horloge n'a pas d'autre fonction que de tourner le cylindre et de dégager le crochet du levier f, on comprendra que tout ce qui est nécessaire pour obtenir un nombre différent d'observations par heure, con- siste en une aiguille des minutes avec un nombre différent de bras. Toute- fois, il doit y en avoir au moins deux, pour que lon n'ait pas besoin de changer autre chose dans la construction. L'appareil est au reste muni d'un mécanisme qui, deux minutes avant chaque observation, communique un léger choc au barométre, à l'effet de prévenir des erreurs résultant de l'adhésion du mercure au verre. On voit ce mécanisme ff. II et IV. L'appareil d'Upsal différe dans les points suivants de celui qui vient d'être décrit. Des qu'il n'est pas en mouvement, le rouage B est, de méme que C, désembrayé de l'arbre 6. Cela s'opére au moyen des roues à man- chon d,, combinées avec d de maniére à s'engrener quand ces derniéres se desengrenent et vice versa. L'appareil est muni d'un relais, de sorte que le courant établi par le mercure du thermomètre ou du baromètre, ne sert pas à faire mouvoir l'appareil de la maniére signalée plus haut, mais seulement à établir le courant qui opére cette fonction. Le but est de ré- duire à un minimum l'action que le courant pourrait exercer sur le mercure des instruments. Il a été constaté que, malgré les précautions prises pour empé- cher la formation d'étincelles, il est arrivé qu'il s'en est formé dans l'appareil de Copenhague, par suite, à coup sür, d'une oscillation quelconque du fil d'acier ou du niveau du mercure. L'intensité du courant est, par ce moyen, réduite dans l'appareil d'Upsal à environ un quarantiéme. Cette modifi- cation peut done être considérée comme écartant totalement le danger de l'action oxidante du courant sur le mercure. En outre, comme je l'ai déjà signalé plus haut, les thermométres se trouvent à une plus grande distance du mur. La construction par laquelle ce résultat a été effectué, est donnée dans la fig. ci-contre, à Y,, de la grandeur naturelle. Z7 est le pied de l'appareil, A, le cylindre sur le- quel est tendu le papier, et D, l'armoire de zine avec les thermométres. La communication entre les fils d'acier qui descendent dans les ther- METEOROGRAPHE ENREGISTREUR. 13 momètres et les électro-aimants correspondants est principalement produite de la même manière que dans l'appareil de Copenhague. Nous retrouvons 7 ici les deux leviers m et n, de la méme longueur que 1a. L’augmentation de la distan- ce est produite par de longs arbres horizontaux p et q, reposant dans des coussinets en c et en b. Il est clair qu'une modification dans la longueur de ces axes par suite des va- riations de la température, ne peut influer ni sur la position de l'éleetro-aimant, ni sur celle du fil d'acier. Afin de pouvoir, dans cette construction eom- me dans l'autre, fermer l'ar- moire de zinc de toute com- munication avec l'air exté- rieur, ce que je considére indispensable, les deux axes sont enfermés dans un tube hermétique Æ, réuni en a avec l’armoire, et muré dans la paroi en Æ Les arbres reposent dans des coussinets hermétiques en 5, à l'extré- mité de ce tube. Les autres coussinets sont en c. Cette construction est no- tablement plus compliquée et plus couteuse que l'autre, et elle a entrainé des difficultés trésgrandes dans le montage et l'installation. Elle fonction- ne toutefois d'une manie- re parfaitement satisfaisante , comme le montrent les com- paraisons ci-dessous. 14 A.-G. THEORELL, Dans les appareils enregistreurs de ce genre que je pourrai encore être appelé à construire, j'ai l'intention de faire subir à la construction des modifications assez considérables portant sur leur simplification et la réduc- tion de leur prix. Elles ne concerneront toutefois pas les parties dont dépend principalement l'exactitude des observations, et elles sont en outre telles que leurs résultats peuvent étre parfaitement calculés d'avance. Elles consis- teront surtout dans l'emploi d'un seul rouage au lieu de deux, rouage qui devra en outre opérer une partie de la fonction de l'horloge, savoir la ro- tation du cylindre, et, en général, dans la réduction du nombre des par- ties agissantes, en faisant faire à quelques-unes des parties décrites ci-des- sus, les fonctions d'autres parties, enfin dans une modification qui per- mettra, sans emploi de relais, à en avoir l'avantage. Pour ce qui concerne le prix de ces appareils, il m'est impossible de l'indiquer d'une manière précise, la construction en devant ¢tre modifiée en trés-grande partie. Dans le cas où l’on désirerait, pour l'installation des thermomètres, le méme arrangement qu'à lappareil de Copenhague j'ai toutefois l'espérance quil n'excedera pas 3000 francs, l'emballage et le transport non compris. COMPARAISONS. Afin que le lecteur puisse se faire une juste idée de l'exactitude dont est capable linstrument que je viens de décrire, je donne ici le tableau suivant, que je dois à l'obligeance de M. RUBENSON, lequel a bien voulu le faire précéder d'une note sur les principes suivis par lui pour l'établisse- ment des comparaisons y contenues. La question de savoir si l'exactitude constatée au moyen de ces comparaisons continuera à se maintenir, dé- pend entièrement, dans cette construction, de la possibilité de tenir le mercure en état de pureté. Comme on l'a vu, des précautions spéciales ont été prises à cet égard, en prévenant, par l'emploi de relais, la formation d’etincelles dans le mereure des instruments, et en tenant les thermométres enchássés dans une armoire hermétique qui, tout en éloignant la poussiére, les entoure d'une atmosphère privée d'humidité et d'acide carbonique. "Pour apprécier la valeur de l'instrument quant à la précision des ob- servations, il a fallu établir une méthode d'observations doubles, laquelle a été pratiquée dés le commencement du mois d'aoüt de cette année, époque où l'appareil, complétement installé, commença à fonctionner”. METEOROGRAPHE ENREGISTREUR. 15 "En effet, les valeurs absolues des points marqués sur le cylin- dre, se déterminant par des observations directes du barométre et des thermométres qui font partie de l'appareil, nous avons répété ces obser- vations plusieurs fois par jour, pour obtenir des valeurs absolues plus exactes, ainsi que pour nous assurer de l'invariabilité parfaite de Finstru- ment pendant vingt-quatre heures, vu que les variations survenues dans le mécanisme de l'appareil pendant ce court espace de temps, sont les seules qui puissent exercer une influence facheuse sur les nombres obtenus. On trouve ces "observations directes” dans le tableau à côté des nombres qui représentent les indieations de l'enregistreur. Les écarts qu'on a également insérés dans ce tableau étant les différences entre les valeurs des points mesurés sur le cylindre et les valeurs directement observées, ils doivent contenir toutes les erreurs d'observation, et on ne saurait en induire une modifieation du travail de l'appareil, à moins que ces écarts ne surpassent en valeur les erreurs d'observation probables". "De l'autre côté, pour qu'un appareil enregistreur soit capable de remplacer un observateur personnel, il faut que les instruments qui en con- stituent la partie essentielle, à savoir, dans ce cas, le barométre et les deux thermométres, s'accordent dans leurs indications avec les instruments d'une construction approuvée et généralement adoptée: ou, en d'autres termes, il faut qu'ils suivent avec promptitude les variations qui se présentent dans l'état atmos- phérique. Il a été nécessaire de se rassurer sur ce point, surtout pour les thermométres, puisque, la construction nécessitant des boules thermométriques d'un volume considérable, il en aurait pu résulter une lenteur facheuse dans leur marche et conséquemment des erreurs notables dans les indications de Yenregistreur. Pour étudier l'appareil sous ce rapport, on fait la lecture, plusieurs fois par jour, d'un "barométre de comparaison" placé dans la méme chambre et à la méme hauteur que celui de l'appareil et des deux thermo- mètres (N:o 4 et N:o 1) placés à côté des thermométres enregistreurs". "La correction qui doit étre appliquée aux nombres donnés par le barométre enregistreur, pour en réduire les indications à zéro, étant la méme que celle employée pour un barométre ordinaire, les comparaisons communiquées dans le tableau se rapportent à des valeurs obtenues immé- diatement par l'observation sans aucun calcul. Pour le barométre de com- paraison, il a été, par conséquent, nécessaire de faire subir aux nombres observés une légére correction se rapportant à la différence de tempé- rature des deux barométres en question”. 16 A-G. THEORELL, RE 1868 | : \ Conse BAROMÈTRES. THERMOMETRES SECS. | THERMOM. MOUILLÉS. a © a © ARS Ss PR es x |s2| 8 23 BE DL as PREP) y zus + Sa OF oso E QD = = =. SA E SE RES ale NE SEE SA AE UMS i ; 1. 10°20” |753.85 753.85) 0.0 13.7 13.75 |—0.05)13.7 0.0 | 1145/1145 0.0 11.4 |+0.05 2.10 | 52.2 | 522! 0.0 14.8 (14.85 |—0.05 14.85 |—0.05) 11.55 11.5 |+0.05 11.5 |4+-0.05 9.10 | 46.3 46.35 —0.05, 11.95 11.9 |4-0.05 11.75 |-+0.2 | 10.95 10.85 |4-0.1 110.85 |+0.1 9. 10. O | 47.25 47.15 +0.1 |746.95 +0.3 | 8.9 | 8.95 |—0.05, 8.9 0.0 | 7.9 | 7.85 |440.05 7.85 |+-0.05 10.20 747.2 747.3 —04 8.55! 8.55 | 0.0} 8.6 |—O.o5| 7.65 7.65 | 0.0 | 7.6 |+-0.05 9.10 | 49.4 | 494 | 0.0 8.7 | 8.75 |—0.05 8.75 —0.05 8.05 8.0 [-+0.05 8.0 |+-0.05 9.10 | 544 | 544 | 0.0 10.55 10.5 |+0.0510.5 |--0.05| 8.2 | 82 00 | 8.25 |—0.05 3. 10. 0 | 60.75 60.75 0.0 1760.65 +-0.1 | 11.0 11.0 0.0 (11.05 |—0.05| 7.4 | 7.3 |+0.1 | 7.35 |+-0.05 10.50 |761.2 761.05 +-0.15 11.6 |1L.55 |4-0.05 11.6 | Oo! 7.55 7.5 |+0.05| 7.5 |+-0.05 2.10 | 61.55 61.55 0.0 14.1 (141 | 0.0 114.05 |4-0.05) 8.8 | 8.85 |—0.05| 8.75 |4-0.05 9.10 | 61.6 | 61.65 —0.05 6.7 | 6.75 |—0.05, 6.7 | Oo! 5.25, 5.25 | 0.0 | 5.25 | 0.0 4, 10. 0 | 60.65 60.6 +-0.05 760.55 +01 | 13.85 13.8 |+-0.05 13.85 | 0.0 | 9.75 9.7 |+0.05| 9.25 | 0.0 | 10.90 |760.65 760.7 |—0.05 14.35 14.35 | 0.0 |14.3 +-0.05| 9.9 | 9.9 0.0 | 9.85 |-1-0 05 2.10 | 60.8 | 60.8} 0.0 16.6 |16.6 0.0 116.55 |-4-0.05| 10.85 10.85 | 0.0 110.7 |+-0.15 9.10 | 62.25 62.2 | +005! 8.7 | 8.7 | Oo! 8.65 [+005] 6.95! 7.05 |—O.1 | 7.05 01 5. 10. O | 645 | 64.5 | 0.0 7645 | 0.0 | 15.3 [15.25 |-I-0.05 15.4 —0.1| 11.55 11.55 | 0.0 |11.5 |-+0.05 10.90 17646 764.6 | 0.0 15.55 15.55 | 0.0 15.5 |-+0.05| 11.35 11.3 | |4-0.05 11.3 |+0.05 2.10 | 64.8 | 64.8 | 0.0 20.85 20.85 | 0.0 [21.0 =e 14.7 14.65 |--0.05 14.6 |+0.1 9.10 | 65.4 | 65.4 | 0.0 14.45 144 |+0.05 14.5 |—0.05|.12.45 12.45 | 0.0 112.3 [+0.15 6. 10. 0 | 66.5 | 66.5 | 0.0 [766.4 |4-0.1 | 20.1 120.1 0.0 (20.15 |—0.05| 16.05 16.05 | 0.0 116.05 | 0.0 10. 30 |766.8 766.8 0.0 20.15 20.15 | 0.0 120.15 | 0,0 | 16.0 16.0 0.0 |16.0 0.0 2.10 | 67.45 6745 0.0 91.4 91.5 |—0.05 21.5 |—0.1 | 16.05 16.05 | 0.0 16.0 |+0.05 9.10 | 69.0 | 68.8 +02 13.35 13.35 | 0.0 13.4 |—0.05| 10.8 110.85 |— 0.05 10.8 0.0 1.10. 0 | 68.3 | 68.4 —0.1 768.3 | 0.0 | 20.1 120.1 0.0 120.1 0.0 | 16.55 16.55 | 0.0 16.45 | +0 10.30 [768.3 768.2 +01 21152135 | 0.0 211 +0,05) 17.1 [17.1 | Oo 170 +01 2.10 | 67.15 67.2 |—0.05) 23.8 123.85 |—0.05 24.15 —0.35| 18.4 |18.4 0.0 |18.35 |+-0.05 9.10 | 65.3 | 65.4 |—0.1 17.4 |17.4 0.0 117.5 |—0.1| 15.4 [15.45 |—0.05 15.5 | —0.1 8. 10. 0 | 62.0 | 62.05 —0.05 761.85 -1-0-15| 20.65 20.65 | 0.0 20.7 |—0.05| 10.35 16.35 | 0.0 116.35 0.0 10.30 761.7 |761.7 | 0.0 21.65 21.65 | 0.0 21.7 |—0.o5, 15.95 15.95 | 0.0 |16.0 |—0.05 2.10 | 59.5 | 59.5 | 0.0 24.6 124.6 0.0 248 |—0.2 | 16.15 1615 | 0.0 116.1 |+-0.05 9.10 | 59.2 | 59.4 [+01 11.6 (11.55 |-4-0.05 11.6 0.0 | 10.5 (10,45 |-+0.05 10.45 |+-0.05 9. 10.50 768.5 768.45 +-0.05| 13.1 113.1 0.0 13.2 |—O.1 || 8.45! 8.45 | 0.0 | 8.35 [01 2. 0 | 69.55 69.6 |—0.05 769.55! 0.0 | 15.8 | 15.8 0.0 115.9 |—0.1 | 10.05 10.05 | 0.0 10.0 |+-0:05 9.10 | 71.05! 7115 —01 Vs 7.55 | Oo 7.55 | Oo! 5.35) 5.45 |—0a | 545 |—01 10. 10. O | 716 | 71.6 | 0.0 |771.55 -+0.05| 14.25 143 |—0.05 14,35 |—0.1 | 9.6 | 9.55 [+005 9.4 |-+0.2 10.30 1771.55 771.55 0.0 15.5 15.55 |—0.05 15.7 |—0.2 | 10.35 10.35 | 0.0 110.2 [+015 9. 0 | 70.25 70.35 —0.1 |770.3 |—0.05| 17.2 17.25 |—0.05 17.25 |—0.05 10.7 |10.7 0.0 110.55 |--0.15 9.10 | 67.4 | 61.6 —0.2 8.35, 8.35 | 0.0} 8.25 |4+0.1|| 6.1} 6.15 |—0.05| 6.05 |+-0.05 11. 10. 0 | 63.4 | 63.45 —0.05 763.4 | 0.0 | 15.0 |14.95 |-10.05 15.05 |—0.05| 15 11.5 0.0 114 |+0:1 19. 0 |762.6 762.6 | 0.0 16.4 16.4 0.0 116.5 |—0.1 | 11.7 11.65 |-+0.05 11.65 |+-0.05 2. 0 | 62.0 | 62.9 | 0.0 [762.0 | 0.0] 17.25 17.3 |—0.05) „ olere Oo} x 9.10 | 60.6 | 60.6 | 0.0 8.55 8.55 0.0 | 8.6 I—0.05| 6.65| 6.65 | 0.0 | 6.6 |+0.05 12. 10. 0 | 56.55! 56.5 |4-0.05/756.45 40.1 || 12.35 12.35 | 0.0 (12.45 |—0.1 || 10.85.10.s5 | 0.0 |10.85 | 0.0 MÉTÉOROGRAPHE ENREGISTREUR. 0 — ——— ——À —— UC (€ nn €———— — 1868 B ee T xi " SERE AROMETRES. HERMOMETRES SECS. | THERMOM. MOUILLÉS. "Ex auo a =| aS an] ao | D H | ok 38 of DISEASE cs es )£2 él 5) 7) 2 NN e © 2|8% ze|e5 = = DNS le Re, © POS ee PE m | 12. 10 30 | 756.35 756.4 "m 12.65 12.75 ——0.1 12.85 —0.2| 11.25 11.3 re 0.0 2. 0 | 55.03; 55.1 |—O.1 [755.0 | 0.0 | 12.9 12.9 0.0 112.95 —0.05| 12.2 |12.2 0.0 112.2 0.0 9.10 | 53.15 53.15) 0.0 10.8 10,75 —-4-0.05 10.8 0.0 10.35 10.3 +0.05110.4 |—0.05 13. 10. 0 | 52.25 52.25 0.0 |752.3 |—0.05| 13.75 13.75 | 0.0 13.25 | 0.0| 12.75 12.7 40.012,75 | Oo 10.40 |752.6 752.6 | 0.9 13.7 137 | 0.0 13.6 +01| 125 125 | 0.0 [12.55 |—0.05 2. 0 | 53.5 | 53.55 —0.05 753.45 +-0.05| 13.45 13.5 '—0.05'13.45 | 0.0 | 12.8 |12.85 |—0.05112.8 0.0 9. 10 | 55.05 55.1 |—0.05 7.5 | Ta +01| 7.35 -+-0.15] 7.2 | 7.25 —0.0| 7.2 0.0 14. 10. 0 | 56.6 | 56.6 | 0.0 1756.55 40:05] 9.25 9.25 | 0.0 | 9.35 —01| 8.65) 8.65 | 0.0 | 8.7 —0.o5 10.30 17565 756.5 | 0.0 10.5 10.5 0.0 10.65 —0.15| 9.2 | 9.15 +0.05| 9.2 0.0 2. 0 | 56.5 | 56.5 | 0.0 756.5 | 0.0 | 14.2514.2 +0.05 14.3 —0.05| 10.7 10.65 |4-0.05/10.6 |+0.1 9.10 | 56.65 56.7 —0.05 6.95) 6.95 | 0.0 | 7.05 —01| 6.4 | 6.45 '—0.05] 6.45 '—0.05 15. 10. 0 | 51.0 | 5l.o| 0.0 11.5 11.5 |+0.05 11.8 '+0.0| 11.4 11.4 0.0 111.4 0.0 10.40 [750.7 750.7 | 0.0 11.9 11.9 0.0 11.9 0.0 | 11.5 111.5 0.0 [11.55 |—0.05 2. 0 | 49.95 49.8 '4-0.05 749.6 +0.95| 11.75 11.75 | 0.0 11.25 | 0.0 | 11.3 11.3 0.» 111.3 0.0 9.10 | 52.8 | 52.8] 0.0 9.8 | 98 | Oo! 9.85 0.05] 9.6 | 9.65 —0.05| 9.65 |—0.05 16. 10. 0 | 53.25 53.15 40.1 753.05 +0. | 114 111.4 | Oo 114 | 0.0 | 1085 10.55 | 0. 110.35 | 0.0 10.30 [753.2 7532| 0.0 12.1 12.05 p0.05 12.15 —0.o5| 11.25 11.25 | 0.0 (11.25 | 0.0 2. 0 | 53.55 53.55 0.0 [753.4 +0.15| 16.45 16.45 | 0.0 16.5 —0.05| 12.65 12.65 | 0. 112.6 [+0,05 9.10 | 54.9 | 54.95 —0.05 9.65] 9.75 |_O1 | 9.75 —0.1| 9.0 | 9.05 |—0.05| 9.05 |—0.05 17. 10. 0 | 55.65 55.6 -+0.05 755.5 +0.15| 12.8512.85 | 0.0 12.9 |—0.05| 11.9 11.9 | Oo 111.9 0.0 10.20 |755.7 755.7 | 0.0 13.0 113.0 0.0 13.0 0.0 | 11.95'11.95 | 0.» 12,0 |— 0.05 2. 0 | 56.6 | 56.6 | 0.0 |756.45 40.15) 14.2 |14.9 0.0 14.05 +0.15| 11.8 11.85 — 0.05 11.8 0.0 6.40 | 57.6 | 57.5 +0.1 |757.35 0.25) 11.75 11.75 | 0.0 11.85 |—0.1 | 11.0 11.0 0.0 |11.05 |—0.05 18. 10. 0 | 59.85 59.8 -+0.05 759. 0.25) 13.4 1345 |—0.05 13.4 | Ov | 123 121 | 0.0 112.15 |—0.05 10.50 |760.0 760.0! 0.0 145 14.5 | Oo 145 | Oo! 12.65 12.65 | 0.0 12.5 | 0.0 2. 0 | 59.95 59.9 40.05 759.7 +025) 13.35 13.4 | 0.5 13.4 |—0.05) 12.25 12.25 | 0.0 [12.25 | 0.0 9,10 | 610 | 61.0 | 0.0 10.35 10.95 | 0.0 10.55 | O0! 1015101 |+0.05102 |—0.0s 19. 10. 0 | 63.1 | 63.1 | 0.0 762.9 +0.2 | 10.8 110.75 [40.05 10.75 |--0.05| 9.9 | 9.9 | On! 99 | 0.0 10.30 |763.3 |763.25 +-0.05 10.7 107 | Oo 107 | Oo| 9.9. | 00/96 | 0.0 2. 0 | 63.5 63.6 +015 7634 40.35) 1125113 — 0.05 11.35 —01| 9.7| 9.7 | On! 97 | 0.0 9.10 | 65.05 65.1 —0.05 on 97 0.0 9.75 |—0.1| 8.85! 8.85 | On | 8.85 | 0.0 20. 8. 0 | 65.3 | 65.4 —0.1 1765.25 +0.05) 9.55 9.55 | 0.0 | 9.6 |—0.05] 7.9 | 7.9 0.0 | 7.95 |—0.05 10. 40 |765. 765.8 | 0.0 13.1 1131 | 0.0 1345 |—0.05] 10.0 10.0 | 0. [10.0 | 0.0 2. 0 | 65.0 | 65.0 | 0.0 764.85 +015) 16.1 16.1 | 0.0 16.15 |—0.05] 12.0 120 | O. 12» | 0. 9.10 | 63.85, 63.9 —0.05 8.2 | 8.2 | Oo! 8.25 |—0.05| 7.6 | 7.65 |—0.05] 7.65 |— 0.05 21. 10. 0 | 63.25 63.3 —0.05 763.2 +0.05| 10.15 10:1 |-4-0.0510.15 | Oo! 88] 8s | 00188 | 0.0 10.20 |763.4 |763.4| 0.0 10.75 10.7 |--0.05 10.7 |+0:05| 9.1 | 9.4 0.0 | 9a 0.0 2. 0 | 63.0 63.0 | 0.0 |762.9 +-0.1 | 15.2 115.2 0.9 15.15 |+-0.05| 11.3 11.3 0.» 11.2 |-r0.1 9.10 | 63.55 63.6 —0.05 D.55| 5.55 | 0.0, 5.6 |—0.05| 5.0 | 5.05 |—0.05| 5.15 |—0.15 22. 10. O | 66.4 | 66.45 —0.05 766.45 —0.05| 11.1511.1 |+0.0511.3 |—0.15] 8.2 | 8.2 0.0 | 8.3 |—0.1 | | 10.20 1766.7 766.71 0.0 11.05 11.05 | 0.0 10.9 [+015] 8.05 | 8.05 | 0.0 | 8.0 [-+0.05 2. 0 | 67.8 | 67.8| 0.0 767.7 +01 | 11.6 [11.6 0.0 11.85 |—0.25| 7.75 | 7.7 |+-0.05, 7.8 |—0.05| Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 3 18 A-G. THEORELL, MÉTÉOROGRAPHE ENREGISTREUR. 1868 SENS BAROMETRES. THERMOMETRES SECS. THERMOM. MOUILLES. | Poles TN (esl eS! er] aS oF [ceed] get) 2 ee gs ss) ig = 5 AS FES lsulaal Pi |B SE Re 22, 910" | 684 | 68.2 |4-0.2 3.85 3.9 |—0.05 3.85 | 0.0 | 3.05 | 3.05 | Om | 31 |—0.05 93. 10. 0 | 65.4 | 65.4 | 0.0 1765.35 HO | 9.75 9.75 | 0.0 | 9.75 0.0 | 7.65 | 7.65 | O0 | 7.65 | 0.0 10.30 765.1 7651] 0. 10.35 10.35 | 0.0 10.35 | O0! 7.95 | 7.95 | On| 7.95 09 | 2.10 | 62.9 | 62.9 | 0.0 12.45 12.45 | 0.0 12.4 |+0.05| 7.95 | 8.0 —0.05 7.95 0.9 9.10 | 58.3 | 58.3 | Oo 5.9 | 5.85 |2-0.05 5.8 |+-0.1 | 5.05 | 5.05 | 0.0 | 5.1 |—0.05 94. 10. 0 | 46.25 46.1 |-4-0.15 745.85 40.4 | 10.05 10.0 |-1-0.05 10.0 |+0.05| 9.8 | 9.8 0.0 | 9.85 |—0.05 10.30 745.7 745.6 |--0.1 10.35 10.4 |—0.05 10.35 0.0 10.15 |10.1 |+-0:05 10.15 0.9 2. 0 | 43.0 | 43.0 | 0.0 1742.38 |+0.2 1 11.8 118 0.0 11.8 0.0 11.65 11.65 | 0.» 111.65 | Oo 10.50 | 39.6 | 39.65 —0.05 10.75 10.65 |+-0:1 110.75 0.0 10.5 |10.45 |+0.05 10.5 0.0 95. 10. 0 | 4435 44.2 |—0.05 744.1 |+-0.05] 6.55 6.55 | 0.0 | 6.5 |-+0.05| 5.95 | 5.95 | 0.0 | 6.0 |—0.05 10.90 |744.45 744.45 0.0 6.5 | 6.5 0.0 | 6.45 |-+0.05| 5.95 | 6.0 —0.05 6.05 |—0.1 9. 0 | 473 | 47.2 |+0.1 |747.05 40.95) 6.5 | 6.55 | —0.05| 6.5 0,0 | 5.75 | 5.75 | O.0 | 5.8 |—0.o5 9.10 | 51.8 | 51.75 4-0.05 5.6 | 5.6 0.0 | 5.6 0.0 | 5.1 | 5.05 +0.05 5.1 0, 26. 10. 0 | 55.6 | 55.55 -4-0.05 755.5 +0.1 | 6.2 | 6.15 |+4-0.05| 6.2 0.0 | 5.3 | 53 0.0 | 5.35 |—0.05 10.30 |755.65 755.6 |+-0.05 6.65] 6.65 | 0.0 | 6.7 |—0.05| 5.65 | 5.65 | 0.0 | 5.65 | 0.0 9. 0 | 55.95 56.0 |—0.05 755.8 |-I-0.15| 7.3 | 7.3 0.0 | 7.25 |--0.05 5.85 | 5.85 | 0.0 | 5.85 | 0.0 9.10 | 56.55 56.6 |—0.o5 4. | 405 |--0.05| 4.0 |-1-0.1 | 3.8 | 3.75 |-41-0,05, 3.8 0.9 97. 10. 0 | 59.5 | 59.5 | 0.0 |759.4 |4-0.1 | 5.95} 5.95 | 0.0 | 6.0 |—0.05| 42 | 4.15 |-i-0.05| 4.25 |—0 05 10.50 |759.8 (759.8 | 0.0 6.5 6.75 | 0.0 | 6.8 |—0.05 4.5 5 0.0 | 46 |—O.1 2. 0 | 59.8 | 59.85 —0.05 (59.75 4-0.05| 8.05] 81 |—0.05| 8.1 |—0.05 5.3 | 5.3 0.0 | 5.35 |— 0.05 9.10 | 59.35, 59.4 |—0.05 1.5| Le |—0.05| 1.55 | 0.0 | 1.05 | 1.05 | O.0 | 1.2 |—O.15 98. 10. 0 | 54.0 | 540 | 0.0 [753.9 |+0.1 | 77.0 | 6.95 +0,05) 7.0 0.0 | 5.3 | 5.35 |—0.05| 5.35 |—0.05 10.30 |753.7 753.7 | 0.0 7.6 | 76 0.0 | 7.65 |—0.05| 6.0 | 6.0 0.0 | 6.0 0.0 9. 0 | 52.5 | 52.5 | 0.0 |752.3 |+-0.2 | 8.9 | 8.95 |—0.o5| 8.95 |—0.05| 7.2 | 7.2 0.9 | 7.25 |—0.05; 9.10 | 51.65) 51.6 |+-0.05 6.65] 6.6 |-0.05| 6.65 | Oo! 6.2 | 6.15 |--0.05| 6.2 0.0 99. 10. 0 | 48.6 | 48.6 | 0.0 [748.4 |+0.2 | 12:55112.6 |—0.05,12.6 |—0.0511.5 [11.5 | 0.0 111.5 0.0 10.30 |748.8 |748.75|+-0.05 13.75|13.75 | 0.9 [13.7 |-r0.0512.05 |12.05 | 0.0 12.0 |+0.05 2. 0 | 483 | 483 | 0.0 |748.15/ 40.15) 14.5 14.55. |—0,.05'14.45 |+-0.05]/12.5 |12.5 | 0.0 |12.6 |—04 | 9.10 | 46.6 | 46.6 | 0.0 12.4 [12.4 0.0 11235 |+0.05111.8 [11.7 |+4+01 [118 0.9 30. 10. 0 | 444 | 444 | 0.0 744.2 [102 | 13.9 |13.9 0.0 |13.9 0.0 12.25 112.25 | O.0 112.25 | 0.» 10.30 |744.5 [7446 | O1 144 |144 0.0 144 0.0 112.15 112.45 | 0.0 1245 | 0. 2. 0 | 443 | 443 | 0.0 [7441 |+0.2 | 15.0 |15.0 0.0 114.95 |+-0.05112.8 |12.85 |—0.05|12.85 |—0.05 9.10 | 443 | 443 | 0.0 10.8 10.8 0.0 10.75 |+-0.0510.05 |10.05 | 0.0 110.05 | On 1. 10. 0 | 48.55 48.5 |-+0.05 748.3 [+025] 0.8 | 0.8 0.0 | 0.8 0.0 | 0.6 | 0.5 |+0.1 | 0.6 0.0 Soe. Se. Ups. I Ser. Theorell. Meteoro$raphe enreeistreur. PLI. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Se. Ups. Ill Ser. ONE EAE TCE A i" yu THECA 2 0. m EL ALES | yh ahaa | IDÓRTTIW. sanbase mra y^ TS i MD | NILE RATAR Känga Vt dv. teal N 1 l i i LU "n WEIT ^ Mr. E ha À 1 2 a ü ou T: ü P & ri 1 , , aS m | (Pisin col ralis E cedido edit le May Voaritshel yas Ld VT vac Li ANTECKNINGAR SKANDINAVIENS DESMIDIACEER AF VEIT BRECHER WITTROCK, Docent vip UPSALA UNIVERSITET. MED EN TAFLA. (Inlemnad till K. Wetenskaps Societeten i Upsala d. 14 Nov. 1868). UPSALA, W. SCHULTZ BOKTRYCKERI. 1869. ni? i! ini a À i IT TT, "huy AT da Knie “OIE Wed MR ron ir tht DALE UAL AT ne, tela lien guo oia A Wu T + ut nt camen] ante fa th sime Da inqui v1611 7^ lo shugo s att pe Atari far epe | B e&t rou Sabet ia) fact | EN ot: a) mea et Ht b Lud satietas DH nal "E aie DOTE we ROUE mis Gk dy, wies pn STE wih Mk Ax Po Han ua: bin aut aties erster DAL. en Dan? 1 Hoi wibalsellft ame ash acest gyillideth E N poeti ovp nat Atos: Sind nenn ra dti lees mede Raman Ye 0 -, 90 dd ‘bushi {tal ol dap FC ime ann monte Sahih. Wb ogee tq. sudes 0 qx auto DL aa CLR yt i Fb tel up iae ofi T troll ripis nt ee, bici WATTE REN UIDES in HONKA FR “EE promu TERI ET id yog topi! “TGA (5n. Le rafale Fr: imd A, su Ih : ris ibirga ] Pr Et MV OCT AP yes (PGs le Aue MOS eds nier emiten idu " fr Wt th (E beat — eit E eh INLEDNING. anse med denna uppsats är att lemna ett litet bidrag till kännedo- men om Skandinaviens DESMIDIACEER och särskildt till kännedomen om de- ras utbredning pa var halfó, i Norge såväl som i Sverige. Om NORGES DESMIDIACEER finnes hittills så godt som intet publiceradt. I Rabenhorsts "Flora europxa algarum aque dulcis et submarine” äro blott trenne arter uttryckligen omnämnda säsom forekommande derstädes. SVERIGES DESMIDIACÉER fro deremot jemnförelsevis vil kinda. Om dessa ega vi redan förut tvenne afhandlingar, nemligen en af P. 7. Cleve med titel "Bidrag till kànnedomen om Sveriges sótvattensalger af familjen Desmidieæ” och en af O. Nordstedt med titel ” Bidrag till kännedomen om Sveriges Desmidiez". Den förra af dessa innehåller utom beskrifning och figurer öfver åtskilliga nya arter en fullständig uppräkning af de för för- fattaren säsom svenska bekanta arterna. Den senare utgór en förteckning öfver de arter, som af författaren blifvit observerade pa tvenne särdeles Desmidiacé-rika lokaler i Westergötland. Cleve upptager 151 arter såsom svenska. Genom JVordstedts förteck- ning ökas antalet med 13 nya. Dertill komma 5), som af Rabenhorst i ”Flora europea algarum” angifvas såsom förekommande i Sverige, utan att vara observerade af någon af de tvenne förutnämnde forskarne, samt ytterligare 3%, som, meddelade af Cleve, finnas intagna i Rabenhorsts exsickatverk ”Die Algen Europa's”, dubbelhäftet 92 och 93. När härtill läggas 15 för landets flora nya, af mig funna och härnedan anförda arter, så blir summan af de Desmidiacéer, som blifvit iakttagna i Sverige, 187. ? Dessa finnas uppräknade i Nordstedts citerade afhandling sidan 83. 2) Dessa äro STAURASTRUM EXSECTUM Cleve, COSMARIUM ORNATUM Ralfs och CLOSTERIUM RALFSII Bréb. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 1 2 V. B. WITTROCK , Da antalet af samtliga kända europeiska arter uppgår till omkring 300 ? och Desmidiacéerna i allmänhet äro af en utpregladt kosmopolitisk natur, så torde man kunna hysa grundad förhoppning om, att ännu rätt många Desmidiacé-former stå att upptäcka i Sverige. Hvad kännedomen om NORGES DESMIDIACÉER beträffar kan densamma ännu sägas sa godt som ligga i sin linda. Antalet af de för Norge kända arterna uppgår nemligen endast till 30. Trenne af dessa, nemligen PENIUM CLOSTERIOIDES Ralfs, CLOSTERIUM EHRENBERG Menegh. och EUASTRUM CIRCU- LARE Hass., äro kinda såsom norska genom uppgifter i Rabenhorsts " Flora europea algarum”; de öfriga äro af mig observerade. Bland dessa finnes en, nemligen SPHÆROZOSMA PYGMÆUM Rabenh., som ännu ej är iakttagen i Sverige. Totalsumman af de pa Skandinaviska halfón funna Desmidiacé- arterna blir salunda 188. Fór att underlätta jemnförelsen med Cleves och Nordstedts svenska Desmidiacé-fórteckningar, hafva slägten och arter blifvit ordnade pa samma sätt som uti dessa. Af samma skal häfva i afseende pa slägt- och artbe- gränsningen De Barys och Ralfs’, af de nämnde författarne hyllade, asig- ter i allmänhet blifvit följda. Fullständig synonymi har blifvit anfórd blott vid de arter, som äro nya för landets flora; föröfrigt äro af synonymer blott de allra vigtigaste citerade. Hvad nomenklaturen i öfrigt vidkommer, har jag följt de grundsatser, som blifvit antagna af den BOTANISKA KONGRESSEN I PARIS 1867 och som finnas uttalade i ”Lois de la Nomenclature botanique par Alph. De Candolle. Genéve et Bale 1867”. De arbeten, som vid utarbetandet af denna afhandling blifvit radfra- gade och som i det följande citeras, äro: i AGARDH, C. A. Dispositio Algarum Sueciæ. Lunde 1810—12. (Ag. Dispos. Alg. Suec.) » Systema Algarum. Lundz 1824. (Ag. Syst. Alg.) » Neue Gattungen und Arten von Algen; Flora oder Botanische Zei- tung 10! Jahrg. 2'* Band. Regensburg 1827. (Ag. Flora.) ARCHER, W. Desmidieæ or Desmidiaceæ; A History of Infusoria by A. Pritchard. London 1861. (Archer in Pritch. Inf.) » Description of a New Species of Micrasterias (Ag. et aliorum, non Ebr.); Quarterly Journal of Microscopical science. Vol. 2, new ser. London 1862. (Archer Descript. 1862.) D Rabenhorst upptager i Flor. Eur. Alg. såsom säkert kända 292 arter. Denna summa erhåller dock en tillökning af ett eller annat tiotal, om arterna begränsas så som af Ralfs, Brébisson, Archer och flertalet öfriga författare. Atskilliga af de for- mer, hvilka Zabenhorst betraktar såsom blotta varieteter, komma nemligen da att fa rang af arter. SKANDINAVIENS DESMIDIACEER, 3} ARCHER, W. Description of two new species of Cosmarium (Corda), of Penium (Bréb.) and of Arthrodesmus (Ehr.); Quart. Journ. of Mier. sei- ence. Vol. 4, new ser. London 1864. (Archer Deseript. 1864.) » Observations on Mierasterias Mahabuleshwarensis (Hobson) and Do- cidium Pristidæ (Hobson); Quart. Journ. of Mier. science. Vol. 5, new ser. London 1865. (Archer Observ.) » On the Conjugation of Spirotænia condensata (Bréb.) and of Spiro- tenia truncata (Arch.); Quart. Journ. of Mier. Science. Vol. 7, new ser. London 1867. (Archer Conjug. of Spirot.) Barzey, J. W. Microscopical Observations made in South Carolina, Georgia and Florida; Smithsonian contributions to knowledge, Vol. 2. New- York 1851. (Bailey Micr. Obs.) BRÉBISSON, A. DE. Liste des Desmidiées observées en Basse-Normandie; Mémoires de la Société impériale des sciences naturelles de Cherbourg. Tome 4. Cherbourg 1856. (Bréb. Liste d. Desm.) Cueve, P. T. Bidrag till kännedomen om Sveriges sótvattensalger af familjen Desmidieæ; Ofversigt af Kongl. Wetenskaps-Akademiens Körhand- lingar, 20:de ärgängen 1863. Stockholm 1864. (Cleve Bidrag.) De Bary, A. Zu Gonatozygon monotænium; Hedwigia. Dresden 1856. (De Bary Hedw. 1856.) » Untersuchungen über die Familie der Conjugaten. Leipzig 1858. (De Bary Conjug.) DE-NOTARIS, G. Elementi per lo studio delle Desmidiacee Italiche. Genova 1867. (De Not. Elem.) DILLWYN, L. W. British Confervæ. London 1809. (Dillw. Brit. Conf.) EHRENBERG, C. G. Beiträge zur Kenntniss der Organisation der Infusorien und ihrer geographischen Verbreitung, besonders in Sibirien; Abhandlun- gen der Königlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin 1830. Berlin 1832. (Æhrenb. Abh. d. Akad. 1830.) » Ueber die Entwickelung und Lebensdauer des Infusionsthiere; Ab- handl. der Königl. Akad. der Wissensch. zu Berlin 1831. Berlin 1832. (Ehrenb. Abh. d. Akad. 1831.) » Dritter Beitrag zur Erkenntniss grosser Organisation in der Richtung des kleinsten Raumes; Abhandl. der Königl. Akad. der Wissen- sch. zu Berlin 1833. Berlin 1835. (Æhrenb. Abh. d. Akad. 1833.) » Die Infusionsthierchen als vollkommene Organismen. Leipzig 1838. (Ehrenb. Infus.) » Verbreitung und Einfluss des mikroskopischen Lebens in Süd- und Nord-Amerika. Berlin 1843. (hrenb. Verbr.) » Mikrogeologie. Leipzig 1854. (Æhrenb. Mikrogeol.) GREVILLE, R. K. Scottish Cryptogamie Flora. Vol. 5. Edinburgh 1827. (Grev. Scot. Crypt. Flor.) HassALL, A.H. A History of the British Freshwater Algæ. London 1845. (Hass. Brit. Alg.) 4 V. B. WITTROCK, Hogsow, J. Notes on Indian Desmidieæ; Quart. Journ. of Micr. Science. Vol. 3, new ser. London 1863. (Hobson Notes.) Hooker, W. J. The English Flora. Vol. 5, part. 1. London 1833. (Hook. Engl. F1.) Kirzine, F. T. Synopsis Diatomearum; Linnea, 8'* Band, Jahrg. 1833. Berlin 1833. (Kitz. Syn. Diat.) » Phycologia germaniea. Nordhausen 1845. (Kütz. Phyc. Germ.) » Species Algarum. Lipsiæ 1849. (Kütz. Spec. Alg.) LynGBYE, H. C. Tentamen Hydrophytologiæ Danicæ. Hafniæ 1819. (Lyngb. Hy- droph. Dan.) MENEGHINI, J. Synopsis Desmidiearum hucusque eognitarum; Linnea, 14'" Band, Jahrg. 1840. Halle 1840. (Menegh. Synop.) MEvEN, F. J. F. Beobachtungen über einige niedere Algenformen; Nova Acta Phy- sico-Medica Academiæ Cesare: Leopoldino-Caroline Nature Cu- riosorum. Tomus 14, pars 2. Bonn 1829. (Meyen Nov. Act.) Nirzscu, C. L. Beitrag zur Infusorienkunde. Halle 1817. (Nitzsch Beitr. zur Infus.) NAGELI, C. Gattungen einzelligen Algen. Zürich 1849. (Nüg. Gatt. einz. Alg.) NorpstgpT, O. Bidrag till kännedomen om Sveriges Desmidieæ; Botaniska Notiser 1868. Upsala 1868. (Nordstedt Bidrag.) Perry, M. Zur Kenntniss Kleinster Lebensformen. Bern 1852. (Perty Kleinst. Lebensf.) RABENHORST, L. Kryptogamen-Flora von Sachsen, der Ober-Lausitz, Thüringen und Nordböhmen. 1° Abtheil. Leipzig 1863. (Rabenh. Krypt. FT. v. Sachs.) » Die Algen Sachsens och Die Algen Europa’s. Dresden 1850—1867. (Rabenh. Alg.) » Flora Europea Algarum aque dulcis et submarine. Sectio 3. Lip- sie 1868. (Rabenh. Fl. Eur. Alg.) Rarrs, J. Remarks on the species of Desmidium; The Annals and Magazine of Natural History. Vol. 11. London 1843. (Ralfs Ann. of Nat. Hist. v. 11.) » On the British Desmidieæ; The Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist. Vol. 14—16. London 1844—1845. (Ralfs Ann. of Nat. Hist. v. 14—16). » The British Desmidieæ. The drawings by Æ. Jenner. London 1848. (Ralfs Br. Desm.) REINSCH, P. Die Algenflora des Mittleren Theiles von Franken. Niirnberg 1867. (Reinsch Alg. Frank.) Såsom bekant är, förekomma DESMIDIACEERNA rikligast i smärre vat- tensamlingar med klart och stillastående vatten. Det är också på dylika lokaler, som det vida öfvervägande antalet af här nedan uppräknade Des- midiacéer blifvit iakttaget. I de fa fall da förekomstorten är en sjö eller annat större vatten, fimnes detta särskildt anmärkt. De lokaler, som äro allra mest gynnsamma för utvecklingen af en rik Desmidiacé-vegetation, äro vattenfyllda gropar i torfmossar, isynnerhet gamla s. k. torfgrafvar. Den SKANDINAVIENS DESMIDIACEER, 5 växtlokal, som i den füljande fürteckningen oftast finnes anfórd, nemligen Hjulsängen, eger ocksa en stor rikedom pa sädana; och massan af olika Desmidiacé-former, som der förekommer, är ocksa sä stor, att antalet af derstiides iakttagna arter redan uppgar till nära 70, ett antal som genom fortsatta undersókningar helt säkert kan betydligen ókas. Af de i den efterfoljande fórteckningen anfórda lokalerna äro en del belägna i OSTRA SVERIGE nemligen Lassby backar, Malma tegelbruk, Bergs- brunna, Alsike, Knifsta, sjön Valloxen och Bursjén, alla i trakten af Up- SALA; andra i VESTRA SVERIGE nemligen Ekholmen, Hjulsängen, Hällan och Norra Bäckebol i Gunnarsnäs socken på DAL, Krokefors i Ors socken af samma provins och Hälsö i Tanums socken i BOHUSLÄN; en i SYDÖSTRA NORGE nemligen Haugelunds gästgifvaregård i Asaks socken af SMÅLENENES amt, samt en i SYDVESTRA NORGE nemligen Huseby i Vandsö socken af MANDALS och LISTERS amt. Den måttenhet, som här blifvit använd, är den franska millimetern (= m.m.), och hafva storleksförhållandena alltid blifvit angifna medelst 1000- delar af densamma. De med tecknet * utmärkta formerna äro nya för Skandinaviens flora. 6 V. B. WITTROCK, DESMIDIACEÆ Kitz. (Syn. Diat. p. 591, mut. char.; De Bary Conjug. p. 70). IL EUASTRUM Ehrenb. (Abh. d. Akad. 1831, pag. 82, mut. char.; Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 78.) 1. E. INSIGNE Hass. (Brit. Alg. t. 91, f. 2). Hälsö. 2. E. OBLONGUM Ralfs (in Ann. of Nat. Hist. v. 14, p. 189, t. 6, f. 4; Echinella oblonga Greville in Hook. Engl. Fl. v. V2, p. 398). Goteborg, Hjulsängen. 3.* E. AMPULLACEUM Ralfs (Br. Desm. p. 83, t. 13, f 4; Bréb. Liste d. Desm. p. 123; Archer in Pritch Inf p. 729; Rabenh. Krypt. Flor. v. Sachs. p. 185, Fl. Eur. Alg. sect. 3, p. 183; Euastrum sp. Hass. Brit. Alg. t. 90, £. 11. — Æxsic. Rabenh. Alg. N:o 1656). Hälsö. 4. E. Ratrsi Rabenh. (Fl. Eur. Alg., sect. 3, p. 184; E. ansatum Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 85, t. 14, f. 2). Hälsö, Hjulsängen. Den vanliga benämningen på denna art, E. ANSATUM Ehrenb., har af Raben- borst blifvit utbytt mot en ny, E. Razrsir, på den grund, att Ehrenbergs figurer i ”Infusionsthierchen” taflan 12 tydligen ge vid handen, att denne förf. med E. ansa- tum hufvudsakligen afsett en COSMARIUM-form. Att likväl Ehrenbergs E. ansatum tillika innefattar en verklig EUASTRUM framgår deraf, att det i slutet af artdiagnosen heter "lobis raro leviter emarginatis". 5. E. ROSTRATUM Ralfs (Ann. of Nat. Hist. v. 14, p. 192, t. 7, f. 5). Hälsö. 6. E. ELEGANS Kütz, (Phyc. Germ. p. 135; Cosmarium elegans Bréb. in Menegh. Synop., p. 222). Knifsta, Hjulsängen; Huseby. SKANDINAVIENS DESMIDIACÉER. 7 7. E. BINALE Ralfs (Ann. of Nat. Hist. v. 14, p. 193, t. 7, £. 7; Hetero- carpella binalis Turp. Diet. des Sc. Nat par Levr. Alt. Veg. f 14, 1820, sec, Ralfs). Huseby. Den form, som här förekommer, öfverensstämmer fullkomligt med Ralfs’ fig. 8d, tab. 14 i British Desmidiex. Var. 8 Ralfs (Br. Desm. p. 90, t. 14, fig. 8). Hälsö. 8. E. vENUSTUM Breb. (Liste d. Desm. p. 124, t. 1, £. 3; non Hantzsch in Rab. Alg. N:o 1543). * @ MAJUS nov. var. Var. duplo fere major quam forma e; longitudine cellulze tertia cirea parte majore quam latitudo; semicellulis sinubus subrectangulis distincte trilobatis, lobis emarginatis, emarginaturis conformibus. Long. cell. 0,065 m.m., lat. cell. 0,046 m.m., lat, isthmi 0,009 m.m. — Fig. 1. Hjulsängen. Denna varietet skiljer sig frän hufvudformen i främsta rummet genom sin stor- lek. Denna är nemligen, efter Brébissons figur att dömma, omkring dubbelt så stor hos 8- som hos a-formen. En jemfórelse med de af Cleve i Bidrag ete. pag. 486 für c-formen uppgifna måtten gifver ungefärligen samma resultat. Cleve anger nemligen cellullängden till 0,035 m.m. och bredden till 0,028 m.m. f-formen karakteriseras vi- dare derigenom, att inskürningarne mellan halfeellulernas trenne flikar hos denna äro djupare och, som det vill synas, af mera regelbunden form, samt slutligeu derige- nom, att àndflikens urringning är fullt ut lika tydlig som sidoflikarnes, dà deremot hos @-formen sidoflikarne äro betydligt starkare urringade än ändfliken. Uti Flora Europea Algarum har Rabenhorst öfverflyttat Brébissons EUASTRUM VENUSTUM til) slägtet COSMARIUM. Denna omflyttning torde dock, såsom det synes, vara beroende på en oriktig uppfattning af Brebissons art. Rabenhorst beskrifver nemligen Cosmarium venustum, vid hvilken Euastrum venustum Bréb. anfóres säsom synonym, sásom "parvum, paulo longius quam Jatum, utroque polo late truncatum, ambitu undulatum; semicellulis quadrato-reniformibus, dorso leviter retusis, angulis inferioribus rotundatis conniventibus, lateribus triundulatis; eytiodermate lzevi." Vid granskning af denna diagnos finner man, att ett par af de karakterer, som här tilläggas arten, alldeles icke harmoniera med dem, som enligt Brébissons diagnos och figurer tillkomma densamma. Rabenhorst siger nemligen für det fórsta, att eellullàngden är föga större än bredden, dà deremot Brébissons figurer lemna den upplysning, att hos den verkliga Euastrum venustum längden förhäller sig till bred- den som 3 till 2. Vidare säger Rabenhorst, att cellulens omkrets är vâgig, utan att nämna det vissa af bugterna äro så mycket djupare än de öfriga, att halfcellulerna derigenom blifva treflikade, en karakter som dock af Brébisson framhälles säväl i diagnos som figurer. 8 V. B. WITTROCK, Med anledning häraf torde det kunna antagas såsom mycket sannolikt, att Rabenhorst vid uppgörandet af den citerade diagnosen haft framför sig en helt annan art än den Brébisson med sin beskrifning afsett. Rabenhorsts art synes nemligeu vara en med Cosmarium Meneghinii Bréb. mycket närbeslägtad, äkta COSMARIUM- form, då Brébissons åter tvifvelsutan är en verklig, om också på gränsen till slägtet Cosmarium stående, EvasTRuM-form. Den karakteriseras såsom sådan dels genom de jemförelsevis djupa bugterna mellan halfcellulernas flikar, dels och isynnerhet ge- nom ändflikarnes egenskap att vara tydligt, om också svagt, urringade. Om grupperna Evastrum och COSMARIUM verkligen med rätta kunna hållas i sär såsom skiljda slägten, är åter en annan fråga. Mig synas skilnaderna mellan dem vara så obetydliga och kedjan af öfvergångsformer, som förenar dem, så full- ständig, att jag helst skulle vilja uppställa dem såsom underafdelningar (subgenera) af ett och samma slägte. 9. E. PECTINATUM Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 86, t. 14, f. 5). Hjulsángen. 10. E. VERRUCOSUM Ehrenb. (Abh. d. Akad. 1833, p. 247). Alsike gistgifvaregard, Krokefors, Hjulsángen. IL MICRASTERIAS Ag. (Flora 1827, pag. 642; Ralfs. Br. Desm. p. 68.) 1. M. DENTICULATA Bréb. (Alg. Falaise p. 54, t. 8, sec. Ralfs). Hjulsängen. 2. M. ROTATA Ralfs (Ann. of Nat. Hist. v. 14, p. 259, t. 6, f. 1; Echi-: nella rotata Greville in Hook. Engl. Fl. v. V2, p. 398). Hjulsángen. Benümnes af Rabenhorst i Fl. Eur. Alg. M. ruRCATA Ag. (Flora 1827, p. 643). Agardhs artdiagnos pa det citerade stället inskranker sig till ej fullt en rad, sa ly- dande "radiis pluries fureatis obtusis". Att af dessa fa ord med säkerhet sluta till, hvilken art han hatt for 6gonen, torde vara omójligt. Att det ej kan hafva varit M. furcata Auct. är väl mer än sannolikt, da ju segmenterna sagas vara trubbiga. Men att med ledning endast af diagnosen afgöra, huruvida det varit M. denticulata Bréb. eller t. ex. M. Jenneri Ralfs, hvilka bada hafva trubbiga segmenter, synes vara lika omöjligt. Ofverflyttningen af namnet M. furcata Ag. på M. rotata Grey., med hvilken art M. dentieulata Bréb. af Rabenhorst förenas säsom en varietet, synes mig derföre ej vara fullt motiverad, särdeles som Agardhs citerade diagnos ej passar in pà hufvud- formen (M. rotata Ralfs), utan blott pa den s. k. varieteten (M. denticulata Breb.). Om nu dertill skulle befinnas, att M. rotata Ralfs och M. denticulata Bréb. verkligen äro skiljda arter, nägot som den utmärkte Desmidiacé-kännaren W. Archer uti en uppsats med titel: "Description of a New Species of MrcRasTERIAS (Ag. et aliorum, non Ehr.), with remarks on the distinctions between MICRASTERIAS ROTATA (Ralfs) SKANDINAVIENS DESMIDIACEER. 9 and M. DENTICULATA (Bréb.)", införd i Quarterly Journal of Microscopical science 1862, sökt och, såsom mig synes, äfven lyckats leda i bevis, så blir Rabenhorsts förberörda åtgärd ovilkorligen att betrakta såsom fullkomligt oriktig. M. rotata kan nemligen då icke få ens det ringaste med M. fureata Ag. att göra, alldenstund den nödvändiga förbindande länken dem emellan, varieteten denticulata, då alldeles bort- faller. 3. M. RADIOSA. (Flora 1827, p. 643). Hjulsángen. 4. M. Crux MELITENSIS Ralfs (Br. Desm. p. 73, t. 9, f 3; Æuastrum crux melitensis Ehrenb. Abh. d. Akad. 1831, p. 82). Hjulsängen. M. rurcata Kütz. (Syn. Diat. p. 603; Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 73, t. 9, f. 2; non Ag.). Hjulsängen. x Ar tvifvelsutan endast en form af föregående och har också såsom sådan blif- vit uppford af Rabenhorst i Flora Europæa Algarum sect. III. 6. M. TRUNCATA Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 75, t. 8, £. 4 et t. 10, f. 5; Cosmarium truncatum Corda Alman. de Carlsbad 1835 p. 121, f. 23 sec. Ralfs). Hjulsángen. * (4 BAHUSIENSIS nov. var. Var. sinu semicellularum latiori; semicellulis semicircularibus, tri- lobatis, lobis sinu lato, obtusangulo inter se discretis; lobis polaribus convexis, apice emarginuiatis, angulis uni- (raro bi-) dentatis; lobis la- teralibus ineisura obtusangula bilobulatis, lobulis quadridentatis; cytio- dermate subtiliter punetato. Long. cell 0,025— 0,024 m.m., lat. 0,020— 0,021 m.m. — Fig. 2. Hälsö. Från öfriga former af denna polymorfa art skiljer sig denna varietet hufvud- sakligen genom de breda inskärningarne såväl mellan de begge halfcellulerna som isynnerhet mellan halfcellulernas trenne flikar. De rundade klorofyll-anhopningar , som förekomma tvenne i halfcellulernas ändflikar och en i hvardera af sidoflikarne synas äfven vara karakteristiska. — Den Micrasterias-form, som synes komma ifrå- gavarande varietet närmast, är den af Miyeli i Gatt. einzell. Alg. pag. 123 och 124 2 beskrifna och på taflan VI i fig. H 3 afbildade M. SEMIRADIATA Kütz ? Dessa skilja sig fran hvarandra i följande afseenden: l:o äro de linier, som begränsa inskärningarne mellan såväl halfcellulerna sjelfva som halfcellulernas trenne hufvudflikar betydligt mer divergerande hos M. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Se. Ups. Ser. III. 2 10 V. B. WITTROCK, TRUNCATA Bréb. 8 BABUSIENSIS än hos Nägelis M. SEMIRADIATA. I sammanhang här- med star att halfcellulernas sidoflikar hos den förra äro af en jemnbred och hos den senare af en vigglik form. 2:0 äro ündflikarne hos den förra väl i det hela konvexa men ófverst dock något urringade, hos den senare deremot fullständigt konvexa. 3:0 är den inskärning, som delar sidoflikarne i tvenne smáflikar, hos den förra rundad, hos den senare spetsig. 4:0 äro de nämnde begge smäflikarne bos den förra urringade af trenne lik- formiga och nästan lika djupa bugter (den mellersta är nemligan endast högst obe- tydligt djupare än de begge andra), dä deremot hos den senare smäflikarnes meller- sta bugt är bade smalare och betydligt djupare än de begge andra. 5:0 öfverträffar den förra i afseende pa storleken den senare med ungefär en tredjedel. 7. M. PINNATIFIDA Ralfs (Br. Desm. p. 77, t. 10, f£. 3; Euastrum pinnati- jidum Kütz. Phye. Germ. p. 134). Hjulsängen. IL COSMARIUM Corda. (Almanach de Carlsbad 1835 p. 205, see. Ehrenb., mut. char; Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 91). 1. C. PYRAMIDATUM Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 94, t. 15, f. 4). Hjulsángen. 2. C. NÆGELIANUM Bréb. (Liste d. Desm. p. 127. Euastrum (Cosmarium) crenatum Nig. Gatt. einz. Alg. p. 120, t. 7 A, f. 8). Hjulsängen; Huseby. Den på sistnämnde lokal funna formen har celluländarne fint vågiga och öf- verensstämmer sålunda med Nägelis citerade figur 8 0. 3.* C. CRENATUM Ralfs (Ann. of Nat. Hist. v. 14, p. 394; 1. 11; f. 6; Transact. of Bot. Soc. of Edinburgh v. 2, p. 151, t. 16 (sec. Ralfs Br. Desm.); Br. Desm. p. 96, t. 15, f 7; Bréb. Liste d. Desm. p. 127; Rabenh. Krypt. Flor. v. Sachs. p. 199; Fl. Eur. Alg. sect. 3, p. 165; Euastrum? sinuosum Kütz. Spec. Alg. p. 174. — Æxsic. Rabenh. Ale. no 1211). Lassby backar, Hjulsingen och Huseby. Af de utaf De-Notaris i Elementi ete. t. 4, f. 34 till Cosmarium crenatum lemnade trenne figurer torde blott den nedersta verkligen tillhöra Ralfs CosM. CRE- NATUM; de begge üfre äro helt visst former af C. UNDULATUM Corda. SKANDINAVIENS DESMIDIACÉER. 11 4. C. unpurarum Corda (in Almanach de Carlsbad 1839, p. 243, t. 5, f. 26, sec. Ralfs; Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 97, t. 15, f. 8; Archer in Pritch. Inf. p. 132, t. 2, f. 33 et 34, Bréb. Liste d. Desm. p. 127). B CRENULATUM (Ewastrum (Cosmarium) crenulatum Nig. Gatt. einz. Alg. p 120; tV Ay f. V e et dj non a et 0). Hjulsángen. Denna form torde pä grund af sin nära üfverensstimmelse med den form af C. undulatum, som finnes afbildad i Ralfs Br. Desm. t. 15, f. 8 d, rätteligen böra placeras här såsom en varietet af nämnde art. Rabenhorst betraktar den såsom en varietet af C. bioculatum Bréb., med hvilken den dock företer olikheter i rätt väsent- liga punkter. i det att halfeellulerna hos den förra (C. erenulatum Neg. 1. e. f. Te) äro halfeirkelformiga, dà de deremot hos den senare (C. bioculatum) äro nästan el- liptiska, på samma gang som inskränkningarne mellan cellulhalfvorna hos den förra äro jemnbreda ett längt stycke utat, hvaremot de hos den senare vidga sig ända fran sin innersta ända. * y MINUTUM nov. var. Cosm. parvum, sexta parte longius quam latum, sinu lineari profunde constrictum, semicellulis ovali-semicircularibus, et dorso et la- teribus late rotundatis, margine undulato-crenatis, crenis 12— 13; cytio- dermate levi. Long. cell. 0,005 m.m., lat. 0,004— 0,0045 m.m. — Fig. 3. Knifsta jernvägsstation. Denna varietet skiljer sig fran hufvudformen af C. undulatum fürst och främst derigenom, att den ej är mer än + så stor som denna; vidare derigenom att de vág- formiga upphójningarne här äro 12—13. da de hos hufvudformen äro 9—10, och slut- ligen derigenom, att cellulens längd här är blott +, men hos hufvudformen fullt + större än bredden. Olikheterna äro sålunda ej så obetydliga. Skälet hvarför jag likväl ej ansett mig böra uppställa ifrågavarande form såsom en egen art är det, att jag uti en del af de teckningar, som Ralfs i Br. Desm. t. 15, fig. 8 lemnat till C. undulatum, trott mig igenkänna former, som otvetydigt förbinda här ifrågavarande Cosmarium-form med typisk C. undulatum. De med b och c på det citerade stället betecknade figurerna representera nemligen påtagligen former, som utgöra förbindande mellanlänkar så väl i afseende på cellulernas storlek och allmänna form som i afse- ende på antalet af de bågformiga upphöjningarna i cellulens kant. De sist uppräknade trenne Cosmarium-arterna äro med hvarandra särdeles nära beslägtade och hafva också ofta blifvit med hvarandra förblandade. Såsom de af mig blifvit uppfattade, äro hufvudskilnaderna dem emellan följande. C. NEGELIA- NUM Bréb. och CRENATUM Ralfs utmärka sig, jemnforda med C. UNDULATUM Corda, derigenom, att inskärningarne mellan celluleus begge halfvor äro jemnbreda nästan ända ut, hvarigenom halfeellulernas till inskärningarne gränsande hörn blifva mera vinkliga. Hos C. undulatum åter äro inskärningarne väl ett stycke jemnbreda, men vidga sig slutligen utåt, så att halfcellulernas börn här blifva starkt rundade. De 12 V. B. WITTROCK, begge förstnämnde arterna skilja sig fran den sistnämnde äfven derigenom, att cellul- ändarne hos dem äro mer eller mindre tvära, under det att de hos den senare äro alldeles afrundade. Hufvudskilnaden mellan de begge förstnämnda arterna sinsemel- lan ligger deruti, att hos C. Nægelianum Bréb. cellulens bredd är ungefär lika stor som längden, hvarjemte celluländarne äro jemfórelsevis starkt afstympade, under det att hos C. erenatum Ralfs cellulens längd är minst + större in bedden samt cellul- ündarne endast svagt nedtryckta. 5. C. MxwEGHINH Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 96, t. 15, f. 6). Ekholmen; Huseby. 8 CONCINNUM Rabenh. (Fl. Eur. Alg. sect. 3, p. 163; Didymium (Cosma- rium) concinnum forma C concinnum Reinsch Alg. Frank. p. 111, t. 9, fig. 3 b, e, d et g. — ÆExsic. Euastrum concinmun Rabenh. Alg. n:o 1303). Hälsö. Den af mig observerade formen har cellulens sidor fullkomligt räta och är sälunda ej alldeles densamma som den af Nordstedt i Bidrag ete. sid. 39 omnämnda. Den ófverensstimmer deremot särdeles väl bade i afseende pa storlek och form med den af Reinsch l. e. beskrífna och afbildade. 6. C. Granatum Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 96, p. 32, f. 6; Liste d. Desm. p. 126). Valloxen, Knifsta jernvágsstation, Hjulsingen; Huseby. 7. C. TETRAOPHTHALMUM Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 98, t. 17, f. 11; Heterocarpella tetrophthalma Kütz. Syn. Diat. p. 597. f. 87). Hjulsángen. 8. C. Borrytis Menegh. (Synop. p. 220; Heterocarpella Botrytis Bory Diet. Class. 1825, sec. Ralfs). Knifsta, Ekholmen, Hjulsingen, Krokefors; Huseby. 9. C. MARGARITIFERUM Menegh. (Synop. p. 219; Ursinella margaritifera Turp. Dict. des Sc. Nat. 1820, sec. Ralfs). Kuifsta, Hjulsängen, Krokefors, Göteborg; Huseby. 10.* C. LATUM Bréb. (Liste d. Desm. p. 128, t. 1, f£. 10; Archer in Pritch. Inf. p. 733; Rabenh. Fl. Eur. Alg. sect. 3, p. 158). Hjulsängen. Af denna art som hittills blott blifvit iakttagen i Frankrike i Normandie har jag funnit några fa exemplar. Dessa stämde noga 6fverens med Brébissons beskrif- ning och figurer, blott med det undantag att cellulernas ändar här ej voro så tvära som pä den af Brébisson lemnade figuren, utan mera rundade. SKANDINAVIENS DESMIDIACÉER. 13 Cellullängden (longit. cell.) uppgick till 0,095 mm. och bredden (latit.) till 0,073; niisets bredd (latit. isthmi) till 0,020 m. m. 11. C. CONSPERSUM Ralfs (Dr. Desm. p. 101, t. 16, f. 4). * @ ROTUNDATUM nov. var. Cosm. magnum, quarta parte longius quam latum, sinu sublineari profunde constrictum; semicellulis rectangulari-reniformibus, dorso late rotundato, lateribus subrectis, margine erenato-verrucoso, cytiodermate dense verrucoso, verrucis truncatis, in series regulares decussatas dispo- sitis. Long. cell. 0,104— 0,098 m.m., lat. 0,076--0,078; lat. isthmi 0,025 m.m. — Fig. 4. Knifsta jernvägsstation. Denna särdeles vackra Cosmarium-form skiljer sig från C. conspersum Ralfs, till hvilken jag trott mig böra hänföra den såsom en varietet, hufvudsakligen derige- nom, att cellulernas ändar hos densamma äro bredt rundade, då de hos C. conspersum form. « äro nästan fullkomligt tvära. I sammanhang härmed står att halfcellulernas öfre hörn hos varieteten äro mycket starkt afrundade, under det att de hos a-formen äro mera vinkliga. Äfven halfcellulernas nedre hörn äro hos den förra något afrun- dade, beroende derpå att inskärningarne mellan halfcellulerna ej äro helt och hållet jemnbreda, utan vidga sig något litet utåt, da de deremot hos «-formen äro allt ige- nom af lika bredd. I nu nämnda afseenden öfverensstämmer ifrågavarande varietet temligen nära med den Cosm. conspersum, som //e Notaris i Elementi etc. taflan 3, fig. 27 afbildat; men fran denna skiljer den sig isynnerhet genom anordningen af de für arten karakteristiska vartlika upphójningarne pa cellulmembranen. Hos De Notaris’ form synas dessa nemligen vara oordnade, da de hos här ifragavarande- varietet äro tydligt ordnade enligt tvenne, hvarandra under en nästan rät vinkel korsande, liniesystemer, bildade det ena eller det, hvars linier lópa i cellulens langdriktning, af alldeles raka sädana, och det andra eller det, hvars linier gä tvärs öfver cellulen, af svagt bägböjda dylika. — En karakter, genom hvilken ofvan diagnosticerade varietet skiljer sig såväl fran Ralfs som De Notaris former, är att cellulmembranens värtlika upphöjningar hos henne äro märkbart talrikare och mera tätt tillsammans stäende än hos de af de begge nämnde förf. beskrifna formerna. Med Cosm. LATUM Breb. företer den en likhet, som ej är obetydlig. Den hufvudsakliga skilnaden dem emellan synes ligga deruti, att inskärningarne mellan halfcellulerna hos den fôrra starkt vidga sig utat, under det att de hos den senare ej vidga sig, utan äro i det närmaste jemnbreda; hvartill kommer att halfcellulernas sidor hos den förra äro rundade, dä de hos den senare äro nästan räta, andra obe- tydligare skilnader att fürtiga. 12. * C. Broomen Thwaites (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 103, t. 16, f. 6 et t. 32, f 7; C. Broome Bréb. Liste d. Desm. p. 130; Archer in Pritch. Inf. p. 734, t. 1, £ 7; Rabenh. Krypt. Fl v. Sachs. p. 201; Fl. Eur. Alg. sect. 3, p. Lil). Hjulsängen. 14 V. B. WITIROK, 13.* C. UNGERIANUM Neg. (Gatt. einz. Alg. p. 120, t. TA, f. 10; Archer in Pritch. Inf. p. 732; Rabenh. Fl. Eur. Alg. sect. 3, p.* 160) Knifsta jernvägsstation. Af denna högst utmärkta Cosmarium-art har jag lyekats anträffa blott ett enda. exemplar. Detta öfverensstämde i det allra närmaste med Nägelis citerade figur c. Enda olikheten låg deruti att den vártlika, nära eellulens ända belägna upphójningen på cellulmembranen, som à den citerade figuren är betecknad med s, här saknades. — Cellulens làngd (long. cell.) utgjorde 0,070 m.m. och dess bredd (latit.) 0,057 m.m.; nüsets bredd (latit. isthmi) uppgiek till 0,025 m.m. Arten är förut antrüffad endast vid Zürich i Schweitz, hvadan den synes vara särdeles sällsynt. 14. C. AMOENUM Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 102, t. 17, f. 3). Lassby backar. 15. * C. oRBICULATUM Ralfs (Ann. of Nat. Hist. v. 14, p. 392, t. 11, £ 2; Transact. of Bot. Soc. of Edinburgh v. 2, p. 148, t. 16 (see. Br. Desm.); Hass. Br Alg- p. 364, t. 86, f. 5; Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 107, t. 17, f. 5 et, t. 33, f. 9; Breb. Liste d- Desm. p. 152. Archer 10 PTIT 734; Rabenh. Fl. Eur. Alg. sect. 3, p. 173). Hjulsángen. 16. C. MONILIFORME Ralfs (Br. Desm. p. 107, t. 17, f. 6; Tessarthronia mo- niliformis Turp. Dict. des Sc. Nat. 1820, t. 7, f. 1?, sec. Ralfs Br. Desm.). Hjulsángen. 17. C. coNNATUM Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 108, t. 17, f. 10). Hjulsángen. 18. C. PHASEOLUS Bréb. (in Menegh. Synop. p. 220). Hjulsängen, Ekholmen i sjön Kalungen, Hälsö; Huseby. 19. C. CucurgirA Bréb. (in Desmaz. Crypt. d. France ed. 1, N:o 1103, sec. Rabenh. Fl. Eur. Alg.). Krokefors, Hjulsängen, Hälsö; Haugelund. 20. C. Tuwartesu Ralfs (Br. Desm. p. 109, t. 17, f. 8; Penium Thwai- tesii Cleve Bidrag p. 492). *(4 MAJUS Rabenh. (Fl. Eur. Alg. sect. 3, p. 175). Knifsta jernvägsstation. Dà denna form fórut ej finnes afbildad, har jag hür af densamma lemnat en teckning; se fig. 5. Den skiljer sig fran hufvudformen 1:o derigenom att den ar un- SKANDINAVIENS DESMIDIACEER. 15 gefür dubbelt stórre; cellullängden (long. cell.) är 0,107 m.m. och bredden (latit.) 0,055 m.m.; 2:0 derigenom att cellulen är mera cylindrisk, beroende derpä att halfeellu- lerna mera tvärt afsmalna vid ändarne; 3:0 derigenom att bredden proportionsvis är stórre; dess fürhällande till langden är sasom 1 till 2, samt 4:0 derigenom att cellul- membrum ej är slit utan fint punkterad. Efter De Barys begränsning af slügtena bör denna form föras hit till slägtet Cosmarium och ej till slägtet PENrUM, alldenstund den, såsom den bifogade figuren utvisar, har endast en enda stor amylumkärna i hvarje halfcellul. 21.* C. ATTENUATUM Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 110, t. 17, f. 9; Liste d. Desm. p. 133; Archer in Priteh. Inf. p. 735; C. eurtum (Bréb.) Ralfs c majus Rabenh. Fl. Eur. Alg. sect. 3, p. 177). Hjulsängen. Sásom synonymien utvisar, betraktar Rabenhorst denna art som en varietet af C. CURTUM, en uppfattning, som väl torde vara den riktiga, dà skilnaden emellan dem är högst obetydlig. IV. ARTHRODESMUS Ehrenb. (Infus. p. 149, mut. char.; Archer in Pritch. Inf. p. 736). 1. A. CONVERGENS Ehrenb. (Infus. p. 152, t. 10, f. 18). Ekholmen, Hjulsängen. 2. A. Incus Hass. (Brit. Alg. p. 357, t. 85, £. 10; Cosmarium Incus Bréb. in Menegh. Synop. p. 228). Hälsö; Huseby. Den form af denna polymorfa art, som fórekommer pa den förstnämnda loka- len, är den, som finnes afbildad i Ralfs Brit. Desm. tafl. 20, fig. 46; den ater som blifvit iakttagen på det senare stället är den, som i nyssnämnda arbete finnes afbil- dad på samma tafla uti fig. 4e. * @ INTERMEDIUS nov. var. A. parvus, tam longus quam latus vel paullulum longior; incisura in media cellula parva, obtusangula; semicellulis breviter cuneatis, angulis aculeatis, aculeis longis singulis divergentibus. Long. cell. (sine aculeis) 0,012— 0,015 m.m., latit. 0,011— 0,013; longit. acul. 0,007 —0,008 ; latit. isthmi 0,008— 0,009; erassit cell. 0,007— 0,008. — Fig. 6. Lassby backar. Denna Arthrodesmus-form står midt emellan A. Incus Hass. och A. MINUTUS Kütz. så vil i afseende på storlek som form. Fran den förra skiljer den sig, utom genom sina i allmänhet mindre dimensioner, hufvudsakligen derigenom, att inskär- 16 V. B. WITTROCK, ningarne mellan halfeellulerna, i stället für att vara djupa och rundade, äro grunda samt trubbvinkliga; från den senare, förutom genom något betydligare dimensioner, derigenom att halfcellulerna, i stället för att vara nästan jemnbreda, märkbart tilltaga i bredd mot ändarne, och att taggarne, i stället für att vara nästan parallela, äro temligen starkt divergerande. Skilnaderna mellan dessa trenne Arthrodesmus-former äro således ingalunda betydliga. Framtida undersökningar torde ock komma att ada- galägga, att de endast äro varieteter af en och samma art. V. STAURASTRUM Meyen. (Nov. Act. p. 777; De Bary Conjug. p. 71). 1. S. ORBICULARE Ralis (Ann. of Nat. "Hist., v. 15 p. 152, t 107 fi 4, 1845; Desmidium? orbiculare Ehrenb. Abh. d. Akad. 1833, p. 292). Knifsta jernvigsstation; Huseby. 2. S. MUTICUM Bréb. (in Menegh. Synop. p. 228). Hjulsängen. 3. S. DEJECTUM Bréb. (in Menegh. Synop. p. 227). Hjulsängen, Hälsö; Huseby. Den form, som förekommer pa Hälsö, tillhór var. « Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 121, t. 20, f. ba; den deremot, som förekommer pa de båda andra lokalerna, varr. 8 och Rats lc 51> ochre: A4.*S. BIDENTATUM nov. spec. S. magnum, læve, tam longum quam latum; sinu profundo, sub- rectangulari; semicellulis ellipticis dorso paullulum retuso utroque fine dentibus binis ornatis, a vertice triangularibus, lateribus leviter retusis, angulis dentibus singulis armatis; cytiodermate subtiliter punctato. Long. cell. 0,080—0,090 m.m., latit. (sine dentibus) 0,075— 0,085; long. dentium 0,007— 0,010; latit. isthmi 0,030, — Fig. 7. Hjulsängen. Denna art utmärker sig i främsta rummet genom sin storlek; i detta afseende öfverträffas den af ingen bland kända Staurasta med undantag endast af S. TUMIDUM Bréb. Särdeles utmärkande för arten äro äfven de tvenne ofvanför hvarandra ställda, starka, tandlika utskott, med hvilka de snedt elliptiska halfeellulernas ändar sluta. De Staurastrum-arter, med hvilka den i ett eller annat afseende företer en mera anmärkningsvärd likhet, äro S. AvicuLA Bréb. och S. rumrpum Bréb. Med den första af dessa visar den en icke så ringa öfverensstämmelse i afseende på cellulens allmänna form, en öfverensstämmelse så pass genomgående, att den sträcker sig äf- ven till vissa enskildheter; så äro t. ex. halfeellulernas ändar hos båda arterna två- tandade. De olikheter som förefinnas äro likväl mer än tillräckliga att grunda en SKANDINAVIENS DESMIDIACÉER. i säker artskilnad. Ty först och främst äro de begge arternas dimensioner högst olika; S. bidentatum är nemligen flera gånger större än S. Avicula; och vidare finner man vid närmare granskning flera olikheter äfven i afseende på formen. Halfcellulerna t. ex. äro hos den förra nästan triangulära, då de hos den senare snarare äro ellip- tiska. Cellulens ryggsidor äro hos S. Avicula helt och hållet konvexa, hos S. biden- tatum åter på midten konkaverade. De tandlika utskotten äro hos S. Avicula diver- gerande och spetsiga, hos S. bidentatum parallela och i toppen afrundade, flera an- dra olikheter att förtiga. | STAURASTRUM TUMIDUM och S. BIDENTATUM, hvilka i afseende på storleken stå hvarandra närmast (den senare uppnår likväl ej stort mer än hälften af den för- ras volum), särskiljas bland annat lätt på den olika beskaffenheten af cellulens rygg- sidor; dessa äro nemligen hos S. tumidum fullständigt samt särdeles starkt konvexa, hos S. bidentatum på midten konkaverade och i öfrigt blott svagt konvexa. Den egendomliga tandbeväpning, som S. bidentatum eger, saknas dessutom hos S. tumi- dum; denna har i stället blott ett enda litet rundadt utskott vid hvardera ändan af halfeellulerna, och detta utskott är ofta så obetydligt, att det knappast är märkbart. 5. =S. PILOSUM Archer (in Pritch. Inf. p. 739; Rabenh. Fl. Eur. Alg. sect. 3, p. 212; non Bréb.; Phycastrum (Amblyactinium) pilosum Neg. Gatt. einz. Alg..p. 126, i. 8 A, f. 4). Lassby backar. Da Nägelis citerade figur, hvilken är den enda afbildning af arten, som mig veterligen finnes publicerad, blott visar densamma sedd i tvirprofil, sà har jag an- sett mig här böra bifoga en fullstindig teckning af densamma; se fig. 8. De utskott, som bekläda zygosporerna, äro sásom figuren utvisar, af en egen- domlig och rätt vacker form. De äro nemligen upprepadt gaffellikt förgrenade, först trikotomiskt och sedan dikotomiskt. Fran de i viss man liknande zygosporerna af S. Brezissoni Archer (= S. pilosum Bréb.), utaf hvilka Cleve i Bidrag etc. tafl. 4, fig. 3 lemnat en afbildning, skilja de sig derigenom, att de gaffellika fórgreningarne af 1:sta ordningen, d. v. s. de trikotomiska, här äro af fullt lika stor längd som utskot- tens stamdelar, hvaremot de hos S. Brébissonii icke äro mer än j sa långa som dessa. Afven förgreningarne af 2:dra ordningen, de dikotomiska, äro proportionsvis längre hos S. pilosum Archer än hos S. Brébissonii. Skilnaderna mellan de nyssnämnde begge arterna, hvilka af Z'abenhorst blifvit sam- manslagna till en, och hvilka också obestridligen äro hvarandra ganska närstående, äro i öfrigt hufvudsakligen följande. Cellulens längd är hos S. PrLosuM Archer fullt +, hos S. BRÉBISSONIT åter knappast + större än bredden. Halfcellulerna äro hos den förra nästan halfeirkelformiga, hos den senare aflångt elliptiska. Ryggsidan är till följe häraf hos den förra mycket starkare kullrig än hos den senare. Halfcellulerna äro mindre divergerande hos den förra än hos den senare. Afven i afseende på stor- leken förefinnes en skilnad i så måtto, att S. Brébissonii i allmänhet är + större än S. pilosum Archer. Dimensionerna hos Upsala-exemplar af denna senare äro föl- jande: cellullängden taggarne oberäknade (longit. cell. sine aculeis) 0,050—0,055 m.m., bredden (latit.) 0,038—0,040, taggarnes längd (long. acul.) 0,004—0,005, zygosporernas 2 Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Se. Ups. Ser. III. 3 18 V. B. WITTROCK, diameter, utskotten oberäknade (diam. zygosp. sine process.) 0,044—0,049, utskottens làngd (long. process.) 0,015—0,017. | 6. S. TELIFERUM Ralfs (Br. Desm. p. 128, t. 22, f. 4 et t. 34, f. 14). Hjulsängen; Huseby. Samma form med i tvärprofilen blott svagt konkaverade sidor som Cleve fun- nit vid Upsala och Nordstedt vid Sandhem. 7. S. PUNCTULATUM Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 133, t. 22, f. 1). Hjulsängen; Huseby. 8. S. LEVE Ralfs (Br. Desm. py 131, t. 23, f. 10). RB CLEVEI nov. var. S. leve, tam longum quam latum; semicellulis sexradiatis, radiis longis divaricatis bifurcatis. Long. cell. (cum radiis) 0,053, latit. 0,050; long. radiorum 0,016; latit. isthmi 0,017. — Fig. 9. Lassby backar. Denna form har forst blifvit iakttagen af P. T. Cleve och omnämnes af honom i Bidrag ete. sid. 490. Den skiljer sig frân den af Ralfs i Brit. Desm. beskrifna och afbildade hufvudformen af ifragavarande art hufvudsakligen derigenom, att den är ungefiir dubbelt stórre. Derjemte har den àfven strälarne och isynnerhet dessas gaf- felformiga spetsar proportionsvis längre. — Nordstedt omnämner i Bidrag ete. sid. 40, att han vid Mullsjö funnit en form af S. leve, som i afseende pa storleken star midt emellan Cleves och Ralfs' former. 9. S. FURCIGERUM Bréb. (in Menegh. Synop. p. 226). Hjulsángen. 10. S. GRACILE Ralfs (Ann. of Nat. Hist v. 15, p. 155, t. 11, f. 3). Hjulsängen. 11. S. PARADOXUM Meyen (Nov. Act. p. 777, t. 43, f. 37 et 38). Hjulsängen, Hälsö. 12. S. TETRACERUM Ralfs (Ann. of Nat. Hist. v. 15, p. 150, t. 10, f 1; JMicrasterias tetracera Kütz. Syn. Diat. p. 602, t. 19, f. 83 et 84). Ekholmen, Hjulsängen, Hälsö. 13. S. POLYMORPHUM Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 135, t. 22, f. 9 et t. 34, f. 6). : Hälsö. Den här funna formen är den femsträliga. SKANDINAVIENS DESMIDIACEER. 19 14. S. rRICORNE Menegh. (Syn. Desm. p. 225; Binatella tricornis Bréb. Alg. Falaise p. 57, t. 8, sec. Ralfs Br. Desm.). var. 8 Ralfs (Br. Desm. p. 134, t. 34, f. 8). Bursjün. Att äfven Cleve iakttagit ensamt varieteten och ej hufvudformen af ifrägava- rande art framgär deraf, att han i Bidrag ete. sid. 491 vid S. tricorne citerar blott Ralfs Brit. Desm. taf. 34, fig. 8, der varieteten finnes afbildad, och ej taf. 22 i samma arbete, der en teckning af bufvudformen fórekommer. VI XANTHIDIUM Ehrenb. (Abh. d. Akad. 1833, p. 317, mut. char.; Bréb. Liste d. Desm. p. 134). 1. X. ARMATUM Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 112, t. 18; Cosmarium ar- matum Bréb. in Menegh. Synop. p. 218). Hjulsängen. 2. X. ACULEATUM Ehrenb. (Abh. d. Akad. 1833, p. 318). Knifsta jernvägsstation. 3. X. FASCICULATUM Ehrenb. (Infus. p. 147, t. 10, f. 24 a). Hjulsängen. 4. X. CRISTATUM Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 115, t. 19, £ 3 a, 5, c). | Huseby. VI. TETMEMORUS Ralts (in Ann. of Nat. Hist. v. 14, p. 256). 1. T. BnÉBISSONU Ralfs (Ann. of Nat. Hist. v. 14, p. 257; Closterium Brebissonii Menegh. Synop. p. 236). Hjulsángen. 2. 'T. GRANULATUS Ralfs (Ann. of Nat. Hist. p. 257; Closterium granula- tum Bréb. in Menegh. Synop. p. 236). Hjulsángen. VIII. SPIROT ANIA Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 178). 1. S. CONDENSATA Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 179, t. 34, £. 1). Hjulsängen. 20 V. B. WITIROK, IX. PENIUM Bréb. 3 (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 148, mut. char.; De Bary Conjug. p. 73). 1. P. POLYMORPHUM Perty (Kleinst. Lebensf. p. 207, t. 16, f. 15; P. cras- siusculum De Bary (?) Conjug. p. 73, t. 5, f. 5-—7). Hälsö. Af denna högst variabla art fórekommo former både med och utan insnórning pi midten, former som voro 0,042 m.m. länga och 0,020 breda och andra som voro endast 0,019 länga och 0,011 breda. Jemnförda med den form, som De Bary be- skrifvit och afbildat i Conjug. under namn af P. CRASSIUSCULUM, visade de sig re- latift kortare samt ej fullt sà cylindriska, detta beroende derpä, att cellulens (eller halfcellulernas, om cellulen var försedd med insnórning pà midten) langsidor ej voro fullt parallela utan i stillet nàgot konvexa. 2. P. Dicrrus Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 150, t. 25, f. 3; Closterium Digitus Ehrenb. Abh. d. Akad. 1831, p. 68). Knifsta jernvägsstation, Hjulsángen. X. DOCIDIUM Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 155, mut. char.; = Meurotenium (Näg.) Rabenh. Fl. Eur. Alg. sect. 3). I ófverensstimmelse med prioritetslagen har jag fór slägtet antagit Brébis- sons benämning Docrpium, gifven 1848, i stället for Nägelis PLEUROTÆNIUM, gifven 1849. I afseende pa begrünsningen af detsamma har jag ansett mig bóra fólja det föredöme Aabenhorst gifvit i Flora Europæa Algarum sect. 3 Till slägtet fores sä- lunda äfven arterna af det af Bailey uppstüllda genus TRIPLOCERAS. De till detta hänförda formerna synas visserligen vid fürsta päseendet mycket afvikande, men mellanformer mellan dem och typiska Docidier förefinnas dock uti den kinesiska D. Kayer Archer och den amerikanska D. noposum Archer. 1. D. TURGIDUM (Cosmarium turgidum Bréb. in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 110, t. 32, f. 8; Pleurotzenium turgidum De Bary Conj. p. 75, t. 5, f 31). Lassby backar, Malma tegelbruk. 2. D. nopuLosum Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 155, t. 26, £ 1). Krokefors, Hjulsängen; Huseby. Rabenhorst benämner i Fl. Eur. Alg. denna art PLEUROTÆNIUM CRENULATUM. Han antager nemligen, att det ir denna, som Ehrenberg afsett med sin CLOSTERIUM CRENULATUM, beskrifven och afbildad i "Verbreitung" ete. sid. 123, tafl. 4, fig. 29. Under detta antagande har artnamnet CRENULATUM, säsom gifvet 1843, prioritet framför NODULOSUM, publiceradt först 1848. — Efter hvad mig synes, passar dock SKANDINAVIENS DESMIDIACEER. 21 Ehrenbergs beskrifning och figur ej rätt väl in på Docidium nodulosum Bréb. (de 5 5 Ål p vâgformiga upphüjningarne på cellulens midt saknas hos Ehrenbergs art), hvadan jag också ej vågat följa Rabenhorst exempel i afseende på identifieringen af de båda arterna. 3. D. TRABECULA Reinsch (A Ehrenbergii, non B et C, Alg. Frank. p. 182 et 183; Closterium Trabecula Ehrenb. Abh. d. Akad. 1831 p. 68; Infus. p. 93, t. 6, f. 2; Mikroskopische Analyse des eurländischen Meteorpa- piers von 1686, Berlin 1839, t. 1, £ 9, sec. Rabenh.; Mikrogeol. t. 34 XII B., f. 21; Menegh. Synop. p. 235; Jenner Flora of Tun- bridge Wells p. 196, sec. Ralfs; Docidium Ehrenbergii Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 157, t. 26, f. 4; Bréb. Liste d. Desm. p. 147; Archer in Pritch. Inf. p. (45, t. 2, f. 8—11; Penium (Docidium) Ehrenbergii Kütz. Spec. Alg. p. 168; Pleurotænium Trabecula Nag. Gatt. einz. Alg. p. 104, t. 6 A; Rabenh. Krypt. Fl. v. Sachs. p. 176; Fl. Eur. Alg. sect. 3, p. 141). Ekholmen, Hjulsingen, Hälsö; Huseby. Denna art finnes omnümnd redan i Ehrenb. Abh. d. Akad. 1830 sid. 62 och 70, dock utan bifogad beskrifning; först i Abh. d. Akad. 1831 är en kort diagnos öfver densamma lemnad. 4. D. Bacutum Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 158, t 33, f. 5; Closterium Baculum Bréb. Alg. Falaise 1835, p. 59, t. 8, sec. Ralfs). Hjulsängen. 5. =D. GRACILE (Triploceras gracile Bailey Micr. Obs. p. 38, t. 1, f 10; Archer in Pritch. Inf. p. 744; Observ. p. 261, t. 7, f 1; Docidium verticillatum Bailey pro parte in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 218, t. 35, f. Ic; Docidium pristidæ Hobson Notes p. 169 cum icone; Pleurotænium gra- cile Rabenh. Fl. Eur. Alg. sect. 3, p. 144, icon p. 104, f. 56 ). Hjulsängen. Descriptio ad exemplaria suecica delineata: D. valde elongatum, undeeim eirca partibus longius quam latum, cylindraceum, ad apices versus paullulum angustatum, in medio con- strictum, stricturee margine non prominente; semicellulis processubus dentiformibus acutis verticillatis, S—-10 in unoquoque verticillo, arma- tis, verticillis 11—14; semicell. in apice trilobis lobis bidentatis; laminis chlorophyllaceis 7. Long. cell. 0,395—0,405 mm., lat. max. cell. 0,03 — 0,038, long. process. dentif. 0,007—0,008, long. lobor. terminal. 0,012— 0,015. — Fig. 10. Fyndet af denna högst egendomliga Desmidiacé-form i Sverige måste füre- falla temligen 6fverraskande, dä man besinnar den utbredning arten i öfrigt eger. 22 V. B. WITTROCK, Den är nemligen fórut anträffad i Gamla Verlden endast i Ostindien och sódra delen af Kina samt uti Nya Verlden isynnerhet i sydostliga delarne af Amerikas fórenta stater, säledes uti trakter som ätnjuta ett tropiskt eller átminstone subtropiskt klimat. Da den nu är fuunen äfven uti ett land beläget på gränsen till den kalla zonen och i öfrigt i trenne skiljda verldsdelar, så kan man väl knappast önska sig ett bättre exempel pa utbildad kosmopolitism hos en växtart, än det som denna lemnar. Da nágon mera fullständig beskrifning öfver arten hittills ej finnes, sä har jag har ofvan lemnat en sädan, uppgjord specielt efter svenska exemplar. Dessa öf- verensstämma i allt väsentligt med de utländska och, efter afbildningarne att döma, bäst med de kinesiska och ostindiska. De amerikanska afvika enligt Baileys beskrif- ning och figurer derigenom, att de tandlika utskotten hos dem ej äro hvassa utan i någon mån rundade. : XL CLOSTERIUM Nitzsch. (Beitr. zur Infus. p. 60 et 67). 1. C. EHRENBERGU Menegh. (Synop. p. 232). Krokefors. 2. C. Draw Ehrenb. (Infüs. p. 92, t. 5, £ 11). Hjulsiingen; Huseby. C. LEIBLEINI Kütz. (Syn. Diat. p. 596, f. 19). Bergsbrunna. 4. C. LUuNULA Nitzsch (Beitr. zur Infus. p. 60 et 67; Vibrio Lunula Mül- ler Naturforscher XX 1784, p. 142, sec. Rabenlı.). Hjulsängen. 5. C. pipymorocum Corda (Almanach de Carlsbad 1835 p. 125, t. 5, f. 64 et 65, sec. Ralfs). Norra Bäckebol, Hjulsingen, Krokefors, Hälsö. 6.* C. LANCEOLATUM Kütz. (Phyc. Germ. p. 130; Spec. Alg. p. 165; Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 164, t. 28, f. 1; Bréb. Liste d. Desm. p. 152; Archer in Pritch Infus. p. 747; Rabenh. Krypt. Fl. v. Sachs. p. 171; Alg. N:o 643; Fl. Eur. Alg. sect. 3, p. 129; Kryptogamen Badens N:o 6, sec. Rabenh.; non Cleve Bidrag p. 495, t. 4, f. 7; Cymbella Hopkirkii Moore in Harvey Manual of British Algæ 1841 p. 215, sec. Ralfs). Ekholmen. Den Closterium, som Cleve i ”Bidrag” 1. c. upptagit under namn af C. LAN- CEOLATUM, är, såsom Archer i "Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science 1865” sid. 170 anmärker, icke den äkta C. lanceolatum Kütz., utan en kortcellulig form af O. PRITCHARDIANUM Archer. © SKANDINAVIENS DESMIDIACEER. 23 =] C. ACEROSUM Ehrenb. (Abh. d. Akad. 1831, p. 68: Vibrio acerosus Schrank Fauna Boica 1803 III 2, p. 47, see. Ralfs). Bergsbrunna, Hjulsángen. 8. C. STRIOLATUM Ehrenb. (Abh. d. Akad. 1831, p. 68). Norra Bäckebol, Krokefors. 9. C. INTERMEDIUM Ralfs (Br. Desm. p. 171, t. 29, f. 3). Ekholmen, Hjulsängen. 10. C. ANGUSTATUM Kütz, (Phye. Germ. p. 132). Hjulsángen. 11. C. suncipumM Ralfs (Br. Desm. p. 172, t. 29, f. 6). Norra Bäckebol, Hjulsingen, Hälsö. Den pà de bäda senare ställena iakttagna formen är särdeles smal och i af- saknad af striering; den tillhór sälunda Radenhorsts forma c,Fl. Eur. Alg. sect. 3, p. 127. 12.* C. CALOSPORUM nov. spec. C. parvum, semilunare, medio non tumidum, gracile, 6—9 partibus longius quam latum, apicibus aeuminatis, cytiodermate primum achroo lævique, denique luteolo et longitudinaliter subtilissime striato, vesiculis chlorophyllaceis uniseriatis, 4—5 in quaque semicellula, la- minis chlorophyllaceis 4— 5; zygosporis luteo-fuscis, globosis, proces- subus conicis, apice rotundatis ornatis, in canali copulationis mox eva- nescenti formatis. Long. cell. 0,070— 0,095 mm., lat. 0,010—0,012; diam. Zygosp. sine process. 0,020, eum proeess. 0,000 mm. — Fig. 11. Lassby backar. Denna art liknar under sitt vegetativa stadium i så hög grad C. PARVULUM Näg., att det synes nästan omöjligt att i detta stadium säkert skilja dem fran hvar- andra. Under det fruktifikativa stadiet áter fürete de sa stora skilnader att nágon sammanblandning af dem da ej kan ifrägakomma. Enligt den skildring af kopulatio- nen hos C. PARVULUM Nig, som De Bary lemnat i Conjug. sid. 48 och följande, bildas zygosporen hos denna art uti en tjockvüggig, afven efter zygosporens mognad qvarblifvande kopulationskanal och antager slutligen en oval eller fyrkantigt oval form. Hos C. caLosporum åter bildas zygosporen i en tunnväggig och redan före zygosporens mognad genom väggarnes upplösning forsvinnande kopulationskanal och företer såsom fullt utbildad en så att säga stjernlik form, beroende derpa att den mogna zygosporens membran ej är slät utan i stället försedd med kägelformiga, åt alla håll strållikt utgående utskott. Genom denna zygosporernas egendomliga form skiljer sig arten så betydligt från öfriga kända Closterier, att den lämpligen torde kunna uppställas såsom typ för 24 V. B. WITIROCK, ett eget underslägte likställdt med subgenus STAUROCERAS Kütz. Detta underslägte, åt hvilket jag gifvit benämningen AsTEROSELENE (af Corse = stjerna och gem = mane), dermed syftande pä zygosporernas stjernlika och de vegetativa cellulernas halfmanlika form, kan i korthet karakteriseras sälunda: ASTEROSELENE nov. subgen. CLOSTERIL. Zygospore globose, processubus conicis, radiatim dispositis, ornate. Af detta undersligte är C. CALOSPORUM ännu den enda representanten. Alla öfriga Closterier, hvilkas zygosporer äro kända, hafva släta sådana, vare sig att de till formen i öfrigt äro klotrunda, ovala eller fyrkantiga, och tillhöra sålunda andra underafdelningar af slägtet. Beträffande kopulationen hos C. CALOSPORUM må till hvad som förut blifvit sagdt läggas, att de kopulerande cellulerna nästan alltid äro af en osymmetrisk form (se fig. 11c), detta beroende derpä, att kopulation enligt regeln eger rum blott mel- lan celluler, som så nyss undergått delning, att den vid delningen bildade nya cellul- halfvan ännu ej hunnit växa ut till lika storlek med den gamla. Vidare kan anmär- kas att de kopulerande cellulerna regelmässigt vända den konkava sidan mot hvar- andra, samt att de tomma halfcellulernas läge efter slutad kopulation alltid är sådant, att de halfvor, som tillhört samma cellul, bilda med sina konvexa sidor mot hvaran- dra en rät eller något spetsig vinkel (se fig. 11 c). Den tid på året, vid hvil- ken kopulationen försiggår, är hösten, i slutet af September och början af Oktober månader. 13. C. acurum Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 177, t. 30, f. 5; Echinella acuta Lyngb. Hydroph. Dan. p. 209, t. 69 G). Hjulsängen. 14. C. SETACEUM Ehrb. (Abh. d. Akad. 1833 p. 239; C. Kützingii Bréb. Liste d. Desm. p. 156, t. 2, f. 40; Cleve Bidrag p. 495; Nordstedt Bidrag p. 42). Huseby. XI. GONATOZYGON De Bary. (in Hedw. 1856, N:o 16, p. 10, mut. char.; Conjug. p. 76). 1. G. BRÉBISSONI De Bary (Conjug. p. 77, t. 4, f. 26 et 27; Docidium asperum Bréb. Liste d. Desm. p. 147, t. 1, f. 33). Huseby. XI. BAMBUSINA Kütz. (Phye. germ. p. 140). 1. B. Borrert Cleve (Bidrag p. 496; Desmidium Borreri Ralts Ann. of V. B. WITTROCK, 25 Nat. Hist. v. 11, p. 315, t. 8, f. 4; Bambusina Brébissonii Kütz. Phye. Germ. p. 140). Hjulsängen, Hälsö, Göteborg; Haugelund. XIV. DESMIDIUM Ag. (Syst. Alg. p. XV, mut. char.; De Bary Conjug. p. 76). 1. D. CYLINDRICUM (Scot. Crypt. Flor t. et p. 293; Didymoprium Grevil- lei Kütz. Phye. gener. p. 166). Hjulsángen. 2. D. Swarızı Ag. (Syst. Alg. p. 9; Diatoma Swartzii Ag. Dispos. Alg. Suec. p. 34). Knifsta jernvagsstation, Hjulsängen. 3. D. aproconum Bréb. (Alg. Falaise 1835, p. 65, t. 2, sec. Ralfs). Hjulsängen. XV. SPHÆROZOSMA Corda. (Almanaeh de Carlsbad 1835, sec. Ralfs; Rabenh. Fl. Eur. Alg. sect. 3). 1. S. VERTEBRATUM Ralfs (Br. Desm. p. 65, t. 6, £. 1; Desmidium verte- bratum Bréb. Alg. Falaise 1835, p. 65, t. 2, sec. Ralfs). Hjulsängen; Huseby. 2. S. EXCAVATUM Ralfs (Ann. of Nat. Hist. v. 16, p. 15, t. 3, f. 8). Hjulsángen, Huseby. | 3.* S. BAMBUSINOIDES nov. spec. S. minimum, seriebus cellularum fragilibus, tubo et isthmis destitutis, cellulis a fronte suborculzeformibus, quarta parte longioribus quam latis, in- cisura mediana lineari, extrorsum paullum ampliata, a latere oblongo- ellipticis, utroque fine truncatis, medio leviter constrictis, a vertice ellipticis. Long. cell. 0,010—0,012 mm., lat. max. cell. 0,007—0,009, crassit. cell. 0,004—0,005 mm. — Fig. 12. Hälsö; Haugeluud. Såsom af diagnosen synes, äro cellulerna hos denna art omedelbart förenade med hvarandra och i afsaknad af ett gemensamt, rörformigt gelé-hylle. Antager man det af Brébisson uppställda slägtet SPONDYLOSIUM, kommer arten sålunda att till- höra detta. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 4 26 SKANDINAVIENS DESMIDIACEER. Bland förut kinda Sphærozosma-arter torde S. BAMBUSINOIDES behüfva jemn- füras endast med S. PULCHELLUM Archer. Dessa förete ej obetydlig öfverensstäm- melse. Skilnaderna dem emellan ligga, enligt Archers figur i Pritch Inf. taflan 3 att démma, hufvudsakligen deruti, att inskärningarne mellan halfcellulerna hos S. PUL- CHELLUM vidga sig ända fran sin innersta ända, dä de hos S. BAMBUSINOIDES till sin största del äro jemnbreda och fórst längst ut nagot vidga sig, samt deruti att cellulens bredd hos den förra är lika stor som längden, men hos den senare 7 min- dre àn denna. Ê Sitt namn har arten erhällit med anledning af en viss likhet i anseende till cellulform med BAMBUSINA Borrert Cleve. 4.* S. PYGMÆUM Rabenh. (Fl. Eur. Alg. sect. 3, p. 150; Cosmarium pyg- meum Archer Descript. 1864, p. 174. t. 6, f. 45—49). Huseby. Long. cell. 0,009—0,012 mm., lat. cell. 0,011— 0,013, lat. isthm. 0,005, crass. cell. 0,007 mm, En art med hvilken denna företer en omisskänlig likhet ir COSMARIUM TRUN- CATELLUM Rabenh. (Huastrum truncatellum Perty Kleinst. Lebensf. p. 209, t. 16, f. 13). Storlek och äfven form, nemligen dà cellulen ses fran den breda sidan, äro hos båda i det närmaste desamma. Betraktade uppifrån och från den smala sidan visa dock de hada arternas celluler sa stora skiljaktigheter att nagon forvexling ej kan ifrägakomma (förutsatt nemligen att Pertys figurer äro korrekta). Ett skal för ifrågavarande arts ofverflyttande fran slägtet COSMARIUM till släg- tet SPHJEROZOSMA utom det af Rabenhorst anförda, fran zygosporernas beskaffenhet hemtade, har jag trott mig finna deruti, att cellulerna ofta befinnas förenade med hvarandra 2 och 2 eller 3 och 3, äfven sedan de efter afslutad delning blifvit full- ständigt utbildade. Afven hos denna art visar sig sálunda ätminstone en tendens till den bandformiga anordning af eellulerna, som för slágtet i allmänhet är så karakte- ristisk. XVI. HYALOTHECA Ehrenb. (Monatsberiehte der K. Preus. Akad. der Wissensch. zu Berlin. Berlin 1840, sec. Rabenh.) 1. H. DISSILIENS Bréb. (in Ralfs Br. Desm. p. 51, t. 1, f. 1; Conferva dis- siliens Smith Engl. Bot. 1812, t. 2464, sec. Ralfs). Alsike, Ekholmen, Hjulsängen, Hällan. 2. H. mucosa Ehrenb. (Monatsb. 1840, sec. Rabenh.; Conferva mucosa Dillw. Brit. Conf. p. 46, t. B). Hälsö; Huseby. 3.*H. puBIA Kütz. (Phyc. Germ. p. 140; Spec. alg. p. 188; in Ralfs Br. SKANDINAVIENS DESMIDIACÉER. 27 Desm. p. 207, t. 35, f. 16; Archer in Pritch. Infus. p. 722; Rabenh. Alg. N:o 285; Fl. Eur. Alg. sect. 3, p. 152). B LEVIS nov. var. H. major, seriebus cellularum firmis, vagina mucosa non circum- datis; cellulis rotundato-quadratis, arctissime conjunctis, vesiculis chlo- rophyllaceis binis magnis, cytiodermate levi. Long. cell 0,028— 0,035 mm., lat. eell. 0,035, diam. vesie. ehloroph. 0,010 mm. — Fig. 13. Hjulsängen. Denna varietet skiljer sig frän hufvudformen derigenom, att den är omkring + större samt att den saknar de fyra punktlika upphójningarne på cellulmembranen, hvilka enligt beskrifning skola finnas hos hufvudformen; på de torkade exemplaren i Rabenhorsts " Algen Europa's” har jag dock ej- kunnat iakttaga dem. Trádarnes ändcelluler afvika alltid i afseende på formen från de öfriga cel- lulerna. De äro nemligen längre samt hafva den fria ändan fullständigt afrundad i stället för tvär. Till den för Desmidiacéerna i allmänhet så karakteristiska delningen af cel- lulen i tvenne lika hälfter genom en starkare eller svagare sammansnörning på mid- ten finnes här intet spår. Endast hos innehållet i cellulen är en tudelning märkbar. Hvarje cellul eger nemligen tvenne stora klorofyllblåsor och omkring dessa är kloro- fyllet anordnadt i tvenne temligen likformiga grupper. 28 Fig. 1. Fig. 2. Fig. 3. Fig. 4. Die, 5% Fig. 6. De 4 Fig. 8. Bug. 9. Fig. 10. Fig. 11. Fig. 12. Fig. 13. V. B. WIITROCK, SKANDINAVIENS DESMIDIACÉER. EXPLICATIO RGus Reo i EUASTRUM VENUSTUM Bréb. 8 Magus n. var. — Cellula vegetativa a fronte visa (400 amplif.). MICRASTERIAS TRUNCATA Bréb. f BAHUSIENSIS n. var. — Cellula vegeta- tiva a fronte visa (200 amplif.). COSMARIUM UNDULATUM Corda y MINUTUM n. var. — Cellula vegetativa a fronte visa (400 amplif.). COSMARIUM CONSPERSUM Ralfs 8 ROTUNDATUM nm. var. — Cellula vegeta- tiva evacuata, a fronte visa (400 amplif.). Cosmarium TuwarrEsm Ralfs 8 magus Rabenh. — Cellula vegetativa a fronte visa (400 amplif.). ARTHRODESMUS Incus Hass. INTERMEDIUS n. var. — a cellula vegetativa a fronte visa; a cellule vegetative evacuate, a fronte vise; 5 cellule vegetative evacuate a latere vise; c cellula vegetativa evacuata a ver- tice visa (omnes fig. 400 amplif.). STAURASTRUM BIDENTATUM nm. sp. a cellula vegetativa a fronte visa; 6 cel- lula vegetativa a vertice visa (utraque fig. 400 amplif.). STAURASTRUM PILOSUM Archer. — a cellula vegetativa a fronte visa; b semicellula copulatione evacuata a vertice visa; c zygospora matura (omnes fig. 400 amplif.). STAURASTRUM LÆVE Ralfs 8 CLEVEI n. var. — a cellula vegetativa a fronte visa; in semicellula superiore omnes sex radii, in inferiore tres soli conspicui sunt; d cellula vegetativa a vertice visa (utraque fig. 400 amplif.). DocIDIUM GRACILE mihi. — a cellula vegetativa a fronte visa (200 amp- lif.); in apiee cellule superiore duo, in inferiore unus tantum trium pro- cessuum terminalium eonspieui sunt; 5 semicellula evaeuata a fronte visa (300 amplif.); duo soli processus terminales sunt conspicui. CLOSTERIUM CALOSPORUM n. Sp. — a et b cellule vegetativæ evacuate a fronte vise; ¢ cellule dus copulate cum zygospora semimatura, in ea- nali eopulationis adhue inclusa; d zygospora matura cum semicellulis quattuor evaeuatis, reliquiis duarum cellularum eopulatarum (omnes fig. 400 amplif.). SPHJEROZOSMA BAMBUSINOIDES n. Sp. — a series cellularum vegetativarum a fronte visarum; 5 series cellularum vegetativarum a latere visarum; e cellula vegetativa a vertice visa (omnes fig. 400 amplif.). HYALOTHECA DUBIA Kütz. 8 Lavis n. var. — Series cellularum vegetati- varum a fronte visarum (400 amplif.). Nova deta Soctet Upsal Ser. 5 4€ Vol Vit : NESS vum et ER ee a SUN NN Er erc OT NEN nn A /, 2; 50000 0060 20060066 b essessssse 19 co a ÉD à Tith o.tr-h.c.¢ Haglma. SSBOWittroGk. del. 4 - à | Euastrum venustum. 9 Micrasterias truncata. 3 Cosmarium undulatum. 4 Cosm.conspersum. 9. Cosm. Thwaitesti. 6 Arthrodesmus Incus. 7. Staurastrum bidentatum. 8. Staur pilosum. 9. Staur. leve. 10. Docidium gracile. tl Closterium calosporum.12. Sphærozosma bambusinoides. 15. Hyalotheca dubia. At LULZ TOLLIT HEC stab Baa dave ur karen. wer 3 T rota, Are ET Á Menu th r SCHERER cw e Piin nd S e d a our 4 | # nre DA y ps. x LO0TTO ZITZTG ^30 DRORICLZ MC RN MILI OADM "y (A XORTAGWUI H-0 À x y a AEN s px DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA DANS UN PROBLEME ISOPERIMETRIQUE PAR C-E. LUNDSTROM. (Prisenté À LA Socteré ROYALE DES SCIENCES p'Ursar LE 13 FEVRIER 1869). UPSAL, ED. BERLING, IMPRIMEUR DE L'UNIVERSITÉ. 1869. S4 ey ie dae ste | a ; fet NES d qui Li Mp tto V LM à: TNR T 2] { Fe eov ra hr ee: yt mi OT EA un me qu We at (uar Wr "wr? e i | j TI LAS tan je BI Krieg (lo ore fede ieee A ROT ove o o Y cl rre TE Een) a MAN TE [rån m TT nor. MH th hoste: P: | Pring "iet igou FA OPA | jn PITT t hel BN ek Ben SE Pipe OL MAD on mo Hon qe VET. rae n nn Thco RL Py SPAT CR de pm mte Be ARR ER Canvas LAU and s AE CM Aun iau TIT itr ala pod anth ea v Loic nai SRE TUTO ae I ade ELA nuo olg oer viti, fnr aee bebo oed M ime uus MA [PIPE dO Suet an tyr ES Hg Hl OR «n. d Air’ geh 21] ETAT Hh 1 tin she Ot gt « - 12 ue 14 OTTO}. en DET baa iade TII diti [. ir m ) HIM n un ur une Mes MT faut x. "m "Hi ANO, ve i nN Big) M My TT m aol dp i : vd eT UN — Nom M IL uper 1 M "m | RD 5 4n i P JA T INTRODUCTION. [. question: Etant donnée la solution d'un probléme isopérimétrique, trou- ver les conditions nécessaires et suffisantes auxquelles elle doit satisfaire pour donner un vrai maximum ou un vrai minimum, c'est-à-dire, pour être une solution proprement dite, est sans nul doute l'une des questions les plus difficiles du calcul des variations. Aussi attend-elle encore une réponse gé- nérale et définitive. Les résultats incomplets auxquels ont abouti jusqu'ici les travaux sur ce point, sont d'ailleurs fournis par des méthodes trop com- pliquées, ee nous semble, pour faire partie d'un cours élémentaire du cal- cul mentionné. Voilà les motifs qui nous ont déterminé à entreprendre iei lexposition d'une méthode, à notre avis, plus effective et plus simple. Pour donner plus d'homogénéité à cette exposition, nous avons jugé nécessaire d'embrasser, sommairement et à titre d'introduction, les autres points cardinaux du calcul des isopérimétres. Quoique nous espérions arriver par cette méthode à une solution générale de la question proposée, nous nous bornerons iei à considérer uni- quement les problémes dans lesquels on cherche les maxima et les minima d'une intégrale simple, tout développement naturel d'une théorie devant, se- lon nous, commencer par ce qu'elle a de moins compliqué. Le contenu général des problèmes qui feront l'objet de cette esquisse, peut done étre formulé dans ces termes: : Trouver une courbe de telle forme et à de telles limites, que, tout en satisfaisant aux conditions du probléme, elle fasse prendre à une inté- grale dépendant de cette forme et ayant les mémes limites, une valeur maxima ou minima. Nous rappellerons, pour commencer, que les maxima et les minima dont il s'agit ne sont point les plus grandes ou les plus petites valeurs pos- Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 1 2 C.-E. LUNDSTRÖM, sibles des intégrales proposées. Leur caractère distinctif est quil soit im- possible de les augmenter, en cas de maximum, ou de les diminuer, en cas de minimum, par une déformation quelconque de la courbe et un déplace- ment quelconque des limites, pourvu que ces changements soient compatibles avec les conditions du problème et suffisamment petits. Ce caractère s'exprime analytiquement comme suit: Soit S, la valeur de l'intégrale rapportée à la courbe dont y est Yordonnée et prise entre les limites x, et x; soit S, la valeur de la méme intégrale rapportée à une autre courbe, définie par l'ordonnée 7, et à d'autres limites £, et £,. Si la différence S, — S,, ou brièvement AS, , reste toujours positive ou toujours négative, quelle que soit la courbe de toutes les 4 qui satisfont aux conditions du probléme et s'approchent suffi- samment de la courbe des y, il existe dans le premier cas un vrai maxi- mum, dans le second un vrai minimum. C'est ce caractére qui sert de base aux théorémes conduisant à la solution du probléme, toutes les fois qu'il en admet une. Mais il est nécessaire à cet effet d'avoir une expression générale de la différence AS,. Or voici comment nous la formulerons: Soient æ et y l'abscisse et l'ordonnée de la courbe cherchée, y, y,...y™, les dérivées successives de y par rapport à a. L'intégrale en question sera de la forme T2 2 2 2) y Qu, y, y°, YO... YO) dx , Ti où Q désigne une fonction connue des quantités sur lesquelles elle opère. On a donc, suivant la définition de AS,, & T2 AS, — Ola, 7; nant. A) da -— O(a, y, Ye yP custodie © 1 ou plus brievement NS, — [ot f Q, da, par où est donnée la signification des notations Q, et Q,, dont nous nous servirons dans la suite. DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA. 3 La courbe des 7 s’approchant indéfiniment de la courbe des y, nous n'avons besoin que d'une expression approximative de AS,. Dans ce but, nous introduisons les différences d ORO 7 désignées respectivement par Ay ; NOD ; An AP et nous en eomplétons la definition par l'addition importante que toutes les quantités y, y, y®...y, 4, 1°, 7...” correspondent à la même abscisse. Quant à ces différences, nous rappellerons qu'il est permis d’abais- ser la valeur numérique de chacune d'elles au-dessous d'une limite arbitraire, si petite qu'elle soit. Cela n'est en effet que l'interprétation analytique de ce qu'on entend par une déformation suffisamment petite. Dans des conditions bien connues, et en employant une notation sym- bolique très-usitée, on pourra done écrire: r—n nr) ®, a Q, = > dn AYD RS y? Sr fll, aX A yn a) | Q, == KR, um ou R désigne un reste que l'on diminuera indéfiniment vis-à-vis des termes précédents en rendant assez petites les valeurs numériques de Ay, Ay®, Ay.) sete. Cela posé, on peut remplacer l'expression exacte de AS, par la suivante E & 2. rn tet [ode [Sa pr S asy Mo Q,da + DE rt ja) {Pr da, N 0) 7 7 re ja r=0 bien entendu, à la condition qu'une seule valeur de y et une seule valeur de 7 correspondent à la méme valeur de x pendant l'intervalle x, — a, . On eomprendra facilement l'importance de cette restriction, mais ce point étant d'une nature trop spéciale pour une esquisse, nous en supprimons ici la discussion. Ayant trouvé ainsi l'expression cherchée, nous établirons les condi- tions nécessaires et suffisantes pour qu'elle soit ou constamment positive ou constamment négative de quelque maniére que varie Ay, en restant toute- fois dans les bornes que nous donnerons plus bas. 4 C.-E. LUNDSTRÖM, Or les termes linéaires par rapport à Ay étant la partie prépondé- rante de AS,, il est naturel de les considérer séparément. Mais ces ter- mes, ou A, e par lequel ils seront désormais désignés, doivent étre trans- formés afin que la quantité arbitraire Ay, qui entre implieitement dans ses dérivées Ay®, Ay®... Ay”, se détache distinetement de la partie invaria- ble. Ces transformations, qui ne sont que des intégrations par parties suc- cessivement exécutées, donnent le résultat connu: IP De AR syn Py AY: a4 N Si Guy (2); nh Ay. TIU — 23 zu Iei se présente naturellement la question suivante: A quelles restric- tions prés, la différence Ay, qui se trouve sous le signe intégral, doit-elle étre regardée comme arbitraire? Bien que Ay soit, d'aprés ce qui précéde, tellement arbitraire qu'on le peut exprimer par des fonctions différentes de # pour des parties diffe- rentes de l'intervalle x, — x, , et par conséquent lannuler aussi pour une étendue arbitraire du méme intervalle, il est important d'observer que Ay avec ses n dérivées successives, doit satisfaire à la condition de continuité, et que Ay avee ses (n — 1) dérivées successives, doit étre nul au point oü la déformation commence et au a ou elle finit, si ces points sont situés en dedans des limites a, et x,; ou, namen parlant, que la courbe des „, divergeant de la courbe de y pendant une partie de l'intervalle Xx, — 2, doit avoir avec elle un contact de (n — 1)" ordre au moins aux points de divergence. Sans cela, la dérivée 7” serait destituée de toute signification aux points où la courbe des 7 s'unit à la courbe des y pour constituer avec elle une seule branche pendant le reste de l'intervalle x, — a, . Une remarque analogue s'applique évidemment aux points oü la courbe des 4 est représentée par des fonctions différentes, quand on passe d'un côté à l’autre. Ce sont là des restrictions genérales que la nature méme du pro- bléme impose à Ay. Mais en outre, Ay doit satisfaire dans chaque cas spécial à de certaines conditions données, appartenant ordinairement à l'une ou à l’autre des deux classes suivantes: Dans la premiére, nous rangeons toutes les conditions qui prescri- vent qu'une ou plusieurs intégrales, prises le long de la courbe entre les limites x, et a,, doivent avoir des valeurs constantes; dans la seconde, DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA 5 toutes celles qui expriment une relation entre les valeurs limites de y et ces restrictions spéciales dans l'ex- de ses dérivées jusqu'à la n°" C’est Il faut naturellement introduir pression de AS,, avant d'aborder la question de la constance du signe ce que nous allons faire. Soit done Ta E: Us p(x, y?, y...y)dax a une intégrale de celles qui doivent rester constantes quand Ay varie Pour plus de symétrie, nous avons supposé que S, contient aussi bre n. Cela ne modifie en rien la des dérivées successives de y au nombre n cénéralité des formules déduites. La dite condition entraine l'équation S de Hr J+ da, qui, aprés Tomission des termes d'ordre supérieur au second, et des inté- grations par parties de AS,,, deviendra Scots aren + [LS ar) ous © ate s Site v) ps Ag es +f tre Sf bie = mi Soit, de plus, | Fe utu ey ENT une équation de condition de la seconde classe On a done aussi l'équation | Jee NUE 6 C.-E. LUNDSTROM, qui peut étre approximativement remplacée par Ze gs De Bul r-—mn-—1 r=n—1 Is 10 s) {f+ r—n—1 u^ + Eus +23 d? == A eb = OM le degré d'approximation étant le même qu'auparavant. Aa, désigne la dif- férenee £, — a, qui peut être diminuée à volonté. A laide de ces équations, nous transformerons AS, de Ja maniére 3 y suivante: Nous ajoutons les équations de la premiére classe, multipliées par des constantes A, A, etc., à AS,. Pourvu que ces constantes soient con- venablement choisies, il est permis de regarder Ay, en tant qu'il entre dans A,S,, comme arbitraire et uniquement soumis aux restrietions générales mentionnées ci-dessus. Quant aux termes d'ordre supérieur au premier, ils demeurent assujettis aux mêmes équations de condition, ce qu'il est néces- saire d'observer, dés qu'on veut examiner le signe de ces termes. Nous traiterons de la méme maniére les équations de la seconde classe. Les facteurs indéterminés seront iei désignés par p, pm ete. Ils pourront, de méme que les constantes A, À, À..., être déterminés de manière à faire disparaître des termes linéaires les quantités supposées dé- pendantes. Après cela, les valeurs limites de Ay et de ses dérivées, ainsi que Aa, et Ax, deviennent des quantités indépendantes et arbitraires, en tant qu'elles entrent linéairement dans AS,. L'expression de a S,, transformé de cette manière, sera uy DURE ya Pt Ah + Ad, + ete...) Ay da + dx Ti få sis | BTE =) (0 + A 4, x + ete....)da + DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA. 7 eee Tics E m 1 + WES: "LE e v) grew 0 E Sh taht jdn m-—1 2 ern Y ft ah +] + ag o Iz Kılı Sed | A cn 1 à y + ile 52 AY sus) (pf + tA) - 35 (Af tinh M Wye r=0 ag: 5 FIT ef af HD + f (Edu Ada dde + tf (OA Ay A )dr— — des termes de substitution analogues pour la limite inférieure. Après cela, il est possible d'examiner le signe de A, $,, qui est aussi le signe de A S,, quand on prend les valeurs numériques de A y et de ses dérivées suffisamment petites. Or il est immédiatement clair que ce signe ne peut jamais étre con- stant, parce quil est toujours possible de donner à A, S, deux valeurs éga- les et opposées, A y étant par la transformation précédente, délivré des res- trictions spéciales de A, S,. Le signe de A S, ne pourra done pas non plus rester constant, à moins que A, S, n'existe pas. Mais pour que cela ait lieu, il est nécessaire que la courbe des y satisfasse à l'équation diffé- rentielle x Te ER EE Z P^ 1) (s) guo (Phe + Ady +) = 0, comme on le démontre aisément, en s'appuyant sur ce que A y, étant dé- livré des restrictions spéciales de A,S,, peut être, à l'exception de par- ties aussi petites qu'on voudra, annulé pendant tout l'intervalle à, — a, , et que Ay peut prendre pour ces parties des valeurs exclusivement positives ou exclusivement négatives. Si cette équation différentielle, nommée l'équation indéfinie, a lieu, les termes d'intégration de A, S, disparaissent à l'exception de ceux compris 8 C.-E. LUNDSTRÖM, sous les signes ‘et ye Pour que les termes de substitution de & A, S, disparaissent aussi, il faut en outre que le système des équations, dites équations aux limites, soit satisfait. Ce système s'obtient en égalant à zéro les coefficients des valeurs limites de Ay et de ses dérivées avec ceux de Am, et Aa. Toutes ces quantités sont en effet, comme nous l'avons expliqué plus haut, à regarder comme indépendantes et arbitraires dans A, S,. Les coefficients de Aa, et Aa, embrassent naturellement les facteurs de Aw, et de Aw, dans le développement des intégrales Nous inscrirons seulement les équations qui auront lieu à la limite supérieure: A r=n—m > | 2 = 1) ele yet + m) (Qj. Nas Nay DT ayer? Fm) (Mf a fut = 0 Os | Q, + ^ da Ly är A: Nos vis Spe lee =P Bi fu + Il est clair que ces équations suffisent à annuler A, $,, quelle que soit la courbe des 7. Il est clair aussi qu'elles suffisent en général avec les équations de condition, à la détermination de y comme fonction de x. Quand Q + Ad, + Ayla +... ne contient que des dérivées de l'ordon- née, quelques constantes resteront indéterminées, mais leurs valeurs n'influent pas dans ce cas sur la valeur de S. Supposé quil soit trouvé une fonction de x dont la substitution à y annule A, s,, il reste à examiner le signe des termes d'ordre supérieur au premier dans A $,. Nous voilà done arrivé à l'objet principal de ce mémoire. DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA. 9 DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA. Les termes linéaires de A S, étant ainsi constamment nuls, les ter- mes suivants dominent le signe: y 1 rn (rae re Ti Te + AT T. Vs diy ein VT + [iere inne AN Aa: | as Ese | + des termes analogues à la limite inférieure. V, et F, ont, comme on l'apercoit facilement, remplacé les sommes Q, + Alu + Arte, + ete. et pf + ah, + Mh, + ete, et l'intégrale t+ Ar=& V, dx sest d’abord dissoute en frie Sy: ncn 2 (m) 2 | | EN AV sy) V, (de. r=0 puis en T2 T. fes Ax d T Am | V, LE um. Ar s $59) Vida, 0 dont le premier terme a déja disparu. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 2 10 C.-E. LUNDSTRÖM, Nous désignons ces termes par A,S,, et nous représentons la solu- tion trouvée y comme substituée partout. D'après ce qui précède, Ay et ses dérivées sont assujettis aux mêmes équations de condition qu'avant la transformation de A, S,. L'élimination effectuée dans A, S, a seulement introduit quelques termes nouveaux dans ANSE Voici done la question å résoudre: A quelles conditions le signe de AS, reste-t-il constant, quand Ay se meut arbitrairement en dedans des limites marquées par les équations de condition et les restrictions générales? Pour trouver une premiére condition nécessaire, concevons la défor- mation étendue sur une partie seulement de la courbe des y entre les limi- tes, et remarquons que cette partie peut être prise aussi petite qu'on voudra. Cela posé, les points de divergence seront situés en dedans des limites, et, en vertu du contact qui doit avoir lieu en ces points entre la courbe des 7 et la courbe des y, l'on aura seulement à considérer l'intégrale es (NV ey © ) Vd | ee VR a a étant l'abscisse du point où la divergence commence, et a + e l'abscisse du point où elle finit. Nous allons maintenant démontrer que le signe de cette intégrale 2 est le même que celui de la quantité (es) V, pourvu que cette quantité ait un signe constant et une valeur finie autre que 0 en chaque point de l'intervalle (2 + €) — 2, quand e est suffisamment diminué. Cela sera mis en évidence, en attribuant aux autres quantités de lintégrale une plus grande influence sur le signe qu'elles n'en peuvent réel- lement avoir, mais en abaissant au contraire le terme qui contient le fac- 8 Y? : teur (Gra) V au-dessous de ce qu'il vaut dans le cas le plus défavorable. Comparons par exemple: s »2V em E E y AY? AY? Saye dx avec b (Ay (s) V da , a a (CRETE DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA. 11 Nous augmentons l'influence de la première intégrale en donnant à chaque élément le méme signe et en substituant partout à la place de o? V 2 [ y > Do Cette valeur ne pourra être infinie, parce qu’alors la formule approximative de AS, donnée ci-dessus serait en défaut, cas exclus par nos suppositions. Nous remplacons de plus Ay“ par sa plus grande valeur numérique dans le méme intervalle. Si ces valeurs maxima sont marquées par l'indice 1, et la valeur moyenne des valeurs numeriques de Ay” par l'indice m, la valeur de lin- tégrale augmentée sera sa plus grande valeur numérique pendant lintervalle considéré. V (r) (s) Garo AYE e. Ay® étant nul au point @ et variant continuellement de là jusqu'au point a + e, où il est de nouveau nul, nous pouvons énoncer que AD (r +1) 1 ^y, > € , où les indices m et 1 ont la méme signification qu'auparavant. Et par la méme raison, il est clair quon a Ay 1) (r + 2) 1 AY, > € A (r+ 3) 1 AY, £ PNY ieee (s) 1 Aves > E (n —1) Ay” ah, . A € Par conséquent, il sera permis de poser A "o, k gar ’ Ay? 12 C.-E. LUNDSTROM , k étant un facteur nécessairement > 1, et de méme Ay? kek, m GT ?) où £, est aussi > 1. De l'autre côté, nous abaissons la valeur de l'autre intégrale en b) o 2 | SV : substituant partout à Ge Så plus petite valeur pendant l’intervalle (a Fe) — 2, car le signe de tous ses éléments est le méme selon notre supposition. Si cette valeur est marquée par l'indice 0 et la valeur moyenne de (Ay”)? par l'indice m, l'intégrale ainsi diminuée sera API P S (asy) Cas DE La valeur de cette expression éprouvera une nouvelle diminution, si nous substituons à (Ay)? le carré de la valeur moyenne de Ay” ou (Ay)?. En effet, on a toujours, y étant une fonction de x, “m fir fit | | Pour prouver cet énoncé, nous introduisons la valeur moyenne de Y Ym, définie par l'égalité Syde Ym = = £ Cela posé, on a évidemment M v.) da er: c EU Ajoutant au second membre de cette équation lintégrale ate J Vs (y — Ym) da € ? DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA. 13 ce qui est permis, parce quelle est identiquement nulle, nous aurons 0€ rs JJ idet S yy — yi) da bep Jismark a La différence peut done se mettre sous la forme @+E S (à — yn + dx £ ce qui montre qu'elle est toujours positive et qu'elle est nulle seulement dans le cas où y devient constante. Or, malgré cette diminution, il est possible de rendre SV \ (AYRE)? (aul gran) numeriquement plus grande que Bev NAG) ee ec 7) CEU MT Ti en prenant une valeur suffisamment petite de e, car 2(n — v) est toujours ae A plus grand que s— 7. Il est donc démontré que le signe de Cyr est aussi le signe de J = (Sa) vae dans les suppositions mentionnées. m Sy . , 2 Nous en concluons quil faut que yo} ait le méme signe en 14 C.-E. LUNDSTRÖM, chaque point entre les limites, pour que le signe de A,S, reste constant. Si en effet cette quantité avait le signe + en un point et le signe — en un autre, on pourrait, en étendant la déformation une première fois au voisinage seulement du premier point et la seconde à celui du second, faire prendre à A,S, deux signes opposés. Le raisonnement qui précède, suppose aussi Sy ay”) individuels sans changement du signe, il faut faire un examen particulier au voisinage de ces points; mais nous ne nous arrêterons pas à la discussion 27 de ces cas spéciaux. Si, au contraire, Gym): etait constamment nul, d’au- ue ne s’annule en aucun point. Si cela a lieu en quelques points q tres quantités détermineraient le signe. Ces quantités seront obtenues en réduisant l'intégrale Te TEN | (> ay. ) Vda = (0) Ta à la forme ae r=n—1 J 2 A, (Ay? de, A, étant une fonction de x. La possibilité de cette réduction se voit en considérant Vintégrale WR): Ici deux cas se présentent: m a) La différence s — r est un nombre pair 2p. Aprés p intégrations par parties successivement effectuées, il reste sous le signe intégral d \? ye =» =| (F(a) y?) à Le premier terme de cette expression est déjà de la forme voulue. DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA. 15 @) La différence (s—r) est un nombre impair 2p + 1. Après avoir répété p fois l'intégration par parties, on a, sous le signe intégral, (s —p) dv (r) y as (x) y?). Le premier terme de cette expression est Oh TE yr +P) F(x) E et peut s'écrire ye +p +1 one + 2) F(a) ; qui, intégré de nouveau par parties, donne (r + p) tyne sous le signe intégral. Les termes restants étant de la méme forme que ceux traités plus haut, et ayant pour indices des nombres diminués, on parviendra nécessaire- ment au but proposé par la continuation de l'opération. Les termes de substitution, düs aux intégrations répétées, disparais- sent tous, si la déformation n'embrasse pas les points limites. En rappro- chant les limites de la déformation, on prouvera, par la méthode ci-dessus, que, la réduction opérée, le coefficient de (Ay"-—?)* déterminera le signe, pourvu que ce coefficient ait lui-méme un signe constant. Si cette quantité était aussi constamment nulle, le tour viendrait au coefficient de (Ay"—”)?, ete. Nous pourrons donc compléter de la maniére suivante la condition nécessaire que nous avons trouvée plus haut: L'intégrale étant, par des intégrations répétées, réduite à la forme Tres BN 2 | d'A (syfde, 20 16 C.-E. LUNDSTRÓM, la première des quantités A,, à partir de A,, qui ne s'évanouit pas, dé- terminera le signe de l'intégrale, en prenant e suffisamment petit, ce qui donne comme condition nécessaire de l'existence d'un vrai maximum ou dun vrai minimum, que cette quantité doit avoir le méme signe en tous les points de l'intervalle a, — x, . Si cette condition est remplie, il s'ensuit qu'aucune déformation ad- missible, embrassant une partie suffisamment petite de la courbe des y entre les limites, ne pourra changer le signe de A, S,. Nous allons maintenant voir sil en est de méme, quand la déformation embrasse aussi les points limites. Outre l'intégrale considérée, on a donc les termes suivants: i Ww. Wu. PA aga | (Ma se)" 2s + r=n—1 EN + an | S ar ga) f OEY A Ea) + des termes analogues à la limite inférieure. Concevons la déformation étendue au voisinage de x, entre a, —e€ et v, +¢. En ce cas, on prouvera, par un raisonnement analogue à celui 2? que nous avons donné page 10, non-seulement que la quantité COR pourvu qu'elle ait une valeur finie à signe constant, déterminera le signe de l'intégrale Dn > AD a V dx dy" AL LE mais encore qu'elle surmontera l'influence de 9; r=n—1 D Ay” sa) F^ tp emit) si l'on prend e suffisamment petit. DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA. 17 En effet, chaque terme de 7 p=n—1 . | (> ay ya) r=0 qui contient en facteur un produit de la forme AyAy® et qui est une quan- tité finie (ce qu’on doit toujours supposer), sera, d’aprés ce qui précéde, numériquement inférieur à A ey P d (^y (2? V, si méme on l’augmente en remplaçant | Ay?Ay? par | (Ay?) ou par l (Ay?) Ay? et Ay? étant les plus grandes valeurs numériques de Ay” et Ay? pendant l'intervalle x, — (x, — €), en admettant toujours que e soit assez diminué. Prenons pour exemple le cas où r et s — n — 1. D'après la mé- thode indiquée, nous aurons à mettre (Ay“—”)? à la place de | (Agee): l'indice marquant la plus grande valeur numérique de AY"? pendant l'inter- valle x, — (x, — e). Or, comme nous l'avons déjà prouvé, SV A re 2 a TE gay de est num. > (ax A In Ti — € et pourra par conséquent être augmenté autant qu'on le voudra relativement T au terme qui contient | (Ay*-PY. La comparaison avec les termes nt as J à Ay? — ys) Vide + aa [5 : ps av dr, donne un résultat semblable, comme nous allons le montrer en nous ap- puyant sur ce que y satisfait aux équations page 7 et 8. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. II. 3 18 C.-E. LUNDSTRÖM, D'abord on aura, par des intégrations par parties, l'identité To + AL La + A Te Ins ‚de = P UE 24 da + 10 Te Tr n rzn—m cm V m — 1) pe + Dar : 2 ee | scene T2 qui, en vertu des équations page 7 et 8, se transforme en celle-ci: nr De mn rn ) i (r) = ON (Saya) Fae = UE DE YG) Ges r=0 m-—1i ye 5 es 3 (r + 1) — AP [ox Ay sak r=0 Le terme négatif du membre droit est détruit par une partie de l'expression r=n—1l "s ay se)" de sorte qu'il reste seulement an a; y d sco Age d yrm 3 m-1 expression qui ne contient aucune dérivée, dont l'indice soit > n—1. Cela étant, si l'on se rappelle que Az, pourra être, en vertu de l'équation T2 page 6, remplacé par une expression linéaire contenant fär et ses dérivées jusqu'à la (» — 1)"* au plus, on comprendra facilement que la somme considérée DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA. 19 Ta + Ars Ta (> Ay 5 yo] ae + AS i "m Ay 5,9) F Te n'nfluera pas non plus sur le signe de A,S,. Il en est de méme des termes restants Te a (Gr + gar): parce quils ne contiennent pas non plus de dérivée au-delà de la (n — 1)°" de AY. Zz Si Aa, ne dépendait point de x, et de ses dérivées, la comparai- son entre les termes qui contiennent Az, et les autres serait naturellement impossible. Ce cas sera traité ci-dessous en connexion avec un autre. Le résultat obtenu par lexamen précédent, pourra donc s'énoncer comme suit: Aucune déformation admissible de la courbe des y, pourvu qu'elle en embrasse une partie suffisamment petite, ne pourra changer le signe de ; Sy Á i : A, S,, toutes les fois.que Qy9y a le méme signe en tous les points entre les limites, et une valeur finie autre que zéro. Cela s'étend aussi au cas ou la déformation amène des changements des points limites, pourvu que le déplacement de l'ordonnée limite dépende de Ay et de ses dérivées. 0 re , . e Dans le signe de la dérivée partielle QYPE I nous avons donc e trouvé la marque qui sépare les valeurs maxima des minima, et dans la constance du méme signe, une condition nécessaire à leur existence. Dans le cas oü la dite dérivée est constamment nulle entre les limi- tes, nous avons déjà fait voir quelles sont les quantités dont le signe sert de marque de séparation. Ce serait maintenant le lieu d'examiner si ces quantités dominent le signe, lors méme que les extrémités de la courbe éprouvent des changements. Mais il est immédiatement clair qu'elles ne le feront point, si Ay" se trouve dans les termes de substitution. Il faut done, pour que la somme de ces termes ne change pas de signe, recourir aux conditions connues auxquelles doit satisfaire un polynome composé de 20 C.-E. LUNDSTRÖM, termes quadratiques et rectangulaires pour conserver toujours le méme signe. Cela n’est pas moins nécessaire dans le cas où Aa, ne dépend pas de | Ay et de ses dérivées. Ces conditions étant bien connues, il est superflu de les énumérer ici. L'examen du signe de A, S,, quand il s'agit de déformations suffi- samment petites, conduit donc aux conditions nécessaires, mais non suffi- santes, pour l'existence d'un vrai maximum ou d'un vrai minimum. Ces premiéres conditions étant supposées remplies, nous passerons à la recherche des autres. Puisque une petite déformation ne changera pas le signe de A,S,, élargissons l'intervalle (o + c) — x en faisant glisser le long de la courbe le point qui correspond à &--«. Sil arrive mainte- nant, en quelque lieu, qu'on puisse changer le signe de A,S, par une déter- mination convenable de Ay, il faut qu'on ait déjà dépassé le point oü il était possible d'annuler A,S,, mais non d'en changer le signe. Pour le prouver, supposons qu il soit possible, quand la déformation s’etend de a à un certain point æ+e, de changer le signe de A,S, de + en —, mais que ce soit impossible si elle finit avant ce point, et impos- sible en outre de l'annuler sans rendre Ay identiquement nul. On pour- rait alors, en étendant la déformation à un point précédent aussi prés qu'on le voudrait du point a ++, trouver des courbes des 7 qui s'appro- chassent indéfiniment de celle qui rendait A,S, négatif, tandis que les va- leurs correspondantes de A,S, resteraient séparées par un intervalle fini, ce qui est contraire à la continuité que nous avons supposée dès le com- mencement. Il est done clair qu'on arrivera d'abord à un point où il sera possible d’annuler A, S, sans rendre Ay identiquement nul. Mais cela ne se fera pas par une déformation quelconque, puisque A,S, serait alors in- dépendant de Ay; au contraire, il est aisé de voir qu'elle sera assujettie à la condition d'annuler les termes linéaires dans la variation de A,S,, ou, d'après la notation adoptée, dans A A,S,, Ay étant considéré comme la fonction inconnue devant donner une valeur maxima ou minima de A,S,. Admettons en effet que A A.S, ne soit pas = 0. Il serait done possible, en faisant varier Ay, de changer le signe de A,S,, ce qui est contraire à la supposition. Cela conduit naturellement au méme probléme relatif à Ay que celui que nous avons résolu relativement à y dans l'introduction de ce mémoire. Or les termes restants de A,S, sont, comme on l'a vu, (^ r=. 7, —Rn—l1 d 2 & [| (Sarge sonans DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA. 2T r—n—m MI E r=0 zc E AGS nh oe = + des termes semblables à la limite inférieure. En appliquant les règles données à cette expression, on trouve que Ay doit satisfaire à l'équation différentielle Sev où AA, AA, etc. sont des constantes jouant le même rôle que A, A,, etc dans le probléme relatif à y; on trouve de plus que le système suivant d'équations doit avoir lieu aux limites, si celles-ci sont affectées par la déformation, (Say 3 Je + sa ar + Aa.) = 0 (2), d 2 3) y (r) SIS viento d ute + (Sar 3) rt Duc sd AA is A tt + oe + dm +] = 01 absentia: Va 14^. oft: dual (3). L'équation IS» y? To * ^^ 1 IVA Hardt. Ex NECS ewe oe. ORC TORRE EE IM CEN (4), dû à la variation de Ax, doit aussi être remplie. 22 C.-E. LUNDSTRÓM , On l'obtient sous cette forme en employant comme une valeur suffisamment approchée de [pes | (Says) rae. Ts Si la déformation n'affecte pas les points limites, on aura, au lieu du système ci-dessus, 2» équations, exprimant que Ay et ses (n — 1) dé- rivées s'évanouissent aux points de divergence. Nous allons maintenant faire voir que la solution de l'équation diffé- rentielle (2), qui est linéaire par rapport à Ay, est donnée en méme temps qu'on a trouvé la solution générale de l'équation différentielle page 7 déter- minant la fonction cherchée y. En effet, soit cette solution y ESSE € y € +++ Con) a où c &...c, désignent des constantes introduites par l'intégration. Si l'on donne à ces constantes les valeurs nouvelles e, +eAc, % +eAG; ce Cm +6 A €, la fonction éprouvera un changement qu'on pourra expri- r=2n i d ; ee mer par € A y, car il est = « [9 A FH RK, où R désigne un reste trm Cr qui s'évanouit avec e. Il est évident que y He A y satisfait à la même équation différentielle que y. Substituons donc y +e Ay à y dans cette équation, divisons la nouvelle équation par e et passons à l'équation limite, en rendant e = 0. Cette équation sera précisement l'équation linéaire en A y donnée ci-dessus. D'un autre côté, on a, quand ¢ converge vers zéro, qui est par conséquent la solution générale avec ses 2n constantes arbitraires. Pour la détermination de ces constantes, on a, si la déformation embrasse les DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA. 23 points limites, les équations aux limites, qui, avec les équations de condition page 5 et 6, sont en nombre suffisant. En effet, les quantités à déterminer sont, outre les 2n constantes A c, les constantes A A, les constantes Aj, Aa et Az,. Les équations aux limites sont au nombre 2» + 2, les équations de condition page 5 et 6 sont au méme nombre que les constantes A A et Ay, ce qui prouve lénoneé. Si, au contraire, la déformation ne s'étend point aux limites, on a, aux points de divergence, les 2» équations NUN IA ges. ^» [aye — 0 | alius os 16) IR = 0 ln =" EE EN qui, avec les équations page 5 et 6, sont encore en nombre égal à celui des in- connues, puisque A x, et A à, disparaissent en ce cas ainsi que les constantes Ap. On voit aisément que dans l'un ou l'autre cas, les équations sont li- néaires et homogénes par rapport aux inconnues, d'oü il suit qu'il n'y pourra généralement pas être satisfait par des quantités finies autres que 0. Il est done clair que leurs coefficients doivent étre soumis à une certaine condi- tion, pour que cela ait lieu. Cette condition s'obtient en égalant à zéro le déterminant des mémes coefficients. Il en résulte la régle suivante: Examinez d'abord le signe de A, S, quand la déformation embrasse des parties infiniment petites de la courbe des y. Si vous le trouvez con- stant, méme avec variation des limites, étendez, à partir de l'un des points limites, la déformation successivement à des points de plus en plus éloignés jusqu'à l'autre point limite, et faites aussi, si les conditions du problème le permettent, varier celui-ci de maniére que toute la courbe se trouve enfin déformée. Sil n'est pas possible, pendant ce glissement successif du point de divergence de la courbe des 7 sur la courbe des y, de trouver quelque point pour lequel le déterminant des coefficients du systéme (8) et (4) et du systéme (5) soit nul, et que le déterminant des coefficients du systéme (3) et (4) et du système analogue à l’autre limite ne s'évanouisse pas, la courbe des y donne un vrai maximum ou un vrai minimum. Si, au contraire, l'un ou l'autre des deux déterminants mentionnés 20 sévanouit, A, S, s'évanouit aussi par la substitution Ay = UN AG, =) I, 7 {0 Gr puisque la fonction A y qui annule A A,S, annule aussi A,S,, 2 A.S, étant 24 C.-E. LUNDSTRÖM, ce que devient A A,S, en remplaçant A Ay par Ay. Mais si A,S, peut être annulé sans que A y soit identiquement nul, A,S, peut changer de signe, et alors il n’y aura ni maximum ni minimum. Dans les applications, il est important d'observer la loi trés-simple suivant laquelle se forment les systémes d’équations (3), (4) et (5). Soit Cg GB oc ORC on an d o9) la solution trouvée. Supposons que les limites soient variables, et que y doive satisfaire, ainsi que a, et æ,, à un système d'équations de condition de la première classe, que nous désignons par 2 (S, = 0), à un système de la seconde classe m Xie =0); WF 29, et à un système d'équations aux limites Dire) Sao): Dans ce cas, le determinant en question se compose, quand la de- formation embrasse l'une des limites, mais finit avant l’autre, des coeffi- cients des systémes suivants LOG VSO) I Ay? = 0) et, quand la déformation embrasse toute la courbe, y compris les limites, des coefficients des systémes DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA. 25 où le symbole à est une notation abrégée du symbole Sa qui suppose, pour son application, qu'on a déjà substitué à la place de y la Bau (m e Choy oss n ns )e Hp — d Lo + Sas + A a - de Nous terminons ici cet exposé, qui, tout rapide et tout incomplet quil est, suffira peut-étre néanmoins å donner une idée générale de notre méthode et à en montrer l'utilité dans ce genre de questions. Quelques mots, pour finir, sur des énoncés peu exacts que nous avons trouvés dans des traités du caleul des variations. I a été soutenu que la question de trouver une valeur maxima ou "minima de S, à condition qu'une autre intégrale S, ait une valeur constante, se réduirait à la question de trouver une valeur maxima ou minima de S+ AS, sans aucune condition, A étant déterminé d'une manière convenable. Cela est vrai, quand il s'agit de trouver les équations qui déterminent y comme fonction de æ, mais c'est assurément faux, quand il s'agit d'examiner si la solution trouvée est une solution véritable. Cet examen se résoudra d'une maniére essentiellement différente, selon que A est une constante don- née d'avance, ou quil est introduit pour l'élimination, comme nous le croyons avoir montré dans ce qui précéde, et comme nous le mettrons en évidence ci-dessous par quelques exemples trés-ordinaires. On a aussi soutenu qu'on pourrait exclure de l'examen mentionné les variations des limites, et les regarder comme nulles, parce que ce se- Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 4 26 C.-E. LUNDSTROM, rait du domaine du calcul différentiel ordinaire que de décider, si les valeurs limites de y et de ses dérivées ainsi que #, et x, donnent un vrai maximum ou un vrai minimum de S, après que le calcul des variations aurait décidé que y donne un vrai maximum ou un vrai minimum, les limites étant sup- posées invariables. C'est sur cela même que se fonde la méthode ordinaire pour la distinction des maxima et des minima. Mais un démembrement pareil de la question ne présente pas d'utilité pratique, et il est en outre peu satisfaisant au point de vue de la théorie. Voici quelques exemples destinés à montrer l'application des propo- sitions énoncées et à illustrer les dernières remarques. EXEMPLE 1. Faire passer, par deux points fixes d'une droite, une courbe plane de longueur donnée, et telle que l'aire comprise entre la courbe et la droite soit un maximum. Comme il se pourrait que l’ordonnée devint tangente à la courbe entre les limites, et, par conséquent, que deux points de la courbe des 7 correspondissent à un seul point de la courbe des y, quoique la première fût du nombre de celles qui devraient être comparées avec celle-ci, nous nous servirons de coordonnées polaires. Une difficulté semblable pourrait certainement se présenter aussi dans ce système de coordonnées, le rayon vecteur devenant tangent à la courbe entre les limites; mais la solution montrera que ce n’est pas le cas. La précaution que nous avons prise est évidemment inutile quand il sagit seulement de trouver l'équation de la courbe, mais elle est d'une importance essentielle quand il s'agit de discuter le signe de 4,S,. Le milieu des deux points fixes étant pris pour origine, nous nom- mons # langle que fait le rayon vecteur 7 avec la droite. On a done DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA. 27 Les conditions du probléme sont IB = = d, si d est la demi-distance des deux points, et GE gogo i: Kart SL, Z étant la longueur donnée. D’après les règles ordinaires, la courbe satisfait à l'équation diffé- rentielle. ou, en abrégeant, À nom el (€ = rayon de courbure). La solution est, comme on le sait, un cercle, dont l'équation gené- rale est (r cos § — a)” + (rsinü — 8)? = À? ........ @)r où a et 8 désignent les coordonnées du centre et en même temps les con- stantes d'intégration. Comme ona a=0; d+B=n, ce qui réduit l'équation (2) à la suivante r? = 2rB sin I + d? , @ étant donné par l'équation l= VB + dr = cei am) 28 C.-E. LUNDSTRÖM, 4 —- d ou l= 2 B: + di(aresin vara selon que LS > ou We oh L’équation du cercle sera encore simplifiée, en prenant son centre pour origine, et deviendra A étant égal au rayon, mais de signe opposé, ce qu'on trouve en posant r = constante dans (1). Reste maintenant à examiner si le cercle donne un vrai maximum. y ; ef T?AX EG PATI étant id] = —— 5 = — À, 0 ai) P+ 9) | la premiére condition nécessaire pour que A,S ait un signe constamment négatif, est remplie. Des déformations suffisamment petites ne pourront done augmenter S. Pour trouver si la même chose peut se dire de toute déformation admissible, il faut recourir à l'équation générale (2) et faire varier a, 8 et A. De cette manière, on aura Ar = cos Aa Ib anm) AQ —— NAN NS (4). L'équation de condition, à laquelle Ar doit satisfaire, est f? 7 dr | d do r J | ou 9 VETE = 0, bi d 0, étant l'angle polaire du point initial et par conséquent = = aresin vera (+ selon que 7 > ou < rd), 9 l'angle polaire du point où la déforma- tion finit. DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA. 29 L’équation ci-dessus donne la relation suivante entre Aa, AB et AA: à | («sin 5— a eos — a af) SOMME A, SICH (y. 6 Comptons, pour simplifier, les angles polaires à partir du rayon vecteur qui passe à lun des points fixes, de manière que 9, soit nul. Cela ne changera en rien l'équation (3) r — — A, et (4) conservera la méme forme. Le déterminant qui décide la question, sera alors formé des coef- fieients des équations suivantes A,S, = Aasin® + AB(1— cos 0) — Aad = 0 UN = Aa—AA= 0 5 [Ar = Aa 6050 + AB sind — AA = 0. Ce déterminant est [dormi oh O job see) | esf sin 9 | 1} | sin 4, 1 — cos 6, = 6) Pour quil soit nul en quelque point, on doit avoir en ce point 9 9 == E ce qui est impossible pour toutes les valeurs de ? comprises entre les li- mites 0 et 2z. Nous concluons donc que le cercle donne un vrai maximum. Si, négligeant la vraie signification de A, on l'avait traité comme une constante donnée et fixe, le déterminant aurait été i) = | cos 0 , DTE qui devient nul toutes les fois que /2 zd. On en aurait conclu que le cercle ne donne pas dans ce cas un vrai maximum, ce qui est évidemment faux. La conclusion serait vraie, si A était une constante donnée = r, 30 C.-E. LUNDSTROM , comme on le vérifie aisément en faisant passer par les points fixes un cer- cle d'un rayon plus grand que r. Nous avons dit qu'il est nécessaire, pour la discussion du signe de AS, d'avoir recours aux coordonnées polaires, si l'ordonnée devient tan- gente à la courbe entre les limites. Cela résulte immédiatement de ce que l'expression de A,S en coordonnées rectilignes devient en méme temps . illusoire. L'exemple traité ci-dessus est, par sa simplicité, bien propre à éclair- cir la différence entre le probléme consistant à chercher la valeur maxima de S à la condition que S, — /, et le probléme de la recherche de la va- leur maxima de S + aS, sans cette condition. EXEMPLE 2. On donne la longueur et les extrémités d'une courbe. Trouver sa forme, quand la distance de son centre de gravité à l'horizon est un ma- ximum. Dirigeons Faxe des y dans le sens de la pesanteur. La quantité uj yV1i+y de doit done être un maximum, à condition que ya T y da — 1, | étant la longueur donnée. Par conséquent, la courbe satisfera à l'équation différentielle ur nda d / Vite =O e tr dont l'intégrale est l'équation de la chainette T y+a= oe te“ ) omes «loses tenets en DE « et 8 étant des constantes et e la base des logarithmes nepériennes. DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA. öl La fixité des extrémités et la longueur donnée suffisent pour la de- termination complete de y comme fonction de x. Examinons maintenant, si la solution trouvée donne un vrai maximum. NEN duode f d NE. DN L'expression (yy étant ici y + À deu . JA : : 5 i : y +A il faut, pour l'existence d'un maximum, qu'on ait toujours 0, TOR ce qui revient au méme que y+A<0, parce que J/1+ y? entre comme une quantité positive dans les intégrales du problème. Cette condition y + À < 0 sera remplie, sia< 0. Supposons que les données du problème soient telles, qu'elles ad- mettent une valeur négative de a. Il reste alors à examiner si les autres conditions sont remplies. Pour cela, nous avons besoin de l'expression I 3y Du BO q 8 eum EE TUE qui, en ce cas, peut s'écrire Aa / / Ay =—AA+ uy (yta—ay) + eA By AUR ©) et de l'expression correspondante pour A, S,, qui est P UON NN 1 VAE yr x étant l’abseisse du point où la déformation finit. Or la différentiation de (3) donne l'expression de Ay’ A Ay! =e — P7 ay! eA By", 2 C.-E. LUNDSTRÖM, oo qui, substituée dans A,S,, lui fait prendre la forme voulue [s ^a ayy" y y" — 32 UE + aap À J SAS V ee gr EA En opérant une intégration par parties, on aura Aal Ta fyrir VAG = um lee = +y’de)taaß/V1+y”, qui, en vertu des propriétés connues de la chainette LD. Ne 1 A T a. mie T Vif [Vitae = aly, devient, si l'on pose Ti Yio ly et y n a e À OA m AL ya i CA A zn) a a Pour simplifier, nous prenons, pour l'axe des y, la verticale qui passe par celui des points fixes qui correspond à a,. Nous aurons donc, en rendant A,S, égal à zéro, cette équation entre Aa et AB Aa a + aA iss = x e (ii). | a(y — 9) E T et, en rendant égaux à zéro Vie et n y, les deux autres équations sui- vantes A 1 Li —AA- (ylar xa m ay)HH-a A By 0 nenn (5), A —AAt SE (HA ab yA Bini Eur ca oa (6). D’aprés les régles données plus haut, le déterminant formé des co- efficients des équations (4), (5) et (6) ne doit pas s'évanouir entre a, (QU dh, c C.-E. LUNDSTRÖM, 33 > Ce déterminant est Eu. D ME: -M | y; +A UA ELS | qui, en soustrayant la 3"" ligne de la 2°, devient e —) — -— 2 ao o| | y—n—«y Xy ci, 0 | Y1 + À 5 Oh ; e | On a done à résoudre la question: Trouver si l'expression 1 — x je! —a)y — aQ + Un) + vy vn) peut être annulée pour une valeur de x, située entre a, et x,. 3 ; 1 Nous supprimons d'abord le facteur constant — —, et nous introdui- sons l'angle Q défini par les égalités 1 tgo — y, SUP mecs d'où il sera facile, en se rappelant que y + A = de se convainere a cos @ ? que l'expression proposée peut être remplacée par la suivante, en posant D le, = 2a[1 — eos(Q — ©.) + a (sin Q, — sin Q)] | : eos Q COS Q, i Le facteur portant un signe constant, n'influera point cos Q cos Q, ' Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 5 34 C.-E. LUNDSTRÖM , , , . . . = sur le de notre examen, et sera par conséquent omis, ainsi que le 7 , qui est nul au point initial, mais en- facteur 2 S a suite toujours positif. Il a ainsi & examiner le signe de 9—40 sin Cette expression est nulle au point initial, mais croit ensuite d'une manière continue vers + co, comme on le voit aisément dés que lon en prend la dérivée. En effet, si l'on différentie par rapport à ©, on trouve, en se rap- pelant que do a dp ~ cos Q' cos Q, ar il * cos ? VU SPON TN 2 C2 = JA 7 . cos Q cos LE m cos ? INS D La dérivée par rapport à « est ainsi une quantité nécessairement positive. Il est done prouvé que le déterminant ne changera pas de signe, et que par conséquent la chainette donne un vrai maximum de l'intégrale proposée. Si, au contraire, A était une constante donnée, Aa et A /9 seraient déterminés par les équations A == (y EA — ay) + a A By = 0 Aa (nm +A) +aAßy = 0, DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA. 30 “d'où résulte, pour l'existence d'un maximum, la condition ae SLOG y! | Yi + À , yy" Mais ce déterminant s’évanouit, quand on a y+ aA— ay’ Yı FA y on" ? €-à-d quand la tangente au point initial rencontre la droite y + À = 0 au méme point que la tangente au point oü la déformation finit. Nous en con- cluons qu'il n'existe pas en ce cas de vrai maximum. Voilà done encore une illustration de notre remarque sur les con- stantes A. EXEMPLE 3. Le probléme est le méme que le précédent, à la seule différence prés que l'une des extrémités de la courbe cherchée est mobile sur une courbe donnée, dont l'équation est 9j ex MG) c L'équation générale de la courbe est ici la méme: CHINE E a AN = D. (e* Les constantes a, 8 et A sont déterminées par les conditions que la courbe doit avoir une longueur donnée, que lune de ses extrémités est fixe et l'autre mobile sur la courbe donnée, et par une équation aux limites. Supposons que la limite inférieure soit variable. On a done pour cette limite, aprés avoir éliminé au moyen de l'équation (Ay+y' Az) = Fa)Az, l'équation E ——, (y¥try'(y'—F'@)) | 36 C.-E. LUNDSTRÖM, ou plus simplement HS 0. d'où Von tire le théorème connu que la chainette doit être perpendiculaire à la courbe donnée. Dans l'exemple précédent, nous avons déjà montré que des défor- mations comprises entre des limites suffisamment étroites ne peuvent aug- menter S, si y J- A est négatif Voyons maintenant si S peut être aug- menté par des déformations qui s'étendent successivement sur toute la courbe, y compris la limite variable. D'aprés la régle donnée, cela revient au méme que d'examiner si les équations oS, = 0 T, à | [1+ y" F'(x)] = 0 | A peuvent être remplies par des valeurs finies de Aw, AB, AA autres que 0. En vertu des développements donnés dans lexemple précédent, et : 1 en > : en remplaçant f(x) par — y on trouve que les équations ci-dessus se ré- 1 duisent aux suivantes AC ia eas ug Or 20) See «ern 2 e E FR A / i " y TA Dm WW) 3 hes E E Ae (— ay! se) Jt @)\ = 0; A ; —AA 4 C (y 4 A — ay!) + aaBy’ = ), qui, moyennant les égalités Wy 0n y; + v / AX, Re MC Van UE DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA. EX produisent le systéme équivalent eQr-A) ,eAB(y—3) — «ABC +AG+A u 3i fs ATS RTE NT s EF Diss + e ) 2 af y F" (v) (,4-2)] : A äg = (y+A—ay’) + e#ABy' = 0; Aa , & A^ (y, SF A) (Cie 3 1) = AR E = (Ya + À) + e AB y, Ar peu Fra) — (9, 4- 2)] 25 Le déterminant formé des coefficients de ce systéme sera évidem- ment — le déterminant de l'exemple précédent -- le déterminant suivant ; e (y +A) QA + A) (n + A) | a(y Al ) — m , XE a [oy 2 Fo) nus, OA JE 2)] ) 0 | y+a—ay’ NO mI Qu + D GE +) | À = = = 1 | Zr : y [eu Fo) — (+ 2)] ? J ou plus simplement | a (y'i—y,)—a(y+a), MA a) | 241 | y dA Sj ccr | DER mS "e a[æy, * P" (2) — (y+) | | | 42 aL 1 [m+ er cesse äl "n y A ew salt) re) eee aaa — al Fe) — (yi + 2)] UM y: — G+ AY — 4) d- ev On + A) | : Le résultat de l'addition des deux déterminants sera, en omettant le facteur constant 1 gb s) aab js Aer (COS ORE E. (vit A) I 1 4 38 C.-E. LUNDSTRÖM, mU Eo) { a? (y: En y,» &(y + X)(y' — y) — (y —3n»-- zy'(y—)] — CAC ED LC REED) æ(y + 2) ir: (Yı + À) | y; DEF y; ie (y ate À) (y = yi) : Le facteur de a^y,?F'"(») est, d’apres exemple précédent, d'un signe constant et peut être désigné par la notation abrégée — 47°. Reste done à examiner le signe du facteur qui multiplie y, + À. En introduisant langle ee faeteur deviendra o 1 a Sin Q, cos Q, cos Q x eos * Q, | alsin (p — 29,) + sin Q,] a sin Q, cos Q, cos Q est positif, et toujours positif, si sin y, est négatif, on n'a quà considérer le signe de Le signe de étant toujours négatif, si sino, { e [sin (Pp — 20) + sin $,] — «cos?Q]. Pour en déterminer le signe, différentions cette expression par rap- port à g. Nous aurons _ nd sin'(p—0Q) _ Qc E a (cos (p—2 Q) EGOS o cos Q a) rums do sin” (® UEM Q) , d'où il résulte que la dérivée par rapport à x est constamment négative. Or la fonction est nulle au point initial. Elle sera donc constamment négative. La diseussion précédente prouve que le déterminant en question pourra s'écrire sous la forme suivante à un facteur constant prés =, oy D (a) Me + N? (+ selon que sing, > ou < 0). On voit done que le déterminant ne s'évanouit jamais dans le cas sing, > 0, si F(a) est négatif, et dans le cas sin q, < 0, si F'(x) est positif. DISTINCTION DES MAXIMA ET DES MINIMA. 39 La conclusion se formule géométriquement comme suit: La solution donne un vrai maximum: 1:0) toutes les fois que la courbe y = F(x) est une droite; 2:0) toutes les fois que la dite courbe et la chai- nette se trouvent à des côtés opposés de la tangente au point où elles se rencontrent. Il pourra exister un maximum en d'autres cas, mais cela ne pourra se décider que par un examen partieulier pour chaque cas spécial. La question générale traitée dans ce mémoire, coincide souvent avec celle de la stabilité des formes d'équilibre; par conséquent, elle est d'une grande importance pour la Statique. Nous y reviendrons peut-étre dans un autre mémoire, en appliquant notre méthode à des problémes isopéri- métriques contenant des intégrales doubles. Errata. Page 3, ligne 21, au lieu de | 9, dx, lisez I g,dz. » 4, » Ga > » r=n-1, lisez r=n—m. à . à a » On ul > STE (uf, + ete.), lisez ay ete.). > Bo sx» 2, s» DD! Aye» NS zu roO ei” n TI + UA "n TM TP, iore ifi E gl h » bu IISASOHT.T Hh. ich 1 , = - E YA í 4 ; N 2 hey ty ; Di 1 Ut, Al ; à Seb £i MINT ANT) n + al TLS TLS b x 3 À I q I" : | ya A F Pn 1 icy Th VARS TI h tiri SEITE. TO AA) CIOL NET 10. Wal vo xor TARRY SODA vim "rp i “an PA " MU, Ru AION. mb np ENS ^ Es Mas Tho pen ES Wo ra v Di wis a at wr: de Fall: 4 y - You LES ie 4 yl A An 4 " 7 L . c M | "Wo DENT IP as i" J | E BET MN Ee amt ULL DA NU eee s n d oe 6^ * i uL De I / E a af Goel [wad EX. NET eitis ro: ered TUE UTE visés J \ 4 : N | M ol, we zi gus E p Ti wi j T a gps A ne E ae. iad Be) > P E Tod us "— Ales ue Ln E^ | m P EL "ue c siye : ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS BY T. THORELL. D REVIEW OF THE EUROPEAN GENERA OF SPIDERS, PRECEDED BY SOME OBSERVATIONS ON ZOOLOGICAL NOMENCLATURE. WITH ONE PLATE, (PRESENTED TO THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF UPSALA, THE 13 FEBR. 1869). UPSALA, PRINTED BY ED. BERLING. 1869. 2:22. SEES DUR eo (rob de tat int ara ee za aus TIROL NS Meo ACA TO (ptis n med. Soult ore dd coda (abaco ‚ar fo PEA: 2 al 9a we omc TD IM oslo Yu err pultdisat ^d AN Du Wire e Ue pO o Tub Silt” 40: T TRA vigor So ron, ULTOR. PUR rop gel. n... vA LAT BOR ciel lp ae ty) al A youths bility Aat TO pe onem aed ng tod d sth mad Ot arte Tey vit ty alten wc De Podio Cp. dud ova ECTS DH OA vei i emm DA nh: ea ee edt få voi mitten i i yy Aub) ara L Ee MP Mosis 3o Hio GS, AU | han ln eh Bad HS owe © aha Te gent do tel ol BAHN ALL ray ey ads ch it Bee. IT ES IM bd una "m TE ar död” Ot qo en om : t babel sedi > ober ör ate: - Adr TE HSMN DIR Hi, Orr To Benni WAREN: Ot ee hia fui toile aii edere erro Hot. uii oie à sut av cre Re 9y $F 3 said wot TNT ivit Dor M ivan y T b AAI ovre zd Flo 5di ui bir x YU DOTT: m m mena Bing "Rl jä SE fåra i 3 | f busta Wa hu t 4 aded ah D) n "i irish iyd ow etia ja ab vot TA Ue a Y 7 Á AB jos" agi! wd " ERU bap ya "MA NIS, eii LE a Among the Faunistic works, that treat of European Arachnida, BLACKWALL’S Spiders of Great Britain and Ireland (1861—1864) and WESTRING’S Ara- nec Suecice (1861) undoubtedly occupy the first place, both on account of the high degree of perfection, to which these two works have carried our knowledge of the Spider-fauna of these two countries, and for the light they spread upon a large number of previously unknown or only imperfectly known species of the group of animals whereon they treat.) A compara- tive examination of these two almost contemporaneous works is in more than one respect a matter of the greatest interest; indeed a comparison of the synonymous denominations of the various species described in them is abso- lutety necessary, for, as each of these authors appears to have been igno- rant of the other's works — even those, which had been published previously to the works above mentioned — it has happened, that a large number of species common to both have been described in each with a totally different nomenclature. The results, to which I have been led by such a compari- son, have been the primary cause of my making, and also constitute the prineipal subject of, the following annotations, in which I have first and prineipally endeavoured to fix the nomenclature of the spiders known to me, that are described in the works of WESTRING and BLACKWALL, adding such remarks as I supposed to possess any synonymical importance or utility. To these notes on WEsrRINGS and BLACKWALL’s works I have added some 1) A faunistic work now in progress, and which, when complete, may worthi- ly take its place beside the works of BLACKWALL and WESTRING, is MENGE's Preus- sische Spinnen, Danzig 1866—68. Another less exteusive but highly meritorious per- formance is OHLERTS Die Araneiden oder echten Spinnen der Provinz Preussen, Leipzig 1867. To both these works we shall in the following pages often have oc- casion to refer. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Se. Ups. Ser. III. 1 2 T. THORELL, remarks on a third almost contemporaneous performance, SIMON'S Histoire Naturelle des Araignées (1864), or, more properly speaking, on the ”Ca- talogue Synonymique des Araneides Européennes" which follows it, for that catalogue appears to me in many points to require a thorough revision, to which I was desirous of offermg some sporadic contributions. As the value of remarks on species of animals and plants is often somewhat equivocal, unless they be accompanied by descriptions or some other guarantee that the species are rightly identified, I consider myself bound to inform my readers, that I can with perfect confidence refer to the descriptions in WESTRINGS Araneæ Suecicæ, as really belonging to the spiders declared by me in the succeeding pages to be identical with species described by him- During many years’ residence in Göteborg and constant intimacy with this gentleman, my respected teacher and friend, I have had the opportunity of becoming accurately acquainted with by far the greater number of the species described by him in that work, and all Swedish spiders, that I have since collected, I have sent to be examined by him, wherever there was the least doubt about their classification. Moreover the species describ- ed by WESIRING, which are wanting in my own collection, I have, with very few exceptions, had the opportunity of examining; some of them have been sent me for examination from the Zoological department of the Natio- nal Museum in Stockholm by the kindness of Prof. C. STÅL, and others I have received from WESTRING himself? As I have, in identifying the spi- ders described by SUNDEVALL, followed WESTRING, who had SUNDEVALL'S own collection at his disposition, and whose determinations of the species found in that author are aecordingly perfectly trustworthy, and as I have moreover myself examined a collection of spiders made by CLERCK, and have consecrated a great part of the last twenty years to arachnological researches in just that province (Uppland) of Sweden, where CLERCK, LIN- NÉ and DE GEER lived and laboured,?) I may reasonably make pretensions 1) I take this opportunity of openly expressing my thankfulness not only to Mr, WESTRING, to whom my thanks are more particularly due on account of the nume- rous and valuable communications that I have received from him concerning our Spider- Fauna, but also to Prof. STÅL, to Dr. HAGLUND and other friends who have sent me the Swedish spiders they had collected. I also beg to express my most sincere gra- titude to Prof. Loven and to Mr. AHLSTRAND, Librarian to the R. Acad. of Sciences in Stockholm, for the indefatigable kindness and attention, with which they have pro- cured me die loan of several important works of arachnological litterature, to which I could not otherwise have had access. 2) On the Swedish species of spiders described by the older Swedish arachno- logists I have already published the two following works: Recensio critica Aranearum On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 3 to intimacy with the distinguishing features of most of the species described by both the older and younger Swedish arachnologists, and which are taken up in the followmg work. As regards non-Swedish species, I cannot, it is true, lay claim to the same degree of certainty. By means of the collections of Arachnoidea, which I have formed during several journeys and visits of considerable length to different countries of Europe, (as e. g. many parts of Germany, Switzer- land, France and Italy), as well as through presents of various European spiders and other valuable communications from several Zoologists (among whom I may with thankfulness mention the late Prof. AL. v. NORDMANN, Dr L. Kocx, Count E. KEYSERLING, Dr E. ÖHLERT and Director L. REDTENBACHER), Ihave however aequired a tolerably good view of the European spider-fauna and have arrived at certainty in several complicated questions of synonymity. My remarks upon non-Swedish species are however confined to such forms as are either generally known or easily determinable, and I have moreover, both a regards Swedish and other spiders, specially noted, by placing an asterisk before the name, all the cases, in which I have not learned by actual inspection to know the species or genus I treat of. The rules, which I consider ought to be observed in deciding con- troverted questions of zoological nomenclature, and which I have alluded to and endeavoured to apply in my Recensio critica Aran., are generally in ac- cordance with those laid down in Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Ser. 1, Vol xr, p. 259 et seq. under the title: Series of Propositions for rendering the Nomenclature of Zoology uniform and permanent, being the Re- port of a Committee for the consideration of the subject appointed by the Bri- tisk Association for the Advancement of Science.) These propositions are for the most part merely a repetition or development of the principles already laid down by LINNÉ iu his Philosophia Botanica, amd which FABRICIUS af- terwards in his Philosophia Entomologica applied to Entomological Nomen- clature. Since however my views differ on a few points from those of the British Committee, and since moreover its above cited work is far less ge- nerally known than it deserves to be, I think it best here to give a brief account of the rules I have in the following pages applied. Suecicarum, quas descripserunt CLERCKIUS, LiNNæus, DE GEERUS (in Acta Reg. So- cietatis Scientiarum Upsal. 1856; and "Om Clercks Original-Spindel-samling” [On Clerck’sOriginal Collection of Spiders] (in Ofvers. af K. Vet. Akad. Fórhandl. 1858). 2) Compare also O. A. L. Mörcn, Observations on Conchological Nomenclature, ibid. 3 Ser., Vol. II, p. 133; Asa Gray, On Scientific Nomenclature, ibid. 3 Ser. Vol. XIII, p. 517. 4 T. THORELL, As fundamental principle we of course go out from the so called Lex Prioritatis, which ordains that each genus preserve the generic name, and each species the specific name, by which it was first made known; the name of the person, who frs described or figured such genus or species under the aforesaid name, being added as authority”. The reasonableness of this law is so clear and evident, that I should not have thought it necessary to mention it, were it not that there are persons (even among arachnologists), who seem to live in total ignorance of its existence and of every one’s du- ty to conform to it.) Simple as this rule is, some difficulties present them- selves in its application, which may give rise to differences of opinion. One might e. g. ask in what manner a name ought to be given in order to have the right of being preserved. We conceive that the name ought to be followed by a definition or characterization of the object named, i. e. either (which is preferable) a description (diagnosis), or a figure, or at least a refe- rence to some previously existing description or figure; moreover that such name and accompanying characterization ought to be printed and published; that accordingly no other denominations than those, which have been giv- en in the above named manner, can, in fixing the scientific nomencla- ture of animals (and plants), be taken into consideration. Hence it follows .that no one needs pay any attention either to names published in print unaccompanied by descriptions,?) nor to denominations given to natural 1) That the scientific names of animals and plants must be Latin (i. e. have a Latin form) would seem to be selfevident. Any person then, who describes a new species by e. g. a French name only, cannot expect that a such denomination should be respected on the ground of priority. If such names, for example, as Athelgue cladophore, Prostèthe cannelé (Vid. Hesse, Mém. sur deux nouv. genres de l'ordre des Crust. sédentaires ete. in Ann. des Sciences Nat., 4 Ser., Zool, Tom. 18) are to be generally used, they must first be provided with a Latin form, and the right of prio- rity (and authority) must be assigned to the work, where these animals are first en- tered with their Latin denominations. For this reason we consider that e. g. the genus called by LATREILLE in his Cours d'Entomologie, 1831, Gastéracanthe and which SUNDEVALL in his Conspect. Arachn. 1833 calls Gasteracantha (Gastracanthus Wesrw. 1835), must be properly designated as Gasteracantha (SUND.) 1833. 2) If, when a genus has been once set up and characterized, there should be given, as a type of it, some species, named indeed, but not farther described, but concerning which no uncertainty is possible, I think that also such specific name ought to be retained Not only the genus but the species is in this case sufficiently di- stinguished by the characteristics of the genus. An example of this is afforded by Filistata testacea LATR. 1810 (= F. bicolor WALCK. 1820—25). Neither does it appear reasonable, when a species has been described under a new generic name, to reject such generic name simply because the characteristics, On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 5 objects in manuscripts ("in litteris") or in private or public collections and museums.?) It follows further, that the date which ought to be accepted as the epoch of a denomination, is the time when it was in the above manner made public, but not that, at which it was written down or announced in a verbal lecture, or that at which it was delivered to the editor of a perio- dical or to some learned Society to be published under their auspices.’ which distinguish the genus, have not been separately set forth in the description. Nevertheless that now very common method of forming new genera is by no means so deserving of commendation and imitation as it is easy and convenient. To reject a name, as some have proposed to do, on account of defectiveness in the definition, would seem not to be right, as leaving room for much arbitrariness. What seems to one good enough may to another appear insufficient or faulty. When one only knows with certainty what is to be understood by such a name, every one can either alter or improve the characterization for himself. A new genus on the contrary, that has been distinguished merely by referring to some particular species of an older genus as it’s type, without in any way indicating, which of the characte- risties of the species is to be considered as the mark of the new genus, no one can indeed be looked upon as bounden to acknowledge; nevertheless it appears to me advisable to do so, especially if the species referred to deviate in any generally known manner from the typical species of the old genus, and always if the new ge- nus has been once received and acknowledged by a subsequent investigator; the right of priority ought also then to be assigned to him who first proposed the name. 1) One is of course no more at liberty to take an authority from such sources than to take a name from them. It is for this reason that e. g. for the names of the spiders described in Reuss’ Zool. Miscell (Mus. Senck. I) I always cite Reuss as the authority, although he has in most cases appended "WrpER" to the names: I do not in fact consider myself at liberty to doubt, that Reuss is the author of these Zoo- logische Miscellen and of the descriptions that occur in them, and have nowhere seen it stated that they were written by WIDER. Probably in WIDER'S collection and his notes thereupon these spiders have borne the names, under which Reuss has published them. Again when it is certainly known, that the person, who has published for ex- ample a description, is not really the author of the same, then it is evident that the name, that ought to be cited as authorithy for the described genus or species, is that of the real author. 2) I am perfectly aware that, especially on this last mentioned point, considerable differences of opinion exist, and that many consider that the priority of a work ought to be reckoned from the day, when it was delivered to the academy or society. Others are of opinion that every separate printed sheet ought to bear the date of its delive- ry to the press and that from such date priority ought to be reckoned. Against the first of the opinions here urged it may be objected, that it would frequently mislead a person who endeavoured to ascertain the true date, when an observation was first made or a species first described, because an author has frequently the opportunity of making extensive corrections and alterations in his manueript and proofsheets , 6 T. THORELL, This last case it is especially important to take notice of, for a consider- able time frequently elapses between the day, when a paper is thus deliver- ed, and that, on which it is made accessible in print to the public; neither ought it to be forgotten that printed works often bear upon their title-page a date different from that, at which they really appeared, and which accor- dingly ought to stand there. — If a name has been published without caracte- rization, and this latter be supplied in a subsequent work, the name should be considered as originating at the epoch of this latter and not at that of the former work.!) Another question requiring an answer is the following: How far back- ward in time ought the application of the law of priority to be extended? — Here it would seem that a difference ought to be made according as the question regards the name of a genus, or that of a species, and the pri- ority of generic and specific names to be decided independently of each other. Firstly and principally as regards the names of species, it will probably without difficulty be admitted, that, since the Linnean binominal nomenclature for all species both in the vegetable and animal king. doms is that which is universally received, the introduction of that nomen- clature into science ought to constitute the epoch, from which priority should be reckoned, at least in the case of specific names. The præ-Linnæan authors, as is well known, distinguished the different species of a genus, not by a "nomen triviale”, as LINNÉ calls the specific names consisting of a single word, which he introduced, but by a brief diagnosis, "nomen specificum" or "differentia specifica”, which generally consisted of several words, though occasionally it might be comprised in but one, and in this latter case as- sumes to the eye the appearance of a nomen triviale. Some modern writers occasionally go back to these præ-Linnæan denominations, and receive the differenti specificæ that consist of a single word, or even the first word even until the last sheet leaves the press. We object to both alternatives, that no one is bound to know of a work as long as it, either as manuscript or even as prin- ted, lies concealed in the author's, publisher's, or any learned society’s stores. When it has been made accessible to the public in general, then, and not previously, can it be said to have been published. Many disagreeable controversies concerning the right of priority might be avoided, if it were the general custom to register consci- entiously upon every work the day on which it was offered to the public in the book- sellers’ shops, or, in cases where no exposure for sale takes place, when the distri- bution of the work was effected by some other process. 1) According to this rule some of the species-names used by WALCKENAER in his Tableau des Aranéides (1805) will have to give place to others, published at a subsequent period. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 7 of those that consist of several, as names of species. This custom we look upon as one, that should altogether be rejected: it is easily perceived that it opens wide the door to unlimited arbitrariness, and that it is incom- patible with the fixing of any determinate limit to the application of the law of priority. We assume then as a rule, that in determining the priori- ty of a specific name notice should be taken only of those works (or indepen- dent portions of works), in which the now received Linnean nomenclature is exclusively and consistently employed. We therefore leave unnoticed; 1°. all works published previously to the year 1751, when LINNÉ's Philosophia Botanica appeared, in whieh his new system of nomenclature was first fully and distinctly propounded;?) 2. all writings published subsequently to that epoch, in which that nomenclature has either not at all, or not consistently and constantly been employed.?) Such names as Tarentula Apuliae ALDROVANDUS (instead of 7. Apulie WALCK.), Textrix fuliginea LiSTER (instead of 7. den- ticulata OLIV.) cannot therefore be received, because both ALDROVANDUS and LisrER lived long before LINNE’S time; neither can GEOFFROY, LEPECHIN or GOEZE be cited as authorities for the specific names of spiders, for, although they were acquainted with LINNÉ'S system of nomenclature, the first named author has never used it,?) whereas the other two use in the same work 1) LrixNÉ had, it is true, already in his Academical Dissertation Pan Suecus (Ameenitates Acad., II, p. 225 — 262) for the sake of brevity ("ut brevitati studeam” says he) reduced the differentia specifica to a single word: it was however in the Philosophia Botanica (§ 257) that he for the first time proposed the laws of his new system of nomenclature: the term momen triviale is here introduced, and it is stated that this nomen triviale, or specific name, shall consist of ”Vocabulo uno" and "Voeabulo libere undequaque desumto", whereby it's essential difference from the old diagnosis or differentia specifica is indi- cated. — LINNÉ in that work still continues to use the expression "nomen specificum” as synonymous with differentia specifica: and it is in the Species Plantarum (1153) that "nomen specificum” first occurs in its now generally accepted signification, i. e. as identical with nomen triviale or species-name. 2) It is however to be remarked (Conf. Recensio crit. Aran., p. 4.) that some authors, and among them LINNÉ himself, have, in works, in which they must still be considered as having consistently employed the binominal nomenclature, sometimes used trivial names compounded of two, usually closely connected words, (e. g. Ca- rabus cruz major LINN., Araneus X notatus OLERCK, Aranea resupina domestica DE GEER, Micryphantes ferrum equinum GRUBE), a custom by no means deserving of imitation. If the two words, of which such a specific name consist, be not closely connected, so as to express a single idea (as is the ease with "resupina domestica" DE Geer), the name ought in all instances to be rejected. 3) Except in the supplement to the 2" Edit. of his Hist. Abrégée des Insectes. 8 T. THORELL, sometimes nomina trivialia, sometimes verbose differentiæ specificæ to distin- guish the species they treat of.") It appears furthermore from this, that we ought not, as in some quarters has been proposed, to fix upon either the X”, or still less the X 77^ Edition of Linnés Systema Nature as the starting point from which prio- rity in specific names is to be reckoned.?) For most Classes of animals no- mina trivialia have been first employed by LINNÉ himself, and that in the X” Ed. of the Systema Nature; but this is not the case with all, and as regards Spiders in particular, CLERCK has already 1757, in his famous work "Svenska Spindlar, Aranei Suecici', applied LiNNÉ's nomenclature with per- fect consistency, and aceordingly the denominations given by him in that work have right of priority in preference to the Linnean, as I have more fully shown in my ec. crit. Aran. p. 4 et seq. As regards generic names the above named Committee seems to as- sume, that for them, as for specific names, priority ought not to be recko- ned farther back than to the date of Systema Nature Edit. XII (1767): SUNDEVALL on the contrary considers Edit. I of that work (1735) as the li- mit that ought to be chosen. The most reasonable and consistent method would perhaps seem to be, either to reckon the priority of generic names also from the epoch of the introduction of the binominal system into the sci- ence, with the same limits, that we have indieated in the case of specific names, i. e. from 1751; or else to take into account, in determining that pri- ority, all works in which species have been consistently grouped in "genera", in the modern meaning of that word, quite as, in determining the priority of specific names, account should be taken of all works, in which nomi- na trivialia are consistently used. Against the first alternative the impor- tant objection may be made, that since in Botany a large number of far older generic names has been generally accepted — botanists in fact rec- 1) Gaze has (in "LrsrERS Naturgeschichte d. Spinnen") undertaken to give na- mes to a number of spiders described or figured by some older authors, as ALBIN and ScHuFFER; but as among these names some occur of such a form as for example 7 Aranea tetra abdomine mucronato”. " A. atro-alboque lineata”, there is surely no rea- son to burden the lists of synonyms with these names, nor to make any account of them in determining questions of priority. For the names of the spiders figured by SCHAFFER, priority should be reckoned from PANZER's Syst. Nomencl. to SCHEFFER’S Icones Insect. Ratisbon. (1804). 2) The above named British Committee proposes Ed. XII (1767), SUNDEVALL (in Arsberättelse öfver Zoologiens framsteg 1840—42) with more reason Ed. X (1758) — as being that in which the binominal system was first applied to both kingdoms of organic nature — as the starting point for specific names. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 9 kon the priority of these names from TOURNEFORTS 1) Institutiones Rei Herba- riae (1719) — the admission of that alternative would cause too great a difference between the rules of zoological and botanical nomenclature. As for the second alternative, it cannot be thought of for the simple reason, that it would certainly be impossible to determine, when and by whom the term genera, in the sense in which it is now usually understood, was first applied. Now there being in Zoology contemporaneously with TOURNEFORTS Institutiones Rei Herbarie no such epoch-constituting work to go out from — for it must be admitted that, with respect to nomenclature, that is not the case with the famous works of RAY, — it would seem to be the best course and that which requires the least change in the existing nomencla- ture, to commence, as SUNDEVALL has proposed, reckoning the claims of priority for generic names from LiNNÉ's Syst. Nat. Edit. I (1735), the first in a systematic respect epoch-constituting zoological work, subsequent to the time of RAy and TOURNEFORT, and that in which for the first time real genera are arranged and defined consistently throughout the animal king- dom. — Some few zoologists indeed remove the limit of priority to a much earlier period: WILLOUGHBY, RONDELET, ALDROVANDUS, and even ARISTOTE- LES (who did not write in Latin!) have been cited as “authority” after ge- neric names, although for several af these authors genera, in the modern meaning of the word, had no existence. Moreover it would be a matter of no small difficulty for those, who go back to so remote times, to discover who first employed such generic names as e. g. Canis, Perca, Musca, Aranea! — In Arachnology the manner in which this question may be determined is fortunately of no consequence, as all the genera comprehend- ed in the classification of Spiders have been formed subsequently to the commencement of the present century. It follows immediately from the law of priority, that if the same name should have been given to two different genera of animals, it belongs to the genus jist described under that name; the other genus receives the next oldest of the names under which it has been made known, or in the absence of such, receives a new name ?. The same rule of course holds 1) ’TouNEFORTIUS primus characteres genericos ex lege artis condidit": LINN., Philos. botan., § 209. 2) If a genus has been described by two different names, and has resumed (or ought to resume) the elder of them, the younger name, or synonym, ought not to be considered as free and unappropriated, and should not be employed as name of any other new genus than one formed by dividing the genus to which it was originally applied. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 2 10 T. THORELL, if two different species belonging to the same genus have obtained the same "nomen triviale". If several genera be united in one, that one ought to be distinguished by the name of one of them (preferably the o/dest), and on no aecount be called by a new denomination. And again if one genus be re- solved in several, that genus which contains the typical species") of the old genus ought to retain the old generic name; the other new genera ei- ther receive new names, or (as is preferable) are distinguished by synonyms, if such exist, of the genus, at the expense of which they have been form- ed.?) Entirely to reject the old generic name and form new names for all the new genera that result from the division, is in general a reprehen- sible course. An exception may be made of the cases in which the old na- me is an ordinary nomen appellativum, which is equally applicable to all the species included under the old name, and is or might be used as the de- nomination of a whole Order or Class, as is the case e. g. with the name Aranea:?) an exception may also be permitted, when the genus divided does not constitute any natural unity, 1. e. when there is no species that can be considered as typifying it. We cannot therefore complain that such generic names as e. g. Monoculus Linn. and Binoculus GEOFFR. have been rejected by later naturalists, though we do not mean to maintain that such a step was either necessary or deserving of imitation.) 1) LiNNÉ and Fapricius say the commonest, "vulgatissima": Phil. bot., § 246; Phil. entom., 8 30. As however opinions may be divided as to whether a species be most common in, or typical of a genus, it seems to me desirable, when a genus is divided, and the person, who made the division, has determined for what spe- cies he would preserve the ancient name, not to make any alteration in it. Thus for example, although the spider called by SUNDEVALL Salticus formicarius is neither the commonest species within the old genus Salticus LATR., nor yet typical of that ge- nus, still we retain with SUNDEVALL, who was the first who divided the genus, La- TREILLES generie name for just that very species. 2) "Nomina generiea, quamdiu synonyma digna in promptu sunt, nova non fin- genda": Lryy., Phil. bot., 8 244. "Antiquum si disjungitur genus, nova nomina effin- genda non sunt, quamdiu antiqua adsunt:” FABr., Phil. entom., p. 113, § 28. 3) It will hardly be questioned that it is better with SUNDEVALL to call the or- der of Spiders Aranee than for instance Araneides, an ill-concocted word, that sounds no better than for example Avides instead of Aves or Serpentides instead of Serpentes! LINNÉ even lays down as a general rule, that "Nomina generica, Classium et Ordinum Naturalium nomenelaturis eommunia, omittenda sunt". (Phil. bot., 8 253). This rule however must be considered as bearing with a little modifieation: at least a generic name cannot (except in the above mentioned cases) be rejected because some Class or Order has subsequently received the same appellation. 4) If, on the division of a genus, the nomen triviale of one of the species On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. jl Besides the cases here mentioned, in which deviation from the law of priority is necessary or allowable, one more deserves to be noticed. When a word taken from the Latin or any of the more modern languages, and the signification of which is unquestionable, is applied as the scientific na- me of a genus, which, according to all ordinary rules of etymology, it can by no means indicate, it cannot be other than fitting to reject such generic name and replace it with another. Thus the name Zurantula FABR. (1793) e. g. has very properly been generally discarded in favour of the newer name Phrynus OLIV.; and the former name is now rightly applied to that genus of Lycosoidæ, which includes the Tarantula so often spoken of both by ancient and modern authors. The names of different genera are often not indeed absolutely iden- tical, but so similar, that it may be doubted whether they can be allowed to remain together or not. It is however only when the names are properly speaking identieal, and the difference confined to the spelling, that I have thought it necessary to reject the later name or names: thus for example two such names as Ariadne and Ariadna, Galene and Galena, Sphodros and Spodrus cannot of course be allowed to exist beside one another. Many names differ only in gender and in having different terminations: and, though one ought of course in future to avoid forming names distinguished only in this manner from others already accepted, it appears to me that, when they have once come into general use, they may be retained; for the opposite course would be attended by too great changes in the existing nomenclature. I do not therefore consider that in the names Atta and Attus, Aulonia and Aulonium, Euryopis and Euryopa and such like, the use of the one name excludes that of the other.?) I cannot agree with the British Committee in considering that a known and received zoological generic name ought to be rejected, if it should pre- viously have been used to denote a botanical genus, or vice versa, as it is scarcely possible that any misunderstanding or other inconveniences can arise from the retaining of such names. The consistent carying out of such a belonging to it be taken as the generic name of that species, it ought no longer to be at the same time retained as specific name, but the species should receive the next oldest specific name, by which it has been described, or, in the absence of of such other name, a new one. Such names for example as Tarentula Tarentula, Trutta Trutta ought accordingly to be rejected. 1) In some instances persons have taken upon themselves to change whole series of generic names, so as to give them all the same termination. Such changes I do not think it worth while to notice. 12 T. THORELL, wholesale doom of cassation would lead to much confusion both in zoologi- eal and botanical nomenclature.) i It is rightly observed by the British Committee, that a name once published is the property of the science, and cannot therefore be revoked or altered, not even by the person who has imposed it. Exceptions however exist, and we have already (pag. 10, 11) mentioned a couple: the Committee also admits, that there are names which ought unquestionably to be discarded, those namely, which in their signification are absurd or false. It would have been desirable that this sentence of reprobation had been extended also to certain classes of those names which the Committee only considers that naturalists ought in future to abstain from forming ("objectionable names”). Such are for instance mongrel names (compounded of two or more different languages) — e. g. Cirrhifera from xeeds and fero — and names manufactured by mutilating and mangling other names, e. g. Cypsnagra from Cypselus and JTanagra.?) To this class belong also the equally barbarous denominations that have arisen from the ridiculous practice of composing unmeaning generic names of arbitrarily combined letters, usually in the form of an anagram: e. g. Rocinela, Conilera, Cirolana, Anilocra, formed from the letters in Ca- rolina. We hope the time will come when also such names as those just mentioned will be rejected,*) though this is not yet the case. But certainly 1) LINNÉ is even more severe than the British Committee in this matter: not only will he not permit the same generie names to be used in botany and zoology or mineralogy (Phil. bot., § 230), but he even adds: "nomina Generica cum Anatomico- rum, Pathologorum, Therapeuticorum, vel Artificum nomenclaturis communia omit- tenda sunt": ibid., 8 231. Fasricius lays down the same rule (Phil. entom., § 21, p. 108); but it would be vain now to attempt to get it applied. — Some modern authors have gone into the opposite extreme, and maintain that two or more genera of animals ought to be allowed to have the same name, if only they do not belong to the same Order. This assumption is in direct opposition to the hitherto universally re- ceived praxis in most branches of zoology. In araehnology e. g. the names Lycena, Hecaörge, Macaria have been discarded, because these generic names had been previously given to animals of another Class. 2) Some other equally ill compounded names have very properly been discarded by more modern zoologists. Thus for example SUNDEVALL has rechristened the bird-genus Malherbipicus (from MALHERBE, the ornithologist, and picus) Pediopipo [Conspeetus Avium Picinarum p. 77 (1866)]; and Güntner [Catalogue of the Fishes in British Museum, Vol. V, p. 387 (1864)] has changed into Coccia the crazy name Ichthyococcus, given to a genus of fishes in honour of an Italian ichthyologist, and compounded of his name, Cocco, and éydwc! 3) In confirmation of this view I beg to adduce the following citations: On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 13 one ought to be at liberty to amend such in other respects appropriate deno- minations as are in a less serious degree erroneously formed. This right — which is far from being universally acknowledged, although defended and used by several good zoologists — ought to belong not only to the person who first published the name, but also to every one who observes and can correct the error. That e. g. LATREILLE changed his Micromata to Micrommata, and the absurd name Clubiona lapidosa WALCK. to C. lapidicola, and that these latter appellations have been generally received, ought therefore to be approved; and in virtue of the same right we alter e. g. WALCKENAERS Drassus rubrens to D. rubens (as in fact MENGE and OHLERT have already done), his Æpeira myabora to E. myiobora, Latrodectus to Lathrodectus, Li- pistius to Liphistius (Astro, fords), Deinopis to Dinopis, as also it is now usual to write Lowia pityopsittacus, Hyponomeuta, Histiophorus, Chiromys ete. instead of L. pytiopsittacus, Yponomeuta, Istiophorus, Cheiromys. The right of making such improvements must be granted, in order to prevent the no- menclature of zoology from gradually assuming an appearance absolutely dis- gusting to a person possessing even the slenderest classical attainments. As long as the scientific names of animals and plants are to be Latin, we have a right to require that they do not sin against the simplest laws of that language. One is not, it is true, obliged to learn Latin and Greek in order to occupy oneself with Natural History: we are fully aware that a man may be a very distinguished naturalist without having had a classical edu- cation; but he who does not know sufficient Greek and Latin as to be able of himself to compound a scientific name for an animal or plant, might surely obtain the assistance of some more competent individual, if he find himself under the necessity of imposing a name. As most generic denominations are derived from the Greek, it follows, that it is principally words drawn from that language, that, in the process of composition and reduction to the Latin form, are most frequently subjected to barbarous misusage. Without "Nomina generica ex vocabulo græco et latino similibusque hybrida, non agno- scenda sunt." LINN., Phil. bot., 8 223. Conf. FABr., Phil. entom., § 18, p. 107. "Nomina generica ex uno vocabulo plantarum generico fracto, alio integro com- posita, Botanicis indigna sunt." LINN., Phil. bot., 8 224. — "Per anagramma orta non placent." SPRENGEL, in LINN., Phil. bot., Ed. 4, § 229. "Nomina barbara, que quidam in Entomologia in novissimis temporibus intro- duxerunt, omnino rejieienda, quum nullo modo intelligantur et diffieile pronuntientur." Fagr., Phil. Ent., p. 109, § 24. — LixNÉ even says that all generic names should be rejected, "quz a lingua græca vel latina radicem non habent" (Phil. bot., § 229), but he has not himself strictly adhered to this rule, and it would now be impossible to get it acknowledged and consistently carried out. 14 T. THORELL, exposing ourselves to the charge of pedantry, we may at least venture to urge, with regard to them, the observance of the two following simple rules: 1. If a name be formed of two or more Greek words, these ought to be put together according to the simple rules for the formation of Greek compounds; and 2. When the Greek word is transmuted into a Latin form, it ought to receive a Latin termination, and the Greek letters ought to be replaced by such Latin letters, as correspond to them in the works of Roman authors.) Now since a great number of names are in this respect most erro- neously formed, I consider it not only as a right, but as a duty to correct them, e. g. to correct Uptiotes (from ünzıos) to Hyptiotes, Megamyrmekion (ueyauvounziov) to Megamyrmecium, Ozyptila to Oxyptila, Arkys to Arcys, Deinopis to Dinopis, and so forth. Such corrected names ought not to be considered as new, but to preserve their original rights, and be followed by the name of the individual, as authority, who first formed the name. Even names (at least generic names) formed of words taken from other languages, or of proper names, ought to be furnished with a Latin termination and, as far as is possible, with a Latin orthography. Generic names of unknown or uncertain etymology, but generally known and accepted, (e. g. Epeira, Filistata, Clubiona) must not be altered; and in general more freedom may be allowed in the formation of generic than of (adjective) specific names,?) which latter ought always to be in full conformity with the rules of etymology. With the help of the rules above stated I have here endeavoured to fix the original specific names of number of spiders admitted into the works of WESTRING, BLACKWALL, and SIMON, as well as those of some other European spiders known to me, and to correct such errors of synonymism as have crept into the works of these authors. Ar regards the genera, I have en- deavoured to restore also to them their original denominations, where they have been dispossessed by subsequent ones; as regards however the bounds and compass of the various genera, such difference of views prevails, that I cannot of course hope to gain for my own opinions on this subject more than a partial assent. In the case of the families, the law of priority is, as 1) "Nomina generiea latinis literis pingenda sunt". LINN., Phil. bot., 8 247. "Sonus nominum, quantum fieri potest, facilitandus, ideoque nec græca nee bar- bara admittimus; et terminationem græcam in latinam mutamus". Fasr., Phil. ent., p. 114, 8 31. 2) We have accordingly, for example, preserved unaltered the £ermination in Lathrodectus (from Ado and dijxrys) and Epesinus (Exveoums), though unquestionably Lathrodectes and Æpisines is the proper orthography; neither have we adopted cor- rections, which would greatly alter the appearance of the word (e. g. Oops instead of Oonops). ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 15 is generally known, not applied, and I have accordingly, in conformity with the practice of most modern arachnologists, adopted SUNDEVALLS denomina- tions, derived from the most prominent genus within the family, employing however the termination -oide, as being more etymologically correct than -1- des or -ide. — I have no doubt in many points been guilty of real mistakes, but I venture nevertheless to hope for a mild judgement from persons acquaint- ed with the subject, who are aware of the difficulties to be encountered in a work like the present. I ought especially to remark, that I have been un- able to determine with certainty the exact date of the publication of some of the arachnological works here cited; this has been especially the case with a couple of works published in numbers without date, as also with some papers published in periodicals. As regards these latter, I have in dubious cases assumed the year for which the periodical is published, as the date of the articles it contains, though in many instances this may not be right, because the latter numbers of a journal commonly appear the year following. When the year of a work’s printing is expressed, I have of course accepted that as the date of publication, whenever I did not know with certainty that such date was incorrectly given 2). In restoring the first or original specific names I have endeavoured to observe all the cautiousness so necessary in such a process. The species of the older writers are, as is well known, often difficult, sometimes im- possible to determine with certainty: with respect to them I have, in appli- cable cases, laid it down as a rule to preserve the determinations accepted by modern arachnologists who have lived in the country where the species described by the author in question have been collected. It is evident that a French naturalist has the best opportunities for studying the French spiders described by Fourcroy, DE VILLERS, LATREILLE etc., a German the Ger- man species of SCOPOLI, FABRICIUS and PANZER, and so forth, as also we Swedes ought to be best acquainted with the Swedish forms described by CLERCK, LINNÉ and DE GEER. Tradition has here a significancy that must not be undervalued. It is only in cases in which I have supposed myself able to show that an evident mistake has been made, that I have deviated from this rule ?). 1) This is for instance the case with WALCKENAER'S Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., Tome II, which bears on its titlepage the date 1837, but did not come out till 1841. 2) Regarding the rules, which, in determining the species of the older authors, ought in doubtful cases to be applied, I beg to cite the following from Ree. Crit. Aran.: "...maximi nobis esse momenti crediderim penitus cognovisse, quæ forme in iis regionibus gignantur, ubi vixerit et animalia collegerit scriptor, eujus species sint 16 T. THORELL, As a complete registration of synonymous generic and specific names does not enter into the plan of these remarks, I have in general taken up in the lists of synonyms only such citations, as were necessary to show the origin and date of the various denominations given to each species and genus: I have however frequently, in the case of specific names, also referred to some work where the species in question is fully and unmistakably described or figured, as also invariably to WESTRINGS and BLACKWALL’S great works, and, for genera, to SIMON's. Names from mere lists of species I have only in a few cases admitted among the synonyms, for in most in- stances we are destitute of all guarantee that such names really correspond to the species, to which the names properly belong. The common synonym for a number of generic names, Araneus CLERCK, Aranea LINN. (and other authors), I have not considered it necessary to include, neither have I in the synonyms for the genera formed at the expense of the old genera of LATREILLE and WALCKENAER, admitted these, unless it, for some especial reason, appeared to me desirable. When I have admitted into the lists a synonym, which I look upon as uncertain, I have placed before it a? definiendæ; exclusis enim omnibus, quie ibi non reperiuntur, ita sspe minuitur et circumscribitur numerus formarum, in quibus dubitetur, ut nullo interdum negotio vere judicare possimus . . . . At si qua deseriptio, licet hoc modo intra terminos quosdam coéreita, tamen in duas vel plures species æque quadrat, nec seriptoris verba vel figure ullam ansam ad unam earum, rejectis aliis, eligendam præbeat; nee denique ab omnibus receptum est, nomine veteri speciem quandam ex iis, in quibus dubitatur, significare; tum ita equidem censeo, que ex iis in provincia vel in patria illius scrip- toris maxime sit vulgaris, eam nomine, quo ille usus sit, esse appellandam. Eodem quoque modo judicandum est, quum evidenter apparet, scriptorem aliquem duas vel plures diversas species confudisse: nisi si //guram addiderit, que unam earum mani- feste repræsentet; tum enim nomine, quod ille adhibuerit, hane speciem vocare, satius mihi videtur. — — — Quum autem in uno eodemque opere varietates ejusdem speciei ut diverse species descriptæ et nominate sunt, difficile interdum videri potest judicare, ex nominibus datis quod retinendum sit et speciei imponendum. . . . . Definiendum est, quz sit forma principalis sive primitiva, cujus nomen sibi adsciscat species necesse est, et cujus varietates igitur relique sunt habendæ. Forma vero principalis ea existimanda est, que frequentissime invenitur in patria ejus, qui primus nomina, de quibus agitur, dedit. Si id dijudieari non potest, vel si apparet, serip- torem illum veram formam principalem non cognovisse: tum primum ad alias rationes est confugiendum, et ex nominibus, que dederit, id eligendum, quod exempli gratia magis quam reliqua in hac specie tritum atque usitatum sit, vel quod magis aptum et idoneum videatur — et id genus alia." When a species, concerning which there is a differenee of opinion, is not found in the country where the describer resided, it is evident that what has here been said of that eountry, must be considered as holding good for the locality where the species in question was taken. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 17 In conformity with an alternative proposed by the British Committee, I have, in this as well as in my previous works, in giving the authority for a generic name, placed the authors name within parentheses whenever the limits of the genus received by me are different from those of that author, but without parentheses when the genus is considered as possessing its original compass. If I wish to indicate that a genus ought to be taken in the meaning proposed by some other particular author, I have usually added the name of that author after that of the original describer. Thus Epeira WALCK. signifies the genus Æpeira as limited by WALCKENAER, who first set up that genus. petra (WALCK.) is the same genus, but with diferent limits; Epeira (WALCK.) WESTR. (sometimes, but only for the sake of brevity, Epeira WESTR. means the same genus with the limits assigned to it by WESTRING. After a complete name (including both the generic and specific names) the authority has been placed without parentheses, when the species occurs under the same both generic and trivial name in the author cited, but within parentheses, when the generic name used by him is different. I write, for example, Epeira angulata (CLERCK) with, but Æ. adianta W ALCK. without parentheses. If a specific name appear to be not fully certain, I have generally placed after the authority cited for it the name of some other author, in whose works it indicates the species I refer to. Ærigone rufipes (LINN.) SUND. thus indicates the spider, which SUNDEVALL describes as the Aranea rujipes of LINNÉ 2). 1) The ordinary custom in botanical works, of appending as authority to the complete name of a species the name of the author, who first employed the whole name (both generic and specific), and of passing in silence over the writer, who first made known the species, if he should have used another generic name, has not been much followed by zoologists. What advantages that custom can offer, I am unable to discover. By the opposite method of notation, adopted by me and by most zoologists for indicating authorities, one obtains reference to the epoch, when the spe- cies was first made known, and from which the priority of the name is to be reckoned, and that is, I suppose, in most cases the main advantage gained by appending an authority. This method does not of course prevent the citation of a later author after a complete name, if the occasion be such as to require the making of a di- stinction between his description or figures of the species and those of others. We may accordingly very well speak e. g. of Epeira quadrata WESTR. and Epeira quadrata Kocu, though at the same time we assume, that the Æpeira quadrata of both these writers ought in strict propriety to be called Epeira quadrata (CLERCK). Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Se. Ups. Ser. III. 3 18 T. THORELL, A + placed before a generic name indicates that the name, as being previously engaged or found unsuitable for some other reason, has been abandoned in favour of some younger name; this mark, when placed before the complete name of a species, has the same signification with respect to the specific name. A date placed after a generic name indicates the year, in which that genus was made known and defined; after a complete or specific name it has the same signification with respect to the specific name. The addition of these dates to the names I look upon as of the greatest utility for preserving the proper denominations of the various species. Instead of setting forth the observations I have thought fit to make on the genera (and families) recognized by our three authors, in the order in which they appear in their works here referred to, and mixed with dis- quisitions respecting the species, I have preferred to treat these larger groups separatety. I have therefore first made up a systematical list or review of the sub-orders, families, sub-families and genera of European Spiders recog- nized by me. Each generic name is accompanied by the name of the author, who first published it, and the year when this took place; more- over by its etymological derivation, its synonyms, and the name of the species that typifies the genus; and lastly are subjoined such synonymical and critical remarks as I have thought appropriate. In almost all the genera which I have had the opportunity of examining, I have subjoined a short description of the form and armature of the tarsal and palpal claws, which organs have not yet attracted all the notice they appear to deserve >). — To this list, when in going through our authors, I have come upon the different genera, I have always subsequently referred. Under the head of each family I have introduced a short aecount of the characteristics of the sub-families and genera it comprises. These characteristics I have endeavoured as far as possible to derive from the number and position of the eyes and the form of the organs of the mouth, partly because such distinctive features are easily verified, partly because they are most generally (often too exclusively) used, at least in determining the limits of the generic groups. But I have also endeavoured to make use of the different form and number of the spinners, of differences in the conformation of the cephalothorax and abdomen, in the relative lengths and 1) As regards the claws of spiders I may refer to Saviany’s admirable figures in "Déseription de l'Egypte", as also to OHLERT’S important treatise: "Beitrüge zu einer auf die Klauenbildung gegriindeten Diagn. u. Anordn. der Preuss. Spinnen.” On EUROPEAN SPIDES. 19 armature of the legs, the number of claws on the tarsi, ete. Genera, which rest exclusively on such characteristics as belong only to one sex, leaving the other undetermined, I have not adopted, but consider that they ought to be unreservedly rejected. I ought to call especial attention to the cir- cumstance, that exotic forms have not been taken into consideration in the formation of these schematic reviews, which accordingly can be used as a clew in classifying such species only, as belong to the Kuropean fauna. The characteristics of the swb-orders, as they cannot be expressed in few words, and indeed may be considered as generally known, I have not thought it necessary to repeat, but refer for them to e. g. LATREILLE'S, SUNDEVALL’S, WESTRINGS and OHLERTS works. In the catalogue of arachnological litterature, with which I have opened this treatise, I have included all the works known to me on now existing European spiders, of a descriptive, systematical and 200-geographical character, with the exception however of such writings as belong to the pre-Linnean period, of which only a small number of works, referred to in the following pages, have been admitted. Works belonging to that period, among which I also reckon writings of later date, in which LINNÉ'S binominal system is not fully adopted, are in the list marked with a 7. Moreover for reasons, that are easily understood, zoologieal handbooks and compendia, in which no new facts relating to our subject are communicated, have been excluded. Of works which as regards spiders contain only no- tices of their anatomy, economy etc., I have taken into my list only those, which I have occasion in this work to cite, and they are distinguished from others by their titles being included in brackets []. Of the littera- ture that treats exclusively of ewotic spiders, I have similarly admitted only such works, as I had occasion to cite. Their titles are printed in smaller types. Some of the works in the catalogue I have not myself had the opportunity of consulting; these are marked with an asterisk, and whenever I have been obliged to quote such a work, I have always indica- ted the source from which I have derived the citation 5. Before proceeding to the special examination of the three works before us, I ought perhaps to give a short general account of each of them. 1. WESTRINGS Aranee Suecice contains complete and accurate descriptions of 308 species of Spiders found in Sweden and Norway, of which 34 belong to the family Epeiride, 115 to Theridide, 63 to Drasside, 1) For rectifications or additions to this catalogue, either privately or publicly communicated, the author will feel very thankful. 20 T. THORELL, 30 to Thomiside, 35 to Lycoside and 31 to Attide. Not only the species, but also the genera and families are in this work characterized in detail: by this the author has been enabled to avoid the error of taking up in the description of the species a number of distinctive marks common to whole series of species, an error, which makes the descriptions given by sundry other writers so deficient in characteristics, in spite of their often wearisome prolixity. WESTRING has succeeded in finding sharp and certain distinctive marks for the species he describes: we would especially call attention to the excellent characters he has discovered in the different number and di- stribution of the spines on the extremities. Equally important are the di- stinguishing features pointed out by WESTRING in his detailed descriptions of the males’ palpi: nor has he quite overlooked the circumstance, that similar sharp characteristics may be found by studying the external sexual organs of the females. What immediately strikes a reader on looking into WESTRING’s book, is the singular diligence and conscientiousness that it evinces: his descriptions have not been made independently of each other, they have not been written down once for all as the different species came under the author’s eye, but they are the result of most accurate and many times repeated comparisons of the various species 1). They have thus become 1) WESTRING’s rigorous comparative treatment of the Swedish spiders has been considerably facilitated by the method in which his collection of spiders is preserved. He does not preserve his spiders in spirits, but impaled upon pins, after having first been dried by a process invented by himself and described with full details in his paper: "Anvisning att ändamålsenligt insamla och conservera Arachnider, fórnámli- gast med afseende 4 spindlarne.” We shall very briefly describe this method, which it is true at first seems difficult and tedious, but which one, after a little practice, finds as easy as it is appropriate. It is a characteristic of the method that the spider's abdomen, and that part only of ist body, is hardened by heat. The following simple instruments are required for the operation: 1:0, a glass cylinder of about 1” or 1'/," diam. and about 4" long, one end of which is closed with a cork: in this cylinder the spiders abdomen is hardened over the flame of a candle; 2:0, a small and very fine pair of scissors, as also a stronger and coarser pair: with the former the abdomen is cut off, with the latter the pin, which is used as a spit; 3:0, a little cylindrical shaft encircled at the one end by a cylindric metal ring filled with a cork, in which cork the spit is fastened during the operation; 4:0, a fine pair of tweezers, and a few small slices of cork about 2 lines thick, insect-pins, blotting- paper, and a lighted candle. When the spider has been in a proper manner killed (e. g. by vapour of ether or by heat) it is to be impaled on an appropriate insect- pin passed through the right side of the cephalothorax; the abdomen is then cut off (the animal being holden in the half-closed left hand, in which the abdomen, on being separated, falls) close to the cephalothorax, and the incision is dried with blot- On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 21 strictly comparative, a quality we do not often meet with in the descriptions of this group of animals; and we probably do not say too much when we assert, that WESTRING surpasses all his predecessors in the accuracy and sharpness of his descriptions, and that his work, in its descriptive character — if we overlook the occasionally somewhat lengthey diagnoses !) — may be considered as a model for those who come after him. ting-paper. The head of another insect-pin of about the same substance having been cut off, the blunt end is introduced into the severed abdomen (through the opening caused by the abscission) up to the spinners, and is fastened by its point into the above-named shaft. By holding the pin a moment in the flame of the light, the abdomen is easily made to sit fast upon the little spit. The glass cylinder is then taken in the left hand and holden horizontally over the flame; with the right hand the spider’s abdomen is introduced into the open end of the cylinder, and holden there immediately over the flame. In consequence of the heating of the air in the cylinder, the abdomen is gradually hardened, under which process it must be turned on all sides and brought nearer to or removed farther from the heated glass as occasion may require; but care must be taken not to employ too great a heat, as the abdomen would then be burned or erack, nor too small a heat, as the skin would in that ease wrinkle and collapse. One must every now and then try with a fine needle whether the abdomen be everywhere firm so as not to yield to pressure: and the hardening process must be continued till this is the case. The pin (spit) is now cut off obliquely (so as not to be too blunt), at such distance, that a portion of about ?/, the length of the cephalothorax is left standing out from the abdomen. By means of the tweezers this portion of the pin fixed in the abdomen is introduced into the cephalothorax through the opening made by clipping the petiolum. When the abdomen and cephalothorax have been thus reunited, and placed in their natural position, the pin for mounting the spider is stuck perpendicularly into a slice of cork, so that the spider remains at a short distance from the cork; the legs are extended and fastened by means of pins in their natural position (as in the speci- mens in my collection), or else somewhat bent under the body (as in WEsTRING'S collection, in which case they are not so easily broken off); in this condition the animal must remain in a dry place, until the cephalothorax and legs are completely dry, when it is ready to be placed in the collection. Spiders thus prepared are as easily and conveniently examined as insects impaled in the usual manner; but if one has besides a collection in spirits, so much the better. Very few species (e. g. some of the genus Xysticus) lose a little of their colour in hardening: nearly all others, if rightly manipulated, remain entirely unchanged. 1) Originally diagnosis was looked upon as synonymous with "differentia speci- fiea", i. e. a definition comprising the marks necessary and suffieient to distinguish the species from all other species belonging to the same genus. But such a definition is possible only when all the species of the genus are known, which is far from being always the case: and, in the case of genera containing many species, at any rate such definitions would mostly be too long to be of any great practical utility. 22 T. THORELL, WESTRING has throughout consistently endeavoured to apply the law of the priority of names, and it is therefore only in consequence of his not having had access to certain portions of arachnological litterature, that he has, instead of the oldest and therefore right names, occasionally used newer appellations, not only for a number of species, but even for certain genera. But to this we shall have occasion hereafter to return. The remarks we have to make against WESTRINGS work are not many. It may be mentioned as an imperfection, that the author has paid no attention to those characteristics, the examination of which requires the aid of the microscope, and some of which, e. g. those derived from the structure of the spinners and the claws, are by no means unimportant either in classification or specific description. A somewhat more detailed account of the different species’ of spiders occurence, economy, industry, ete., than what the author has furnished, would have been acceptable, and might also certainly by him, who for so long a series of years has devoted his attention to that group of animals, easily have been supplied. As regards the families into which WESTRING has distributed the Swedish spiders, they are, as corresponding with the Latreillean family- groups (by me considered as sub-orders) very natural, but might perhaps at least in part be resolved with advantage into several, as is particularly the case with the Drasside WESTR., which most modern authors divide into three or more separate families. With regard to the division of the families into genera, the author appears in general to have hit upon the right mean course between too strict an adherence to the views of older systematizers and the occasionally over minute subdivision of genera, such as has been introdu- ced into the territory of arachnology by for instance MENGE; nevertheless it appears to us, that some of the older genera preserved unchanged by WESTRING, e. g. Theridium, Philodromus, Lycosa, Attus, might well have borne with some division, as well as Æpeira, Clubiona, Drassus, ete., which he has divided into several smaller generic groups. To facilitate comparison between the Spider-fauna of the Scandina- vian peninsula and that of Great Britain and Ireland, as they appear in the We accordingly find in descriptive works of moderate bulk the diagnoses generally so expressed, that they serve to distinguish only those species of the genus, that are immediately under treatment, and have therefore no other object than to facili- tate the determination of an unknown species. But for that purpose — the only one which in a diagnosis needs be considered — it needs not be very verbose, not even in very large genera, if nota bene these genera are duly subdivided into smal- ler easily distinguishable groups. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 23 works of WESTRING and BLACKWALL here referred to, a tabular view is here given of the number of species belonging in these countries to the different families and genera of the order of spiders, in which I have follow- ed WESTRINGS system, and endeavoured to aggregate to the genera and families adopted by him, such species as by BLACKWALL have been other- wise classified. In the case of certain species among these, to me unknown, I have however been unable with full certainty to determine the correspon- ding genus in WESTRING’S system. This has been especially the case with several of the species comprehended by BLACKWALL, in the genus JVerene. Most of the species in that genus belong indeed to WESTRINGS Ærigone; nevertheless it is probable, that some more than the few (6) species that I have reckoned to Linyphia WESTR., ought to be referred to this genus: perhaps also one or two Neriene-species belong to WESTRINGS Theridium. Being unable to come to any certain conclusion in this matter, I have aggre- gated to the genus Ærigone WESTR. all the species (about 20 in number) of the genus Neriene, of whose place in WESTRING'S system I felt uncertain. EPEIRIDZE WESTR. s and a ae (= Epeiride Buackw. et Chute BLACKW. ad part. Se sued. Epeira WESTR. = Epeira BLACKW. ') ad maximam partem .| 19 | — | 19 | — Singa WESTR. = Epeira BLACKW. ad partem . 5 | — | 4) — Zilla WESTR. = Epeira BLACKW. ad partem 0 3/ el 3d] = MECS TR EE pE na BEACKW adopanteme ES NS SN COUR AUR CNES DR STACK WE | wea tee stir bbs EE et | Kon 1 — Veleda BLACKW. (Uloborus LATR) . . . . . | —| il — Mithras WESTR. 1| 34|— | 33 THERIDIDZE WESTR. (= Theridide, Linyphiide et Scytodidæ BLACKW.) Linyphia WESTR. = Linyphia Buackw.?) ad max. partem + Neriene BLACK We) ad part. + Theridion BLACKW.?) ad part. | 30 | — | 38?) — Tapinopa WESTR. = Linyphia BLACKW. ad a io cede de FN — Pachygnatha THREE, BLACKW. . . . 0 me ee Mee I el | = Ero WESTR. = Pheridion BLACKW. ad m 5-5: 89 or el wv Lom EE Theridium WEsTR. = Theridion BLACKW. ad max. part. . . | 24 | — | 95?| — Episinus WESTR. = Theridion BLACKW. ad part. . . . 1; — | 1} — Erigone WESTR. = Walckenaera BLACKW.?) + Neriene Gil RER EB were eee cee ee ee mae 1) BLACKWALL mentions 31 species of the genus Zpeira. 2) The genus Linyphia has in BLACKWALL 33, Theridion 27, Neriene 48 and Walckenaera 32 species. 24 T. THORELL, Sweden and | Gr. Britain Norway. and Ireland. Pholcus WESTR., BLACKW. ub PM ENT PES: ating RT a 1 = 1 — ISCUtodes e DYLAGKW er MM M MM ET EE = 5 ERES OE: DRASSIDÆ WESTR. (= Drassidæ, Ciniflonidæ ad max. part., Agelenide et Dys- deride BLACKW. Segestria WESTR., BLACKW. 2; —| 2| — Dysdera WESTR., BLACKw. 1 |> Sere Schenobates BLACKW. || Img Oonops BLACKW. AEE Utes SR EE Ce —| — | 1| — Tegenaria WESTR. = Tegenaria BLACKW. ad max. part. ‘) SEP = Agelena WESTR. = Agelena BLACKW. ad part. ? : 1| —| 3% = Textrix WESTR., BLACKW. . 1, —| Le Agroeca Wem. = Agelena [b ers ad ges «| i] ,— | an Hahnia WESTR. = Agelena Buackw. ad NS + Tegenaria = | — BLACKW. ad part. : 8 | == | — Apostenus WESTR. = Agelena BLACKW. ad ded 1. |- —. 22 Miles Celotes BLACKW. 2 6 euge od — Zora WESTR. = Hecaerge BCE ies 1 bei - 1 si Phrurolithus WESTR. = Drassus BLACKW. al parts » 211 GRAIN ee Micaria WESTR. = Drassus BLACKW. ad part. 48 NP AIRES Drassus WESTR. = Drassus BLACKW. ad part. 7 = E — Pythonissa WESTR. = Drassus BLACKW. ad part. Doi | — Melanophora WESTR. = Drassus BLACKW. ad part. . HS) =) 31 = Drassodes WESTR. = Drassus BLACKW. ad part. 4| SX aM m Argyroneta WESTR., BLACKW. : 1 = 1 eS Anyphena WESTR. = Clubiona Diva der. m Sun DE lol zr uuum Amaurobius WESTR. = Cinijlo BLACKW. . 3 N Cheiracanthium WESTR. = Clubiona BLACKW. ad aan Dh p= ce c Dictyna WESTR. = Ergatis BLACKW. [553 e 3 = Clubiona WESTR. = Clubiona BLACKW. ad max. st AE Our Sparassus WESTR., BLACKW. . m 63 acu 59 THOMISIDZE WESTR., BLACKW. Thomisus WESTR., BLACKWe NN DI [Sg MESES SON PRilodRomUSIRWIESTEN IBL/NGIRWES o- oo o 5 o9 e o o e o || 3 30 9 9g 1) Tegenaria in BLACKWALL comprehends 4, Agelena 9, Drassus 13, and Clubiona 12 species. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 25 Sweden and | Gr. Britain LYCOSIDZE Westr., BLACKW. Ce nd Lycosa WESTR., BLACKW. eerie AE. tr. MUR ERO MESS Ai | — Dolomedes WESTR. = Dolomedes BLACKW. ad part.) . . . Ej =|) mJ = Ocyale WESTR. = Dolomedes Buackw. ad part. Mo ee gi — Sphasus WESTR., BLACKW. 102352 at) 0 ATTIDÆ WESTR. (= Salticidæ BLACKW.) Salticus WESTR. = Salticus BLACKW. ad part. ?) 1} —| 1| — Attus WESTR. = Salticus BLACKW. ad max. part. . . . . | 30) —| 16 | — Hhesos- BONG Sb A Se Re ce ae cle der ce lu NOTA elle MYGALIDÆ BLACKW. PS D RC LE 6 de du AU Pm In| a Lol il — | 308 | — | 304 À glance at the foregoing table shows, what is remarkable enough, that the number of species of spiders observed in Sweden and Nor- way -on the one side and Great Britain and Ireland on the other is very nearly the same, a little above 300. As however the last mentioned coun- tries, from their more southerly position and warmer climate, ought pro- bably to possess a richer spider-fauna than our peninsula, one may perhaps asssume, that this latter has been more carefully scrutinized with respect to its arachnology than the British Isles, where accordingly a rich after- harvest of new species probably remains to be made. >) The number of species that compose the different families, is on the contrary very unlike within the faunistic districts in question. The Thera- phosoide (Mygalidæ BLACKW.), which in England are represented by Aty- pus piceus, are altogether absent from Scandinavia. Unless we aggregate Pholcus to the Scytodoidæ, that family is also unrepresented in Scandinavia. While Westrinc has in his Theridüde (Theridioidæ + Scytodoide NOB.) 1) Dolomedes in BLACKWALL comprehends 3 species. 2) Salticus in BLACKWALL comprehends 17 species. 3) In some papers that have since appeared, CAMBRIDGE and BLACKWALL have indeed considerably augmented the number of known spiders in these islands. In Sweden also several new forms have in the meantime been observed, but not yet published; some of these we shall have occasion in the following pages to mention. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. Ill. 4 26 T. THORELL, but 115 species, BLACKWALL has described 144 species of the same family or rather sub-order — 145, if we consider Scytodes as belonging to the The- vidiide WESTR. It is the genera Linyphia and Erigone alone (comprehending together 112 species in BLACKWALL and but 83 in WESTRING) that deter- mine that family’s great preponderance in the British compared with the Scandinavian fauna. On the other hand ZLycosidæ and Attide are far more numerous here than within the boundaries of Britain, the first of these fa- milies showing 35 to 20, the latter 31 to 18 species; of the genus Lycosa WESTRING takes up double as many (32) species as BLACKWALL, of Attus nearly double (30 to 16). The families Zpeiride, Drasside and Thomiside of WESTRING are about equally numerously represented in both countries. As regards his Dras- side (Tubitelarie NOB.) it should however be observed that, whereas the genuine Drassidæ (Drassoide NOB.) are far more numerous in our country (41 to 29 species — Sparassus being referred to the Thomisoide, Agreca, Argyroneta and the Ciniflonide BLACKW. to the Agalenoide —), the number of species of the Dysderoide and Agalenoide is not so great in the Scandina- vian peninsula as in Great Britain and Ireland (the respective proportions being 3 to 7 and 17 to 22). Among the forms described by BLACKWALL, we find several belong- ing also to the southern and middle parts of the European continent, which are entirely absent here: such for ex. are Uloborus Walckenaerii LATR. ( Ve- leda lineata BLACKW.), Scytodes thoracica, Segestria florentina, Dysdera punctoria, Coelotes sawatilis, Eresus cinnaberinus and typus piceus. Besides Uloborus, Scytodes, Cœlotes, Eresus and Atypus, the genera Oonops and Schenobates of the family Dysderoidæ, (each of one species), are entirely unrepresented in the Scandinavian peninsula, whereas again — since Æyptiotes (Mithras) paradoaus has been found in England’), and if we have been right in referring BLACKWALL’s Agelena gracilipes and celans to Apostenus WESTR. — all the genera that occur in our country have their representatives in the fauna of Great Britain and Ireland. Among the species common throughout a great part of Sweden, but which seem to be absent in Great Britain and Ireland, we mention (by the names given them in WESTRING's work) the following: Zilla montana, The- ridium castaneum, albo-maculatum, Melanophora nocturna, Philodromus mar- garitatus, formicinus, Lycosa nemoralis, monticola, tarsalis, lignaria, paludi- cola, teniata, cuneata, Attus hastatus, medius, V-insignitus and arcuatus. 1) BLACKWALL, Notice of the capture of Mithras paradoxus in England. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 27 2. "A History of the Spiders of Great Britain and Ireland, by John Blackwall’, (Part I. 1861, Part IL. 1864), is the title of the second of the works with the examination of which we are occupied. The work is published by Zhe Ray Society, and is a costly work, a small folio, with 384 pages of text and 29 coloured plates. The author, who has long borne an honoured name among the zoologists of the present age, has not only by numerous essays of a descriptive character on the order of spiders, but also by important discoveries relative to these animals’ economy, their industry and their (outward) structure, laid this branch of zoology under great obligations. Since however the greatest part of BLACKWALLS pre- vious works are scattered over a series extending to many years of English journals and other periodical works, they are not so easily or generally accessible as were to be desired, and accordingly several of the continental arachnologists seem not to be aware of them. We are therefore so much the more thankful for the work before us, which unites to a whole in an independent treatise and worthily completes the author’s previous labours in illustrating the spider-fauna of Great Britain and Ireland. As we have already seen (p. 25), this work contains descriptions of 304 species, distributed into the following 12 families: Mygalide (1 spe- cies) Lycoside (21), Salticidæ (18), Thomiside (29), Drasside (21), Cini- flonide (9), Agelenide (15), Theridüde (28), Linyphüde (116), Epeiride (32), JDysderide (7) och Scytodide (1). It is preceeded by an introduction, in which the author gives a short general account of the external and internal structure of the spiders, their economy, the construction of their webs and their manner of living, which is so much the more valuable, as being found- ed on BLACKWALL'S own observations and discoveries. This is perhaps the ground on which the respected author labours with most success: as a systematizer he does not appear to us to be always quite so fortunate. We cannot, for example, accept the authors method, proposed by him in 1841 ?), and since then constantly maintained, of dividing the spiders into 3 tribes distinguished by the number of the eyes: Octonoculine with 8, Senoculine 1) BLACKWALL seems not to have witnessed a peculiarly important fact ascer- tained many years ago by MENGE (Ueb. die Lebensw. d. Arachn., p. 36), viz. that the male spider, before the act of copulation, emits from the sexual aperture situated under the base of the abdomen, a drop of sperma on a kind of small web made for the purpose, which drop he then takes up in the genital bulb of the palpi. This process has newly been observed also by AussERER (Beob. über die Lebensw. der Spinnen, pag. 194 et sequ.) 2) BLAckw., The differ. in the numb. of eyes ete., p. 632. 28 T. THORELL, with 6, and Binoculine with 2 eyes I). Now not only is a fourth tribe wanting for the spiders, which have no eyes, as e. g. Stalita SCHIÖDTE and Hadites KEYSERL., of which genera the first is nearly connected with Dysdera and the other is, so to say, a blind Agalena; but this whole sy- stem of classification lies open to the objection, that it is entirely artificial. By a one-sided adherence to a single feature not correlated with an aggre- gate of characters or intimately affecting the whole organism of the animal, nearly related forms are, as is well known, almost always widely sundered, and others, which are really far removed from one another, united in the same division, — and this is also the case when spiders are grouped ac- cording to the number of their eyes. As proof of this assertion we need no more than to refer to the genera Pholcus and Spermophora (Rachus), of which the former has 8, and the latter 6 eyes. One species of the last named genus was first described by DUGES ?) under the name of Pholcus senoculatus, and is in fact so like a Pholcus, that WALCKENAER doubted the correctness of Ducks’ statement as to the number of the animals eyes, nor was it until Lucas ?) also had found a six-eyed Pholcus, (Ph. 4-punctatus Luc., no doubt identical with the Pholcus senoculatus), and thus confirmed Ducs report, that WALCKENAER formed for these animals the genus Ra- chus *). The North American Spermophora ( Oophora) meridionalis described by Hentz ?) is said also to differ from Pholcus only in having 6 eyes and 1) WALCKENAER also has made use of the number of eyes as a basis of classifi- cation: he however first separated "les Théraphoses” (Mygalidæ) from other spiders ("les Araignées"), and then divided (as early as 1833) these others into two divisions, spiders with 6 and spiders with 8 eyes (Mém. sur une nouv. classif. d. Aran., p. 438). When he afterwards became acquainted with the 2-eyed genus Mops Mac LEAY, a third division was added for its accommodation, so that in WALCKENAER’S Ins. Apt., I, p. 510, 511 (1841) we find "les araignées” divided into "Jes Binoculées, les Sé- noculées" and "les Octoculées.” — Whether any 4-eyed spiders exist, is uncertain: the Tessarops maritima RAFIN., which is said to be distinguished by that unusual num- ber of eyes, is so ill described and drawn, that one cannot feel certain even that this animal is a spider at all. (Conf. RAFINESQUE, Descript. d'une araignée qui con- stitue un nouv. genre, p. 88, Pl. 116, fig. 1). 2) Observations sur les Aranéides p. 160; — Cuv., Règne Anim., Arachnides, Atlas, Pl. 9, fig. 7. 3) Exploration de l'Algérie, Arachnides, p. 239, Pl. 15, fig. 2. 4) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., IV, p. 459. 5) Deser. and fig. of the Aran. of the United States, in Boston Journ. of Nat., VI, p. 286. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 29 shorter legs ?). Even in BLACKWALL’s works the mischievous consequences of the artificial, even if in other respects convenient, system by him adop- ted are clearly visible: Segestria and Dysdera are widely separated from the Drasside, their nearest relations, and placed next to Scytodes, the natural place of which is surely in the neighbourhood of Pholcus, and which is more nearly related to BLACKWALLS Theridüde, than to any other of his families. — BLACKWALL appears to us also to lay too much weight upon an organ which he considers as a 4" pair of spimers grown together, and on the rows of curved hairs or bristles on the metatarsi of the posterior legs, which he calls calamistrum: on the always contemporaneous presence of these organs be has based his family Ciniflonide, in which he brings to- gether forms so widely separated as e. g. Amaurobius (Ciniflo BLACKW.) and Uloborus (Weleda BLACKW.), the former of which genera is usually aggregated to the Tubitelæ of LATREILLE and the latter to his Orbitele. The genera Æresus and Dinopis, which also, as L. KocH has shown ?), have the "calamistrum" and the above mentioned organ situated immediately under or in front of the spinners (and which we on aecount of its situation call the infra-mammillary organ), ?) must thus also be referred to the family Ciniflonide, which accordingly is made to contain a heterogeneous mixture of species belonging to the most widely separated families 5). However important these characters may be — and we believe that we attribute to 1) Also among the Theraphosoidæ (Mygalidæ) forms occur with only 6 eyes, e. g. the genus Pelecodon DoLESCHALL (Tweede Bijdr. t. d. Kenn. d. Arachn. v. d. Ind. Areh., p. 5) and Mygale (Cteniza) hexops WHITE (Descr. of appar. new spec. of Apt. fr. New Zeal.,p. 3). Among the Thomisoidæ the Th. yolophus DouMERC has six eyes: among the Retitelarie (Incquitelo) not only Spermophora, but also Sicarius WALCK. or Thomisoides NICOLET (if this genus really belong to that sub-order and not, as is more probable, to the Thomisoidæ) has also only six eyes. KEMPELEN has lately (Verhandl. d. zool.-bot. Vereins in Wien, XVII) described under the name of Thysa pythonisseformis a six-eyed spider from Hungary, which seems to be nearly connected with the genus Gnaphosa (Pythonissa €. KocH) belonging to the real Drassoide. 2) Die Arachn.-fam. d. Drassiden, p. 1; Beschr. n. Arachn. u. Myriap., im Ver- handl. d. zool.bot. Gesellsch. in Wien, XVII (1867), p. 231. 3) L. Koen (Die Arachn.-gatt. Amaurobius, Cœlotes u. Cybæus, p. 1) provi- sionally calls this organ cribellum, because he finds that it has some likeness to a sieve ("Sieb"). The name "Sieb", colatorium, has been previously employed by MENGE for the surface of the last joint of the spinners where the spinning-tubes are situated: see MENGE, Preuss. Spinnen, p. 27. 4) BLACKWALL now also includes the Æresus among the Ciniflonidæ: see BLackw., A List of Spid. eapt. in the south east reg. of equat. Africa, p. 454. 30 T. THORELL, them sufficient weight, when we set up for the forms which exhibit them, within the family Zpeiroide the sub-family Uloborine, and within the family Agalenoide the sub-family Amaurobiinæ, and moreover among the Saltigrade reckon the Æresoidæ and Dinopoide as separate families, — they cannot be allowed the importance which BLACKWALL ascribes to them. In the first place it is very uncertain, that the organ, which BLACKWALL considers as a pair of spimers grown together, really is so; I for my part do not think so, for it does not project above the surface of the abdomen, but seems only to consist of a peculiarly modified part of the skin, neither have I been able to discover any spinning-tubes on its surface 1). But even if BLACKWALL'S explanation of that organ is right, still the family Mygalide BLACKW. proves, that the number of spinners needs not be the same in all the genera belonging to one and the same family; for to that family BLACK- WALL himself reckons genera not only with four but also with six spinners. As regards the calamistrum, the purpose of that apparatus in the animal’s economy is perhaps as yet too little known to justify the laying of any great weight upon it in classification. If DLACKWALL'S statement, that it is a curling-apparatus used in the construction of the spiders web, ?) is cor- rect as regards the genera Amaurobius and Dictyna, which I have no rea- son to doubt, it can hardly have the same functions in, for ex., the species of Uloborus and Hyptiotes (Mithras), which weave regular, so-called geo- 1) It is a matter deserving of investigation, whether the infra-mamillary organ be not connected with trachee, having their stigmata in or close to that organ. That some spiders (Dysderoide, Argyroneta) have two tracheal trunks opening on the ventral surface of the abdomen, near its base, behind the openings of the two so- called pulmonary sacs, is generally known. In some other species MENGE (Ueb. d. Lebensweise d. Arachn., p. 23; Preuss. Spinnen, p. 81, 189 ete.) has discovered a system of tracheæ opening at the end of the abdomen, immediately in front of the spinners, with either two stigmata (certain Attoide and the Erigone- and Walcke- naera- or Micryphantes-species) or only one (Cercidia or Cerceis prominens). But according to v. SIEBOLD (Vergl. Anatom., p. 535) there is in most spiders — he reckons up the different genera Æpeira, Tetragnatha, Theridion, Drassus, Clubiona, Lycosa, Dolomedes, Thomisus (Xysticus) — a fissure before the spinners, from which proceed four flattened, band-formed, almost always unramified tracheæ. It seems then that a tracheal system is to be found in all spiders provided with only two "pulmonary" sacs, although it may terminate sometimes with one and sometimes with two very variously situated apertures, and it is certainly not wanting in those genera, which have an infra-mamillary organ and calamistrum. 2) As to BLCKwALL'S beautiful and highly interesting researches on this subject, vid. Buackw., Notice of sev. ree. discov. in the struct. and ceconomy of spiders, p. 472 et sequ. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. oul metrical webs; and as a calamistrum is found in spiders, whose industry is so different, it appears to us that its importance in the construction of the web cannot always be particularly great. The 12 families adopted by BLACKWALL all constitute natural groups, with the exception of the CenZlonide, of which we have already spoken, and in some degree the Vheridiide, which family in DLACKWALL comprises only the Walckenaerian genera Theridium and Pholcus; for the remaining genera Of SUNDEVALLS Theridides he has formed the family Zinyphüde. This division of the old family Theridides is certainly unnecessary: BLACK- WALL does not mention a single character of the animals themselves, whereby the families may be distinguished. Pholcus appears to us rather to belong to the Scytodoide, and that family should immediately follow the Theridio- ide. — The families are very briefly, often insufficiently or not at all, characterized: the genera also very briefly, but in general with sufficient detail for practical behoof in the examination of an unknown form. BLACKWALL, as regards the number and extent of the genera he adopts, is much more conservative than WESTRING; he acknowledges but a small number of new generie groups over and above those already established by WALCKENAER, like whom, in determining the limits of the genera, he appears to fix his attention almost exclusively on the characte- risties of the organs of the mouth, the position of the eyes, and the rela- tive length of the legs. The greatest part of the genera proposed by others, for ex., C. KocH, and the distinctions of which are founded also on charac- teristics deduced from other parts of the body, are rejected by BLACKWALL, although they, if often in a more or less modified form, appear to have been pretty generally acknowledged by the arachnologists of the Continent. The authors remarks on the instincts, haunts and general economy of the species described, their manner of constructing their webs ete., are particularly valuable and interesting. The descriptions of the species are themselves, with few exceptions, very fully detailed, and, in combination with the figures, sufficient for the recognition of the species. Especial attention has been very properly paid to the form of the palpi of the males, to the construction of the spinners and other finer details of structure, except as regards the spines wherewith the legs and palpi are armed, which are only superficially touched upon. The descriptions are however often occu- pied in a great measure by charaeters, which, as common for the whole genus or most of the species comprised by it, are of little or no use in determining the species. We wish to call attention to this as an impedi- ment in the use of the work, as also, and that especially, to the absence of 32 T. THORELL, diagnoses, a want which is felt as much the more, as the author seldom se- parately gives any hints as to the characters by which the species most resembling each other may best be distinguished. The unit of length for expressing the dimensions of the animals is also, as it seems to us, not very well chosen. Instead of stating, as most zoologists do, the size of such small animals in millimeters or lines and decimals of one or other of these units, DLACKWALL measures the length and breadth of the spider's cephalothorax, abdomen etc. by fractions of an inch difficult to compare, so that one is sometimes obliged to submit the given measure to an arith- metical reduction, before it is possible to form a clear idea of the relative size of the parts described. — The figures are, with a few exceptions, (as e. g. some in Pl. I and IT) good. Not only are coloured entire figures of both the male and female of almost every species given, but also outli- nes of the male’s palpi, frequently also of the position of the eyes, the diffe- rent organs of the mouth, and so forth. The large and difficult genera Neriene and Walckenaera (= Erigone WESTR.) are treated with especial care, and indeed there scarcely exists in arachnological literature anything surpassing the superb, highly magnified figures, that BLACKWALL has furnished of these remarkable little spiders. BLACKWALL in his synonyms cites but few arachnological works; excepting his countryman LISTER he mentions none of the older authors, non even CLERCK or FABRICIUS: he generally follows, and only with a too implicit confidence, the determinations and nomenclature of WALCKENAER. Accordingly, as we shall hereafter see, his specific names will be frequently obliged to give place to other, older denominations. In other respects he appears in his nomenclature to have conscientiously observed the law of priority. 9. "Histoire Naturelle des Araignées (Araneides) par Eugène Simon” is a work differing in many respects from the two preceeding, and which we here submit to examination only on account of the "Catalogue synony- mique des espèces européennes” appended to it. The work contains a descrip- tion of the internal and external structure of spiders, followed by a detailed account of their division into families, sub-families and genera, a list of the species belonging to each separate genus, as also an account of the principal species’ haunts and economy. The plan and object of the work are clearly set forth by the author in the following words: "résumer . . . dans un cadre restreint tous les travaux anciens et modernes qui ont été publiés sur cette classe d'animaux, en y joignant les observations qui me sont propres, tel est le but que je me suis proposé en publiant ce traité." On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 33 We are however afraid that the author has not executed his work with sufficient care and accuracy to be said to have solved so comprehen- sive a problem in a satisfactory manner: he does not even possess the acquaintance with arachnological literature indispensably necessary for a work of this nature ?). Accordingly a very large number both of genera and species made known before the publication of SrwoNs work by German, English, American, Swedish and other authors, are in that work wanting. SIMON divides the spiders into 9 families: Scytodiformes, Mygalifor- mes, Drassiformes, Théridiformes, Épériformes, Salticiformes, Lycosiformes, Thomisiformes and Myrmeciformes. The first of these families, Scytodi- formes, includes the genera Scytodes, Omosites, Rachus, Pholcus and Artema, which union appears to us fully justified. On the other hand the combination of two so widely different generic forms as Myrmecium and Chersis (Palpi- manus) in the family Myrmeciformes, does not appear to be a happy step, nor does the union of Agelenidæ BLACKW. with Theridides SuND. to one fa- mily, Zheridiformes, seem more reasonable. Agalenoide and Theridioide are by SIMON not even separated as sub-families or tribes: when break- ing up his Theridiformes. into 3 such divisions ( Clothéiens, Théridiens, and Linyphiens), he removes e. g. the genera Linyphia and Micryphantes from his Théridiens (Theridium, Erigone, etc.) and unites them with the Agalenoide in the sub-family Linyphiens. — Whether SrwoN has been right in removing Æresus from the Attides SUND. and aggregating that genus to his Épéiriformes, it must also be permitted to doubt. Most of the 93 genera adopted by SIMON appear to us founded in nature; indeed they correspond, with the exception of Oxyptila (for Thomi- sus claveatus WALCK.) and Phrynoides (for Th. rugosus WALCK. and Th. 1) This is evidenced already in the introduetion, where the author has attempt- ed to give a brief account of the development of arachnology: thus for ex., having mentioned WALCKENAER's Tableau des Aranéides and Histoire Naturelle des Insectes Aptéres, the former printed in 1805 and the latter 1837—1847, he immediately con- tinues: "Cependant, presque en méme temps, LISTER, en Angleterre, donnait son Hi- stoire des Araignées trop courte et trop incomplète; CLERCK et DE GEER, en Suède, poursuivaient des études sur les moeurs de quelques espéces", etc. LrsTER's classical work, "Historie Animalium Anglie tres tractatus. | Unus de Araneis” ete. here refer- red to, was however printed in 1678, CLERCK’S "Svenska Spindlar, Aranei Suecici”, in 1757, and the volume (Tom. VII) of DE Green's "Mémoires pour servir à l'Histoire des Insectes", which treats of spiders, in 1778. The works in question were then by no means published, as SIMON states, nearly at the same time, but during the course of three successive centuries. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Se. Ups. Ser. III. 5 34 T. THORELL, foka VINS.) to genera already received under either the same or other names. But if at first sight the number of genera adopted by Simon appears not to be unreasonably great, but rather the reverse, the fact is nevertheless otherwise. Instead of dividing every family or sub-family into a number of groups comparable with each other, viz. the genera, and merely applying to these a generie name, he has followed the altogether objectionable exam- ple set by some authors, of forming so-called sub-genera; and not content with dividing a large number of genera into "sous-genres' with separate names, he goes farther and divides these "sous-genres" into groupes”, also loaded with names of a similar kind, whereby the number of generie names used by SIMON becomes very considerable. The "sous-genres" and "groupes" are often very vaguely distinguished, and the characters attri- buted both to them and to the genera properly so called, nay even to the families themselves, are in general by no means trustworthy and indeed not unfrequently erroneous. !) SIMON has endeavoured to give the etymological derivation of every generic name; his services however in this respect are greatly depreciated 1) This may be sufficiently shown by a couple of examples. Of the family Scytodiformes it is said (p. 43), that their physionomy has "quelque chose de parti- eulier, qui est dû à la forme globuleuse du corselet, élevé surtout en arrière” etc. But of the genera belonging to that family, Scytodes is the only one to which this description is applicable; for Omosites has the cephalothorax "déprimé" and Rachus has its "parties latérales et postérieures déprimées", Pholcus has it "déprimé", and Artema "déprimé en arrière”, according to SrwoN's own account. — According to SIMON (p. 256) the genus Singa differs from Æpeira "par une forme particulière et characté- ristique de l'abdomen; . . .. il s'éléve et s'élargit graduellement jusqu'à sa partie postérieure, dont la portion supérieure est un tubercule et dont la portion inférieure est tronquée obliquement" — a description which may very well suit for S. conica (which however WESTRING and MENGE, as it seems to us with good reason, do not aggre- gate to the genus Singa), but which is quite inapplicable to e. g. S. hamata, which is typical of the genus, as well as to S. Herii and others.— Epeira marmorea and pyramidata (scalaris), which are perfectly similar both in form and economy, and distinguished only by colour, are referred by Simon to different "groupes" of the "sub-genus" Æpeira: the former is a Neopora Sım., which group is said (p. 261) to have the abdomen "globuleux faiblement anguleux", and the species of which are "araignées vivant . . . dans les. jardins, ne construisant pas de coques", whereas the last belongs to the group Neoschena [Neoscona] Sim., the species of which have the abdomen "tout-à-fait globuleux et oviforme", and are "araignées vivant sur les bords des eaux, se renfermant dans des coques" etc. — The sub-genera, into which the genus Micryphantes is subdivided, are distinguished by characters belonging only to one sex, and one of them, Viderius SIM, is characterized (p. 196) by a peculiarity ("les deux On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 3) by the mistakes that he not unfrequently commits ). Many names he alters — in consequence probably of their, according to his notions, erroneous etymo- logy — in a manner which it appears to me difficult to justify. Thus for ex. he changes Theridion ov Theridium into Theridio, Erigone to Erygona, Neriene to Nerieneus, Textrix to Tectrix, Hersilia to Herselia, and so forth. A large number of generie names have their terminations arbitrarily altered: many for ex. with the termination es or ws terminate in SIMON'S work in a, so that we there read Scytoda, Eresa, Atta, Thomisa, Sparassa, Philo- droma, etc. instead of Scytodes, Eresus, Attus, Thomisus, ete. Neither does he observe any consistency in this, for he preserves the names Dolomedes, Pholcus, Drassus, Uloborus ete. unaltered, nor does he appear to remark, that, by making or adopting such changes, he applies names already appro- priated to other genera of animals, as for ex. in the case of the names Atypa, Myrmecia and Atta. (instead of Atypus WALCK., Myrmecium LATR. ?) yeux latéraux de la ligne supérieure sont placés chacun à l'extrémité d'un long pé- dicule horizontal"), which cannot be recognized in either of the two species (M. cu- cullatus and M. tibialis) which SrwoN looks on as belonging to the sub-genus Vide- rius, nor in any other European spider, that I know of. 1) Omosites (wuoorros, eating raw food, from «óc, raw and orr£oue:, eat) SIMON derives from ”owos, méme; ovroc, nourriture." Anyphena (dvvyaivo, unravel a web) he derives from ”avvw, tuer; gowos, rouge ou sanglant”; — Theridium (Imoidıov, little animal) from "279«, chasse; eo, voir’; — Phrurolithus (goovoéw watch, and Actos, stone) from "goso, creuser”, and Aí(9oc; — Erigone ( Hocyovn, mythol. prop. name) from ”£ovw défendre; yóvoc, progéniture”; Micryphantes (puxoóc, small, öpavzns, weaver) from wexods and “garde, brillant"; JVeriene (prop. name of the wife of Mars) from ”vevocs, corde, fil; evy, le soir"; — Meta (Mira, mythol. proper name) from "wires, sagesse, prévoyance.” — Uloborus (ovàofóóooc, deadly biting — of oùloc fatal, deadly, and Bıßowoxw, eat) is by Suton derived from "4x, broussailles; Booóc, qui dévore"; — Argyrodes (doyvoos, silver, &idos, appearance) from deyvoos and "oidos, gonflé”; — Singa (Ziyya, geogr. prop. name) from "cv, marque simili- tude; y& ou y5j, terre"; Micrathena ("ucxoa, parva, et “Adyva, nomen Græcum Mi- nerys": SUNDEV.) from u0x005 and "Seívo aiguillonner"; — Hersilia (proper name of Romulus’ Sabine wife) from "£oo:c, action d'enlacer", etc. 2) LATREILLE formed the genus Myrmecium in 1824 (Notice sur un nouveau genre d'Aranéides, p. 23): afterwards, in 1829, he changed the name to Myrmecia (in Cuvier's Règne Animal, 2° Edit., p. 261). In consequence of the too great simila- rity of the name with that of Myrmecia already employed by FABRICIUS: DALMAN (Årsberättelse, 1826, p. 59.) proposed to change Myrmecium to Myrmidea, which however to us appears unnecessary. — Myrmecium or Myrmecion is the classical name of a species of spider, “formic similis eapite, alvo nigro, guttis albis distinguenti- bus": PLIN. Hist. Nat., L. xxix, c. 27. 36 T. THORELL, and Attus WALCK.), of which, as is well known, the first name has long belonged to a Hemipterous, and the last two again to two Hymenopterous genera 1). The names which through these and similar alterations have come into SIMONS work, I have not, in the giving of synonyms and deter- minations of priority, considered myself bound to treat as new names formed by him, but only as varied orthographies of those which he has altered. Very many of the generic denominations used by Simon were al- ready appropriated to other animals before they were used as names for - spiders ?). They must accordingly be rejected and, where necessary, be replaced by others, either by already existing synonyms or by new formed 1) More reasonable grounds for altering the orthography of certain names in the classification of spiders are not wanting, and SIMON would no doubt have won the approbation of many, had he written Chiracanthium instead of Cheiracanthium, Hy- ptiotes for Uptiotes, Phileca for Philoica, ete. Several of the names which SIMON himself desires to introduce into the science, and in the formation of which he has used Greek words, which he has specified, stand in sore need of such correction. Thus it seems to us tolerably evident that the name formed by the combination of ueliæ and xéoas should not be Melicertus, but perhaps Melicerus, or rather Melio- ceros; of doönv and xéoas one would form not Arrecerus, but e. g. Arrhenoceros; of vém and oxotvoc one may form Neoschena, but not Neoscona; of vov and &xev9a' Triacantha, not Tricantha; of cvv and aiua Synema, not Synema; of xgóóc (light yellow) and qéoo Cirrhophora, not Cirrofera, ete. In a couple of the names formed by SIMON, the letters & and £ have been confounded: he writes Pezionyxæ instead of Pexionyæ (from zi: and dvvé), Ozyptila instead of Oxyptila (from oëvc and meédov); in two others he has confounded v and ov, viz. in Nuctobia (vuxroBuoc) and Nuctenea (vvs, véw), which should be written Nyctobia and Nyctinea. Fortunately most of the names formed by Simon will probably be found supererogatory. 2) Such is the case with at least the following names. Artamus C. Kocx 1837 (Artamus VIEILL. [Aves] 1816); — Clotho WALCK. 1809 (Clotho Favs. [Moll.] 1808); — Cyrtdtephalus Lucas 1845 (Cyrtocephalus Aup. [Coleopt.] 1834); — Cyrtonota SIMON 1864 (Cyrtonota CHEVR. [Coleopt.] 1834); — Dia C. Kocx. 1850 (Dia Des. [Coleopt.] 1834); — Diana C. Kocx 1850 (Diana Risso [Pise.] 1826); — Eucharia C. KocH 1836 (Æucharia HÜBN. [Lepidopt.] 1816); — Æurysoma C. KocH 1839 (Burysoma GistL [Coleopt.] 1829); — Isacantha Sım. 1864 (Isacantha Hope [Coleopt.] 1833); — Janus C. Kocu 1846 (Janus STEPH. [Hymenopt.] 1835); — Ino C. KocH 1850 (Ino LEACH [Lepidopt.] 1814);— Lachesis Sav. et Aup. 1825—27 (Lachesis Daun. [Rept.] 1802); — Leimonia C. KocH 1848 (Leimonia Hien. [Lepidopt.] 1816); — Macaria C. Kocu 1835 (Macaria Curt. [Lepidopt. 1826); — Melicertus Sim. 1864 (Melicertus Rarın. [Crust.] 1814); — Monastes Luc. 1847? (Monastes NiTZsCH [Aves] 1840); — Mygale WALCK. 1802 (Mygale Cuv. [Mammal.] 1800); — Pachyptila Sim. 1864 (Pa- chyptila ILLIG. [Aves] 1811); — Pales C. Kocx 1850 (Pales Ros. DEsv. [Dipt.] 1830); — Pandora €. Koch 1850 (Pandora Bruc. [Moll] 1791); — Parthenia C. Kocu 1850 On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 37 names). As regards the greater number of Simon’s "coupes génériques", which will thus become nameless, I have not been able to persuade myself that they are suffieiently founded in nature to deserve, at least for the present, to be preserved: the case seems however to be otherwise with the following genera, for which I accordingly consider that new names ought to be formed: Instead of Artamus C. KocH we propose Artanes (Aorévns, proper name); 5 Cyrtocephalus Luc. 5 Cyrtauchenius (xvoróc, arched, bent; avynv, neck); " Dia €. Kocu id ZElurops (wihovgos, cat; dw, face); o Diana C. KocH » Diea (Autos, prop. name); i. Lachesis SAV. et AUD. ,, Laches (Adyns, prop. name, masc.); 5 Monastes Luc. » Moneses (Moveions, prop. name); » Philia C. Kocx 5 Phileus (diieios, prop. name); 4 Phrynoides SIM. E Phrynarachne (yovvn, toad; docyvq, spider); s Rhanis C. KocH E: Rhene (Pi, prop. name, fem.) ?). (Parthenia Ros.-Desv. [Dipt.] 1830; — Philia C. Koch 1846 (Philia ScuibprE [He- mipt. 1842); — Phebe C. Koch 1850 (Phebe Serv. [Coleopt.] 1835); — Phrynoides Sim. 1864 (Phrynoidis Fitz. [Rept.] 1843); — Potamia C. Kocu 1848 (Potamia Ros.- Dzsv. [Dipt.] 1830); — Pyrophorus C. Koch 1837 (Pyrophorus Inuie. [Coleopt.] 1809); — Rhanis €. Kocu 1848 (Rhanis Des. [Coleopt.] 1834); — Sphodros WALCK. 1837 (Sphodrus CLairv. [Coleopt.] 1806); — Trivia C. Kocx 1850 (Trivia GRAY [Moll] 1832). — Such of the above notices as do not refer to spiders, are for the most part taken from Agassiz’ Nomenclator Zoologicus. 1) Clotho WALCK. ought to be replaced with Uroctea Dur.; Eurysoma C. KOCH with Eurycorma THOR. and Cerostris THOR. (Eugenie’s Resa, Arachn. 1, p. 3, 4); Janus C. KocH with Synemosyna (Hentz); Macaria C. KocH with Micaria WESTR.; Mygale WALCK. with e. g. Theraphosa WALCK.; Pyrophorus C. Kocx with Gees (LATR.) SUND. 2) Instead of some generic names already d sinh appropriated, not, it is true, adopted by SIMON, but applied by other arachnologists, and which appear to me to indieate good and well characterized genera, I avail myself of this opportunity to propose the following appellations: For Ariadne DOLESCH. (1857) I propose Ariamnes ( Agwéuvme, prop. name, masc.); Cerceis MENGE (1866) Cercidia (x&oxíc; shuttle); „ Cyphagogus GÜNTH. (1862) 5 Cyphonethis (xvgóc, curved, v59íc, female spinner); Galena ©. Kocx (1845) Gelanor (l'eAívoo, prop. name myth.); Latona L. Kocx (1866) Lampona (Adurwv, prop. name); » Pasithea BLackw. (1858) ^ Peucetia (Ievxéruos, prop. name myth.); » Triclaria C. Kocx (1848) Z Trechalea (tonxadéos, rough, savage). 38 T. THORELL, To point out and correct the numerous erroneous or contradictory statements we have met with in SIMON's work, excepting where they con- cern the synonymies of the European spider-fauna, would be foreign to the problem we are endeavouring to solve. It would moreover be an unneces- sary and thankless task, for these errors are generally of such a character that they are readily seen by any one tolerably versed in arachnology. — SIMON appears to have no idea, that a name, once imposed, ought to be respected, and not arbitrarily changed for another. He rechristens La- TREILLE'S Cteniza (= Nemesia SAV. et AUD.) Mygalodonta, merely because he imagines himself to have discovered, that the former apellation "est restée inconnue” The name Aulonia C. KocH he rejects without assigning any reason at all, and gives to that genus the new name Lycosina. It is there- ' fore evident that many changes must be made in his nomenclature: the name Actinopus PERTY has right of priority before Sphodros WALCK., 3) which is adopted by SIMON, Palpimanus Dur. before (Platyscelum Say. et AUD., and) Chersis WALCK., SIM., etc. Several corrections connected with this we shall have occasion to make in the following pages. XX. VIEW OF THE GENERA OF EUROPEAN SPIDERS. It is customary to begin the series of spiders with the Zpeiroide or the Orbitelarie. and in the following pages I have conformed to this custom, because it appears to me that the properties that distinguish the whole Order of Spiders, are most strikingly seen in that family, and the Epeiroi- dæ may therefore be considered as including the very type itself of the Order. (Ariadna Sav. et Aup. [Aran.] 1825—7; — Cerceis MILNE-Eow. [Crust.] 1840; — Galene DE Haan [Crust.] 1835; — Latona Scum. [Moll.] 1817; — Pasithea La- MOUROUX [Polypi] 1812; — Triclaria Waen. [Aves] 1838]. — The name Cyphagogus has been given to a genus among the Curculiones [Coleopt.] long before 1862, accord- ing to GERSTÄCKER (Bericht üb. die wissensch. Leistungen im Gebiete d. Entomolo- gie wühr. d. Jahres 1862, p. 560)). 1) Sphodros was, it is true, already in 1833 mentioned by WALCKENAER in his Mém. s. une nouv. classif. d. Aranéides, but all that is there communicated about that genus, is, that it has "les yeux écartés” like Missulena ( Eriodon), and that it is "intermédiare entre les Missulénes et les Mygales", which assuredly cannot be considered as a characterization of the genus. — (Sphodrus CrarRw. [Coleopt.] 1806). ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 39 I begin then with that family, not because I consider it to stand higher than others, but for the same reason, for which, when systematically treat- ing, for instance, the Class of Fishes, one usually goes out from the Teleostei or Bony fishes, and not from the undoubtedly far higher organized Selachie [and Dipnoil. I am far from persuaded that the family Epeiroidze really includes the highest forms within the Order Araneæ. If we had only to take account of the development of the instincts, we might, in consi- deration of the more artistic construction of the webs of the Epeiroidee, place that group above the other families of the Order; but then again, if we consider, as we reasonably ought to do, more the harmonious develop- ment of the body’s various parts, the superior development of the organs of sense, and suchlike, we soon see that the Epeiroidæ, with their weak cephalothorax and heavy abdomen, their slow and clumsy motions, their comparatively small eyes, etc., are surpassed by more than one of the other families, usually looked upon as lower. Generally speaking, the opinion that spiders which build a web, are higher animals than those which hunt their prey, seems to be unfounded. Those which are most perfectly organized ought to have the higher rank assigned them, and it appears to me difficult to show, that in that respect the weavers in any way take precedence of the hunters. The family Theraphosoide or Mygalide, which surpass all other spider-families in magnitude, form through Li- phistius desultor SCHIODIE, which is destitute of spinners and has the back of the abdomen covered with jointed horn-shields, a connexion with the Phrynoidæ and Scorpions, which I believe must be considered as more highly organized animals than spiders ). The Lycosoide, and in a still 1) I do not however consider the remarkable agreement between Liphistius and Phrynus as proving that that genus has any nearer affinity (depending on a closer propinquity of descent) to Phrynus than other spiders have, but I only consider it as an example of the analogy that can exist between groups of animals not inti- mately related. In the case of spiders this is not a solitary example. Anetes cc- letrum MENGE (Verz. d. Danziger Spinnen, p. 71), which is said to stand in near relation to Arcys among the Thomisoide, is without spinners, like Liphistius. The relationship which Vinson believes to exist between the Epeiroid genus Arachnura Vins. (Aran. d. Iles de la Réunion ete., p. 289) — in which genus the abdomen is drawn out into a kind of tail — and the Scorpions, depends upon a similar, only still weaker analogy. Mac LEay mentions (On some new forms of Arachn., p. 5) "a singularly flat and minute, hard-shelled, six-eyed spider with a sessile abdomen", which is met with in Cuba, and which he considers as forming the connecting link between spiders and Acari. Here perhaps we have an instance of true affinity between spiders and a lower group: indeed the Order of spiders is undoubtedly no 40 T. THORELL, higher degree the Attoide, distinguish themselves by their well proportion- ed forms, their powerfully developed cephalothorax, by the quickness and force of their movements, highly developed organs of sight, and the Atto- ide also by an expression of intelligence, which cannot escape even the most casual observer, and which, among other lower invertebrate animals, is only to be found in that Order of Insects which comprises undeniably the most highly developed animals of this Class, the Hymenoptera. As regards the other reasons that have been adduced in support of the as- sumption of the preeminence of the Epeiroide before all other spiders, such as the numerousness and beauty of the species, the small number of transition-forms, ete., they hold equally true of the Attoide, which form a unit quite as close, compact and rich in species as the Epeiroidæ; in the brillianey and variety of their colours they surpass both these and the other families of spiders, and may even be compared with the most showy families of Coleoptera, so distinguished for beauty and brilliancy of colour. If it is difficult to agree on, which group of spiders is to be consi- dered as the highest, it is on the contrary easy enough to determine which of the sub-orders received by us occupies the lowest rank. We without hesitation assign that place to the Tubitelariæ, among which, it is true, clear and defined transition-forms to lower groups of animals are as little to be met with as in any of the other sub-orders, but which nevertheless show themselves in many respects to stand in a lower stage than the other great subdivisions of the Order. The gradual reduction of the organs of vision is already one evidence of this: most of the spiders, that have only six eyes belong to this sub-order, and it is only within its compass that species have been found having only two eyes (Nops), or even totally mere connecting link between two other orders of Arachnoidea, but appears to have been developed side hy side with the so-called Arthrogastra (Solifugæ SUND.) from an inferior group, probably the Opiliones. In the families of the Scytodoidæ and Filistatoide are several features that may be considered to indicate relationship with the last-named order, as for ex. the process at the extremity of the mandible, whieh in conjunction with its claw almost forms a two-fingered forceps; the extraordinarily long legs of Polcus, the tarsus divided into three parts, ete. — Hacxen (Gene- relle Morphologie d. Organismen, II, p. xcvır) believes that spiders were developed from the Galeodoide, independently of the other divergent branches which, accord- ing to his view, go out from the Galeodoide, viz. Scorpiones (including Phrynus) and Opiliones; he considers the Saltigrade as the spiders, which still stand in the near- est relation to the Galeodoidæ, probably on account of the apparent segmentation of the cephalothorax in the genus Myrmecium. I can however in no wise accede to this opinion. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 41 blind forms (Stalita, Hadites)*). In contradistinction to the Saltigrade, Citigrade, Orbitelariæ ete., the sub-order Tubitelarie is extremely polymor- phous, and forms only a loosely connected combination of very heteroge- neous elements: it must be divided into many families and a great number of genera, and but few of these last seem to contain more than a very limited number of species. Transition-forms to almost all the other sub- orders are also to be found among the Tubitelariæ, which form as it were the chaos, from which the other more sharply defined and clearer types have been gradually developed. The forms are frequently coarse, ugly and clumsy, the colour dark and dusky; even their generally concealed and nocturnal habits indicate the lower rank of these animals. Among the dif- ferent families, into which this sub-order is divided, the first place must certainly be assigned to the Agalenoide; the remaining families would ap- pear to be in about the same stage of development, though probably the Filistatoide are the lowest. With them may be joined, as occupying an equally low position, the family Scytodoide in the sub-order Retitelarie. Whether we endeavour to arrange the families and genera of spiders in a continuous series, from that group which is looked upon as the most perfect, down to the lowest, or vice versa, or whether we arrange them after any other principle, we are soon met by the same difficulties which present themselves, whenever we endeavour to arrange in such a manner any class or order whatever of the productions of nature. We are soon obli- ged to abandon the hope of making the arrangement fully natural, i. e. such as to give a clear view of the more near or distant relationships of the various groups, and their thence following mutual similarities and dissimi- larities, and in the choice of the various combinations that offer themselves, we have, as WALCKENAER (Tabl. d. Aran., p. xu) happily expressed himself, often enough only “le choix des inconvénients”. The arrangement of the series itself is accordingly often enough tolerably unimportant, if one only take care in some other way to account for the natural relations which the various groups have to each other. As regards the larger groups of spiders, the sub-orders and the families, the reasons for the order of arrangement we have chosen will, we hope, easily be seen if one casts one’s eye on 1) Even the so imperfectly described blind Antrobia [Anthrobia] monmouthia TELLKAMP (Beschr. einig. neuen in d. Mammuth-Hóhle aufgef. Gliederth., p. 318, Taf. VIII, fig. 13—17) probably belongs to this family, and not to the Territelarie as TELLKAMP supposes: Compare his description and figure of the animal's mandibles ("Kieferklauen eingeschlagen") and maxillæ. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 6 42 T. THORELL, the accompanying diagram, which gives a view of the connexion founded on real affinity which the families of the spiders adopted by us, accor- ding to our opinion, have with each other 1). That connexion is more ea- sily shown in a plane than in a series, but of course ever that method of representation still leaves much to be desired. Thus e. g. the line (13) that marks the Thomisoide ought to be supposed drawn in another plane, so that the distance between the Theraphosoidæ (10) and the Zycosoide (14) may not be greater than between the first of these and the Thomisoidæ (13). We first divide the order of spiders (ARANEÆ) into 7 swb-orders: I. Orbitelarie, II. Retitelarie, III. Tubitelarie, IV. Territelarie, V. Citi- grade, VI. Laterigrade, and VI. Saltigrade, corresponding to the old, almost similarly named Latreillian families (Retitelarie NOB. = Inequitele Later.) 2). These subdivisions moreover fall asunder into the 22 families inserted in the figure. If we begin with the Tubitelariæ as the lowest sub- order, we might also consider the others as radiating from it in three prin- cipal branches, whereof one is composed of the Zetitelarie and Orbitelarie, another of the Territelarie, the third of the Zaterigrade, Citigrade and Saltigrade: the 16 families represented in the European fauna would per- haps then be most accurately conjoined in the following manner: 16. Attoide. 1. Epeiroide. 115. Eresoide. 12. Theridioide. ]14. Oxyopoide. 13. Scytodoide. 113. Lycosoide, 4. Enyoide. 112. Thomisoide. 5. Urocteoide. 6. Hersilioide. Y. Agalenoide. |, Drassoide. © go . Dysderoide. 0. Filistatoide. | | l | 1. Theraphosoide. 1) I believe with Darwin, "that propinquity of descent — the only known cause of the similarity of organic beings — is the bond, hidden as it is by various degrees of modification, which is partially revealed to us by our classifications’ (On the Origin of Species, 4th Ed., p. 489). 2) The old division of the spiders into two great coordinate groups, Theraphoses and Araignées: WALCK. (Mygalées and Aranées: DUGHS), or Quadripulmonaires and | Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Ups. Ser. III. Vol. VII. T. Thorell, On European Spiders. Pag. 42 1. Epeiroide. Il. Retitelariæ. 3.Scytodoidæ. 4 Enyoide. 5. Urocteoide. 6.Omanoidæ. 7.Hersilioide. 8 Agalenoide. 9 Drassoidæ. 10.Dysderoide. 11. Filistatoide. + T- Orbitelarie. 2 Theridioide. TII. Tubitelaria. ARENA VO (Opiliones) IV. Territelaris. 12. Theraphosoide. 13. Liphistiuide, 14, Catadysoide. V. Laterigrade. 15. Thomisoidse, VI. Citigrade. : 16. Lycosoide. 17. Oxyopoide. VIL. Saltigrade. 18. Myrmecioide. 19. Otiothopoide. 20. Dinopoide. 21. Eresoide. 22. Attoidæ. (Phrynoide)_. Lith.o.ir.h. Schlachter & Seedorif, Stockh. - #3 MAMA Kae VOTES «rtr inl wu ag ed tod ape “EN nt So al ie ly oii avos retener jaan: elie vx Me uu tonius ‚amt Arm sare Moon c ou mL PR bán ti uM suede) Ste ibi sil Day od NS ER to te tant dal to T oat: aa tr auront iue The. oat: vor bodies Tan. etr CHR boit Dac rohe rotis sn diem wand quif ot; Taorhod" bra or. asia qi whats fart py an vulto omnet maly ty aodio boum 20 tee dori Tad VW u» ni ae or dintildé. wand ond sor tise) diye ee A fico brand u road Ws coe 0d] nct NG i ot of Bellen. air odi van uelint p oT ul aj rotg zu dolia obo moo SI] dre 1 V add aller range à do ake "iuvare ond ARTEN = " iod "dowr. 4pfirgoyrt ginal one ons idi de^ adi, cron és me | Io ring Menton ait HN etas tr hor s "SIS IN Aion Ur hie Mesue nm sve easly WARE wil. "oo c Dodo neve ent xin or dau ofr enue, Oe AE iod it i : wise V pando N TIVA br vor ow Iudet vent Hall titt] at ditt. ant Ronan UN ani dane: NOT xu A [UM] N : à hunt ott lo donor fauibutronut silted arie TE ARES 1 N. Ba RR TO lat a onu lie oe an dice be d x In | M d Past res ng Eb feo sS wo US tata DUM xi oai Ao art, FRA ur ar ata uw EL N oto fran "stt guit ils. nerven Ser Dr a, Alla anita ^ ; hoe TOTO 4. fin ve a til Haar ud BEI i zn wit i v "nit 10.4 volantes sul il d NT, Pay ih Sa d Ve "abes otim ^o neni Sali pilo MD E LED " | " " i » p DATOS N roo Wan LE Ent, TET 4 rhra 32 | ! olx 15. Ml niea vi O3 ; i vnus . ato onte juli Put bx pur t^e Y ud nd " > } ¢ inne, 115 alle or ERUTI TE ou yv ^g Det aet ds nox ki AW n iuf Hu On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 43 Concerning the exotic families accepted by us a few words appear ne- cessary. The family Ayrmecioide stands almost half-way between the Attoide and the Drassoide, and, though forming a continous series with them, cannot well be aggregated to either. — The wonderful genus Otiothops Mac LEAY !), whieh differs from all other known spiders in the form of the first pair of legs, which are palpiform, short and thiek, without claws, and composed of only 6 joints, certainly appears to stand nearest to Palpimanus among the Eresoide, but cannot easily be united either with that or any other as yet formed family, on which account we have been obliged to set up a new family especially for it, the Otiothopoidæ. — Whether the D/nopoide really ought to occupy the place I have allotted to them, is uncertain: L. KocH >) unites them with the Æresoidæ, to which they appear to me to approach nearest: DOLESCHALL ?) however says of a species described by him, Dinopis Kollari from Amboina, that "it builds a very long irregular web between trees, in the middle of which web it sits, with its frontmost pair of legs stretched out.” DOLESCHALL places Dinopis between Dolomedes and Oxyopes; even Mac LEAY, who was the first to make known this genus, reckons it to the Citigrade. — As regards the Catadysoide, I have thought it necessary to form that new family for the North American Cutadysas [Katadysas] pumilus HENTZ *), which, by having the palpi inserted near the extremity of the maxilla, and by the longitudinal direction of the mandi- bular claw, is related to the typical Theraphosoidæ, but in other respects seems to approach very near to the Zycosoidæ: like them it is said to have only two tracheal ("pulmonary") sacs. — The family Liphistioide has been Bipulmonaires: Durour (Tetrapneumones and Dipneumones: LATR.) is now, I think, pretty generally abandoned. 1) On some new forms of Arachn., p. 13. — The name is no doubt formed: of odéw or OIG, run against, push, and ww, eye, with reference to the cireumstance, that the two posterior intermediate eyes, which are of different size, stand so close together, that the larger seems to push the smaller out of the way. The name in this case ought to be quite otherwise written — one might at least alter it to Othio- tops. But, as some may perhaps prefer to derive the word from wziov, a little ear, and dow, flatterer, however impossible that etymology may appear to me, I have not eonsidered myself at liberty to alter the usually received way of writing the word. In Agassiz’ Nomencl. Zool. it is derived from wziov, auris and ww facies! 2) Beschr. neuer Arachn. u. Myriap. (1867), p. 59 (231). 3) Tweede Bijdr. t. de Kennis d. Arachn. v d. Ind. Arch., p. 11. 4) Araneides of the United States, in Boston Journ. of Nat. Hist., Vol. VI, p. 287, Pl. X, fig. 16. 44 T. THORELL, formed for the remarkable genus Liphistius SCHIÖDTE !) — from the Island of Pinang— which, as we have already observed, differs from all other known spiders in having the back of the abdomen covered with a row of horny plates jointed into one another, and which is destitute of spinners, but in other respects is similar to the Theraphosoide. — Lastly, the family Omanoide is identical with the CEcobiidie BLACKW.?), a family, which BLACKWALL has formed for a six-eyed spider with calamistrum and infra-mammillary organ and two claws on the tarsi, and which he has described under the name of (Kcobius navus; this spider does not however belong to the genus (Ecobius Lucas (as will be shown under that genus) and we have therefore changed its name into Omanus, and that of the family into Omansidæ. — For the new families formed by us, that have representatives in the fauna of Europe, we shall have occasion fully to account in the following pages. GENERA ARANEARUM EUROPHARUM. Sub-ordo I. ORBITELARIE. Sub-ordo II. RETITELARI A. Fam. I. EPEIROIDZE. Fam. I. THERIDIOID A. Sub-fam. I. EPEIRINÆ. Gen. 1. Pachygnatha SUND. 2. Formicina CANESTR. Gen. 1. Argiope Sav. et AUD. 91 Episinus WALCK. 2. Epeira (WALCK.). 4. Argyrodes SIM. 3. Cyrtophora (SIM.). 5. Tapinopa WESTR. 4. Singa (C. Koch). 6. Linyphia (LATR.). 5. Cercidia THOR. 7. Erigone SAV. et AUD. 6. Zilla (C. Koch). 8. Walckenaera (BLACKW.). ü Meta (C. Koch). 9. Nesticus THOR. . Tetragnatha (WALCK.). 10. Ero (€. Koch). 11. Phyllonethis THOR. 12. Dipena THOR. 9. Uloborus LATR. 13. Theridium (WALCK.). 10. Hyptiotes WALCK. 14. Steatoda (SUND.). Sub-fam. II. ULOBORINJE. 1) Om en afvigende Slægt af Spindlernes Orden, p. 5 (621). 2) Deser. of newly dise. spid. fr. the isl. of Madeira, p. 382. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 15. Lithyphantes THOR. 16. Lathrodectus WALCK. 17. Euryopis (MENGE). 18. Asagena SUND. 19. Pholcomma THOR. ‘Fam. II. SCYTODOIDE. Sub-fam. I. PHOLCIN®. Gen. 1. Pholcus WALCK. 2. Spermophora HENTZ. Sub-fam. I. SCYTODINÆ. 3. Scytodes LATR. 4. Loxosceles HEIN. et LOWE. Fam. III. ENYOIDÆ. Gen. 1. Zodarium WALCK. 2. Enyo SAV. et AUD. Sub-ordo III. TUBITELARLE. Fam. I. UROCTEOIDE. Gen. 1. Uroctea Dur. 2. Œcobius Luc. Fam. II. HERSILIOIDÆ. Gen. 1. Hersiliola THOR. Fam. III. AGALENOIDJE. Sub-fam. I. AMAUROBIINA. Gen. 1. Dictyna SUND. 2. Argenna THOR. 3. Titaneca THOR. 4. Amaurobius (C. Koch). 5. Lethia (MENGE). Sub-fam. I. AGALENINÆ. . Cybeus L. KocH. . Celotes BLACKW. . Tegenaria (LATR.). . Crypheca THOR. © D -1 C» 10. Hahnia (C. Koch). 11. Agalena (WALCK.). 12. Histopona THOR. 13. Textrix SUND. 14. Hadites KEYSERL. 15. Agreca WESTR. Sub-fam. IIL ARGYRONETINÆ. 15. Argyroneta LATR. Fam. IV. DRASSOIDJE. Gen. 1. Zora (€. Koch). . Apostenus WESTR. . Trachelas L. Kocx. Liocranum L. Kocn. . Anyphena SUND. . Clubiona (LATR.) Chiracanthium C. Kocn. . Phrurolithus (C. Kocn). . Micaria WESTR. . Drassus (WALCK.). . Melanophora €. KOCH. . Gnaphosa (LATR.). . Thysa KEMP. NE © © 00 -3 C» Ot komm Sy) Fam. V. DYSDEROIDJE. Gen. 1. Segestria LATR. . Schenobates BLACKW. . Ariadne Say. et AUD. . Dysdera (LATR.). . Harpactes TEMPL. . Oonops TEMPL. . Stalita SCHIGDTE. ID OW oo vw Fam. VI. FILISTATOIDÆ. Gen. 1. Filistata LATR. Sub-ordo IV. TERRITELARIE. Fam. I. THERAPHOSOIDE. Gen. 1. Atypus LATR. 2. Cyrtauchenius THOR. 3. Nemesia SAV. et AUD. 4. Diplura (€. Koch). 5. Trechona (€. Koch). [6. Avicularia (Lam.).] Sub-ordo V. LATERIGRAD.E. Fam. I. THOMISOIDÆ. Sub-fam. I. PHILODROMINA. Gen. 1. Micrommata (LATR.). 2. Sparassus (WALCK.). [3. Heteropoda (LaTR.)]. 4. Selenops Dur. 5. Artanes THOR. 6. Philodromus (WALCK.). 7. Thanatus €. Koch. Sub-fam. II. THOMISINJE. 8. Moneses THor. 9. Thomisus (WALCK.). 10. Misumena (LATR.). 11. Diea THOR. 12. Xysticus (€. Koch). 13. Coriarachne THOR. Sub-fam. III. ANETINÆ. 14. Anetes MENGE. Sub-ordo VI. CITIGRADE. Fam I. LYCOSOIDE. 1. Aulonia €. KOCH. 2. Lycosa (LATR.). 3. Tarentula (SUND.). T. THORELL, . Trochosa (C. KocH). . Pirata SUND. . Dolomedes (LATR.). . Ocyale Sav. et AUD. . Ctenus (WALCK.).] D -1 CO» Qt À Ip Fam. II. OXYOPOIDE. Gen. 1. Peucetia 'THOR. 2. Oxyopes LATR. Sub-ordo VII. SAL TIGRAD X. Fam I. ERESOIDÆ. Sub-fam. I. ERESINA. Gen. 1. Eresus WALCK. Sub-fam. II. PALPIMANINA. 2. Palpimanus Dur. Fam. II. ATTOIDZE. Gen. 1. Salticus (LATR.). 2. Leptorchestes THOR. 3. Epiblemum (HENTZ.). 4. Heliophanus €. KOCH. 5. Ballus (€. Koch). 6. Marpissa (C. Koch). 7. Menemerus (SIM.). 8. Dendryphantes (C. Kocn). 9. Euophrys (C. Koch). 10. Phileus THOR. 11. Attus (WALCK.). 12. Ælurops THOR. 13. Yllenus (Srw.). On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 47 Ordo ARANEE. Sub-ordo I. ORBITELARLE. Syn.: Vide infra sub Fam. Epeiroide. The European spiders belonging to this sub-order, which comprises only one family, the Zpeiroide, are, as is known, most easily distinguished from their nearest relations, the Retitelarie, by a very low, not transversally impressed forehead, where the distance between the margin of the clypeus and the intermediate of the anterior eyes is less, or at any rate not greater, than that between the anterior and posterior intermediate eyes (except in the case of some males with a strongly projecting forehead); in the Retite- lariæ on the contrary (with the exception of Tapinopa) the former distance is greater than the latter. They all have three strong, genuine claws on the tarsi, of which the two superior are pectinated, and the inferior armed with two close and (except in the case of Hyptiotes) blunt comb-teeth; in Uloborus and Cyrtophora conica alone I have observed on that claw only one well developed tooth. Moreover the extremity of the tarsus is always previded with two or more accessory (or auxiliary) claws. The palpus-claw in the female is always well developed, pectinated or serrated. The first pair of legs is longer than the others, except in Cercidia (Cerceis MENGE). The spinners are short, the superior and inferior about equal in length. Fam. I. EPEIROIDAE. Syn.: 1817. "Orbiteles" LaTR. in Cuvier, Règne Anim., R. III, p. 86. 1823. Retiariæ SUND., Gen. Aran. Suec., p. 15. 1825. Orbitele Larr., Fam. Nat. du Règne Anim., p. 315. 1833. Epeirides SUND., Consp. Arachn., p. 13. 1833. Araneæ Orbitelariæ Perry, Delect. Anim. Art. Bras.. p. 193. 1850. Epeirides C. Kock+Mithraides, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 8 et 15. rp. In this family we include all the spiders already reckoned as be- longing to it by LATREILLE, who called the family Orbitele, and by SUN- DEVALL, who introduced the appellation Æpeirides, accordingly all those that spin regular, so-called "geometrical" webs. Amongst C. Kocn’s spider- families, besides his Æpeirides, the Mithraides, including the genera Poltys and Mithras (Hyptiotes- WALCK.), belong to this family. That Poltys C. Koch 48 T. THORELL, is an Epeirod spider, has been shown by KEYSERLING: 1) as to Mithras C. Kocu or Hyptiotes, I have in a previous paper ?) endeavoured to show its near relationship to Uloborus LATR. and consequently its connexion with the Epeiroide, whereof more farther on under the Gen. Hyptiotes. — WESIRING gives to this family the same limits that we have assigned to it; BLACKWALL on the contrary separates Uloborus (Veleda BLACKW.) and Hyptiotes from the Epeiroide and includes them among his Ciniflonide, on which step we shall presently have occasion to express our opinion (when treating the sub-family Uloborime) — SIMONS arrangement of this family, which he calls ” Épéiriformes" 5), appears to me not particularly happy. He divides it into four "tribus": 1:0 ”Nuctobiens’ or "Theridio-Epeires” (for the genus Nyctobia SIM = Meta C. KocH + Zilla ıD.); 2:0 ” Tetragna- thiens” (with the genera Uloborus, Zosis, Tetragnatha and Argyrodes SIM. = WALCKENAER'S "Linyphies épéirides"); 3:0 ”Epeiriens’ (including Singa, Epeira, Nephila, Gasteracantha, Acrosoma, Arachnura and Dolophones), and 4:0 " Érésiens" (the genus Æresus). — The species of Argyrodes Sim. live, according to ViINSON,*) who assigns them a place among the Linyphie, parasitically in the "'toiles" of certain Epeiroidæ, in which they weave "leurs petits réseaux." VINSON does not say that these "réseaux" have a form different from those of other Linyphiæ, which I think he would not have omitted to do if such had been the case, and it is therefore not prob- able that the webs of these spiders are like those of the Epeiroidæ, or that Argyrodes belongs to that family. — That there is no near connexion between Æresus and the Epeiroide, it is probably unnecessary to prove. — Uloborus and Zosis (= Orithyia BLACKW.) undoubtedly deserve in combina- tion with Hyptiotes to be classed as a separate "tribus" or sub-family on account of the presence of an infra-mammillary organ >) and calamistrum : Tetragnatha on the contrary is closely related to Meta, and that genus, as also Zilla, is so intimately connected with Æpeira and Singa, that these 5 genera can hardly be distributed among different sub-families. — MENGE, whose "tribus" Orbitele corresponds to our Epeiroidee, divides 5) the spiders of this tribus described by him, (all of which belong to the sub-family 1) Beschr. neuer ete. Orbitelæ, p. 1 and 22. 2) Till kànned. om Mithras och Uloborus, p. 202 et seq. 3) Hist. Nat. des Araignées, p. 233, 4) Aran. de la Réun., Maur. et Madag., p. 259. 5) See above, p. 29. 6) Preuss. Spinn., I, p. 40 and 90. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 49 -Epeirine NOB.) into two "families", Æpeiridæ and Tetragnathide, which however differ only in the position in which the animals place themselves in their webs, and in their methods of capturing their prey and of copulating, but not in any point of bodily formation. — We can admit of only two European sub-families, Epeirin® and Uloborine. We accordingly arrange the European Epeiroide in the following manner: § Organum infra-mamillare nullum; metatarsi postici calamistro carent. nn con Coma tie DU I DEIR UNIS + Maxillæ breves, latitudine non vel parum longiores. * Series oculorum postica, desuperne visa, fortiter procurva’). Cepha- lothorax sub-planus, parte cephalica parva, humili. . . . 1. Argiope. ** Series oculorum postica, desuperne visa, sub-recta vel recurva. Ce- phalothorax modice convexus, parte cephalica (in feminis saltem) sat magna. A. Oculi laterales postici a mediis posticis multo longius distantes quam hi inter se. I. Pedes 1": paris reliquis longiores. a. Oculi laterales antici ab anticis mediis sæpissime eviden- ter, plerumque dimidio — duplo longius distantes quam hi inter se. Abdomen plerumque ovatum, interdum subglobo- sum, sæpe antice tuberculatum. . . . . . . 2. Æpeira. b. Oculi laterales antici ab anticis mediis non vel paullo tantum longius distantes quam hi inter se. Series oculorum posti- corum, desuperne visa, evidenter recurva; frons ultra basin mandibularum plus minus prominens. 1. Oculi laterales sæpissime sat late disjuncti. Abdomen postice in formam coni produetum vel ibi tuberculatum. s 9 woe Nae $09. en BS bho Ga @yriopRonen 2. Oculi laterales sub-contingentes, ab anticis mediis vix vel non longius distantes quam hi inter se. Abdomen cute molli tectum, cylindrato-ovale, cum cephalothorace parce pilosum et sub-nitidum. . . . . . 4 Singa. IL Pedes 4“ paris reliquis longiores. Abdomen cute duriuscula tectum Fein Etre MET. Mey NA LIMES, DW @ereidim, B. Oculi laterales postici non vel (in c?) parum longius a mediis posticis distantes quam hi inter se. Series oculorum posticorum, 1) The series is said to be procurva, when its convezity is directed backwards, recurva, when the convexity is directed forwards (towards the mouth). — The curvature of the anterior series is determined as seen from before, and that of the posterior as seen from above. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 7 50 T. THORELL, desuperne visa, sub-recta; frons non ultra basin mandibula- rum prominens. Cephalothorax parvus, debilis. Abdomen bre- viter ovale, sub-depressum . . . sono à G ZA Tr Maxillæ dimidio — du longiores quam «dines Sees oculorum antico- rum fortiter recurva. Oculi laterales sub-contingentes, a mediis non multo longius distantes quam hi inter se. . . . veo esl ies MEM ELS +t} Maxille latitudine duplo vel ultra luisse Bets oculorum anticorum sub-recta. Oculi laterales disjuneti. . . . . . . . 8. Tetragnatha. SS Organum infra-mamillare adest; metatarsi postici calamistro instrueti. . FUE aula Mc Melo v cet dues | is Pama; tho: CIO do . II. ULOBORINZ. 1. Series oculorum antica margini frontis pt proeurva, postica re- GHIA, o 0 c sm TON Ullob Ommas 2. Oculi a oss donis suse. oh, p magnum occupantes; series antica procurva, postica recurva, ene, SEI oe OSTEN DITES Whether Dolophones notacanthas (Quoy et GAIN.) ?) really belong to the Orbitelarie and Epeiroide, as SIMON thinks,?) appears to me tolerably doubtful. The New-Holland genus Celenia 'THOR.,?) distinguished by its high clypeus and its long slender anterior pairs of legs developed into a sort of pe- des raptorü, the two upper tarsal claws of which are of very different size, ought certainly to form a separate sub-family (perhaps a particular family). This genus bas 3 claws upon the tarsi, which is said not to be the case with the, as it seems, else so nearly related genus T’hlaosoma CAMBR., the species of which, according to CAMBRIDGE,*) have only two tarsal claws, and make no web, but live "beneath folded leaves.” CAMBRIDGE assigns Thlaosoma to the Thomisoide, to which family Celenia at any rate cannot be aggregated. WuitE has 5) under the name of Linyphia (Leucauge) argyrobapta described a spider taken by DARWIN in Brazil, whieh probably belongs to the Epeiroide; at least there is reason to suppose so, in consequence of the following notice of the remarkable method pursued by this species in the construction of its web, which WHITE communicates from DARWIN'S MSS. "Web very regular, nearly horizontal, with concentric circles: beneath, but sometimes above, the concentric web, there is an irregular or thin tissue of network; the animal rests in the centre, on the inferior surface.” 1) Conf. Waucx., Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 382. 2) Hist. Nat. d. Araignées, p. 297. 3) Eugenies Resa omkr. Jorden, Zool, Araehn. 1, p. 1. 4) Deser. of a new gen. and six new spec. of Spid., p. 273, 274. 5) Deser. of new or little known Arachn., p. 473. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 51 Sub-fam. I. EPEIRINZE. Syn.: 1841. Epeiridæ BLackw., The differ. in the numb. of eyes etc., p 668. 1866. Epeiridee MENGE + Tetragnathidæ ID., Preuss. Spinn., I, p. 40, 90. This sub-family includes all the genuine European Epeiroids, i. e. those that are destitute of infra-mamillary organ and calamistrum. The Epeirinæ belonging to the fauna of Europe may, we think, be united under the genera Argiope, Epeira, Cyrtophora, Singa, Cercidia, Zilla, Meta and Tetragnatha, all which, with the exception of the last, constitute portions of the old Walckenaerian genus Epeira. Gen. 1. ARGIOPE Sav. et Aup. 1825—7. Deriv.: '40oycóz, mythol. proper name. Syn.: 1825—7. Argiope Sav. et Aup., in Descript. de l'Égypte, (2:e Ed.:) XXII, p. 328. 1829. Argyopes LaTR., in Cuv., Règne Anim., Nouv. Éd Av: p. 528. 1831. Argyope ID., Cours d'Entomol., p. 529. 1835. Miranda C. Kocu, zm HERR.-SCHEFF., Deutschl. Ins., 128, 14. 1839. Nephila rp., Die Arachn., V, (ad pariem:) p. 33. 1864. Argyopes Srw., Hist. Nat. d. Araignées, p. 281 (ad max. partem). 1864. Nephila 1p., ibid., p. 275 (ad partem). Type: Argiope lobata (PALLAS). We take this genus, which has been separated from WALCKENAER'S Epeira by SAVIGNY and AUDOUIN, in its original compass, which indeed seems to be the same as that assigned to it by SUNDEVALL!) and KEYSERLING ?), whereas some of the species attributed by C. KocH and SIMON to the genus Argiope, e. g. A. tridentatus and gonygaster, hardly seem rightly to belong to it. SAV. and Aup. include (loc. cit. p. 329) Aranea Brünnichü Scop. (Ar. fasciata OLIV.) in Argiope, which is perfectly right. By C. Kocx it was first erroneously assigned to Miranda, and afterwards to JVephila LEACH, which is not a more fortunate disposition, as the characteristics that mark this last genus (the anterior part of the cephalothorax elevated, broad; ma- xillæ considerably longer than they are broad, etc.) by no means apply to A. Brünnichü?). The genus Nephila must, for the present at least, be re- moved from the list of the European genera of spiders. We suspect in fact that Epeira ambagiosa WALCK. also is an Argiope. SIMON indeed classes it with the genus JVephila (p. 276), and, following WALCKENAER, gives 1) Consp. Arachn., p. 15. 2) Beschr. neuer etc. Orbitele, p. 2 (64). 3) Conf. LEACH, Zool. Mise., II, p. 133; — KEYSERLING, loc. cit. 52 T. THORELL, "Espagne" for its country, although on the page immediately following he says of Arg. Brünnichü (Nephila fasciata SIM.) that it is “la seule espèce Euro- péenne" of the genus JVephila, and also omits to include Æ. ambagiosa in his "Catalogue Synonymique"; but it is referred by WALCKENAER himself ") to the same (1°) Race of the genus Zpeira’s 4" family ("les Décorées"), to which Æ. fasciata, aurelia, œtherea and the other species of Argiope with unlobated or unnotehed abdomen belong. With reference to the orthography of the name Argiope, the follow- ing remarks may be reasonably made?) Both in the passage of the Descr. de l'Égypte, where that genus is described by Aupouin (T. XXII, p. 328 of the 2" Edit.) and in the index to that volume (p. 466), its Latin name is Argiope, but in French he calls it Argyope ("Genre Argyope, Argiope” just as he writes "Genre Tegenaire, Tegenaria”, "Genre Pholque, Pholcus" ete.) This latter orthography has moreover since been used not only in the French but also in the Latin names ?) of the species, and this has caused several subsequent authors to write Argyope instead of Argiope. As however AUDOUIN first, and in characterizing the genus, wrote Argiope, that orthography must be preserved, especially as it is that which is etymologically right (see the derivation of the word above), and the unreasonable spelling Ar- gyope, which has been received by LucAs, WALCKENAER and others — in- cluding myself, *) before I had the opportunity of consulting the Deser. de l'Egypte — must be abandoned. LATREILLE first (loc. cit. in Syn.) changed Argiope into Argyopes, in which he has been followed by SUNDEVALL, C. KocH, KEYSERLING and others, but shortly after wrote Argyope (loc. cit.). — The genus will, it is to be hoped, hereafter retain its original and proper name: Argiope SAv. et AUD. 1) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., II, p. 113. 2) Conf. THoRELL, Om Aranea lobata PALL., p. 596. 3) The confounding of i and y in names borrowed from the Greek is not very rare among French writers. SIMON for ex. has in his Hist. Nat. des Araignées, p. 433 formed a genus that he calls Pachyptila, but p. 526, where he reckons up the European species of that genus, he calls it Pachyptyla. . 4) Nya exot. Epeirider, p. 299. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 53 Genus 2. EPEIRA (WALCK.). 1805. Deriv. unknown ?). Syn.: + 1804. Aranea Larr., ir Nouv. Dict. d’Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 135 (ad partem). 1805. Epeira Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 53 (ad partem). 1837. Miranda C. Koch, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 4 (ad max. part.). 1837. Epeira ID., ibid. p. 1. 1837. Atea ID., ibid., p. 3. 1861. Epeira WESRTR., Aran. Suec., p. 20 (ad max. part.). 1864. a Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 323 (ad max. part.). 1864. 5 Srw., Hist. Nat. d. Araignées, p. 259 (ad maz. part.). Type: Epeira diademata (CLERCK). Among modern authors only LUCAS, BLACKWALL, VINSON and a few others have preserved WALCKENAER'S genus Æpeira (= Aranea LATR. 1804) undivided. Separate groups of species have from time to time been taken from it, and formed into partieular genera, and although several of these (especially those formed by C. KocH) are very imperfectly characterized, they have yet, though often with modified limits, been more or less gene- rally accepted. The greater part of the species included by KocH in his genera Miranda and Atea we refer to Æpeira strictly so called: his Meta, Zilla and Singa (with the limits assigned to the two first by WESTRING and to the last by MENGE and ourselves) may on the other hand be suffered to retain their place as independent genera. The determination of Kpeira sensu strictiori given by us in Ree. erit. (p. 106) has been adopted by WESTRING (loc. cit); we now however think that JE. conica were better se- parated from Æpeira and referred to a separate genus, Cyrtophora (SIM.). SIMON'S view of the genus Zpeira agrees with that of WESTRING, except that, in conformity with Kocx, he reckons JE. conica to Singa. He moreo- ver divides Epeira into three sub-genera, Miranda, Atea and Epeira, and this last sub-genus he farther divides into six "groups", Nyctinea f Nuctenea], Eriophora, Neoschena [Neoscona], Neopora, Epeira and Cyrtophora, most of which appear to be even more unnecessary and still worse defined than 1) In AaassiZ Nomencl. Zool. it is derived from ”Erretoouer, examinor”, a deriva- tion which appears to me destitute of all grounds. According to Simon, Æpeira comes from ”Erreiow, faire un tissu", which verb I have not been able to find in any Greek Lexicon to which I have access. — May not the name perhaps be formed of £z, on, and eioos, wool (with reference to the circumstance of the female's being usually found, after laying her eggs, sitting beside or upon the wool-like cocoon)? — As however all this is but conjecture, I have not ventured, like EnrcHsoN and SCHIÖDTE, to change the received orthography Epeira into Epira. 54 T. THORELL, the sub-genera proposed by Kocx. — Of Kocn’s above named new genera KEYSERLING adopts only Meta ?). MENGE 2), in dividing WALCKENAERS genus Æpeira, has adopted Kocu’s Singa, Zilla, Zygia, Miranda and Meta, as also Epeira, but not Atea, and has moreover formed two new genera, Cyclosa (for JE. conica) and Cerceis (for Singa prominens WESTR. But as he, in marking the cha- racteristics of these genera, fixes his attention almost exclusively on diffe- rences in the organs of generation, differences which do not seem to me sufficient to distinguish genera, I have not for the present considered it advisable to adopt his division entirely unaltered, more especially as, in many of the species, only one sex is known, and MENGE has therefore in some cases been uncertain whether the species really belong to the genus to which he has aggregated them or not. To Miranda he assigns, besides certain species referred to it by C. KocH, Ep. acalupha WALCK.; whereas, according to the characteristics given by MENGE, the following for example do not belong to his Miranda: Epeira armida Sav. and Aup. and JM. cero- pegia C. KocH (which is not identical with Z. ceropegia WALCK., as we shall hereafter, when we come to examine WESTRING’S Æ. ceropegia, show), al- though they are very nearly related to Æpeira ceropegia WALCK. and E. adianta ID., which MENGE assigns to Miranda. — The greatest part of the species, that compose KocH's Atea, are referred by MENGE, as also by us, to Epeira. — Zygia (Z. atrica) differs only by modifications of the organs of copulation from Zilla, which genus in MENGE'S work embraces only Zilla montana WESTR. (non KocH), described by MENGE under the name of Z. calophylla. The true Z. calophylla (WALCK.) C. KocH does not, according to the characteristics given by MENGE, belong either to Zygia or Zilla. — Singa prominens, which has the 4" pair of legs longer than the others, well deserves to be received as the type of a new genus, Cercidia NOB. (= Cerceis MENGE). — Ep. conica (and probably also Ar. citricola F'ORSK., Ep. oculata WALCK. and some others) ought to be united with Kp. opuntie DUF., which by the greater distance between the lateral eyes, and by the peculiar form of its abdomen, seems to form the type of a separate genus, Cyrtophora Sm. ad part. OnLERT?) has latterly endeavoured more accurately to determine and fix the genera reckoned by C. KocH to the Epeiroide, which are repre- sented in the Prussian fauna. He first divides them into three groups. In the first group (including the genera Æpeira, Singa, Miranda and Atea) 1) Beitr. z. Kenntn. d. Orbitelæ, p. 2 (800). 2) Preuss. Spinn., p. 41. 3) Die Aran. d. Prov. Preussen, p. 20—21. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 55 the 3" pair of legs is more than half as long as the first pair; in the se- cond group (Zygia and Zilla) the length of the 3" pair is /ess than half that of the 1"; and lastly in the third group (Meta) the length of the 3" pair is equal to half that of the first. The first group is also distinguished from the second and third by the form of the 4'" joint of the male’s palpi, which is short, broad and bowl-formed, not, as in the case of the others, cylindrieal and of greater length than breadth — a characteristic accordingly, that holds good only for one sex. The distinctions derived from the rela- tive length of the 1* and 3" pairs of legs do not however hold even for the few species that OHLERT has treated: in his Zilla acalypha (at least ©) for ex. the 3" pair of legs is not at all shorter but on the contrary considerably longer than half the 1‘, and that species ought therefore not to have been referred to Zilla but to Epeira (to which genus I have aggregated it) or Singa. Moreover this relation is sometimes different in the different sexes of the same species.) — Within the first group, Æpeira and Singa on the one hand are distinguished from Miranda and Aéea on the other by the 4 intermediary eyes of the first named genera forming a trapezoid, of which the posterior side is shorter than the anterior, and being all of about the same size, whereas in the latter they form a rectangle, and the hindermost of them are sensibly larger than the anterior ones. Of how little conse- quence however these differences are, will doubtless be immediately seen by anybody who has examined a larger number of not only European Epeiroidæ. If suchlike trifling differences in the position and size of the eyes are to be considered as decisive in the formation, within this family, 1) In a large full-grown female of Meta Menardi (LaTR.), I find the length of the 1% and 3" pairs of legs, reckoned from the edge of the cephalothorax, respec- tively 32'/, and 19 '/,, or, if the coxæ be taken into account, 34 and 21 millimeters; accordingly the 3™ pair of legs more than half as long as the 1*. This is also certainly the case in the male M. Menardi: in the only full-grown specimen I have of this spider, the tarsi of the 1* pair are wanting, but if these be considered as only half the length of the metatarsi, the 3" pair in this specimen will still be longer than half the first. — In a moderate-sized 5’ of Meta Merianæ (Scor.) I have indeed found the 1* pair of legs just double the length of the third, when the coxe are ineluded, but in Q the ease is otherwise: in a small, but fullgrown female specimen I found the first pair of legs 14"" and the 5"! pair 8 '/,"”-, reckoned from the edge of the cephalothorax; reckoned from the bases of the cox: these pairs were respec- tively 15""- and 9'/,"» long. — In cf of Zilla reticulata €. Kocx or Meta segmen- tata (CLERCK) the first pair is more than double, nearly 3 times, as long as the 3™ but in the female scarcely double: if the coxæ are included, the 3" pair is at least sometimes longer than half the first. 56 T. THORELL, of generic groups, the genera will be in the highest degree artificial, and species in all other respects very nearly related will be torn from each other and referred to different genera: e. g. Æ. angulata will be separated from E. bicornis, which must be an Atea OnL., E. sclopetaria from Æ. sollers, which would also, according to this system, belong to the genus Atea; Singa pygmea (S. Heri WESTR.) and S. albo-vittata from S. hamata, and so forth. — Atea ') according to OHLERT is distinguished from Miranda, by the lateral eyes being in the last named genus more than double, whereas in Atea they are less than double so far removed from the intermediary eyes, as these are from each other, and the anterior series being in Atea straight and in Miranda slightly curved backwards. (According to C. Kocx the anterior intermediary eyes in Area are farther apart than the posterior, whereas according to OHLERT these four eyes are placed rectangularly, — and yet both these authors refer the same species, Hp. agalena WALCK., to the genus Atea.) — OHLERT distinguishes Singa from Æpeira by the side- eyes being in Singa at the same distance, and in Zpeira at double the di- stance from the intermediary eyes, which the anterior intermediary eyes are from each other. If there were no transitions (as however there are both to Atea and Miranda), this would be a very good characteristic; and the genus Singa is perhaps the only one of KocH's new genera here mentioned, which can in the present state of the science be retained, not so much however on account of anything characteristic in the position of the eyes, as for the animal’s general form and appearance, somewhat resembling that of certain Theridioidæ. (Conf. WESTRING, Aran. Suec., p. 56). — In addition to the above-mentioned really trifling and moreover not even constant diffe- rence in the proportion of the length of the 1* and 3" pairs of legs, which, according to OHLERT, exists between Zygia and Zilla on the one side and Meta on the other, the two first of these genera are stated to have their eyes rectangularly placed, and the lateral litle more distant from the intermediary eyes than these latter from each other, whereas in the case of Meta the anterior intermediary eyes are somewhat nearer to each other than the posterior, and the side eyes at the same distance from the inter- mediate as these latter from each other. All these are, as we have already said, extremely weak and insignificant distinctions, which have not even the merit of being reliable, for e. g. Kocu’s and OHLERTS Zilla reticulata 1) Atea melanogaster C. KocH (Dipena melanogaster NOB.) is not an Zpei- roid at all, but belongs to the family Theridioide. Vid. infra: Gen. Dipena of that family. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 57 has the intermediary eyes placed precisely in the same manner as those of their Meta fusca. — Concerning these three genera, vid. infra: Gen. Zilla and Meta (p. 59, 61). Genus 3. CYRTOPHORA (Sm.). 1864. Deriv.: xveróc, crooked, bowed; géow, bear. Syn.: 1837. Singa C. Koch, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 6 (ad partem). 1861. Epeira Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 20 (ad partem). 1864. a Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., IT, p. 323 (ad partem). 1864. Singa Hist. Nat. d. Araignées, p. 255 (ad partem). 1864. Epeira: «groupe» Cyrtophora ID., ibid., p. 262 (ad partem). 1866. Cyclosa MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., I, p. 73. Type: Cyrtophora opuntiæ (DUFOUR). The spiders which, in consequence of peculiarities in the form of the abdomen, and usually also in the position of the eyes (conf. p. 49), we assemble under this generie name, are chiefly exotie: the only species found in northern Europe is Ar. conica PALLAS, which, sometimes referred to Epeira, sometimes to Singa, sometimes elevated to the rank of a separate genus, appears to us to stand in very close relation to Epeira opuntie DUF.'), a spider which we take as typical of the genus Cyrtophora, and which seems to be so consi- dered by Simon (loc. cit). For C. conica, MENGE has formed the genus Cyclosa, which name, being younger, must be rejected in favour of that given by SIMON. SIMON however aggregates to Cyrtophora several species, which surely have little or no relationship with C. opuntie: such are Epeira mexicana Lucas, Æ. paradoxa ID. — which would seem to be a Cyrtarachne THOR. (Cyrtogaster KEYSERL. — and Æ. mitralis VINSON, belonging to the genus Cerostris THoR., of the other species of which genus one, C. tuberculata (VINS.), is included by SIMON in the "groupe? Eriophora of the genus Epeira, and another, C. imperialis (WALCK.), in the sub-genus Hurysoma of the genus Gasteracantha.?) Further on in his work (p. 494, 495) he assigns even the species of the "groupe" of the ge- nus (and sub-genus) Zpeira, for which he had first specially reserved that name, (E. angulata, E. bicornis, etc.), to Cyrtophora, whereby this latter group is certainly not made more natural. 1) Durour, Deser. de six Arachn. nouv., p. 359, Tab. LXIX, fig. 3. 2) SIMON, loc. cit, p. 261 and 284. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 8 58 T. THORELL, In C. opuntie, as in most Epeiroidæ, the inferior tarsal claw has two comb-teeth in close juxtaposition, but in C. conica I have, as aforesaid, not been able to discover more than one distinctly developed tooth (and sometimes a very small point behind it) on that claw. Genus 4. SINGA (C. Koch). 1836. Deriv.: Ziyya, geogr. prop. name. Syn.: 1836. Singa C. Kocu, Die Arachn., III, p. 42 1837. , 1iv., Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., p. 6 (ad max. part.). 1861. d Wesrr. Aran. Suec., p. 56 1864. Epeira Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 323 (ad partem). 1864. Singa Srw., Hist. Nat. d. Araignées, p. 255 (ad max. part.). 1866. , MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., I, p. 81. Type: Singa hamata (CLERCK). This genus, formed by C. KocH at the expense of WALCKENAER'S Epeira, is not ackowledged by BLACKWALL, but received by WESTRING, who however assigns it somewhat different limits from those given it by KocH (and SIMON), paying more attention to the form of the cephalothorax and abdomen and the consequent peculiarities in the animal's general appearance, than to the position of the eyes, which but slightly deviates from that of certain Zpeire, viz. those in which the lateral eyes, like those of Singa, are little, if at all, more distant from the intermediary eyes, than these latter from each other. With MENGE, we assign to Singa the same spe- cies that are referred to it by WESTRING, excepting S. prominens (and SS. scu- tifera WESTR.), for which MENGE has formed the genus Cerceis (Cercidia NOB.) The limits between Æpeira and Singa are however by no means sharply defined, and it is not without some doubts that I have here taken up Singa as an independent genus separate from Æpeira. As its type Koch himself gives S. hamata (CLERCK). Concerning this genus see also under Gen. Epeira (p. 53). Genus 5. CERCIDIA x. Deriv.: xeoxéc, shuttle. Syn.: 1851. Epeira Wesrr., Förteckn., p. 33 | 1861. Singa ID., Aran. Suec., p. 56 (ad partem). 1864. Epeira BLackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 323 | 1) Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., loc. cit. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 1865. Atea Ontert, Arachnol. Studien, p. 9. + 1866. Cerceis MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., p. 80. Type: Cercidia prominens (WESTR.) This genus, set up by MENGE under the already engaged name of Cerceis?) for WESTRING'S Singa prominens, differs in sundry important par- ticulars from the other European Epeiroide. The hard, almost leather-like skin of the abdomen, and the unusual relative lengths of the legs (the 4" pair being longer than the first) are sufficient to justify the formation of this new genus; but in addition to this there are, according to MENGE, peculiarities in the structure of the organs of generation, and a small trans- versal opening in front of the spinners, in which 4 fine tubes (supposed by MENGE be air-tubes) terminate ?). The cocoon is like that of Æro but without shaft. Conf. MENGE, loc. cit., p. 80, 81. Genus 6. ZILLA (C. Kocn). 1834. Deriv.: Zilla, prop. name. Zygia C. Koch, in Hurr.-Scumrr., Deutschl. Ins., 123, 17—19. Syn.: + 1834. 1834. 1887. + 1845. 1861. 1364. 1864. 1866. 1866. 1867. Zilla 1D., ibid. (ad part.:) 125, 19. » ID., Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 5 (ad partem). Eucharia ID., Die Arachn., XII, (ad part.:) p. 103. Zilla WEsTR., Aran. Suec., p. 68. Epeira Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 323 (ad partem). Nyotobia [Nuctobia]: sub-gen. Zilla Srw., Hist. Nat. d. Araignées, p. 236, 237 (ad partem). Zilla MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., I, p. 76. Zygia ID., ibid., p. 77. OnnERT, Aran. d. Prov. Preuss., p. 21. ” Type: Zilla x-notata (CLERCK.) The genera Zilla and Meta appear to us to have with good reason been separated by C. KocH from Æpeira WALCK.: they form in many re- spects a transition to the family Theridioidæ, and are distinguished from Epeira not only by SIMON, MENGE and OmnrERT, but also by WESTRING; BLACKWALL however still includes the species of this genus under Æpeira. SIMON has even formed of them a separate tribe of Epeiroide, which, as we have seen above, he calls ”Nuctobiens” or " Théridio-Epéires” ; they form however 1) Vid. sup. p. 37. 2) As to these air-tubes see however p. 30, note 1). 60 T. THORELL, in his work but one genus, Myctobia [Nuctobia] Sn, with Meta and Zilla as sub-genera. (On this subject see further under the article Meta). As type for the genus Zilla, Koc ?), it is true, gives Z. albimacula (Ep. diodia WALCK.), but as we feel ourselves obliged to refer that species to the genus Epeira, we have assumed as typical species Zygia calophylla (WaLckK. C. Koch = Z. «-notata (CLERCK), which appears to us best to express the peculiarities of the genus, is the first species of the genus de- scribed, and has since been by KocH himself assigned to Zilla, to- gether with the very closely related Zilla montana C. KocH. He accord- ingly himself combined in one the genera Zygia and Zilla, and entirely sup- pressed the former name. In Zilla we also include a part of the unnatural genus Æucharia C. Koco — which is formed chiefly of Theridioidæ and is synonymous with Steatoda (SUND.) NOB. — viz. E. atrica C. Koch. Kocu's Z. reticulata (Ar. seymentatus CLERCK.) we refer to Meta, his Z. albimacula and Z. acalypha to Epeira. The limits assigned by us to the genus are accord- ingly the same as those proposed by WESTRING (loe. cit.), which limitation has the right of priority before that adopted by SIMON and OHLERT. In SIMON, Zilla is a sub-genus under his Nyctobia, with about the same limits as in KocH, but includes also species?), which according to the characteri- stics given by Simon himself and derived from the position of the interme- diary eyes, ought to be referred to his sub-genus Meta. — We have already above in treating of Zpeira (p. 55, 56) expressed our opinion that the characters whereby OmnLERT distinguishes Zilla and Zygia from Meta are utterly in- sufficient. MENGE and OHLERT readopt the genus Zygia abandoned by Kocx: MENGE separates it from Zilla in consequence of some difference in the organs of generation in both sexes, OHLERT only in consequence of the greater length, in the males, of the 4" joint of the palpi How nearly related to each other the species are, that compose the genera Zygia and Zilla of these authors, is evidenced by the fact, that Zilla atrica and Z. &-notata (calophylla), which are so like one another as to be considered both by WALCKENAER and SUNDEVALL as one and the same species, and to have been confounded by OHLERT himself in his synonyms, are the former a Zygia Our. and the latter a Zilla OHL. The name Zygia was disposed of long before it was applied by Koch to denote a genus of spiders, and ae- cordingly cannot on any terms be retained?). Also OHLERT assigns Kocn’s 1) Uebers. d. Arach.-Syst., loe. cit. 2) Zilla inclinata and Z. antriada (WALCK.) Srw., which latter is synonymous with Meta Meriane C. Kocx, but by no means with Zilla montana ID. 3) Zygia Fasr. [Coleopt.] 1775. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 61 Zilla reticulata (seymentata) and Zilla acalypha (Miranda acalypha MENGE) to the genus Zilla; we, in unison with WESTRING and MENGE, refer the first mentioned (as has been already observed) to Meta, whereas the other appears to us to be an Æpeira. Z. reticulata in fact agrees in the form of the maxilla, the position of the eyes, and in its general appearance almost exactly with the species that typify Meta (UM. Menardi (LATR.), M. Meriane (Scor.) C. KocH); Z. acalypha again in the relative lengths of the legs, and, as far as we can judge from BLACKWALLS and MENGE'S figures of the male, also in the structure of the palpi of that sex, closely resembles the species of Epeira WESIR.: both differ considerably from Zilla x-notata, atrica and montana, which, while by their short maxillæ they approach Epeira and Singa, by their weak cephalothorax and depressed, short and rounded ab- domen exhibit a close analogy with the genus Steatoda (SUND.), an ana- logy, which led Kocm into the error of uniting within his genus Eucharia species of Steatoda and Zilla, which belong to quite different families. Genus 7. META (C. Koch). 1836. Deriv.: Mira, mythol. prop. name. Syn.: 1836. Meta C. Kocu, in Herr.-Scherr., Deutschl. Ins., 134, 12, 13; 135, 14— 10. 1837. , 1D., Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 6. 1856. ,, THor., Rec. crit. aran., p. 106. 1861. „ Westk., Aran. Suec., p. 75. 1864. Epeira Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 323 (ad partem). 1864. Nyctobia [Nuctobia] sub-gen. Meta Srw., H. N. d. Araignées p. 236, 237. 1864. i t : sub-gen. Zilla In., ibid. (ad partem). 1864. Tetragnatha KeyserL., Beschr. neuer etc. Orbitele, p. 21 (64) (ad partem). 1866. Meta ID., Beitr. z. Kenntn. d. Orbitelæ, p. 2 (800) (ad partem). 1866. ,, MENGE, Preuss. Spinn, I, p. 86. Type: Meta Menardi (LATR.). As Zilla (C. KocH) shows analogy with Steatoda (SUND.), so does Meta form a transition to Linyphia (LATR.).— This genus, which was formed by C. KocH, and by him referred to the family Theridioide, notwithstanding that the species cited as its type, JM. fusca C. Koch = JM. Menardi (LATR.), as also JM. Meriane C. Koch and JM. muraria ID., are, as is probably ge- nerally known, true Epeiroide, is by KocH so ill defined, that also two real Theridioide, Meta cellulana C. KocH and JM. tigrina ID. = Linyphia socialis SUND., are besides by him included in it. It has accordingly been 62 T. THORELL, since restricted by me (loc. cit), and subsequently by WESTRING and MENGE, to those of Kocm's Meta-species, which are really Æpeiroidæ, and some very closely related species, e. g. Ar. segmentatus CLERCK (Ar. reti- culata LINN.), which by KocH and some others is erroneously referred to Zilla. All these species have in their elongated maxille a common chara- cteristic, which distinguishes them from the other European generic groups separated from WALCKENAER'S SL peira (vid. sup.) BLACKWALL refers the species of this genus to Æpeira. SIMON has, as we have already seen, combined Meta and Zilla to one genus, which he calls Nyctobia 1), but which however did not require a new name, as there were two older names to choose between. He divides it into two sub-genera, which preserve their Kochian names, but of the species that compose Kocn’s Meta, he refers only AM. fusca KoCH (M. Menard?) to Meta (see more above under Zilla). On- LERT aggregates also AZ Meriane ©. KocH to Meta. The difference in the position of the eyes assumed by these writers as ground of distinction be- tween the genera Meta and Zilla is too trifling to be acknowledged as of any decisive weight in the characterization of genera; we have accordingly, as above mentioned, been obliged to transfer one of their Zilla-species (Z. reticulata) to Meta. Also KEYSERLING, who at first united the genera Meta and Tetragnatha, though he afterwards admitted the independence of the former genus, finds its principal characteristic in the elongated maxillæ, but he assigns to it not only those Epeiroidæ which C. Kocu referred to Meta, but also the "1" famille, Coadunatæ”, of WALCKENAERS Tetragnatha ?). Genus 8. TETRAGNATHA Larr. 1804. Deriv.: zeroa-, four, yv&3oc, jaw ?). Syn.: 1804. Tetragnatha Larr., in Nouv. Dict. d’Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 135. 1805. » WALCK., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 68. 1) Srwow's reason for this name (from »v&, night, and from, live) probably was that he considered Vınsox’s "Épeires nocturnes" as corresponding to KocH's Meta and Zilla. At least he says (p. 238) of the species of these genera, or JVyetobia Sn.: "M. Vinson les a appelées "Zpeires nocturnes.” Nevertheless, on the prece- ding page, where he reckons up the species of the genus Nyctobia, SIMON curiously enough has not taken up « single one of VINSON'S ”Epeires nocturnes.” He classes them all under his Æpeira and Nephila, which indeed appears. to us right, but is difficult to reconcile with his above quoted words. (Conf. Vinson, Aran. de la Réun., Maur. et Madag., p. 153 et seq.) 2) WALCKE., Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., II, p. 219. 3) Among the ancients rerodyvadov was the name of a venomous kind of arach- noid animal, probably a Galeodes. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 63 1825—7. Eugnatha Sav. et Aup., in Descr. de l'Égypte (2:e Ed.:) XXII, p. 323 (ad partem). 1843. Dinognatha [Deinagnatha] Wurre, in DIEFFENBACH, Tray. in New Zeal., II, p. 271 (sec. Wurre ')). 1861. Tetragnatha Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 83. 1864, Tetragnatha Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 367. 1864. á Srw., Hist. Nat. d. Araignées, p. 248 (saltem ad part.). Type: Zetragnatha extensa (LINN.) To this genus, generally understood as comprising the compass as- signed to it by LATREILLE and WALCKENAER, KEYSERLING ?) also reckons a spider, Æugnatha filiformis Sav. and Aup., which by WALCKENAER and SIMON is referred to Uloborus, and in WALCKENAER forms the "3"* Race" of that genus’ "1" famille” 3). It certainly belongs to the sub-family Zpei- rine, and approaches much nearer to Zetragnatha than to Uloborus, but ap- pears to us, on account of its agreement with Ulodorus in the relative length of the legs and the position of the eyes, by its shorter maxillæ, its abdo- men of almost thread-like dimensions and drawn out in a point, ete., to deserve to be considered as the type of a separate genus. We have else- where *) proposed to reserve to that genus the name of Æugnatha, under which SAVIGNY and AUDOUIN united WALCKENAERS Tetragnatha with that writers Uloborus filiformis (loc. cit.) *). — The spiders, which WALCKENAER (loc. cit., p. 219) classes under the genus Tetraynatha’s 2" family, with the name "Coadunate", KEYSERLING, as we have just seen, refers to Meta KocH. It seems to us that they ought rather to form a separate genus be- twen Meta and Tetragnatha. The "3"* Famille" of 7etragnatha W ALCK., ” Lé- zardiformes”, (loc. cit. p. 224) might also well be separated from Tetragnatha LarR., and that genus be thus restricted to the compass, which it originally had in LATREILLE and in WALCKENAER’S Tableau des Aranéides. — The di- 1) WHITE, Descr. of a new gen. of Arachn., w. notes on two other spec. of spi- ders, p. 13. 2) Beitrige zur Kenntniss der Orbitelæ, p. 38 (836). 3) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., II, p. 230. 4) Till kànnedomen om sligtena Mithras och Uloborus, p. 194. 5) Near this genus Eugnatha (Sav. and AUD.) stands DOLESCHALL’s Ariadne (Bijdr. tot de Kenn. d. Arachn. v. d. Ind. Arch., p. 410) by the relative lengths of the legs and the form of the abdomen (which is still more drawn out behind the spinners and thread-like), but the position of the eyes is quite different. As the name Ariadne had been already in 1825— applied by Sav. and Aup. for another genus of spiders, we have (p. 37) proposed to exchange the name Ariadne DOLESCH. for Ariamnes. 64 T. THORELL, stinctive marks, on which WHITE formed the genus Dinognatha, are too trifling to warrant the separation of the spiders thus characterized from Tetragnatha. Sub-family II. ULOBORINZE. Under this denomination I include those Epeiroidz, which are pro- vided with infra-mammillary organ and calamistrum. The spiders of this sub-family known to me all agree in at least one more respect, viz. that their legs are not armed with spines. Of the two European genera that belong to this sub-family, Uloborus and HHyptiotes, the first named had, ever since it was first so classed by LATREILLE, been considered as an Æpeiroid, until BLACKWALL discovered in U. Walckenarü (Veleda lineata BLACKW.) the agreement, which Uloborus, by the presence of an infra-mammillary organ and calamistrum, exhibits with Amaurobius (C. KocH) = Ciniflo BLACKW. and Dictyna SUND. = Ergatis BLACKW. That agreement induced BLACKWALL to refer Uloborus to the family Cinifonide, formed by him in 1841 for the two above named genera’), and placed between his Drasside and Agelenide, so that by BLACKWALL Uloborus is widely separated from the Epeiroidæ. KEY- SERLING?) assents to the opinion of BLACKWALL. — We have already in the preceding pages (p. 29) drawn attention to the unnatural character of the family Cinifonide, in that it not only brings together forms so widely sepa- rate as e. g. Uloborus and Amaurobius, but even includes Æresus and Di- nopis, for also these genera have an infra-mammillary organ and calamistrum. As regards especially Uloborus, it appears to me that its agreement with Epeira and Tetragnatha as well in the form of the cephalothorax and ab- domen as in the structure of the parts of the mouth and the extremities ete. must more than compensate the differences, which are found, and which we have indicated above; that agreement is so complete as scarcely to re- quire the additional evidence of this genus’ belonging to the Orbitelariæ or Epeiroidæ, which is furnished by the circumstance, that its species all spin regular, circular nets. We may also allow ourselves to call attention to a commonly overlooked characteristic, which is found in Uloborus, as also in all other Epeiroide that I know of, and in a part only of the Theridior- de and Scytodoide, but which is absent in the Tubitelariæ (even Amaurobi- — Another nearly related genus is Oxysoma NICOLET (GRAY, Hist. fis. y pol. de Chile, Zool., III, p. 511). 1) BLACKWALL, The differ. in the number of eyes, etc., p. 606. 2) Beschr. neuer ete. Orbitelæ, p. 2 (64). On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 65 us and Dictyna) in the Laterigrade, Citigrade and Saltigrade, as well as in the Zerritelarie that I have had the opportunity of examining, namely, the presence of accessory claws, together with the (three) ordinary genuine claws, at the end of the tarsi’). These accessory claws are perhaps of as much importance for the animal's industry and for the determination of its systematic position, as the infra-mammillary organ and calamistrum; the presence of these claws in Uloborus may surely therefore be considered as an additional reason for referring that genus to a family where they al- ways occur, and separating it from forms, in which I have never observed them. By considering Uloborus as the type of a separate sub-family of the Epeiroidæ, sufficient notice is certainly taken of the deviations of that genus from the typical Epeiroidæ. — Besides the genera Uloborus, Hyptio- tes and Zosis, it is probable that also Cyllopodia Hentz (Aran. of the Uni- ted States, in Bost. Journ. of Nat. Hist., V, p. 466), which is reported to have only six eyes, belongs to the sub-family Uloborine. Genus 9. ULOBORUS Larr. 1806. Deriv.: ovAofíógoc, with deadly bite (oddoc, deadly, BBçgwoxw, eat). Syn.: 1806. Uloborus LATR., Gen. Crust. et Ins., I, p. 109. 1841. 3 Warck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt. IT, p. 227 (ad partem). + 1855. Phillyra HENTZ, Aran. of the United States, in Bost. Journ. of Nat. Hist., VI, p. 25. 1859. Uloborus THor., Till kànned. om Mithras och Uloborus, p. 194. 1859. Veleda Brackw., Descr. of six recently disc. spec. etc., p. 95. 1864. 4 ID., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 150. 1864. Uloborus Sım., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 244 (ad max. part.). Type: Uloborus Walckenaerii LATR. 1) By accessory claws (wngwes spurii, secundarii), I mean those unguiform or peetiniform appendages, which in the spiders here spoken of are to be found at the end of the tarsus, and occasionally also near the ordinary claw at the extremity of the palpus of the Q. They are posited generally under or immediately beside, though occasionally even above, the genuine claws (ungues veri), from which they are easily distinguished by not being eurved downwards, but directed straight forward (outwards), sometimes slightly upward. Generally they are slightly curved in the manner of an c^; often howeveralmost straight. They are in general smaller, espe- cially slenderer, than the genuine claws, and, like them, are on the under side (though finer) dentated or serrulated, the serrulation being sometimes of extreme fine- ness. They are not always equally developed on the tarsi of the different pairs of legs. Their number varies greatly: generally there are 2 or 4, sometimes 6 or even more (as in the case of Pholcus) on each tarsus, arranged symmetrically near the Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Se. Ups. Ser. III. 9 66 T. THORELL, In the above-cited passage I have more accurately determined the genus Uloborus so as to include only the species, which can be referred to the 1* and 2" Races of the 1* Family ("Les Divergentes, Deflectentes” ) of that genus in WALCKENAER (loc. cit). The 1* Family's 3" Race is the genus Æugnatha (Sav. et Aup.), of which more has been said above un- der the article Tetragnatha. The 2" Family ("les Ecartées, Divaricatæ” ) of WALCKENAERS Uloborus forms the genus Zosis WALCK. Durours statement, cited by LATREILLE and Lucas ?), that U. Walc- kenaerti has but one claw upon the three hinder pairs of legs, is entirely unfounded. The claws in that, as well as in the other species of this ge- nus, are three in number on each tarsus. In U. Walckenaerü the tar- sal claws are very small, but rather powerful; of the two superior claws the inner is considerably thicker at the base than the outer; on the 1* pair of legs the former has at least 5 somewhat curved comb-teeth, gradually increasing in length, the points of which, together with that of the claw, form an almost straight line: the outer has about 4 teeth, the innermost shortest, the others gradually increasing, and the last considerably longer than the rest, issuing from about the middle of the claw. The inferior claw is some- what shorter than the superior, short and thick, strongly curved downwards. In U. Latreillii THOR. there is on this claw one long sharp tooth; in UT. Walckenaeri I have with certainty observed such a tooth on the 3" pair of legs, and I think I have seen one also on the 1* pair. On the 3" pair the claws are shorter, curved more abruptly downwards, and provided with fewer teeth than on the 1* pair. The female’s palpus-claw is weak and of uniform thickness, slightly curved, with some few (in U. Latreillii about 5, in U. Coste THOR. 2 or 3) weak teeth pointing forwards, nearer the tip. The claws of the palpi thus end of the joint. They cannot be put in motion by muscles of their own, as is the case with the genuine claws, and are in fact to be considered merely as trans- formed bristles or spines. Beside in the Æpeiroidæ, I have met with these accessory claws in Pachygnatha, in many, especially the larger, species of Linyphia, Theri- dium, Steatoda ete., as also in Pholcus. (Conf. THORELL, Till kännedomen om slägtena Mithras och Uloborus, p. 200).—The accessory claws of Æpeira diademata have been described and figured already in RósEL's Ins. Belust., IV, p. 252, Tab. XXXIX, fig. 8; BLACKWALL has also described and figured these claws in the Zpeiroide (Notice of sev. rec. disc. in the struct. and cc. of spid., p. 476, Tab. XIII, fig. 4). 1) For inst. in Cours d'Entomol., p. 527. 2) Hist. Nat. d. Crust., d. Arachn. et d, Myriap., p. 443. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 67 exhibit a considerable similitude of appearance to those of the genus Liny- phia in the following family. Genus 10. HYPTIOTES. (Warck.) [1833] 1837. Deriv.: önzıdo, ónvtdto, to be varios, leaning back, easy, careless. Syn.: 1833. Hyptiotes [Uptiotes] WaLck., Mém. s. une nouv. classif. d. Aran., p. 438. T 1834. Mithras C. Kocn, in Herr.-Scumrr., Deutschl. Ins., 123, 9. 1837. 5 ID., Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 6. 1837. Scytodes Warnck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 275 (ad partem). 1837. Hyptiotes [Uptiotes] ID., ibid., p. 277. 1860. Mithras Tuor., Till kànned. om Mithras och Uloborus, p. 198. 1861. a WzsTR., Aran. Suec., p. 87. 1864. Hyptiotes [Uptiota] SIM., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 184. Type: Hyptiotes paradoxus (C. Koch). This genus is first mentioned by WALCKENAER 1833 in his above cited Mémoire sur une nouvelle classification des Aranéides under the name of Uptiotes, but not otherwise characterized, than that it is erroneously sta- ted to have six eyes, like Scytodes and Omosites, together with which ge- nera it is placed in the family " Cellulicoles”. It was not till in 1837?) that WALCKENAER gave a recognizable, though inaccurate, diagnosis of the ge- nus " Uptiotes”. But during this interval, 1835, the animal, which was the type of WALCKENAERS Uptiotes, had been described by C. KocH under the name of Mithras paradoxus (see Synonym.) Under such circumstances it may seem dubious, which generie name ought to be preserved; I for my part should have unreservedly given the preference to the name Mthras, if it had not been previously engaged for another genus of animals; but that being the case?), the Walckenaerian name must be adopted. As Uptiotes is unquestionably formed from vzzos, resupinus, the name, as has been already observed in Agassiz’ Nomenclator Zoologicus, must be written Hyptiotes. The systematie position of this genus has been, and still is, a sub- ject of much dispute. It is remarkable that as long as WALCKENAER and Kocx believed it to have only 6 eyes, they acknowledged its intimate con- nexion with the Æpeiroide. Koch even introduced it into that family >). 1) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., loc. cit. 2) Mithras Hien. [Lepidopt.] 1816. — Mythras HALID. [Hymenopt.] 1829. 3) Uebers. d. Arachn. Syst., 1, p. 6. 68 T. THORELL, WALCKENAER, it is true, says (probably on the strength of the imaginary agreement in the number of the eyes) that his Uptiotes is most nearly rela- ted to Scytodes, and he takes up Kooms Mithras paradoxus — which he considers different from Uptiotes anceps — under the name of Scytodes mithras; but he nevertheless remarks, that U. anceps approaches very near to the genus Uloborus "in the position of the eyes and the form of the cephalo- thorax” }). Afterwards, in 1847 ?), he however maintains, that "the genus Hyptiotes in its cephalothorax, maxillæ and abdomen (?) is intermediate between the genera Theridium and Argus”, and says not a word of its relationship to Uloborus. He accordingly classes it with the Theridioidæ ("les Retiteles”: loc. cit. p. 521), and is here followed by Simon, who has given the genus a place between Æro and Dictyna. Excepting the abnor- mally great distance between the anterior row of eyes and the base of the mandibles, and the more sharp-pointed teeth on the inferior tarsal claw, I find nothing in Ayptiotes that approaches more to the Theridioide than to the Epeiroide. — KocH maintains ?), that "this genus, by the posi- tion of the eyes, the structure of the body, and by its habits in gene- ral(?) belongs to a family of spiders, of which as yet no other genus is known to exist”. Of the habits of this genus KocH seems nevertheless to have known nothing. In his Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5 (1850), he ealls this new family Mithraides, and refers to it, together with Mithras, the ge- nus Poltys (C. KocH) The family Mithraides takes its place between Epeirides and Theridides. (Conf. THORELL loc. cit. p. 192). BLACKWALL (loc. cit.) and KEYSERLING *) refer Æyptiotes, together with Uloborus, to the Ciniflonide BLACKW. on account of the infra-mammil- lary organ and calamistrum: even AUSSERER ”) places that genus next to Dictyna and Amaurobius (reckoned by him to the family Agalenoide), which is so much the more remarkable, as he is acquainted with the form, in which Hyptiotes paradoxus makes its web. What we have above (see p. 64) said on the matter with respect to Uloborus, holds good also of Hyptiotes. By OHLERT this genus was first *) and rightly assigned to the Epeiroide; afterwards 7) he included it in the family ZAomisoide, with which 1) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 279. 2) Ibid., IV, p. 388. 3) Die Arachn., XII, p. 98. 4) Beschr. neuer ete. Orbitelæ, p. 3 (65). 5) Die Arachniden Tirols, I, p. 150. 6) Beitr. z. Diag. u. Rev. d. Preuss. Spinnengattungen, p. 2; — Beitr. z. einer auf d. Klauenbildung gegr. Diagn. u. Anordn. d. Preuss. Spinnen, p. 258. 7) Die Aran. d. Prov. Preuss., p. 110 and 125. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 69 Hyptiotes, as far as I am aware, does not possess a single characteristic in common. As early as 1856 1) I classed Hyptiotes or Mithras among the Epei- roidæ, and have in a later paper *) developed and expounded the grounds for that view. As I there endeavoured to show, the genus Hyptiotes ap- proaches more nearly to Uloborus than to any other known genus of spi- ders, while at the same time by the shorter and robuster form of its body, its short and broad maxillæ, its only slightly tapering extremities, its stou- ter tarsal and palpal claws, its two teeth on the inferior tarsal claw, it stands in nearer relation to the typical Epeiroidze than do the species of Uloborus. The deviations from them, which Hyptiotes exhibits, such as the presence of the infra-mammillary organ and calamistrum, the distribu- tion of the eyes into two rows diverging at the ends, it has also almost all in common with Uloborus. A remarkable analogy between Hyptiotes and the species of Uloborus, with which I am acquainted, is displayed in the fact that the hairy covering on the sides of the back of the abdomen are conglomerated into fascicles, arranged in two rows along the back. In Hyp- totes, as in Uloborus, the 4" pair of legs is longer than the second, and the legs are destitute of spines. A pair of accessory claws appear at the ex- tremity of the tarsus in Hyptiotes, as well as in Uloborus and other Epei- roide. The only character of any consequence, in which Hyptiotes deviates at once from Uloborus and the Epeirine, appears to me to lie in the great extent of the eye-area, and its considerable distance from the fore-edge of the cephalothorax. But a similar relation is also observed in Poltys C. Kocu (Pleuromma DOLESCH.), especially as regards the unusually far back loca- ted position of the posterior side-eyes ?), and that genus seems in this re- spect to occupy the same relation to Æpeira, as Hyptiotes to Uloborus. C. KocH united, as has before been said, the genera Poltys and Hyptiotes in the same family: the former belongs indisputably to the JEpeirine, whither KEYSERLING subsequently referred it, and the latter must with equal cer- tainty be placed in the most intimate relation to Uloborus. That even its habits and industry claim for Æyptiotes a place among the Orbitelariæ, will be evidenced by the following lines which we cite from our above-mentioned paper: 1) Ree. erit. Aran. Suee., p. 107. 2) Till kinnedomen om slägtena Mithras och Uloborus, p. 202 et seq. 3) Conf. KocH, Die Arachn., X, p. 97, fig. 821. — KEYSERL., Beschr. neuer ete. Orbitele, p. 23, Tab. IIT, fig. 1—3. 70 T. THORELL, "In the summer of 1855 I first met with Mithras paradoxus, in the neighbourhood of Stockholm, the only part of this country, in which it has been observed. July, August and September are the months in which it is met with full-grown. ‘The males are extremely rare, and I have as yet not found more than one fully developed. It was taken Aug. 5. The female on the contrary is pretty common, and is met with principally in woods of trees of the fir kind, especially in pine woods. Between the dry bare branches of two neighbouring trees, she spins a strong thread in a horizontal direction, from a point of which she afterwards draws obliquely downwards three other threads, which form equal angles with the original thread and each other and le in the same vertical plane. These four threads form the radii of the web; over them are laid concentric cross-threads, 16—22 in number, and tolerably wide apart. The loose net thus constructed forms a circular sector of about 45 degrees with a radius of a foot or more. It is therefore very large in proportion to the spider itself. The animal does not build itself any shelter or nest near the web, but hangs on the first-named horizontal thread that bears the web, near one of the twigs to which it is fastened, and at a considerable distance from the common point of inter- section of the radii. The identity of colour between the animal and the dry branches causes it not to be so easily perceived: if disturbed, it draws in its legs and lets itself down to the ground. Its movements are slow and sluggish: the prey, which has fastened in the web, is spun into an enve- lope of silk, before it is devoured — a process employed, as far as I am aware, only by the Æpeiroidæ (according to Lucas also by Uloborus).” "Although the web made by Mithras paradowus is so peculiar and so unlike that of every other known species of spider, it is easily seen from the description, that it cannot be looked upon as any separate and inde- pendent form of web, but must be classed under the head of the known so-called geometrical nets of the Epeiroide. Here, as with them, it con- sists of radii diverging from a point, united by threads running concentri- cally; the differenee is simply that, whereas with the other species belong- ing to the family it forms a closed circle, with Mithras it is but .a circular sector. A transition to this latter form may in a certain sense be looked for in the case, of which one sometimes meets with examples, where, in the common cireular net, the interval between two radii is left open, by the circular threads being terminated at these radii?. Not 1) Another more evident transition is described by Darwin (Journal of Resear- ches etc. during the voyage of the Beagle, p. 42) in the following words: "In a ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 71 only then in external character, but also in habits and form of web is the greatest likeness visible between Mithras and the Epeiroidæ. Hitherto, and with good reason, the habits of spiders, and especially the form they give their webs, have been considered as affording the surest basis for a natural grou- ping and classification of these animals; and as, in all probability, all the species that belong to the family Epeiroide distinguish themselves by their power of spinning regular geometrical webs ?) — on which account that fa- mily received from LATREILLE the name of Orbitelæ — and in short one never assigns to any other family a species, which is known to spin such a net?), it seems evident that the genus Mithras ought to be included in the Epei- roid, although it must be placed last among them, nearest to the genus Uloborus, with which it also best agrees in the looseness of its web.” (Loc. cit. p. 203—204). Sub-ordo U. RETITELARLE. Syn.: 1817. ”Inequiteles” Larr., in Cvv., Regne Anim., T. II, p. 84. 1823. Laquearie SUND., Gen. Aran. Suec., p. 13. 1825. Inæquitelæ Larr., Fam. Nat. du Règne Anim., p. 314. 1833. Theridides SUND., Consp. Arachn., p. 15. The limit between this and the next following sub-order, Tubitelarie, is difficult to determine with sharpness. The genera Dictyna, Titancca, lofty valley of the Cordillera, near Mendoza, I found another spider with a singularly formed web. Strong lines radiated in a vertical plane from a common centre, where the insect had its station; but only two of the rays were connected by a symmetrical meshwork, so that the net, instead of being, as is generally the case, circular, con- sisted of a wedge-shaped segment. All the webs were similarly constructed.” 1) We should perhaps except the genus Dolophones, if that genus really belong to the Epeiroidæ (Conf. WaLcx. H. N. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 383), and, according to SUNDEVALL (Consp. Arachn., p. 13), an East Indian species of Epeira, which he calls JE. abnormis, but does not describe: it is said to spin an irregular net. Of Argyro- des Sim. vid. p. 48. 2) ”I take no notice of the curious classification of the family Zheridide, in N:o 5 of Kocn's Uebers. d. Arachn.-Systems, where such genera appear as for example Meta, of the five cited species of which three are Æpeiroidæ (M. fusca = M. Menardi (LATR.), Merianæ = M. fusca (DE GEER), and muraria), one belongs to the genus Linyphia (M. tigrina = Lin. socialis SUND.) and the fifth (M. cellulana) appears to be a Theridium; or Eucharia, of the three species of which two, Æ. bi- 72 T. THORELL, Uroctea for ex. might with almost as good reason be referred to the one as to the other. — Of the characteristic features of this sub-order the following ought to be observed: the extremities are, with few exceptions, fine and slender, and provided with in general weak, serrated or pectinated tarsal claws: there is almost always an inferior tarsal claw, sometimes toothless, sometimes armed with one or two, never more, teeth. The palpal claw in the females is generally weak, serrated or pectinated, but often without teeth: sometimes it is rudimentary or even entirely absent. The hairy co- vering is thin; the markings of the abdomen depend upon the colour of the skin, not upon that of the hairy covering. The eyes (in all European spe- cies) form typically two transversal rows, but sometimes the intermediary eyes, especially of the males in certain genera (Argyrodes, Linyphia, Walc- kenaera) of the family Theridioidæ, are drawn, on account of the unusual development of the pars cephalica of the cephalothorax, out of their ordi- nary regular position. There is no infra-mammillary organ or calamistrum. The spinners are — excepting in the Enyoide, in which the inferior spin- ners are considerably longer than the others — short and of almost equal length, and consist of only two joints. — See also above p. 47. We divide the spiders that compose this sub-order, which very nearly corresponds to LATREILLES Ineguitele or SUNDEVALUS Theridides , into three families, Zhertdioide, Scytodoidæ and Ænyoidæ, which may be thus distinguished: I. Mamille inferiores (anteriores) reliquis non vel parum longiores. 1. Tarsi articulo unguifero libero carentes. Labium liberum. Mandibulæ non ad basin coalite. . . . . . . . . . . . . I. Theridioidæ. 9. Tarsi artieulo libero unguifero aucti. Labium cum sterno plerumque sine sutura coalitum. Mandibule versus basin plerumque inter se unite. Il. Scytodoide. II. Mamille inferiores reliquis multo longiores. . . . . . . IH. Ænyoide. punctata and castanea are typical of the genus Steatoda SunD., the third, E. atrica, is an Epeiroid spider, belonging to Kocn's genus Zilla, and standing so near his Z. montana and Z. calophylla = Z. x-notata (CLERCK) both in form, colour and ha- bits, that all three are considered by Warck. and Sunpev. as belonging to the same species." — C. Kocm's mistake with respect to the systematic position of the Epeiroidæ here mentioned has in fact been observed and corrected by almost all sub- sequent writers. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 73 Fam. I. THERIDIOIDE. Syn.: 1837. Theridides C. Koch, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 6 (ad max. part.). 1861. Theridiide WestR. (excel. Pholco), Aran. Suec., p. 90. 1864, 5 Buackw. (excl. Pholco) + Linyphiidee Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., IMLS os dns AT) 1866. Retiariæ (Pachygnathide + Linyphidæ + Therididæ) MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., I, p. 94, 100, 146 (ad max part.). The European spiders belonging to this family, as well in their ha- bits, the construction of their webs and the form they give their cocoons, as in their general appearance, exhibit very considerable differences, but yet form a perfectly compact and natural group, which it is not easy to resolve even into tolerably well-defined sub-families. Nevertheless BLACKWALL has divided them into two separate families, Linyphüde and Theridide, but without indicating any difference of bodily form between these two fa- milies. They are said to be distinguishable however by the different man- ner in which the species composing them construct their webs: the Liny- phiide fabricate a fine sheet of web, the snares of the Zheridiide on the contrary are said to consist of lines intersecting one another in different planes and at various angles, and to present the appearance of being con- structed without any regular plan '). Even if this basis for their classification could be admitted, which seems to me dubious, it not being taken from the animals themselves, I still think it does not, if strictly applied, lead to a na- tural grouping. Its application would probably in many cases be impossible, for the webs of many species belonging to BLACkwALUS Walckenaera and Ne- viene are unknown, and it seems to me probable, that these do not all construct webs resembling those of Linyphia, nay that some of them fabri- cate none at all Steatoda bipunctata and castanea, Lithyphantes corollatus and others, belonging to BLACKWALLS Theridion, weave nets not indeed so close and fine as those of the Linyphiæ, but which yet have the form of a sheet, and are quite as regular as theirs, and these species surely no one would think of separating from the Theridiide. Other authors also have endeavoured to separate between Theridiidæ and Linyphiide, but it is vain to look for any agreement as to which genera are to be assigned to the one or other of these groups. SIMON refers Micryphantes to the Linyphide, but Erigone to the Theridiide: by BLACKWALL on the other hand the species composing both these genera are referred to the Linyphüde. MENGE, who 1) Conf. Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Britain., II, p. 175 and 210. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 10 74 T. THORELL, divides his ” Netzspinnen, Retiarie” into three families, Pachygnathide, Li- nyphidæ and Therididæ, of which the two latter are distinguished by the form of their webs, just as in BLACKWALL, refers to the Linyphide those spiders only, which belong to WESIRING’S Linyphia and Tapinopa, thus excluding both the Ærigone- and Micryphantes-species, which he makes Theridide. According to MENGE, the Pachygnathide do not make any web, but both WESTRING !) and BLACKWALL ?) speak of their webs as being irregular, and the latter says of Pach. Clerckii, that it is related with Zheridium "by the irregularity of the scanty web which it spins”: nevertheless BLACKWALL aggre- gates this genus to the Zinyphüde, not to the Theridüde. It having thus been found impracticable to assign any certain line of separation between Theridiide and Linyphiide either in the form of the body or the appearance of the web, I have (in company with WESTRING and OHLERT) not considered the latter as either a family or sub-family separate from the former. Also WALCKENAER, who had at first distinguished them under the names of " Rétitéles" (Theridiidee) and ” Tapiteles” (Linyphiidæ), subsequently uni- ted them under the denomination ÆRétitèles *). Neither needs Pachygnatha be separated from them, although that genus certainly deviates a little from the typical Theridioidæ, as is the case also with Æpisinus, which genus is by some (e. g. SIMON and ÖHLERT) included in the family Thomisoide. C. Kocm's division of his Theridides *) into 5 sub-families (” Beutel- spinnen”, Wandspinnen”, " Eigentliche Webspinnen”, ” Strickerspinnen” and "'Bodenspinnen") is altogether impracticable and full of gross errors. Epei- roidæ and Drassoidæ occur there mixed up with real Theridioidæ in a man- ner, which is utterly unaccountable. — SIMON divides his ” Théridiformes” into three "tribus": " Clotheiens”, ” Theridiens”, and ” Linyphiens”; the first of these appears to us to form two separate families, which we call Enyoidæ and Urocteoide, and of which we only refer the former to the Ketitelarie, whereas the Urocteoide may perhaps better be united with the next sub- order, the Tubitelariæ; the Théridiens and Linyphiens together correspond very nearly with our Zheridioide and Agalenoide, which last Simon has united with his Linyphiens. Of Hyptiotes and Dictyna, which he aggregates to his Theridiens, we include the former genus in the Uloborinæ of the fa- mily Zpeiroide, and the latter in the Amaurobiine of the family Agalenoide. — MENGE 5) refers not only Dictyna (and Lethia) but also Hahnia to his The- rididæ; we unite this latter genus with the genuine Agalenine. 1) Aran. Suec., p. 144. 2) Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 320. 3) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., IV, p. 527. 4) Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 15 —24. 5) Preuss. Spinn., III, p. 244, 249, 251. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 75 Among the exotic genera related to our Theridioidæ, we may men- tion the genus NMimetus HENTZ 1), remarkable for its long mandibles and its roving habits, and which seems to form a link between the Epeiroidee and Theridioidæ; as also Thalamia HENTZ?), which has its eyes posited in four transversal rows, the 2" pair of legs longest, the 1“ pair shortest, and which forms a tubular dwelling of silk in the crevices of walls. These genera cannot easily be inserted among our Theridioidæ (sub.-fam. Theri- dine) otherwise than as types of separate sub-families. The exotic genus Phoroncidia WESTW., which by its spiny abdomen so closely resembles Acro- soma (PERTY) and Pycnacantha BLACKW., and which by WEsTWOOD?) is referred to the Zpeiroide, is by CAMBRIDGE‘), in all probability rightly, assigned to the Theridioide. Another (Brazilian) genus, with a three-spined abdomen and belonging to the Theridioidæ, has lately been described by Sımox under the name of Zirithena*). A somewhat similar spider appears to belong to the European fauna: for OÖ. G. Costa has, in Fauna del Regno di Napoli, Araen., Tav. II, fig. 8, figured a Theridium-like species, the abdomen of whieh shows three small pointed processes, one on each side and one behind. That spider has however never been described nor named. The European genera adopted by us may be thus distinguished: 8. Abdomen petiolo longo, nodoso cum cephalothorace unitum. 2. Formicina. SS. Petiolum brevissimum, angustum (ut in araneis plerisque). + Oculi non in tres turmas dispositi, neque inter se valde inæquales. A. Oculi laterales inter se spatio minore disjuncti, quam quo distant medii antiei a mediis posticis. * Pedes aeuleis sparsis armati. Oculi laterales sæpissime contingentes. (Palpus feminæ ungue sæpissime instructus). A. Oculi medii in trapezium antice angustius dispositi: maxillæ pa- ralleliter porrectæ vel in labium paullo tantum inclinatæ. I. Oculi medii antici a margine clypei spatio non breviore di- stantes, quam quo a mediis posticis distant. Cephalothorax MOUCENCONVEXUS ww I On eonypiia: II. Oeuli medii antici a margine clypei multo minus distantes, quam quo a mediis posticis distant. Cephalothorax robustus, eonvexior MAM MN cr Er OLA RÖDE: 1) On North Amer. spiders, p. 104; — Aran. of the United States, in Bost. Journ. of Nat. Hist., VI, p. 31. 2) Aran. of the United States, loc. cit. p. 34. 3) Insect. Arachnoidumque nov. dee. duo, p. 452. 4) Descr. of a new gen. and six new species of spid., p. 270. 5) Sur trois Araignées nouv., p. 9. 76 T. THORELL, B. Oculi medii in quadratum dispositi. Maxillæ angustæ, in labium fortiter inclinatæ. Cephalothorax alte convexus, sub-hemisphæri- cus. 10. ro. ** Pedes aculeis carentes (rarissime serie aculeorum subtus instructi). A. Mandibulæ femore plus duplo crassiores, usque a basi diver- GENER AT TENTAT ES CE in ack gnaga B. Mandibule non vel apice tantum divergentes. A. Mandibulæ non vel parum crassiores quam femora anteriora. Maxille oblongæ, lateribus sub-rectis, paralleliter porrectæ. Pedes tenues valde, prop. 1, 2, 4, 3. Oculi medii fere in quadratum dispositi, anteriores in tuberculo forti, prominenti positi. (Caput maris valde prominens. Palpus feminæ un- gue instructus). . ©» . . . . . » . . 4 Argyrodes. . Mandibule plerumque femore crassiores et apice divergentes: pedum prop. plerumque 4, 1, 2, 3. (Species minute, nigre, fusce vel rufescentes, abdomine sæpissime unicolore. Palpus feminæ ungue sæpissime carens). a. Maxille sub-parallele vel in labium inclinate, ad basin non vel parum latiores. . . . . . . 8. Walckenaera. b. Maxillæ ad basin valde dilatate. . . . . 7. Ærigone. Mandibule sæpissime femore angustiores et sub-cylindrate. Maxillæ plerumque in labium fortiter inclinatæ. (Palpus fe- min: ungue pectinato instructus). a. Oculi laterales contingentes. a. Oeuli medii trapezium antiee duplo angustius forman- tes. Maxille late, ovato-sub-quadrate. Pedes prop. 1, 4, 2, 3, longi et graciles valde. . 9. Nesticus. b. Oculi medii aream antice non vel parum angustiorem quam postice occupantes. Maxillæ in labium fortiter inclinatæ vel circa labium curvate, plerumque angu- ste et sub-lineares. a, Spatium inter oculos posticos medios et laterales duplo circiter majus, quam spatium, quo distant oculi medii inter se. Maxillæ extus sub-dilatatæ. Abdomen longius ovatum, modice convexum. Pedes valde longi et graeiles. . . . 11. Phyllonethis. B. Spatium inter oculos posticos medios et laterales non vel paullo tantum majus, quam quo distant illi inter se. I. Series oculorum postica, desuperne visa, proeurva vel sub-recta. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 77 1. Oculi minores: postiei medii a lateralibus postieis spatio distantes, quod oeuli maximi diametrum superat vel saltem sequat. Abdo- men (Q) plerumque altum, valde convexum, globosum vel forma fere pyri. 13. Theridium. 2. Oculi majores: postiei medii a lateralibus postieis spatio distantes, quod oculi maximi diametro brevius est. Abdomen (9) sæpissime breviter ovatum vel ovale, supra sub-depres- BUS 5 5 5 60 0 o o e dé Shane. II. Series oculorum posticorum, desuperne visa, evidenter recurva. 1. Pedes 1™ paris reliquis longiores. Abdomen sub-globosum. . . . . . 12. Dipena. 2. Series oculorum posticorum, desuperne visa, fortiter recurva. Pedes 4' paris reliquis lon- giores. Abdomen ovatum (postice interdum acuminatum, mamillis superioribus reliquis plerumque multo robustioribus). 17. Æuryopis. b. Oculi laterales disjuncti. a. Spatium inter oculos anticos medios et laterales vix majus, quam spatium, quo distant laterales inter se. Pedes tenues 1"! et 4 paris longi. Abdomen postice latiussr era GI ee I os lU Upisinus- b. Spatium inter oculos anticos medios et laterales multo majus, quam quo distant hi inter se. 1. Clypeus humilior, altitudine circiter dimidiæ man- dibulæ. Oculi medii in rectangulum dispositi. Pe- des 1™ paris sæpissime (num semper?) reliquis longiores; . . . . . . . 15. .Lithyphantes. 2. Olypeus altus, altitudine fere mandibulæ longitudi- nem squanti. Oculi medii aream antice paullo an- gustiorem oecupantes. Pedes 1"! paris reliquis lon- BIOS o e vw o c oo s o e 1e re B. Oeuli in duas series sub-parallelas dispositi. . . 16. Lathrodectus. Tt Oeuli in tres turmas dispositi, duas laterales ex oculis trinis magnis con- stantes, tertiam ex oculis duobus minutissimis inter illas sitis. 19. Pholcomma. Gen. 1. PACHYGNATHA Suxp. 1823. Deriv.: mayvs, thick; yvayos, jaw. Syn.: 1893. Pachygnatha SUND., Gen. Aran. Suec., p. 16. 182.. Theridium Haun, Monogr. Aran. (ad part.:) 4, Tab. 4, fig. B. 78 T. THORELL, 1833. Manduculus Buackw., Charact. of some undescr. gen. and spec. of Aran., p. 110. 1841. Linyphia Waucx., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., II, p. 233 (ad partem). 1861. Pachygnatha WEsTR., Aran. Suec., p. 144. 1864. > Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 318. 1864. + Sim., HL. N. d. Araignées, p. 229. 1860. ji MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., I, p. 94. Type: Pachygnatha Clerckii SUND. WESTRING, BLACKWALL, MENGE and others have already remarked the close analogy between this genus and Yetragnatha among the Epeiroidæ in the structure of the male's palpi, the form of the mandibles, ete.: it was even referred by SUNDEVALL, when he first described it, to his "Retiariz" i e. the Zpeiroide. — The superior tarsal claws are in this genus rather large and powerful, yet slender, pretty uniformly curved, strongly pectinated, with several (12 or less) long, straight teeth; the inferior claw is small, with one very small blunt tooth. The palpal claw in 9 is under the middle provided with a few close-set teeth gradually increasing in length. A remarkable genus, which by the form of its large diverging man- dibles seems to be related to Pachygnathu, is Prodidomus HENTZ (Aran. of the United States, im Bost. Journ. of Nat. Hist., V, p. 466): it is said to show "some of the characters of Clubiona and Theridium”. + Gen. 2. FORMICINA CANESTR. 1868. Deriv.: Formica, ant. Syn.: 1868, Formicina CANEsTR., Nuovi Aracn. Ital., p. 197. Type: Formicina Mutinensis CANESIR. This to me unknown genus is said by CANESTRINI to be related to Pachygnatha: it has however not the mandibles diverging almost at a right angle, but only slightly diverging at the extremities. The most distinguish- ing feature of the genus is, that the petiolum, which unites the cephalo- thorax and abdomen, is long and nodose, thus giving these spiders a certain resemblance with ants. The 4 intermediary eyes form a trapezium: the po- sterior pair are farther distant from the side-eyes than from each other; the anterior are so close as almost to touch each other. The side-eyes are contiguous, the cephalothorax tolerably long and narrow; the relative length of the legs: 1, 2, 3, 4. See CANESTR., loc. cit.; Aran. Ital, p. 118. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 79 Gen. 3. EPISINUS Warck. 1809. Deriv.: Probably eee, hurtful (o¢vouee, plunder, injure). Syn.: 1809. Episinus Warck., in Larr., Gen. Crust. et IE jo Bil. 1861. ^ WESTR., Aran. Suec., p. 193. 1864. Theridium Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 175 (ad partem). 1864. Episinus [Episina] Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 404. Type: Zpisinus truncatus | WALCK. The natural place of this genus is still a matter of controversy. LATREILLE included it among his Incquitel: also WALCKENAER?) and Lucas?) place it near the genus TAeridiwm, and they are here followed by WESIRING and BLACKWALL; the last-named author does not even look upon it as ge- nerically differing from "Aeridium WaLCK. C. Koch also at first 3) refer- red it to his "'Theridides", but subsequently ©) gave it a place among the Epeiroide, probably on account of a certain similitude of appearance with Tetragnatha. Both its industry and the form of its extremities however remove Æpisinus both from the Zpeiroide and the Thomisoide, to which latter this genus is referred not only by Simon (loc. cit.) but also by OHLERT >), who had nevertheless previously *) declared, on the ground of the number and structure of the tarsal claws, his conviction, that it ought to be classed among the Theridioidæ, which all, like the Epeiroide, have three claws at the extremity of the tarsus, whereas the Thomisoidæ have only two. From this last family Æpisinus differs also, and that essentially, in not being in the least /aterigrade. A certain analogy with the Philodromine of the fa- mily Thomisoidæ we will not deny that it exhibits, especially as regards the form of the abdomen; but the extremely fine and weak, tapering extremities clearly show that Æpisinus is a genuine sedentary 7), not, like the Thomi- 1) H. N. d. Ins. Apt. I, 375. 2) Explor. de l'Algér., Araehn., p. 269. 3) Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 10. 4) Ibid., 5, p. 14. 5) Die Aran. d. Prov. Preuss., p. 110. 6) OnrERT, Klauenbildung d. Preuss. Spinnen, p. 10. 1) Onrzmr indeed (with LATREILLE) includes also the Thomisoidæ in the list of Aranee sedentes, but he does not give to that expression the sense we think it ought to bear. Only such spiders ought to be called "sedentes" or "sedentary", as await their prey in a web or nest, in contradistinction to those wich wander about in search of it. In this sense "Sedentes" are perhaps only the Orbitelarie, most Re- titelarie and some Tubitelariæ (Filistatoide, certain Dysderoide, and most, if not all, Agalenoide): the others, and especially Laterigradw, Citigrade and Saltigrade, with the exception perhaps of the Eresoide and Dinopoide, are " Aranee vagantes". Conf. WALCKENAER, Ins. Apt., I, p. 187 et seqq. 80 T. "DHOREED; soidæ, a wandering spider, whose web however appears to consist merely of a few irregular threads, on which it sits with its legs stretched straight forwards and backwards, in much the same position as Tetragnatha. — The male by his large palpal clava resembles the Hyptiotes paradoxus c. The superior tarsal claws are slender, slightly curved, with about 5 curved saw-teeth between their basis and middle, gradually increasing in length (on the 1* pair of legs); the inferior claw is very small, with the extremity curved a little outwards, and has two blunt teeth; the female's palpus-claw is small, more strongly curved, and has about 6 close-set saw- teeth of about the same form as on the superior claws of the tarsi. Gen. 4. ARGYRODES Simon. 1864. Deriv.: doyvoos, silver; eidos, form, appearance. Syn.: 1841. Linyphia Watcx., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., IL, p. 233 (ad part.: »3* Fam. Les Epéirides, Epeirides»). 1864. Argyrodes Sım., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 253 (saltem ad partem). Type: Argyrodes Epeire SIMON. This genus, formed with good reason by Simon at the expense of Linyphia WALCK., is especially remarkable for its living parasitically in the webs of larger Æpeiroidæ. Sımon has lately 1) under the name of Argy- rodes Epeiræ described a species from Spain, which he considers as new, but which certainly is identical with Linyphia argyrodes WALCK., of which I have seen specimens from Brazil, and which is also met with in the Ile de la Réunion (Bourbon) ?) and probably also in Java?) and in Georgia in North America‘). It appears to be as widely geographically distributed as Cyrtophora opuntie (DUF.), in the web of which, according to SIMON, it in Spain resides, — On this genus see also above p. 48. The tarsal claws of A. Epeire are somewhat weak (as in Linyphia) ; the two superior differ considerably from each other in size, and are pro- vided with 2 or 3 teeth of unequal size, pointing obliquely forward (on the 1" pair of legs). The inferior claw is equally large with the greater of the superior claws, more powerful, with a long, pointed tooth. The fe- male’s tarsal claw is fine and slender, slightly curved, with two teeth of different size pointing obliquely forward. 1) Sur quelques Araignées d'Espagne, p. 281. 2) Vinson, Aran. d. Iles de la Réun., Maur. et Madag., p. 318. 3) van HassELT, Notice of Vinson’s Aran. de la Réun. ete., p. 17. 4) WALCKENAER, Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., II, p. 283. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 81 Gen. 5. TAPINOPA Weste. 1851. Deriv.: rzezewóc, low; aw, face. Syn.: 1834. Linyphia Reuss., Zool. Mise., Arachn., (ad part.:) p. 264 (270)). 1851. Tapinopa WtsTR., Förteckn., p. 38. 1864. Linyphia Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 210 (ad partem). 1864. 5 Siv., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 222 (ad partem). 1866. Tapinopa MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., I, p. 143. Type: Tapinopa longidens (REUSS). This remarkable genus, which was formed by WESTRING, approximates , in the very small distance between the anterior central eyes and the margin of the clypeus, to the preceding family, the Æpeiroide. The lateral eyes are however far distant from that margin, as in other Zheridioidæ, to which family the whole appearance of the only yet known species clearly indi- cates it as belonging. The form of the web of 7. longidens is also iden- tical with that of Linyphia. The claws are of the same form as in Linyphia: the superior claws of the tarsi are slender, strongly bent, with about 3—5 small saw-teeth under their first half; the inferior claw is comparatively large, with two close-set teeth of unequal size. The female’s palpal claw is still more slen- der, less curved, with a couple of small teeth nearer its base. * Gen. 6. LINYPHIA (LarmR.) 1804. Deriv.: Aívov, flax; vgaivw, weave. Syn.: 1804. Linyphia LaTm., in Nouv. Dict. d’Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 134 (ad partem). 1805. " Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 70 (ad maz. part.). 1833. Erigone SUND., Sv. Spindl. Beskr., in Vet.-Akad. Handl. f. 1832, p. 259 (ad partem). 1833. Neriene Buackw., Charact. of some undescr. gen. and spec. of Aran., p. 187 (ad partem). 1837. Bolyphantes C. KocH, in Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 9 (ad partem). 1861. Linyphia Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 90. 1864. * Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 210 (ad maz. part.). 1864. Neriene ID., ibid., p. 248 (ad partem). 1864. Linyphia Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 222 (ad max. part.). 1864. Bolyphantes ID., ibid., p. 231. 1866. Linyphia MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., I, p. 101. 1866. Bathyphantes ID., ibid., p. 111. 11866. Pedina ID., ibid., p. 125. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc, Ups. Ser. III. 11 82 T. THORELL, 1866. Helophora MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., I, p. 126. 11866. Stylophora ID., ibid., p. 128). 1866. Lephthyphantes [Leptyphantes] ID., ibid., p. 131. 1866. Bolyphantes ID., ibid., p. 134. 1866. Stemonyphantes ID., ibid., p. 138. 1866. Drapetisca ID., ibid., p. 140. Type: Linyphia triangularis (CLERCK). Now that SUNDEVALL has separated Pachygnatha, WESTRING Tapi- nopa, and SIMON Argyrodes from LATREILLE'S Linyphia, it appears to me that all the remaining European species referred by WALCKENAER to this genus, excepting only L. crypticolens WALCK. (Nesticus cellulanus (CLERCK) NOB.), may be retained under that generic name. C. KoCH has removed from it and made a separate genus of Bolyphantes, in which he at first also in- cluded a couple of species of the genus Chiracanthium, which he however since removed from that place. I cannot persuade myself that the genus Bolyphantes is sufficiently distinctly characterised to deserve to be retained, although it has been adopted by OHLERT and some others. The number of teeth on the palpal claw, on which OHLERT appears to lay the principal stress in determining the limits of Linyphia and Bolyphantes, affords a characteristic peculiar only to the female, and moreover that number is too different in the most nearly related species (8 in e. g. Bol. or Lin. alticeps, 3 or 4 in Bol. alpestris or Lin. luteola BLACKW.) to be allowed any great importance; neither can I find in the position of the eyes any constant dif- ference between these two genera. BLACKWALL has combined certain species of WALCKENAERS Liny- phia with some forms of that writers Argus or WESTRING'S Erigone into a ‘separate genus JVeriene, which appears to me to include elements to differ- ent to be natural. Even had it been natural, there was no occasion for a new name, for it contains species, which had already received from SAVIGNY and AUDOUIN the generic name of Ærigone. Judging from the characters assigned by BLACKWALL to Linyphia and Neriene, it would seem that the latter genus differs from the former principally in having the 1* and 4^ pairs of legs equally long or nearly so, whereas in Linyphia the 1* pair is longer than the rest. The maxillee are dilated at the extremity and inclined or curved towards the lip in Neriene, straight or slightly inclined towards the lip and somewhat quadrate in Linyphia. The genus Walckenaera, accor- ding to BLACKWALL, is distinguished from JVeriene by having the maxillæ 1) Pedina Agass. [Echin.] 1840. — Stylophora Ros.-Desy. [Dipt.] 1830. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 83 dilated at the base. On the difference in the form of the maxillæ BLACK- WALL appears however to have laid no especial weight, for his Neriene longipalpis for ex. has unquestionably the maxille strongly dilated at the base, and the maxillæ of Neriene trilineata do not, as far as I can see, differ in form from for ex. those of Linyphia montana (CLERCK). The distinction then must be founded on the difference in the relative length of the legs; and the consequence is, that species so heterogeneous as for ex. JVeriene ( Erigone) longipalpis and N. trilineata (Lin. bucculenta) have been united in one genus with N. marginata (Lin. clathrata SUND.), which accordingly is made not to belong to the same genus as for ex. Linyphia pratensis BLACKW.! That too much weight ought not in these genera to be laid on the characteristics derived from the relative length of the legs and a somewhat different form of the maxillæ, has nevertheless not escaped the observation of BLACKWALL, for he himself says in his account of his Neriene dubia (p. 289) that even "the sexes of the same spider frequently differ in the rela- tive length of the legs and in the form of the maxille”. — The genus Neriene ought, in my opinion, to be wholly suppressed and its species dis- tributed among Linyphia, Walckenaera and Erigone, in such wise that the species that have scattered spines on their legs be assigned to Linyphia, and of the others those, of which the maxillæ are greatly dilated at the base, to Erigone, and the rest to Walckenaera. The numerous genera which MENGE has separated from Linyphia, I cannot adopt, as they appear to me almost exclusively based upon minute modifications of the organs of copulation ?), frequently only discoverable by means of the microscope. Compare what we have said on this subject in our remarks on the genus Æpeira, p. 54. 1) This of course does not prevent our acknowledgement of the great importance of MENGE's researches on the subject of the more detailed structure of the sexual or- gans, which previous to him had been almost entirely unknown, and whereby a new and highly interesting field for investigation has been opened. It is probable that the results obtained by this species of research will have a certain influence on the classification of spiders, as soon as they have obtained a wider compass, and a richer store of materials of observation has been aecumulated. But as yet it is per- haps too early to attempt to deduce from the modifications of these organs the de- cisive characteristics of genera, for we have as yet too little knowledge of what eonnexion these modifieations have with the different form or arrangement of other organs of acknowledged systematie weight, e. g. the parts of the mouth, the extre- mities and the eyes. It appears to us, that similarities or dissimilarities in the struc- ture of the organs of copulation is far from always indicating a corresponding simi- litude or dissimilitude in the organisms generally; at least species which are very 84 T. THORELL, Linyphia passes gradually into Walckenaera (Micryphantes), and only a tolerably artificial limit can be established between these two genera, however unlike each other they on the whole may be. We admit, with WESTRING, that the presence of scattered spines on the legs is the mark which distinguishes Linyphia from Walckenaera (and Erigone), in preference to the distinction proposed by OHLERT, the presence of palpal claws in Linyphia, and the absence of them in Walckenaera (and Erigone). In fact, the cha- racter deduced from the spines on the legs is easily verified, whereas the palpal claw in some of the smaller Linyphiæ is so fine and slender as to be very difficult to distinguish from an ordinary bristle, and furthermore the presence or absence of a claw on the palpus is a characteristic applicable only to one sew, the female. Besides, Ærigone vagans Say. et AUD. is said to be, unlike other species of that genus, provided with a palpal claw +), and of the genus Ceratina MENGE, which we unite with Walckenaera or Micryphantes, C. brevis, according to MENGE (as well as Wesrrine’s Eri- closely related in every thing else (e. g. the species of the genus Zilla (Koch) Wesre.) show very considerable differences with respect to the organs in question, and this has caused newer arachnologists with predilection to deduce the distinctions of species from the almost endlessly varying forms of the palpi of the males and the "epigyne" or vulva of the females. — Science however must necessarily gain by every endeavour after an improved classification and a sharper distinction of the genera of spiders. It is indisputable, that Arachnology stands in a much lower position than most other branches of Entomology, and that especially the scientific diagnosis of fa- milies and genera is as yet very defective. More than one arachnologist of the pre- sent time content themselves with WALCKENAER'S system, and follow in their deserip- tions the method of that princeps arachnologorum, whose honour one by no means depreciates by not believing, that the science ought always to remain stationary at the point, to which he carried it and where he left it. Only a few of the few, who de- vote themselves to this branch of zoology, labour to promote it by other means than by inereasing the number of better or worse descriptions of species. Of late years however signs of a better spirit have shown themselves, and among the works which rise above the ordinary level, those of MENGE undoubtedly occupy a particularly high place. But many workmen are still wanted upon that so slightly cultivated field, and in order to obtain these, it is necessary in the first place to make fauni- stie and descriptive works in general as easy to use and as practical as possible. As long as good and suffieient marks of distinetion ean be found by the aid of the simple magnifying lens, one must not make the compound microscope an indispensable instrument for any one, who may wish to determine the name and systematie posi- tion of an unknown spider. That the microscope is not necessary in order with cer- tainty to distinguish even the smallest speeies of spiders, is fully evideneed by the works of WESTRING and OHLERT. 1) Descript. de l'Égypte, Arachn., (Éd. 2:) XXII, p. 320. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 85 gone phæopus, which belongs to Ceratina) is destitute of palpal claws 2, whereas other species of Ceratina described by MENGE are provided with them. The superior tarsal claws in the Zinyphie are slender, slightly eurv- ed, and have generally 6—12, sometimes even up to nearly 20, pointed teeth, gradually increasing in length; the inferior claw on the contrary has only one or two pointed teeth. The female’s palpal claw has usually one, two or no teeth; sometimes, but rarely, 3—8 short saw-teeth. In many of the smaller species it is very slender, and sometimes entirely absent. Gen. 7. ERIGONE Say. et Aup. 1825—27. Deriv.: 'Horyóvq, Erigone, mythol. proper name. Syn.: 1825—27. Erigone Sav. et Avp., Descr. de l'Égypte, (Éd. 2:) XXII, p. 319. 1833. s SUND., Sv. Spindl. Beskr., 2 Vet.-Akad. Handl. f. 1832, p. 259 (ad partem). 1833. Neriene Brackw., Charact. of some undeser. gen. and spec. of Aran., p. 187 (ad partem). 1837. Mieryphantes C. KocH, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 11 (ad partem). 11841. Argus Warck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., II, p. 344 (ad part.: ”1° Fam., 1° Race, Les Érigonides, Erigonides”) =). 1861. Erigone WEsTR., Aran. Suec., p. 195 (ad partem). 1864. Neriene Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., IT, p. 248 (ad partem). 1864. Erigone [Erygona] Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 191. 1861. = Outert, Aran. d. Prov. Preuss., p. 34. 1868. 5 MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., II, p. 195. 1868. Tmeticus 1D., ibid., p. 184 (ad partem). Type: Erigone vagans Sav. et AUD. Of the species included by WESTRING in the genus Ærigone, we pre- serve under that generic name only those, which are distinguished by hav- ing the malle considerably dilated at the base, short, and inclined towards the lip. Ærigone NOB. accordingly corresponds to the 1* race ("les Zrigo- nides") of the 1* family of Argus WALCK. In that compass, which appears to be what by SAVIGNY and AUDOUIN was originally intended, it corresponds very nearly with C. KocHs, Smon’s and OHLERTS Ærigone, although the last mentioned author gives as the special characteristic of the genus the long palpi of the male, a characteristic then, that applies only to one sex. In WESTRING this genus corresponds to Ærigone and Micryphantes together 1) Preuss. Spinn., II, p. 171 et seq. 2) Argus Tem. [Aves] 1815. 86 T. THORELL, of the three last-mentioned writers; in SUNDEVALL it has a still larger com- pass, in as much as that he has included in it sundry species of the genus Linyphia. In MENGE again it has been somewhat more confined than in C. KocH and OnrERT. To the form of the maxille MENGE, in opposition to the majority of writers, seems to give no weight: a couple of species, which we, in consequence of the form of these organs, consider as belonging to Erigone, are found in his work attributed to Tineticus, of which again other species belong to Walckenaera (BLACKW.) NOB. or Micryphantes. BLACKWALL reckons the species belonging to this genus to his ANeriene. — DUGES ?) places the genus Zrigone in the family he cails ” Aranées”, which pretty nearly answers to our Tubitelaric. As to the claws, the species of this genus resemble those of the fol- lowing: the palpal claw is almost always wanting; the superior tarsal claw is slender, with about 6 teeth, the inferior is armed with one long pointed tooth. Gen. 8. WALCKENAERA (BLAckw.). 1833. Deriv.: WALCKENAER, proper name. Syn.: 1833. Erigone SUND., Sv. Spindl. Beskr., in Vet.-Akad. Handl. f. 1832, p. 259 (ad partem). 1833. Walckenaera Buackw., Charact. of some undescr. gen. and spec. of Aran., p. 105. 1833. Savignia ID., ibid., p. 104. 1833. Neriene ID., ibid., p. 187 (ad partem). 1833. Mieryphantes C. Kocu, in Hznmn.-ScHuzrr., Deutschl. Ins., 121, 19 et seq. 1837. " ID., Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 11 (ad maz. part.). T1841. Argus Warck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., II, p. 344 (ad max. part.). 1861. Erigone Westr., Aran. Suec., p. 195 (ad max. part.). 1864. Micryphantes [Micryphantus] Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 193. 1864. Walckenaera BLAckw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 289. 1864, Neriene ID., ibid., p. 248 (ad max. part.). 1867. Micryphantes OuL., Aran. d. Prov. Preuss., p. 34 (ad max. part.). +1868. Ceratina MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., II, p. 170°). 11868. Pachydactylus ID., ibid., p. 176 ?). H 1868. Platyopis ID., ibid., p. 178. 1868. Gonatium ID., ibid., p. 180. 1) Observ. sur les Aranéides, p. 161. 2) Ceratina LATR. [Hymenopt.] 1804. 3) Pachydactylus WigGM. [Rept.] 1834. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 87 1868. Gongylidium Menez, Preuss. Spinn., II, p. 183. 1868. Tmeticus ID., ibid., p. 184 (ad partem). 1868. Dieymbium 1D., ibid., p. 193. 1868. Lophocarenum ID., ibid., p. 198. 1868. Lophomma ID., ibid., p. 209. 1868. Phalops ID., ibid., p. 218. 1868. Dicyphus 1D., ibid., Pl. 43, tab. 121; III, p. 221. 11869. Elaphidium ID., ibid., III, p. 224). 1869. Cornicularia Ip., ibid., p. 226. 1869. Microneta ID., ibid., p. 227. 1889. Micryphantes ID., ibid., p. 236. 1869. Leptothrix ID., ibid., p. 240. ?1869. Drepanodus ID., ibid., p. 241. ?1869. Pronopius ID., ibid., p. 243. Type: Walckenaera acuminata BLACKW. (= Erigone cornuta (REUSS) WESTR.). The name Micryphantes we find first, and without characterisation, applied by C. KocH in the 121“ Number of HERRICH-SCHÆFFERS Deutsch- lands Insecten, which appeared in 1833 (or perhaps not before 1834). In 1833 BLACKWALL (loc. cit.) published his genus Walckenaera accompanied by a complete diagnosis: under this name he united a number of species, which, as it appears from the characterization of Micryphantes, subsequently given by KocH (in Uebers. d. Arachn. Syst. 1, p. 11 (1837), and Die Arachn., IV, p. 124—127), also belong to that genus. Walckenaera and Micryphantes are accordingly to be looked upon as synonyms; and from what now has been adduced it is easily perceived, that the first name is to be preferred to the latter, even if not older than, but only contempora- neous with it. The genus Savignia was formed by BLACKWALL for a spider (S. frontata BLACKW. = Erig. conica WESTR.) which he erroneously supposed to have but six eyes, but which he has since rightly aggregated to Walc- kenaera. — To Neriene, besides many other species, he has referred seve- ral, that stand in so close connexion with the spiders that he attributes to Walckenaera, that it seems to us, that they ought to be assigned to that genus. C. KocH referred those of them, with which he was acquainted, to his Mieryphantes. Walckenaera (BLACKW.) NOB. is therefore very nearly identical with Micryphantes C. KocH, which genus has been adopted by 1) Elaphidion SERv. [Coleopt.] 1834. 88 'T. THORELL, many arachnologists, SIMON and OHLERT among the rest.— Of the value of the distinctions that separate JVeriene from Walckenaera and Linyphia we have already delivered an opinion (p. 82—83). While WESTRING unites into one genus, Ærigone, the species that compose Kocn's Erigone and Micryphantes, the large number of species, of which the latter genus consists, and which makes a division of it desirable, has given occasion to two attempts of the kind, which however do not seem to us to have been attended by fully satisfactory results. SIMON divides Micryphantes (loc. cit.) into the sub-genera Micryphantes, Melicertus, Pele- copsis, Nerieneus, Widerius and Arrecerus, in consequence of more or less accurately observed differences in the form of the head and the position of the eyes in the males. He however already at the end of the same work discards (Walckenaera and) Nerieneus. MENGE, in his ” Preussische Spinnen”, resolves the genus Micryphantes or Walckenaera into a very large number of new genera, but does not adopt any of Sımon’s or BLACKWALL’S here ci- ted names. Several of these genera are founded on characteristics belong- ing only to the males, others on modifications, which appear to me of too subordinate importance to be used as the characteristics of genera. Some of them, however, may perhaps deserve to be acknowledged. But as the 3" Part of MENGES work, in which many of his new genera are proposed, did not come out till shortly before the present sheet was sent to the press, I cannot now enter into any detailed examination of his classification of the spiders in question, but preserve for the present the genus Walcke- naera undivided, and of the extent above named. The weak and slender superior tarsal claws of the species compos- ing the genus Walckenaera have usually 6—8 teeth, greatly varying in length; the inferior claw has one, rarely two pointed teeth. The palpal claw is absent, except in the case of a few species (belonging to the genus Ceratina MENGE), in which it has 1—3 teeth. Conf. MENGE, Preuss. Spin- nen, II, p. 171 et seq. Gen. 9. NESTICUS wn. Deriv.: vnozıx0s, skilful in spinning (vw, v79w, spin). b 5 Syn.: 1805. Theridium Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 72 (ad part.: ”4° Fam. Les Cryptico- les, Orypticole”). 1841. Linyphia ID., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., II, p. 233 (ad partem). 1841. Meta ©. Koch, Die Arachn., VIII, (ad part.:) p. 123. 1859. Theridium THor., Om Clercks Origin.-spindelsaml., (ad part.:) p. 150. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 89 1861. Theridium Westr., Aran. Suec., p. 151 (ad partem). 1864. Linyphia BLackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 210 (ad partem). 1864. i Sri, H. N. d. Araignées, p. 222 (ad partem). Type: Nestieus cellulanus (CLERCK). The different genera, to which CLERCK'S Aran. cellulanus has been referred by different arachnologists, sufficiently indicate that it does not fully agree with any one of them. By WALCKENAER it was first classed among the Thertdia, afterwards among the Linyphie. To the Epeiroid genus Meta, to which it is assigned by C. KocH, it of course does not belong. The position of the eyes is the same as in Linyphia, but their form, the absence of spines on the legs, and the form of the cephalothorax, seem to vindicate for this spider a place nearer the genus Theridium WALCK., and especially near Steatoda (SuND.) NoB. In the form of the maxillee it ap- pears to me to stand midway between Linyphia and Steatoda. Accordingly, as it cannot properly be united to either of these genera, I have formed a new genus for its reception. The superior tarsal claws, which are long, slender, and slightly curved, have in Nesticus cellulanus about 11—13 closely set, rather short comb-teeth, gradually inereasing in length and pointing somewhat forwards; the inferior has two close-set blunt teeth, of which the exterior is con- siderably thicker than the interior. The palpal claw has about 13 teeth, similar to those of the superior tarsal claws. The armature of the claws is thus very peculiar and different from what we meet with either in Linyphia, Theridium or Steatoda. Gen. 10. ERO (C. Kocx). 1837. Deriv. uncertain. ro is probably a proper name '), Syn.: 1805. Theridium Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 72 (ad part.: "8* Fam. Les Tubercu- lées, Zuberculate’’). 1837. Ero C. Kocn, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 8 (salem ad part.). 1861. „ Westr., Aran. Suec., p. 148. 1864. ,, Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 182. 1864, Theridium Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 175 (ad partem). 1866. Ero MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., I, p. 146. Type: Ero tuberculata (DE GEER). 1) Had this name been formed from ‘How, C. Kocx would unquestionably have written it with H. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. II. 12 90 T. THORELL, We take this genus, formed by C. KocH, in the extent which WEs- TRING has assigned it, and accordingly cannot include in it Ero sawatilis C. KocH, which is a Theridium (= Th. riparium BLACKW.). — The tar- sus in this genus shows at least some appearance of a little separate joint bearing the claws, and by this, as well as by its highly convex cephalothorax, Ero shows an evident analogy with Scytodes. — The superior tarsal claws are weak, sharply bent downwards, with 3 or 4 small teeth towards the base; the inferior claw appears to me to have only one little tooth. The palpal claw has the same form as the superior claws of the tarsi, and 3 or 4 teeth rapidly increasing in length and directed somewhat forward, situated nearly under the middle of the claw (in Æ. variegata). Gen. 11. PHYLLONETHIS x. Deriv.: gvddov, leaf; vydis, spinner. Syn.: 1805. Theridium Watck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 72 (ad part.: "1* Fam. Les Ovales, Ovatæ”). 1837. Steatoda C. Kocx, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 16 (ad partem). 1861. Theridium Westr., Aran. Suec., p. 151 (ad partem). 1864. D Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 175 (ad partem). 1864. ? sub-gen. Steatoda [Steatodum] Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 167. 1866. a MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., II, p. 164. Type: Phyllonethis lineata (CLERCK). CLERCK'S Araneus lineatus differs so largely from the typical The- ridia (if we consider as such Th. sisyphium, varians, and their nearest re- lations) that, unless the great genus Theridium WALCK. be preserved un- divided, it can hardly be classed among them. WALCKENAER himself formed for this species a special "family" of his Theridium: C. Kocx formed for it a separate genus, to which he erroneously affiliated Th. pictum WALCK., a spider which accurately agrees with the above-mentioned typical species of Theridium. MENGE, who adopts the new genus, restricts it to the spe- cies in question, Ar. lineatus CLERCK. By C. KocH it has been denomi- nated Steatoda, which name however belongs to quite another group of The- ridioidæ (see Gen. 14. Steatoda, p. 93). MENGE calls it Theridium, but that name had previously been by SIMON reserved for Th. sisyphium and its nearest allied species (which again are by MENGE taken up under the name of Steatoda), and ought, according to the law of priority, to be preser- ved to them. I have therefore been obliged to give the genus a new name. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 91 The superior tarsal claws are tolerably large, armed with about 5 teeth, of which the two exterior ones are long and divergent; the palpal claw has 5 teeth increasing in length, and of which the 3 exterior are crooked and somewhat diverging. The inferior tarsal claw has a thick, blunt, somewhat crooked tooth and an inconsiderable point behind it. Gen. 12. DIPŒNA x. Deriv.: 4ízowoc, proper name. Syn.: 1845. Atea O. Koch, Die Arachn., XI, (ad part.:) p. 143. 1863. Theridium CAMBr., Descr. of 24 new spec. of spid., (ad part.:) p. 16 (8576). 1864. Epeira: sub-gen. Atea Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 260 (ad partem). Type: Dipena melanogaster (C. Koch). We have formed this genus for Atea melanogaster C. KocH (Ther. congener CAMBR.), which is not an Atea at all, not even an Epeiroid, as C. KocH maintains (loc. cit). From Theridium, to which this genus ap- proaches more nearly than to any other, and to which the only yet known species is referred by CAMBRIDGE (loc. cit.)*), it differs principally by the posterior row of eyes being curved backwards, and by the coarse bristles with which the legs are armed. In the only known species the height of the clypeus is almost greater than the length of the mandibles, more than 14 times, nearly double as great as the length of the area occupied by the central eyes. The almost spherical abdomen is slightly emarginate or hollowed out at the base. The tarsal claws are rather strong, but small, especially the inferior, which has one tolerably long tooth; the superior are armed with a row of short saw- teeth proceeding from the side of the claw and pointing obliquely forwards, which row reaches nearly to the tip of the claw. The female's palpal claw is bent almost exactly to a half-circle, small, and tolerably powerful; I have not been able to see any teeth on it. 'The construction of the claws is then, in this genus, very unlike that in the genus Theridium. 1) Even AUSSERER, though he includes it in his genus Atea, else consisting only of Epeiroidæ, says, that, on account of its form, it must necessarily be considered a Theridium. (Die Arachn. Tirols, I, p. 150). The web of this spider seems to be . as yet unknown. 92 T. THORELL, Gen. 13. THERIDIUM (Warck.). 1805. Deriv.: Inoidıov, little animal. Syn.: 1805. Theridium [Theridion] Waucx., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 72 (ad part.: ”3° Fam. Les Renflées, 7urgidæ”). 1833. 5 SunD., Consp. Arachn., p. 16 (ad max. part.). 1833. Steatoda ID., ibid. (ad partem). 1850. Ero OC. Koch, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 16 (ad partem). 1861. Theridium Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 151 (ad partem). 1864. 5 [Theridion] Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 175 (ad partem). 1864. 5 : sub-gen. Theridium [Theridio] Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 167 (ad mak. part.). 1866. Steatoda MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., I, p. 150. 1868. Neottiura ID., ibid., II, p. 162. 1868. Euryopis ID., ibid., p. 174 (ad partem). Type: Theridium sisyphium | (CLERCK). If the great Latreilleian genus Linyphia forms a close and compact whole, from which only a few species need be detached and divided among more recently formed genera, this is by no means the case with Theridium WALCK. WALCKENAER himself, already in his Tableau des Aranéides, di- vided it into several "families", most of which form perfectly natural groups, and have been raised to the rank of independent genera by C. KocH, who has been followed in this by OHLERT and others. Most of these two wri- ters' genera I have thought it best to retain, though with some slight mo- difications; moreover I have adopted the genus Æuryopis proposed by MENGE, and have added the new genus Dipana NOB. (for Atea melanoga- ster: see preceding page) The name ZAeridiwm I have, according to the example of (C. KocH and) SIMON, preserved for WALCKENAER'S ”3™ Fam. les Renflées”, which family appears to me to include the forms specially ty- pical of his Theridium. By MENGE this genus has been called Steatoda, a name belonging to a quite different group (see following genus). His The- ridium is our Phyllonethis (see p. 90). For Th. bimaculatum (LINN.), MENGE has formed the genus Neottiura, which I have thought it best to unite with Theridium. Th. guttatum Reuss, which has been looked upon as a Theridium by OBLERT, but for which MENGE has proposed a separate genus, Crustulina, ought, it appears to me, to be referred to the same genus as Ar. bipunctata LINN., i. e. to Steatoda (SUND.). WESTRING and BLACKWALL preserve for Zheridium about the same limits that it has in WALCKENAER, the latter even refers Æpisinus WALCK. to it. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 93 In Theridium the claws are small and weak, the superior tarsal claws ordinarily provided with 5 or 6 teeth gradually increasing in length, of which the extreme ones are long, pointed and somewhat curved; the in- ferior is not much smaller than the superior claws, with one short, blunt, somewhat curved tooth, and frequently a little point behind it; the palpal claw has most generally 4—7 rather long pointed teeth. Th. tepidariorum, formosum and riparium compose a little separate group, distinguished, as OHLERT has already remarked, also by some differences in the form of the palpal claw: that claw in these species is in fact strongly bent, with about 7 (in Th. tepidariorum 10) long, close-set, vertical teeth, which, together with the downward bent extremity of the claw, form a comb. The tarsal claws also are somewhat stouter than those of the other species of the genus. Gen. 14. STEATODA (Sunp.). 1833. Deriv.: "erearoónc, sevum referens": SUND. (créao, tallow; &idos, appearance). Syn.: 1805. Theridium WaLck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 72 ("2* Fam. Les Arrondis, Rotundate” ad part. + "5° Fam. Les Triangulilabres, Trianguklabre” saltem ad part.). 1833. Steatoda SUND., Consp. Arachn., p. 16 (ad partem). 11836. Eucharia C. KocH, in Herr.-Scumrr., Deutschl. Ins., 134, 8—11. 1831. a ID., Uebers. d. Arachn. Syst., 1, p. 7. 1839. Phrurolithus 1D., Die Arachn., VI, (ad part.:) p. 114. 1856. Steatoda THor., Rec. crit., p. 108 (ad partem). 1861. Theridium WkEsTR., Aran. Suec., p. 151 (ad partem). 1864. à Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 175 (ad partem). 1864. 5 : sub-gen. Steatoda [Steatodum] ad max. part., + Phrurolithus [Phrurolithum] ad part.: Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 168. 1867. Eucharia OHr., Aran. d. Prov. Preuss , p. 32. 1868. Crustulina MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., II, p. 168. 1869. Eucharia ID., ibid., III, p. 260 (ad partem). Type: Steatoda castanea (CLERCK). C. KocH, by an unaccountable mistake, has used the name Steatoda for Theridium lineatum, which, together with Th. sisyphium and longima- num (tinctum WALCK.), SUNDEVALL (loc. cit.) has expressly cited as examples of the species he allows to remain under the genus Theridium, after having therefrom separated Steatoda. According to SUNDEVALL'S characteristics of this genus, ” Th. 4punctatum” and ” Th. castaneum” must be considered as its types, and these species are also the jist entered by him as thereto belonging; afterwards he names ” Th. albo-maculatum” (which we look upon 94 T. THORELL, as the type of a separate genus, Lithyphantes NOB. = Phrurolithus (C. KOCH) OnLERT), and lastly " Th. lunatum”, which however approaches nearer to Th. sisyphium than to "Th. 4-punctatum”, and is also by most recent arach- nologists (lately by MENGE) referred to the same genus as the former of these two species. Steatoda (SUND. ought then to be considered as very nearly synonymous with Æucharia (©. KocH) Ont. — In Rec. crit. aran., p. 108 (1856), I adopted the genus Steatoda in the full extent it had re- ceived from SUNDEVALL, i. e. as comprising St. bipunctata and castanea, as also some species, which I then supposed ought to be united in the same genus with these, a eompass which however, as has been said, must be considerably curtailed. MENGE has afterwards used the generic name Stea- toda for Th. sisyphium ete., which according to what has here been shown, is not right; the species of Steatoda (SUND.) are by him called Eucharia. — Of C. Kocn’s Phrurolithus, at least PA. ornatus (Die Arachn., loc. cit.) be- longs to Steatoda, of his Æucharia again E. atrica to the Epeiroid genus Zilla (C. KocH) Westr.— The name Steatoda has the right of priority in preference to Eucharia, which moreover had already in 1816 been assigned by HÜBNER to a genus of Lepidoptera. The claws of Steatoda are far more powerful than those of Theri- dium, but still tolerably long. The free end of the superior tarsal claw is somewhat thickened about the middle; the teeth are thick, not long, gener- ally 7—8 in number; the inferior tarsal claw has one blunt tooth. The palpal elaw has ordinarily about 6— teeth, gradually increasing in length, and pointing forwards. — Such is the case in S. castanea and bipunctata. Gen. 15. LITHYPHANTES wx. Deriv.: Ados, stone; vpdvens, weaver. Syn.: 1805. Theridium Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 72 (”2° Fam., Les Arrondies, Rotun- date” ad partem). 1833. Steatoda SUND., Consp. Arachn., p. 16 (ad partem). 1837. Eucharia C. Koch, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 7 (ad partem). 1839. Phrurolithus 1D., Die Arachn., VI, (ad part.:) p. 100, 105—109. 1861. Theridium WEsTR., Aran. Suec., p. 151 (ad partem). 1864. x : subgen. Phrurolithus [Phrurolithum] Sım., H. d. Araignées, p. 168 (ad partem). 1867. Phrurolithus OHL., Aran. d. Prov. Preuss., p. 33. 1869. Eucharia MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., IIT, p. 260 (ad pawtem). Type: Lithyphantes corollatus (LINN.). ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 95 If from C. Kocn’s heterogeneous genus Phrurolithus we detach some not allied forms, as for instance Ph. trifasciatus, which is a Singa, Ph. ornatus, Which seems to be the young of Steatoda bipunctata, as also Ph. festivus and minimus, which belong to the Drassoide, the remaining Theri- dioide form a perfectly natural group, which has accordingly been acknow- ledged by OHLERT as a separate genus, and by him characterized in a sa- tisfactory manner. WESTRING has however as early as 1851 (Förteckn. ete., p. 46) reserved the name Phrurolithus to the above named Drassoide which KocH had referred to this genus, so that OHLERTS Phrurolithus requires a new name. We have chosen the name Lithyphantes, as indicating the ha- bits of the various species belonging to this genus. — By MENGE?) Lith. corollatus is referred to his Eucharia, i. e. Steatoda (SUND.) NOB. In £L. corollatus the superior tarsal claws are of about the same form as those of Steatoda, but somewhat stouter; they are pectinated, with about 8—10 strong teeth increasing rapidly in length from the base. The infe- rior claw has a thick, blunt tooth, behind which is another fine and more pointed. The female’s palpal claw has about 4 coarse teeth, pointing forwards. Gen. 16. LATHRODECTUS Warck. 1805. Deriv.: dog, secretly; dfxrns, biting (déxvw, bite). Syn.: 1805. Lathrodectus [Latrodectus] Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 81. 1806. Theridium [Theridion] Larr., Gen. Crust. et Ins., I, p. 98 (ad partem). 1836. Meta C. Koch, Die Arachn., III, (ad part.:) p. 9, 10. 1864. Lathrodectus [Latrodectus] Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 177. Type: Lathrodectus 13-guttatus (Rossi). This genus is so nearly similar to Lithyphantes, as to differ from it almost only by a greater distance between the lateral eyes. If WALCKENAER’S genus Theridium is preserved undivided, the species that compose Lathro- dectus must unquestionably be affiliated to it, as was done by LATREILLE and Dueks. — The name ” Latrodectus" is evidently formed of 4420€ and djzens, in the same manner as e. g. Lathrobium of 20902 and f«óo (to live), and ought therefore to be written ZLathrodectus. The derivation ”4Aazgov, merces, Óexróc, acceptus" given in AGASSIZ Nomenclator Zool., and that from "Aeros)c, ouvrier" and dyjxrys, which SIMON adopts, appear to me very im- probable, as yielding no rational meaning for the name. 1) Preuss. Spinn., III, p. 264. 96 T. THORELL, According to DUFOUR !) the claws of his L. (Ther.) lugubris — not to be confounded with ZL. (Ther.) lugubris MOTSCHOULSKY ?) — are destitute of teeth. \WALCKENAER says ?) that the inferior claw is toothless in the genus Lathrodectus in general, and that in L. 13-guttatus all the claws on the posterior legs are so. All these statements, as VAN HASSELT *) suspected, depend upon some mistake, probably on the claw-teeth in the specimens examined having been broken off. In a LL. lugubris (DUF.) from Spain I have found all the claws evidently pectinated. The superior tarsal claws are in this species short and strong, regularly and pretty much bent, with (on the first pair of legs) about 8 long, somewhat pointed comb-teeth, directed somewhat forwards; the inferior claw is considerably smaller, with two short, blunt teeth connected at the base, of which the foremost is much coarser but not longer than the other. On the 4" pair the teeth are not quite so many; the inferior claw there appears to me to show a rudiment of a third tooth (?). Gen. 17. EURYOPIS (MENGE). 1868. Deriv.: evovs, wide, broad; ww, face. Syn.: 1836. Micryphantes C. Koch, Die Arachn., III, (ad part.:) p. 67. 1847. Argus Warck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., IV, (ad part.:) p. 501. 1861. Theridium Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 151 (ad partem). 1864. a Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 175 (ad partem). 1864. Micryphantes Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 193 (ad partem). 1868. Asagena ID., ibid., p. 162 (ad partem). 1868. Euryopis MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., II, p. 174 (ad partem). Type: Æuryopis flavo-maculata (C. Koch). Kocx himself, in the passage above referred to, has remarked, that his Micryph. flavo-maculatus can hardly be suffered to remain within the ge- nus Micryphantes. WESTRING, BLACKWALL and OHLERT accordingly detach it therefrom: they reckon this spider as a Theridium. MENGE, on the other hand, and, I think, with reason, has formed for it a distinct genus, Zuryo- pis. To this genus he also assigns, though not without some doubt, Ther. triste HAHN, which seems to be by no means so happy an arrangement. We refer this species to Theridium sensu strictiori (Steatoda MENGE), although 1) Deser. de six Arachn. nouv., p. 356. 2) Note sur deux Araignées venim., p. 290. 3) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 644—646. 4) Studien ov. de z. g. Curagaosche Oranjespin, p. 65. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 97 it must be owned, that it deviates pretty considerably from the typical spe- cies of that genus. On the other hand Ther. letum WESTR. and Ther. acu- minatum LUCAS?) belong to Euryopis, as I place the limits of that genus (vid. p. 77). Of the last-named species, which was discovered by Lucas in Algeria, and which, as far as I am aware, has never yet been acknow- ledged as belonging to the fauna of Europe, I found several specimens, both 5 and 9, at Livorno (Leghorn) in the summer of 1853. In E. flavo-maculata (c?) the superior tarsal claws (of the 1" pair of legs) are large, rather strong, but not broad towards their base, uni- formly and almost semicircularly curved, with about 6 coarse, pointed comb- teeth, issuing from the side of the claw, from its base to the vicinity of its apex: their extremities form (together with that of the claw itself) an almost straight line; the inferior claw is small, coarse, with two small and very close-set, blunt teeth. The claw of the female's palpus is according to OHLERT ?) strong, with 5 straight long teeth. Gen. 18. ASAGENA Suwp. 1833. Deriv.: & priv.; oaynvn, net; "reti carens": SUND. Syn.: 1801. Phalangium PAxz., Faun. Ins. Germ., (ad part.:) 78, 21. 1805. Theridium Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 72 ("6* Fam. Les Cachées, Absconditæ " ad part.). 1832. Drassus SUND., Sv. Spindl. Beskr., in Vet.-Akad. Handl. f. 1831, p. 132 (ad partem). 1833. Asagena ID., Consp. Arachn., p. 19. 1856. Steatoda THor., Rec. crit., p. 108 (ad partem). 1861. Theridium Westr., Aran. Suec., p. 151 (ad partem). 1864. 5 Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 175 (ad partem). 1864. Asagena Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 162 (ad partem). 1867. - Onr., Aran. d. Prov. Preuss., p. 33, 41. 1869. H MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., III, p. 256. Type: Asagena phalerata (PANZ.). SUNDEVALL included this genus in his Drassides (Tubitelarie NOB.), among which analogous forms occur, e. g. the genus Titanaca NOB. among the Amaurobiine. By C. KocH it was first curiously enough aggregated to his " Agelenides” (Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 13), but afterwards rightly to the "'Theridides". — WESTRING, BLACKWALL and others suffer it to re- 1) Explor. de l'Algérie, Arachn., p. 268, Pl. 17, fig. 10. 2) Klauenbild. d. Preuss. Spinn., p. 9. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 13 98 T. THORELL, main among the species of WALCKENAERS Theridium. — SIMON classes as Asagenæ several spiders, which according to SUNDEVALL'S definition of this genus can in no wise belong to it. The claws of the typical species are strong. The superior tarsal claws are rather strongly curved, broader towards their base, pectinated, with (on the 1“ pair of legs) about 10 long, straight, parallel teeth from the base to near the extremity of the claw, which thus form a dense comb; the inferior claw has one very thick and blunt tooth and a fine point behind it. The female’s strong, much curved palpus-claw is in the same manner as the su- perior claws of the tarsus closely pectinated, with about 12 very long teeth pointing somewhat forward. * Gen. 19. PHOLCOMMA xx. Deriv.: Pholcus, generic name of spider (godxdc, squint-eyed); ouua, eye. Syn.: 1862. Theridion CamBr., Descr. of ten new spec. of Brit. spid., (ad part.:) p. 7962. Type: Pholcomma projectum (CAMBR.). I have not seen the species, on which I have founded this new ge- nus, but the excellent description given by CAMBRIDGE (loc. cit) leaves no doubt of its differing more from 7heridium sensu strict. than any of the spe- cies that have been removed from that and referred to newer genera. Caw- BRIDGE says himself: "The extreme dissimilarity in size between the two "centre eyes of the front row, and the rest, and their position, is a striking "characteristic of the species, and would almost warrant its separation from "the genus Theridion”. According to CAMBRIDGE, the two centre eyes of the front row are very minute, almost contiguous; on each side of these is a group of three almost contiguous eyes, in the form of an equilateral tri- angle. The eyes of these two groups are disproportionably large compared with the size of the spider. The male has a projecting ridge round the abdomen. "By the position of the eyes this species seems to be allied to "the genus Pholcus, though in general form and appearance it is much more "like the true Theridia” (CAMBR.). Fam. II. SCYTODOID E. Syn.: 1864. ”Scytodiformes” Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 43. As regards the proper place for the very peculiar spiders, that we bring together under this name, opinions have been, and süll are, very much divided. The types of the two sub-families, Pholcinæ and Scytodine , On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 99 into which we divide them, Pholcus Pluchii (Scop.) and Scytodes thoracica LATR., were referred by LATREILLE 18047), together with the spiders, for which WALCKENAER in the following year formed the genus Zheridium, to one and the same genus: Scytodes LATR., and even subsequently, after LA- TREILLE had acknowledged the genera Pholcus and Theridèum, which had been formed by WALCKENAER, he continued ?) to place Scytodes and Phol- cus beside each other in his family Znæquitelæ. — W ALCKENAER also at first gave them the same systematic position: Scytodes and Pholcus in his Tableau d. Aran. (p. 79, 80) immediately follow Linyphia and Theridium; but when he began to make the number of the eyes a basis for his classification of "les araignées” ?), he was obliged to separate Scytodes and Pholcus from each other: Scytodes (together with Rachus) is referred to a separate group, " Cellulicoles" or "Capteuses", which is placed between " Tubicoles” (Dysde- roide) and "Coureuses" ( Citigrade) within the division " Vagabondes", whereas Pholcus (like Artema) has a place in the group " Filiteles” among " Errantes" *). Both genera were removed far from the ”Retiteles”, which correspond to our Theridioide. WALCKENAER seems however to have perceived that that me- thod of classifying these spiders was quite artificial, for he himself says: "Le genre Scytode appartient encore plus particulièrement aux Théridions (i. e. than do Dysdera and Segestria to Clubiona and Tegenaria) . . . . et le genre Rack est un Pholque dont les yeux intermédiaires sont oblitérés " >). DucES, who, like LATREILLE, acknowledged the close relationship between Scytodes and Pholcus, united these genera, together with stata, Uroctea ( Clotho), Enyo, Laches (Lachesis) ) and Hersilia into one family, which he calls ”Scythodes”, also " Micrognathes" 7), on account of these spiders’ mandibles, which are usually small and united at the base. These ge- nera in fact show no small affinity with the Scytodoidæ, and this appears to be especially the case with Enyo, Uroctea and Filistata. The Scytodoidze agree with all these genera in having maxillæ closely encircling the lip; they particularly resemble Ænyo (and Hersilia) in their fine extremities, with the claw-joint of the tarsi distinctly separate; Uroctea in their mandibles 1) Nouv. Dict. d'Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 134. 2) For inst. in Cours d’Entom., p. 125. 3) Mém. s. une nouv. Classif. d. Aran., p. 438. 4) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 202; IV, p. 524, 525. 5) Ibid., IV, p. 522. 6) Concerning these names, vid. sup., p. 36, 37. 1) Observ. s. les Aran., p. 106. 100 T. THORELL, united towards the base; Filistata not only in this character, but also by having the lip and sternum coalesced. The Pholcine at least are particularly related to the Zheridioide in the construction of their webs: both WESTRING !) and BLACKWALL ?) accordingly refer Pholcus to their Theridüde; whereas the. Scytodine show a certain relationship with the Dysderoide (the nearest relations to Filistata) in the form of the male’s organ of copulation, to which may be added the identity in the number of eyes, which is probably what principally induced BLACKWALL to place Scytodes in immediate juxtaposition with that family ). Even C. KocH assigned Scytodes to the " Dysderides” 2), whereas he first 5) referred the Pholcine to his Drassides, and when he had for Pholcus formed the family Pholcides ©), he placed it next to the Drassides. DOLESCHALL refers Pholcus to his Tubicolæ *), which correspond most nearly with our Agalenoide, to which family also AUSSERER 5), as well as Ca- NESTRINI and PaAvESI?) affiliate that genus — for what reason, I am at a loss to understand. Lowosceles is by LOWE referred to the Laterigrade 1°). The nearest relations of the Scytodoide are however Filistatoide and Eny- oide (which last, on account of their elongated inferior spinners and free lip, we consider ought to form a separate family), and especially the 7Aeridioi- de. That they, together with the two last named families, belong to the sub-order Retitelarie, is evidenced by their whole appearance, especially their long, fine extremities, armed with three (in Lowosceles only, two) fine, slender claws. he pattern on the abdomen is often bright and lively, and depends in the Seytodoidz, as in the Retitelariæ generally, on the pigment of the skin itself, not on the usually thin covering of hair. As tolerably constant distinguishing features of this family we may also mention the slop- ing, more or less projecting, long clypeus, and the presence of a spine or tooth at the extremity of the mandible, opposite to the claw, indicating an approach to the two-fingered mandibles of the Opiliones or Phalangia. (Conf. Ducës, loc. cit.). In the spiders belonging to this family (of the genera Scytodes, 1) Aran. Suec., p. 296. 2) Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 207. 3) Loc. cit., p. 379. 4) Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 21. 5) Ibid., p. 20. 6) Ibid., 5, p. 31. 7) Syst. Verzeichn. d. in Oesterr. vork. Spinnen, p. 14. 8) Die Arachn. Tirols, I, p. 151. 9) Aran. Ital., p. 65. 10) Deser. of two spec. of spid., natives of Madeira, p. 321. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 101 Loxosceles and Pholcus) known to me, the female’s palpal claw is either more or less rudimentary or entirely absent. SIMON has lately united the spiders in question in one family, "Scy- todiformes", which appears to me perfectly natural and justifiable. (Conf. p. 33). The position he has given this family, which with him is the first, and is immediately followed by the ”Mygaliformes”, is however not the most appropriate, as may be seen from what has already been said. Like SIMON we divide the Scytodoidæ into two sub-families ("tribus": SIMON): 1. Phol- cine (” Phalangoïdiens” or ” Pholciens" SIM), 2. Scytodinæ (” Scytodiens” Sm.). We distinguish these sub-families and the few European genera which belong to them, as follows: I. Oeuli aut 8, aut 6, et tum tres in utroque latere frontis. (Palpi marium valde incrassati, elava complicata).. . . . . . . . J. PmHOELCINZX. 1. Oculi 8. Pedes omnium longissimi. . . . . . . . 1. Pholcus. Nen rA s o 66 c'e 6 c e Pb SNARARE Il. Oculi 6, in tria paria dispositi, duo in utroque latere frontis. (Palpi marium tenues, clava parum complieata. . . . . . . . . 1. Scyropina. 3. Cephalothorax postice alte eonvexus. Mandibule parvæ, debiles. Ungues LATS OTUTHISUDIDIBU Mee ELM rr NS ones: 4. Cephalothorax plus minus depressus. Mandibulæ fortiores. Ungues tar- SOLENS DIN NU Eu dp pen le) AST omo SCeles: Sub-fam. I. PHOLCINÆ. n yn.: 1850. Pholeides C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 31. Gen. 1. PHOLCUS Warck. 1805. Deriv.: godxoc, squint-eyed. Syn.: 1804. Seytodes Larr., im Nouv. Dict. d’Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 134 (ad part.). 1805. Pholeus Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 80 (ad part.). 1861. Bs Westr., Aran. Suec., p. 296. 1864. n" BLackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 207. 1865. - Sım., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 54. Type: Pholcus Pluchii (Scop.). 1) Not two only, as is erroneously stated in my paper: Om hanen af Scytodes thoracicus (On the male of Se. thor.), p. 199. 102 T. THORELL, In Ph. Pluchi the superior tarsal claws are large, weak, of equable curvature, pectinated, with about 8 long, pointed, somewhat curved teeth proceeding from the side of the claw; the inferior claw is tolerably large, long and fine, bent to a hook, curved somewhat outwards at the extremity, with 1 (2?) strong, pointed tooth bent inwards at the tip. The palpal claw in the female is rudimentary, and consists of a little conical, somewhat curved process, surrounded by fine, pointed bristles, of which the two outer- most are considerably stronger than the rest. * Gen. 2. SPERMOPHORA Hexrz. 1841. Deriv.: oxeguopooos, seminiferous (czrégue, seed; péow, bear). Syn.: 1836. Pholcus Ducis, Observ. s. les Aran., p. 160 (ad partem). 1841. Spermophora Hentz, Descr. of an Amer. Spid. ete., p. 116. 1847. Rachus Warck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., IV, p. 459. 1850. Oophora Hentz, Aran. of the United States, zm Bost. Journ. of Nat. Hist., VI, p. 285. 1864. Rachus Sm., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 52. Type: Spermophora meridionalis HENTZ. In the passage above referred to, DuGhs gave in 1836 a very scanty description of a remarkable spider found in the south of France, which he called Pholcus senoculatus, but which differed from other species of the ge- nus Pholcus by being destitute of both the centre eyes. This spider was also found in Algeria, and excellently described and figured in 1847 1) by Lv- CAS, who called it Pholcus quadri-punctatus. For this 6-eyed spider WALC- KENAER (loc. cit.) in 1847 formed a new genus, Rachus. But already in 1841 Hentz had proposed the name Spermophora for an approximate form (from Alabama), which name he subsequently changed to Oophora (vid. Syn.). The female of that species, Spermophora meridionalis HENTZ, carries with her the loosely conglutinated mass of eggs, holding it with her mandibles (as is also the case with the species composing the genus Pholcus), and this is no doubt what has led HEN1Z to give it the said generic names. HENTZ himself says of Spermophora or Oophora: ”'This sub-genus is very closely related to Pholcus. Nay, had it 8 eyes instead of 6, and were its legs much longer, it could not be separated from that sub-genus” 2). The whole 1) Explor. de l'Algér., Arachn., p. 239, Pl. XV, fig. 2. 2) Aran. of the United States, loc. cit., p. 285—286. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 103 appearance of the animal, the position of the eyes and the structure of the mandibles, are the same in Spermophora as in Rachus, as may be seen by a glance at the figures given by Lucas), Ducks?) and HENTZ?) Only the legs appear to be somewhat shorter in proportion in the American than in the European and North-African species. Even their industry and the form of their webs are the same. Generically they cannot possibly be se- parated, and, as the name Spermophora has the right of priority, it must be preferred to Rachus (and Oophora). — In a paper that has lately ap- peared 5), SIMON unites this genus with Pholcus, in spite of the difference in the number of eyes, a proceeding which I can by no means approve. Sub-fam. IL SCYTODINE. Syn.: 1864 Seytodide Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 379. Gen. 3. SCYTODES Larr. (1804). Deriv.: oxvrwdns, resembling leather (cxtroc, leather, hide; &ödos, appearance). Syn.: 1804. Scytodes Latr., in Nouv. Dict. d'Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 134 (ad partem). 1805. 3 Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 79. 1864. N BLACKW., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 379. 1864. 5 [Seytoda] Srw., H. N. d. Araignees, p. 45. Type: Scytodes thoracica LATR. This genus, whieh, as we have above mentioned, originally included also WALCKENAR'S Pholcus and Theridium, was reduced by WALCKENAER loc. cit. so as only to comprise the species that typified the genus, S. tho- racica LATR. WALCKENAER afterwards enlarged it again so, that according to his characteristics, it corresponded with the whole of our sub-family Scy- todine. We take it in the compass first assigned to it by WALCKENAER, and also adopted by Simon, namely, as answering to the "1" Fam., les Gibbeuses, Gibbose” of Scytodes WALCK. in H. N. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 270. The superior tarsal claws are large, weak, equably curved, with about 6 or 7 long, strong saw-teeth, proceeding from one side of the 1) Loe. cit. 2) Cuvier, Règne anim., 3° Éd., Arachn., Atlas, Pl. 9, fig. 7. 3) Aran. of the United States, loc. cit., Pl. X, fig. 5. 4) Monogr. d. espèces europ. du genre Pholeus, p. 119. 104 T. THORELL, claw; the inferior claw is very small, and without teeth (in the next genus it disappears altogether). The female’s palpi are destitute of a claw, but have instead three coarse bristles, slightly curved towards the extremity, and thickened like a button at tip, which internally disclose a canal terminating in a blind, rounded enlargement in the button. These bristles are surrounded by numerous pointed bristles of the ordinary form. This all applies to S. thoracica. In an exotic species (from Caffraria) I have counted 5 such- like bristles dilated in the form of a button. Gen. 4. LOXOSCELES Hern. et Lowe. 1831. Deriv.: Ao&os, oblique; oxéloc, leg. Syn.: 1820. Scytodes Durour, Descr. de cinq Arachn. nouv., p. 202 (ad partem). 1831. Loxosceles Lown, Descr. of two spec. of Aran., p. 321. 1833. Omosites Warck., Mém. s. une nouv. Classif. d. Aran., p. 438. 1837. Scytodes 1p., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 270 (ad part.: "2* Fam. Les Dépri- mées, Depressæ”). 1864. Omosites [Omosita] Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 50. Type: JLowosceles citigrada HEIN. et LOWE. The genus Lowosceles, which was formed by (HEINEKEN and) LOWE in 1831 at the above mentioned place, is identical with Omosites, proposed by WALCKENAER in 1833 for Scytodes rufescens Dur. (loc. cit), though WALCKENAER himself afterwards united it with Scytodes, as a "family" be- longing to that genus. I however agree with SIMON in considering Omosi- tes or Loæosceles as a group sufficiently characterized to deserve being pre- served as an independent genus. In its appearance it bears a certain re- semblance to some Philodromine, and was therefore by Lowe considered as belonging to the Laterigrade ?). The species of Lowosceles, which I have had the opportunity of examining, differ from all other Retitelarie, with which I am acquainted, in having only two claws on the tarsi. These claws are long and slender, strongly and regularly curved almost into a semicircle. In an Egyptian species I have found them provided with about 12 very pointed comb-teeth, the points of which lie in an almost straight line; in a specimen of L. rufescens (Dur), from Spain, kindly sent to me by Mr. Simon, I have found only 8 such teeth. On the other pairs of legs the 1) ”Citissime currit. Quietus pedes omnes oblique in libella horizontali extendit. Telam prædæ nec jacit nec ullam nisi fila quzdam struit", says Lowe loe. cit. of Low. citigrada. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 105 number of teeth is less. The female has no palpal claw, but a little coni- cal process instead. The claw-joint of the tarsi is shorter and slenderer than in Scytodes and Pholcus. Fam. III. ENYOIDÆ. The species of this little family have been generally placed in close connexion with the following family, the Urocteoide, and have, together with them, sometimes been considered as KRetitelarie, and sometimes as Tubitela- rie. SUNDEVALL however included Ænyo among his Theridides, while he united Uroctea with his Drassides"). Together with Uroctea, they were referred to the Retitelarie or Inequitele by e. g. SAVIGNY and AUDOUIN ?), SIMON ?) and C. Koch *), who however had at first 5) given both Ænyo and Uroctea a place among his Drassides; by LATREILLE 5), LUCAS 7) and others both Enyo and Uroctea are placed among genera belonging to our Tubite- lariæ. WALCKENAER, who at first 5) referred these two genera to his ” Fi- liteles”, a group consisting exclusively of Retitelarie, afterwards °) united all the forms known to him of Znyoide and Urocteoide in the genus Clotho, which subsequently took its place in the group ” Miditèles” 1°), which answers nearest to our Drassoide; but he soon 1) detached from it one of the three families (” Uroctées”, ”Enyo” and "Zodarions"), into which he had divided the genus, namely "les Zodarions”, and aggregated it to the Theridioid genus Argus (= .Erigone + Walckenaera). Enyo and Uroctea were by DUGES 1?) united with the Scytodoidæ and some others in his family ” Scythodés” or ” Micrognathes”, as we have already (p. 99) mentioned. Simon forms for them a separate "tribus", " Clothéiens", of the family " Theridiformes” (loc. cit.). Although the Enyoidæ show a more or less striking resemblance with almost every one of the various groups of spiders, to which they have thus been referred, nevertheless they ought not in my opinion to be united with any of them. Among the Zubitelarie it is only the Urocteoide and Filistatoide, with which they can be shown to have any intimate connexion, 1) Consp. Arachn., p. 17, 18. 2) Deser. de l'Égypte, (2 Edit.) XXII, p. 341—222. 3) Hist. Nat. d. Araignées, p. 152. 4) Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 23, 24, 5 Jub. 35 95 LOR 20: 6) Gen. Crust. et Ins., IV, p. 370. 7) Explor. de l'Algérie, Arachn., p. 230. 8) Mém. s. une nouv. Classif. d. Aran., p. 438; Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 202. 9) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 635. 10) Ibid., II, p. 512; IV, p. 526. 11) Ibid., II, p. 347. 12) Observ. s. les Aran., p. 160. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc, Ups. Ser. III. 14 106 T. THORELL, and I think it is only the relationship, in which they have been placed to the Urocteoidæ, that has caused them to be foisted, as a sort of appendage to these latter, into the sub-order Tubitelariæ. The characteristic features (the structure of the mandibles), which they have in common with the Fili- statoide and Urocteoide, belong equally to the Scytodoidæ. Their entire ap- pearance, especially the long, fine extremities, indicate beyond all doubt their place to be among the Retitelarie, and of these the Scytodoide must be considered as nearest akin to them. As in the Scytodoide, the tarsus is augmented with a little separate claw-joint, and even in the structure of the mouth they seem to approach nearest to the Scytodoide, though the lip is separated by a suture from the sternum, as in the Theridioidæ. With the Urocteoide, in spite of the considerable difference in their general appearance, they show several striking points of contact, not only in the similar position of the eyes, and in the mandibles being connected towards the base and having a very small claw (as is also the case with most Scy- todoide and Filistatoide), but even in the structure of the female’s palpi, which are thickened towards the extremity, and armed with a powerful, pecti- nated claw. The eyes are 8 in number, arranged in two transverse rows, of which the posterior row is strongly curved forwards, so much so that the eyes may also be said to form three rows. | But the Enyoidz differ from the Urocteoide and all the Retitelariæ, and indeed, as far as I know, from all other spiders, in the structure of their spinners. Seen in profile, these organs display a considerable resem- blance to those of the Urocteoidæ, for we first remark a pair of long spin- ners, which appear to consist of a short basal joint, from which the remaining part of the spinner issues in the form of a compressed longer joint, somewhat tapering towards the extremity. But whereas in the Urocteoidæ the superior (posterior) pair of spinners are the longest, in the Hnyotde the inferior pair are incomparably larger than the others. Moreover in the Enyoidæ — at least in the species, Enyo greca C. KocH, which I have had the opportu- nity of examining — the basal part of the inferior spinners is common to them both: seen from beneath it is almost inversely heart-shaped, rounded off in front and cut transversely behind, with an incision in the edge, on both sides of which the two real spinners are inserted. Thus seen, they lie in tolerably close juxtaposition, are about as long as the basal piece, but taken together narrower than this, about double as long as broad at the base, and tapering a little towards the extremity. The basal piece must be con- sidered as a part of the abdomen, as it has not divided itself into two se- parate basal joints for the spinners. The spinner itself is directed slightly upward, as in Uroctea, and appears to consist of two joints, of which the On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 107 second is very short, and terminates in a flat surface, bearing the rather few and very short spinning-tubes, which open each through a slightly curved, cylindrical spinning-bristle. — As regards the superior and inter- mediary spinners, they are very small and difficult to observe. I believe however that I have found them somewhat above the larger spinners, which are situated at the extremity of the abdomen, in the shape of four pale eylindrical nipples, with a few spinning-tubes in their apices. To this family we reckon two European genera, Zodarium and Enyo. Of these genera, Zodarium corresponds to the "Race Zodarionides” of WALCKENAER'S Argus, Enyo to the "Famille Enyo” of Clotho WALCK. By SAVIGNY and AUDOUIN, C. KocH, SIMON and others they are considered — perhaps rightly — as constituting but one genus, Ænyo. We distinguish them in the following manner: 1. Series oculorum anticorum procurva.. . . . . . . . . 1. Zodarium. 2. Series oeulorum anticorum sub-recta. . . . . . . . . . 2. Enyo. Among exotic genera, Laches NOB. (Lachesis SAv. et AUD.) and Sto- rena WALCK. perhaps belong to the Enyoidæ: the former genus has, ac- cording to AUDOUIN 5, the latter, according to CAMBRIDGE ?), the inferior spinners longer than the superior, and three claws on the tarsi. Gen. 1. ZODARIUM Warck. 1847. Deriv.: Cwdcecor, little animal. Syn.: 1825—27. Enyo Sav. et Aup., Descr. de l'Égypte, (Éd. 2:) XXII, p. 349 (ad partem). +1837 Lucia C. Koch, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 19 (ad partem) °). +1837. Clotho Warck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 635 (ad part.: "3* Fam., Les Zo- darions, Zodariones”). 11841. Argus ID., ibid., II, p. 344 (ad part.: "1* Fam., 2° Race, Les Zodarionides "). 1847. Zodarium [Zodarion] ID., ibid., IV, p. 563. 1864. Enyo Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 159 (ad partem). Type: Zodarium longipes (SAV. et AUD.). In the ” Description de l'Égypte” loc. eit., under Genus Enyo, we find: "M. WALCKENAER vient d'établir ce genre sous le nom de Zodarion. I lui trouve plusieurs points de ressemblance avec les théridions, et il le place entre ceux-ci et les drasses.” It would seem from this, that the name Zo- darium is older than Ænyo; AUDOUIN does not however indicate the source, 1) Deser. de l'Égypte, (Edit. 2:) XXII, p. 309. 2) Deser. and sketches of some new species of Aran. etc., p. 2 et seq. 3) Lucia SWAINS. [Lepidopt.] 1835. 108 T. THORELL, from which he took his information, and in any work of WALCKENAER pub- lished previous to 1837, I have not found "Zodarion" mentioned. As far as I am aware, WALCKENAER speaks for the first time of any spider of this genus in his Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., Vol. I; and he seems not to have considered his ” Zodarions” or ” Zodarionides” as forming a distinct genus till in 1847. (Conf. Syn.). I have at Nizza met with a female specimen of a Zodariwm, which seems to be identical with Ænyo greca C. Kocu. Perhaps it is also the same as Æ. longipes SAV. et AUD., and as E. occitanica DuGES; but if such be the case, the species must vary considerably in colour. In Z. grecum the free claw-joint is large and easily seen, much as in Scytodes; the superior tarsal claws are weak, strongly curved, saw-toothed, with about 6 large teeth proceeding from the outer side of the claw; the inferior claw is very small, without teeth. The female’s palpal claw is strongly and uniformly curved, and from the base nearly to the tip armed with about 10 straight, parallel, vertical comb-teeth, the points of which are situated in a slightly curved, nearly straight line: the teeth are accord- ingly longest in the middle of the claw and shorter towards its extremity and base. They are not inserted in the middle line of the claw, but on one side. The claw is surrounded by numerous hairy, pointed bristles. * Gen. 2. ENYO (Sav. et Aup.). 1825—1827. Deriv.: 'Evvó, mythol. proper name. i Syn.: 1825—27. Enyo Sav. et Aup., Descr. d. l'Égypte, (Ed. 2:) XXII, p. 349 (ad partem). +1837. Lucia C. Kocx, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., I, p. 19 (ad partem). +1837. Clotho Warck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 635 (ad part.: "2* Fam. Les Enyo”). 1864. Enyo Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 159 (ad partem). Type: Enyo nitida Sav. et AUD. I have seen no species of this genus. Ænyo germanica C. KocH (which is supposed by WALCKENAER to be the same as E. nitida Sav. et AUD.), and Æ, italica CANESTR. are the only European species of the genus as yet known. E. amaranthina Luc., which Lucas only provisionally united with Finyo *), and for which WALCKENAER formed the family "les Incertaines” of his genus Clotho ?, appears to differ in highly important features both from Zodarium and Enyo, and ought in my opinion to be made the type of a separate genus. 1) Explor. d. l'Algérie, Arachn., p. 232. 2) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., IV, p. 454. LITERATURE». 1842—46. Acassız L., Nomenclator zoologieus, continens nomina systematica gene- rum animalium tam viventium quam fossilium, secundum ordinem alpha- beticum disposita, adjectis auctoribus, libris, in quibus reperiuntur, anno editionis, etymologia et familiis, ad quas pertinent, in singulis classibus. Soloduri 1842—1846. — Arachnidæ. Recognovit Guim. F. ERICHSON. + 1736. ALBIN, E., A natural history of spiders and other curious insects. London 1736. + 1840. |Amary, A.], Statistica fisica ed economica dell’ isola di Capri. (Esercitazioni dell’ Academia degli aspiranti naturalisti, Vol. II, Part. 1. Napoli 1840). AUDOUIN, V., in Diet. class., Vid. Dictionnaire classique d'Hist. Nat. —ID.— (SAVIGNY and), Vid. Description de l'Égypte. 1833. —1p.— Observations sur la structure du nid de l'araignée pionniére. (An- nales de la Société Entomologique de France, T. II) — [Also separate with the ttle: Observations sur le nid d’une araignée, construit en terre, et remarquable par une grande perfection de travail]. 1867. AUSSERER, A, Die Arachniden Tirols nach ihrer horizontalen und vertica- len Verbreitung. I. (Verhandlungen der zoologisch-botanischen Gesellschaft in Wien, Bd XVII, 1867). [1867. —1p.—, Beobachtungen über Lebensweise, Fortpflanzung und Entwickelung der Spinnen. (Zeitschrift des Ferdinandeums, 3 Folge, Hft. XIII)]. 1839. BARKER-WeEBB, PH., and BERTHELOT, S., Histoire Naturelle des Iles Canaries. 3 Tomes. Paris 1835—49. [Tom. II. 2. Entomologie: Arachnides, Myriapodes et Thysanoures, par H. Lvcas]. * 1789. BECHSTEIN, J. M., Ueber den wahren Ursprung des fliegenden Sommers. (LICHTENBERG and VoIGT, Magaz. für das Neueste aus der Physik und Naturgeschichte, Bd. VI). BERTHELOT, S., Vid. BARKER-WEBB. BERTHOLD, A. A., Vid. LATREILLE, Nat. Fam. d. Thierreichs. 1) Vid. pag. 19. — The complete titles of most of the periodicals here referred to, may be scen in e. g. Carus and Encermann, Bibliotheca Zoologica. 2 Voll. Leipzig 1861. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 1 1845. 1844—54. 1851—52. T. THORELL, BLACKWALL, J., Description of a species of Arachnida hitherto uncharacte- rized, belonging to the Araneidæ (London and Edinburg Philosophical Magazine, New [3th] Ser., Vol. I.) —ID.— Notice of several recent discoveries in the structure and economy of spiders. (Transactions of the Linnean Society, Vol. XVI)|. —ID.— Characters of some undescribed genera and species of Araneidee. (Lond. and Edinb. Phil. Mag., N. [3th] Ser., Vol. ID. —I1D.— Researches in Zoology. London 1834. —-ID.— Characters of some undescribed species of Araneidz. (Lond. and Edinb. Phil. Mag., N. [3th] Ser., Voll. V, VIII). —ID.— Characters of a new genus and some undescribed species of Ara- neidee. (ibid., Vol. X). —ID.— On the number and structure of the mammulæ employed by spi- ders in the process of spinning. (Transact. of the Linn. Soc., Vol. XVIII, P. II]. - —ID.— The difference in the number of eyes with which spiders are pro- vided, proposed as the basis of their distribution into tribes; with deserip- tions of newly discovered species, and the characters of a new family and three new genera of spiders. (ibid., Vol. XVIII, Part. IV; (1841); JExtr. in Proceedings of the Linn. Soc., Vol. I, N:o 8 (1840)). —ID.— A catalogue of spiders either not previously recorded or little known as indigenous to Great Dritain, with remarks on their habits and economy. (ibid., Vol. XIX, Part. II (1843); Æwtr. in Proceed. of the Linn. Soe., Vol. I, and in Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Vol. X). —ID— Descriptions of some newly discovered species of Araneidea. (Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist, Voll. XIII (1844), XVIII (1846); 2 Ser., Voll. X (1852), XI (1853), XIII (1854). —ID.— Notice of spiders captured by Professor Potter in Canada, with deserip- tions of such species as appear to be new to science. (ibid., Vol. XVII). —ID.— Descriptions of some newly discovered species and characters of a new genus of Araneidea. (ibid., 2 Ser. Vol. VI). —ID.— A eatalogue of British spiders, including remarks on their struc- ture, functions, economy and systematic arrangement. (ibid., 2 Ser., Voll. VII, VIII (1851), IX, X (1852)). 1853, 54, 57. —ın.— Supplement to a catalogue of British spiders, including remarks on their structure, functions, economy and systematic arrangement. (ibid., 2 Ser., Voll. XI (1853), XIV (1854), XX (1851)). —1p— Decriptions of two newly discovered species of Araneidea. (ibid., 2 Ser., Vol. XVI). —1p.— Descriptions of three newly discovered species of Araneidea. (ibid. 2 Ser., Vol. XVID. 1861, 64. 1861. 1862. 1862—63. 1863. 1864. 1864. 1864. 1865. 1865. 1867. 1867. 1868. On EUROPAN SPIDERS. III —ID.— Descriptions of the male of Lycosa tarentuloides Maderiana Walck. and of three newly discovered species of the genus Lycosa. (ibid., 2 Ser.» Vol. XX). BLACKWALL, J., Descriptions of six newly discovered species and charac- ters of a new genus of Araneidea (ibid., 3 Ser., Vol. I). —r1p.— Characters of a new genus and descriptions of three recently discovered species of Araneidea. (zbzd., 3 Ser,, Vol. IT). —i1p.— Descriptions of six recently discovered species, and characters of a new genus of Araneidea. (ibid., 3 Ser., Vol. III). —i1p.— Descriptions of newly discovered spiders captured by James Yate Johnson Esq., in the island of Madeira. (¢bid., 3 Ser., Vol. IV). —ip.— A history of the spiders of Great Britain and Ireland. 2 Parts, London 1861, 1864. —iIp.— Descriptions of several recently discovered spiders. (Ann. and Mag. Of Nat klistra Ser WO VII: —ip.— Descriptions of newly discovered spiders from the island of Madeira. (ibid., 3 Ser., Vol. IX). —1p.— Descriptions of newly discovered spiders captured in Rio Janeiro by John Gray and Hamlet Clark. (idid., 3 Ser., Voll. X, XI). —JID.— Notice of a Drassus and Linyphia new to science, and a Neriene hitherto unrecorded as British. (ibid., 3 Ser., Vol. XII). —ID— Notice of the capture of Mithras paradoxus in England (ibid., 3 Ser., Vol. XIII). —1p.— Descriptions of seven new species of East-Indian spiders received from the Rev. ©. Cambridge. (tbid., 3 Ser., Vol. XIV). —1p.— Notice of spiders indigenous to the Salvages received from the Barao do Castello de Paiva. (ibid.). —1p.— Descriptions of recently discovered spiders collected in the Cape de Ver- de Islands by John Gray Esq. (ibid., 3 Ser., Vol. XVI). —1p.— Descriptions of recently discovered species, and characters of a new ge- nus of Araneidea from the East of Central Africa. (@bid., 3 Ser., Vol. XVI). —rp.— A list of spiders captured in the south-east region of Equatorial Africa; with descriptions of such species as appear to be new to arachnologists. (bid., 3 Ser., Vol. XVIII). —ID.— Notes on spiders, with descriptions of several species supposed to be new to arachnologists (ibid., 3 Ser., Vol XX). —ID.— Notice of several species of spiders supposed to be new or little known to araehnologists. (zbid., 4 Ser., Vol. IT). BóckH (BókH), G., Ueber die Spinnen der Umgebung Presburgs (Verhand- lungen des Vereins für Naturkunde zu Presburg, Jahrg. II, 1857. Hft. 2). —1p— Vorläufige Uebersicht der während der Reise der K. K. Fregatte Novara von den Herren Naturforschern gesammelten Spinnen. (Verhandl. d. zool.-bot. Ge- sellsch. in Wien, Bd XI, 1861). —ID.— (FRAUENFELDT, G. v., and) Ueber unterirdisch lebenden Spinnen und Fische. (ibid., Bd XII, 1862. Sitzungsbericht). 1827. 1869. 1867. 1868. * 1868. T. THORELL, BRANDT and RATZEBURG, Medizin. Zool., Vid. RATZEBURG. BnÉBIssON, L. A. DE, Catalogue des Arachnides, des Myriapodes et des Insectes-Aptéres que l'on trouve dans le département du Calvados; d’après la méthode de M. Latreille. (Mémoires de la Société Linnéenne de Nor- mandie, 1826—1827). Bruchstücke zu einer Fauna der Berberei, Vid.: WAGNER, Reisen ete. BRULLÉ, A., Insectes de Morée, Vid. Expédition scient. de Morée. BULLMAN, J. C., Ueber die Natur und Entstehung des fliegenden Sommers. (Neue Schriften der Naturforschenden Gesellschaft zu Halle, Hft. 5)]. CAMBRIDGE, O. PICKARD-, Remarks on Arachnida taken chiefly in Dorset- shire and Hampshire, with list of 134 species. (Zoologist, 1859). —ID.— Supplement to a note on the Arachnida of Dorset and Hants. in Zool. 6493. (ibid. 1860). —ID.— A list of Southport spiders, with some remarks on uniformity of use and meaning of words in natural history; with list of 80 species of spiders. (ibid.). —1p.— Descriptions of two British spiders new to science (Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 9 Ser., Vol. V). —1p.— Notes on spiders captured in 1860; with list of species containing 56 additions to former lists of British spiders. (Zoologist, 1861). —ID.— Descriptions of ten new species of spiders recently discovered in England. (Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 3 Ser., Vol. VIL). —ID.— List of new and rare spiders captured in 1861; being a supple- ment to the lists in Zool. 6493, 6862, 7553. (Zoologist, 1862). —ID.— Descriptions of ten new species of British spiders. (ibid.). —ID.— Sketch of an arachnological tour in Scotland in 1861; with a list of Scotch spiders. (ibid.). —ID.— Descriptions of twenty four new species of spiders lately discover- ed in Dorsetshire and Hampshire; together with a list of rare, and some other hitherto unrecorded British spiders. (ibid., 1863). —1p.— Descriptions of a new genus and six new species of spiders. (The Linnean Society’s Journal, Zool., Vol. X). —ip.— Descriptions and sketches of some new species of Araneidea, with cha- racters of a new genus. (Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 4 Ser., Vol. III). CANESTRINI, GIov., Intorno agli Aracnidi dell’ ordine Araneina osservati nel Veneto e nel Trentino. (Commentario della Fauna, Flora e Gea nel Veneto e nel Trentino, Fase. 2). —1p.— Nuovi Araenidi Italiani. (Annuario della Società dei Naturalisti in Modena, Anno III). —1p.— Nuove specie Italiane di animali: II. Nuovi Aracnidi. (Comm. d. Fauna, Flora e Gea, Fase. 4). * 1843. * 1804. 1841. 1835. 1855. * 1843. 1817. 1829. 1856. #1787. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. V CANESTRINI, Grov., Enumerazione degli Araenidi dell ordine Araneina osservati nel Veneto. (ibid.). —ID.— and PAVESI, P., Araneidi Italiani. (Atti della Società Italiana di Scienze Naturali, Vol. XI, Fase. III. 1868). Also separate: Modena 1869. Cantor, Tu., General features of Chusan, with remarks on the Flora and Fauna of that island. (Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., Vol. IX). CEDERHIELM, J., Faunæ Ingricæ Prodromus, exhibens methodicam de- scriptionem insectorum agri Petropolensis, præmissa mammalium, avium, amphibiorum et piscium enumeratione. Lipsiæ 1789. CIRILLO, Vid. CYRILLUS. CLARK, H., Notice and description of a new species of spider. (Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 2 Ser., Vol. XVI). CLERCK, C., Svenska spindlar, uti sina hufvud-slägter indelte samt under några och sextio särskildte arter beskrifne och med illuminerade figurer upplyste. Aranei suecici, descriptionibus et figuris æneis illustrati, ad ge- nera subalterna redacti, speciebus ultra LX determinati. Stockholmiz 1757. CONTARINI, N., Cataloghi degli uecelli e degli insetti delle provineie di Padova e di Venezia. Bassano 1845. —ID.—, Vid. Venezia e le sue lagune. CoQUEBERT DE MONBRET, A. J., Illustratio iconographiea inseetorum. Dec. I, Fase. 3. Paris 1799, 1802, 1804. [Fase. III]. CosTA, A., Sur les travaux entomologiques de l'académie des aspirants naturalistes de Naples. (Ann. de la Soc. Ent. de France., T. X, Bulletins). Costa, O. G. and A., Fauna del Regno di Napoli. Napoli 1829— 566. Araenidi [by O. G. Costa; also under the title: Monografia degli Araenidi del Regno di Napoli. — This part of the work has not been continued]. Costa, O. G., Cenni zoologici, ossia descripzione sommaria delle specie nuove di animali discoperti in diverse contrade del Regno nell’ anno 1834. (Also under the title: Annuario zoologico 1834). Napoli 1834. Cremona e la sua provincia. Cremona 1843. Cuvier, G., Le Règne Animal, distribué d’après son organisation, pour servir de base à l'histoire naturelle des animaux et d'introduction à l'ana- tomie comparée. 3 Voll. [Tome III, Contenant les Crustacées, les Arach- nides et les Insectes, par M. LATREILLE. Paris 1817]. Idem liber: Nouv. [2:de] Ed. 5 Voll. [Tome IV: Crustacés, Arachnides et partie des Insectes, par P. A. LATREILLE. Paris 1829. — Voll. IV and V also with the title: Les Crustacées, les Arachnides et les Insectes distribués en familles naturelles, par P. A. LATREILLE. 2 Voll.]. Idem liber: [3:me] Édition accompagnée de Planches gravées ..... par une réunion de disciples de Cuvier. [Tome VII:] Les Arachnides. Avec un Atlas, par M. A. DuGEs et M. MILNE-EDWARDs. Paris. CYRILLUS [CırıLLo], D., Entomologiæ Neapolitane specimen I. Neapoli 1787. VI T. THORELL, 1826. Darwaw, J. W., Årsberättelse om nyare zoologiska arbeten och upptäckter, till Kongl. Vetenskaps-Academien afgifven d. 31 Mars 1826. Stockholm 1826. [1840. Darwin, Cu., Journal of researches into the geology and natural history of the various countries visited by H. M. S. Beagle under the command of Captain Fitz Roy, R. N. from 1832 to 1836. London 1840]. 1778. DE GEER, CH., Mémoires pour servir à l'histoire des Insectes. (7 Voll. en 8 Tomes). Stockholm 1772—1778. [Tome VIIJ. —ID.— Genera et species Insectorum, Vid.: RETZIUS, A. J. #182..') Description de l'Égypte (10 Voll de texte, 10 Voll. de planches in folio. Paris 1809—13). Histoire naturelle. Zoologie (2 Voll de texte, 2 Voll. de planches): Arachnides. Planches par J. C. DE SAVIGNY. [Tome II]. 1897. Idem liber: 9:de Édition, (24 Tom. en 26 Voll. de texte in 8:0, 12 Voll. de planches in folio). Histoire Naturelle. Zoologie: Arachnides. Planches par J. €. DE Savieny, Texte (Explication sommaire des Planches des Arachnides de l'Égypte et de la Syrie publiées par Jules César de Savigny etc.) par V. Aupouin. [T. XXII]. 1822—31. Dictionnaire classique d’histoire naturelle, par M. M. Audouin, Bourdon, Brongniart, De Candolle, Daudebard de Férussae, Deshayes, Desmoulins, Drapiez, Dumas, Edwards, Flourens, Geoffroy de Saint-Hilaire, Guérin, Guillemin, A. de Jussieu, Kunth, De Lafosse, Lamouroux, Latreille, Lucas, Prévost, Richard et BoRY DE SAINT-VINCENT. Ouvrage dirigé par ce dernier collaborateur et dans lequel on a ajouté, pour le porter au ni- veau de la science, un grand nombre de mots qui n'avaient pu faire partie de la plupart des Dictionnaires antérieurs. 17 Voll. Accompagnés d'un atlas de 160 Planches. Paris 1822—31. [Articles on spiders by V. AUDOUIN]. 1802—1804. Dictionnaire, Nouveau, d'histoire naturelle appliquée aux arts, princi- palement à l’agriculture et à l'économie rurale et domestique: par une so- ciété de naturalistes et d'agrieulteurs. 24 Voll. Paris 1802—1804. [Art. Araignée and Mygale, and Tableau méthodique des Insectes (in Vol. XXIV) by LATREILLE]. *1816—19. Jdem liber: 2:de Édition. 36 Voll. Paris 1816—19. [Art. on spiders by LATREILLE]. *1833—39. Dictionnaire pittoresque d'histoire naturelle et des phenomenes de la nature, par une société de naturalistes sous la direction de E. GUERIN- MENEVILLE. 9 Voll. Paris 1833—36. *1840—48. Dictionnaire universel d'histoire naturelle, résumant et complétant tous les faits présentés par les encyclopédies, les anciens dictionnaires scienti- fiques, les oeuvres complètes de Buffon, de Lacépède, de Cuvier, et par les meilleurs traités speciaux sur les diverses branches des sciences natu- relles etc. — Ouvrage dirigé par CH. D’ORBIGNY. [Articles on spiders by H. Lucas]. 13 Voll. et un Atlas de 288 Planches. Paris 1840—1848. [A new Edition is in the press]. 1) Not earlier than 1825. 1858. 1861. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. VII DigrrENBACH, E., Travels in New Zealand, with contributions to the Geology, Botany ete. 2 Voll. London 1843. [Arachn. by Wurm]. DOBLIRKA, K., Beitrag zur Monographie des Spinnengeschlechtes Dysdera. (Verhandl. d. zool.-bot. Gesellseh. in Wien, Bd III, 1853). DOLESCHALL, L., Systematiches Verzeichniss der im Kaiserthum Oester- reich vorkommenden Spinnen. (Sitzungsberichte d. Mathem.-Naturwissensch. Classe d. Kais. Akademie d. Wissenschaften zu Wien, Bd IX, 1852. [A/so separate]. —r1.— Bijdrage tot de Kennis der Arachniden van den Indischen Archipel. (Na- tuurkundig Tijdschrift voor Nederlandsch Indie, Deel XIII (3 Ser., D. III)). —1D.— Tweede Bijdrage tot de Kennis der Arachniden van den Indischen Archi- pel. (Acta Societatis Scientiarum Indo-Neerlandiæ, Vol. V). DomTHES, Observations on the structure and ceconomy of some curious species of Aranea. (Transact. of the Linn. Soc., Vol. II). Doumerct, A., Descriptions de deux Aranéides des genres Thomise et Épeire du Sénégal. (Ann. de la Soc. Entom. de France, 4 Sér., T. IV). DUFOUR, LEON, Description de six Arachnides nouvelles. (Annales géné- rales des Sciences physiques, Vol. IV). —ID.— Observations sur quelques Arachnides quadripulmonaires. (ibid., ole Wp): —1p.— Description de cinq Arachnides nouvelles. (ibid.). —JID.— Observations générales sur les Arachnides et description de quel- ques especes nouvelles ou peu connues. (ibid., Vol. VI). —1p.— Descriptions et figures de quelques Arachnides. (Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Tome II). —1p.— Descriptions et figures de quelques Aranéides nouvelles ou mal connues; et procédé pour conserver à sec ces invertébrés dans les collec- tions. (ibid., T. XXII). —ID.— Observations sur la Tarentule (Lycosa tarantula), avec la figure de cette aranéide. (ibid., 2 Sér., Zool., T. IT). —1.— Description et figure d'une nouvelle espèce d'Épeire. (ibid.). —ID.— Observations sur la Filistata bicolor. (Ann. de la Soc. Entom. de Drama, 405 WE —1p.— Sur la Mierommata spongitarsis. (ibid., 2 Sér., T. X, Bull). —1p.— Description de deux nouvelles espèces d’Aranéides. I. Épeira tho- misoides, nouvelle espèce. II. Sur une nouvelle espèce de Théridion, et note sur le Theridion dispar. (ibid., 3 Sér., T. III). —ip.— Sur le Drassus segestriformes. (ibid., 3 Sér., T. VI). —ID.— Notices Entomologiques. I. Sur l'Épeira sericea et le Pompilus cro- ceicornis, avec quelques considérations sur leur habitat géographique. (ibid., 4 Sie dis 1D. VIII 1834. 1815 (?). 1830. 1841. =D oc T. THORELL, Ducës, A., Recherches sur l'ordre des Acariens en général et la famille des Trombidiés en particulier. (Ann. d. Sciences Nat., 2 Sér., Zool., Vol. I). —ID.— Sur les organes de la respiration dans les Aranéides Ségestria et Dysdera. (Ann. de la Soc. Ent. de France, T. IV, Bull.)]. —ID.— Observations sur les Aranéides. (Ann. d. Sciences Nat., 2 Sér., Vol. VI). —ID.— [and MILNE-EDWARDS], Arachnides du Règne Animal de Cuvier, Atlas, Vid. Cuvier, G., Le Règne Animal, [3:me] Éd. Edinburg Cyclopedia, The, conducted by D. BREWSTER. Vol. VII. [Article Crustaceology by W. E. LEACH]. EICHWALD, E., Zoologia specialis, quam expositis animalibus tum vivis, tum fossilibus potissimum Rossiz in universum, et Polonie in specie, in usum leetionum publicarum in universitate cæsarea Vilnensi habendarum edidit. 2 Voll Vilna 1830. [T. II. —ID.— Fauna Caspio-Caueasia, nonnullis observationibus novis illustra- vit. Petropoli 1841. (Nouveaux Mémoires de la Société Impériale des Naturalistes de Moscou, T. VII). EISEN, G., and STUXBERG, A., Bidrag till kännedomen om Gotska Sandön. (Ofversigt af Kongl. Vetenskaps-Akademiens Férhandlingar, Argáng. XXV, 1868. [Arachn. determ. by T. THORELL]. Encyclopedia Britannica. 4'", 5' and 6 Editions. Supplement [Article Annulosa by W. E. LEACH]. 1789, 1811. Encyclopédie méthodique ou par ordre de matières; par une société de 1868. 1845—49. gens de lettres, de savans et d'artistes. Histoire Naturelle (10 Tomes, Paris 1782—1832). Insectes [Article Araignée in T. IV (1789), and art. Mygale in T. VIII (1811) by A. G. OLIVIER]. Ericuson, Guin. F., Vid AGAssiz, Nomenel. Zool. Eugenies, Kongliga Svenska fregatten, Resa omkring jorden, under befal af C. A. Virgin. Åren 1851— 1853. Vetenskapliga iakttagelser, på H. Maj:t Konung Oscar den förstes befallning utgifna af K. Svenska Vetenskaps-Akademien. Hft. 12. Zoologi. Arachnider, 1. [by T. THorELr.] Expédition scientifique de Morée. Section des Sciences physiques. Tom. III. 1:re Partie: Zoologie. 2:e Section. Les Animaux articulés, par M. BRULLÉ. Les Crustacés par M. GUÉRIN. Paris 1832. Exploration scientifique de l'Algérie pendant les années 1840, 1841, 1842. Sciences physiques. Zoologie I: Histoire Naturelle des Animaux articulés par H. Lucas. Première Partie: Les Crustacés, Arachnides, Myriapodes et Hexapodes. 1 Vol. Paris 1849. FABRICIUS, J. C., Systema Entomologiæ, sistens insectorum classes, or- dines, genera, species, adjectis synonymis, loeis, descriptionibus, observa- tionibus. Flensburgi et Lipsiæ 1775. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. Ix 1777. Fagricrus, J. C., Genera Insectorum eorumque characteres naturales, se- cundum numerum, figuram, situm et proportionem omnium partium oris; ad- jecta mantissa specierum nuper detectarum. Chilonii. 1779. —1p.— Reise nach Norwegen, mit Bemerkungen aus der Naturgeschichte und Œkonomie. Hamburg 1779. 1781. —1p.— Species Insectorum, exhibentes eorum differentias specificas, syno- nyma auctorum, loca natalia, metamorphosin, adjectis observationibus, de- seriptionibus. 2 Tomi. Hamburgi et Kilonii 1781. [Tom. I]. 1787. —1p.— Mantissa Insectorum, sistens eorum species nuper detectas, adjec- tis characteribus genericis, differentiis specificis, emendationibus, observa- tionibus. 2 Tomi. Hafniæ 1787. [Tom. I]. 1793. —1p.— Entomologia Systematica emendata et aueta. Secundum classes, ordines, genera, species; adjectis synonymis, locis, observationibus, de- seriptionibus. 4 Tomi. Hafniæ 1792—1794. [Tom. II]. 1798. —-ın.— Supplementum Entomologiæ Systematicæ. Hafniæ 1798. 182..—30. Faune Française, ou histoire naturelle générale et particulière des ani- maux qui se trouvent en France, constamment ou passagèrement, à la sur- face du sol, dans les eaux qui le baignent et dans le littoral des mers qui le bornent; par M.M. P. Vieillot, A. G. Desmarest, H. Ducrotay de Blainville, Audinet-Serville, Lepelletier de Saint-Fargeau et C. A. Walcke- naer. 29 Livr. de texte, 29 Cahiers de planches. Paris 1820—30. [Arachn. (Arandides) by C. A. WALCKENAER. — Pag. 1—96 (Livr. 11—12): 182.. '); p. 97—176 (Livr. 26) 1830, p. 177—240 (Livr. 29): 1830. — The work has never been completed]. 1775. Forsxit, P. Descriptiones animalium, avium, amphibiorum, piscium, insectorum, vermium, que in itinere orientali observavit. Post mortem auctoris edidit C. NIEBUHR. Adjuncta est materia medica Kahirina atque tabula Maris Rubri geogra- phica. Hauniæ 1775. 1776. —-ın.— Icones rerum naturalium quas in itinere orientali depingi curavit. Post mortem auctoris ad Regis mandatum eri incisas edidit C. NrgBuHR. Hauniæ 1776. * 1785. Fourcroy, A. F. DE, Entomologia Parisiensis. 2 Voll. Paris 1785. FRAUENFELD, G. v., Vid. BóckH (FRAUENFELD and). +1720—38. FmiscH, J. L., Beschreibung von allerley Insecten in Teutsch-Land, nebst nützlichen Anmerckungen und nôthigen Abbildungen von diesem kriechenden und fliegenden inländischen Gewürme ete. Th. 1—13 [in 1 Vol]. Berlin 1720—38. 1775. FuESSLIN, J. C., Verzeichniss der ihm bekannten Schweitzerischen Inseck- ten, mit einer ausgemahlten Kupfertafel: nebst der Ankiindigung eines neuen Insecten Werkes. Ziirich und Winterthur 1775. 1) According to AupouIN, Résumé d’Entomologie, I, p. 244 (Encyclopédie Portative) 1829, this Number was published in 1826; but the genus Philodromus formed in it is cited already in LATREILLE'S Fam. Nat. du Regue Anim., printed in 1825. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Se. Ups. Ser. II. : 2 x T. THORELL, 1847?—49. Gay, C., Historia fisica y politica de Chile, segun documentos adquiridos en 7 1762. esta Republica duranti doze anos de residencia en ella, y publicata bajo los auspi- cios del supremo gobierno. Zoologia. T. III, IV: Aracnidos [by H. NrcorzT]. Pa- ris 1849. [T. IIIJ. Grorrroy, E. L., Histoire abrégée des Insectes qui se trouvent aux envi- rons de Paris. 2 Tomes. Paris 1762. 1799—1800. —1p.— [Idem liber :] Histoire abrégée des Insectes, dans laquelle ces ani- 1863. 1867. 1861. 1862. #1837 (2) 1820—36. 1831—48. maux sont rangés suivant un ordre méthodique; Nouvelle Édition, revue, cor- rigée et augmentée d'un supplément considérable. 2 Tomes. Paris An VII de la République Française. GIEBEL, C. G., Drei und zwanzig neue und einige bekannte Spinnen der Halli- schen Sammlung. (Zeitschrift für die gesammten Naturwissenschaften, Bd XXI, 1863). —1p.— Zur Schweitzerischen Spinnenfauna. (ibid., Bd XXX.) GMELIN, Vid. Linnzus, Systema Nature, Ed. XIII. Gaze, Vid.: Lister, Naturgeschichte d. Spinnen. GRAELLS, M. DE LA Paz, Notice sur divers faits qui confirment la pro- priété venimeuse du Latrodectus malmignatus Walckenaer. (Ann. de la Soc. Entom. de France, T. XI.) GRUBE, A. E., Einige Resultate aus Untersuchungen über die Anatomie der Araneiden. (MrLLER's Archiv für Anatomie und Physiologie, Jahrg. 1842)]. —ID.— Verzeichniss der Arachnoiden Liv-, Kur- und Ehstlands. (Archiv für die Naturkunde Liv-, Ehst- und Kurlands, Ser. 2, Bd I. [Also sepa- rate: Dorpat 1859.] —i1p.— Beschreibungen neuer, von den Herren L. v. Schrenck, Maack, C. v. Ditmar u. a. im Amurlande und Ostsibirien gesammelter Araneiden. (Bulletin de l'Académie des Sciences de S:t Petersbourg, T. IV; Mélanges biologiques tirés du Bull, T.IV, 1). Güntuer, A., On an apparently undescribed spider from Cochin China. (Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 3 Ser., Vol. X). Guérin (-MÉNEvILLE), F. E., Diet. pittor. d'hist. nat., Vid. Dictionnaire pittoresque d'hist. nat. —ıD.— Iconographie du Règne Animal de G. Cuvier, ou représentation d'aprés nature de l'une des espéces les plus remarquables et souvent non encore figurées, de chaque genre d'animaux, pouvant servir d'atlas à tous les traités de Zoologie. 7 Voll. Paris 1829—44 [Arachn.] Haun, C. W., Monographia Aranearum. Monographie der Spinnen. 8 Hefte. Nürnberg 1820—36 [Hft. 1—3: 1820—22 *); 4: 182..; 5: 1829; 6: 1831; 7: 1833; 8: 1836]. —ID.— and Kocu, C. L., Die Arachniden. Getreu nach der Natur ab- gebildet und beschrieben. 16 Voll. Nürnberg 1831— 1848 [Voll. I—II by 1) According to Enscu, Handbuch der Deutschen Litteratur. 1834. 1857. 1858. 1860. 1865. 1869. 1832. 1841. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. XI Hann, Voll. III—XVI by Kocu. — Vol. I: 1831; II: 1834; III: 1836; IV: 1838; V—VII: 1839; VIII: 1841; IX: 1842; X: 1843; XI—XII: 71845; XIII: 1846; XIV—XVI: 1848]. HAMMERSCHMIDT, Neue Spinnen. (OKEN’s Isis, 1834). HassELT, A. W. M. van, [On some rare Dutch spiders, in] Verslag van de dertiende algemeene Vergadering der Nederlandsche Entomologische Vereeniging. (Tijdschrift voor Entomologie, Deel I, 2). —ID.— Over huid- en kleurverwisseling van Dolomedes fimbriatus (Hahn), in verband met zijne soortbepaling en die van andere spinnen uit dit ge- slacht. (ibid., D. I, 6). —1D.— Studien over de z.g. Curaçaosche Oranje-Spin, eene nog weinig bekende Latrodectus-soort. (zbzd., D. IIT). —1D.— [Notice of Vinson, Aranéides des Iles de la Réun., Maurice et Madaga- sear, in] Verslag van de twintigste algemeene Vergadering der Nederlandsche En- tomologische Vereeniging gehouden te Amersfoort, den 30:sten Julij 1864. (ibid., D. VID. —ID.— [On the occurrence of Atypus Sulzeri and Pholcus opilionoides in Holland, in| Verslag van de drie- en twintigste algemeene Vergadering der Nederlandsche Entomologische Vereeniging. (ibid., D. XII). HEINEKEN, C., and Lowe, Vid. Lowe. Hentz, N. M., On North-American spiders. (SILLIMAN’S American Journal of Science and Arts, Vol. XXI). —ID.— Description of an American spider, constituting a new sub-genus of the tribe Inæquitelæ of Latreille. (zdid., Vol. XLI). 1842—50. —1p.— Descriptions and figures of the Araneides of the United States. (Boston 1861. 1861. 1849. 1862. 1863. Journal of Natural History, Vol. IV, 1 (1842) [Æxtr. in the Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural History, I, 1844]; Vol. IV, 2 (1842); Vol. IV, 3 (1843); Vol. V, 2 (1845); Vol. V, 3 (1846); Vol. V, 4 (1847); Vol. VI, 1, 2 (1850)). HERKLOTZ, J. A., Bouwstoffe v. eene Fauna v. Nederland, Vid. Six, Lijst van Spinnen. HERRICH-SCHEFFER, G. A. W., Deutschl. Ins., Vid. Panzer, Faune Ins. Germ. Initia. KEMPELEN, L. v., Bemerkungen über Spinnen im Allgemeinen und eine Untersuchung von Drassus lapidicola insbesondere. (Verhandl. d. k. k. zool.-bot. Gesellsch. in Wien, Bd XVII, 1867). —ID.— Thysa pythonissæformis. Eine neue Gattung and Art. (ibid.). KESSLER, K., Beitrag zur Naturgeschichte und Anatomie der Gattung Ly- cosa. (Bulletin de la Société Impériale des Naturalistes de Moscou, XXII, 1849, II). KEYSERLING, E. v., Beschreibung einer neuen Spinne aus den Höhlen von Lesina. (Verhandl. d. zool.-bot. Gesellsch. in Wien, Bd XII, 1862). —ID.— Beschreibungen neuer Spinnen. (ibid., Bd XIII, 1863). XII 1864. 1865. 1835—41. 1837, 50. 1847. 1855. 1862. 1864. 1865. 1866, 67. 1867. 1867. 1868. T. THORELL, KEYSERLING, E. v., Beschreibungen neuer und wenig bekannter Arten aus der Familie Orbitele Latr. oder Epeiride Sund. (Sitzungsberichte der Isis zu Dresden, 1863). Also separate: Dresden 1864. —ID.— Beitrige zur Kenntniss der Orbitelæ Latr. (Verhandl. d. zool.-bot. Gesellsch. in Wien, Bd XV, 1865). Kocn, C. L., in Herr.-Scaærr., Deutschl. Insekten, Vid. Panzer, Fau- nee Ins. Germ. initia. —ID.— Deutschlands Crustaeeen, Myriapoden und Arachniden. Ein Bei- trag zur deutschen Fauna. Herausgegeben von HERRICH-SCHÆFFER. 40 Hfte. —ID.— Die Araehniden, Vid. Haun and Kocu, Die Arachniden. —ID.— Uebersicht des Arachniden-Systems. 5 Hfte. Nürnberg 1837— 1850. [Hft 1: 1837; Hft 5: 1850]. —1p.— Arachn. d. Regentsch. Algier, Vid. WAGNER, Reisen. —ID.— System der Myriapoden, mit den Verzeichnissen und Berichtigun- gen zu Deutschlands Crustaceen, Myriapoden und Arachniden, Hft. 1—40. Regensburg 1847. — Also with the title: Kritische Revision der Insecten- Fauna Deutsehlands von D:r Panzer und D:r Herrich-Scheffer, Hft. 1— 190. III Bándchen, enthaltend die Verzeichnissen und Berichtigungen zu Deutsehlands Crustaceen, Myriapoden und Arachniden, und ein System der Myriapoden, von C. L. Kocn. Kocx, L., Zur Charakteristik des Artenunterschiedes bei den Spinnen im Allgemeinen und insbesondere der Gattung Amaurobius. (Korrespondenz- Blatt des zoologisch-mineralogischen Vereines in Regensburg, 9 Jahrg., 1855). à —ıD.— Die Thiere Andalusiens, Arachn., Vid. ROSENHAUER. —ID.— Zur Arachniden-gattung Tetragnatha Walck. (Korresp.-Blatt d. zool.-miner. Vereins in Regensburg, 16 Jahrg., 1862). —ID.— Die europäischen Arten der Arachnidengattung Cheiracanthium. (Abhandlungen der Naturhistorischen Gesellschaft zu Nürnberg vom Jahre 1864). —1p.—- Beschreibungen neuer Arachniden und Myriopoden. (Verhandl. d. zool.- bot. Gesellsch. in Wien, Bd XV, 1865). —1p.— Die Arachniden-Familie der Drassiden. Nürnberg 1866—18:. [Hft. 1—6 (p. 1—304): 1866; Hft 7 (p. 305—352): 1867. [Zhe work is still in progress]. : —Ip.— Beschreibungen neuer Arachniden und Myriapoden. (Verhandl. d. zool.- bot. Gesellsch. in Wien, Bd XVII, 1867). —1p.— Zur Arachniden- und Myriapoden-Fauna Süd-Europas. (ibid.) —1D.— Die Araehnidengattungen Amaurobius, Cælotes und Cybæus. (Ab- handl. d. Naturhist. Gesellsch. in Nürnberg, 1868). Also separate: Nürn- berg 1868. 1857. 1838. 1798. 1798. 1802. 1804. 1806, 9. 1810. 1824. 1825. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. XIII KorENATI, F. A., Meletemata Entomologiea. Fase. VII. Einige Arachni- den der Caucasischen Liinder u. s. w. (Bulletin de la Soc. Imp. des Na- turalistes de Moscou, T. XXX, Année 1857, N:o 2). Kongl. svenska fregatten Eugenies resa, Vid. Eugenies resa. Kritische Revision d. Ins.-Fauna Deutschl., Vid. Kocu, C. L., System der Myriapoden. KRYNICKI, J., Arachnographiæ Rossice decas prima. (Bull. de la Soc. Imp. des Natur. de Moscou, Année 1837. N:o V). Lamarck, J. B. DE, Histoire naturelle des Animaux sans Vertébres, pré- sentant les caractéres généraux et particuliers de ces animaux, leurs di- stribution, leurs classes, leurs familles, leurs genres, etla citation des prin- cipales espèces qui s'y rapportent; précédée d'une introduction offrant la détermination des caractéres essentiels de l'animal, sa distinction du végé- ial et des autres corps naturels, enfin l'exposition des prineipes fondamen- taux de la zoologie. 7 Voll. Paris 1815—22. [Tome V]. LAMBOTTE, H., Notice sur le Theridion malmignatte. (Bulletins de l'Aca- démie Royale des Sciences et Belles-Lettres de Bruxelles, Année 1837, RS ES): LATREILLE, P. A., Extrait d'un mémoire sur la famille des Araignées mi- neuses. (Bulletins des Sciences, par la Société Philomatique, T. I, rr, N:o 22). —ID.— Description d'une nouvelle espèce d'araignée. (ibid.). —1D.— Histoire naturelle des Fourmis, et recueil de mémoires et d'obser- vations sur les abeilles, les araignées, les faucheurs et d'autres insectes. Paris An X—1802. (p. 332—353: Mémoire sur une nouvelle distribution méthodique des Araignées; lu la Société Philomatique). —1p.— Histoire Naturelle, générale et particulière des Crustacés et des Inseetes. Ouvrage faisant suite aux oeuvres de Leclere de Buffon, et partie du cours complet d'histoire naturelle rédigé par C. S. Sonnini. 14 Voll. Paris An X— XII. [Vol. VII: An XII]. —1p.— in Nouv. Diet. d’hist. nat. (Tabl. méthod. d. Ins.), Vid. Diction- naire, nouv., d'hist. nat. —ID.— Genera Crustaeeorum et Insectorum, secundum ordinem naturalem in familias disposita, iconibus exemplisque plurimis explicata. 4 Voll. Parisiis et Argentorati 1806, 1807, 1809. (T. I, IV]. —ID.— Considérations générales sur l'ordre naturel des animaux composant les classes des Crustacées, des Arachnides et des Insectes. Paris 1810. —ID.— Arachnides du Règne Animal de Cuvier, Vid. Cuvier, Le Règne Animal, Nouv. Éd. —1D.— Note sur un nouveau genre d'Aranéides (Ann. d. Sciences Nat., T. III). —-1p.— Familles naturelles du Règne Animal, exposées suceinetement et dans un ordre analytique, avec lindieation de leurs genres. Paris 1825. XIV 1827. 1831. 1832. 1770. 1815. + 1774. [1848. [1867. + 1735. 1758. 1767. 1789? + 1742. + 1745. T. THORELL, LATREILLE, P. A., Natürliche Familien des Thierreichs. Aus dem Fran- zösischen. Mit Anmerkungen und Zusätzen von A. A. BERTHOLD. Wei- mar 1827. —ID.— Arachnides du Règne Animal de Cuvier (Les Crustacées, les Arachnides et les Insectes distrib. en fam. nat.), Vid. Cuvimr, Le Règne Animal, Nouv. (2°) Éd. —ID.— Cours d'Entomologie, ou de l'histoire naturelle des Crustacés, des Arachnides, des Myriapodes et des Insectes, à l’usage des élèves de l'école du Muséum d'histoire naturelle. Première année: Discours d'ouver- ture du cours. Tableau de l'histoire de l'entomologie. Généralités de la classe des Crustacés et de celle des Arachnides, des Myriapodes et des Insectes. Exposition méthodique des ordres, des familles et des genres des trois premières classes. (Avec un Atlas composé de 24 Planches). Pa- ris 1831. —ID.— Vues générales sur les Aranéides à quatre pneumobranches ou quadripulmonaires, suivies d'une notice de quelques éspéees de Mygales inédites et de l'habitation de celle qu'on nomme Nidulans. (Nouvelles Annales du Muséum d'histoire naturelle, T. I). LAXMANN, E., Novæ Insectorum species. (Novi Commentarii Academie Scientia- rum Imperialis Petropolitanæ. T. XIV, pro anno 1759, Pars prior). LzaAcH, W. E., Zoological Miscellany; being descriptions of new and interesting animals. 3 Voll. London 1814— 1817. [Vol. II]. —ID.— Edinb. Cyelop., Art. Crustaceology, Vid. Edinburg Cyclopedia. LEPECHIN, J., Tagebuch der Reise durch verschiedene Provinzen des Rus- sischen Reiches in den Jahren 1768 und 1769. Aus dem Russischen über- setz von C. H. Haase. 3 Thle. Altenburg 1774, 1775, 1783. [Vol. I. — The Vol. I of the Russian original is printed in 1771]. LEUCKART, R., Ueber den Bau und die Bedeutung der sogenannten Lun- gen bei den Arachniden (Zeitschrift für wissenschaftliche Zoologie, Bd I)]. Lincecum, G., The Tarentula. (The American Naturalist, I, N:o 8)]. Linnzus [v. LINNÉ], Systema Nature sive regna tria nature systematice proposita, per classes, ordines, genera et species. Lugduni Batavorum 1735. —ID.— idem liber, Ed. X, reformata. 2 Tomi. Holmiæ 1758. [T. I]. —ID.— idem liber, Ed. XII, reformata. 3 Tomi. Holmiæ 1766—1768. [T. I, Pars IJ]. —ID.— idem liber, Ed. XIII, aucta, reformata. Cura J. F. GwELIN. 3 Tomi in 10 Voll. Lipsiæ 1788—1793. [T. I, Pars V]. —ID.— Animalia per Sueciam observata. (Acta Literaria et Scientiarum Sueciæ. Vol. IV, continens annos 1735— 1739). [Ann. 1736]. —1p.— Öländska och Gothländska Resa, pi Riksens högloflige Ständers befallning förrättad ahr 1741. Stockholm och Upsala 1745. + 1746. 1761. SL 06. + 1678. T 1778. 1831. 1836. 1836. * 1840. 1843. 1844. 1845. [1847. 1847. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. XV Linnzus [v. Linn&], C., Fauna Suecica sistens animalia Sueciæ regni: quadrupeda, aves, amphibia, pisces, insecta, vermes, distributa per clas- ses et ordines, genera et species. Cum differentiis specierum, synonymis auctorum, nominibus incolarum, locis habitationum, descriptionibus insec- torum. Stockholmiæ 1746. —ID.— idem liber, Ed. II, auctior. Stockholmiæ 1761. —ip.— Vollständiges Natursystem, nach der 12:ten lateinischen Ausgabe und naeh Anleitung des Holländ. Houttuyns’schen Werks, mit einer aus- führlichen Erklärung ausgefertiget von P. L. S. MürLER. 6 Thle in 9 Bdn. Nürnberg 1773—1776. [Supplement- und Register-Band]. —ID.—, Entomologia, eur. et aug. C. DE VILLERS, Vid. VILLERS, Lin- næi Entom. Lister, M, Historie animalium Angliæ tres tractatus. Unus de araneis. Alter de cochleis tum terrestribus tum fluviatilibus. Tertius de cochleis marinis. Quibus adjectus est quartus de lapidibus ejusdem insule ad co- chlearum quandam imaginem figuratis. Londini 1678. —ID.— Naturgeschichte der Spinnen überhaupt und der Engellündischen Spinnen insonderheit, aus dem Lateinischen übersetzt, und mit Anmerkun- gen vermehrt von F. H. W. Martini, nach dessen Handschrift aber zum Druck befördert und mit neuen Zusätzen vermehrt von J. A. E. Gaze. Quedlinburg und Blankenburg 1778. Lowe, R. T., Descriptions of two species of Araneidz, natives of Madeira. In a letter to the editor. (Zoological Journal, Vol. V). Lucas, H., Observations sur les Aranéides du genre Hersilia, et description de deux espèces nouvelles appartenant à ce genre. (Gukrın, Magazin de Zoologie, 6:e Année). —ID.— Quelques observations sur le genre Atypus et description d'une espéce nouvelle appartenant à ce genre. (Ann. de la Soc. Ent. de France, EAN) —ID.—, in Diet. univ. D’ORBIGNY, Vid. Dictionnaire universelle d’hist. nat. —1D.— Histoire naturelle des Crustacés, des Arachnides et des Insectes Thysanoures, faisant suite au Buffon Duménil. Paris 1840. —ID.— Note sur le Latrodectus malmignathus. (Ann. de la Soc. Ent. de France, 2 Sér. T. I, Bull.). —ID.— Arachn. des Iles Canaries, Vid. BARKER-WEBB. —ID.— Note monographique sur les Aranéides composant le genre Tege- naria. (Ann. de la Soc. Ent. de France, 2 Sér., T. II). —ID.— Clotho Durandi trouvé a Nimes. (ibid., 2 Sér., T. III, Bull.). —1D.— Arachn. de l'Algérie, Ved. Exploration scientifique de l'Algérie. —ID.— Sur une ponte d'une Scytodes thoracica Latr. (Ann. de la Soc. Ent. de France, 2 Sér., T. V, Bull.)]. —ID.— Epeira diadema. Sur une variété remarquable de cette Aranéide. (ibid., Bull.). T. THEORELL, Lucas, H., Episinus truncatus. Note sur cette Araneide. (ibid., Bull.). —ID.— Latrodectus martius trouvé en France. (ibid., Bull.). —ID.— Seytodes thoracica. Note au sujet de cet insecte. (ibid., Bull). —1D.— Description et figure d'une nouvelle espèce d'Aranéide, appartenant au genre Theridion. (ibid., 2 Sér., T. VII). —ID.— Salticus formiceformis n. sp. (ibid., Bull; GUÉRIN-MÉNEVILLE, Revue et Magazin de zoologie, 2 Sér., 'T. II, 1850). —ip.— Eresus cinnabarinus trouvé à Passy. (Ann. de la Soc. Ent. de France, 2 Sér., T. VII, Bull.). —1p.— Histoire naturelle des Crustacés, des Arachnides et des Myriapo- des. Préeédée de l'histoire naturelle des Annélides par M. le Comte de CASTELNAU. -Paris 1850. —1D.— Observations géographiques sur la Filistata bicolor. (Ann. de la Soc. Ent. de France, 2 Sér., T. IX, Bull.). —ID.— Observations sur le jeune áge de la Segestria perfida. (ibid., Bull.). —ID.— Note sur une variété remarquable de l'Epeira scalaris. (ibid. 3 Sér., T. I, Bull.). —1p.— Essai sur les animaux articulés qui habitent l’île de Crète. Revue et Mag. de zool., 2 Sér., T. V (1853), VI (1854). — Also separate. —ip.— Note sur une nouvelle espèce d'Aranéide qui habite l'Espagne mé- ridionale. (Ann. de la Soc. Ent. de France, 3 Sér., T. III). —ID.— Note sur la rétraetilité ou la non-rétraetilité des ongles dans les tarses des Aranéides du genre Mygale. (Comptes rendus hebdomadaires des séances de l'Académie des Sciences, T. XLV; l’Institut, T. XXVI, N:o 1253). —ID.— De la manière de vivre, de l'habitat et de la synonymie chronolo- gique de l'Oletera picea. (Ann. de la Soc. Ent. de France, 3 Sér., T. VII, Bull). —ip.— Sur les mandibules de la Segestria florentina. (ibid., Bull). —1p.— Quelques remarques sur la manière de vivre de la Segestria flo- rentina, Aranéide de la tribu des Quadripulmonaires (ibid., T. VIII). —1p— Note sur la rétractilité ou la non-rétraetilité des ongles des palpes dans les Aranéides du genre Mygale. (ibid., 4 Sér., T. IIT). —1p.— Note sur une variété de la Segestria florentina. (ibid.). —ip.— Atypus piceus de Sulzer rencontré aux environs de Fontainebleau. (ibid., 4 Sér., T. IV, Bull.). —ip.— Note sur des espèces d'Aranéides sous les noms d'Eresus albo- marginatus, pulchellus et siculus. (ibid., Bull.). —ID.— Observations sur le genre Eriodon, Aranéide de la tribu des Thé- rophoses, précédées de quelques remarques sur les coupes génériques qui composent actuellement cette tribu. (ibid., 4 Sér., T. V). 1850. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. XVII M...., C., An illustration of the structure of some of the organs of a spi- der deemed the type of a new genus, and proposed to be ealled Tricho- pus libratus. (Loupon’s Magazine of Natural History, Vol. VII). Mac Lray, W. S., On some new forms of Arachnida. (Ann. of Nat. Hist., Vol. Il). MATIRONI DA PONTE, G., I tre regni della natura nella provincia Berga- masca. (Atti della Società Italiana di Scienze, T. XIX, Fase. 2° di Fisica). — Also separate: Modena 1824. Marmoccut, F., Memoria sopra il ragno rosso dell’ agro Volterrano. (Atti dell’ Academia dei Fisiocritici di Siena, T. VIII). Martini, Vèd., Lister, Naturgesch. d. Spinnen. Martyn, Tu., Aranei, or a natural history of spiders, including the prin- cipal parts of the well-known work on English spiders by Eleazar Albin, as also the whole of the celebrated publication on Swedish spiders by Charles Clerck; revised, enlarged and designed a new. 2 Voll. London 16093: MEADE, R. H., Deseription of a new species of spider lately discovered in England. (Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 3 Ser., Vol. VII). MENGE, A., Ueber die Lebensweise der Arachniden. (Neueste Schriften der Naturforschenden Gesellschaft in Danzig, Bd. IV, Hft. 1)]. —ID.— Verzeichniss der Danziger Spinnen. (ibid., Bd IV, Hft. 3). 1866, 68, 69. —1p.— Preussische Spinnen. [I Abtheilung, p. 1—152:] (Schriften 1849. 1790. 1849. 1764. 1776. d. Nat.-forsch. Gesellsch. in Danzig, Neue Folge, Bd I, Hft. 3, 4); II Abtheil. [p. 153—218:] (ibid., Bd II, Hft. 1); III Abtheil. [p. 219—264:] (ibid., Bd II, Hft. 2). — Also separate: Danzig 1866, 1868, 69. — The work is still in progress. MENZEL, A., Kurzer Abriss einer Naturgesehiehte der Spinnen. Ein Fest- geschenk für die Jugend. Zürich 1849. MEYER, F. A. A., Ueber einige Spinnen der Göttingischen Gegend. Nebst Anzeige eines vollständigen Cursus über die Thiergeschichte. Göttingen 1190. MOTSCHOULSKY, V. DE, Note sur deux araignées venimeuses de la Russie méridionale qu'on croit être le Tchim des Kalmouks. (Bull. de la Soc. Imp. d. Natur. de Moscou, T. XXII, Année 1849. N:o 1). MÜLLER, O. F., Fauna Insectorum Fridrichsdalina, sive methodica deserip- tio insectorum agri Fridrichsdalensis, cum characteribus genericis et spe- cificis, nominibus trivialibus, locis natalibus, iconibus allegatis, novisque pluribus speciebus additis. Hafniæ et Lipsiæ 1764. —ID.— Zoologie Danicæ Prodromus, seu animalium Danis et Norvegiæ indigenarum characteres, nomina et synonyma imprimis popularium. Hav- nie 1776. MÜLLER, P. L. S., Linnei Vollst. Nat.-Syst., Vid. LiNNEUs , Vollständiges Natur-System. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 3 XVIII * 1845. 1863. 1854. 1865. 1367. T 1772. [1862. rile rie 1777. T. THORELL, Museum Leskeanum. Vid. ZscHaAcH, Mus. Lesk. Napoli e le sue vieinanze. Vol. I. Napoli 1845. Nicozer, H., Aracn. de Chile, Vid. Gay, Hist. fisica y polit. de Chile. NORDMANN, A. v., Erstes Verzeichniss der in Finnland und Lappland ge- fundenen Spinnen, Aranes. Vorgetragen in der finnischen Wissenschafs- Societät d. 1 Dec. 1862. (Bidrag till Finlands naturkünnedom, etnografi och statistik, Bd VIII). 2 Nouv. Diet. d’Hist. Nat., Vid. Dictionnaire, Nouveau, d’Hist. Nat. ÖHLERT, E., Beiträge zur Diagnose und Revision der Preussischen Spin- nengattungen. (Programm der höheren Burgschule zu Königsberg i. Pr., April 1851. Königsberg 1851). —ID.— Beiträge zu einer auf die Klauenbildung gegründeten Diagnose und Anordnung der Preussischen Spinnen. (Verhandl. d. zool.-bot. Gesellsch. in Wien, Bd IV, 1854). —ID.— Arachnologische Studien. (Programm der Real-Schule auf der Burg zu Königsberg i. Pr., Sept. 1865. Königsberg 1865). —ID.— Die Araneiden oder echten Spinnen der Provinz Preussen. Leip- zig 1867. OLAFSEN, E., Eggert Olafsens og Biarne Povelsens Reise igiennem Island, foranstaltet af Videnskabernes Sælskab i Kiobenhavn. 2 Voll. Soroe 1772. Ozivier, A. G., Encycl. Méth., Vid. Encyclopédie méthodique. PACKARD JR, A. §., Entomological Report. (Second annual report upon the natural history and geology of the State of Maine. [Augusta] 1862)]. PALLAS, P. S., Reise durch verschiedene Provinzen des Russischen Reichs 9 Voll. St. Petersburg 1771, 1773, 1776 [Vol. I, II. —ID.— Spicilegia zoologica. Tomus I, continens quadrupedium, avium, amphibiorum, piscium, insectorum, molluscorum aliorumque marinorum Fa- seieulos decem. Berolini 1767—1 14. [Fasc. 9, with the title: Spicilegia zoologica, quibus novæ imprimis et obscuræ animalium species iconibus, de- seriptionibus atque commentariis illustrantur]. —ID.— Naturgeschichte merkwürdiger Thiere. Durch den Verfasser ver- teutscht. Bd I, 1—10 Sammlung. Berlin und Stralsund 1769— 1778 [9:te Samml.]. 1793—1844. Panzer, C. F. W., Faunæ insectorum Germanis initia. Deutschlands Insecten. Hft. 1—110. Regensburg 1793—1809. [Hft 1—12: 1793; 13— 24: 1794; 25—36: 1796; 37—48: 1797; 49—60: 1798; 61—72: 1799; 73 —84: 1801; 85—96: 1804; 97106: 1806; 107—110: 1809 )]. Fortge- setzt von G. W. HERRICH-SCHAFFER. [Arachn. by C. L. el Hft. 111 —190. Regensburg 1829—1844. [Hft. 111—118: 1829—1852; 119—121: 1833; 122—127: 1834; 128—138: 1835; less 1836—1838; 159—190: 1839 —1844 — PE = Dib 1) According to SCHINER, Fauna Austriaca. Die Fliegen, I, p. xxvr. 2) Compare the "Leipziger Messen-Cataloge" for the years mentioned. — I have only had opportunity to consult a part of this work. 1804. * 1864. 1833. 1786. eme On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. XIX PANZER, G. F. W., D. Jacobi Christiani Schæfferi Ieonum inseetorum circa Ratisbonam indigenorum enumeratio systematiea. Systematische Nomen- elatur über weiland Herrn Dr. Jacob Christian Schäffers natürlich ausge- mahlte Abbildungen Regensburgischer Insekten. Erlangen 1804. Pavest, P., Notizie naturali e chimico-agronomiche sulla provincia di Pa- via. (Aracnidi). —ID.—, Vid. CANESTRINI and PAVESI. Perry, M., Delectus animalium artieulatorum que in itinere per Brasiliam ann. 1817—1820 . . . peracta collegerunt J. B. de Spix et de Martius. Digessit, descripsit, pingenda curavit Max. Perty. 3 Fasc. Monachi 1830— 1834 [Fasc. 3]. PETAGNA, V., Specimen insectorum Ulterioris Calabriæ. Neapoli 1786. —ID.— Institutiones entomologiex. 2 Voll. Neapoli 1792. +1702—11. PETIVER, J., Gazophylacii nature et artis Decades X. London 1702 * 1761. 1781. 1765. 1866. 1821. 1839. 1833. 1787. * 1789. —1711. PICKARD-CAMBRIDGE, Vid. CAMBRIDGE. Popa, N., Insecta Musei Græcensis. Greecii 1761. Porrer, Sur quelques insectes de Barbarie. Suite. (Observations sur la physique, sur l’histoire naturelle et sur les arts [Journal de Physique], T. XXXI). PONTE, DA, Vid. MarRONI DA PONTE. PONTOPPIDAN, E., Kurzgefasste Nachrichten, die Naturhistorie in Dänne- mark betreffend. Aus dem Dänischen übersetzt. Kopenhagen und Ham- burg 1765. PRAcH, H., Monographie der Thomisiden (Krabbenspinnen) der Gegend von Prag, mit einem Anhange, das Verzeichniss der bisher in der Um- gebung unserer Hauptstadt aufgefundenen Araneinen enthaltend. (Verhandl. d. zool.-bot. Gesellsch. in Wien, Bd XVI, 1866). Quoy et Garwamp, Vid. Voyage de la corvette l'Astrolabe. RarrNESQUE, C. S., Description d'une araignée qui constitue un genre nouveau. (Ann. géner. d. Sciences Phys., T. VIII). RAIKEM, A., Recherches, observations et expériences sur le Theridion mar- mignatte de Volterra et sur les effets de sa morsure. (Ann. d. Sciences Nat., 2 Sér., T. XI). RATZEBURG, J. T. C., (BRANDT, J. F., and) Medizinische Zoologie, oder getreue Darstellung und Beschreibung der Thiere, die in der Arzneimittel- lebre in Betracht kommen, in systematischer Folge herausgegeben. 2 Bd. Berlin 1827—34. [Bd II]. RAZOUMOWSKI, G. DE, Lettre de M. le Comte de Razoumowski à M. Rey- nier sur une Araignée. (Observ. s. la Phys. [Journ. de Phys.], T. XXXI). —ID.— Histoire naturelle du Jorat et de ses environs, et celle des trois lacs de Neufchâtel, Morat et Bienne; précédé d'un essai sur le climat, les productions, le commerce et les animaux de la partie du pays de Vaud ou de la Suisse romande qui entre dans le plan de cet ouvrage. 2 Voll. Lausanne 1789. + 1767— * 1804. 1847. 1849. T. THORELL, RETZIUS, A. J., Caroli de Geer genera et species insectorum e generosis- simi auctoris scriptis extraxit, digessit, latine quod partem reddidit, et terminologiam inseetorum Linnæanam addidit. Lipsiæ 1783. Reuss, A., Zoologische Miscellen. Arachniden. (Museum Senckenbergianum, Bd I). Rink, H., Gronland, geografisk og statistisk beskrevet (Tilleg N:o 3: Udsigt over Grenlands Land-, Ferskvands- og Strandbreds-Arthropoder, ved J. C. ScHIODTE). Kiobenhavn 1857. Risso, A., Histoire naturelle des principales productions de l'Europe méri- dionale. 5 Voll. Paris et Strassbourg 1826—1827 [T. V]. ROBERTSON, J., A new British Mygale. (Brighton Herald 1862; Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 3 Ser., Vol. X). Ramer, J. J., Genera insectorum Linn&i et Fabrieii iconibus illustrata. Vitoduri Helvetorum 1789. RamsEL v. ROSENHOF, A.J., Monatlich herausgegebene Insectenbelustigun- gen. 4 Voll. Nürnberg 1746—1761. [Vol. IV]. RosENHAUER, W.G., Die Thiere Andalusiens nach dem Resultate einer Reise zusammengestellt, nebst den Beschreibungen von 249 neuen oder bis jetzt noch unbeschriebenen Gattungen und Arten. Erlangen 1856. [Arachn. by L. Koch]. Rossi, P., Osservazioni insettologiche. (Memorie di Matematica e Fisica della Società Italiana, Vol. IV). —ID.— Fauna Etrusca, sistens insecta que in provinciis Florentina et Pisana prsesertim collegit. 2 Voll. Liburni 1790. [T. II]. —ID.— Mantissa insectorum, exhibens species nuper in Etruria collectas, adjeetis Faunæ Etruscæ illustrationibus et additionibus. 2 Voll. Pisis 1792, 1794. [T. II]. Rossr, F. W., Neue Arten von Arachniden des K. K. Museums, beschrie- ben und mit Bemerkungen über verwandte Formen begleitet. (HAIDINGER, Naturwissenschaftliche Abhandlungen, Bd I. Wien 1846). Savieny, Vid. Description de l'Égypte. 69. SCHAFFER, J. C., Icones inseetorum cirea Ratisbonam indigenorum, coloribus naturam referentibus expressz. Natürlich ausgemahlte Abbildun- gen Regensburgischer Insecten. 3 Voll. Regensburg 1767—1769. . Idem liber: Nova Editio; methodo systematico aucta a G. W. F. PANZER. 4 Voll. Erlangæ 1804. [Conf. Panzer, Scheefferi Ie. ins. cirea Ratisb. indig. enum. system.]. SCHIÖDTE, J. C., Forelöbig Beretning om Undersögelser om den underjor- diske Fauna i Hulerne i Krain og Istrien. (Oversigt af det Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes Selskabs Forhandlinger 1847). —ID.— Bidrag til den underjordiske Fauna. (Det Kongelige Danske Vi- denskabernes Selskabs Skrifter, 5 Række, Naturvid. o. mathem. Afd., 1851, Bd. ID). — Also separate. —1D.— Om en afvigende Slægt af Spindlernes Orden. (KroyEr, Naturhistorisk Tidskrift, Ny [2] Række, Bd ID. 1861. 1861. 1861. 1862. 1864. 1866. 1866. 1867. 1868. 1868, 69. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. XXI ScmiópTE, J. C, Udsigt over Gronlands Land-, Ferskvands- og Strandbreds- Arthropoder, Vid. Rixk, Gronland. —ID.— Om Slegten Stalita, (Naturhist. Tidskr., 3 Rekke, Bd III) SCHRANCK, F. v. PAULA, Enumeratio insectorum Austrie indigenorum. Auguste Vindelicorum 1781. —1p.— Naturhistorische und ökonomische Briefe über das Donaumoor. Mannheim 1795. —1D.— Fauna Beica. Durchgedachte Geschichte der in Baiern einheimi- schen und zahmen Thiere. 3 Vol. Vol. I: Nürnberg 1798; Vol. II: In- golstadt 1801, 1802; Vol. III: Landshut 1803 [Vol. III. 1]. ScoPoLr, J. A., Entomologia Carnioliea exhibens insecta Carnioliæ indigena et distributa in genera, species, varietates. Methodo Linnæana. Vindobonæ 1763. —ID.— Annus I—V Historico-naturalis. 5 Voll. (Observationes zoologice in Ann. V). Lipsiæ 1769, 1770, 1772. SEIDEL, Ueber die Schlesischen Arten aus den Familien der Epeirides und Theridides. (Uebersicht der Arbeiten und Veränderungen der Schlesischen Gesellschaft für vaterländische Kultur im Jahre 1848). SIEBOLD, C. TH. v., Lehrbuch der vergleichenden Anatomie der wirbello- sen Thiere. (Also with the title: Lehrbuch der vergleichenden Anatomie von V. SIEBOLD und STANNIUS. Erster Theil: Wirbellose Thiere, von C. TH. v. SIEBOLD). Berlin 1848]. SIEMASCKKO, J. M. v., Verzeichniss der in der Umgegend von St. Petersburg vorkommenden Arachniden. (Hore Societatis entomologieæ Rossicæ, Fase. I). SILL, V., Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Crustaceen, Arachniden und Myria- poden Siebenbürgens. (Verhandlungen und Mittheilungen des Siebenbür- gischen Vereins für Naturwissenschaften zu Hermannstadt, Jahrg. XII, N:o 1 —1D.— Zweiter Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Crustaceen und Arachniden Sie- benbürgens. (ibid., N:o 11, 12). —ID.— Dritter Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Crustaceen und Arachniden Sie- benbürgens. (ibid., Jahrg. XIII, 1862). SIMON, E., Histoire Naturelle des Araignées (Aranéides). Paris 1864. —ID.— Monographie des espèces eufopéennes du genre Pholcus. (Ann. . de la Soc. Ent. de France, 4 Sér., T. VI). —ID.— Sur quelques araignées d’Espagne. (ibid.). —1p.— Sur trois araignées nouvelles. (Revue et Mag. de Zool., Année 1867). —ip.— Sur quelques Aranéides du midi de la France. (ibid., 2 Ser. T. XX, Année 1868). —1p.— Monographie des espèces européennes de la famille des Attides (Attidæ Sundev. — Saltigradæ Latr.) (Ann. de la Soc. Ent. de France, 4 Sér., T. VIII). XXII 1858. 1858. 1898. 1863. 1366. 1810. 1765, 68. * 1776. 1823. 1830, 32, 1833. 1841. 1844. 1834. 1855. 1855. 1856. T. THORELL, Six, G. A., Lijst van spinnen in de Provinzie Utrecht gevonden en gede- termineerd door G. A. Six. (HERKLoTZ, Bouwstoffe voor eene Fauna van Nederland, Deel II. Leiden 1858). —1p.— Opmerkingen omtrent de kleurverandering van Epeira Herii Hahn en eenige andere spinnen. (Tijdschrift v. Entomologie, D. I). —1p.— [Aanvulling van de lijst van inlandsche spinnen, in] Verslag van de veertiende algemeene Vergadering der Nederlandsche Entomologische Vereeniging. (ibid., D. II). " —1p.— Nieuwe bijdrage tot de kennis der inlandsche spinnen. (ibid., D. VI). Statistica fis. ed econ. dell’ isola di Capri, Vid. Amary. SrAvELEY, E. F., British Spiders: an introduction to the study of the Araneidæ of Great Britain and Ireland. London 1866. Srrack, C. F. L., Einige selbstgemachte Beobachtungen über den Som- merflug und die Spinne, die ihn hervorbringt. (Neue Schriften d. Natur- forsch. Gesellsch. zu Halle, Heft 5). Srrom, H., Beskrivelser over Norske Insekter. Forste Stykke. (Det Trondhiemske Selskabs Skrifter, Deel III, 1765). Andet Stykke. (ibid., D. IV, 1768), SuLZER, J. H., Abgekürzte Geschichte Schweitzerischer und ausländischer Insekten, nach Linnéischer Form, in 32 Tafeln und erlàuternden Vignet- ten. 2 Voll. Winterthur 1776. — Idem liber: Supplement, Vid. Ra@MER. SUNDEVALL, C. J., Specimen aeademieum genera Araneidum Sueciæ ex- hibens. Lunde 1823. 33. —ID.— Svenska Spindlarnes Beskrifning. (Kongl. Vetenskaps-Aka- demiens Handlingar for 1829, 1851, 1832). —1p.— Conspectus Arachnidum. Dissertatio academica. Londini Gotho- rum 1833. — 1p.— Arsberüttelser om nyare zoologiska arbeten och upptäckter, till Kongl. Vetenskaps-Akademien afgifne for aren 1837—1840. Stockholm 1841. TELLKAMPF, TH., Beschreibung einiger neuen in der Mammuth-Höhle in Kentucky aufgefundenen Gattungen von Gliederthieren. (Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte, 10 Jahrg., 1844, Bd I). TEMPLETON, R., On the spiders of the genus Dysdera, Latr., with the deseription of a new allied genus. In a letter to the Editor. (Zoologieal Journal, Vol. V: 1832— 1834). THORELL, T., Om hanen af Seytodes thoracicus Latr. (Ofversigt af Kongl. Vetenskaps-Akademiens Fórhandlingar, Arg. XI, 1854). —1p.— Recensio critica aranearum suecicarum, quas descripserunt Clerckius , Linnæus, De Geerus. P. I. Dissert. Academica. Upsaliæ 1855. —ip.— Recensio critica aranearum suecicarum, quas descripserunt Clerckius, Linnæus, De Geerus. (Nova Acta Regie Societatis Scientiarum Upsaliensis, Ser. 3, Vol. II, Pars Prior. 1856). Also separate: Upsaliæ 1856. 1858. 1858. 1858. 1860. 1868. * 1794. * 1847. 1789. 1863. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. XXIII THORELL, T., Om Clercks original-spindelsamling. (Öfvers. af K. Vet.- Akad:s Förhandl., Ärgäng XV, 1858). —1D.— Till kännedomen om slägtena Mithras och Uloborus. (ibid.). —ID.— Om Epeira marmorea och pyramidata. (ibid.). —ip.— Nya exotiska Epeirider. (ebid., Årg. XVI, 1859). —1p.— Om Aranea lobata Pallas (A. sericea Oliv.). (ibid., Arg. XXIV, 1867). —1D.— Eugenies Resa, Arachnider (Araneæ. Species nove minusve cognitæ), Vid. Eugenies Resa omkr. jorden. —ID.— [Arachn. from Gotska Sandön] Vid. Eisen and STUXBERG. Torr, L., Memoria fisico-medica sopra il falangio o ragno yenefico dell’ agro Volterrano. (Atti dell’ Academia dei Fisiocritiei di Siena, T. VII). Venezia e le sue lagune. 2 Voll. Venezia 1847. [Arachn. by CONTARINI, in Vol. II]. Vicors, N. A., Vid. TEMPLETON, On the spid. of the gen. Dysdera. VIELERS, C. DE, Caroli Linnæi Entomologia, Faunæ Suecicæ descriptioni- bus aucta; D. D. Scopoli, Geoffroy, De Geer, Fabricii, Schranck, ete. speciebus vel in Systemate non enumeratis vel nuperrime detectis, vel spe- ciebus Galliæ australis locupletata, generum specierumque rariorum iconi- bus ornata, curante et augente Carolo de Villers. 4 Voll. Lugduni 1789. — With a Number of Plates under the title: Nomenclator iconum entomologiæ Linnæanæ curante et augente Car. de Villers. Vinson, A., Aranéides des iles de la Réunion, Maurice et Madagascar. Paris 1863. *1826—34. Voyage de la corvette Astrolabe, éxécuté par ordre du Roi pendant les années 1841. 1802. 1805. 1806—08. 1833. 1826— 1829 sous le commandement de M. Dumont d'Urville. Zoologie, par Quoy et GarwaAgD. 4 Voll Paris 1826— 1834. WAGNER, M., Reisen in der Regentschaft Algier, in den Jahren 1836, 1837 und 1835. Mit einem naturhistorischen Anhang und einem Kupferatlas. 3 Voll. Leip- zig 1841. (Arachniden und Myriapoden der Regentschaft Algier bearbeitet vom Forstrath Kock in Regensburg, Zn Vol. III) — Vol. III also with the title: Bruchstücke zu einer Fauna der Berberei, mit besonderer Rücksicht auf die geo- graphische Verbreitung der Thiere am Becken des Mittelmeeres, nach der von Moritz Wagner in der Regentschaft Algier gesammelten Materialien, von J. F. Brandt, M. Erdl, W. F. Erichson, ©. L. Koch, H. Nathusius, E. A. Rossmässler, H. Schlegel, A. Wagner und R. Wagner. Leipzig 1841. WALCKENAER, C. A. (DE), Faune Parisienne, Insectes. Ou histoire abrégée des insectes des environs de Paris, classés d’aprés le systeme de Fabri- eius; précédée d'un discours sur les insectes en général, pour servir d'in- troduction à l'étude de l'entomologie. 2 Voll. Paris An XI.—1802. —ID.— Tableau des Aranéides. Paris 1805. —ID.— Histoire Naturelle des Aranéides. 5 Livr. Paris et Strasbourg 1806—1808. [The work has not been continued]. —ID.— Faune Frang., Arachn. (Aranéides de France), Vid. Faune Francaise. —ID.— Mémoire sur une nouvelle classification des Aranéides. (Ann. de la Soc. Ent. de France, T, II). XXIV 1834. 1835. T. THORELL, ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. WALCKENAER, C. A. DE, Synonymies de l'Aranea domestica de Lyonnet. (ibid., T. III, Bull). —ID.— Mémoire sur une nouvelle espéce de Mygale, sur les Théraphoses et sur les divers genres dont se compose cette tribu d'Aranéides. (ibid. T. IV). 1837,41, 47. —1p.— (and Gervais, P.), Histoire naturelle des Insectes. Aptéres. 1847. 1851. * 1855. [1832. 1843. [1844, 47. 1851. 4 Vol. 1837—1847. [T. I, II, IV}. —ID.— Sur une nouvelle famille du genre Tétragnatha dans les Araignées. (Ann. de la Soc. Ent. de France, 2 Sér., T. V, Bull.) WALKER, F., List of spiders captured by F. Walker. (Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., Ser. 2, Vol. VII). —1p.— List of spiders found at Piercefield near Chepstow. (Zoologist, 1855). Warr, M., Observations on the Aranea geometrica, obtextrix, domestica and other spiders, and particularly on the power they possess of fixing their threads horizontally or at any degree of inclination, to two perpendi- cular bodies at a considerable distance from each other, so as to suspend the circular part of their web in an open space: Also some remarks on the food of spiders ete. (Memoirs of the Wernerian Natural History So- ciety for the years 1826—1831. Vol. VI)]. WESTRING, N., Om stridulationsorganet hos Asagena serratipes. (Naturhist. Tidskrift, Bd IV, 1842—1843). —ID.— Bidrag till historien om insecternas stridulationsorganer. (ibid., 2 Rekke, Bd I, 1844—45; Bd II, Hft. 4, 1847)]. —1D.— Förteckning öfver till närvarande tid kinda, i Sverige forekom- mande spindelarter, utgürande ett antal af 253, deraf 132 äro nya for den svenska Faunan. (Gütheborgs Kongl. Vetenskaps- och Vitterhets-Samhälles Handlingar, Ny Tidsföljd, Hft. 2). —ID.— Anvisning att ändamålsenligt insamla och conservera Arachnider, förnämligast med afseende à spindlarne. (ibid., Ny Tidsföljd, Hft. 4)]. —ID.— Beskrifning pa stridulationsorganer hos slägtena Pachycoris Burm. och Seutellera Lamarck, af insektsordningen Hemiptera, jemte ófversigt af alla de hittills bekanta olika sätten für sädane ljuds framalstrande bland andra insekter (ibid.)]. —JID.— Aranes Suecicæ descriptæ. (ibid., Ny Tidsföljd, Hft. 7). Also sepa- rate: Gothoburgi 1861. Westwoop, J. O., Insectorum Arachnoidumque novorum Decades duo. (Zool. Journ., Vol. V, 1832— 1834). WmnrrE, A., Descriptions of new or little known Arachnida. (Ann. of Nat. Hist., Vol. VID. —1D.— Description of a new genus of Arachnida, with notes on two other spe- cies of spiders. (¢bid., Vol. XVIII). —ip.— Descriptions of apparently new species of Aptera from New Zealand. (Proceedings of the Zoological Society, Part XVII, 1849). WIDER, Vid.: Reuss, Zool. Mise. ZcHACH, J. J., Museum Nath. Gtfr. Leskeanum. Pars entomologica, ad systema entomologiz Cl. Fabricii ordinata. Lipsiz 1788. II. PRESES ILLUSTRIS SERENISSIMUS PRINCEPS AC DOMINUS OSCAR FREDERICUS SVECLE ET NORVEGIÆ PRINCEPS HEREDITARIUS OSTROGOTHUE DUX. MEMBRUM HONORARIUM PRIMARIUM SERENISSIMUS PRINCEPS AC DOMINUS NICOLAUS AUGUSTUS SVECIÆ ET NORVEGLE PRINCEPS HEREDITARIUS DALECARLIÆ DUX. A. Socii Regiæ Societatis Scientiarum Upsaliensis secundum electionis ordinem Honorarü: TROLLE WACHTMEISTER, Hans Gabriel, Comes, ex Primoribus Regni unus, Ju- stitie quondam Cancellarius, Reg. Ordd. adscriptus preefectus. IHRE, Albertus Elavus, Lib. Baro, ex Primoribus Regni unus, Rerum externarum a. h. Minister supremus, Reg. Ordd. adscriptus præfectus et Ord. S. Ol. e. m. Cr. Commendator, ete. FÂHRÆUS, Olavus Immanuel, Regis a. h. Consiliarius, Reg. Ordd. adseriptus pre- fectus et Ord. S. Ol. c. m. Cr. Commendator. IV SPARRE, Gustavus Adolphus, Comes, ex Primoribus Regni unus, Summæ Rei Ju- diciariæ a. h. Minister supremus, Universitatum Ups. et Lund. Cancellarius, Reg. Ordd. adseriptus præfectus, Ord. S. Ol. c. m. Cr. Commendator, etc. MANDERSTROM, R. Ludovicus, Comes, Rerum externarum a. h. Minister supremus, Academie Svecanæ Octodecimvir et Secretarius, Reg. Ordd. adseriptus præfec- tus, Ordd. S. Ol. et Danebrog. c. m. Cr. Commendator, ete. KREMER, Robertus Frederieus, Lib. Baro, a. h. Gubernator Uplandiarum, Ordd. St. Pol. et Was. e. m. Cr. Commendator, Ensiferorum Ord. adscriptus. HANSTÉEN, Christoph., Ph. Dr, Astronomiæ Pire Christianiensis emeritus, Ordd. St. Pol. et S. OL e. m. mach, etc. PLATEN, Baltzar von, Comes, Regis a. h. Consiliarius, Reg. Ord. adseriptus præ- fectus, etc. ANJOU, Laurentius Antonius, Th. et Ph. Dr, Episcopus Diceceseos Wisbyensis, Ord. St. Pol. e. m. Cr. Commendator. HAMILTON, Henning Ludovicus Hugo, Comes, Ph. Dr, Regis a. h. Consiliarius, Academie Svecanæ Octodecimvir, Reg. Ordd. adscriptus præfectus, ete. WREDE, Fabian Jacobus, Lib. Baro, Rei Tormentarii a. h. Præfectus Generalis, Ordd. Ensiferorum, S. Ol. et Danebrog. c. m. Cr. Commendator, etc. REGNELL, Andreas Fredericus, Med. Dr, St. Pol. Ord. adseriptus. FRIES, Elias, Ph. Dr, Botanices Professor Upsaliensis emeritus, Academiæ Svecanæ Octodecimvir, Reg. Soc. Scient. Ups. a. h. Secretarius, Ordd. St. Pol. e. m. Cr. et Danebrog. Commendator. Ordinarü Svecani: NILSSON, Sveno, Ph. Dr, Hist. Nat. Professor Lundensis emeritus, Ord. St. Pol. Commendator, ete. TORNBERG, Carolus, Joannes, Ph. Dr, LL. OO. Professor Lundensis, St. Pol. Ord. adscriptus. SVANBERG, Gustavus, Ph. Dr, Astronomiæ Professor Upsaliensis, St. Pol. Ord. adseriptus. MALMSTÉN, Carolus Joannes, Ph. Dr, Regis a. h. Consiliarius, Gubernator Vestro- gothorum, Ord. St. Pol. c. m. Cr. Commendator, etc. BJORLING, Immanuel Gabr., Ph. Dr, ad Scholam Arosiensem Matheseos Lector, St. Pol. Ord. adseriptus. SUNDEWALL, Frederieus, Med. Dr, Anatomie et Physiologie Professor Upsalien- sis, Reg. Societatis Scient. Ups. Questor, St. Pol. Ord adscriptus. GLAS, Olavus, Med. Dr, Medicinæ Theoreticæ et Practice Professor Upsaliensis, St. Pol. Ord. Baten! WAHLBERG, Petrus Fredericus, Med. et Ph. Dr, a. h. Reg. Academic Scient. Holm. Saone, Ord. St. Pol. Commendator. ARESCHOUG, mms Erhard., Ph. Dr, Botanices et Œconomiæ Practice Professor Upsaliensis, St. Pol. Ord. adscriptus. Vv NORDSTROM, Joannes Jacobus, Jur. Utr. et Ph. Dr, Professor, Archivarius Regni Svecani, Ord. St. Pol. Commendator, etc. CARLSON, Fredericus Ferd., Ph. Dr, Hist. Professor Upsaliensis, a. h. Consiliarius Regis, Academiæ Svecanæ Octodecimvir, Ordd. St. Pol. c. m. Cr. et S. Ol. Commendator, ete. SVANBERG, Laurentius Fred., Ph. Dr, Chemise Professor Upsaliensis, St. Pol. Ord. adseriptus. HUSS, Magnus, Med. et Ph. Dr, a. h. Collegii Med. Præses, Nosocomiorum Sveciæ Director generalis, Ordd. St. Pol. c. m. Cr. et S. Ol. Commendator, ete. HILL, Carolus Joannes, Ph. Dr, Matheseos Professor Lundensis, St. Pol. Ord. ad- scriptus. ANGSTROM, Andreas Jon., Ph. Dr, Physices Professor Upsaliensis, Reg. Societatis Scient. Upsal. Secretarius, St. Pol. Ord. adscriptus. SUNDEWALL, Carolus Jacobus, Med. Dr, Professor et Musei Zoologiæ Holmiensis Præfectus, St. Pol. Ord. adseriptus, ete. BOTTIGER, Carolus Vil, Ph. Dr, Linguarum Litterarumque Recent. Professor Up- saliensis emeritus, Academiæ Svecanæ Octodecimvir, Ord. St. Pol. Commendator et S. Ol. Ord. adscriptus, etc. HILDEBRAND, Bror Emil, Ph. Dr, Antiquarius Regni Svecani, Ordd. St. Pol. et S. Ol. Commendator, etc. EDLUND, Erieus, Ph. Dr, Physices Professor Holmiensis, St. Pol. Ord. adseriptus. WACKERBARTH, Athanasius Franciscus Theodoricus, Ph. Dr, Professor, St. Pol. Ord. adseriptus. LILLJEBORG, Vilelmus, Ph. Dr, Zoologiæ Professor Upsaliensis, St. Pol. Ord. ad- scriptus. ARRHENIUS, Joannes Petrus, Ph. Dr, Professor, Reg. Academie Agric. Holm. Se- eretarius, St. Pol. et Was. Ordd. adscriptus. BERGFALK, Petrus Ericus, Jur. Utr. et Ph. Dr, Juris Professor Upsaliensis emeri- tus, Ord. St. Pol. Commendator. BERLIN, Nicolaus Joannes, Med. et Ph. Dr, Collegii Med. Præses, Ord. St. Pol. Commendator et S. Ol. Ord. adscriptus, etc. LINDHAGEN, Dan. Georg., Ph. Dr, Reg. Academiæ Scient. Holm. Secretarius, St. Pol. et S. Ol. Ordd. adseriptus, etc. MESTERTON, Carolus Benedict., Med. Dr, Chirurgiæ et Artis Obstetricie Professor Upsaliensis, St. Pol. Ord. adscriptus. DAUG, Hermannus Theodorus, Ph. Dr, Matheseos Professor Upsaliensis. STYFFE, Carolus Gustavus, Ph. Dr, ad Reg. Academiam Upsaliensem Bibliotheca- rius, St. Pol. Ord. adscriptus. THALÉN, Tobias Robertus, Ph. Dr, Physices Adjunctus Upsaliensis, Reg. Societatis Scient. Ups. Bibliothecarius. SÀVE, Carolus, Ph. Dr, Linguarum Septentrionalium Professor Upsaliensis, St. Pol. Ord. adscriptus. AGARDH, Jacobus Georg, Ph. Dr, Botanices Professor Lundensis, St. Pol. Ord. ad- scriptus. FRIES, Theodorus Magnus, Ph. Dr, Botanices Adjunctus Upsaliensis. VI THORELL, Tamerlan, Ph. Dr, Zoologiæ Adjunctus Upsaliensis. LOVEN, Sveno, Ph. et Med. Dr, Professor et Musei Zoologiæ Holmiensis Præfectus, St. Pol. Ord. adscriptus. ALMEN, Augustus, Med. Dr, Chemiæ medicinalis et Physiologiæ Professor Upsali- ensis, St. Pol. Ord. adscriptus. Ordinaru Exteri: WERLAUFF, Ericus Christian., Regi Dan. a Consiliis intimis, Histor. Professor Hau- niensis, Bibliothecæ Regis Præfectus, Ordd. St. Pol. et S. Ol. c. m. Cr. Com- mendator. ANDRAL, G. Junior, Medicinæ Professor Parisiensis, Instituti Paris. Membrum. POGGENDORFF, Joannes Christian., Physices Professor Berolinensis, St. Pol. Ord. adseriptus. WEBER, Vilelmus, Physices Professor Gottingensis, St. Pol. Ord. adscriptus. HARSER, Henr., Medicine Professor Gryphisvaldensis. HANSEN, A. P., Observatorii Astronomici Gothani Preefectus, St. Pol. Ord. adseriptus. LASSEN, Christian., LL. OO. Professor Bonnensis, S. Ol. Ord. adscriptus. GRAY, Asa, Botanices Professor Bostoniensis, Societatis Scientiar. Americans Se- cretarius. AIRY, Georg. Biddle, Astronomus Regius Anglie, Director Observatorii Astronomiei Grenovicencis. REGNAULT, Victor, Physices Professor Parisiensis, Instituti Paris. Membrum, St. Pol. Ord. adseriptus. OWEN, Richard., Med. Doctor, Musei Britanniei Historie Naturalis Director. THOMSON, Vilelmus, Physices Professor Glascovensis. ROKITANSKI, Carolus, Anatomiz Pathol. Professor Vindobonensis. RANKE, Leopold., Histor. Professor Berolinensis. LYELL, Carolus, Reg. Societatis Scientiar. Londinensis Membrum. MAURY, M. F., a. h. Director Observatorii Astronomici Washingtonensis. BONSDORFF, Evert., Anatomiæ et Physiologiæ Professor Helsingforsiensis. DECAISNE, J., Botan. Professor, Horti Paris. Director, Instituti Paris. Membrum. LAMONT, J., Astronomiz Professor Monacensis, St. Pol. Ord. adscriptus. BUNSEN, Robertus Vil., Chemiæ Professor Heidelbergensis, Ord. St. Pol. Commen- dator. STEENSTRUP, Japet., Zoologiæ Professor Hauniensis, St. Pol. Ord. adscriptus. TISCHENDORFF, Car., Theologiæ Professor Lipsiensis, St. Pol. Ord. adscriptus. WEGENER, Casp. Freder., Regi Dan. a Consiliis intimis, Ordd. St. Pol. et S. Ol. c. m. Cr. Commendator. LE VERRIER, U. J., a. h. Director Observatorii Astronomici Parislengisg Instituti Paris. Membrum, Ord. St. Pol. Commendator. TASSY, Garcin de, Tae OO. Professor Parisiensis. DIEZ, Freder., Praesens LL. Romanic. Bonnensis. VII DOVE, Henr. Vilelmus, Physices Professor Berolinensis. LATHAM, Robertus Gordon., Medieinæ Doctor Anglus. MOHL, Hugo von, Botanices Professor Tubingensis, St. Pol. Ord. adscriptus. DECANDOLLE, Alphons., a. h. Botanices Professor Genevensis. DARWIN, Carolus, Reg. Societatis Scientiar. Londinensis Membrum. MILNE EDWARDS, Henr., Zoologiæ Professor Parisiensis, Instituti Paris. Membrum, St. Pol. Ord. adscriptus. ANDERSON, Thomas., Chemiæ Professor Glascovensis. BRAUN, Alexander, Botanices Professor Berolinensis. DELAUNAY, Carolus Eug., Mechanices Professor Parisiensis, Instituti Paris. Membrum. STOKES, Georg. Gabr., Matheseos Professor Cantabrigiensis. BECK, Christ. Petr. B., Medicinæ Professor Christiania, St. Pol. Ord. adseriptus et Ord. S. Ol. Commendator. GRAY, Joannes Edv., Musei Zool. Londin. Preefectus. HOOKER, Joseph. Dalton, Horti Botanices Kewensis Director. UNGER, Carolus Richardus, Historiarum Professor Christianiensis, S. Ol. Ord. ad- scriptus. STEPHENS, Georg., Linguarum Septentrion. Professor Hauniensis, St. Pol. Ord. ad- scriptus. ADAMS, Joannes C., Observatorii Astronomici Catabrigiensis Director. ARPPE, Adolph Edv., Chemize Professor Bonnensis. BISCHOF, Carolus Gustavus, Chemie Professor Bonnensis. SCHULTZE, Max., Anatomiæ Professor Bonnensis. VIRCHOW, Rudolphus, Anatomiæ Pathologice Professor Berolinensis, St. Pol. Ord. adscriptus. TYNDALL, Joannes, Physices Professor Londinensis. STRUVE, Otto, Observatorii Astronomici Director Pulkovensis. RAWLINSON, Henricus, Philologus Londinensis. MADVIG, Joannes Nic., Philologiæ Professor Hauniensis. MULLER, Max. Professor Taylorianus Oxoniensis. Litterarum commercio juncti: MAINARDI, Caspar, Matheseos Professor Universitatis Ticin. LITTROW, Carolus Ludov., Astronomiæ Professor Vindobonensis. SOMMER, Andreas G., Medicinæ Professor Hauniensis. KROIJER, Henricus Nic., Zoologie et Physiolog. Professor Hauniensis. HOLMBŒ, Christoph. Andr., LL. OO. Professor Christianiensis, Numophylacii Præ- fectus, St. Pol. et S. Ol. Ordd. adseriptus. GRUNERT, Joannes August., Matheseos Professor Gryphisvaldensis, St. Pol. Ord. adscriptus. HOLBROOK, J., Hist. Nat. Professor Charlestowniensis. SCHEERER, C. F., Metallurgiæ Professor Fribergensis, S. Ol. Ord. adscriptus. VIII BERKELEY, J. M., Botanieus Anglus. PERTZ, Ges. Henr., Bibliotheeze Regie Berolinensis Præfectus. TORTOLINI, Barnab., Mathematum Professor Romanus. RUPRECHT, Freder., Imp. Academiz Scientiar. Petropolitane Membrum. JAMIN, J., Physiees Professor Parisiensis, St. Pol. Ord. adscriptus. PAINE, Mart., Medicinæ Professor Neo-Eboracensis. WILDE, R., Medicine Doctor Dublinensis, St. Pol. Ord. adseriptus. KOREN, J., Medicinæ Doctor Bergensis. BECK, C. V., Medicine Professor Christianiensis, S. Ol. Ord. adseriptus. DANIELSEN, D. € , Medicine Doctor Bergensis, S. Ol. Ord. adscriptus. HOFMEISTER, Vilelmus, Botanices Heidelbergensis Professor. LAGGER, Freder., Medicine Doctor Freyburgensis. SECCHI, Angel., Director Observatorii Astronomiei Romani. " KIRCHHOFF, Gustavus Robert, Physices Professor Heidelbergensis, St. Pol. Ord. adseriptus. d'ARREST, H. L., Astronomi: Professor Hauniensis. MÜLLER, Ferd., Horti Botanici Melbournensis Director. CARRINGTON, Richard. Chr., Reg. Soc. Astron. Londinensis Seeretarius. HELMHOLTZ, Hermanuus L. F., Physiologie Professor Heidelbergensis, St. Pol. Ord. adscriptus. DE NOTARIS, Josephus, Botanices Professor Genus. REICHART, C. B., Anatomiæ Professor Berolinensis. ALLEN, Carol. Freder., Historiarum Professor Hauniensis. STEINTHAL, Henric., Philologiæ Professor Berolinensis. LASSEL, Vilelmus, Astronomus Anglus. DE LA RUE, Warren, Astronomus Londinensis. KJERULF, Theodorus, Mineralogie Professor Christianiensis, St. Pol. et S. Ol. Ordd. adseriptus. MARIGNAC, J. C., Chemize Professor Genevensis. GÜNTHER, Albertus, Zoologus Londinensis. TUCKERMANN, Edv., Botanices Professor Amherst. RECKLINGHAUSEN, Fredericus, Medicine Professor Vireeburgensis. ANGER, Joannes, Medicinæ Doctor Carlsbadensis, St. Pol. Ord. adscriptus. IX B. Socii Regiæ Societatis Scientiarum Upsaliensis I. In Classe Physico-Mathematica: (14) Svanberg, G...... 1843. Malmsten, ©. J... . 1843. Björling, E. G. . 1845. Svanberg, L. F.... 1850. ishills (ode ES 1850. Angstrém, A. J. Secret. 1851. BG Wks Ao ss 1858. Wackerbarth, A. F. D. 1858. iBenlin e Nee dor 1859. Lindhagen, D. G. . . 1859. Dans WE: Baar 1862. Wihalen; Tu Res = m. 1863. Almen, AS... 1870. Physico-Mathematica: (21) Poggendorff, C. J.. . 1844. Weber, V. 2.0... 1844. Hansen, A. P..... 1845. Ally, (Ce 1851. Regnault, V.H.... 1851. ikhomson, V. se qi 1852. La CP 1853. Maury, M. F. . 1855. AMONG Je. 1856. Butisen, B5 V.. ... em Veriers Us. Js 3: 1856. 1858. DOVE MEN... 180! Andersson, T.. ... 1861. Delaunay, C. E.... 1865. Stokes, G. G. . . . . 1865. Adams, J. C. . 1866. Arppe, A. E. .... 1866. Bischof, CO: G. . 1... 1866. yndal dis sores 1868. Sirve, Ole ..... 1868. secundum disciplinas Ordinarii Svecani I. In Classe Medica et Historie Naturalis: (14) Nilssons al): 1836. Tornberg, C. J. ... 1841. Sundewall, F..... 1847. Nordström, J.J... . 1848. Glas Ones & 1847. Carlsson, F. F. . . . 1849. Wahlberg, P. F.... 1848. Böttiger, C. V. ... 1853. Areschoug, J. E. .. 1848. Hildebrand, B. E.. . 1856. Hussein. 1850. Bergfalk, P. E. . . . 1858. Sundewall, C. J... . 1851. Styffe, OC. G. ..... 1863. Lilljeborg, V... ... IG SM SEN Ob RU EH 1865. Arrhenius, J. P. . . . 1858. Mesterton, €. B.. . . 1860. Agardh, J. G. . . .. 1865. INP M ME 1866. Dhorel ee 1866. DoyénjsS dedo man 1869. Ordinarii Exteri Medica et Historie Naturalis: (21) Andral, G. Junior . . 1843. Werlauff, E. C. . . . 1836. Hosen Hu... 1844, Lassen, (Us cs acu c 1845. Gira PATTES USB, IRENE, dU 55 6 m6 1852. Owen, hio o o 5 5 a6 1851. Tischendorff, C. E. . 1856. Rokitanski, C.. .. . 1852. Wegener, C. F. . . . 1857. Bonsdorff, E...... 1856. Tassy, G. de .... 1858. Decaisne, J...... 1806.20 Dre AR ero b ose 1858. Steenstrup, J- . . . . 1856. Unger, O. R...... 1865. Latham, R. G..... 1859. Stephens, G...... 1865. WOM, EE 6504000 1860. Rawlinson, H..... 1868. Decandolle, A... 1860. Madvig, J. N. .... 1868. Darwin, C....... 1860. Müller, Max. . . . . . 1869. Milne-Edwards, H. . 1860. Braun Ak 5 oo 40 6 1861. Beck, C. P. B. .. . 1865. CAYENNE EN ET 1865. Hooker, J. D. . ... 1865. Schultze, M. . .... 1866. Wirehows Re." 1867. 9 9 9 © © © © * 9 © we * * $ * IH. In Classe Historico-Archeologica: (8) Historico-Archeologica: (12) "A Litterarum commercio juncti I. In Classe II. In Classe II. In Classe Physico- Mathematica : Medica et Historie Naturalis: Historico-Archæologica : Mainardi, C...... 1844. Sommer, A. G. ... 1844. Holmboe, C. A. ... 1844. Bittkow, Ch 1D, 5 5 5 a 1844. Holbrook, J. . . . .. ISO, Pay, Ce BL 52.22 1852. Guuneri dis Ao 6 oo ISAO Berkeleya Jee. 2.221852 Allen ICONE EEE 1865. Scheerer, T. . . . .. 165% Pane. Wie oo6 oo 0 1859. Steinthal, H...... 1865. Tortolini, B. ..... 1856. Wilde, R 34... - 1859. daiwa, dk go od 8 oc ise. JKGNG Ve o 0.0005 1859. Secchi, AC nee 1862: Boeck Cy Vee EE 1861. Kirchhoff, G. R.. . . 1862. Danielsen, D. C. . . 1861. d’Arrest, H. L..... 1862. Hofmeister, V.., . . 1861. Carrington, R. €. . . 1865. Lagger, F....... 1862. Helmholtz, H..... 1868, MER, UE 1862. Kassel, Vemm 1866. De Notaris, J..... 1865. De la Rue, W. . .. 1866. Reichart, CO. B. . . . 1865. IK erul ME 1866. Günther, A. ..... 1867. Marignac, J. C. . .. 1866. Tuckermann, E. . . . 1867. Recklinghausen, F. . 1867. ANNEE dbs 0 0 cos. 1867. III. His Academiis vel Societatibus Scientiarum Acta Regis Societatis Scientiarum Upsaliensis dimittuntur. Boston, Chicago, Columbus, Madison, New-Haven, New-Orleans, New-York, Philadelphia, Saint-Louis, Salem, San-Fransisco, Washington, In America: American Academy of Arts and Sciences. Society of Natural History. Academy of Sciences. Ohio State Board of Agri- culture. Wiseounsin State Agrieult. Society. Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences. Academy of Sciences. Lyceum of Natural History. American Geogr. a. Stati- stical Society. Academy of Natural Sci- ences. American Philosophical So- ciety. Entomological Society. Academy of Science. Essex Institute. Peabody Academy. California Academy of Na- tural Sciences. Department of Agriculture. National Academy. Naval Observatory. Smithsonian Institution. Surgeon General’s Office. U. S. Patent Office. Melbourne, Cambridge, Dublin, Edinbourg , Greenwich, London, Manchester, Oxford, Amsterdam, Amsterdam, Harlem, In Australia: Roy. Society of Victoria. In Europa: Observatory. Philosophical Society. Natural History Society. Roy. Dublin Society. Roy. Irish Academy. Geological Society. Physical Society. Roy. Observatory. Roy. Society. Roy. Observatory. Linnean Society. Roy. Astronomical Society. Roy. Institution of Great Bri- tain. Roy. Society. Zoological Society. Literary and Philosophical So- ciety. Radcliffe Observatory. Kon. Academie van Weten- scappen. Kon. Zoologisch Genootschap. Société Teyler. Société Hollandaise des Sci- ences. XII Bruxelles, Bordeaux, Caën , Cherbourg, Dijon, Lyon, Montpellier, Paris, Strasbourg, Bern, Geneve, Lausanne, Milano, Napoli, Palermo, Roma, Académie Roy. des Sciences, des Lettres ete. Observatoire Royal. Société Malacologique de Bel- gique. Société des Sciences physi- ques et naturelles. Société Linnéenne de Nor- mandie. Société des Sciences natu- relles. Académie des Sciences, Arts et Belles-Lettres. Académie des Sciences, Bel- les-Lettres et Arts. Société d'Agriculture, stoire naturelle etc. Société Linnéenne. Académie des Sciences et Let- tres. Académie des Sciences. Ministère de l'Instruetion pu- blique et des Cultes. Observatoire impérial. Société Philomatique. Société des Sciences naturelles. d'Hi- Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Société Helvétique des Scien- ces naturelles. Société de Physique et d’Hist. naturelle. Société Vaudoise des Scien- ces naturelles. Reale Istituto Lombardo di Scienze e Lettere. R. Accademia delle Scienze. R. Istituto Tecnico. Accademia Pontificia de’ Nuo- vi Lincei. Torino, Dorpat, Helsingfors, Moscou, Pulkowa, S:t Pétersbourg, Berlin, Bremen, Breslau, Briinn, Dresden, Dürkheim, R. Accademia delle Sei- enze. Observatoire imperial. Finska Vetenskaps Socie- teten. Société des Naturalistes. Observatoire impérial. Académie imp. des Scien- ces. ' Commission archæologique. Observatoire physique cen- tral de Russie. K. Preuss. Akademie der Wissenschaften. K. Sternwarte. Physikalische Gesellschaft. Naturwissenschaftl. Verein. Sehlesisehe Gesellschaft f. Vaterländische Cultur. Naturforschender Verein. K. Leopold. Carolin. Aka- demie der Naturforscher. Pollichia. Frankfurt am Main: Redaktion der Zeit- Giessen, Greifswald , Gottingen , Halle, Königsberg, Leipzig, schrift: Zoologische Gar- ten. Oberhessische Gesellschaft für Natur-uud Heilkunde. Redaktion des Archiv der Mathematik und Physik. K. Gesellschaft der Wis- senschaften. Naturforschende schaft. Physikalische und Œkono- mische Gesellschaft. Astronomische Gesellschaft. Fürstlich Jablonowski’sche Gesellschaft. K. Sächsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Gesell- München, Prag, Presburg, Regensburg, Ulm, Wien, Wiesbaden, K. Bayerische Akademie der Wissenschaften. K. Hof- und Staats-Bibliothek. K. Bömische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Verein für Naturkunde. K. Bayerische Botanische Ge- sellschaft. Verein für Kunst und Alter- thum. K. K. Akademie der Wissen- schaften. K. K. Geologische Reichs- anstalt. K. K. Sternwarte. K. K. Zoolog.-Botan. Gesell- schaft. Verein zur Verbreitung na- turwiss. Kentnisse. Verein f. Naturkunde in Nas- sau. Kjöbenhavn, Reikiavik, Bergen, Christiania, Trondhjem , Göteborg, Stockholm, XIII K. Danske Videnskabernes Selskab. K. Nordiske Oldskrift Selskab. Naturhistoriske Forening. Universitets Bibliotheket. Islands Stifts-Bibliothek. Museum. Observatorium. Observatorium. Universitets Bibliotheket. Videnskabs Selskabet. Videnskabs Selskabet. K. Vetenskaps och Vitterhets Samhället. Geologiska Byrän. K. Vetenskaps Akademien. K. Vitterhets, Historie och Antiqvitets-Akademien. E edit? 72 E3904 reg 1 nn nn Wo SAUNA aM ue TW ee. | AHUTAIOAXMOZX JAMIAOLTNÈS AIT WO RIM OPEL stead 6r pie TR We JAN ML He UT ameet | 1 | d | À Mes ME À } $ i: ^ 1 i | , Mons n hdi "t. 25.3 E " LIN | rad | x DORIA ad AND a ara SS 10 00. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS BY T. THORELL. pr REVIEW OF THE EUROPEAN GENERA OF SPIDERS, PRECEDED BY SOME OBSERVATIONS ON ZOOLOGICAL NOMENCLATURE. WITH ONE PLATE. (PRESENTED TO THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF UPSALA, THE 13 FEBR. 1869). UPSALA, PRINTED BY ED. BERLING. 1869. L'auteur avait proposé comme titre du présent mémoire: Remarks on Synonyms of European Spiders, preceded by some observations on Zoological Nomenclature and a Review of the European Genera of Spiders; mais, la partie, insérée dans le Tome VII, étant seule présentée à la Societé des Sciences le 13 Fevr. 1869, il a été nécessaire d'y conformer le titre. LE SECRÉTAIRE DE LA SOCIÉTÉ. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 109 Sub-ordo III. TUBITELARIE. Syn.: 1817. "Tubitéles" LaTR., inr Cuv., Règne Anim. III, p. 81. 1893. Textores SUND., Gen. Aran. Suec., p. 10. 1825. Tubitele LaTm., Fam. Nat. du Règne Anim., p. 314. 1833. Drassides SUND., Consp. Arachn., p. 17. 1833. Araneæ Tubitelariæ Perry, Delect. Anim. Art. Bras., p. 192. The best way of briefly characterizing the Tubitelariæ is perhaps the following: all known spiders, which cannot be classed under any of the other sub-orders, belong to this! — Their ordinary form and appearance are too well known to need describing here; but within this polymorphous group we meet with transition-forms to many different families, not only of Retitelariæ and Territelariæ, but also of Laterigrade, Citigrade and Saltigrade — indeed of all the other sub-orders, except the Orbitelarie. It is probably impossible to mention any sure characteristic, that at once distinguishes these spiders from all the other sub-orders, with which they are thus related: I have therefore instead of this endeavoured, in the case of each of these latter, to indieate such marks of distinction as appear to me decisive of the limits between them and the Tubitelariæ, and I refer to what is said on this sub- ject under the heads of these sub-orders as well as under the different fa- milies of the Tubitelariæ. The Tubitelariæ, as we already know, correspond to LATREILLE’S Tubitele, but certain of the genera included by us in this division have been otherwise classified by other authors. Uroctea is often assigned to the Inequitele or Retitelarie, Filistata again to the Territelarie, Zora to the Citigrade, ete. To this we shall return in treating of the different fami- lies. — The Tubitelariæ seem, as we have also had occasion to observe, to be the lowest sub-order among spiders, that in fact, from which the others have mediately or immediately been developed. It may be divided into several families, whieh do not however all seem to be very sharply de- fined. To the usually received three European families, Agalenoide, Drassoide and Dysderoide, we add for the European fauna three more, Urocteoide, Hersilioide and Filistatoide, which 6 families we characterize as follows: I. Stigma tubi traehealis utrinque pone stigma sacci trachealis (pulmonalis) in latere ventris non adest. Oculi sæpissime 8. | A. Tarsi articulo unguifero aucti. Mamillæ superiores reliquis multo longio- res, articulis trinis aut binis: subtus tubulis textoriis præditæ. Series ocu- lorum 8 ambe recurve. Tarsorum ungues trini. . . . IL Hersilioide. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. II. 14* 110 T. THORELL, B. Tarsi articulo unguifero distincto carentes. a. Pars cephalica impressionibus lateralibus a parte thoracica sepissime distincta. Mamillæ superiores inferioribus plerumque multo longiores. a. Cephalothorax brevis, sub-reniformis vel inverse cordatus, parte cephalica parva. Mamille superiores reliquis multo longiores, arti- culis binis: 2% longo, compresso. Mandibulæ parvæ, debiles. Ma- xillæ in labium valde inclinate. Oculi 8. Tarsorum ungues trini. I. Urocteoide. B. Cephalothorax oblongus, parte cephalica majore, sæpissime elevata, convexa. Mamillæ superiores reliquis plerumque longiores et tum subtus tubulis textoriis præditæ. Oculi 8, rarissime (in gen. Hadi- tis) nulli. Tarsorum ungues trini (excepto in gen. Agræca). EC ce Ct Rc) OPEC P n d on a LE IIl. Agalenoide. b. Pars cephalica a parte thoracica non distineta. Mamillæ superiores in- ferioribus non vel parum longiores. a. Mandibulæ inter se libere, ungue medioeri vel longo. Labium non eum sterno coalitum. — Oculi 8, rarissime (in gen. Thysa) 6. Ungues tarsorum bini 6 EL 6 oo 6 6 6 0 0 IN, Ste B. Mandibulæ versus basin inter se unite. Labium cum sterno coali- tum. Oculi 8. Ungues tarsorum trini. . . . . VI. Filistatoide. IL Stigmata 4, bina in utroque latere ad basin ventris: anteriora saccorum, po- steriora tuborum trachealium. Oculi 6, rarissime (in gen. Séalita) nulli. Un- gues tarsorum trini aut bini. . . . . . . . . . . . V. Dysderoide. Fam. I. UROCTEOIDÆ. The few spiders belonging to this family appear to me to stand just upon the boundary-line between Tubitelariz and Retitelariæ, and might with almost equal reason be attributed to either of these sub-orders. By their or- dinarily short extremities, and in a certain degree also by their general ap- pearance, the Urocteoidæ exhibit an approach to the more short-legged forms among the Theridioida, e. g. Asagena and Euryopis. The small mandibles united towards the base show their relationship with the Scytodoidæ and Filistata. With the last-named genus and the Ænyoidæ they agree in the structure of the female's palpal claw, and with the Enyoidz also in the position of the eyes (the 8 eyes form two transverse rows, curved forwards); but they dif- fer from them in the absence of a separate claw-joint on the tarsi, in their entire general appearance, and especially in their spinners. (Conf. p. 106). We class them among the Tubitelarie principally because the superior (posterior) spinners are considerably longer than the others, and are, at least On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 111 in Uroctea, along the underside of the elongated 2" joint provided with spinning- tubes, thereby plainly showing the relationship of these spiders to the Hersi- lioide and Agalenoide. That they cannot however be united with either of these two fami- lies, follows from certain peculiarities in their organisation. The cephalo- thorax is short, reniform or inversely heart-shaped. The first joint of the superior spinners is very short, whereas the second is long, compressed, and almost lancet-formed. The anus is surrounded by a double crown of a peculiar kind of bristles, which, as far as I am aware, has not been found in any other spider, and whose functions are unknown ?. Respecting the different views, that have previously to the present time been maintained on the subject of the systematic position of the Urocteoidæ, we refer to what has been stated above, p: 105. Beside Uroctea Dur. or Clotho (WALCK.), I include in this group only the genus Œcobius Luc. ?. That the 6-eyed genus Sicarius WALCK. (Tho- misoides NIC.), which SIMON ?) refers to his "Clothéiens", i. e. our Urocteoide and Zmyeide, should belong to that group, seems to me highly improbable; I imagine that it ought to be referred to the Thomisoidæ, with which also according to GAY and NICOLET it is most nearly related ‘). Uroctea and (Ecobius are easily distinguished in the following manner: 1. Oeuli omnes rotundati, convexi. Cephalothorax sub-reniformis. Pedes ro- busti. Mamillæ superiores subtus tubulis textoriis vestiti. . . 1. Uroctea. 2. Oculi intermedii postici sub-trianguli, deplanati. Cephalothorax inverse sub- Conan, les mraGllones, o a s 5-6 o9 6 a 0 s n B QBUS Gen. 1. UROCTEA Dvr. (1820). Deriv.: ovoc, tail; xzeí(c, comb. Syn.: +1809. Clotho Warck., in Larr., Gen. Crust. et Ins., IV, p. 370. 1820. Uroctea Dur., Descr. de cinq Arachn. nouv., p. 198. 1) Durour, who did not succeed in observing any spinning-tubes on the spinners of Uroctea, and aecordingly supposed that these organs were not the true spinning apparatus, believed that "les véritables filiéres" were to be found between the cir- cles of bristles, and that the bristles themselves "servent de peigne ou de carde pour enchevétrer les fils dont l'araignée fabrique sa demeure." (Descr. de cing Arachn. nouv., p. 200). 2) Explor. de l'Algérie, Arachn., p. 232. 3) Hist. Nat. d. Araignées, p. 156. 4) Gar, Hist. fis. e. pol. de Chile, Zool., III, p. 351. 112 T. THORELL, 1837. Clotho WALcK., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 635 (ad part.: "1* Fam. Les Uroctées, Uroctee” ). 1864, - SIM., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 152. Type: Uroctea Durandit (W ALCK.). Before this genus of spiders received the name of Clotho, that name had already (in 1808) been appropriated by FAUJAS DE Sr. FONDS to a genus of shells (= Saxicava FLEUR.), and had therefore here to be replaced by the more recent, synonymous denomination Uroctea, given by L. DUFOUR. (Conf. p. 9, note 2). In U. Durandi the tarsal claws are coarse, strongly curved, broad * at the base, and have from the base to a little beyond the middle about 10—15 long stout comb-teeth, the points of which lie in an almost straight line. The inferior claw is comparatively small, with one tolerably long tooth near the base. The female’s palpal claw is very strong, curved almost into a half-circle, with about 10 strong blunt teeth, gradually, but slightly in- creasing in length when reckoned from the base, where they are very short. The second joint of the superior spinners forms in this species (the only one of the genus, with which I am acquainted) an angle with the short basal joint, and is directed obliquely upward; it is of considerable length and strongly compressed from the sides, almost lancet-formed, curved up- wards and inwards, rounded at the extremity, without any trace of a se- parate lamina there; the spinning-tubes form a narrow, close band begin- ning at the apex of the spinner and continued throughout the entire length of its inferior surface; they are cylindrical, small, and very numerous. The anterior or inferior spinners are short, with a plainly visible but short 2" joint. The intermediate spinners are very small. Gen. 2. ŒCOBIUS Luc. 1845. Deriv.: oëx0Buos, living in houses (oixoc, house; Bow, live). Syn.: 1845. Œcobius Luc., Explor. d. l'Algérie, Arachn., p. 101. 1847. T Warck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., IV, p. 386. 1864. |. , Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 157. Type: Œcobius domesticus Luc. This genus was created by Lucas loc. cit. for two small spiders from Algeria, Qc. domesticus and Œc. annulipes Luc., and were reckoned by him among the genera of spiders that have but six eyes. SIMON, who On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 113 4 ^N has discovered both these species in Spain, and has thus enriched the Eu- Wropean Fauna with this interesting genus, has had the kindness to send me a specimen of each of them, whereby I ues been enabled to observe, that this genus, as well as Tveta, has 8 eyes, and not only 6, as LUCAS and all others who mention it, have stated. The posterior central eyes, which were supposed to be missing, have however quite a different appearance from the rest. They are posited much nearer to the lateral eyes than to each Other, and of an oblong triangular form, with the longest side . turned ‘towards the lateral eyes; they diverge rapidly backwards with their points, whereas the obliquely cut off base-sides diverge forwards. They Sei show a more or less evident transverse depression passing from the longest side to the opposite almost right angle. They are very flat, and ar as glass, and very much resemble the similarly flat and clear, oval .. or almost triangular posterior central eyes “of certain Drassoidæ (e. g. of the À genera Drassus and Gnaphosa). 7** The anus is surrounded by a double ring of bristles, exactly as in the case of Uroctea. In Œc. annulipes the bristles of the outer ring are curved almost in the form of an uw. I have not been able to discover any row of spinning-tubes on the underside of the superior spinners. The legs are finer and slenderer in proportion than those of Uroctea, especially in (Ec. domesticus; but in other respects the species of Œcobius are in the highest degree similar to Uroctea, and SIMON very justly remarks: "Un observateur peu exercé prendrait les écobes pour de trés-jeunes clothos, tant l'aspect de toutes ces araignées est semblable" ?. It having been now .- shown that the number of eyes is the same in both, the mutual agreement between these two genera is still more striking. | The superior tarsal claws are slender, uniformly and much curved: in QEc. annulipes I have found those of the 1° pair of legs armed with about 10 comb-teeth, not long, but increasing in length from the base. On the 4" pair the claws are still more slender than on the 1*, with about 8 teeth. The inferior claw has 3 “teeth, the palpal claw about 12. All this applies to Œc. annulipes 2. BLACKWALL has, under the name of Œcobius navus, described a spi- der from Madeira, which has 6 eyes, infra-mammillary organ and calamistrum, 2 claws on the tarsi, and three-jointed (?) spinners with spinning-tubes on the underside. None of these characteristics however belong to the genus Œcobius Luc., and it is clear that the species described by BLACKWALL 1) Hist. Nat. d. Araignées, p. 158. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc, Ups. Ser. II. 15 114 T. THORELL, #* a GE & does not even belong to.the family before us. BLACKWALL has. proposed . a separate family for it, ut he calls GEcobüdce?), and which we also | bs have adopted; but as it requires a new name; we call the family Omanoidee and the species in question Omanus?) navus. (Conf. p. 44 above). +... a Fam. IL HERSILIOIDE. =~ - va The genus Hersilia, which was formed (1825— —27) by BAYIGNY a AUDOUIN in "Descr. d. l'Égypte” (T. XXII, p. 317 -0f the 2" Edit.) i as the reader, from the few details above ‚given (p. 109) under. the, head the family Bb silioide, is probably already aware, so peculiar, as Beauly ? to admit of being med with any of the other families that are referred. te the Tubitelarie. By SAVIGNY and AvbOUIN Hersilia was placed between the genera Arachne (Nyssus WALCK.) and Ærigone. WA ALCKENAER plages" this genus between Ctenus and Sphasus, and. refers it to his " Coureuses” or LATREILLES Citigrade, on account of a certain similarity, in the position of the eyes, to Dolomedes and Sphasus 5). It has the Same systematic po- sition in the works of Lucas — who nevertheless has remarked that, in his opinion, it belongs to another "section" or ought to form a new one 5 — as also in SIMON, who formed for it a "tribus", ”Herseliens” in the family " Lycosiformes" 5). Ducks ©) reckoned Hersilia to his "Micrognathes "or " Scythodés", SUNDEVALL to his Drassides, i. e. our Tubitelarie ),. C. Koch to the family Agelenides among these 5). It seems to me that the Hersili- cide stand nearest to the Agalenoide, with which they agree in the struc- ture of the spinning organs (especially in the spinning T es appearing not only on the extremity but along the underside of the superior spinners), and the Urocteoide, which they also resemble in the structure of the parts of the mouth: in that respect they also approximate to thé other pom $e or se 1) Œcobius navus was first described in 1859, in "Descr. of newly disc. spid. capt. by J. Y. Johnson” (Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 3 Ser., IV, p. 258); the family Œcobiidæ was formed in 1862, in "Descr. of newly dise. spid. from the Isl. of Madeira (ibid., 3 Ser., IX, p. 382). : 2) Omanus, mythol. prop. name. 3) Mém. s. une nouv. Classif. d. Aran., p. 438; — Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 202 and 372 4) Observ. sur les Aran. du genre Hersilia, p. 4. a 5) Hist. Nat. d. Araignées, p. 343. 6) Observ. sur les Aran., p. 160. 7) Consp. Arachn., p. 22. 8) Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 14; ibid., 5, p. 25. c ROPEAN SPIDERS. 115 E distinguished by Ducks as ”Micrognathes”, accordingly to the Filistatoide, = Seytodoide and Enyoide, of which the two last-named families have a se- + ' parate claw-joint on the legs, like the ZZersilioide. With the Citigrade this family seems to me to be far less nearly related. "Only one species of this remarkable family has, as far as I am aware, as yet been met with in Europe, viz. Hersilia oraniensis Luc., which “Smion has found in Spain, and of which he had the kindness: E send me a specimen (a young 5) under the name of ”Hersiliola oraniensis”. As this . "Species differs considerably from the typical species of the genus Hersilia, we form for ita new genus, with the name proposed by Simon, Hersiliola, “and we define it thus: . . 4. Tarsorum artieulus pnguiferus ipso tarso multo brevior. Mamillarum superio- ^— rum articuli bini: primus et secundus sub-æquales. Pedes 3% paris reliquis non valde breviores. ©... . . . . . . à. . . . 1. Hersiliola. © Gen. 1. HERSILIOLA x. : Dimin. of Hersilia, histor. prop. name. Syn.s 1845. Hersilia Tive., Explor. de l'Algérie, Arachn., p. 127 (ad partem). XX. 1847. wb — WaLck, He N. d. Ins. Apt, IV, p. 404 (ad part.: "2* Fam. Les , = Orthopodes, Orthopodes”). - 1864. “4 SIM. , H. N. d, Aggignées, p. 343 (ad partem). pne ve Type: Hersiliola oraniensis (LUCAS). A In Hersilia caudata Sav. et AUD., the typical species for Hersilia, the claw-joint of the tarsus is as long the tarsus itself, the superior spin- ners extraordinarily long, 3-jointed, and the 3" pair of legs in an unusual . degree shorter ‘than the other legs; even the armature of teeth on the claws is quite different from that of Hersiliola oraniensis 1). Lucas has himself explained the properties that distinguish 7. oraniensis from the other known ‘species of Hersilia; he formed for it a separate division of that genus, characterised by the shorter spinners and comparatively long 3" pair of legs, but considered these characteristics as not of sufficient importance to justify the formation of a new genus ?). ; 7 In Hersiliola oraniensis the superior spinners are about double as long as the inferior, and consist of two cylindrical joints about twice as . 1) Conf. Deser. de l'Égypte, (Éd. 2:) T. XXII, p. 317 et seq. 2) Explor. de l'Algérie, Arachn., p. 127. y uw [ex 116 T. THORELL, long as they are broad, and of about equal length, the second joint being somewhat conically terminated. This second joint on the underside exhibits. a row of (about 6) unusually long and stout spinning-tubes, about rh as the medium diameter of the joint, and terminating with a short. 0 cylindrical, truncated spinning-bristle. A similar large spinning-tube is si- _ tuated just under the extremity of the first joint. Moreover the end of that joint and the whole underside of the 2”! joint are occupied by a number of shorter and much finer spinning-tubes, which also terminate in a Some; what short, fine spinning-bristle. At the apex of the spinner a few spinning-- tubes of different sizes are observable. The inferior spinn as the superior, but scarcely half as long, somewhat tapering; their second joint is extremely short, the apex thickly covered with small spinning-tubes ’). - The intermediate spinners are somewhat shorter, and of much less diameter - than the inferior, cylindrical, with a few spinning-tubes at the apex. pj " E The superior tarsal claws are rather weak, but large, of unifor curvature, with about 10 or. Je d^ ABA UM) inereasing in length towards the extremity of the claw; the uttermost teeth are somewhat sinuated (i. e. curved a little in the form of an ») and divergent; the in- ferior claw is small, and has only one rather coarse and somewhat curved tooth. Thelßelaw-joint is plainly visible, a little slenderer than the tarsus, rather longer than it is broad. Inside ite joint, in my specimen (a © jun.) lies a new outfit of claws, ready to take the place of the old ones, which. fall away when the spider changes its integument. . This cingumstatiog Te have also noticed in younger specimens of species destitute of a separate Ms claw-joint, e. g. in an Alistopona, and it would seem therefore to be a ge- neral law, that previous to every moult new claws are formed within the tar- sus itself. OHLERIS’ conjecture, that the old claws are retained, and only ers are as thick = JAR their skin changed ?), is not reconcileable with these observations, and must 4 accordingly be considered as erroneous. In Hersiliola oraniensis (and perhaps in other species of the same family) it is a remarkable fact, that the palpus also of the male is armed with a pectinated claw. This is at least the case in the © jun. of this spe- cies in my possession. Only one similar case was previously known, that namely of Dolomedes fimbriatus, in which OHLERT has observed a pectinated claw at the extremity of the males as well as the female’s palpus ©). 1) These tubes are cylindrical, narrow, and apparently destitute of a spinning bristle at the tip (?). 2) Klauenbild. d. Preuss. Spinn., p. 2. 3) Ibid., p. 12. f Ag B » . " "^ ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 117 Fam. III AGALENOIDÆ. Syn.: 1837. Agelenides C. KocH, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 13 (ad max. part.). 1852. Tubicolæ DonzscH., Syst. Verzeichn. etc., p. 14 (ad max. part.). The Agalenoidie were detached as a separate family from LATREILLE’S Tubitelæ or SUNDEVALL'S Drassides by C. Kocu 1837 (loc. cit), and that family has since been acknowledged by BLACKWALL, OHLERT, and others. * In WALCKENAER it also forms a group, "les Tapitöles” , answering to one x sof our families. WESTRING on the other hand preserves SUNDEVALL’S Dras- LA © „sides undivided, and Reh assigns the Agalenoide to that family. Sı- ON has, as beu (p. 33), united most of the spiders belonging to this A, EIS with Lin yphia ane others, into a "tribus", "les Linyphiens” of the family "les Theridiformes” — a way of classing them, which, in y opinion, is quite inadmissible. Species of the genera Dictyna and Ti- ^ taneca have formerly, before their relationship with Amaurobius was detected, been reckoned as Theridioide, by e. g. WALCKENAER (who also has described a couple of species of Dictyna under the head of his Drassus), and Sun- DEVALL, and even still by SIMON and OnHLERT ). Hyptiotes on the con- trary, which builds a regular, geometrical net in the form of a circular sector, and is nearly related to Uloborus (vid. sup. p. 69 et seq.), has been er- -. roneously referred by AUSSERER ?) and CANESTRINI?) to the Agalenoide, to ^ which these authors, as well as DOLESCHALL 5), also assign Pholcus (and ‘Rachus or Spermophora), which I believe to be equally unnatural. The genus Teatrix, which exhibits sundry remarkable analogies with the Lycosoidæ, has sometimes, e. g. by Lucas 5), been placed in juxtaposition with genera belonging to this latter family, which also, through the me- dium of Dolomedes, nearly approaches the Agalenoide. But it never- theless appears to be generally admitted that the Drassoide are the nearest relations of this last-named family: the transition from the Agalenoide to the Drassoide is in fact so gradual, that the demarcation can only be made in a tolerably arbitrary and artificial manner; several genera, situated just upon the boundary-line between the two families, have therefore been re- ferred sometimes to the one, sometimes to the other, and sometimes they . have been formed into a separate family. Thus according to C. Kocx the 1) Aran. d. Prov. Preuss., p. 33. 2) Die. Arachn. Tirols, I, p. 14. 3) Aran. Ital., p. 65. 4) Syst. Verzeichn. ete., p. 14. 5) Explor. de l'Algérie, Arachn., p. 121: Gen. Lycosoides Lucas ad partem = Textrix SUND. er , "P; d X 118 'T. THORELL, « species forming the genera Amaurobius and Ceelotes belong to the Drassoi- de, to which also OHLERT refers the first-named of these genera, whereas by BLACKWALL and L. KocH Colotes is assigned to the Agalenoide, and Amaurobius (Ciniflo BLACKW.) is made the type of a separate family, Cini- flonide BLACKW. or Amaurobiide L. Kocn. These spiders are classified in i like manner by CANESTRINI and PAVESI?) Agreca and Liocranum, which’ C. KocH includes in his Agelenides, belong according to L. Kocx to the T Drassoide. BLACKWALL refers the species of Agraca to the former, those " of Liocranum to the latter family; and so forth. — If attention be fixed ex- _ clusively on the number (3) of the tarsal claws, Agreca must be detached" p" from the Agalenoide, though in its whole appearance closely allied to tha Es family, but having only 2 claws on the tarsus; if again, with OHLERT, we , assume elongated superior spinners as the indispensable characteristic of the „ = så Agalenoidæ, then we are obliged to exclude not only Agreca, but also Ar- Lx gyroneta, Cybeus and the Amaurobünæ. IL. KocH, in his excellent vore b on the Amaurobiinæ and Drassoidæ, detaches, in company with BLACKWALE, T as we have already seen, the Amaurobün® as a separate family on account of the presence of the infra-mammillary organ and ealamistrum; he appt ars to consider two-jointed superior spinners and three tarsal claws as essentially ; à necessary characteristics of the Agalenoide, and is therefore im doubt to = what family to refer Cybceus *), which, like the Agalenoide, has no infra- * - mammillary organ or calamistrum, but has only one-jointed superior spiny” L ners, and on account of its 3 tarsal claws cannot be referred to the Drass- oide. For my part I prefer, in determining the boundary between Drassoide and Agalenoide, to lay, in cases of doubt, the principal stress on the presence of a distinctly marked pars cephalica in these latter in contradistinetion from the former. Not only Cybœus, but also Colotes appears to me much more nearly related to Amaurobius than to the typical Agalenoidæ, and I am therefore obliged to consider the presence of the infra-mammillary organ and the ca- „ lamistrum, which distinguishes the Amaurobiine (but which also occurs in genera of the most widely differing families), as a feature of tolerably trifling importance *), and which barely allows the forming of a separate sub-family * for the genera of Agalenoide, which are provided with these organs. As regards the superior spinners, ‘their length varies sos considerably within à 1) Aran. Ital., p. 61—63. 2) Die Arachn.-gattungen Amaurobius, Ccelotes u. Cybæus, p. 4, 3) MENGE does not seem to lay any weight on the organs in question: at least he includes the genera Dictyna and Lethia (= Ciniflo BLACKW. ad part.) in his fa- mily Theridide (Preuss. Spinn., III, p. 244, 249). À 9 "ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 119 the limits of this family (compare, for example, Hadites tegenarioides and Tegenaria cinerea (cicurea)), that it does. not appear to me unjustifiable to refer to.it even genera, in which their 2" joint is so short, that it can only have spinning- -tubes quite at the extremity (Amaurobiine, Fe Agre- ca), or in which. it has been reduced to a mere flat lamina bearing the spinning-tubes, as appears to me to be the case in the genus Cybœus. That the inferior tarsal claw should sometimes be absent within a family, in which it is generally met with, is exemplified not only in the Dysderoide 3 and Scytodoidæ (Loxosteles) but. „also in the Zresoide (Palpimanus), and I therefore consider that I ought. to aggregate Agræca to the Agalenoide and not to the Drassoide, although it has but two claws, for in its general ap- pearance it seems to. .me to approximate much more nearly to the former than to Be latter. in cannot a. be denied that the family Agalenoide, as I have - understood its compass, comprises tolerably heterogeneous en and I therefore break up the European forms belonging to it into 3 sub-families, Amaurobiineg Agalenine and Argyronetinæ. C. Kock also divided his "Age- lenides” (nearly answering to,the two last-mentioned sub-families) into 3 such groups: ”Eigentliche Trichter-spinnen”, "Wanderspinnen" and ” Wasserspin- »n nen". 'The middlemost of these is an unnatural section, containing species, * which ought to be distributed among the Agalenoidæ (: Philoica C. Kocm) ; „and the Drassoide (: Anyphena). — We distinguish the sub-families and genera of the European fauna that belong to family Agalenoide according to the following scheme: § Nulla stigmata trachealia in medio ventris paullo pone plicam genitalem. + Organum infra-mamillare et calamistrum adsunt. . . . I ÅAMAUROBINE. A. Maxillæ in labium sub-triangulum inclinatæ. Pedes omnes aculeis carentes. 1. Oculi eine M inter se sub-contingentes; antici eorum a mediis anti- cis longius (diametro saltem oculi) distantes. . # . . 1. Dictyna. — 2. 'Oculi laterales et omnes oculi seriei anterioris inter se valde et æque appropinguantes- e 5 6 a6 6 5 6 a 5 2 Argennar . B. Maxillæ sub-parallelæ. a. Oculi laterales disjuncti. 1. Pedes saltem 6 posteriores aculeis carentes. Labium semi-ovale ; 3. Titanæca. 2. Pedes omnes aculeati. Labium ad basin constrictum, apice trun- catum vel sub-emarginatum. Oculi seriei 1”® sub- siete: medii postici paullo longius a lateralibus posticis quam inter se distan- ESA OA ET RER RE PT TU TIO SUSAN Mec ere DUIS. 120 T. THORELL, . AS a ” 5 b. Oculi laterales sub-contingentes, medii antici reliquis multo minores: medii postici inter se parum plus diametro oculi, at paullo longius quam a lateralibus posticis distantes. Pedes pilosi et setosi, non Acnledt.. - +de 9 se noie ER ge ee Co Lei ++ Organum infra-mamillare et calamistrum desunt. . . . . IL AGALENIN&. = Mamillæ superiores reliquis longiores, articulis binis: 2% acuminato, in la- tere inferiore, non in apice tantum, tubulis textoriis instructo '). P A. Oculi 8. " WT s a. Mandibule ad basin geniculato-convexe. Mamillarum superiorum articulus 2% 1% paullo brevior yel ejus fere longitudine. 7. Celotes. b. Mandibule dorso recto vel leviter modo convexæ, non ad basin. geniculate. a. Series oculorum posticorum, desuper visa, plus minus recurva vel sub-recta: simulque est mamillarum superiorum articulus 9*Us yix vel non brevior, plerumque longior quam 12%, 1. Series oculorum anticorum sub-recta vel recurva, posticorum, ex quibus medii lateralibus multo majores sunt, desuper visa fortiter recurva. Cephalothorax antice carinato-elevatus, fronte proeminenti. . +. . + - 2 = osten CMS 2. Series oculorum anticorum proeurva vel sub-recta; series po- sticorum, inter se parum inæqualium, desuper visa sub- _ recurva vel recta. . . = . . . . -' | 12. Histopnass ut B. Series oculorum posticorum, desuper visa, procurva vel sid reeta. a. Mamille superiores et inferiores in trapezium postice paullo latius vel in aream sub-rectangulam dispositis. ' I. Series oculorum anticorum fortiter procurva. 1. Series oculorum posticorum, desuper visa, procurva. . Mamillarum superiorum artieulus 2% 1% Tongior. . . i a ae eee tery Il. dL 2. Series oculorum posticorum, desuper visa, sub-recta. Mamillarum superiorum artieulus 2% 1™° saltem di- midio brevior. . . . . . «+ . . . 9. Vrypheca. II. Series oculorum anticorum sub-recta vel paullo procurva. Mamillarum superiorum artieulus 2% 1% sæpissime multo breviores :1 5 dues ueste Lei E UICE 1) According to BLACKWALL and some other writers, the superior spinners of these spiders consist of three joints; but as I have not been able to discover that the elevation, to which the joint considered by these authors as the 2", is articulated, is separated by any articulation from the abdomen, I cannot consider it as a sepa- rate joint. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 121 b. Mamillæ longæ, superiores inter se valde remote, cum in- ferioribus in lineam transversam reeurvam dispositæ, et iis fere dimidio longiores. Series oculorum anticorum sub-recta VE OWNED 3 olus 8 6 6 o o 5o So Gh JUD B. Oculi nulli. Mamillæ superiores valde longs, articulo 21 «que fere [one MALU Ms e rey acters cans ER RENE EME 4716 ** Mamille superiores inferioribus non vel parum longiores, in ipso apice tantum tubulis textoriis preedite. 1. Mamille superiores articulis distinctis binis. Ungues tarsorum bini. 0. d ob MION OE ome di ose URSS ER . 15. Agreca. 2. Mamille superiores articulo 2° exserto nullo. Ungues tarsorum trini. 6. Cybeus. * . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . . . - SS Pone plicam genitalem alia plica, stigmata trachealia duo in medio ejus sita continens, ad basin ventris adest. Pedes posteriores preesertim subtus (et in lateribus) pilis longis natatoriis vestiti. . . . . . . Ill. ARGYRONETINE. 1. Mamillæ superiores et inferiores eadem fere longitudine, articulo 21° brevi. Series oculorum antica fere recta, postica desuper visa paullo recurva. 16. Argyroneta. Dolomedes agalenoides WALCK. !) probably forms a separate genus of this family. Apostenus WESTR., the species of which BLACKWALL ?) appears to refer to Agalena, and which genus also AUSSERER ?) reckons to that fa- mily, we aggregate to the Drassoide, as also Anyphena SUND., which by C. KocH had been united with the Agalenoidee *). Sub-fam. I. AMAUROBIINÆ. This sub-family corresponds to BLACKWALL’S Ciniflonidæ, when we detach therefrom the genera, which belong to other sub-orders, and agree with Amaurobius or Cinilo BLACKW. only in having an infra-mammillary organ and calamistrum >). AUSSERER places these spiders, as also we do, 1) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., II, p. 454. 2) Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 151—162. 3) Die Arachn. Tirols, I, p. 151. 4) Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 26. 5) In MENwGE's Preuss. Spinn., Abth. III, which I received after the five first sheets of the present work were printed, several important observations on the infra-mammillary and the respiratory organs of spiders are communicated. MENGE thinks (loc. cit. p. 244) that the infra-mammillary-organ answers to the small coni- cal process (colulus MENGE), which in other spiders is seen immediately under or in front of the spinners, and that both may be considered as a separate termi- nal part (hypopygium) of the coalesced abdominal segments (?). In at least one spe- cies of the genus Dictyna, D. albo-maculata MENGE, two tracheal tubes have their Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 16 122 T. THORELL, in the family Agalenoide?). That in the form and armature of the claws they agree with the typical Agalenoide, has already been pointed out by OHLERT ?). Even in the cases, when the inferior tarsal claw has but two teeth (there are usually more), these teeth are distinguished by their form: they are long, curved, generally very pointed, and the palpal claw of the female is at the same time armed with several powerful teeth. The spinning-tubes are very small and short, sometimes, as in Dictyna, difficult to perceive. — The European species known to me may be divided into five genera: Dictyna, Argenna, Titaneca, Lethia and Amaurobius. Gen. 1. DICTYNA Sunp. 1833. Deriv.: Aéxrvva, mythol. proper name (of Diana). . Syn.: 1805. Theridium WaLck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 72 (ad part.: "7° Fam. Les Minimes, Minima"). 1805. Drassus ID., ibid., p. 45 (ad part.: 3° Fam. Les phytophiles apparentes, Phy- tophile conspicue" ). 1833. Dictyna Sunp., Consp. Arachn., p. 16. 1833. Clubiona Buackw., Charact. of some undeser. gen. and spec. of Aran., p. 437 (ad partem). 1834, Drassus ID., Res. in Zool, p. 337 (ad part.; sec. Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit.). [1840. Operaria..., in Proceed. of the Linn. Soc., I, p. 66.] 1841. Ergatis Buackw., The differ. in the numb. of eyes etc., p. 608. 1847. Argus Warck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., IV, p. 500: ("Fam. des Ergatides, Ær- gatides", ad max. part.). 1861. Dietyna WESTR., Aran. Suec., p. 382. 1861. Ergatis Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 146. 1864. Dictyna Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 186. 1869. 5 Menge, Preuss. Spinn., III, p. 244. Type: Dictyna arundinacea (LINN.). It is BLACKWALL that we have to thank for having assigned to this genus, which had usually before been reckoned among the Retitelarie, its proper place in the vicinity of Amaurobius, and for having united with it stigmata in the infra-mammillary organ, which Menge here (loc. cit. p. 248) even calls the tracheal area ("Luftróhrenfeld"). Conf. our note p. 30. But in other species of Dictyna, D. arundinacea or benigna for inst., the tracheæ do not open in the infra-mammillary organ, but just behind the rima genitalis, according to MENGE. —. The ordinary air-sacs are said (1. c., p. 248) to be rudimentary in D. albo-maculata. 1) AuSSERER, Die Arachn. Tirols, 1, p. 150. 2) Klauenbild. d. Preuss. Spinn., p. 9, 18. ©) On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 123 those species of Drassus WALCK., which WALCKENAER referred to the ” 5° fam., les Phytophiles” of that genus?) It is however still by SIMON, On- LERT and MENGE referred to the Zheridioide, from which the appearance of its claws is sufficient to distinguish it; the inferior tarsal claw is in fact armed with several (4— 6) long, curved teeth, which is never the case in the sub-orders Orbitelariæ and Retitelarie. As regards the name Operaria see below (p. 128) under the head of Gen. 5. Cœlotes. Gen. 2. ARGENNA m. Deriv.: "4oyevvóc, mythol. proper name. The spider for which we have formed this genus, and which we have called A. Mengei *), seems to occupy an intermediate position between Dictyna, Amaurobius and Hahnia, and on a hasty inspection reminds an observer strongly of the last mentioned genus. I have but two dried spe- cimens of it, a c? and a 9 (the first much injured), which I found many years ago here in the vicinity of Upsala. It is distinguished by the eyes of the anterior row being situated very close together, not more distant than are the lateral eyes from each other. In the form of the maxillæ and lip, as well as in the unarmed legs, this spider is nearly related to Dictyna, but the form of the cephalothorax and the mandibles is much the same as in Amaurobius. The breadth of the large, arched, thin-haired pars cephalica is nearly = 2 of the maximum breadth of the cephalothorax (in 9; it is somewhat less in 5). The eyes are of nearly equal magnitude, the anterior central eyes a trifle smaller than the others. The anterior row of eyes is straight, the posterior, when seen from before, curved downwards, when seen from above, slightly curved forwards. The distance of the anterior series from the border of the clypeus is a little greater than an eye’s diameter. The 4 central eyes describe a trapezoid broader behind; the distance between the 1) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 630. 2) Argenna Mengei. — Rufescenti-fusca, pedibus extus plus minus distincte fusco- annulatis, abdomine fusco vel nigro, sericeo-pubescenti, in dorso maculis parvis te- staceis picto: primum 4, fere in quadratum dispositis, quarum duæ posteriores, ma- jores, versus medium dorsi site sunt, tum pone eas pluribus, minutis, in tres series, versus anum convergentes, dispositis. Longit. c:a 2—2+ millim. (c? 3). Ad Upsaliam rarissime inventa. 124 T. THORELL, Duk X posterior central eyes is about an eye's diameter, and a little less than the distance between them and the posterior lateral eyes. "The eyes of the an- terior row, like the lateral eyes, are so near each other as almost to be contiguous. The mandibles are strong, and, seen from the side, almost pear-formed; when seen from in front, slightly tapering at the extremity, convex and somewhat projecting at the base, the length about double the breadth. The maxillæ are dilated at the base, sinuated a little inwards at the extremity, and somewhat inclined towards the lip, which is large, al most triangular, and rounded at the apex. The last joint of the female’s pal- pus is cylindrical, not gradually tapering. Legs short, of almost equal length, hairy, but without spines. The abdomen is short, inversely ovate; the spin- ners are tolerably far apart (almost as in Crypheca): the superior somewhat longer and thicker than the inferior, distinctly two-jointed, with the second joint slenderer and much shorter than the first. The superior tarsal claws are much curved, with about 9 very long, parallel comb-teeth of about equal length; the inferior claw is small, with two long, fine, curved teeth. The palpal claw has at least 3 teeth. Gen. 3. TITANŒCA. wx. Deriv.: tévavoc, lime-stone; oëxéw, inhabit. Syn.: 21805. Theridium Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 72 (”6° Fam. Les Cachées, Abscon- date”, ad part.). 1831. 2 Haun, Die Arachn., I, (ad part.:) p. 84. 1837. Asagena OC. Koch, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 13 (ad partem). 1850. Lathrodectus ID., ibid., 5, p. 23 (ad partem). ?1864. Theridium: sub-gen. Eucharia Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 165 (ad partem). 1867. Amaurobius Auss., Die Arachn. Tirols, I, p. 150 et 162 (ad partem). Type: Titaneca quadri-guttata (HAHN). I have found it necessary to create this new genus for HAHNS The- ridium 4-guttatum (= Amaurobius Kochi AUSS.; Ther. obscurum WALCK.?), which is widely different from both Theridium and Lathrodectus. It has in fact infra-mammillary organ and calamistrum, and is, in the form of the ce- phalothorax, mandibles, and parallel maxillæ, intimately related to the genus Amaurobius. Even the position of the eyes is almost identically the same as in that genus. In its broad, heart-formed sternum, in the absence of spines on the (6 posterior) extremities, and in its colour, it much resembles certain genera among the Theridioide, especially Asagena. The lateral LA A On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 125 eyes are however still more distant than in that genus, which is probably "the reason why C. KocH, after having first assigned it to Asagena, sub- sequently transferred it Lathrodectus. The anterior row of eyes is very slightly bent forward, almost straight. The mandibles are a little thicker than the femora, perpendicular, their back straight, only a little convex towards the base (in ©). The maxillæ are almost double as long as the lip, parallel, without impression, slightly rounded on the outside, straight on the inside, the apex rounded exteriorly. The relative lengths of the legs is 1, 4, 2, 3. The calamistrum is re- markably strongly developed: its bristles proceed from short, almost cylin- drical nipples, directed obliquely backwards, which form a row following the superior border of the compressed metatarsus. The inferior spinners are somewhat thicker and longer than the superior, two-jointed, with very short 2" joint. The palpal claw is armed with about 10 strong, closely set comb-teeth, pointing much forwards, and situated along almost the whole length of the claw: the superior tarsal claws, which are remarkably powerful, have about 9 stout comb-teeth directed somewhat forwards, and their free extre- mity is somewhat thickened in the middle; the inferior claw is small, but stout, with three pointed, curved teeth gradually increasing in length. I have found several examples of this species at Kissingen in Ba- varia, but only females and young males, under stones in dry chalky de- clivities. In these the 1* pair of legs have but one spine near the extremity of the thighs: according to AUSSERER (loc. cit. p. 163) the adult 7 has 8 pairs of short, knife-formed spines on the underside of the tibiæ of the first pair of legs, and the mandibles are excavated inwards and in front, as in Dic- tyna, but less distinctly. The 6 other legs are without spines. T. 4-guttata appears then to stand about half-way between Dictyna and Amaurobius, which latter it more resembles in its habits. Both AUSSE- RER and L. KocH !) have already expressed the opinion, that it ought to form an independent genus, distinct from Amaurobius. Gen. 4. LETHIA Mence. 1869. Deriv.: "Aj9ua, occulta”: MENGE (Aij9o = Aavddvw, to be hidden). Syn.: 1855. Ciniflo BLACKW., (ad part.:) Descr. of two newly disc. spec. of Aran., p. 120. 1861. , ID., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 139 (ad partem). 1869. Lethia MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., III, p. 249 (saltem ad part.). Type: Lethia humilis (BLACKW.). 1) Die Arachn.-gatt. Amaur., Col. u. Cybæus, p. 31. 126 T. THORELL, Ciniflo humilis BLACKW. (Spid. of Gr. Brit, I, p. 145, Pl. IX, fig. . 2), of which species I have myself taken a female at Pyrmont in Germany, - and received English specimens from the Rev. Mr. CAMBRIDGE, differs too much in the relative size and position of the eyes etc. from the genus Amaurobius (C. KOCH) nos. (Ciniflo BLACKW. ad max. part.), to be allowed to remain in that genus. This spider has recently been described by MENGE (loc. cit.) under the name of Lethia varia. — MENGE reckons Lethia to his Theridide. The superior tarsal claws of L. humilis Q are rather stout, much curved, strongly pectinated, with (on the 1* pair of legs) about 8—10 long straight, coarse, parallel and very close-set teeth directed a little forward; the inferior claw has two very long, curved, pointed teeth and a very small point behind them. The claw of the palpus is tolerably weak, uniformly and much curved, and armed with about 4 rather long and pointed teeth pointing forward and gradually increasing in length. Gen. 5. AMAUROBIUS (€. Koch). 1837. Deriv.: duavo6Buos, living in the dark (duavoos, dark; Bow, live). Syn.: 1805. Clubiona Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 41 (ad part.: "4* Fam. Les Parques, Parce”). 1837. Amaurobius C. Koon, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 15 (ad max. part.). 1841. Ciniflo Buackw., The differ. in the numb. of eyes ete., p. 607. 1861. » ID., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 139 (ad maz. part.). 1861. Amaurobius Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 373. 1864. 5 SIM., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 138 (ad mam. part.). 1868. x L. Kocn, Die Arachn.-gatt. Amaur., Coel. u. Cyb., p. 4. Type: Amaurobius fenestralis (STROM) (= Ar. atrox DE GEER). Instead of the name given by C. KocH to this genus, BLACKWALL makes use of the newer name Ciniflo BLACKW., on the ground, that KocH has united under the name of Amaurobius species, that can never be allowed to remain together under the same generic name, nay, that in BLACKWALLS opinion belong to quite different families '). That this reason cannot be ad- mitted, is easily seen: one would thus for consistency's sake be obliged to cashier a great many good and universally accredited generic names, e. g. both Theridium and Drassus, because WALCKENAER referred to them spe- cies, which belong to the genus Dictyna, and consequently to another fa- 1) BLAckw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 171. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 127 mily than either Theridium or Drassus. In these and similar cases it is "quite sufficient to detach from the old genus such species as one considers not to belong to it, and to assign to them a new generic name, as also BLACKWALL did, when he formed the genus Celotes of species detached from C. KocHS Amaurobius. In Amaurobius the claws are very nearly similar in form to those of the typical Agalenine, coarse and strong, with many and long comb- teeth; on the inferior tarsal claw the teeth are sometimes 3, sometimes only 2 in number, but always long, pointed and curved. Sub-fam. IL AGALENINAZE. In this sub-family we combine the typical Agalenoide, characterized by having spinning-tubes distributed along the underside of the superior spinners ), and also a couple of genera standing just on the points of transi- tion, the one to the Drassoide, and the other to the Amaurobiine, viz. Agreca and Cybeus. We accordingly begin with the last named. Gen. 6. CYBÆUS L. Kocx. 1868. Deriv.: cybeus, (a ship of burden;) thick and bellied (as such a ship). Syn.: 1839. Amaurobius C. Koch, Die Arachn., VI, (ad part.:) p. 43. 1864. + Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 168 (ad partem). 1868. Cybæus L. Koch, Die Arachn.-gatt. Amaur., Col. u. Cyb., p. 46. Type: Cybœus tetricus (C. Koch). On the systematic position of this interesting genus, vid. p. 118 et seq. In C. angustiarum L. KocH, the female’s palpal claw is slender, slightly curved, with a long extremity, and armed towards the base with about 4 pointed, rather short comb-teeth pointing forwards. Of the tarsal claws (of the 1* pair) the superior have about 9, the inferior only 2 teeth. On the 4" pair the claws are longer and slenderer, with very long extremities, and about 7 teeth, of which the outmost are rapidly divergent; the teeth of the 1) BLACKWALL seems to be the first who (in 1833) observed these spinning-tubes and showed the erroneousness of the commonly received opinion, that the long supe- rior spinners in the Theraphosoide and Agalenoidz were not spinning-organs, but a sort of palpi (anal palpi, ”filieres tentaeules") Vid. BLACKW., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 154. 128 T. THORELL, inferior claw are short and pointed. In C. tetricus the powerful superior tarsal claws have about 12 long, closely set comb-teeth, the inferior 3. — Of both the above named species specimens have been kindly presented to me by Dr. L. Kocx. Gen. 7. CŒLOTES BLacxw. 1841. Deriv.: xocldw, hollow, excavate. Syn.: 1820. Drassus Dur., Observ. gén. sur l. Arachn., p. 9 (356) (ad partem). 1830. 5 Warck., Faune Frang., Arachn., p. 169 (ad part.: "IV. Les Spéo- philes, Speophile” ). 1833. Clubiona Brackw., Charact. of some undescr. gen. and spec. of Aran., p. 436 (ad partem). 11834. Aranea Reuss, Zool. Mise., Arachn., p. 210 (216) (ad partem). 1837. Amaurobius C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 15 (ad partem) [1840. Cavator..., Proceed. of the Linn. Soc., I, p. 66.] 1841. Cœlotes Brackw., The differ. in the numb. of eyes etc., p. 618. 1861. 5 ID., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 169. 1864. Amaurobius Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 138 (ad partem). 1868. Cœlotes L. KocH, Die Arachn.-gatt. Amaur., Col. u. Cyb., p. 32. Type: Colotes saxatilis BLACKW. In a short notice of BLACKWALL’s above cited work, ” The difference in the number of eyes with which Spiders are provided," etc., in the Pro- ceedings of the Linn. Soc. for Apr. 21, 1840, we read as follows: "In the first tribe [Octonoculini] he proposes three new genera, two "of them belonging to a family, whieh he characterizes under the name of ” Ciniflonide: these genera he also characterizes under the names of Ciniflo, "founded on Clubiona atrox of LATREILLE, and Operaria, comprising the ” Theridion benignum W ALCK., Drassus exiguus BLACKW. and Drassus viridissi- "mus WALCK. The third genus characterized by Mr. BLACKWALL, is referred "by him to the family of Agelenidæ, under the name of Cavator: it is founded "on the Clubiona sawatilis BLACKW." From this we may conclude that in BLACKWALL’S above-mentioned paper, before it was printed, his genus Ergatis, or Dictyna SUND., was called Operaria, and Colotes, Cavator. Although I certainly do not think that an author has the right of arbitrarily changing a name, when it has once been published, yet in this case Cœlotes seems to me preferable to Cavator, and so much the more so, as no author of the notice that occurs in the "Proceedings" is named, and the two denominations in question, there in- On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 129 troduced, are not used by BLACKWALL in the work in which they are said to have been proposed, so that one has not even a right to cite BLACKWALL as authority for them. It is best to consider them as ”nulles et non avenues”. As may be seen from the synonyms, the species of Cwlotes have been referred to very different genera, and it was not till BLACKWALL had shown that their spinning-organs are of exactly the same structure as those of the typical Agalenoide, that they received a secure position in the vi- cinity of these spiders. In the typieal species the palpal claw is strong, of tolerably uniform curvature, and armed with about 7 comb-teeth, gradually increasing in length, and directed slightly forwards; the superior tarsal claws are long, strong, and armed with about 13 similar long and powerful teeth. The inferior claw has only two long, pointed, teeth. Gen. 8. TEGENARIA (LarR.) 1804. Deriv.: uncertain. Perhaps from réyoc, roof, or zfyavov, pan (with reference to the form of the web) '). Syn.: 1804 Tegenaria LATR., im Nouv. Dict. d'Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 134 (ad partem). +1806. Aranea ID, Gen. Crust. et Ins., I, p. 94 (ad partem). 1832. Agelena SUND., Sv. Spindl. Beskr., in Vet.-Akad. Handl. f. 1831, p. 125 (ad part.). 1837. Tegenaria C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 13 (ad max. part.). 1837. Philæca [Philoica] ID., ibid. 1841. Tegenaria Watcx., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., II, p. 1 (ad part.: "1* Fam. Les Fa- miliéres, Familiarie”, et ”2° Fam. Les Agrestes, Agrestc"). 1861. 1 Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 303. 1861. u Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 163 (ad max. part.). 1864. » SIM., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 201 (ad max. part.) Type: Tegenaria civilis WALCK. The generic name Aranea was in 1804 restricted by LATREILLE to the spiders now called Epeira, but in 1806 he adopted for them this latter name, which had been given them by WALCKENAER, and transferred the denomination Aranea to those that he had before called Tegenaria. In this signification it was adopted by several writers. But afterwards, especially since SUNDEVALL ?) called attention to the fact, that the order of Spiders in its entire extent ought to be called Aranee, the use of this word as a ge- neric name has gradually been abandoned. 1) In Acassız’ Nomenel. Zool. it is derived from " Téyea, nom. prop." SIMON (and also STAVELEY) thinks that it comes from ”zey7, toit; acow, élever”. 2) Svenska Spindlarnes Beskr., im Vet. Akad. Handl. fór 1832, p. 372. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. DI. 17 130 T. THORELL, We take the genus Tegenaria in the compass assigned to it by WESTRING, i. e. we include in it also most of the forms, which C. KocH and SIMON refer to the genus or sub-genus Phileca [Philoica]. As how- ever this last genus may at some future time be resumed, it will not be deemed superfluous to indicate here in a few words its relation to Tegena- ria properly so called, and to WESTRING'S genus Agræca. In consequence of C. KocH'S contradictory and confusing definitions of his Phileca, it is utterly impossible to determine, which species ought properly to be united under that name, unless we accept the limitations first given by him of Tegenaria and Phileca. When these genera were first separated (1837, in Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1), KocH expressly gave " Ara- neus domesticus CLERCK" as type of the genus Philwca, and at the same time set up as the type of Tegenaria, "Aranea domestica LINN.", by which KocH, as one sees from e. g. Die Arachn., VIII, p. 37, rightly understood Tegenaria civilis WALCK. But in 1850, in the 5" Number of Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., this relation is reversed: there we find reckoned up under the head of Tegenaria: T. domestica (CLERCK), 7. intricata, T. campestris, etc., whereas to Philæca are now referred 7, civilis, 7. atrica and near- related species, as also two spiders belonging to totally different genera, " Ph. notata" (Liocranum domesticum (REUSS) and "PA. linotina” (Agreca brunnea (BLACKW.)). In "Die Arachniden” (vid. Vol. XVI, p. 49) Kocx reckons to Phileca only these two last-mentioned species, and a third, "PA. ad- vena", which appears to be a young specimen of Tegenaria atrica. If then the genus Phileca is to be retained as separate from 7'egenaria, which how- ever to me appears superfluous, we are obliged by the law of priority so to limit these genera, that 7. domestica (CLERCK) may belong to Phileca, and Z7. civilis to Tegenaria, and not vice versa, as SIMON has done (loc. cit.). For Phil linotina C. KocH, which cannot be united with either of the above genera, WESTRING has very properly formed a new genus, Agroca, and has with so much greater reason given it a new appellation, as that the name Phileca is quite unreasonable for that species, which never lives in houses. Of WALCKENAER'S Tegenaria (loc. cit.) the first two (see Syn), and possibly also the 3' family ("les Brévilabes, Brevilabie") belong to Tege- naria NOB.; the 4" fam., "les Caudées, Caudate”, appears to agree with the genus Histopona NOB. The 5", "les Tisseuses, Textrices”, answers to SUNDEVALL’S and BLACKWALL’S Textrix. The superior tarsal claws are long and powerful, armed with nume- rous comb-teeth, in 7. atrica, for example, with 16—18 on the 1* and On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 131 about 15 on the 4" pair of legs. In this species the inferior tarsal claw has 4 long, curved teeth, and the female’s palpal claw about 10 teeth gradually increasing in length. In other species the number of teeth on the superior tarsal and on the palpal claw is somewhat less. Gen. 9. CRYPHŒCA vx. Deriv.: xovgos, hiding-place; oixéo, inhabit. Syn.: 1834. Tegenaria C. Koch, zm Hurr.-Scumrr., Deutschl. Ins. (ad part.:) 125, 26. 1845. Hahnia 1D., Die Arachn., XII, (ad part.:) p. 158. 1847. Tegenaria Warnck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., IV, p. 464 (ad part.; "69 Fam. Les Argusides, Argusides” ). 1850. Amaurobius MENGE, Verzeichn. Danz. Spinn., p. 63 (ad partem). 1861. Hahnia Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 315 (ad partem). 1861. Tegenaria Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 163 (ad partem). 1864. Agelena: sub-gen.: Hahnia Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 212 (ad partem). 1869. Hahnia MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., III, p. 251 (ad partem). Type: Crypheca silvicola (C. Koch). This genus I have thought it necessary to form for C. KocH's Hah- nia silvicola, which especially by the different arrangement of the spinners essentially differs from the typical species of the genus Hahnia. Even On- LERT ), although he refers it to Hahnia (as does also MENGE in his Preuss. Spinn.), thinks it ought preferably to form a separate genus. BLACKWALL refers it to Tegenaria, and unites the other species of Kocum's Hahnia with Agalena. It appears to differ from Hahnia also in the armature of the palpal claw: whereas this claw in Hahnia has no tooth or only one that is scarcely visible, it has in Cryphwca silvicola 4 or 5 long, gradually increas- ing teeth pointing slightly forwards. The superior tarsal claws have about 10 long, closely set comb-teeth; the inferior claw has 3 (4?) long, curved, pointed teeth gradually increasing in length. Gen. 10. HAHNIA (C. KocH) 1841. Deriv.: Haun, proper name. Syn.: 1841. Hahnia C. Koch, Die Arachn., VIII, (ad part.:) p. 61, 63. 1841. Agelena Brackw., The differ. in the numb. of eyes ete., (ad part.:) p. 619 ete. 1847. Argus Warck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., IV, (ad part.:) p. 465, 503, 506. 1861. Hahnia Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 315 (ad partem). 132 T. THORELL, 1861. Agelena Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 152 (ad partem). 1864. » : sub-gen. Hahnia Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 212 (ad partem). 1869. Hahnia MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., III, p. 251 (ad partem). Type: Hahnia montana (BLACKW.) (= .H. pusilla C. Kocn). The species belonging to this genus are referred by BLACKWALL to Agalena, from which genus they are however easily distinguished by the different position of the eyes, etc. — On the superior, strongly curved tarsal claws I have in the typical species counted about 8 long, powerful, close- set, slightly divergent comb-teeth; on the inferior 3: the female’s palpal claw is, according to OHLERT ), toothless or provided with one scarcely perceptible point below the middle. Also in 77. elegans (BLACKW.) (H. pratensis C. Koch) this claw is destitute of teeth, according to MENGE ?). — By MENGE Hahnia (with Crypheca) is now referred to the family Therididæ, from which it seems to me to be widely separated. Gen. 11. AGALENA Wauck. 1805. Deriv.: e priv., and yaAyvn, calm, tranquillity °). Syn.: 1805. Agalena [Agelena] Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 51. 1841. 3 " ID., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., II, p. 19 (ad part.: 1° Fam. Les Labyrinthiques, Labyrinthice”). 1861. » T WrzsTR.. Aran. Suec., p. 308. 1861. 5 5 Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 152 (ad partem). 1864. " » : sub-gen. zd., Sım., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 211. Type: Agalena labyrinthica (CLERCK). BLACKWALL assigns to this genus much wider limits than we can adopt, and even refers to it some species, to which the characteristics he gives of Agalena by no means correspond, and which we refer to Hahnia, Apostenus and Agræca. Even his Ag. Hyndmanni is hardly an Agalena, but still less does it belong to any of the three last-named genera. Also Ag. boopis CAMBR. *) seems to me to be the type of a separate genus: its anterior row of eyes is straight, and the central eyes of the posterior row are very 1) Klauenbild. d. Preuss. Spinn., p. 11. 2) Preuss. Spinn., III, p. 254. 3) With respect to the animal's rapid and restless motions. To derive this name, as some have done (Vid. e. g. Diet. Univ. d'Hist. Nat. par D’ORBIGNY) from &yél, herd, has no other foundation than the aceidental similitude of the letters in the two words. 4) Deser. of twenty-four new spec. of Spid., p. 11 (8571). On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 133 disproportionately large, protruding and wide apart, their outer brims extend- ing nearly to the entire length of the anterior row, according to CAMBRIDGE loc. cit. Of the two families into which WALCRENAER divided this genus, per- haps the 2", "les Nysses, Nyss@”, deserves to form a separate genus: Nys- sus WALCK. 18051) = Arachne Sav. et AuD. ?). According to WALCKE- NAER >), Megamyrmecium [Megamyrmekion] Reuss *) or Dyction WALCK. °) is identical with Arachne SAV. et AUD. The derivation of the name given above, is that generally adopted, and the only one which affords a rationel meaning to it. I therefore write Agalena, not Agelena, as is usually the custom. It is an additional reason for writing Agalena, that WALCKENAER himself, when he used that word as a specific name (in " Epeira agalena") always wrote it thus. The long, powerful, superior tarsal claws, in the typical species, have 10 or 12 comb-teeth, the inferior 3 or 4 long, curved, pointed teeth. On the palpal claw, which is more slender, I have counted 6 teeth rapidly increasing in length, and pointing more forwards. The superior tarsal claws of the 4" pair have about 14 teeth. Gen. 12. HISTOPONA wn. Deriv.: éords, web; zovéo, work. Syn.: 1834 Agelena C. Koch, in Herr.-Scuærr., Deutschl. Ins., (ad part.:) 125, 11. 1837. Tegenaria 1D., Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 13 (ad partem). 1841. A Warck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., II, p. 1 (ad partem). 1841. Textrix C. Kocu, Die Arachn., VIII, (ad part.:) p. 48. 1864. 5 [Tectrix] Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 219 (ad partem). Type: Histopona torpida (C. Koch). 2 The spider we have chosen as type for this genus has, as we see, been referred by C. Kocx first to Agalena, then to Tegenaria, and lastly to Textrix. To me it appears to stand about midway between the two last mentioned genera; it differs from Textriæ in that the cephalothorax is less high and less compressed in front, with a forehead that is not prominent, 1) Tableau d. Aran., p. 52. 2) Deser. de l'Égypte, (2 Ed.:) XXII, p. 314. 3) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., II, p. 419. 4) Zool. Mise., Arachn., p. 211 (217). 5) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 380. 134 T. THORELL, and that the eyes, of which the posterior lateral ones are almost of equal size with the central, are, when seen from before, arranged in two rows uniformly and slightly curved forwards; the posterior row, seen from above, is just a little bent backwards. In another, apparently undescribed species from Nizza, the anterior row is straight, or, if bent, bent rather backward than forward; the posterior row, seen from above, is scarcely perceptibly . curved backwards, and the second joint of the superior spinners is longer than the first. This genus differs from Tegenaria chiefly in the greatl elongated superior spinners, which are exactly like those of Textrix. C. Kocu’s Textrix montana?) belongs beyond a doubt to Æistopona, as do probably also the spiders, which WALCKENAER refers to the 4" Fam. "les Caudées, Caudate” *) of his genus Tegenaria. In H. torpida the claws are of the form usual in the Agaleninz, powerful, pretty much curved, with a long, strong extremity, and about 10 somewhat diverging teeth, of which those at the base are much the smallest; the inferior claw has 3 teeth, of which the inmost is very small. The fe- male’s palpal claw is slender, pretty much curved, with about 7 gradually inereasing, sharp teeth pointing forwards. In the above mentioned species from Nizza the superior tarsal claws are very closely pectinated, with about 14—17 teeth; the inferior claw has 3. ur Gen. 13. TEXTRIX Sunp. 1833. Deriy.: textrix, female weaver. Syn.: $1831. Aranea Dur., Descr. et fig. de quelques Aran. nouv. ou mal conn., p. 358. 1832. Agelena SUND., Sv. Spindl. Beskr., zn Vet.-Akad. Handl. f. 1831, p. 125 (ad partem). 1833. Textrix ID., Consp. Arachn., p. 19. 1833. 3 Brackw.. Charact. of some undescr. gen. and spec. of aran., p. 108. 1841. Tegenaria Waucx., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., II, p. 1 (ad part.: "5* Fam. Les Tisseuses, Texirices”). 1845. Lycosoides Lucas, Explor. de l'Algérie, Arachn., p. 12 (ad partem). 1861. Textrix WESTR., Aran. Suec., p. 310. 1861. ^ Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 171. 1864. À [Tectrix] Sım., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 219 (ad partem). Type: Textrix denticulata (OLIV) (= T. lycosina SUND.). 1) Die Arachn., VIII, p. 53, Tab. corxvir, f. 630. 2) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., JI, p. 13, On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 135 As regards our limitation of this genus, we refer to what has been said of the preceding genus, or Histopona. — The superior tarsal claws in 7. denticulata or lycosina are of the form usual in the family, but not particularly strong, pretty regularly curved, with about 10—12 comb-teeth gradually increasing in length, the outermost pointing forwards and diverging. The inferior tarsal claw has only ‘wo teeth. In a few other species (among which is 7: vestita or ferruginea C. Kocn) I have also found only 2 teeth on that claw. Gen. 14. HADITES Keryseru. 1862. Deriv.: (ys, Hades. Syn.: 1862. Hadites KExsERL., Beschr. ein. neuen Spinne aus d. Hóhlen v. Lesina, p. 3 (541). Type: Hadites Tegenarioides KEYSERL. Of this remarkable, blind spider, which has hitherto been found only in the subterraneous caverns of the isle of Lesina, Count KEYSERLING has kindly presented me with a female specimen. — The superior spinners are very long, two-jointed: the first joint is more than double as long as it is broad, and somewhat longer than the inferior, thicker spinners; the 2™ joint is not so thick as the first, but equally long, conically pointed at the ex- tremity, covered on the underside with very long spinning-tubes; on the apex of the joint a similar, very coarse spinning-tube is situated. Such a tube is found also at the apex of the slender intermediate spinners. — The palpal elaw is weak, pretty regularly and slightly curved, with about 8— 10 gradually increasing, pointed comb-teeth directed forwards. The tarsal claws are of the form usual in the Agalenine, somewhat weak, with about 12 long, pointed comb-teeth directed forwards; the inferior claw is small, with 3 long, pointed teeth. — KEYSERLING has found only 7 or 8 teeth on the superior and 2 on the inferior tarsal claw (loc. cit., p. 5). Gen. 15. AGRŒCA Westr. 1861. Deriv.: @ygotxos, living in the country (@yoos, country; oëxéw, inhabit). Syn: 1833. Agelena Buackw., Charact. of some undeser. gen. and spec. of Aran. (ad part.:) p. 351. 1843. Philceca [Philoica] C. KocH, Die Arachn. X, (ad part.:) p. 108. 1861. Agrœca Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 311. 1361. Agelena BLackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 152 (ad partem). 136 T. THORELL, 1864. Tegenaria: sub-gen. Philæca [Philoica] Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 202 (ad partem). 1868. Agrœca L. Koch, Die Arachn -fam. d. Drassiden, p. 2. Type: Agreca brunnea (BLACKW.) (= A. linotina (O. Kocn)). As regards the systematic position of this genus vid. sup. p. 118, 119. Concerning Phileca C. KocH v. p. 129: Gen. 7. Tegenaria. — The species of this genus are referred by BLACKWALL and CAMBRIDGE to Agalena, from which they differ widely by the totally dissimilar structure of the spinners ete. — In A. brunnea the female’s palpal claw is moderately curved, with 5 toler- ably long comb-teeth gradually increasing in length, and pointing somewhat forward. The two tarsal claws on the 1* pair of legs are pretty powerful, with about 4—6 strong comb-teeth; on the 4" pair they are thin and slender, much weaker and longer than those of the 1* pair, springing at a right or slightly acute angle from a narrow, high basement, and armed with about 5 or 6 sparse teeth gradually increasing in length and pointing somewhat forwards. Thus the form of the claws on that pair differs from that which is usual among the Agalenoidz, and indicates that Agræca stands just upon the point of transition to the Drassoide. As in these latter, the tarsi have no inferior claw. The inferior spinners are a trifle longer and thicker than the superior; their 2" joint is very short, scarcely perceptible, with rather few, short spinning-tubes at the apex. Sub-fam. II. ARGYRONETINZE. Argyroneta aquatica seems to me to deserve to be taken as the type of a separate sub-family, as well on account of its peculiar habits, as of the structure of its respiratory organs. Argyroneta has in fact, as has been shown by GRUBE !) and MENGE ?), two large tracheal tubes opening close to each other in a transversal groove, situated a little behind the ordinary genital- or "pulmonary" groove, in whieh the two tracheal saes have their stigmata. These large air-tubes run through the petiolum into the ce- phalothorax, there sending out bundles of fine tracheæ into the legs, palpi and mandibles etc.: near the stigmata they give off two such bundles for the abdomen?) In certain species of Dictyna, D. arundinacea for instance, 1) Einige Resultate aus Unters. üb. die Anat, d. Spinnen, p. 300. 2) Ueber d. Lebensweise d. Arachn., p. 23. 8) MENGE, loc. cit. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 137 the tracheæ have a similar distribution '). Also in Anyphena (of the family Drassoide), L. KocH ?) has discovered a transversal groove under the ab- domen, into which tracheæ probably debouch. With respect to the position of its stigmata, Argyroneta (as also Dictyna arundinacea etc.) is related to the Dysderoide, which have also 4 stigmata, of which two lead to tracheal tubes: but these stigmata lie, each behind the corresponding one of the stigmata of the tracheal sacs, at the sides of the abdomen, whereas in Ar- gyroneta (and Dictyna) the two tracheal tubes terminate near the middle- line of the belly. Gen. 16. ARGYRONETA LATR. 1804. Deriv.: @eyvoos, silver; véw, spin. Syn.: 1804 Argyroneta Larr., in Nouv. Dict. d'Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 134. 1861. á Westr., Aran. Suec., p. 367. 1861. a Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 136. 1864. B SIM., H. N. d. .Araignées, p. 127. Type: Argyroneta aquatica (CLERCK). In this spider the superior tarsal claws are large and powerful, al- most straight at the base, afterwards curved strongly and much downwards, with (on the 1* pair of legs) about 9—12 long, vertical, parallel comb- teeth, of which the 2 or 3 innermost are much smaller than the others. The inferior claw has 3—4 pointed teeth gradually increasing in length. On the remaining pairs of legs the number of teeth on the superior claws is somewhat less. The first half of the palpal claw shows about 6 some- what diverging teeth, of which the innermost is much smaller than the rest, Fam. IV. DRASSOIDÆ. Syn.: 1833. Drassides Sunp., Consp. Arachn., p. 17 (ad partem). 1852. Cellicolæ Dotuscu., Syst. Verzeichn. ete., p. 6 (ad partem). In the arrangement of this family — which may be considered as including all not laterigrade (nor saltigrade) spiders, which are provided with only 2 stigmata and only 2 tarsal claws, and are destitute of a distinctly 1) MENGE, Preuss. Spinn., III, p. 246. 2) Die Arachn.-fam. d. Drassiden, p. 194. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 18 138 T. THORELL, marked pars cephalica, and whose 2™ pair of legs is not longer than the others — I have adopted the limitations of the genera given by L. KocH in his excellent work: Die Arachniden-familie der Drassiden. As aforesaid however, I exclude from this family Agræca, which in my opinion ought to be classed among the Agalenoide, although it has not, like the other genera of that family, three, but only two claws at the extremity of the tarsus, as also Storena (Conf. p. 107). Apostenus is not received as a se- parate genus in L. Kocm's work; neither is Thysa adduced in it, this last genus having been later made known to arachnologists. The want of a distinctly marked pars cephalica, together with the presence of only 2 tarsal claws, distinguishes in doubtful cases the spiders belonging to this family from the Agalenoidæ, into which they gradually pass, through e. g. Apostenus in the one family and greca in the other. From certain not distinctly laterigrade Zhomisoidıe (Misumena), the Dras- soid are easily distinguished by the relative length of the legs: the 2" pair being not longer than the others. All European Drassoidz have 8 eyes, except 7Aysa, which has but 6. As their eyes, of which the two central ones of the anterior row are never considerably larger than the rest, are, excepting in Zora, arranged in two transverse rows, they are thus easily distinguished from the Attoide. From certain other (exotic) Saltigrade (Otiothops, Myrmecium etc), which approach near the Drassoidz in the position of the eyes, the Drassoide are probably best distinguished by their eephalothorax being less high and broad anteriorly. Zora in the po- sition of the eyes approaches the Lycosoide, but not only the number and form of the claws, but also the double row of long, moveable spines under the tibiæ and metatarsi of the anterior legs, indicate for that spider a place in the vicinity of Apostenus among the Drassoidæ. The structure of the tarsal claws is very various. While in the Aga- lenoide they are gradually tapering, more equably curved, they are generally in the Drassoide of a more uniform breadth and straight at the base, and bent downwards only towards the extremity. Yet the genera, that in other re- spects approach the Agalenoidze, as Liocranum, also have claws more like theirs than those of the typical Drassoidæ. Even among these we find that large and strong species, e. g. Drassus 4-punctatus, Gnaphosa lucifuga, have claws gradually tapering from the base. The claw-teeth are in general less numerous and stouter than those of the Agalenoidæ. In the genera, which, at least in the structure of the claws, form the transition to the Thomisoidæ (Clubiona, Chiracanthium), these organs are very elongated and closely pec- tinated with many teeth. The palpal claw is often entirely toothless; fre- quently it has a few, rarely many teeth. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 139 This family chiefly corresponds to WALCKENAER'S ” Nidicoles” ?), which group however originally ?) included also the Dysderoide and Micrommata (Sparassus), and in which he at last erroneously placed e. g. Enyo and La- throdectus ?). From SUNDEVALL LATREILLE'S Tubitelæ received the name of Drassides, which many arachnologists, e. &. WESTRING, continue to give them. Agalenoide and Dysderoide were however soon (1837) detached from them as separate families by C. KocH BLACKWALLS Drasside are pretty nearly identical with our Drassoidæ, as also SIMONS " Drassiens", which however also include genera which we refer to the Agalenoide. The European genera we include in this family may be distinguished in the following manner (Conf. L. Kocx, Die Arachn.-fam. d. Drassiden, p. 2): 8 Oeuli 8. + Maxillæ convexæ, non impresse. * Series oculorum postica, desuper visa, recurva. A. Pedes aculeati. 1. Oculi laterales inter se longius quam medii antici a mediis posticis distantes; series oculorum 4 posteriorum adeo recurva, ut oculi po- tius tres quam duas series designent. . . . . . . . 1. Zora. 2. Oculi laterales inter se non longius remoti, quam medii antici a me- diis posticis: series oculorum postica leviter tantum recurva. . : 2. Apostenus. (P5 MPedessnongaenleati RE NN 9 7:29:99 ee 2 Znachelas. ** Series oculorum postiea proeurva vel reeta. A. Abdomen subtus pone plicam genitalem aliam plicam transversam præ- beta p EM e Roo Cun mae det I PL HM. EE pham. B. Abdomen plica pone plieam genitalem caret. a. Mandibule ad basin inermes. a. Pedes 4" paris reliquis longiores. 1. Labium ad summum dimidiam maxillarum longitudinem sequat. sO die ve RENE EN e . 4. Liocranum. 2. Labium + brevius quam maxilla. . . . . . . 6. Clubiona. B. Pedes 1™ paris reliquis longiores. . . . . WV. Chiracanthium. b. Mandibule ad basin aculeo armate. . . . . 8. Phrurolithus. Tt Maxille in medio impressæ. * Cephalothorax linea media impressa earet. . . . . . . . 9. Micaria. ** Cephalothorax linea media impressa præditus. 1) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 202. 2) Tabl. d. Aran., p. 1. 3) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., II, p. 512; IV, p. 526. 140 T. THORELL, A. Series oculorum postica, desuper visa, plus minus procurva, et evi- denter longior quam series antica. . . . . . . . 10. Drassus. B. Series oculorum postiea, desuper visa, recta vel recurva. 1. Series oculorum postica sub-recta, non recurva, parum longior quam series antica. Margo posterior sulci unguicularis mandibularum in- tus inermis vel dentibus tantum parvis armatus. 11. Melanophora. 2. Oeuli laterales inter se evidenter longius distantes quam medii an- tici a mediis posticis; series oculorum posticorum sæpissime eviden- ter reeurva. Margo posterior sulci unguicularis mandibulæ intus in laminam dentieulatam (rarissime in dentem tantum fortem) produetus. sp eret eye P von wet Es PRETERITO RA SH Ocal Git fou inte arn ramo Spo dones ona E Gen. 1. ZORA (C. KocH). 1848. Deriv.: probably Cwedc, strong, fiery. Syn.: 1820. Dolomedes Dur., Descr. de cinq Arachn. nouv. (ad part.:) p. 204. 11833. Lycæna SUND., Sv. Spindl. Beskr., 2 Vet.-Akad. Handl. f. 1832, p. 265. 1833. 4 [Lycodia] 1D., Consp. Arachn., p. 22. +1833. Hecaörge BLackw., Charact. of some undescr. gen. and spec. of Aran., p. 193. 21847. Lycosoides Lucas, Explor. de l'Algérie, Arachn., p. 12 (ad partem). 1848. Zora €. Kocn, Die Arachn., XIV, p. 91 (ad partem). 1851. Lycodia, WEsTR., Förteckn. etc., p. 46. 1861. Hecaörge Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 41. 1861. Zora WEsTR., Aran. Suec., p. 324. 1864. » Sm., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 371 (ad partem). 1866. , L. Kocu, Die Arachn.-fam. d. Drassiden, p. 2 (ad partem). Type: Zora lycena (WALCK.) )). The species of this genus were by WALCKENAER and others united with Dolomedes among the Lycosoide; they really constitute a transition from the Drassoide to that family, from which however, as is justly remarked by WESTRING, they are excluded by their low and weak cephalothorax, the peculiar spines with which the legs are armed, their habits etc., as also by the number and form of the claws, to which OHLERT has drawn attention. 1) Durour has already in 1820 (loc. cit.) given the specific name spinimanus to another spider belonging to the genus Zora, and accordingly the typical species, Z. spinimana (SunD.), must be denominated by the specific name next following in order of time (/ycena Warck.), under which it has been described. The older names produced by WALCKENAER and Simon as synonyms, Dolomedes errans Dur. and D. hippomane Sav. et Aup., assuredly do not belong to Zora spinimana (SUND.). On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 141 Nevertheless they have been considered as Lycosoidz by most writers, e. g. by C. Koch, BLACKWALL, SIMON. — Zora ocreata C. Koch ?) probably does not belong to this genus. The name Lycodia SUND. (Consp. Arachn.) is either a slip of the pen or a misprint for Lycena, as is evident partly from the passage cited in the Consp. Arachn.: ” Lycodia Act. Holm. 1832" — in Act. Holm. (Vet.-Akad. Handl.) 1832 the word is Lycena, not Lycodia — partly from SUNDEVALL’S own express declaration in ”Ärsber. om nyare zool. arb. o. uppt. 1837—40", p. 940. It is on this account that the name Zora is to be preferred to Lycodia. The names Lycena and Hecaérge were already applied to genera of butterflies before they were given to the spiders now under considera- tion ?. Conf. WESTRING, Aran. Suec., p. 325. In the typical species the tarsal claws are weak, slender, and of almost uniform breadth (but somewhat stronger at the place which bears the teeth), issuing from a high base, uniformly and much curved. The inner claw has about 4 or 5 saw-teeth, gradually increasing in length, of which the outermost are pointed, those nearest the base blunt and very short. The outer claw has but from 2 to 4 teeth 3), the innermost tooth being situated under the middle of the claw. The hair-tuft under the claws is rather small, the hairs shorter than the claws and dilated towards the extremity. The female’s palpal claw is very small, uniformly and pretty much curved, with 3 or 4 short, triangular teeth gradually increasing in length. Gen. 2. APOSTENUS Wesrr. 1851. Deriv.: aroorevow, to make narrow (orevóc, narrow). Syn.: ?1841. Agelena Brackw., The differ. in the numb. of eyes ete., (ad part.:) p. 624. 21847. Argus Warck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., IV, p. 504 (ad part.: "Fam. des Agele- : nides, Agelenides”). 1851. Apostenus Wesrr., Förteckn. etc., p. 46. 1861. 5 ID., Aran. Suec., p. 322. ?1861. Agelena Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 152 (ad partem). ?1861. Drassus CAMBR., Descr. of ten new spec. of spid. lately dise. in Engl. (ad part.:), p. 3 (450). 1866. Zora L. Koch, Die Arachn.-fam. d. Drassiden, p. 2 (ad partem). Type: .Apostenus fuscus WESTR. 1) Die Araehn., XIV, p. 105. 2) Lycena FaBR. [Lepidopt.] 1808. — Hecaörge Ocusenu. [Lepidopt.] 1816. 3) According to OHLERT (Klauenbild. d. Preuss. Spinn., p. 17), the teeth of the tarsal claws are more numerous, 7 and 4 respectively. 142 T. THORELL, This genus, which is not received by L. KocH in his.” Die Arachn.- fam. d. Drassiden", appears to me to form a transition from the Drassoidæ, on the one side to the Agalenoide, and on the other through Zora to the Lycosoide. By BLACKWALL a couple of species belonging, as far as I can see, to this genus, are referred to Agalena, namely his A. celans and gra- cilipes 1), — A. fuscus WESTR. I have found at Kissingen in Bavaria, and af- terwards also at Söderköping in Sweden; another species is described by AUSSERER ?) under the name of A. saxatilis. The tarsal claws of A. fuscus are weak, much curved, and provided nearer the base with 4—5 divergent, rather long comb-teeth gradually in- creasing in length. On a conical process beneath them are only two, co- lossal hairs (the claw-tuft), in the form of flat thin slices, narrow at the base, gradually dilated, and cut off obliquely at the broad extremity. They are much longer than the claws. The palpal claw, which is weak like those of the tarsi, has 2 or 3 teeth pointing forward, near its base. To Apostenus or some nearly related genus belongs perhaps Aranea spuucrus Dur. *), which however is by WALCKENAER referred to the genus Sparassus or Micrommata *), as also Drassus sub-niger CAMBR. loc. cit. *Gen. 3. TRACHELAS L. Kocx. 1866. Deriv.: teaxndds, thick-necked. Syn.: 1866. Trachelas L. Koch, Die Arachn.-fam. d. Drassiden, p. 2. Type: ? This South-European genus is known to me only by the few words with which it is characterized by L. Kocu in the above cited passage. Iam not even sure that I have assigned it a right place in my schema, for L. KocH does not say that the posterior row of eyes, seen from above, is curved backwards, but only: "die hintere Augenreihe durch Tieferstehen der Mittelaugen gebogen.” CANESTRINI and Pavesi 5) refer Trachelas to the The- ridioidæ, not to the Drassoide. 1) Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 161, 162, Pl. X, fig. 103, 104. — A. celans BLACKW. is by CaNEsTRINI and Pavesi (Aran. Ital, p. 37) referred to the genus Ziocranum of L. Kocn. 2) Die Arachn. Tirols, I, p. 163. 3) Deser. et fig. de quelques Aran. nouv. ou mal connues, p. 361, PI. X, fig. 3. 4) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 586. 5) Araneidi Italiani, p. 46. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 143 Gen. 4. LIOCRANUM L. Kocu. 1866. Deriv.: Aetos, smooth; xo&vov, head, skull. Syn.: 1834. Tegenaria C. Kocn, in Herr.-Scumer, Deutschl. Ins. , 124, (ad part.:) 4, 15. 1834. Clubiona Reuss, Zool. Mise., Araehn., (ad part.:) p. 208 (214). 1841. Phileeca [Philoica] C. Koch, Die Arachn., VIII, (ad part.:) p. 55. 1861. Clubiona Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 121 (ad partem). 21861. Drassus CAMBR., Deser. of ten new spec. of spid. lately dise. in Engl, (ad part.:) p. 1 (428). 1866. Liocranum L. Kocn, Die Arachn.-fam. d. Drassiden, pene: Type: Liocranum domesticum (Reuss). The typical species of this genus, formed by L. Koon, belongs also to the Fauna of Sweden: I found a few half-grown specimens under stones at Söderköping in the summer of 1862. BLACKWALL still refers it to Clu- biona. — The tarsal claws are pretty strong, short, with about 5 divergent teeth on the 1* pair of legs. On the 4" pair the claws are somewhat longer and weaker, also with 5 teeth. There is no claw-tuft. The pal- pal claw is pretty much curved, with about 3 teeth. Drassus prelongipes CAMBR. loc. cit. appears to belong to this genus. Gen. 5. ANYPHÆNA Sunp. 1833. Deriv.: evygaivm, unravel a web. Sun.: 1805. Clubiona Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 41 (ad part.: “2° Fam. Les Hamadrya- des, Hamadryades”). 1832. Agelena SUND., Sv. Spindl. Beskr., zn Vet.-Akad. Handl. f. 1831, p. 125 (ad partem). , 1833. Anyphæna ID., Consp. Arachn., p. 20. 1861. a Westr., Aran. Suec., p. 370. 1861. Clubiona Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 121 (ad partem). 1864. a Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 131 (ad partem). 1866. Anyphæna L. Kock, Die Arachn.-fam. d. Drassiden, p. 2, 194. Type: Anyphena accentuata (WALCK.). The genus Anyphena, still by BLACKWALL included in Clubiona, was formed by SUNDEVALL in 1833 (loc. cit.) for WALCKENAER’S Clubiona accentuata. To this genus C. Kocx subsequently, in 18371), referred, to- 1) Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 18. 144 T. THORELL, gether with this or the typical species, also Clubiona nutrix WALCK., which he however some time afterwards detached from Anyphena and united with a couple of other species into a new genus, Chiracanthium. To take, as SIMON has done, the generic name of Anyphena for just these species, which SUNDEVALL never referred to that genus, is of course an error. L. KocH has discovered (vid. loc. cit., p. 194) that Anyphena is distinguished by both sexes having on the underside of the abdomen, some- times in the middle of the belly, sometimes a little fore or aft of that point, a small transversal groove or fold of the skin. I imagine that in this groove there are one or two tracheal stigmata, as is the case with e. gr. Argyro- neta aquatica, which has a similar groove under the anterior part of the belly. (Vid. sup. p. 136). The tarsal claws of A. accentuata are rather small, strong, with about 14—20 long, closely set comb-teeth on the inner claw and only about half that number on the outer. The claw-tuft is formed of uncommonly broad, flattened, platelike hairs, which are dilated outwards, cut almost transversely at the extremity, and somewhat longer than the claw. Gen. 6. CLUBIONA (Larm.). 1804. Deriv. unknown '). Syn.: 1804. Clubiona Larr., in Nouv. Dict. d’Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 134 (ad partem). 1805. " Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 41 (ad part.: saltem "1* Fam. Les Dryades, Dryades "). 1861. A Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 388. 1861. " Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 121 (ad partem). 1864. rf Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 131 (ad max. partem). 1866. " L. Kocu, Die Arachn.-fam. d. Drassiden, p. 2, 291. Type: Clubiona holosericea (DE GEER). This genus is still preserved almost in its original compass, as more accurately limited by WALCKENAER, by, for example, BLACKWALL, who however detaches from it the species, which, in consequence of their having an infra-mammillary organ and calamistrum, he refers to Ciniflo (Amau- robius). The tarsal claws of these spiders are rather long, almost straight, curved only at the extremity, closely pectinated with long, strong teeth, 1) The usually received etymology, x4éoc, fame; from, live, seems highly im- probable. — Perhaps the name is formed of »Awßiov, a bird-trap (with reference to the sack-like tube which these spiders inhabit). ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 145 about double as many on the interior as on the exterior claw. The chief part of the claw forms almost a right angle with its base. The claw-tuft varies greatly; in the larger species it is strongly developed, especially on the 4" pair of legs, where the hairs are long and thin and more numerous than on the 1* pair, and almost similar to the tuft-hairs of Chiracanthium. The claws themselves are also on that pair considerably longer than on the 1" pair. The palpal claw is small and without teeth. Gen. 7. CHIRACANTHIUM C. Kocu. 1839. Deriv.: yeéo, hand; dxév9vov, little thorn (@xavda, thorn). Syn.: 1805. Clubiona Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 41 ("3* Fam. Les Nymphes, Nympha" ad part.). 1834. Drassus Reuss, Zool. Misc., Arachn., (ad part.:) p. 204 (210). 1837. Anyphæna C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 18 (ad partem). 1839. Chiracanthium [Cheiracanthium] 1D., Die Arachn., VI, p. 9. 1861. $ Jf Westr.. Aran. Suec., p. 377. 1861. Clubiona Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 121 (ad partem). 1864. Anyphæna Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 144 (saltem ad part.). 1866. Chiracanthium [Cheiracanthium] L. KocH, Die Arachn.-fam. d. Drassiden, p. 25 GNIS Type: Chiracanthium nutrix (WALCK.). BLACKWALL refers the species of this genus to Clubiona. By C. KocH it was singularly enough reckoned among the ” Theridides” (Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 22). Concerning Anyphena SIMON, vid. sup., p. 144 under head of Gen. 5. Anyphena. The tarsal claws are of the same form as among the Philodromine in the next sub-order: they are small, long, slender, almost straight, except at the extremity, where they are bent into a hook. They spring at a right angle from a slender, high base: the inner claw has on the underside about 15 coarse, short, vertical, conical, somewhat sparse comb-teeth, that gra- dually increase in length; on the outer claw the number of teeth is some- what less. The claw-brush is very thick and longer than the claw itself; its hairs are long and slender, slightly broader just at the extremity (as in Micrommata). The palpal claw is toothless, as in Clubiona. Gen. 8. PHRUROLITHUS (C. Koch). 1839. Deriv.: gooveém, guard; Aí9oc, stone. Syn.: 1839. Phrurolithus C. Kocu, Die Arachn., VI (ad part.:) p. 110—112. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 19 146 T. THORELL, 1851. Phrurolithus Wesrr., Förteckn. etc., p. 46. 1861. 5 ID., Aran. Suec., p. 326. 1861. Drassus Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 104 (ad partem). 1864. Theridium [Theridio]: sub-gen. Phrurolithus [Phrurolithum] SIM, H. N. d. Araignées, p. 168 (ad partem). 1866. Phrurolithus L. Koch, Die Arachn.-fam. d. Drassiden, p. 2, 224. i Type: Phrurolithus festivus C. KocH. Under the name of Phrurolithus, C. KocH united a number of spiders of various families, chiefly Theridioidæ and Drassoide. For the species among C. KocH's Phrurolithi, that are Drassoide, WESTRING in 1851 adopted this generic name, and has been followed in this by L. Kocx (Vid. Syn.). OHLERTS Phrurolithus, embracing the greater part of the Theridioidæ in- cluded by C. KocH in that genus, I have called Lithyphantes. Vid. sup., p. 94. The tarsal claws of Ph. festivus are very small, rather short, much and pretty regularly curved (on the 4" pair of legs longer and weaker, straight at the base, much curved at the extremity), without teeth. There is a claw-tuft, but it consists only of a few much dilated hairs. The fe- male’s palpal claw is small, weak, and toothless. Gen. 9. MICARIA Weste. 1851. Deriy.: micare, shine. Syn.: 1805. Drassus Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 45 (ad partem). 1832. Clubiona SUND., Sv. Spindl. Beskr., in Vet.-Akad. Handl. f. 1831, p. 138 (ad partem). ?1832. Herpyllus Hentz, On North Amer. Spid., p. 120 (ad partem). 11835. Macaria C. Koch, zn Herr.-Scumrr, Deutschl. Ins., 129, 14—16. 1851. Micaria Westr., Fórteckn. etc., p. 46. 1861. " ID., Aran. Suec., p. 330. 1861. Drassus Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 104 (ad partem). 1864. Macaria Sim., H. N. d. Araignees, p. 112. 1866. Micaria L. Koch, Die Arachn.-fam. d. Drassiden, p. 2, 52. Type: Micaria fulgens (WALCK.). The name Micaria, under which C. Kocn had introduced this ge- nus, being already occupied ?), it was in 1851 changed by WESTRING to Micaria. 1) Macaria Curt. [Lepidopt.] 1826. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 147 The tarsal claws are small, straight at the base, but towards the extremity curved almost to a semicircle, with few teeth. In JM. pulicaria the teeth are only 2 in number, very short and blunt; in JM. fulgens they are 3, longer, but sparse, thick, and very obtuse. The hairs of the elaw- tuft are few, dilated, rounded at the extremity; the whole underside of the tarsus is thinly covered with suchlike hairs. Under this genus SIMON ?) takes up as synonyms Corinna C. Koch ?) and Drassina GRUBE*), both of which appear to me to be very remote from it. Drassina is stated to have three claws on the tarsi, and, if this be really so, cannot even belong to the family Drassoidz. Corinna would seem to stand on the point of transition from the family Drassoide to the Myrmecioidæ, to which last the genus is referred by C. KocH: to me it appears rather to belong to the former family. L. KocH however has not received it among the Drassoide. Gen. 10. DRASSUS Warck. (1805). Deriv.: dodooouæ, seize, catch. Syn.: 1805. Drassus Wazok., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 45 (ad partem). 1805. Clubiona ID., ibid., p. 41 (ad part.: "5* Fam. Les Furies, Furiæ”). 1832. Herpylus Hentz, On North Amer. Spid., p. 102 (ad partem). 1834. Filistata Reuss, Zool. Mise., Arachn., p. 197 (213) (ad partem). 1837. Drassus C. Kock, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 18. 1851. Drassodes WEksTR., Fórteckn. etc., p. 48. 1861, 2 ID., Aran. Suec., p. 360. 1861. Drassus ID., ibid., p. 337. 1861. * Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 104 (ad partem). 1864. n Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 123. 1806. " Koch, Die Arachn.-fam. d. Drassiden, p. 2, 76. Type: Drassus quadri-punctatus (LINN.). In common with L. KocH, we unite WESTRING'S Drassodes with his Drassus in one genus, since, as L. Koch has shown, it is not at present possible to determine any sure line of separation between them, however different in their general appearance the more typical species of these two groups may be. It must not however be forgotten, that the form of the cocoons in WESTRING'S Drassus and Drassodes is quite different, although of course that circumstance alone cannot be considered as possessing any de- 1) Hist. Nat. d. Araignées, p. 539. 2) Die Arachn., IX, p. 17 et seq. 3) Beschr. neuer im Amurlande u. in Ostsibirien gesammelter Aran., p. 15. 148 T. THORELL, cisive importance. — In BLACKWALL the genus Drassus has a far wider compass, and comprises also the groups Phrurolithus, Micaria, Melanophora and Gnaphosa, which we have considered as separate and independent ge- nera. WALCKENAER, as is well known, also referred to this genus many other and widely separate forms, among which are some species of the genera Colotes and Dictyna, to which BLACKWALL first assigned their true places in the system. The genus Herpyllus HENTZ seems very nearly to correspond to Drassus WALCK., and comprises not only species of the genus now before us, and of Gnaphosa, but probably also of several others, Micaria and Melanophora among the rest. Conf HENTZ, Aran. of the United States, in Boston Journ. of Nat. Hist., V, p. 454—401, Pl. XXIV, fig. 2—20. In the genus Drassus the tarsal claws are powerful, straight at the base, generally somewhat long, especially on the posterior legs, armed below with 5 or 6 strong comb-teeth; the palpal claw has about 3 teeth at some distance apart. Such is the case with e. g. D. lapidicola. In D. quadri-punctatus the claws are still more powerful, but in other respects very similar. The hairs of the claw-tufts are in general dilated towards the extremity, flattened, and mostly short; they are often continued on the tarsus throughout its underside, especially on the first pair of legs. In D. braccatus (vid. infra) I have counted 3 thick, almost parallel comb-teeth and a little point before them on the tarsal claws, 2 or 3 teeth on the palpal claws. In the vicinity of Söderköping I have met with a particularly fine species of Drassus 1) (no doubt identical with D. braccatus L. Koch, though the cephalothorax in that species is said to be black, whereas in my spe- cimens it is reddish brown), which in some respects appears to form the transition to Gnaphosa. In size and colour it is very like Gn. variana, but the position of the eyes is exactly the same as in Drassus. The po- sterior edge of the claw-furrow of the mandibles forms in this species with the corresponding longitudinal inner edge of the mandible a strong, right- 1) Drassus braccatus L. Kocm cephalothorace rufescenti-fusco, palpis et parti- bus oris infuseatis, pedibus rufescenti-testaceis, femoribus 4 anterioribus nigricantibus; abdomine fuligineo, maculis 6 albicantibus in dorso: 2 ad basin, minoribus, rotundatis; reliquis 4 fere in medio, transversis, obliquis, in rectangulum vel trapezium postice angustius et paullo latius quam longius dispositis. Long. © 7—8, cg? c:a 5 millim. Femora supra in medio aculeis 2, 1", 2% et 4" paris præterea uno ad apicem in latere interiore, 3% paris 2 ad apicem; pedes cetero supra non aculeati; tibi: et tarsi pedum 4 posteriorum subtus et in lateribus aculeati. Sub lapidibus ad Söderköping rarissime inventus. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 149 angled corner. The eephalothorax is broad in front, almost as in D. troglo- dytes; the maxillæ are almost parallel, scarcely at all inclined towards the lip, of considerable length, narrower in the middle, slightly rounded, nearly eut transversely, at the broad extremity. Gen. 11. MELANOPHORA C. Kocx. 1833. Deriv.: uélas, black; géow, bear. Syn.: 1805. Drassus Tabl. d. Aran., p. 45 (ad partem). 21832. Herpyllus Hentz, On North Amer. Spid., p. 120 (ad partem). 1833. Melanophora C. Koch, 2x Herr.-Scnærr., Deutschl. Ins., 120, 20— 23. 1834. Filistata Reuss, Zool. Misc., Arachn., p. 197 (213) (ad partem). 1837, Melanophora C. Koch, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 17. 1861. e Wesrr., Aran, Suec., p. 354 (ad partem). 1861. Drassus BLAckw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 104 (ad partem). 1864. Melanophora Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 116. 1866. M L. Kocu, Die Arachn.-fam. d. Drassiden, p. 2, 142. Type: Melanophora atra (LATR.). We adopt this genus, which however might perhaps without harm be suppressed and united with Gnaphosa, in the extent assigned to it by L. KocH, whieh appears to coincide with its original limits assigned by C. Kocx. — The structure of the tarsal claws is the same as in the genus Gnaphosa. Gen. 12. GNAPHOSA (Larr.) 1804. Deriv.: yvézvo, scratch, tear. Syn.: 1804. Gnaphosa Larr., in Nouv. Dict. d’Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 134 (ad partem). 1805. Drassus WaLck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 45 (ad part.: ”1° Fam. Les Lithophiles Lithophile”’, etc.). 1832. Herpyllus Hentz, On North Amer. Spid., p. 120 (ad partem). 1834. Filistata Reuss, Zool. Misc., Arachn., p. 197 (213) (ad partem). 1837. Pythonissa C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 16. 1861. e Westr., Aran. Suec., p. 350. 1861. Melanophora ID., ibid., p. 354 (ad partem). 1861. Drassus Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 104 (ad partem). 1864. Pythonissa SIM., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 120. 1866. ps L. Kocu, Die Arachn.-fam. d. Drassiden, p. 2, 6. 1868. Gnaphosa THOR., in ErsEN et SrUxBERG, Om Gotska Sandon, p. 379. Type: Gnaphosa lucifuga (W ALCK.). 150 T. THORELL, This genus, for which LATREILLE in his Genera Crust. et Ins. (I, p. 125) still uses the name Gnaphosa — a name which he afterwards changed for the more recent Walckenaerian denomination Drassus — has in LATREILLE for its type Gnaphosa melanogaster LATR. (Aranea lucifuga WALCK. 1802), and it answers, in the more restricted meaning in- which we now, in right of priority, restore it to science, the genus Pythonissa C. Kocu, for which without doubt the same species is typical. As regards the more accurate determination of the limits of Gnaphosa or Pythonissa, we follow L. KocH, and accordingly refer to this genus P. variana C. Koch, which, as well by the position of the eyes, as by the presence of the little lamina, into which the posterior edge of the mandible’s claw-furrow is drawn out, shows itself to belong to this genus and not to Melanophora, to which WESTRING refers it. The cocoon of this spider is however of an altogether different form from that of the other species both of Gnaphosa and Mela- nophora known to me: it is not plano-convex and of a firmer substance, re- sembling paper, but loose and lenticular, as in e. g. Drassus lapidicola. We also consider Pyth. maculata C. KoCH (Ar. nocturna. LINN.) as a Gnaphosa, though standing on the limit between that genus and Melanophora, to which WESIRING refers it. The claws in this spider are very dissimilar to those of the other species both of Gnaphosa and Melanophora, which I have examined. The tarsal claws are in Gnaphosa usually small, but coarse and powerful, of about the same form as those of Drassus: of uniform breadth or slightly tapering and straight nearest to the base, much bent towards the extremity, which is long and strong. On the underside they have only a few comb-teeth (in G. lucifuga e. g. about 5—6). On the 4" pair the claws are weaker and more uniformly curved. The palpal claw is tolerably strong, with some few (in G. lucifuga about 5) coarse comb-teeth. Devia- tions from this however occur: in G. exornata for example, the tarsal claws of which have 5—7 rather long and close-set comb-teeth, the palpal claw is long and slender, slightly and uniformly curved, with about 15 fine, long, very closely set comb-teeth. G. nocturna deviates still more: in this spe- cies the palpal claw is toothless; the tarsal claws are weaker, more equably curved, and armed from the base nearly to the extremity with about 5 or 6 conical teeth, proceeding from the side of the claw; the free extremity of the claw is very short. Remarks. LATREILLE is the first, who, after WALCKENAER had in 1802, in his Faune Parisienne, separated Jygale from the great Linnean genus Aranea, divided the remaining spiders into several smaller groups ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 151 distinguished by generical names. (See Nouv. Dict. d'Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 133—136). These groups are: Æriodon, Dysdera, Segestria, Argyroneta, Gnaphosa, Clubiona, Tegenaria, Scytodes, Linyphia, Aranea, Heteropoda, Misumena, Micrommata, Oxyopes, Dolomedes, Lycosa and Salticus. Although he did. not himself immediately, but only some time afterwards ?), expressly call these groups "genres", it is beyond a doubt that they ought to be considered as genera formed by LATREILLE, and their names accordingly to have right of priority before subsequently proposed, synonymous denomina- tions. This is also usually admitted as regards most of them, those in fact which were retained by WALCKENAER in his Tableau des Aranéides (1805). As to the groups which received new names from WALCKENAER, LATREILLE in his subsequent works retained the appellations he had given to « part of them ( Eriodon, Micrommata, Oxyopes and Salticus), whence also some arachnologists have adopted these names, whereas others have made use of the corresponding Walckenaerian denominations; but the names Gnaphosa, Aranea, Heteropoda and Misumena LATREILLE himself in time abandoned, and adopted the corresponding Walckenaerian synonyms, whereby these names have gradually fallen into oblivion. In the mean time, as no rational cause can be assigned, why these names should not be retained, as well as those, whieh belong to the two first named categories, I have adopted all LATREILLES generic names, with the single exception of Aranea, Ara- nec being the general name for the entire order of spiders. * Gen. 13. THYSA Kemp. Deriv.: probably Ovow, a name of the female bacchanals (Iv, to rage). Syn.: 1867. Thysa Kemp., Thysa pythonissæformis, p. 607 (1). Type: Zhysa pythonissæformis KEMP. YI gsm py The remarkable spider, for which this genus has been formed, and of whieh only one specimen, a female, has been found (at Erlau in Hun- gary), is known to me only through KEMPELEN' description and figures (loc. cit.) According to him it is related to Pythonissa (Gnaphosa), but has only six eyes. If we imagine to ourselves a Gnaphosa without the anterior central eyes, and with the posterior row curved strongly backwards, we have much about the same position of the eyes as in Zhysa. But this animal LE] 1) In his Cours d’Entomologie, p. 501, he says: ”... je perfectionnai ma distribu- tion et j'y établis la plupart. des genres admis aujourdhui. (Nouv. Dict. d Hist. Nat.).” 152 T. THORELL, differs also in other respects from Gnaphosa, as e. g. it is stated that "the head is considerably elevated above the thorax, especially anteriorly”. The systematie position of this animal cannot yet be considered as definitely determined: it is only provisionally that we place it in this family and next after Gnaphosa. Fam. V. DYSDEROIDA. Syn.: 1837. Dysderides C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 20. 1852. Cellicolæ DorEscu., Syst. Verzeich. ete., p. 6 (ad partem). The spiders belonging to this family are without difficulty distinguish- ed from all others, except the Territelarie, by their having two stigmata, the one immediately behind the other, on each side of the belly near its base. In other spiders provided with tracheal tubes as well as two air-sacs, the former usually debouch near the spinners, rarely (Argyroneta, Dictyna, Anyphena?) in the middle line of the belly. The Dysderoidæ differ from the Territelarie principally in having the mandibular claw, when at rest, bent inwards or obliquely inwards and backwards, not directly backwards and in that the two posterior stigmata lead to tracheal tubes, not to tracheal or air-sacs (" pulmonary” sacs). They are, in general, further distinguished by remarkably short tarsi and long patellæ, and have, as far as is known, never eight, but only six (or two, if the exotic genus Nops Mac LEAY belong to them) or no eyes. Stalita Schiedtei NOB. (S. tenaria KEYSERL) has, curiously enough, small rudiments of 6 eyes. The tarsal claws vary greatly in form and armature: the inferior claw is wanting about as frequently as it is present; the palpal claw is always small and without teeth. Durour, who first discovered that Dysdera had 4 stigmata, and who believed that these all led to tracheal or so-called pulmonary sacs 1), as in the case of the Territelarie (Tetrapneumones LATR), united that genus with these last mentioned or "les araignées quadripulmonaires" *), and was in this followed by LATREILLE 3). SUNDEVALL*) and WALCKENAER °) however powerfully opposed a so one-sided over-estimation of an anatomical peeu- 1) That the "pulmonary saes" or "lungs" of spiders and of other arachnoidea are only peculiarly modified tracheæ, has been shown by Leuckarr (Ueb. d. Bau u. d. Bedeut. d. sog. Lungen bei d. Arachn., p. 246 et seq.). 2) Observ. sur quelques Arachn. quadripulm., p. 26 ete. 3) Fam. Nat. du Régne Anim., p. 312; Cours d’Entom., p. 512. 4) Svenska Spindl. Beskr., in Vet.-Akad. Handl. f. 1829, p. 192 (1830). 5) Mém. sur une nouv. Classifie. d. Aran., p. 436. (1833). ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 153 liarity, which moreover, as Ducis !) shortly after showed, had not even been correctly understood, since the posterior stigmata do not, like the anterior, lead to tracheal sacs, but to a pair of tracheal tubes. The Dysderoidæ are now generally admitted to stand in nearer relationship to SUNDEVALL'S Drassides than to his Mygalides. WALCKENAER ?) was, I be- lieve, the first who considered them as a separate group comparable with our families; they were by him called " Tubicoles”: the name Dysderides they received from C. KocH (loc. cit). This family is also adopted by BLACKWALL. WESTRING includes it in his Drasside, and SIMON in his ” Drassi- formes" (as a separate "tribus", ” Ségestriens ou Pulmo-trachéens”), i. e. in our Zubitelarie. The genus Nops, which SIMON refers to his " Drassiens” (ad max. part. = Drassoidæ NOB.) belongs probably to the Dysderoide: Conf. Mac LEAY, On some new forms of Arachn., p. 2 et seq. In that paper (p. 4) we read of another spider, which Mac LEAY also refers to the Dysderoide: "I possess specimens of a translucid West Indian spider closely allied to Filistata, and having Mygalidous eyes situated on the balloon-shaped cepha- lothorax of a Nops. In these specimens the antennæ [mandibles], maxillæ etc. are so rudimentary and inconspicuous, as would almost make us doubt that the species can be an animal of prey, did we not find it make an irregular web in the corners and crevices of houses. I call it Æemerachne ?) tenuipes”. — This spider would seem to belong rather to the Scytodotde than to the Dysderoide or Filistatoide. The following genera belong to the European Fauna: $ Oculi 6 perfecte explicati. + Series oculorum antica ex 4, postica ex 2 oculis constans; oculi non omnes valde appropinquantes. 1. Maxille longæ, reetze, sub-parallelæ. Ungues tarsorum trini. 1. Segestria. 2. Maxillæ breves, late, basi gibbosæ, in labium paullo inclinatæ. 2. Schænobates. ** Series oculorum antica ex 2, postica ex 4 oculis constans. A. Oeuli laterales seriei postieze, sub-rectæ, longius ab oculis mediis ejusdem seriei disjuncti; oculi duo antici inter se longe remoti. Ungues tarsorum TIT N NUN or Mer EMEN ce n do nS Seve iss T Ariane B. Oculi saltem seriei posticæ inter se valde appropinquantes. 1) Sur les organes de la Respir. dans les Aran. Segestria et Dysdera, p. xir, xiv. (1835). 2) Mém. sur une nouv. Classif. d. Aran., p. 438. 3) This name (which is from juegos, tame, and dedyvn, spider) ought of course to be written Hemerarachne. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 20 154 T. THORELL, a. Oculi duo anteriores, reliquis plerumque manifeste majores, plus minus longe disjuncti. Series oculorum postiea, desuper visa, procurva. 1. Mandibulæ sub-porrectæ, ungue longo et valido. Ungues tarsorum Dini. uo wet ELE SENE a on NN ARE CODE D US denge 2. Mandibulæ verticales, ungue brevi. Ungues tarsorum trini. 6. Harpactes. b. Oculi omnes inter se valde appropinquantes, in tria paria dispositi, 2 utrinque, 2, reliquis majores, in medio. Tarsi articulo libero ungui- fero aucti. Ungues tarsorum bini. . . . . . . . . V. Oonops. SS Oeuli aut 6 valde imperfecti, aut nulli. Ungues tarsorum trini. . 4. Stalita. Gen. 1. SEGESTRIA Larr. 1804. Deriv.: segestre, a coarse coverlet. Syn.: 1804. Segestria Larr., im Nouv. Dict. d'Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 134. 1861. Westr., Aran. Suec., p. 298. 1864. u Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 373. 1864. H SIM., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 98. Type: Segestria senoculata (LINN.). The superior tarsal claws are powerful, somewhat long, with pretty many long, almost parallel, vertical, comb-teeth, of which the outermost are somewhat sinuated and divergent; in front of these the free extremity of the claw is somewhat swelled at the root. The inferior claw is small but stout, with one long, fine, curved tooth. On the 4" pair the teeth of the superior claws are somewhat fewer in number (about 7 in S. senoculata, which on the claws of the 1* pair has about 9). The palpal claw is weak, slightly curved, toothless. * Gen. 2. SCHOENOBATES Brackw. 1850. Deriv.: oxowoßdrns, rope-dancer (cyovvoc, rope; faívo, go). Syn.: 1850. Schonobates [Schænobates] BLackw., Descr. of some newly disc. spec. ete., in Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 2 Ser., IV, p. 343. 1864. er 3 ID., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 375. Type: Schenobates Walkeri (BLACKW.). Of this genus only one species, and of that only one specimen has been found. It is only on BLACKWALL'S authority that I have taken it up in this family. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 155 Gen. 3. ARIADNE Sav. et Aup. 1825-27. Deriv.: '4o«tóvy, Ariadne, mythol. proper name. Syn.: 1825—27. Ariadne [Ariadna] Sav. et Aup., Descr. de l'Égypte, (Éd. 2:) XXII, p. 308. 1837. Dysdera Warck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 261 (ad part.: ”3° Fam. Les Ariadnes, Ariadna"). 1864. * Sım., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 105 (ad partem). Type: Ariadne insidiatrix (FORSK.). In everything, except the position of the eyes, Ariadne comes much nearer to Segestria than to Dysdera, to which last genus it has been ag- gregated by WALCKENAER and several others. LATREILLE ?) and C. Koch ?) however recognize it as an independent genus. Like Segestria, Ariadne is remarkable for keeping the 3 first pairs of legs stretched forwards, and only the 4" pair backwards. — A. insidiatrix, of which I have specimens which I eaught in Rome, where that species is common, is in habits and industry quite similar to Segestria Florentina and Filistata testacea. — I am not aware that any species of this genus has previously been adduced as belonging to the fauna of Europe. The orthography Ariadne is surely preferable to Ariadna, as being the ordinary Latin form of the word. — Of Ariadne DorEscH. vid. p. 63. The superior tarsal claws in A. insidiatrix are stout and powerful, pretty much and rather uniformly curved, gradually diminishing in breadth from the base, with 7—8 coarse, somewhat divergent comb-teeth; the in- ferior claw is small but powerful, with one little tooth. The superior tarsal claws on the 4" pair have but about 4 teeth. The female’s palpal claw is small and toothless. Gen. 4. STALITA ScnuiópTE. 1847. Deriv.: ornAirns, belonging to pillars (07747, Dorice oréla, pillar). Syn.: 1841. Stalita ScHIODTE, Forelöbig Beretn. om d. underjord. Fauna, p. 80. 1849. 3 ID., Bidr. t. d. underjord. Fauna, p. 22. Type: Stalita tenaria SCHIODTE. Through the kindness of Prof. SCHIÔDIE I have had the opportunity of comparing a male specimen of the typical species, the true S. tenaria, 1) Cours d'Entom., p. 514. 2) Die Arachn., X, p. 90. 156 T. THORELL, with the spider described by KEYSERLING 1) as St. tenaria, which, as SCHIÖD- TE suspected, is quite a different species from the genuine St. tenaria so accurately described by this latter author. This is in fact easily seen since the appearance of SCHIGDTES paper: On the genus Stalita ?), in which special attention has been paid to the points in which the last men- tioned spider differs from KEYSERLING’S description. Of KEYSERLING'S spe- cies I possess a full-grown 9, 8"" long, exclusive of the mandibles, which are of 2™ length; it agrees in every essential particular with the descrip- tion given by KEYSERLING. The length of the cephalothorax is 5"", and the breadth full 3", the breadth of the pars cephalica little more than 2". The length of the pars cephalica is a little greater than its breadth, and it is tapering behind. The mandibles are thinly covered with hairs on the whole of the dorsal surface, but more thickly hairy at the extremity, along the claw-furrow. The posterior edge of the claw-furrow has two teeth. The last joint of the palpus is longer and slenderer than the preceding joint. The patellæ are destitute of spines. The superior tarsal claws are long, slender, and much curved, with about 13 long, closely set comb-teeth; the toothless part of the claw is very long and much bent downwards. The inferior claw is long, slender and abruptly inflected downwards, and without teeth. All this refers to the 1* pair of legs. On the 4" pair the claws are still longer and slenderer, with about 6 divergent teeth near the base. The palpal claw is small and toothless. The abdomen is 42™ long and 21"* broad, with thin fine hairs. The posterior stigmata are as broad as the anterior. A particular interest is attached to this spider, (which I call S. Schicedtei), from the circumstance of its having six rudimentary eyes! In position these eyes agree nearest with those of Ariadne (which genus also, like Stalita, has 3 claws on the tarsi). They are small like points, about equal in size, and rather lighter in colour than the cephalothorax, and there- fore easily visible with a good common magnifying lens, and occupy an area the breadth of which is about a third of that of the head, and which is about three times as broad as it is long. They are arranged in two rows very near the margin of the'clypeus, 4 eyes in the posterior, and 2 in the anterior row. The posterior row is straight and considerably longer than the anterior. The two posterior central eyes are somewhat nearer to each other than to the lateral eyes. The distance between the two lateral eyes is about two eye-diameters, and perhaps somewhat greater than the 1) Besehr. einer neuen Spinne aus d. Hóhlen v. Lesina, p. 2 (540). 2) Om slägten Stalita, p. 4—5 (14—15). ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 157 distance between the two anterior eyes and the very low elypeus, and equal to about + of the distance between the two anterior eyes. — The specimen of S. Schiedtei here described was kindly presented to me by Count Kry- SERLING. i As to S. tenaria, which shows no traces of eyes, I need but refer to SCHIODTE'S description of that species (locis cit.). Gen. 5. DYSDERA Larz. (1804). Deriv.: dvodnges, hard to contend with (dvs-, ill-; 0occ, contention) '). Syn.: 1804 Dysdera Larr., in Nouv. Dict. d'Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 134 (ad partem). 1837. p Warck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt, I, p. 261 (ad part.: ”1° Fam. Les Agones, Agonæ”). 1864. 3 Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 369 (ad partem). 1864. " Sım., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 105 (ad partem). Type: Dysdera punctoria (VILL.). (D. erythrina WALCK.). The tarsal claws in this genus are only éwo in number, and a claw- tuft is met with under them, whereas in Ariadne and Harpactes, which are usually united with Dysdera, there are 3 claws, and no claw-tuft (as is the ease with all spiders that have 3 claws). The superior tarsal claws are slender, somewhat sinuated at the base, outwards curved strongly and al- most into a semicircle, with several (in D. punctoria about 10, in D. punc- tata C. Koco about 5) long saw-teeth, issuing from the side of the claw from about its middle to near the extremity, which is thus rather short. The claw-tuft is thickly set, and consists of linear hairs, slightly dilated at the extremity only. The palpal claw is small and toothless. Gen. 6. HARPACTES TEMPLETON. 1834. Deriv.: aoxaxrfs, robber (&ozébo, rob). Syn.: 1834. Harpactes TEwPL., On the Spid. of the gen. Dysdera, p. 401. 1837. Dysdera Warck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 261 (ad part.: "2* Fam. Les Agores, Agora"). 1861. 3 Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 301. 1864. a Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 369 (ad partem). 1864. 5 Sım., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 105 (ad partem). Type: Harpactes Hombergit (ScoP.). 1) In Agassiz’ Nomencl. Zool. it is derived from dus-, and ”déon, collum." 158 T. THORELL, Not only the presence of a third tarsal claw, but also peculiarities in the structure of the parts of the mouth, and a longer, slenderer form of the body, distinguish this genus from Dysdera, to which it is otherwise very similar, and with which it is commonly united. — The superior tarsal claws of the typical species are slender, curved nearly to a semicircle, and pro- vided with about 6 long, parallel, vertical comb-teeth. The inferior claw is toothless. The genus Pylarus HENTz !) is near related to Harpactes. Gen. 7. OONOPS Temp. 1834. Deriv.: adv, egg; aw, eye. Syn.: 1834. Oonops TEMPL., On the Spid. of the gen. Dysdera, p. 404. 1837. Deletrix Brackw., Charact. of a new gen. etc., p. 100. 1847. Dysdera Warck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., IV, p. 382 (ad part.: "4* Fam. Les Albionides, Albionide’’). 1864. » Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. (105,) 455 (ad partem). 1864. Oonops BLackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., II, p. 377. Type: Oonops pulcher 'TEMPL. The typical species of this interesting genus, of which the Rev. O. P. CAMBRIDGE has kindly sent me specimens, is found not only in Great Britain and Ireland, but also in Italy, according to CANESTRINI and PAVESI ?). The two tarsal claws of O. pulcher are weak and slender, uniformly and rather slightly bent, with 5 or 6 tolerably coarse, pointed comb-teeth directed somewhat forwards. In stead of a claw, the female's palpus is at the extremity provided with a strong conical process (in a young specimen). By the presence of a small separate claw-joint this spider forms a transi- tion to the Scytodoide; I place it among the Dysderoide principally on the authority of DLACKWALL, for I have not myself been able to see more than two stigmata in the somewhat damaged specimens I possess. Fam. VI. FILISTATOID.E. Syn.: 1867. Filistatidee Auss., Die Arachn. Tirols, I, p. 140. This family comprises only the genus Filistata, which was referred by WALCKENAER to "les Théraphoses” or our Territelarie, although it has 1) Aran. of the United States, in Boston Journ. of Nat. Hist., IV, p. 225. 2) Araneidi Italiani, p. 27. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 159 6 spinners, the mandibular claw directed inwards, not backwards, and only (wo air-sacs, so that it is destitute of all the characteristics that usually distinguish the spiders belonging to the sub-order Territelarie. Even La- TREILLE, who first ?) referred it to his ” Zubiteles”, assigned it in his later works, in consequence of the erroneous assumption that it had 4 "pul- monary” sacs, to his Jetrapnewmones or the Territelarie. C. Koch ?) gives it the same systematic position. DUGES referred it to his ” Micro- gnathes” or " Seythodés" *), a group, that comprises spiders of widely separated families, but which agree with each other in the structure of the mandibles. (Conf. p. 99). Simon, who rightly insists upon the relationship of the Filista- toidæ with the Drassoide and other Tubitelariæ, forms for them a separate "tribus", " Filistatiens ou Mygalo-drasses”, within the family ” Drassiformes” 9). Lastly, in AUSSERER 5), as also in CANESTRINI and PAVESI 5, we find the family Filistatide placed between Mygalide and Dysderide. It is strictly speaking only by the position of the eyes, that Filistata agrees more with the Zerritelari®e than with the Tubitelariæ, and it seems chiefly to have been this agreement that induced WALCKENAER and C. Kocx to refer Filistata to the first-named sub-order. Mandibles directed some- what forwards and united at the base 7), form a feature occurring in many other genera which have never been referred to the Territelariæ, and especially among the Seytodorde, which we unreservedly consider as the nearest rela- latives of the rlistatoide. The parts of the mouth exhibit the same struc- ture in both these families, and also in Filistata the weak mandibles, armed with a very small claw, remind an observer of the two-fingered claw of the Opiliones, by their having a spine or tooth at their extremity opposite the claw. Both families appear to have been developed from a common root: the Scytodoide form the beginning of the series of genera, which constitute the sub-orders Retitelarie and Orbitelariæ, while from the Filistatotde and forms nearly related to them the other sub-orders have probably descended. The general appearance of the Filistatoidæ is very peculiar and un- like that of other spiders: it reminds one most of certain Scytodoidæ (Loxo- sceles) and Theraphosoidæ, but also of some T'ubitelarie, e. g. Uroctea. Their 1) Cuv., Règne Anim., III, p. 83. (1817). 2) Uebers. d. Arach.-Syst., 1, p. 35; ibid., 5, p. 76. 3) Observ. sur les Aran., p. 106. 4) Hist. Nat. d. Araignées, p. 95. 5) Die Arachn. Tirols, I, p. 140. 6) Aran. Ital., p. 23. 7) In F. capitata HENTZ, they are however not united at the base, according to Hentz, Aran. of United States, in Bost. Journ. of Nat. Hist., IV, p. 228. 160 T. THORELL, generally strong extemities, as also their habits and the structure of their webs at once separating them from the Retitelariæ, they cannot be referred to any other sub-order than the Tubitelariæ. If by a certain outward ap- pearance, by the structure of the mandibles, and by the form and armature of the female’s palpi, they exhibit affinities with the Urocteoidæ, they, on the other hand, as Lucas ?) has remarked, and as I have myself in Southern Europe observed, agree with Segestria, and especially with S. Florentina, in their habits and economy: the tubular web has just the same appearance, and is met with in the same localities (especially in the holes and crevices of old walls), as that of the last mentioned spider. Also HENTZ remarks concerning this genus, that "by its habits it is closely related to Pylarus and to Segestria” *). Gen. 1. FILISTATA Larr. 1810. Deriv. uncertain: fium, thread; stare, stand. Or perhaps filum and ormue, set, place (cords, warp, web). Syn.: 1810. Filistata Larr., Consid. gén. sur les Crust., les Arachn. et les Ins., p. 121. 1839. Teratodes C. Kocu, Die Arachn., V, p. 6. 1864. Filistata Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 95. Type: Filistata testacea LATR. In the typical species the superior tarsal claws are very strong, long, much and uniformly curved, with about 12 long, strong, almost parallel, almost equally long comb-teeth; the free extremity of the claw is not long, a little swelled at the root below. The inferior claw is very small, but strong, with two very long, strong teeth, sitting close together. The palpal claw of © is long, of almost uniform substance, much and regularly curved, armed from the base throughout about two thirds of its length with about 16 rather short, strong, parallel comb-teeth slightly increasing in length outwards, the points of which form a much curved line following the direction of the claw. Sub-ordo IV. TERRITELARIÆ. Syn.: Vid. infra sub Fam. Zheraphosoide. As an, in cases of doubt, decisive characteristic of the spiders be-. longing to this sub-order, we consider the to them peculiar direction of the 1) Observ. sur le genre Eriodon, p. 312. 2) Aran. of United States, in Bost. Journ. of Nat. Hist., IV, p. 227. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 161 mandibular claw: it moves, as is known, in a vertical plane very nearly parallel to the longer axis of the body, and, when at rest, is directed back- wards; in all other spiders- on the contrary, it moves in a plane almost at right angles to the longer axis of the body, and lies with its point turned inwards, sometimes obliquely inwards and backwards. The mandibles themselves are generally more projecting and larger than in other spiders, and can only be opened to an inconsiderable amount. The Territelariæ have generally four air-sacs; the spinners are with few exceptions only four in number: the superior are usually considerably longer than the inferior, and consist of three, sometimes (at least in the genera Diplura C. Kocu and Æriodon LATR. or Missulena WALCK.) of four joints. The tarsal claws are mostly two, sometimes three in number. The Territelariæ approximate on the one side to the Tubitelarie (Fi- listatoide and Dysderoide) and on the other to the Citigrade. The genus Catadysas HENTZ forms an evident transition to this latter sub-order, with which they also in their habits show many analogies. That some of the female Theraphosoide carry their young upon their backs, just like species of the genus Lycosa, has been long known: LATREILLE states it to be the case with Nemesia Sauvagesii (ROSSI) or Mygale fodiens WALCK. !), and AB- BOT has, according to WALCKENAER ?), observed the same phænomenon in Actinopus Abbotii (WALCK.). Lincecum relates ?) concerning certain species found in Texas: "Two or three species of Mygale carry a sack well filled with eggs attached to the tip of their abdomen, and when the young ones hatch out, they take them on their backs and carry them like the Mygale Hentz.” The European Territelariæ all belong to one family, the Therapho- soide, all the species of which have four pulmonary sacs, and a£ least four spinners. Of the families Liphistioide and Catadysoidæ see pag. 43. Fam. I. THERAPHOSOIDÆ. Syn.: 1802. Gen. Mygale Warck., Faune Par., II, p. 241. 1805. Gen. Theraphosa 1D., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 1. 1817. " Territeles" Larr. in Cuv., Règne Anim., III, p. 79. 1823. Terrestres SUND., Gen. Aran. Suec., p. 10. 1) See Warck., Faune Franc., Arachn., p. 5. 2) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 248. 3) The Tarantula, p. 411. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 21 162 T. THORELL, 1825. Tetrapneumones Larr., Fam. Nat. du Règne Anim., p. 312. 1830. Theraphosæ Sunp., Sv. Spindl. Beskr., im Vet.-Akad. Handl. f. 1829, p. 203. 1833. Mygalides ID., Consp. Arachn., p. 28. It is well known that Cuvier in the year 1800 gave the name of Mygale to a genus of Mammals, and that WALCKENAER first in 1802 (” dans un Mémoire lu à la Société Philomatique de Paris": see WALCK., Faune Parisienne, II, p. 249) separated the spiders belonging to the family before us from the others or "spiders properly so called” (Aranea WALCK.) under the name of Mygale. Some naturalists have curiously enough attempted to avoid the confusion thus introduced, by altering CUVIER'S generic name into Myogale or Myogalea — which however is only another way of spelling Mygale — instead of, in accordance with the law of priority, altering the more recent name or replacing it with another, as reasonableness requires. It ean moreover hardly be denied that the name Mygale, as that of a ge- nus of spiders, is ill chosen: the Greek word wvyalÿ, uvyalén OT uvoydan signifies a shrew (Sorex), and nothing else. Nevertheless, in spite of the requirements of consistency, we should perhaps not have ventured ,to ex- change this generally known and accepted generie name for another, if the following circumstances had not contributed to induce us to such a step. First and principally the genus Mygale has by more recent authors been resolved into several smaller generic groups, by C. KocH ?) for inst. into seven, so that by him the name of Mygale is only retained for a group comprising but two species, JM. Blondi and M. Javanensis, whereas all the other forms described by him bear other generie names — and the mat- ter is aecordingly reduced merely to the giving of another name to the above mentioned little group; moreover that other name needs not be a new and previously unknown denomination, for we have at hand an appropriate generic name formed by WALCKENAER himself in 1805, namely Theraphosa, which in the original definition of that genus is absolutely synonymous with Mygale. This word is not, as has been sometimes supposed, a plural, but a true generic name in the singular number”), and has already in 1830 been used by EICHWALD ?) instead of Mygale. In the Tableau des Arané- ides WALCKENAER divided "les Aranéides” into two great "Divisions", 1) Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 12— 5. 2) It is so taken by e. g. SUNDEVALL, as is evident from the following words: "WALCKENAER considered that he had sufficient reason to separate the Bird-spiders and the species most nearly allied to them, as a separate genus, Theraphosa, from LixNÉ's Aranea.” Sv. Spindl. Beskr., in Vet.-Akad. Handl. f. 1829, p. 190. 3) Zool. spee., II, p. 73. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 163 Theraphosa and Aranea (just as he had before divided them into Mygale and Aranea), after which each of these great generic groups was subdivided into a number of smaller groups, "genres": Theraphosa into Mygale, Ole- tera and Missulena; Aranea into Lycosa, Dolomedes, Ctenus ete. The name Aranea has been entirely abandoned as a generic name, simply because the whole Order of Spiders ought to be called Aranew; but any sound reason for not preserving the name Theraphosa for some portion of the forms to which it has once belonged, it would assuredly be hard to assign. We propose therefore with EICHWALD to replace the name Mygale, which had already been appropriated by Cuvier, with Theraphosa, giving Th. Blondii as type of the genus. Theraphosa (WALCK.) NOB. is therefore = Mygale (WaLck.) C. Kocnu 1850. We also desire to call attention to the following circumstance. When, in 1811, OLIVIER !) adopted WALCKENAERS genus Alygale as separate from Aranea, he restricted it to "les Araignees mineuses”, excluding all the other Mygale-species or "les Araignées aviculaires" , which he referred to Aranea. He was followed by Lamarck ?), who also (in the year’ 1818) received into the genus Mygale only "les Araignées mineuses"; but for "les Araignées aviculaires” this author formed a separate genus, Avicularia LAm.?). It was not till several years later (1825), that LATREILLE gave to "/es Arai- gnées mineuses” the name " Ctenize", and in opposition to OLIVIER'S and LA- MARCK’S limitation of the genus A/ygale, applied that name to "/es Araignees aviculaires". It is accordingly evident that 7f the name Mygale were to be preserved to any genus of spiders at all, it ought, according to the law of priority, to belong to that genus which is usually called Cteniza LATR. (Nemesia Sav. et AUD.) — We have preferred the denomination Theraphosa to that of Avicularia for the species of "les Araignées aviculaires”, which in Koch and SIMON bear the name of Mygale, and thus have been by them considered as types of the genus JMwgale WALCK., partly because Thera- phosa is the older appellation of the two, partly because the name Avicula- ria ought in our opinion to be reserved for that group of species among "les Mygales avieulaires", which comprises LINNÉ'S Aranea avicularia. (Vid. p. 169 sub gen. Avicularia (LAM.)). We divide provisionally "les Mygales aviculaires” into the 4 follow- ing genera, which number will however doubtless hereafter, when these animals have been more accurately studied, be considerably augmented: 1) Encyel. Méth., VIII, p. 83. 2) Hist. Nat. d. Anim. sans Vertébres, V, p. 105. 3) Ibid., p. 107. 164 T. THORELL, 1. Theraphosa (WALCK.) = Mygale (WALCK.) C. Kocn; 2. Avicularia (LAM.) = Eurypelma (C. Kocn); 3. Trechona (C. Koch), and 4. Diplura C. Kocn. The first-named two genera together answer to WALCKENAER'S ” Plantigrades”’, the latter two to his " Digitigrades inermes". ” Les Mygales (Digitigrades) mineuses” ought to be called Nemesia Sav. et AuD. — The family Mygali- des we call, in conformity with the method, in which we have formed the other family-names, Theraphosoide. If the genus Atypus have really, as LATREILLE ') and DUGES ?) ex- pressly state, siz spinners, and not only four, as WALCKENAER ?) says, that genus ought to be made the type of a separate sub-family, Atypine, in contradistinetion to the ordinary Theraphosoidæ (Theraphosine), which are provided with only four spinners. Also in Eriodon formidabile CAMBR. the spinners, according to CAMBRIDGE‘), are 6 in number. According to Lucas >) however the oldest known species of that genus, E. occatorium (WALCK.), has only two pair of spinners (?). The European genera included in the family Theraphosoide are the following: A. Maxille versus basin dilatatæ: palpi dilatationi lateris affixi. Cephalothorax Estoy en vut, GLEN 6 os 6 5 o o 6 S 9e np o de Apes B. Maxille angustæ, sub-cylindrate; palpi apici earum inserti. a. Area oculorum 2+—3-plo latior quam longior. Cephalothorax antice alte elevatus. Pedes breves, robusti, 3" paris reliquis breviores. 2. Cyrtauchenius. b. Oculi conferti, eminenti: communi parvæ impositi; area, quam occupant, c:a dimidio — duplo tantum latior quam longior. I. Mandibule ad apicem dentibus vel lamellis eorneis liberis, rastellum vel pecten formantibus, armate. Pedes apicem versus plus minus attenuati ; ungues ipsi apiei tarsorum inserti. . . . . . . . . 9$. Nemesia. II. Mandibulæ rastello carentes. * Pedes versus apicem attenuati, unguibus ipsi apici tarsorum insertis. 1. Mamillæ superiores (posteriores) articulis quaternis. . 4. Diplura. 2. Mamillæ superiores articulis trinis. . . . . . . . 5. Trechona. [** Pedes robusti, versus apicem vix vel parum attenuati, unguibus supra apicem farsi insertis, retrahendis. . . . . . . . 6. Avicularia.] 1) Cuv., Régne Anim., 2° Éd., IV, p. 228. 2) Observ. sur les Aran., p. 197; Cuv., Régne Anim., 3° Éd., Arachn., p. 31, PI. 5, fig. 20. 3) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 245. 4) Deser. of a new gen. and six new spec. of Spid., p. 267. 5) Obsery. sur le genre Eriodon, p. 316. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 165 *Gen. 1. ATYPUS Larr. 1804. Deriv. @ priv., and zurrow, form (accordingly, unshapely ; "laid de figure": LATREILLE). Syn.: 1804. Atypus Larr., in Nouv. Dict. d'Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 133. 1804, " ID., Hist. Nat. d. Crust. et d. Ins., VII, p. 168. 1805. Oletera Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 7. 1861. Atypus Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 14. 1864. i, [Atypa] Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 83. Type: Atypus piceus (SULZER). The synonyms show that the nama Atypus has the right of priority before Oletera, and not vice versa, as LUCAS 1) has supposed. Gen. 2. CYRTAUCHENIUS m. Deriv.: xvoróc, crooked; avywv, neck. Syn.: 1845. Cyrtocephalus Lucas, Note sur une nouv. esp. d'Aran. appart. au genre Actino- pus, p. 58. 1845. A ID., Explor. de l'Algérie, Arachn., p. 92. 1864. 5 [Cyrtocephala] Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 81. Type: Cyrtauchenius Walckenaerit (LUCAS). The name Cyrtocephalus having been already disposed of, before it was applied by Lucas to this genus (conf. p. 36, note 2), I have been obliged to give it a new denomination. — I possess a specimen (a 9) of a species of Cyrtauchenius, from Corfu, given to me by Count KEYSERLING, which is perhaps identical, or at least very closely connected, with C. /a- pidarius (Luc.) from Crete. It is distinguished by the palpi as well as the first two pairs of legs being towards the extremities (on the last three joints of the legs and the last two of the palpi), on both sides and for some distance downwards, armed with a band of, especially on the last joint, closely arranged, short, blunt, very strong spines, which undoubtedly make these extremities excellent digging organs. On the 3" and 4" pairs these joints only show a few sparse spines. Of the palpi of C. lapidarius Lucas ?) states, that between the hairs that cover them, one may remark "des épines placées cà et là", and of the legs of the same species, that it has "le métatarse et le tarse des trois premières paires armés d'épines d'un 1) De la man. de vivre ete. de l'Oletera picea, p. CLxx. 2) Anim. artic. de Vile de Créte, p. 16. 166 T. THORELL, brun rougeâtre”. In other respects Lucas’ description accurately corresponds with the spider I have mentioned. Should this spider be found not identical with C. lapidarius, it may be called C. Corcyreus. SIMON (loc. cit.) enters under the genus Cyrtocephalus [-a] a species "C. lapidaria RouLin, Ile de Cuba”, which is probably a slip of the pen for "C. lapidaria Lucas, Ile de Crète”. He has however not inserted this genus in his Catal. syn. d. Aranéides d'Europe. The tarsal claws of Cyrtauchenius are 3 in number on each tarsus, as in Nemesia. The tarsi of the posterior legs are somewhat thicker towards the extremity, almost clublike. The superior or posterior spinners show only 3 distinctly separated joints. Gen. 3. NEMESIA Sav. et Aup. 1825—27. Deriv.: Newgovos or Neueoıs, mythol. proper name. Syn.: 1805. Mygale Watcx., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 5 (ad part.: "3* Fam. Digitigrades mi- neuses, Cunicularic" ). 1811. 5 Onrv., Encycl. Méth., VIII, p. 83. [1825. ”Ctenize” Larr., Fam. Nat. du Règne Anim., p. 315]. 1825—7. Nemesia Sav. et Aun., Descr. de l'Égypte, (98 Éd.:) XXII, p. 302. 1827. Ctenize Berru., LarR. Natürl Fam. d. Thierr., p. 298. 1899. Cteniza Larr., in Cuv., Règne Anim., 2° Éd., IV, p. 230. 1864. Mygalodonta Sım., Hist. Nat. d. Araignées, p. 75. Type: Nemesia cellicola SAV. et AUD. The most commonly received name of this genus is not Nemesia, but Cteniza, which name is first found in LATREILLE'S Familles Naturelles du Règne Animal (1825), where "les Araignées mineuses” are brought to- gether under the French appellation "Ctenize". Whether the scientific name was intended to be Ctenizus, Cteniza or any thing else, it is not possible to see there, for the generie names, even those newly formed, appear in that work only in their French form, whence also follows (Conf p. 4 note 1), that any right of priority cannot be claimed for the generic names there proposed. It is true that BERTHOLD, in his German translation of LA- TREILLE'S Familles Naturelles (1821), gave a Latin form to these new generie denominations 7), and in the cases, in which he was the first who did so 1) He however calls LATREILLE’S "Otenize" not Cteniza, but Ctenize, as the ge- nus is also called by for inst. SUNDEVALL (Consp. Arachn., p. 28). That LATREILLE'S meaning was, that the name should end i a, is visible in his subsequent works, as e. g. in the edition of Cuvier’s Règne Animal published in 1829, and it has since generally received that termination. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 167 (as is undoubtedly the case with the name in question), the time of the na- me’s publication must be reckoned from that translation; but SAVIGNY and AUDOUIN had, if I mistake not, a little before its appearance, given the name of Nemesia to a species belonging to the "mining" spiders, and this name, as probably somewhat older, I have considered myself bounden to perfer to Cteniza BERTH. SIMON has exchanged (Nemesia and) Cteniza for an entirely new name, Mygalodonta, and says concerning Cteniza (loc. cit. p. 76) that "cette dénomination est restée inconnue”. It has therefore escaped his observation, that that name is both known and used in a work that he often cites, Kocxs Die Arachniden, and SIMON even himself cites (p. 453) in his ac- count of his Mygalodonta fodiens: " Cteniza Graja Kocn". That the name Mygale, if it could be used of a genus of spiders, would by right belong to the genus before us, I have already (p. 163) endeavoured to show. N. cellicola, according to O. G. Costa ?), is met with, though rarely, in the south of Italy, at Naples. Costa states that it has 3 claws upon the tarsi of the 3" pair only, the first pair being armed with 2, and the 2" with but one claw respectively (!). According to SAVIGNY and AUDOUIN ?) this species has however three claws on each of the tarsi, like other spe- cies of the genus. *Gen. 4 DIPLURA C. Kocx. 1850. Deriv.: dızrAoos, double; ovo, tail. Syn.: 1805. Mygale Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 5 ("2° Fam. Les Digitigrades inermes" ad partem). 1850. Diplura C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 75. 1864. Mygale: sub-gen. Pexionyx [Pezionyx] Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 64, 68 (ad partem). Type: Diplura macrura C. Kocn. A This genus, corresponding with those of WALCKENAER’S ” Mygales digitigrades inermes”, which have very elongated superior spinners, consisting of 4 distinct joints, belongs to the European Spider-Fauna at least through Mygale Calpetana |Calpeiana] WALCK., which, according to WALOKENAER'S description *), in this feature agrees with the species, D. macrura C. 1) Fauna d. Regno di Napoli, Araen., p. 20. 2) Descr. de l'Egypte, (2° Ed.:) XXII, p. 304. 3) Hist. Nat. d. Aran., Livr. 1, n:o 8 et 9. 168 T. THORELL, Koc :), given by KocH as typical of Diplura. Also Mygale luctuosa Lu- cas from Spain, which is said to be very closely allied to D. (AL) Calpetana, and to have the superior spinners about as long as the abdomen, appears to belong to this genus; but Lucas does not state of how many joints these spinners consist ?). Gen. 5. TRECHONA (C. Koch). 1850. Deriv.: roéyo, run. Syn.: 1805. Mygale Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 59 ("2* Fam. Les Digitigrades inevmes " ad partem). 1850. Trechona C. Kocm, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 74 (saltem ad max. part.). 1864. Mygale: sub-gen. Pexionyx [Pezionyx] Sm., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 64, 68 (ad partem). ? 1864. = sub-gen. Eurypelma 1D., ibid., p. 66 (ad partem). Type: Trechona Valentina (DUF.). Some of the species classed by C. Kocx under this genus, are by SIMON referred to the sub-genus Zurypelma (” groups” ÆEurypelma and La- siodora) — whether rightly or not, I cannot venture to decide. In the spe- cies which we assign to Trechona, as e. g. 7. (Mygale) Valentina (Dur. the superior spinners have but 3 distinct joints ?), which distinguishes them from the preceding genus, Diplura. [Gen. 6. AVICULARIA (Law) 1818. Deriv.: avicularius (bird-keeper), in the signification adopted, bird-catcher. Syn.: 1805. Mygale WaLck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 5 ("1* Fam. Les Plantigrades" ad maa. part.). 1818. Avicularia Lamarck, H. N. d. Anim. sans Vertèbres, V, p. 107 (ad partem). 1830. Theraphosa [Teraphosa] Ercmw., Zool. spec., II, p. 73 (ad partem). 1850. Eurypelma C. Koch, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 73 1850. Lasiodora ID., ibid., p. 72 [ichs ad maz. 1850. Scurria ID., ibid., p. 74. | part.). 1850. Typiochlæna 1D., ibid., p. 75. ?1850. Trechona ID., ibid., p. 74 (ad partem). 1804. Mygale: sub-gen. Eurypelma Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 64, 66 (ad max. 1 j arte part.). Type: Avicularia vestiaria (DE GEER). 1) Die Arachn., IX, p. 38, Taf. CCC, f. 715. 2) Conf. Lucas, Note sur une nouv. esp. d'Aran. qui habite l'Esp. mérid., p. 17. 3) Durour, Observ. sur quelques Arachn. quadripulm., p. 100, 102. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 169 As we remarked above (p. 163), LAMARCK divides WALCKENAER'S Mygale into two genera, Avicularia and Mygale, of which the former is synonymous with Mygale LATR., the latter with Cteniza [LATR.] BERTH. or Nemesia Sav. et AuD. As type for Avicularia LAM., I propose Aranea avi- cularia LINN. (Ar. vestiaria DE GEER, Avicularia canceridea LAM.), partly for the sake of the name, and partly because it is the first species entered by LAMARCK under the genus Avicularia. As it was for this species and forms nearly related to it, that C. KocH proposed the genus Zurypelma, it will be to the species of that genus that the older name Avicularia ought in the first place to be applied. The other new genera cited in our Syn., which Kocu formed at the cost of WALCKENAER'S ”Mygales plantigrades”, may probably for the present be united with Eurypelma or Avicularia. I am not convinced, that any species belonging to this genus is met with in Europe. As however SIMON in his sub-genus Hurypelma — which he states to have "tarses élargis, garnis de brosses adhérentes; griffes trés- retractiles”, and which thus by these characteristics agrees with Avicularia (Law) NOB. — includes e. g. Mygale (Trechona) icterica C. KocH from Greece, which species is to me unknown, I consider that I ought, at least provisionally, to insert here the genus Avicularia.] Sub-ordo V. LATERIGRADJE. Syn.: Vid. infra sub Fam. 7homisoide. In their peculiar manner of moving — with about as much ease sideways or backwards as forwards, and with their femora depressed and stretehed out sideways, the following joints of the legs moving towards the femora in a plane more nearly approaching the horizontal than the vertical plane — the spiders belonging to this sub-order have a distinctive mark, by which, as is well known, they may usually without difficulty be distin- guished from all other spiders. Of the European genera, Micrommata (LATR.) is the only one, which has not the crab-like appearance that is peculiar to the other Laterigradæ. Many of the great exotic forms of this sub-order (especially those of the genus Heteropoda), present a striking analogy with certain Theraphosoide; but it is to the Drassoidæ in the sub-order Tubite- lariæ, that the Laterigradæ are most nearly related, and between which and them it is most difficult to assign the line of demarcation. Like the Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Se. Ups. Ser. III. 23 170 T. THORELL, Drassoide, they have only two claws at the extremity of the tarsi ): as in them, the eyes generally form two transversal rows; but these rows usually enclose a crescent-shaped or circular-segmental area, and are but rarely nearly parallel or curved towards each other?) Most frequently (also in Micrommata) the second pair of legs is longer than the others, which on the other hand, as far as I am aware, is never the case with the Drassoi- de. The maxillæ are usually narrow and strongly inclined towards the la- bium, the mandibles small and conical: nevertheless there are numerous ex- ceptions to this, of which Heteropoda and the genera nearly connected with it are striking examples. The species of this sub-order, at least the European ones, may for the present be united in a single family, Thomisoidw, to which we also refer the wonderful and but little known genus Anetes MENGE, which is stated to be destitute of both spinners and tarsal claws. Fam. I. THOMISOIDÆ. Syn.: 1817. "Latérigrades" Larr., in Cuv., Règne Anim., III, p. 91. 1823. Retrograde SUND., Gen. Aran. Suec., p. 18. 1825. Laterigradæ Larr., Fam. Nat. du Règne Anim., p. 315. 1833. Thomisides SUND., Consp. Arachn., p. 27. LATREILLE in 1804 ?) formed, at the expense of LINNÉ'S Aranea, for spiders belonging to this family the genera Heteropoda, Misumena and Mi- crommata. As the characteristic difference between the two first mentioned, 1) A remarkable exception is Sparassus abnormis BLACKW., which has only "a single claw at the extremity of each tarsus” (BLAckw., A list of spiders captured in the South-East region of Equat. Africa, p. 457). This species ought probably to form a separate genus. 2) In Eripus WALCK. the eyes are arranged in 3 or 4(?) transversal series. In Platythomisus DoLescu. the eyes form two rhômb-like groups, situated far apart at the two corners of the forehead; in Arcys WALCK., Heterognatha Nic. and Ane- tes MENGE on the contrary the lateral eyes are far removed from the central eyes, much about as in Æpeira. In Stephanopis CAMBR. the eyes are arranged in a ring, in Diphya Nic. they have again about the same position as in Ocyale. Thomisus yolo- phus Doum. has but 6 eyes, and ought of course to form a separate genus, for which we propose the name Daradius (from Daradus, the river Senegal); Sicarius WALCK. or Thomisoides Nıc., which, I suspect, belongs to this family, has also only 6 eyes. 3) Nouv. Dict. d’Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 135. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 171 he adduces the different relative length of the two posterior pairs of legs: they are in JMiswmena "brusquement plus menues et plus courtes que les autres”, which is not the case in Heteropoda. Micrommata, according to LATREILLE, differs from both these genera in having the maxillæ straight, not inclined to the labium. The next year WALCKENAER (in Tableau des Aranéides) united Heteropoda and Misumena in one genus, which he called Thomisus, instead of retaining for it, as in justice he ought to have done, one of the Latreillian names. The genus AMicrommata he adopted unaltered, but gave also to it a new name, Sparassus ). In the Tabl. des Aran., Thomisus is divided into three sections: "les Hétéropodes”, answering to Misumena, and "les Équipèdes brévirostres" and "les Équipèdes longirostres”, both together answering to Heteropoda LATR. In Faune franç., Arachn., Livr. 11 et 12 (1825?), the French forms of WALCKENAERS Thomisus were by that author again divided between two genera, Philodromus and Thomisus, the first of which corresponds to a part of Heteropoda LATR., the last to Miswmena LATR. In the same work, a few years later (1830), the genus Delena was proposed (p. 110): afterwards WALCKENAER, as is known, created or adopted several new genera formed at the expense of his Zhomisus: Selenops, Clastes, Arcys, Eripus, Olios (= Sarotes SUND.). — WALCKENAER soon perceived the intimate connexion between JMicrommata LATR. or Sparassus and the spiders, which in his Tabl. d. Aran. form the 8" family of Thomisus (Thom. leucosius or Ar. venatoria LINN. and others, for which he afterwards formed the genus Olios): in Faune Frang., loc. cit. we even find these latter referred to Sparassus, whereas LATREILLE had united them with the species of Philodromus, with which they have far less affi- nity. — 'The very different development of the posterior, compared with the anterior extremities in Misumena or Thomisus on the one side, and He- teropoda (Philodromus) and Micrommata on the other, probably still affords the best basis for the division of the Zhomisoide into larger groups, after the resolution of these old genera into a number of smaller; this basis has gained increased stability since attention has been called (by Ducks, On- LERT, and others) to the presence of hair-tufts (claw-brushes, claw-tufts, as I eall them) under the tarsal claws in the last two Latreillian genera, and the absence of them in the first-named. Simon also divides, chiefly on that principle, his family " Thomisiformes "into two tribes, " Philodromiens” and " Tho- 1) LATREILLE soon submitted in part to this usurpation, and himself adopted a couple (Thomisus, Philodromus) of the names imposed by WALCKENAER. But this of course does not authorize us here any more than elsewhere to neglect the law of priority. 172 T. THORELL, misiens”, uniting Micrommata (Sparassus) with the former?) The same two groups are also adopted by PRACH ?), who calls them Philodromi and Cancroides. According to our method they constitute sub-families, and may be called Philodromine and Thomisinæ. The sub-family Anetine we have added merely provisionally for the as yet too imperfectly known genus Anetes MENGE. The exotic genus Arcys WALCK. *) ought, it seems to me, to be con- sidered as the type of a separate sub-family, Arcyinæ, which shows strong analogies with certain Æpeiroide, as Gasteracantha (SUND.) and Peniza THOR. ). With the Arcyinæ, Anetes might perhaps also be united. WESTRING and BLACKWALL have divided the Thomisoidæ belonging to the European Fauna, with which they were acquainted, into only three genera, Thomisus, Philodromus and Sparassus. C. KocH detached from Tho- misus the genus Xysticus, and from Philodromus the genera Artamus and Thanatus 5), which three new genera have been adopted by SIMON, OHLERT and others. SIMON adds one more European genus, Oxyptila 9) SIMON however in a paper lately published 7) has abandoned his former division of the Thomisoidæ. Not satisfied with taking the genus Thomisus in as extensive a meaning as that which it bears in WALCKENAER’S latest works, he also unites with it Monastes Luc. (Monwses NOB.), and even wishes to suppress Philodromus WALCK., because that genus only differs from Zho- misus, "by a greater equality between the eight legs." But the greater part of the European genera of e. g. the family Attoidee adopted by Simon 5), are most assuredly as nearly connected with each other, and exhibit among . themselves quite as evident transitions as the above Thomisoid genera, and it cannot be right in estimating the value of generic characteristics to follow one rule with one family and another with another °). 1) Hist. Nat. d. Araignées, p. 392. 2) Monogr. d. Thomisiden v. Prag, p. 8 (604). 3) I possess one species of the genus Arcys from New Holland, kindly presented by Prof. LEUCKART, which appears to be identical with A. Zancearius WALCK. Spe- cies of that genus have else only been found in South America (Brazil, Chili). 4) Vid. THORELL, Eugenies Resa, Arachn., 1, p. 10. 5) Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 25—28. 6) Hist. Nat. d. Araignées, p. 440. 1) Sur quelques Araignées d'Espagne, p. 285. 8) Simon, Monogr. d. espèces Europ. de la fam. d. Attides, p. 6 (16). 9) The very principle on which Srwow's view of the connexion of the above- mentioned Thomisoid genera appears to rest, viz. that all genera, whieh gradually pass into each other, ought to be united in one, appears to me quite wrong. The case is just the same with genera as with families, orders, classes, etc., nay even On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 173 We arrange the European Thomisoide under the following genera: § Mamillæ ut et ungues in apice tarsorum adsunt. * Pedes 4 posteriores reliquis non vel parum graciliores, sæpissime iis non vel parum breviores. Tarsi in apice sub unguibus fasciculis duobus pilorum plus minus dilatatorum instructi. . . . . . . . . . . J. PHILODROMINAS. A. Utraque oculorum series ex oculis 4 composita. a. Oeuli medii antiei vix vel non longius a margine clypei quam a me- diis postieis remoti. Maxille plerumque rectæ et parallele. (Fasciculi unguieulares spississimi, ex pilis longis, tenuibus, in ipso apice tan- tum paullo dilatatis constantes). 1. Series oculorum antica paullo recurva, postica, desuper visa, paullo procurva. (Oculi intermedii in trapezium antice angustius dispositi). Genua pedum altius elevata. . . . . . . . . 1. Micrommata. with the two great main divisions of the organie world, the animal and vegetable kingdoms: all these various kinds of systematie unities have been formed on the strength of a certain, greater or less, number of common features, which the natural productions united under them seem to us to possess, and although we see now a greater, now a less saltus between the most nearly related coordinate groups, yet the differences in this respect do not affect the propriety of considering them as independent genera, families, orders, etc., provided only their typical forms show the amount of peculiarities, which one assumes to be necessary for a group to be acknowledged as possessing the signifieancy of a genus, family, etc., and provided some sure, even if insignificant, feature can be pointed out as determining in doubtful cases the limit of the group. The groups, which, like e. g. the genera Dinopis and Hyptiotes among Spiders, or like this and most other orders within the class of Arachnoidea, do not exhibit transitions to any other group, are comparatively few; and how vast differences in this respect are visible between e. g. the different orders of the class Crustacea on the one and of the Arachnoidea on the other hand! And yet surely no one will deny, that for inst. Copepoda and Branchio- poda are as natural and rational orders as Araneæ and Opiliones, although the boundary between the former is not so sharply defined, but that the same genus (e. g. Argulus) is referred by some authors to the Copepoda and by others to the Branchiopoda. Precisely similar to the relation between these two orders, is that between many genera, and among them that between 7homisus, Moneses and Philodromus: transitions there are, it is true, but the groups are on the whole and in their tupical forms sufficiently different, to deserve their separate denominations and the rank in the system, which it has hitherto been customary to give them. — The more new forms (especially fossile ones) are discovered, the more the intervals between a number of genera and of higher groups, which had previously been considered as widely separated, are filled up. If we were fully acquainted with the entire animal and vegetable world, both the now living and the extinct, all such gaps would as- suredly be filled up, and the truth of the old adage: natura non facit saltus, would stand out in all its grandeur. 1 4 T. THORELL, 2. Series oculorum antica paullo recurva, postica, desuper visa, sub- recta. (Oculi intermedii plerumque fere in rectangulum dispositi). Femora sub-librata, genubus parum elevatis. . . . 2. Sparassus. [3. Series oculorum antica sub-procurva vel recta, postica paullo re- curva vel sub-recta. Oculi laterales antici mediis anticis non ma- nifeste MATE S 20299: 5 0:5 121919925 209-2995 9 9 Hetenopodas) b. Oculi medii antici evidenter longius a margine clypei quam a mediis postieis remoti. Maxille in labium inelinate. (Pili fasciculorum un- guieularium breviores, compressi, in formam fere spathæ dilatatæ). a. Pedum proportio 2, 1, 4, 3 (vel 2, 1, 3, 4). Cephalothorax bre- viter ovatus vel sub-orbiculatus. 1. Series oculorum antiea modiee, postica levius recurva, oculi la- terales inter se paullo minus quam medii antici a mediis posticis distantes. Oculi laterales mediis paullo majores. Abdomen de- pressum, breviter et inverse ovatum vel sub-pentagonum. . "^. . SR uw: e mu) C IMP M Dor. PME NM YE . Series oculorum amb modice et æqualiter recurve; laterales in- ter se spatio non minori distantes quam quo distant medii antiei a mediis posticis. Abdomen plerumque ovatum vel inverse ova- DHT M ae US : : m POOR ONSE bo p. Pedum proportio 2, 4, 1, 3 vel 2, 4, 3, 1: series oculorum ambæ fortiter recurvæ. Cephalothorax et abdomen oblonga. 6. Thanatus. B. Series oculorum antica ex oculis 6, postica ex 2 tantum oculis constat. RU aL EM ML FAT ac lo (GODS ** Pedes 4 posteriores reliquis graciliores et breviores multo. Tarsi fasciculis UNAUICUIATDUSNCATENT NC NN M HI MEET A. Frons cum mandibulis declivis, sub-porrecta; oculi medii antici a margine clypei longius distantes quam a mediis posticis. 1. Series oculorum antica levius, postica fortius recurva; laterales antici evidenter majores quam medii antici. (Abdomen postice in tuberculum elevatum vel acuminato-productum). . . . . . . . 8 Moneses. 2. Series oculorum antica fortius, postica levius recurva, laterales antici non majores quam medii antici. . . . . . . . . 9. Thomisus. B. Frons et mandibule sub-verticales; oculi medii antici non longius a mar- gine clypei quam a mediis posticis remoti. a. Series oculorum antica plus minus recurva. a. Oculi laterales postici vix vel non majores quam medii postiei. (Oculi 4 medii plerumque in trapezium antice angustius dispositi). Aculei tibiarum graciles. 1. Series oculorum antieorum fortius, postieorum levius reeurva; oculi laterales antiei non vel parum majores quam intermedii anticl- ^. o: 046.54 OS), e membr ao BIOS UTERE On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 175 2. Series oculorum anticorum levius, posticorum fortius recurva; la- terales antici manifeste majores quam intermedii antici. 11. Dima. 8. Oeuli laterales postici evidenter majores quam medii postici; late- rales antiei multo majores quam intermedii antiei; laterales inter se vix vel non longius remoti quam medii antici a mediis posticis. (Oeuli 4 medii sæpius in reetangulum dispositi). Tibiæ et metatarsi anteriores subtus aculeis robustis armati. . . . . 12. Aysticus. b. Series oeulorum antiea sub-recta; oculi laterales inter se manifeste longius distantes quam medii antiei a mediis postieis; oculi 4 medii in reetangulum latiorem quam longiorem dispositi. Corpus valde depres- SUM ae) "oci Er busses EM CREE S LO CTULE So Mamulles et unsues, desunt. «eus are sm, tot Rut hu on. s, DUE ANETINZE, 1. Oculi laterales a, mediis longe remoti. . . ... =... . 14. Anetes. Sub-fam. I. PHILODROMINZE. The powerful development of the posterior extremities gives the spi- ders of this sub-family that quickness and lightness of motion in which they so remarkably excell the Zhomisinæ. — The claws are long and slender, generally straight or somewhat sinuated (i. e. slightly curved in the form of an ~) the greater part of their length, with only the extremity bent down to a hook. The claw-tufts vary in length and density, but are always pre- sent. — We assign the genus Selenops to this sub-family; by SIMON it is referred to the Thomisinæ, because the eyes in that genus are of different sizes, which he considers as one of the features by which the Thomi- sine are distinguished from the Philodrominæ. This is however no reliable characteristic, and indeed Simon himself, in his description of the genus Thomisus, says: "yeux égaux" 1). Gen. 1. MICROMMATA (Larr.) 1804. Deriv.: mexoouuaros, small-eyed (ucxods, small; ouua, eye). Syn.: 1804. Micrommata [Micromata] Larr., im Nouv. Diet. d'Hist Nat., XXIV, p. 135 (ad partem). 1) The exotie genus Delena WALCK. also we refer to the Philodrominæ, and not, as is done by SIMON, to the Thomisinæ. Its hinder pairs of legs are indeed not ineonsiderably shorter than the fore legs, but they are about equal to them in strength; and by the presence of strong claw-brushes, by the form of the claws themselves, and the powerfully developed scopulæ under the metatarsi and tarsi, as well as by its general appearance, Delena betrays a close affinity to Heteropoda. 176 T. THORELL, 1805. Sparassus Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 39 (ad part.: "1° Fam. Les Mycro- mates, Mycromate’’). 1806. Micrommata Latr., Gen. Crust. et Ins., I, p. 115. 1861. Sparassus WEsTR., Aran. Suec., p. 405. 1861. m Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 101. 1864. 7 Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 396 (ad partem). Type: Micrommata virescens (ÜLERCK). LATREILLE, in Nouv. Dict. d'Hist. Nat., l. c., states that his Micrommata eomprises the spiders that WALCKENAER calls "les Grottiformes" (Faune Par., II, p. 225), i. e. Aranea smaragdula, ornata, rosea (and A. accen- twata, which is placed there by mistake) In Gen. Crust. et Ins., Microm- mata smaragdula (Ar. virescens CLERCK.) is expressly adduced as the type of the genus. — The more recent synonym Sparassus we reserve for those species of Micrommata LATR. or Sparassus WALCK. for which WALCKENAER formed the family "Jes Opticiennes”, and which in the whole of their ap- pearance approach far nearer to WALCKENAER’S Olios (Heteropoda (LATR.) NOB.) than to the 1* family of his Sparassus. By some authors, e. g. WESTRING, Micrommata is referred to the Drassoide. It certainly differs considerably in general appearance from the more typical Thomisoidæ, the knees being so little depressed, that the ani- mal can hardly be called laterigrade; but the intimate relationship of Mi- crommata with the evidently laterigrade species of the next genus, Sparassus (WALCK.) NOB., is too palpable to allow of its being separated from the fa- mily before us and transferred to the Drassoidæ, although it may be con- sidered as forming the transition to these. — The form of the claws and claw-brushes is precisely that of the next following genus. The spiders united by HENTZ !) under the name of Micrommata, can- not belong to this genus, for they all have the posterior row of eyes strongly curved backwards, and the anterior row straight or curved forwards. They seem to approach much nearer to Dolomedes or to Dendrolycosa DOLESCH., than to Micrommata, as far at least as we can judge from the position of the eyes as described and figured by Hentz. Gen. 2. SPARASSUS (Wauck.) 1805. Deriv.: oagdoow, tear sunder. Syn.: 1805. Sparassus WaLck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 39 (2° Fam. Les Optieiennes, Optices”, saltem ad part.). 1) Aran. of the United States, in Bost. Journ. of Nat. Hist, V, p. 192. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. d 1818. Micrommata Larm., in Nouv. Dict. d'Hist. Nat., 2° Éd., XX (ad part.; sec. WALCK.). 11838. Ocypete C. Kocu, Die Arachn., IV, (ad part.:) p. 83. 1864. Sparassus [Sparassa] Sım., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 396 (ad partem). Type: Sparassus Argelasii WALCK. The species we have proposed as type for this new genus has, it appears to us, been referred by C. Koch to his Ocypete (Olios WALCK., Heteropoda (LATR.) NOB.) and described under the appellation of O. tersa (loc. eit), although it has by all other writers, who have treated on it, been considered as a Micrommata or Sparassus. From Micrommata, as that ge- nus has been limited by us, it differs in the strongly marked laterigrade position of the legs, in its more dense scopulæ, in the closer vicinity to each other of the two rows of eyes, etc. The eyes are moreover larger, and the anterior central eyes at least as large as the anterior lateral ones. From the next following genus, Heteropoda, it differs in that the anterior row of eyes is curved backward instead of being straight or curved somewhat forward. For this genus we have assumed the name Sparassus, which has previously been synonymous with Micrommata, and under which the typical species was first described. In Sparassus Argelasü the tarsal claws are very long and slender (somewhat longer still than in Mierommata), straight, only a little sinuated towards the middle, and with the extremity turned down into a hook. The teeth are short, blunt and pretty close together, gradually longer towards the extremity of the claw, their points forming an almost straight line; they are about 16 in number on the inner, and a couple less on the outer claw. The females palpal claw has about 8 tolerably strong, close-set comb-teeth, gradually increasing in length. The hairs in the thick claw-brushes are long and fine, with the extremity compressed, somewhat dilated, and bifid. [Gen. 3. HETEROPODA (LarR. 1804. Deriv.: ®orovs, with dissimilar feet (£regos, other; zrovc, foot). Syn.: 1804. Heteropoda Larr., in Nouv. Dict. d'Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 135 (ad partem). 1805. Thomisus Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 28 (ad part.: ”8° Fam. Les Robustes, Robuste’’). 1830. Sparassus 1D., Faune Franç., Arachn., p. 102 (ad partem). 1833. Sarotes Sunp., Consp. Arachn., p. 28 (ad partem). 11831. Ocypete C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 27 (ad max part.). Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 23 178 T. THORELL, 1837. Olios Warck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 563 (ad part.: saltem "1* Fam. Les Robustes, Robuste”). 1864. » Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 409 (ad partem). Type: Heteropoda venatoria (LINN.). The only species provided with specific name, that LATREILLE takes up loc. cit. as an example under his genus Heteropoda, is Aranea venatoria Linn. (Olios leucosios WALCK.) 3), which must accordingly be considered as the type of the genus. According to the characteristics given by LATREILLE to Heteropoda, it answers to the whole sub-family of Philodrominæ, quite as Misumena LATR. answers to the sub-family Thomisinæ. — That a whole Class (of Mollusca) several years afterwards (1812) should have received the name of Heteropods (Heteropoda), is certainly unfortunate, but this cir- cumstance, it seems to us, cannot hinder the use of the singular form He- teropoda as a generic name, any more than the circumstance, that this name would have been much more suitable to a Thomisine than to a Philodro- mine genus, since at any rate it is not false as applied to this last. (Conf. p. 10, note 3). The tarsal claws of H. venatoria are very long and slender, only at the end bent downwards, with (on the 2™ pair) about 12 comb-teeth on the inner claw; those nearest the base (the interior) are very close to each other, parallel, the exterior coarse and divergent; all are rather short, gradually increasing a little in length towards the extremity of the claw; on the outer claw they are less numerous and more sparse. The claw- brushes are long and. thick, every separate hair very fine and somewhat incrassated just at the apex: seen in profile it there appears to be serrated on the underside. The genus Olios WALCK. seems to us to contain forms too hetero- geneous to allow of its remaining long undivided. Its ”1" Famille”, and perhaps a couple more, belong to Æeteropoda, as we have in p. 174 deter- mined the limits of that genus. The same generic group, which WALCKE- NAER calls Olios, had been previously characterized by SUNDEVALL under the name of Sarotes. That name, the oldest synonym of Heteropoda, ought to be made use of, if ever the genus comes to be divided into smaller generic groups. The Walckenaerian name is so incorrectly formed — it is said to be derived from Giodc, dAowéc, destructive, and accordingly should be writ- 1) Ar. venatoria FaBr., Ent. Syst., II, p. 407 = Ar. nidulans 1D., Mant. Insect., p. 343 (1787), is a Theraphosoid (Nemesia), and therefore altogether diffe- rent from Ar. venatoria LINN. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 179 ten Olous or Olœus — that on that account alone it ought to be dis- carded. Ocypete, as the genus Heteropoda has been denominated by C. KocH, is a name already in 1815 assigned by LEACH to a genus of Acari. It is with doubt that I inelude this genus among those of Europe. Of the four species of Olios or Ocypete stated to belong to the European Fauna, one, the Ocypete tersa C. Kocu ?), is undoubtedly identical with Spa- rassus Argelasü, of which species I have found a specimen at Nizza, and have received another from Spain from Mr. Smon. The second, Ocypete vulpina (HAHN) C. KocH, described by HAEN as an Æpara, has according to KocH ?) its front row of eyes evidently curved backwards, and is there- fore surely a Sparassus (WALCK.) NOB. The third species, which, as well . as the preceding, is unknown to me, Olios spongitarsis (DUF.) WALCK. ?), is referred by DUFOUR *) to Micrommata (Sparassus WALCK.), and probably also belongs to Sparassus NOB. A fourth species, from Naples, described by CANESTRINI and PAVESI 5), is called Ocypete nigritarsis: it is perhaps also a Sparassus. | Gen. 4. SELENOPS Dur. 1820. Deriv.: celijvn, moon; ww, eye. Syn.: 1820. Selenops Dur., Descr. de six Arachn. nouv., p. 361. 1839. Hypoplatea (sub-gen. of Selenops) Mac Luay, On some new forms of Arachn., jae 6 1864, Seienops SIM, H. N. d. Araignées, p. 420. Type: Selenops homalosoma DvF. The typical European species is to me unknown. — In a species from Asia Minor (Caramania), belonging to the ”3" Fam. Les Apharteres” of the genus in WALCKENAER (Ins. Apt., I, p. 548), and which I have re- ceived from Count KEYSERLING, the claws differ in appearance from those of all other Thomisoide known to me. They are indeed very long and slender, like those of the Philodrominæ in general, but they are pretty wnz- . formly curved, not straight the greatest part of their length, and entirely destitute of teeth. Under the claws are two strong, very thick claw-brushes, the hairs of which are long and fine, slightly dilated at the end, as in 1) Die Arachn., IV, fig. 305; ibid., XII, p. 39, figg. 980, 981. 2) Ibid., XII, p. 30, fig. 974. 3) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., 1, p. 574. 4) Deser. de six Arachn. nouv., p. 12 (366); Sur la Micr. spongitarsis, p. Liv. 5) Aran. ital., p. 138. 180 T. THORELL, Heteropoda, Micrommata, ete. The thick scopula under the tarsus and meta- tarsus of these genera is absent in Selenops, which genus thus is distinguished not by its peculiar position of the eyes alone. It is possible that this genus may have been created already by LATREILLE, in the 2™ Edit. of Nouv. Dict. d'Hist. Nat., which I have not had the opportunity of consulting (Conf. Durour, loc. cit). In his later works however LATREILLE calls it: ” Selenops DUFOUR." Gen. 5. ARTANES vw. Deriv.: "4oravns, proper name. Syn.: +1837. Artamus C. KocH, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 27. 1861. Philodromus WEsTR., Aran. Suec., p. 445 (ad partem). 1861. - Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 91 (ad partem). 1864. Artamus [Artama] Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 415. Type: Artanes margaritatus (CLERCK). Artamus being the well known and accredited name of a genus of birds, so named by VIEILLOT as early as 1816, I have been obliged to give the spider-genus Artamus a new appellation. In this and the two following genera, the hairs of the claw-tufts have an appearance quite different from that presented in any of the genera of the family, we have as yet described: these hairs are in fact beyond all comparison shorter and broader, flattened, spade-like or feather-like, and far less numerous (especially in Thanatus). The claws are often shorter, espe- cially in Thanatus, but of the same form; the teeth usually far more nu- merous on the inner than on the outer claw, in Philodr. aureolus, for inst., about 5 on the outer and about 14 on the inner claw; in Thanatus oblon- gus about 3 on the outer and about 10 on the inner; but in Zh. formicinus about 5 on the outer and 8 on the inner. The number of teeth on the claws is here, as usual, frequently very different not only on the different pairs of legs of the same individual, but on the same pair in different in- dividuals of the same species, and accordingly the number observed by me in the various specimens that I have examined, frequently differs considerably from that given by OHLERT. Gen. 6. PHILODROMUS (Warck.) 1820—26. Deriv.: qeléw, love, like; doduos, course, run. Syn.: 1825(?) Philodromus Watck., Fauna Franç., Arachn., p. 86 (ad partem). 1837. 2 C. Kock, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 28. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 181 . 1861. Philodromus Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 445 (ad partem). 1861. så Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 91 (ad partem). 1864. m [Philodroma] Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 406. Type: Philodromus aureolus (CLERCK). WALCKENAER refers Thaumasia senilis PERTY ") to the genus Philo- dromus, without doubt erroneously: it is not certain that Thaumasia is even a Thomisoid: PERTY himself refers it, though doubtfully, to the Zubitelarie. Gen. 7. THANATUS C. Koch. 1837. Deriv.: Savards, death. Syn.: 1837. Thanatus C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 28. 1861. Philodromus WEsTR., Aran. Suec., p. 445 (ad partem). 1861. & Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 91 (ad partem). 1864. Thanatus [Thanata] Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 401. Type: Thanatus formicinus (CLERCK). Sub-fam. I. THOMISINÆ. This sub-family includes the forms which are strictly speaking ty- pical of the whole family — the xer éfoyÿv "crab-spiders". Their two pairs of back legs are always weaker and much shorter than the fore legs; single feather- or spade-like hairs are sometimes found under the claws, but they do not form claw-tufts or claw-brushes as in the Philodrominæ. The tarsal claws are (at least in the females) broad at the base, short and strong, and curved almost from the base, with rather long, closely set comb- teeth. In Xysticus and Coriarachne they are particularly coarse and blunt, in Misumena and other genera slenderer and more pointed. à From the genus Thomisus WALCK., in the compass given to it in th "Faune Francaise", and which is still received by for example WESTRING and BLACKWALL, i. e. as identical with Misumena Larr., C. Koch already in 1835 detached his genus Xysticus, which is very natural, and has been adopted by many arachnologists. The remaining species of Thomisus WALCK., for which C. KocH preserved that latter generie name, are on the contrary too heterogeneous to be allowed to remain united under a common name. One is obliged either to preserve Misumena LATR. (Thomisus WALCK.) un- 1) Delect. Anim. Art. Bras., p. 192, Tab. XXXVIII, fig. 5. 182 T. THORELL, a divided, or else to break up Zhomisus ©. KOCH into some few minor ge- nera. I, for my part, have preferred the latter alternative. SIMON!) has already divided Thomisus C. KOCH, Sım., into 4 "sub-genera", Phlooides, Thomisus, Pachyptila and Synema, and the sub-genus Zhomisus again into three "groups", Thomisus, Cirrofera (= Platythomisus DOLESCHALL ?) saltem | ad partem) and Diana, and has furthermore proposed the new genera Oxy- ptila and Phrynoides (Phrynarachne NOB.: vid. sup. p. 37). The last-named (exotic) genus appears to me to merit preservation, but the other, European, groups, to which he has assigned generic names, I cannot, in the very vague limits of Simon’s definitions, accept as genera. Li Gen. 8. MONJESES x. Deriv.: Movatoys, proper name. Syn.:41845—41. Monastes Luc., Explor. de l'Algérie, Arachn., p. 192. 1847. D Warck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., IV, p. 432. 1838. Xysticus C. Kocn, Die Arachn., IV, (ad part.:) p. 79. 1864. Monastes Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 418. 1864. Xysticus ID., ibid., p. 524 (ad partem). 1868. Thomisus ID., Sur quelques Araignées d'Espagne, p. 284 (ad partem). Type: Monwses paradoxus (LUC.). The genus Monastes — or Moneses, as I have called it, the name Monastes being already appropriated (vid. p. 37) — was formed by Lucas for two remarkable Thomisinæ from Algeria, and has lately been increased by SIMON with a third and European species, Thomisus Piochardi Sim. from Spain. As a fourth species I refer to this genus Xysticus cuneolus C. Koch, which also belongs to the Fauna of Europe. SIMON in the latter of his works above cited has suppressed this genus and united it with Thomisus, which appears to us by no means a happy step. On this subject se farther p. 172. The genus Sylvia Nic.*) seems to me, judging from the figures, to be nearly related to, perhaps identical with Monwses, although the species of that genus are said not to be laterigrade, and to have vertical mandi- bles. — Sylvia is the old Linnzean name of a genus of birds. In JM. cuneolus the tarsal claws present very nearly the same con- struction as in ÂMisumena and Dima; the inner claw has about 12 long, 1) Hist. Nat. d. Araignées, p. 432. f 2) Tweede Bijdr. t. de Kenn. d. Arachn. v. d. Ind. Arch., p. 59. 3) Gray, Hist. fis. e pol. de Chile, Zool., III, p. 465. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 183 e parallel comb-teeth, of which those nearest the base are considerably finer and very close-set; the outer has about 8 somewhat equal, coarse teeth. The palpal claw is small, with about 4 pretty long comb-teeth. Gen. 9. THOMISUS (Watck.) 1805. Deriv.: perhaps Jwuioow, bind, whip. Syn.: 1805. Thomisus Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 28 (ad partem). 1825 (?). 4 ID., Faune Franç., Arachu., (ad part.:) p. 70. 1831. » C. Kocn, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 24 (ad partem). 1861. a3 Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 66 (ad partem). 1864. s [Thomisa]: sub-gen. Phleoides Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 431 > (ad partem). Type: Thomisus abbreviatus (WALCK.). We preserve WALCKENAERS generic name Thomisus for the large and remarkable species, which WALCKENAER called Th. abbreviatus and HAHN Th. diadema, and which also in the works of C. KocH retains the generic name Thomisus. — By its high and sloping clypeus and its somewhat pro- truded mandibles, this spider, like the species of Monwses, in some degree resembles the Philodrominæ, but the entire general appearance of the ani- mal, as well as the presence of the characters that distinguish the sub-family Thomisinæ, gives it an undoubted place in the last named group. The tarsal claws of Th. abbreviatus 9 are small, but coarse, not so blunt however as those of Xysticus, with about 8 tolerably long, somewhat curved comb-teeth on the inner and 4 on the outer claw. The female's palpal claw is almost straight throughout half its length, then sharply eurv- ed, with a long point and about 5 long comb-teeth, of which that nearest the base is considerably smaller than the rest. Gen. 10. MISUMENA (LarR.). 1804. Deriv.: weoovuevos, hated (ueoéw, hate). Syn.: 1804. Misumena Larr., in Nouv. Dict. d'Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 135 (ad partem). 1805. Thomisus Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 28 (ad partem). 1837. z C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., p. 24 (ad partem). 1861. u Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 410 (ad partem). 1861. i3 Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 66 (ad partem). 1864. P [Thomisa]: sub-gen. Phleoides, Thomisus et Pachyptila Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 431 (ad partem). Type: Misumena vatia (CLERCK). 184 T. THORELL, La Misumena LATR. 1804 is, as we already know, synonymous with Thomisus WALCK. 1805 ad part., and accordingly has the right of priority in preference to that later name. As LATREILLE loc. cit. names Aranea citrea DE GEER (Aran. vatius CLERCK) as the type of Misumena, this oldest generic name must be reserved for that one of the smaller genera, into which Misumena or Thomisus has by later authors been resolved, that in- cludes Ar. vatius CLERCK. To Misumena, besides Ar. vatius, I reckon among others Ar. truncata PALL. (horrida FABR.), Thom. lateralis C. Koch, as also Thom. villosus LATR., for which SIMON has formed the sub-genus Pachyptila. In order that the generally known name Thomisus may not be altogether lost, I have preserved it for a genus formed by myself, of which the type is Zhomisus abbreviatus WALCK. See preceding genus. Gen. 11. DIMA wx. Deriv.: Avaiocs, proper name. Syn.: 1805. Thomisus Watcx., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 28 (ad partem). 1831. 5 C. Koch, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 24 (ad partem). 1861. re Westr., Aran. Suec., p. 410 (ad partem). 1861. 5 Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 66 (ad partem). - 1864. z [Thomisa]: sub-gen. id.: "groupe" Diana, et sub-gen. Synæma [Synema] Sm., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 431 (saltem ad partem). Type: Diea dorsata (FABR.). The spiders belonging to this genus, which are usually referred to the same genus (Zhomisus C. KocH) as Misumena vatia (CLERCK); differ from that and from other species of Misumena by having the anterior row of eyes less eurved than the posterior, as also the anterior lateral eyes evi- dently larger than the anterior central ones. In that respect they more nearly approach Xysticus than Misumena, which latter genus however they most closely resemble in their weak extremities, armed with fine spines, and their usually lively colours. This genus appears very nearly to coincide with the "group" Diana of Smon’s Thomisus; but the name given by Sr MON being previously engaged (vid. p. 36), I have replaced it with Diva. — Ar. globosa FABR., which appears to be the type of the sub-genus Synæma SIM., may, although in its appearance tolerably different from Diea dor- sata, D. tricuspidata (Thom. Diana WALCK.) etc., perhaps for the present be united with Diva. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 185 e Gen. 12. XYSTICUS (C. Kocn). 1835. Deriv.: probably Evorexdc, scraping (£vw, scrape, polish). Sım.: 1835. Xysticus C. Koch, in Hrrr.-Scherr., Deutschl. Ins., 129, 16, 17. 1837. M ID., Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 25 (ad partem). 1861. Thomisus Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 410 (ad partem). 1861. jä Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 66 (ad partem). 1864. Xysticus [Xystica] Sım., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 427 (ad max. part.). 1864. Oxyptila [Ozyptila] 1D., ibid., p. 440. 1867. Xysticus OHL., Aran. d. Prov. Preuss., p. 108. Type: Aysticus Kochü N. = X. viaticus C. KOCH ?). The genus Oxyptila Srw., formed for Thomisus claveatus WALCK., appears to me to differ from Xysticus only by the bristles on the body being incrassated at the extremity; this is also the case in Thom. scabriculus WESIR., which species I cannot generically distinguish from e. g. Xyst. brevipes, in which the bristles display, though in a less degree than in Th. claveatus and scabriculus, a tendency to become thicker towards the end. The name Omwyptila can moreover hardly be retained, on account of its signification (from sóc, sharp and riAov, bristle), which is absolutely the reverse of the characteristic feature (the club-like thickening of the bristles towards the apex) which seems to constitute the principal claim of this group to be considered as a separate genus. In the genus Xysticus the tarsal claws are very different in the two sexes. In .X. cristatus for ex. they are in the female short and strong, pretty regularly eurved, with 4 or 5 strong comb-teeth and frequently also a finer tooth near the base. In the male the claws are weaker, rather long and slender: they are but slightly curved for the greatest part of their length, almost straight, with the point turned downwards; the outer elaw has about 5 sparse and eoarse teeth; on the inner claw the teeth are more numerous, for where in the outer claw the inmost tooth is posited, we find in the in- ner a group of about 5 closely set, fine teeth. 1) Aranea viatica Linn. or A. cristatus CLERCK, which C. KocH considers to be the same as his Aysticus viaticus, is an entirely different species, and = .X. audax C. KocH. — In both species the genital bulb is on the underside, nearer the base, provided with two processes: in .X. cristatus that nearest the base is broad, compressed, elaw-like, the other is slender and has almost the form of a I or an anchor; im X. Kochii, both processes are slender and of about the same substance: that nearest the base is bent almost in the form of a boot, the other process has its ‘short, blunt extremity curved against the foot of the boot. — X. Kochii has not as yet been found in Sweden. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 24 186 T. THORELL, Gen. 13. CORIARACHNE wn. Deriv.: xógtc, bug; dodyvn, Spider. Syn.: 1837. Thomisus C. Koch, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 25 (ad partem). 1838. Xysticus ID., Die Arachn., IV (ad part.:) p. 67. 1850, Thomisus 1p., Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 37 (ad partem). 1861. 5 Westr., Aran. Suec., p. 410 (ad partem). 1864, Xysticus Sım., H. N. d. Aran., p. 427 (ad partem). Type: Coriarachne depressa (C. Koch). That the spider C. KocH has in the above cited passage of "Die Arachniden" described under the name of Xysticus depressus, cannot perma- nently be considered as belonging to the genus Xysticus, he has himself seen, and has accordingly in Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, loc. cit. moved it to his Thomisus. But that he is still dissatisfied with the position he has thus assigned to this remarkable species, appears from his appending the remark: ”Allen Formen nach eine eigene Gattung.” In fact this spider, which in the particularly depressed form of its body resembles certain spe- cies of Delena and Heteropoda, must be considered as the type of a spe- cial genus, the nearest neighbour to Xysticus, but distinguished from that genus, not only by its flattened body, but by having the anterior row of eyes straight, while the posterior row is sensibly curved backward. — The claws have much the same appearance as those of Xysticus. Sub-fam. UI. ANETINÆ. + Gen 14. ANETES Menges. 1850. Deriv.: @ priv.; véw, spin. Syn.: 1850. Anetes MENGE, Verzeichn. Danz. Spinn., p. 71. Type: Anetes celetrum MENGE. All that is known about this remarkable genus is contained in the following lines. "Lastly I mention here a spider, which I look upon as new both as to genus and species, and which I shall call Anetes cœletron. Eyes posited as in Epeira. Abdomen oblong heart-formed, flat, terminating in a hard point posteriorly; on the underside of the belly a triangular, bordered (umsäumte) depression, in which I have not been able to discover any spinners. Tarsi destitute of claws. Length about 2 lines. Cephalo- ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 187 thorax brownish, abdomen white, densely sprinkled with dark-brown points. Legs yellowish-white, mottled with brown. Lives in decaying matter. Un- fortunately I possess no more than one female specimen. Appears to be nearly related to Arkys lancearius WALCK. Apt, I, 497, pl. 13, Fig. 3." (MENGE, loc. cit.). Sub-ordo VI. CITIGRADA. Syn.: 1817. "Citigrades" Latr., in Cuv., Règne Anim., III, p. 95. 1823. Cursores Sunp., Gen. Aran. Suec., p. 20. 1825. Citigradæ Larr., Fam. Nat. du Règne Anim., p. 316. 1833. Lycosides SUND., Consp. Arachn., p. 23 1852. Venatores Dotuscu., Syst. Verzeichn. ete., p. 8. This perfeetly natural and universally acknowledged group, almost identical with WALCKENAERS ” Coureuses" and SIMON'S ” Lycosiformes”, and characterised by its high, almost prismatie cephalothorax, with narrow back, its eyes, which are arranged in 3 or 4 transversal rows (rarely in 2, and, when so, the posterior row strongly curved backwards), its 3 tarsal claws, its wandering habits, etc., has but few points of connexion with other sub- orders. The Lycosoide however show (through Dolomedes) a relationship with the Agulenoide (Textrix) and Drassoide (Zora), but may, as far at least as regards the European forms, be easily distinguished from them by differences in the form of the cephalothorax, as also by the the position of the spinning tubes on the spinners, or by the number of the claws. They + also show a certain affinity to the Ælersihoide, but these are without diffi- eulty distinguished by their long superior spinners, garnished with spinning fubes all along the under side, by the form of the parts of the mouth, etc. (Conf. p. 114). The genus Catadysas HENTZ (vid. p. 43, 161) is a connecting link between the Zycosoidæ and the Theraphosoide ?) The Oxyopoidæ show evident analogies With the Aztoide; both the Oxyopoidæ and Ocyale resemble in their general appearance certain Philodromine (Thanatus); but the form of the cephalothorax and the number of the claws is different, and the dif- 1) Like several of these latter, many Lycosoide dig with their mandibles deep holes or galleries in the ground: HENTZ (Aran. of the United States, in Bost Journ. of Nat. Hist., IV, p. 229) even states that he once found such a hole, in the winter, which was supplied with a /id. Also of the European Tarentula Apulie it has been said that it closes the orifice of its gallery for hibernation; but this is an error: Conf. BERGSoE, lagttagelser om den Italienske Tarantel ete., p. 255. 188 T. THORELL, ference in the form of the claws between any of these Citigradæ on the one side and the Philodromine and Attoide on the other is still greater. Simon divides his ”Lycosiformes” into 3 tribus, Herséliens, Lycosiens, and Dolomédiens. The first of these answers to our Hersilioide, which ap- pear to us to belong to the sub-order Tubitelarie, and not to the Citigradze. The other two, which are distinguished, the ”Zycosiens” by having "yeux inégaux, corps court et ramassé, membres robustes et courts", whereas the " Dolomédiens" have "yeux peu inégaux, corps étroit et allongé, membres fins, longs et allongés", I cannot consider even as sub-families, for these characteristics do not appear to me to hold good: Dolomedes for example cannot surely be said to have a slenderer body and finer extremities than e. g. Lycosa, Oxyopes LATR. on the other hand is already by the position of the eyes so distinctly separated from other Citigrade, that that genus may rea- sonably be considered as the type of a separate family. We accordingly divide the European Citigrade into two families, Lycosoide and Oxyopoide, in the following manner: 1. Oculi in series transversas tres vel duas dispositi: oculi 4 posteriores in tra- pezium postice latius, vel in lineam fortiter recurvam dispositi. I. Lycosoide. bo Oculi in series transversas quattuor vel tres dispositi; oculi 4 posteriores in trapezium postice angustius vel in seriem proeurvam dispositi. IL Oxyopoide. Fam. I. LYCOSOIDA. Syn.: 1833. Lycosides Sunp., Consp. Arachn., p. 23 (ad max. part.). In this family we include all genera belonging to the Citigrade, with the exception of Oxyopes LATR. or Sphasus WALCK. and Pasithea BLACKW. or Peucetia NoB. — The claws in this family are very nearly similar to those of the Agalenoide: the superior tarsal claws are strong, broad at the base, pectinated; the inferior claw is bent suddenly downwards, but, unlike what is usually the case with the Agalenoide, is generally toothless; occasionally it is furnished with one or two pointed teeth. The palpal claw of the female is also pectinated, but has usually only a few teeth. In c? of many species, especially within the genera Lycosa and Trochosa, the palpus is, as OnrERT has shown 1), provided at the extremity with an appendage more or less resembling a claw, which however can only be considered as a coarse spine, in as much as that it is not, like a real claw, broader at 1) Klauenbild. d. Preuss. Spinn., p. 12. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 189 the base, moveable and articulated to the tarsus; sometimes two or even - three such spines are found situated close to each other at the extremity of the palpus. In Dolomedes (at least D. fimbriatus), the palpus of the male (as has been discovered by OmnLERT, loe. cit.) is provided with a genuine pectinated claw at its extremity, which is not the case in any other genus that I know of among the Citigradæ (not even in Ocyale), and has only been observed in one spider beside Dolomedes, namely in Æersiliola oraniensis (Conf. p. 116). The European genera accepted by us as belonging to this family are as follows: § Series oculorum antica ex oculis 4 formata. * Oculi medii seriei anticæ a margine clypei spatio remoti quod diametrum oculorum non vel paullo tantum superat. A. Mamille superiores reliquis saltem dimidio longiores. Facies alta, sub- quadrata, fronte prominenti; series oculorum antica proeurva. 1. Aulonia. DB. Mamillæ superiores reliquis vix vel non longiores. a. Series oculorum antiea paullo brevior quam media. Area oculorum sque saltem longa atque lata. Facies alta. 1. Facies sub-quadrata, versus mandibulas non vel parum latior, la- Lenibusnectisas Wedes extlsSatenucsssas E RR E E UOS: 2. Facies versus mandibulas multo latior, lateribus fortiter convexis. Pedes plerumque robusti et extus parum attenuati. . 3. Tarentula. b. Series oculorum antica plerumque paullo longior, saltem non brevior quam media. Area oeulorum plerumque latior quam longior. Facies humilis, lateribus convexis; oculi medii seriei antieæ vix longius quam diametro suo a margine clypei remoti. 1. Oculi medii seriei antieze majores, vix vel non minores quam oculi seriei posticæ: series oculorum antieorum evidenter longior quam series media. Cephalothorax plerumque densius appresso-pubescens. dum ED RM hu} iur adde dE voe Mose. E133 CC RDS US 2. Oculi medii seriei anticæ parvi, evidenter minores quam oculi seriei postieze: cephalothorax parce pubescens. . . . . . 5. Pirata. ** Oculi medii seriei antice a margine clypei spatio remoti, quod diametro oculorum maximorum duplo saltem majus est. 1. Oculi 4 seriei antieze sub-æquales. Pedes robustiores. . . 6. Dolomedes. 2. Oeuli 2 laterales seriei anticæ evidenter majores quam medii ejusdem se- xiemubedesWeracilesu Dr Ne, Bool a8 oo PR Ue Claotenia, [SS Series oculorum antica ex duobus tantum oculis constans. Oculi laterales seriei mediæ ab oculis duobus seriei posticæ longe disjuneti . . . . 8. Céenus.| 190 T. THORELL, Gen. 1. AULONIA C. Kocx. 1848. Deriv.: avlwv, defile, valley. Syn.: 1805. Lycosa Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 10 (ad part.: "3? Fam. Les Porte-Queues, Caudatæ "). 1848. » Sub-gen. Aulonia C. Koch, Die Arachn., XIV, p. 97. 1864. Lycosina Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 369. Type: Aulonia albimana (WALCK.). In this genus, which is especially distinguished by its long superior spinners, the claws are of the form usual within the family. The typical species, of which I found several examples at Kissingen, has about 7 or 8 gradually increasing comb-teeth on the superior tarsal claws, and two fine, rather long teeth on the inferior claw. The palpal claw has 3 or 4 teeth gradually increasing in length. Gen. 2. LYCOSA (Larr.). 1804. Deriv.: Avxow, tear like a wolf (Avxos, wolf). Syn.: 1804 Lyeosa Larr., in Nouv. Dict. d'Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 135 (ad partem). 1805. 5 Warer., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 10 ("1* Fam. Les Terricoles, Zerricole” ad part.). 1833. » : sub-gen. Lycosa SuxD., Consp. Arachn., p. 24. 1848. » : sub-gen. Pardosa C. Kocx, Die Arachn., XIV, p. 96. 1848. » : sub-gen. +Limonia [Leimonia] ID., ibid., p. 99. 1861. äs Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 467 (ad partem). 1861. T Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 16 (ad partem). 1864. » : sub-gen. Limonia [Leimonia] et Lycosa Sım., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 349, 351, 352. 1867. Pardosa Omnr., Aran. d. Prov. Preuss., p. 127, 136. 1867. Limonia [Leimonia] ID., ibid., p. 127, 133. Type: Lycosa lugubris WALCK. | When in 1848 C. Koon divided the genus Lycosa of LATREILEE into several sub-genera (as SUNDEVALL had already done in 1833), he gave new names to them all, without preserving to any the old name Lycosa. His sub-genus Pardosa appears to us to embrace the forms, in which the type of the Lycosoide is best and most fully developed, and SIMoN has therefore done rightly in preserving to that sub-genus the old generic name Lycosa. As type of the genus we select the well-known L. lugubris WALCK. (= L. silvicola SuND., L. alacris. C. Koch). On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 191 As regards Limonia [.Leimonia] C. Koch, the pecularities in the form of the head and position of the eyes of this sub-genus do not appear to us of sufficient importance to require a generic separation from Pardosa or Lycosa, and we therefore give to the last named genus the compass as- signed by SUNDEVALL in the Consp. Arachn. to his sub-genus Lycosa. The difference in the habits of Pardosa and Limonia, mentioned by C. Koch, is not universal, for e. g. L. lignaria (CLERCK), which is evidenly a Limonia, lives in dry, sunny places (especially in pine-woods), not in wet localities. In the structure of the claws there is no difference: also the form of the cocoon is the same in Pardosa and Limonia. — The name Leimonia had already in 1816 been given by HÜBNER to a genus of Lepidoptera. BLACKWALL and WESTRING preserve WALCKENAER'S Lycosa undivided, and it must be admitted, that the characteristic distinetions, on the strength of whieh it has by some modern arachnologists been divided into several genera, are by no means so sharp as could be desired. They show them- selves more in the animals’ habits, in the form given to their cocoons, and in the disposition of the eolours, than in distinetly marked differences in the form of the various parts of the body. The superior tarsal claws in Lycosa have ordinarily from 5 to 7 coarse, thinly set, somewhat divergent teeth; the inferior claw is usually unarmed, but, according to OHLERT, is now and then provided with a very small tooth. In the species examined by me the palpal claw is furnished with two or three coarse teeth. Gen. 3. TARENTULA (Sunp.). 1833. Deriv.: Tarentum, proper name of the city now called Taranto. Uu Syn.: 1805. Lycosa Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 10 ("1* Fam. Les Terricoles, Zerricole” - ad partem). 1833. » : Sub-gen. Tarentula SUND., Consp. Arachn., p. 24 (ad partem). 1848. » : sub-gen. Tarantula C. Kocn, Die Arachn., XIV, p. 96. 1861. x Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 467 (ad partem). 1861. T Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 16 (ad partem). 1864. » : sub-gen. Tarantula Sım., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 349, 350. 1867. Tarantula OHL., Aran. d. Prov. Preuss., p. 127, 138. Type: Tarentula Apulie (WALCK.). The tarsal claws are similar in form and armature to those of Ly- cosa; the superior have most generally from 5 to 7 teeth (usually 6—8 on the 4" pair), the inferior is destitute of teeth. "The palpal claw has about 192 T. THORELL, 4 teeth. In the large burrowing species, e. g. 7: melanogaster (LATR.) or JNarbonensis (WALCK.), the free point of the claw is longer and bent more deeply downward than in the smaller species found in north and central Eu- rope. In 7. melanogaster, the palpal claw has 4, the superior tarsal claws 5 or 6 teeth in the first half of their length. Also in 7' Apulie these latter claws are armed with 5 strong comb-teeth, according to BERGSOE !). Gen. 4. TROCHOSA (€. Koch). 1848. Deriv.: zooydw = wvoéyo, run. Syn.: 1805. Lycosa Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 10 ("1* Fam. Les Terricoles, Zerricole” ad partem). 1833. » + Sub-gen. Tarentula Sunp., Consp. Arachn., p. 24 (ad partem). 1848. Trochosa C. Koch, Die Arachn., XIV, p. 95. 1848. Arctosa ID., ibid., p. 94. 1861. Lycosa Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 467 (ad partem). 1861. » Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 16 (ad partem). 1864. Trochosa Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 345. Type: 7. ruricola (DE GEER). I have not been able to discover any feature depending on difference of form, whereby Arctosa ©. KocH may with certainty be distinguished from Trochosa 1D., and I therefore follow SIMON in uniting these two genera in one, under the latter name. A difference might perhaps be shown to exist in the form of the claws, but it does not appear to me advisable to found a genus on a characteristic, that can only be discerned by the aid of the microscope. In the species of Arctosa that I have had the opportunity of examining (A. cinerea C. KocH, A. picta ID., Lyc. leopardus SUND.), the superior tarsal and the palpal claws have their toothless extremity considerably longer, and eurved more deeply downwards, thau in most other Lycosoidze, at least on the fore legs: the superior tarsal claws are provided with teeth through- out their first half only, and on the palpal claw the teeth are seated still nearer the base. This form of the claws is, I suppose, connected with these spiders’ more fully developed ability of digging themselves cylindrical holes or galleries in the earth. (Conf. preceding genus, Tarentula). In T. (A.) cinerea I have met with about 10 teeth on the superior tarsal claws of the 1°, and 12 on the 4" pair of legs, those most external being bent somewhat forward, all of about equal length; the inferior claw is small and 1) Iagttag. om den Ital. Tarantel ete., p. 245. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 193 destitute of teeth; the palpal claw has 3 or 4 small comb-teeth close to the base. In 7: (A.) picta the claws are somewhat shorter, with about 8 teeth on the superior tarsal claws, in 7! (A.) leopardus with 7: in this last species I have seen one tooth on the inferior claw, and a very small point just behind it, at least on the 4" pair of legs. — Also in 7. intricaria C. Koch the free extremity of the claws is very long; the superior tarsal claws have but 4 parallel teeth, of which the three outer are very coarse; the palpal claw has also 4 teeth, the innermost much smaller than the others. This species is also distinguished by the trapezoid formed by the 4 posterior eyes being twice as broad behind as in front, whereas in the typical spe- cies of the genus it is only 14 time as broad behind: moreover the anterior row of eyes is longer in comparison with the middle row than in the other species of the genus. But it does not appear to me necessary on account of these deviations to form a new genus for 7. intricaria. | T. ruricola has 5—6 comb-teeth on the superior tarsal claws; the inferior claw is without teeth; the palpal claw has four gradually increasing teeth. In this species the spine, which is so frequently met with among the Lyeosoidz at the end of the male's palpus, is pointed and somewhat curved at the extremity, and thus very like a toothless claw; it is absent in 7. terricola 'THOR., in which species the female’s palpal claw is generally furnished with 2 coarse teeth, and a 3" small tooth behind them. Gen. 5. PIRATA Suwp. 1833. Deriv.: mecoatis, pirate. Syn.: 1805. Lycosa WarcK., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 10 (ad part.: "2* Fam. Les Corsaires, Piraticæ”). 1833. „ © sub-gen. Pirata SUND., Consp. Arachn., p. 24. 1848. » : Sub-gen. +Potamia C. KocH, Die Arachn., XIV, p. 98. 1861. s Westr., Aran. Suec., p. 467 (ad partem). 1861. 5 Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 16 (ad partem). 1864. » : Sub-gen. Potamia Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 349, 352. 1867. Potamia OHL., Aran. d. Prov. Preuss., p. 126, 132. Type: Pirata piraticus (CLERCK). The name Pirata SUND. has right of priority in preference to Po- tamia C. KocH, which latter moreover had been already several times ap- propriated, before KocH in 1848 applied it to the genus before us.— Vid. p. 37. P. piraticus has about 7 long teeth on the superior tarsal claws, and one fine tooth with the rudiment of a second on the inferior claw. The Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 25 194 T. THORELL, palpal claw has 3 teeth. In P. uliginosus THOR. there are on the superior tarsal claws about 8, on the inferior 1, and on the palpal claw 4 or 5 teeth. Gen. 6. DOLOMEDES (Lamm. 1804. Deriv.: dolouÿons, wily (d0Aos, cunning, uyÿdouæ, devise). Syn.: 1804 Dolomedes LaTR., zn Nouv. Dict. d'Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 135. 1805. " Wazck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 15 (ad part.: “1° Fam. Les Riverines, Ripuarie”’). 1833. Lycosa: sub-gen. Dolomedes SUND., Consp. Arachn., p. 24. 1861. Dolomedes Westr., Aran. Suec., p. 534. 1861. " Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 37 (ad partem). 1864. À Sım., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 374. Type: Dolomedes fimbriatus (CLERCK). On the superior tarsal claws of the typical species I have found 8— 10 teeth; the inferior claw has a long curved tooth and a fine short point behind it; the female’s palpal claw is more powerful and more sharply curved than in the preceding genera, and armed with 5 or 6 teeth. The male’s palpal claw has, according to OHLERT, 5 teeth. Under the generic name of Dolomedes several species are by some writers included, which by no means belong to that genus as defined by the limits which we, together with C. KocH, WESIRING and others, have assigned it. Of the species of Zora (©. Koch), which WALCKENAER refers to Dolomedes, we have elsewhere spoken (p. 140), as also of Dolomedes agalenoides Luc. (p. 121). — The East Indian genus Dendrolycosa DOLESCH.') appears to differ from Dolomedes chiefly in having all the eyes small and of equal dimensions. Gen. 7. OCYALE Say. et Aup. 1825—27. Deriv.: wxvalos, moving rapidly on the sea (wxvc, swift, ads, sea). Syn.: 1805. Dolomedes WALCK., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 15 (ad part.: "2* Fam. Les Sylvines, Sylvarie”’ ). 1825—91. Ocyale Sav. et Aup., Descr. de l'Égypte, (Éd. 2:) XXII, p. 372. 1861. Ocyale WEsTR., Aran. Suec., p. 536. 1861. Dolomedes Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 37 (ad partem)- 1864. Ocyale [Ocyala] Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 381. Type: Ocyale mirabilis (CLERCK). 1) Tweede Bijdr. t. de Kenn. d. Arachn. v. d. Ind. Arch., p. 51. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 195 This genus, which BLACKWALL, following WALCKENAER, has united with Dolomedes, differs even in the whole of its general appearance from the preceding genera, which are more typical of the family. — On the first pair of legs the superior tarsal claws are armed with about 12 teeth, the inferior with one tooth; on the 4" pair there are about 9 teeth on the su- perior and £wo on the inferior elaw; and of these last the foremost is rather long and curved, the back tooth small. The palpal claw is strong, with about 7 teeth gradually increasing in length. [* Gen. 8. OTENUS (Wazok.) 1805. Deriv.: probably xzwvoc, live stock, cattle, a head of cattle. Syn.: 1805. Ctenus Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 18. 1837. " ID., Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 363 (excl. ”3° Fam. Les Phoneutres, Phoneutriæ”). 1864. Ctenus [Ctena]: sub-gen. zd. Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 377. Type: Ctenus dubius WALCK. This genus was originally formed by WALCKENAER for the species we have adduced as its type. To it he afterwards referred — according to a figure and short notice, left by the painter OUDINOT, and representing a spider found by him near Paris — the species C. Oudinotii WALCK. WALCKENAER had however not himself seen this spider, and no Ctenus has since been met with in France, so that one may reasonably doubt whether C. Oudinotii be really a Ctenus. WALCKENAER also considered a spider described and figured by ALBIN (Nat. Hist. of Spid., p. 51, Pl. XXXIV, Fig. 167 )) as belonging to this genus, probably on the strength of a certain similitude in the position of the eyes (which in ALBINS figure are arranged in 2 lines, the first consisting of 2, the other, which is much curved back- wards, of 6 eyes); but ALBIN’s figures, perhaps more especially those which represent the positions of the eyes, are in general so faulty, that it is im- possible to place any confidence in them; and I am the less inclined to believe that the figure in question really represents a Ctenus, since sub- sequent English arachnologists have never found any species of that genus in their country. It appears therefore to me more than doubtful that the genus Ctenus is anywhere represented in the Fauna of Europe.] 1) This figure probably represents a Thanatus oblongus (WALCK.). 196 T. THORELL, Fam. I. OXYOPOIDÆ. The spiders of this family, as is known, exhibit certain analogies with both Attoide and Philodrominæ, and seem to form a connecting link between the Zycosoidæ and these groups. ‘They resemble the Attoide in their, comparatively with the Lycosoidæ, broader back of the cephalothorax, and frequently display a remarkable similitude with the Philodromin« in their whole general appearance, and even in the position of the eyes (compare e. g. Peucetia and Eripus). But the Lycosoide are, as is generally admitted, their nearest relations, and it is also with them that they most closely agree in the structure of the claws. The tarsal claws are however usually longer than in the Lycosoidæ, with a shorter extremity and more teeth; the inferior claw has, in the species that I have examined, two or three teeth. The males have no claw at the end of the palpus. — To this family I refer two Eu- ropean genera, Peucetia and Oxyopes. 1. Oculi in series tres, sectorem circuli fere formantes, ordinati: 4 posteriores seriem paullo procurvam designant; medii eorum cum oculis duobus seriei 2% in trapezium postice multo angustius, vix longius quam latius, dispositi. ERRNO 5 tates El ee DAN ae 1, Peucetia. 2. Oculi in series quatuor ordinati: 4 posteriores trapezium breve formant: oculi seriei 2% et 4' fere in rectangulum, evidenter longiorem quam latiorem, UE MOM M ML LE cda ero QU en Gen. 1. PEUCETIA yn. Deriv.: Mevxerioc, proper name. Syn.: 11858. Pasithea Brackw., Descr. of six newly disc. Spid. and a new gen. of Aran., p. 427. 1866. Oxyopes Srw., Sur quelques Araignées d'Espagne, p. 287 (ad partem). Type: Peucetia viridis (BLACKW.). The type of this genus is Oxyopes littoralis Sim. (loc. cit), but this species appears to me to be identical with Pasithea viridis BLACKW. (loc. cit), which was first by BLACKWALL aggregated to the Laterigrade, but afterwards ?) rightly to the Citigrade. — P. viridis differs from Oxyopes, to which genus it is referred by SIMON, not only in the position of the eyes, 1) BLACKWALL, Descr. of recently disc. spec. etc. from the East of Central Africa, p. 6. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 197 but also by its long, slender maxillæ dilated at the base, ete. The supe- rior spinners are distinctly longer than the inferior. The claws are more powerful than in the genus Oxyopes: the superior tarsal claws have only about 7 long, strong, pointed comb-teeth, and the inferior has three, of which the outermost two are long and curved. — Of this handsome spider, which has been found in Algeria and Spain, I am acquainted only with the male, of which Mr. SIMON kindly sent me a specimen. The name Pa- sithea being already appropriated, I have substituted a new (vid. p. 36, 37). Gen. 2. OXYOPES Larm. 1804. Deriv.: 0&vorrjs, sharp-eyed (dEvs, sharp; aw, eye). Syn.: 1804. Oxyopes Larr., in Nouv. Dict. d'Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 135. 1805. Sphasus Warck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 19. 1861. n WzsTR., Aran. Suec., p. 538. 1861. 5 BLACKW., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 43. 1864. Oxyopes [Oxyopa] Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 386. Type: Oxyopes variegatus LATR. On the upper tarsal claws of O. variegatus I have counted, on the outer about 17, and on the inner about 14, long, fine, close, parallel comb- teeth; the inferior claw terminates in a long, fine, straight point, and has two fine, long, curved teeth at the base. The palpal claw is small, with 10 close-set, fine comb-teeth. O. italicus has but about 10 teeth on the su- perior tarsal claws; on the inferior claw it has two powerful, curved teeth, and on the palpal claw about 8 long teeth. The Brazilian genus Jdiops PERTY 1) is by WALCKENAER ?) taken up as synonymous with Sphasus or Omwopes: it has, it is true, a certain re- semblance to that genus in the position of the eyes; but the direction of the mandibular claw, which is articulated longitudinally, as in the Zerri- telarie, appears to us to show, that Zdiops belongs to that sub-order, to which it is also referred by Perry. The species described by him, 7. fusca ?), shows in the form of the male's palpi an evident analogy with the genus Acti- nopus PERTY among the Zheraphosoide, from which genus Jdiops in other respects would seem to be widely separated. The form of its cephalothorax displays some resemblance to that of Filistata LATR. 1) Delect. Anim. Art. Bras., p. 197. 2) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 379. 3) Delect. Anim. Art. Bras., p. 198, Pl. XXXIX, fig. 5. 198 T. THORELL, Sub-ordo VII. SALTIGRADÆ. Syn.: 1804 Gen. Salticus Larr., in Nouv. Dict. d'Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 135. 1817. "Saltigrades" ID., vn Cuv., Règne Anim., III, p. 98. 1823. Saltatores SUND., Gen. Aran. Suec., p. 20. 1825. Saltigrade Larr., Fam. Nat., du Règne Anim., p. 317. 1833. Attides SUND., Consp. Arachn., p. 25. 1843. Salticidæ Buackw., The differ. in the numb. of eyes, ete., p. 616. The spiders belonging to this group are, as is known, distinguished by their high cephalothorax, which has almost vertical sides and a very broad back, by their usually short and thick extremities, and by the pecu- liar position of their eyes, which most nearly approaches that of the Lycosoidze: 4 eyes in fact form a first row, and the remaining 4 a second and third. An exception in the disposition of the eyes is presented by the exotic fa- mily Otiothopoide, in which the eyes form only two transversal rows, con- verging at the ends, and by Lyssomanes among the Attoide, which genus has its eyes arranged in four transversal rows. In the Myrmecioide the eyes may be as truly said to form two rows divergent at the ends, as three; in Palpimanus also they are arranged in two rows, both greatly curved in op- posite directions, so that one might even say that the eyes of that genus form four rows. The family Dinopoide, which we, though with doubt, refer to this sub-order, differs especially in its very long and fine extremities from other Saltigradæ. Also in certain other genera, as for example Myrmecium, Salticus and Leptorchestes, the extremities are fine, though somewhat short. — The spinners, as far as is known, are six in number, usually not very long. There are generally but two claws on each tarsus, and in this case there is also, except in Palpimanus (and Otiothops?) a tuft of hairs dilated at the end immediately under the claws; Zresus (as well as Dinopis?) has 3 claws on each tarsus, as also a claw at the termination of the female’s palpus, which is absent in at least Attoide and Palpimanine. Most Saltigradæ leap actively, whence the name. We resolve the European Saltigradee into two families, Hresoide and Attoide, according to the following distinctive features: 1. Cephalothorax antice valde elevato-convexus. Oculi 2 postici inter se multo longius distantes quam sunt duo proxime antecedentes. Tarsi unguibus trinis aut binis instrueti, fasciculo unguiculari carentes. . . . . . I. Æresoide. 2. Cephalothorax deplanatus, parte cephalica non vel paullo tantum altiore quam parte thoracica. Oculi 2 postici inter se non multo longius quam 2 antece- ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 199 dentes remoti. Oculi 4 anteriores inter se proximi: medii (antici) eorum re- liquis omnibus multo majores. Tarsi unguibus tantum binis et fasciculo ungui- culari instructi. (Palpus feminæ ungui caret). . . . . . . . IL Attoide. Fam. I. ERESOIDA. Syn.: 1850. Eresides C. Kocm, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 70. The two sub-families, into which we divide this family, certainly agree in the structure of the cephalothorax, the position of the eyes, and in their whole general appearance very closely with each other, but present the remarkable difference, that whereas the Æresinæ are provided with infra- mammillary organ and calamistrum, the Palpimanine are without these organs. The two genera Æresus and Palpimanus ( Chersis) had already by WALCKENAER!) and Durour ?) been placed in the closest connexion with each other and with Attus; SUNDEVALL ?) and C. Koch *) received them into the family At- tides, and when the latter afterwards detached them from that family, he united them with the new-formed family Æresides, which received a place immediately after the Attides >). — CANESTRINI and Pavesi 9) who unite Eresus with the Attoidæ, have formed a separate family, Cherside, for Pal- pimanus, a view which I cannot approve. How Simon 7) could refer Æresus to the Epeiroide and Palpimanus to the Myrmecioide is to me inexplicable. — We characterize the two sub-families and thereto belonging European genera as follows: I. Organum infra-mamillare et calamistrum adsunt. . . . . . I. ERESINX. 1. Oeuli seriei terti: longe pone reliquos siti; laterales seriei 1"* ab inter- mediis ejusdem seriei longissime remoti. Tarsi omnes unguibus trinis in- structi. (Palpus feminz ungui armatus) Mamille breves. . 1. Eresus. IL Organum infra-mamillare et calamistrum desunt. . . . . IL PALPIMANINX. 1. Oeuli seriei 3* paullo tantum pone oculos 2% seriei siti, cum iis seriem reeurvam formantes. Tarsi pedum 6 posteriorum unguibus tantum binis armati. (Palpus feminz ungui caret). . . . . . . . 2. Palpimanus. 1) Tabl. d. Aran., p. 21; Mém. sur une nouv. Classif. d. Aran., p. 438; Hist. Nat: ds Ins. Apt., IV, ps 525: 2) Descr. de six Arachn. nouv., p. 364. 3) Consp. Arachn., p. 27. 4) Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 34. 5) Ibid’, 5, p. 70. 6) Aran. ital., p. 75—76. 7) Hist. Nat. d. Araignées, p. 299, 448. 200 T. THORELL, Sub-fam. I. ERESINA. This sub-family includes for the present 2 genera, Æresus WALCK. and Dorceus C. KocH (exotic and distinguished by long, three-jointed ma- mille). C. KocH has indeed divided Æresus into two genera, Erythrophora and Æresus +), but as the genus Erythrophora can hardly be distinguished from Æresus by anything else than a difference of colour, it seems to me not deserving of preservation. Gen. 1. ERESUS Warck. 1805. Deriv.: probably éoeidw, press against, inflict, attack. Syn.: 1805. Eresus WALCK., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 22. 1837. Chersis ID., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 390 (ad partem). 1850. Eresus C. Kocx, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 50. 1850. Erythrophora ID., ibid. 1861. Eresus Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 45. 1864. As [Eresa] Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 299 (ad max. part.). Type: Eresus cinnaberinus (OLIV.). In the few species of this genus known to me, the calamistrum is but slightly developed. In a © of Æ. lineatus LATR. or E. acanthophilus DUF.?), which has the upperside of the two posterior metatarsi somewhat flattened, the calamistrum is plainly visible on the external edge; but in the male of E. cinnaberinus, in which these metatarsi are cylindrical as in the other legs, I cannot perceive any calamistrum distinguishable from the adjacent fine hair. The infra-mammillary organ is on the contrary easily seen in both species: in Æ. lineatus it forms a very narrow, uniformly broad, trans- versal area, which appears to be divided into two by a middle suture, and exhibits two rounded foveæ *), one on each side, and a small depression behind these, near the spinners. The tarsal claws of Æresus are short, but extremely broad and strong, 1) Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 70. 2) This species was first described by LATREILLE in the 2% Edition of Nouv. Dict. d'Hist. Nat., X, p. 393 — which I have not been able to consult — under the name of ” Hrése rayé" (see for inst. WALCK., Ins. Apt., I, p. 399), probably also with the Latin name Æresus lineatus: at least it is by Aupouin, in Dict. class. d'Hist. Nat., VI, p. 253, called ” Eresus lineatus LATREILLE ". 3) Conf. note, p. 30. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 201 uniformly and much curved, pectinated. In Æ. lineatus © the superior claws of the first pair of legs are from the base to near the apex armed with about 12 long, strong comb-teeth, and the inferior claw with 3 long teeth. On the 4" pair the teeth are less numerous, 7 or 8 on the superior claws, while the inferior claw seems to be without teeth. The female’s palpal claw is also short, very strong, and provided with about 9 coarse teeth. FE. cinnaberinus 5 has about 16 (and 14) teeth on the superior claws, and 2 on the inferior. The Aranea nigra of PETAGNA 1), to which WALCKENAER has given the name Chersis dubius ?) is most certainly an Æresus (perhaps but a va- riety of Æ. cinnaberinus) and not a Chersis (Palpimanus). Sub-fam. I. PALPIMANINÆ. Syn.: 1869. Chersidæ CANESTR. et Pav., Aran. Ital, p. 75. Of this family only one genus is known, that namely formed by L. Durour under the name of Palpimanus. Gen. 2. PALPIMANUS Dur. 1820. Deriv.: pa/pare, caress, touch; manus, hand. Syn.: 1820. Palpimanus Dur., Descr. de six Arachn. nouv., p. 12. 1825—27. Platyscelum Sav. et Aup., Descr. de l'Égypte, (2 Éd.:) XXII, p. 401. 1837. Chersis WaLck., H. N. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 390 (ad max. part.). 1864. 5 SIM., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 448 (ad max. part.). Type: Palpimanus gibbulus Dur. Palpimanus is, as may be seen from the synonyms, the oldest name of the genus, and there is no plausible reason for abandoning it. That certain Attoide also have thicker fore-legs, which appear to serve as organs of touch (whence the name Palpimanus), and that SAVIGNY intended to call it Chersis ?), can of course be no reason for cashiering the name Palpima- 1) Spee. Ins. Ulter. Calabriæ, p. 34 (of the Ed. printed "Francofurti et Moguntiæ, ITS). 2) Hist. Nat. d. Ins. Apt., I, p. 392. 3) Conf. WALck., Ins. Apt., I, p. 393. — Sımon considers that the name Pal- pimanus must mean that the palpi resemble hands; but this is not the case: manus here signifies the fore-legs, not the palpi. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 96 202 T. THORELL, nus, that name not being unfit for the animal to which it has been applied, and having been published long before the name Chersis. The genus Palpimanus is extremely interesting, not only on account of the well known singular form of its first pair of legs, but also for cer- tain characteristics, which mark it as a connecting-link between Zresine and Attoide. The agreement with these last in the absence of an infra- mammillary organ and calamistrum, we have already mentioned: also the close position of the 4 anterior eyes, of which the 2 central ones are larger than the other 6, shows a tendency to similitude to the Attoide. The fe- male’s palpi are incrassated outwards, flattened on the underside, and, like those of the last-mentioned spiders, destitute of a claw at the extremity. In the Eresine, as we have already observed, the fasciculus unguicularis or claw-tuft usually found in the Attoide, is wanting: it is also absent in Palpimanus; but the peculiarly formed hairs of which it is composed are found in that genus, though they have been transferred to another place. The broad compressed metatarsus has in fact (in JP. gibbulus) both its su- perior and inferior edge covered with hairs which rapidly dilate to oval or spade-like blades, and a band of such hairs, enclosed by longer, pointed bristles, is continued also along the upper edge of the tibia and patella. These hairs are longer on the upper edge of the metatarsus, where they are mixed with numerous longer, pointed bristles, than on its underside, where they are closer, shorter and of uniform length, and where only a few longer, pointed bristles occur; they accordingly here form a scopula, which is continued under a part (the base) of the tarsus itself. This joint is else only covered with pointed hairs and bristles. The claws, as is known, are but 2 in number on the tarsi of the six posterior legs. They are weaker than those of the Hresine, and stouter than those of the Aftoidæ. They are rather large, of uniform breadth, and curved in the form of a semicircle; the outer claw has (in P. gibbulus) on the 4" pair of legs about 7 teeth, the inner 6; on the 2™ and 3" pairs the teeth are less numerous (5 and 4 on the 2" pair) These teeth are conieal, rather short and far apart. à; According to Durour’s frequently repeated statement, P. gibbulus differs from all other spiders by having no claws on the first pair of legs. This is nevertheless so far from being the case, that this spider has really no less than three claws on the first pair of legs, but only two on the suc- ceeding pairs! In this respect Palpimanus probably stands quite alone in the order of spiders. 'The claws on the 1* pair are however so small that they are quite concealed by the hairs at the extremity of the tarsus, On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 203 and can only be clearly seen with a good microscope. The superior ones are similar in form to those of the following legs, except that they are less curved and have only about 3 conical teeth; the inferior claw has the form of a very small hook, sharply bent downwards, with a long fine extremity, and seems to be armed on the underside with one long fine tooth. Thus the number of claws on the first pair is the same as in Hresus, and on the other legs as in the Attoide. Fam. IL ATTOIDE. Syn.: 1850. Attides C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 42. This family, perhaps the most sharply defined and most natural within the whole order of Aranew, is without difficulty distinguished from the Æresoidæ by the peculiar position and relative size of the eyes. The claws are in all cases only two on each tarsus 5; they are long and slender, a little sinuated (i. e. with a slight .^-formed curvature), and spring at a right or slightly acute angle from the upper end of the narrow and high part formed by their base. The tooth-armature is very various, and ordi- narily different on the inner and outer claw, the number of teeth on the former being usually far greater than on the latter. The teeth, when there are any, occupy only the outer half of the claw’s length; near the base there are no teeth, except now and then on the first pair of legs, the claws of which are often shorter and more uniformly éurved than those of the other legs. The 4" pair of legs has usually the claws longest and most copiously provided with teeth. The claw-tuft is formed of hairs that are either flattened and gradually more or less dilated towards the end, or di- lated and flattened at the extremity only; in this respect the tufts on the different pairs of legs are often very different; they are sometimes, on the 1* pair, continued as a scopula on the underside of the tarsus. In all the species that have been examined, the female’s palpi are destitute of a ter- minal claw, a circumstance, which in other families, with the exception of the Scytodoide, only occurs exceptionally. I believe it is only the species of this family, that justify the name "jumping-spiders", given to the whole 1) Attus phrynoides WALCK. (Ins. Apt., I, p. 479) is said to have on its extra- ordinarily long 1* pair of legs (pedes raptorii) only one toothless claw. This species ought undoubtedly to form a separate genus, to which also Attus obisioides DOLESCH. (Bijdr. t. d. Kenn. d. Arachn. v. d. Ind. Arch., p. 433) ought to be referred. This new genus, characterized by the long trochanteres of the fore-legs, may be called Diolenius (dıwi&veos, with outstretched arms). 204 T. THORELL, sub-order. — All the European species may be referred to one and the same sub-family (Attinæ); among exotic forms perhaps Lyssomanes HENTZ !), ought to be considered as the type of a separate sub-family, characterized by the eyes being arranged in four transversal rows: the lateral eyes of the first row in the ordinary Attoide are in fact in Lyssomanes removed so high up that they form a separate row about half-way between the first and third pair of eyes. The relative size of the eyes is however exactly the same in Lyssomanes as in the Attinæ, i. e. the first pair is considerably larger and the third pair considerably less than the other eyes. (In the Dinopoide, in which the position of the eyes is the same as in the Attinæ, the relative size of the eyes is altogether different: it is in fact the last pair but one, or the eyes of the 2" row, which in that family are consi- derably larger than the rest). — Calamistrum and infra-mammillary organ are absent. There is no family in the whole order of spiders, which, on account of the great similarity between the species, is so diffieult to resolve into good genera, as this, while at the same time its extraordinary richness in species renders such a resolution in the highest degree desirable. In the works of the older writers, from LATREILLE and WALCKENAER inclusively, the whole family constitutes but one genus, Salticus LATR. or Attus WALCK., whieh by many arachnologists, among whom is BLACKWALL, is still pre- served undivided. But already in 1832 Hentz ?) detached from Attws WALCK. the genus Synemosyna, which partly answers to Leptorchestes NOB. or Sal- ticus C. KocH (non SUND.), as also Æpiblemum (ad part. = Calliethera C. Koch). SUNDEVALL ?), who is followed by WESTRING, the following year divided Attus WALCK. into two genera, Salticus and Attus, which easily admit of distinction. This on the contrary is not the case with most of the Attoid-genera proposed by C. Koch (in Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., Die Arachniden, etc.) between 1835 and 1850, and which have been pretty generally received, in spite of the imperfect manner in which they have been characterized. WHITE in 1841 5) formed the genus Homalattus and in 1846 °) Dineresus [Deineresus], both exotic. OHLERT *) has endeavoured to define more accurately those of Kocn’s genera, which belong to the Prus- 1) Aran. of the United States, in Boston Journ. of Nat. Hist., V, p. 197. 2) On North American Spiders, p. 108. 3) Svenska Spindl. Beskr., in Vet. Akad. Handl. f. 1832, p. 199, 201. 4) Descr. of new or little known Arachn., p. 446. 5) Deser. of a new genus of Arachn. etc., p. 179. 6) Aran. d. Prov. Preuss., p. 148—150. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 205 sian Fauna; but his attempts do not appear to me to have fully suc- ceeded, chiefly on aecount of the insufficient materials he had at his disposal. SIMON in 1864?) combined C. Kocm's many genera so as to form five, Rha- nis ©. KocH (= hene THoR: Vid. p. 37), Attus WALCK., Cyrtonota Siw., Heliophanus C. Koch and Salticus (LATR.), of which the last four be- long to the Fauna of Europe; the greatest part of Kocm's genera (and sub- genera) SIMON accepted as separate sub-genera or "groups"? SIMON’S classification of the Attoidæ here referred to, appears to me very defective, and ean hardly be considered as making any advance towards the solution of the difficult problem; the genus Cyrtonota, in which he includes Kocnu's Calliethera together with Philia, Plexippus, ete. especially is very unnatural. SIMON himself has moreover since abandoned this division and adopted another quite different; he now ?) divides the European Attoidze into 10 genera (of which two, Aenemerus and Yllenus, are new) according to characteristics principally derived from the form of the males palpi and mandibles. This division has indeed the advantage of being based upon fixed and easily observable differences of form, but it has also the great defect of applying only to one (and that the rarer) sex; it is impossible to say to which of SIMONS genera a female specimen belongs, as long as the male of the same species is unknown, unless it should happen, that the females of that genus are also distinguished by some common feature; but in such case that feature ought to have been included among the characteristics of the genus. I have already (p. 19, 83) stated my objections to the adoption of genera depending upon characteristics that apply only to one sex, or that are de- rived from a difference of form in the organs of copulation alone. What has here been said, sufficiently indicates my opinion, that a natural arrangement of the Attoidæ is as yet a pium desiderium. For my own part I have awhile hesitated between two methods of proceeding — either to adopt only three genera, Salticus (Pyrophorus C. KOCH), Leptor- chestes (Salticus C. KocH) and Attus; — or to adopt and endeavour as well as possible to characterize those of the genera formed by C. Kocx, which belong to the European Fauna. These genera are in fact pretty well known as regards their general appearance, aud they have also been acknowledged 1) Hist. Nat. d. Araignées, p. 307. — Dinopis [Deinopis] Mac Leay, which SIMON also refers to the Attoidæ, is in our opinion the type of a separate family, Dinopoide. Vid. p. 43. 2) For Attus Doumercii WALCK. he proposed Lagenicola ‚as a new sub-genus of Attus (loc. cit., p. 316). 3) Monogr. d. espéces Europ. de la fam. d. Attides, p. 16. 206 T. THORELL, by several arachnologists. ‘They moreover on the whole form tolerably na- tural groups, although KoCH has not succeeded in giving any reliable dia- gnosis of them. I have determined on adopting the second, far more dif- ficult alternative, because I believe the division of the genus Attus WALCK. into several smaller genera to be a matter of great practical importance, especially on account of the great number of exotic species that have been described, and which furnish an amount of materials which it will be scar- cely possible to manage, unless one can distribute them among smaller generic groups. I am however by no means satisfied with the result of the experiment I have made, and the following arrangement, of the many de- fects of which I am perfectly conscious, must therefore be looked upon as merely provisional. It may however possibly, even if but negatively, con- tribute in some measure to the solution of the problem. None but a person having at his disposal far more comprehensive materials for research than I can command, can hope to arrive at any fully satisfactory result. All C. Kocn’s European genera have been here employed, with the exception of Zcelus ), which is founded on a feature (the back of the man- dibles raised to a sbarp ridge) belonging only to one sex, the males. Two of his sub-genera, Ballus and Dia (Ælurops NOB.) have been promoted to the rank of genera, the others I have been obliged to pass by. I have also endeavoured to give a place in my scheme to the genera Menemerus and Yllenus formed by SIMON. § Pars cephaliea parte thoracica abrupte altior. Quadrangulus oculorum (ex oculis seriei 3%® et lateralibus seriei 1"? formatus) vix vel non longior quam latior. Corpus longum et angustum. Pedes tenues. . . . . . 1. Salticus. $8 Pars cephalica parte thoracica non altior. + Quadrangulus oeulorum longior quam latior: oculi seriei 3"* fere in medio cephalothorace siti. Corpus longum et angustum; pedes tenues. 2. Leptorchestes. +t Quadrangulus oeulorum saltem postice latior quam longior. + Metatarsi et tibi: omnes aeuleis carentes. Cephalothorax duplo fere lon- gior quam latior, humilis, dorso sub-recto. (Oculi seriei 1"? contingentes: medii eorum a margine clypei vix emarginati spatio brevissimo remoti ?). 3. Epiblemum. 1) The name Icelus was already in 1844 by Kroyer given to a genus of fishes. 2) In order to judge rightly of the eyes' distanee from the edge of the elypeus and of the form of the latter, it is necessary to remove at least a part of the thick covering of hair which ordinarily conceals the edge: moreover the membrane, which unites the base of the mandibles, and which is sometimes covered with hair, and frequently visible under the edge of the clypeus, must not be reckoned as part of the clypeus. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS, 20 -1 ** Metatarsi pedum saltem anteriorum evidenter aculeati. A. Oeuli seriei 3"° non longius a margine eephalothoraeis quam inter se remoti. a. b. Cephalothorax plerumque duplo fere longior quam latior, minus hu- milis, dorso evidenter arcuato. Quadrangulus oculorum postice paullo latior. Oeuli seriei 1"* sub-contingentes, a margine clypei profunde emarginati et sub-nudi spatio brevissimo tantum remoti. » 659 5 5/50» arb Se ler ess oe n s. Ma EC Op Roar Cephalothorax non duplo longior quam latior. a. Cephalothorax humilis valde, dorso sub-plano. Oculi seriei 3%# plerumque multo longius inter se quam a margine cephalothora- cis remoti. 1. Quadrangulus oculorum postice evidenter latior quam antice; oculi seriei 3"* non multo ante medium cephalothoracis siti. Pars cephalica magna, lata. Oculi medii seriei 1"* a margine elypei vix emarginati satis remoti. . . . . . . 5. Ballus. 2. Quadrangulus oeulorum postice vix vel non latior quam antice. Oculi seriei 3"* longe ante medium cephalothoracis siti; oculi seriei 1% disjuneti; medii eorum a margine clypei vix emar- ginati spatio remoti quod + diametri oculi plerumque sequat. Corpus satis longum et depressum . . . . . 6. Marpessa. B. Cephalothorax altus, antice non angustatus, dorso evidenter areuato. Oculi seriei 39* parum longius inter se quam a margine cephalo- thoraeis remoti. Quadrangulus oculorum postiee non latior quam antice. Oculi seriei 1"^ contingentes: medii eorum a margine cly- pei vix emarginati spatio remoti quod + diametri oculi non superat. (Pietura abdominis sæpissime ex colore ipsius cutis, non ex colore pilenum qpendet)c 44. by... Abi: nette EON SENDEN S! B. Oculi seriei 55* longius a margine cephalothoracis quam inter se remoti, a. Cephalothorax minus altus, dorso leviter tantum areuato, parte ce- phalica parum declivi, ita ut oculi seriei 3% vix diametro sua al- tius quam oculi laterales seriei 1"? sint siti. Oculi seriei 1"* sub- rectæ inter se proximi, sed non contingentes: medii eorum a mar- gine clypei fortiter emarginati spatio remoti quod dimidiam diame- irum oculi squat. Corpus longius, sub-depressum. 7. Menemerus. Cephalothorax altus, immo altissimus, parte cephalica adeo declivi ut oculi seriei 35? multo altius quam oculi laterales seriei 122 siti sint. a. Metatarsi pedum posteriorum circa apicem tantum aculeis armati. Quadrangulus oculorum postice paullo latior quam antiee. Ocu- lorum series 1™ paullo recurva: medii eorum a margine clypei evidentius emarginati spatio remoti, quod dimidiam diametrum oeuli fere sequat. Corpus longius villosum. 8. Dendryphantes. 208 T. THORELL, B. Metatarsi pedum posteriorum non tantum ad apicem aculeati. I. Oculi medii seriei 1"*, quum desuper inspiciatur cephalotho- rax, ante frontem eminentes. 1. Mandibule facie circa duplo longiores (an etiam in 9?). Oculi seriei 1"? sub-recurvæ disjuncti; medii eorum a mar- gine clypei, profunde emarginati et sparse tantum pilosi, spatio remoti, quod dimidiam diametrum oculi vix sequat. Pedes longiores © 3 2]. - 2 « 2020 LON Pralenz; 2. Mandibule facie non vel paullo tantum altiores. Oculi se- riei 1™* rectæ vel sub-recurvæ a margine clypei, pilis densis plerumque teeti, spatio remoti quod dimidiam oeuli diame- trum plerumque superat. . . . . . . . - 11. Attus. IL Frons adeo prominens, ut oculi medii seriei 1"*, quum desu- per inspiciatur cephalothorax, a margine frontis occultentur. Series oeulorum 1™ recurva; medii eorum a margine clypei dense pilosi spatio remoti, quod dimidiam diametrum oculi superat. Pedes posteriores anterioribus longiores. 1. Tibia pedum 4" paris evidenter brevior quam metatarsus CUM: iars0... = os ee tae Re 2. Tibia pedum 4" paris æque saltem longa ac metatarsus eum tarso. Ungues presertim horum pedum longissimi, denti- bus longissimis pectinati. . . . . . . . 13. Yllenus. SIMON also takes up Plexippus among the European Attoidæ, and gives as the chief features that distinguish it from nearly related genera the following characteristics of c: "patte machoire (the palpus) gréle, très longue, à tarse moins large que la jambe" ?. He assigns to it only one European species, P. Adansonü Sav. et AUD. I do not know to which ge- nus this to me unknown spider ought properly to be aggregated: SIMON indeed calls his Plexippus: ” Pleaippus C. KOCH ex parte"; but he also says of it: "Tel que nous le concevons ce genre n'a aucun rapport avec celui de M. Kocx” ?, and I therefore do not venture to take up Plexippus KocH among the European genera. Gen. 1. SALTICUS (Larr.). 1804. Deriv.: salticus, dancing, leaping. Syn.: 1804. Salticus Larr., Nouv. Dict. d'Hist. Nat., XXIV, p. 135 (ad part.). 1805. Attus WaLck., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 22 (2° Fam. Les Voltigenses, Volatilie” ad partem). 1) Monogr. d. espéces Europ. de la fam. d. Attides, p. 6 (16). 2) Ibid., p. 178 (644). ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 209 1833. Salticus SUND., Sv. Spindl. Beskr., zm Vet.-Akad. Handl. f. 1832, jay ISIS). +1837. Pyrophorus C. Koc, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 29. 1861. Salticus Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 543. 1861. 3 Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 47 (ad partem). 1864. + [Saltica]: sub-gen. Pyrophorus [Pyrophora] Sım., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 336. 1868. Pyrophorus Srw., Monogr. d. espèces europ. de la fam. d. Attides, p. 6 (16). 1869. Pyroderes 1D., ibid., p. 248 (714). Type: Salticus formicarius (DE GEER). When SUNDEVALL in 1833 (loc. cit.) divided Salticus LATR. or Attus WALCK. into two genera, Salticus and Attus, it was for a species of the genus afterwards by C. Kocu called Pyrophorus, that he preserved the for- mer, older name, and not for a Salticus C. Kocu, which genus was to him unknown. This appears immediately from the description of SUNDEVALL’S Salticus formicarius, the c? of which has the mandibles "fere porrecte, supra plane” ete. The very generic diagnosis of Salticus SUND. ("Pars cepha- lica abrupte altior quam thoracica;...oculi...aream quadratam ... delinean- ies") is suitable only to Pyrophorus, and not to Salticus Kocu, and this last genus cannot therefore be considered as corresponding to Salticus SUND. even ad partem. As the name Salticus came by a mistake only — Koch erroneously supposed his Salticus formicarius to be identical with the spe- cies, to which SUNDEVALL had assigned that name — to be applied by KocH, and after him by OHLERT and others, to an entirely different genus from that so denominated by SUNDEVALL, whereas the real Salticus (LATR.) SUND. was by Koch rechristened Pyrophorus, we must of course restore to that genus its original name. Pyrophorus is moreover, as SIMON has already remarked, the universally received name given by ILLIGER in 1809 to the so called " American fire-flies", belonging to the Elaterida (Coleopt.). The, genus Salticus KocH we call Leptorchestes. The tarsal claws of Salticus formicarius are of the usual form, long and slender; on the 4" pair the inner claw has about 8 and the outer about 5 very short, thick, blunt teeth. "The hairs in the claw-tuft are dilated spade-wise at the apex. Gen. 2. LEPTORCHESTES wn. Deriv.: Aezróc, slender; doynorÿs, dancer. Syn.: 1832. Synemosyna Henrz, On North Amer. Spid., p. 108 (ad partem). 1836. Attus Luc., Attus venator, in Gu£m., Mag. de Zool., 6° Année, Cl. VIII, Pl. 15. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 27 210 T. THORELL, 1837. Salticus C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 29. 1864. 5 [Saltica]: sub-gen. zd. Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 335 (ad maz. part.). 1868. 5 Sım., Monogr. d. espèces europ. de la fam. d. Attides, p. 6 (16), 241 (707). Type: Leptorchestes formiceformis Luc. Concerning Salticus (LATR.) SUND. see preceding genus. As type for Leptorchestes (Salticus C. KocH) I have taken LUCAS’ Attus formicæfor- mis, which is identical with Salticus formicarius C. Kocm. The right Sal- ticus formicarius (DE GEER) and SUND., is the same as Pyrophorus semirufus C. Kocn. The genus Synemosyna HENTZ answers properly speaking to Janus C. Kocx, but under the former name species have also been included, which belong to Leptorchestes, and perhaps even to Salticus SUND. Synemosyna formica HENTZ!), which appears to be typical for the genus, is a Janus, and it is therefore this latter name, which must give place to the older appellation Synemosyna: the name Janus is moreover already appropriated (see p. 36). In the typical species the claws are small, of quite an ordinary form, sinuated, with about 7 teeth gradually increasing in length on the inner and about 3 on the outer claw. The hairs of the claw-tuft are much dilated at the extremity. Gen. 3. EPIBLEMUM (Hzwrz). 1832. Deriv.: émígAque (èxé, on, Béllw, throw), that which is thrown on or over (in allusion to the animal’s swift motions, or the projecting mandibles of ©). Syn.: 1832. Epiblemum Henrz, On North Amer. Spid., p. 108 (ad partem). 1837. Calliethera C. Koch, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 30 (ad partem). 1850. 5 1D., ibid., 5, p. 45 (ad max. part.). 1861. Attus Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 543 (ad partem). 1861. Salticus Brackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 47 (ad partem). 1864. Cyrtonota: sub-gen. Calliethera Sım., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 324, 327 (ad partem). 1868. Calliethera [Callietherus] 1D., Monogr. d. espèces europ. de la fam. d. Attides, p. 6 (16), 180 (646) (ad maz. part.). Type: Epiblemum faustum. HENIZ. In the above-cited passage, where HENTZ proposes the genus .Epi- blemum, he distinguishes it from Atéus WALCK. by the mandibles being 1) Aran. of the United States, i» Boston Journ. of Nat. Hist., V, p. 368, PI. XXII, fig. 18. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 211 ”nearly horizontal, slender, as long as the cephalothorax, tooth as long.” Of the two species adduced, E. faustum and E. palmarum, the first-named is made type of the new genus. But that X. faustum is so extremely like our European Calliethera histrionica C. KoCH and C. scenica, that I imagine it to be identical with one or other of them’), and they must accordingly resign their generic name Calliethera for the older name Epiblemum. — E. palmarum is perhaps a Plexippus C. KoCH, and certainly does not belong to the same genus as Æ. faustum. SIMON refers to Calliethera also for inst. the species C. Znfima [-us] Sim., which its whole appearance, the spines on its legs, etc. indicate in my opinion to belong to Heliophanus C. Koch. The male Æpiblemum, like the male Salticus, is distinguished by its almost horizontal, projecting mandibles. — The eyes of the 3" row are farther from each other than from the margin of the cephalothorax. The claws are very long and slender, and the teeth on the inner claw very nu- merous (about 15 in Æ. histrionica on the 4" pair), on the outer claw on the contrary few (in the above named species about 3); the number is however very variable. The hairs of the claw-tufts are gradually somewhat dilated. Gen. 4. HELIOPHANUS C. Kocx. 1833. Deriv.: jos, sun; gaívo, show, shine. Syn.: 1833. Heliophanus C. Koch, in Herr.-Scumrr., Deutschl. Ins., 119, 1, 2. 1831. » ID., Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 29. 1861. Attus WEsTR., Aran. Suec., p. 543 (ad partem). 1861. Salticus Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 47 (ad partem). 1864. Heliophanus [Heliophana] Sım., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 332 (saltem ad part.). 1868. 5 Srw., Monogr. d. espéces europ. de la fam. d. Attides, p. 6 (16), 201 (667). 1868. Calliethera [Callietherus] ID., ibid., p. 6 (16), 180 (646) (ad partem). Type: Heliophanus cupreus (W ALCK.). The males of this genus, which is easily recognized by its general appearance, are usually distinguished, as KocH has already remarked, by 1) Conf. the description and figure of Æ. faustum in Aran. of the United States (Boston Journ. of Nat. Hist., V, p. 367, Pl. XXII, fig. 17). — BLACKWALL, who does not consider Æ. histrionicum as specifically different from E. scenicum , includes ” Sal- ticus scenicus” in a catalogue of spiders from Canada. (Notice of Spid. capt. by POTTER in Canada, p. 34). 212 T. THORELL, a strong tooth on the underside of the pars femoralis of the palpus. In some species the cephalothorax is not double as long as it is broad, but it is easy to distinguish them from other, nearly related genera by the close- ness of the anterior central eyes and their inconsiderable distance from the deeply emarginated edge of the almost naked clypeus, together with the peculiar colour (black, abdomen more or less metallic, legs generally yellow or spotted with yellow). The eyes of the 3" row are usually, but not al- ways, more widely separated from each other than from the margin of the cephalothorax. The claws are of the usual form, nearly similar to those of Epiblemum, but the teeth are less numerous on the inner claw. In H. cupreus I have counted 6 fine teeth upon the inner and 2 coarse ones on the outer claw (4" pair) OHLERT states the numbers to be 10 and 1. On the 1* and 3" pair, according to him, the external claw is without teeth. The hairs of the claw-tuft dilate gradually outwards. Gen. 5. BALLUS (C. Kocx). 1850. Deriv.: Baddw, throw. Syn.: 1834 Salticus Reuss, Zool. Misc., Arachn., (ad part.:) p. 273 (279). 1837. Euophrys C. Kocu, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 33 (ad partem). 1846. Marpessa [Marpissa] ID., Die Arachn., XIII, (ad part.:) p. 53. 1850. Attus: sub-gen. Ballus ID., Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 68. 1861. - WzsTR., Aran. Suec., p. 543 (ad partem). 1861. Salticus Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 47 (ad partem). 1864. Attus [Atta]: sub-gen. zd.: "groupe" Ballus [Balla], et sub-gen. Dendryphantes Sm., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 310 (ad partem). 1868. 5 ID., Monogr. d. espéces europ. de la fam. d. Attides, p. 6 (16), 14 (24) (ad partem). Type: Ballus heterophthalmus (REUSS). To this genus we refer not only the species proposed as its type, but also Attus depressus WALCK. (Salticus brevipes HAHN), which C. Kocx refers to JMarpessa, and Salticus obscurus BLACKW., which is probably nothing else than the male of Ballus depressus. The claws are, at least in B. depressus, small, slightly sinuated, of ordinary form: on the 4" pair I have counted about 15 teeth on the inner and about 5 on the outer claw; the outer claw of the 1* pair is destitute of teeth, the inner has about 10 teeth. The hairs of the claw-tuft are dilated at the extremity. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 213 Gen. 6. MARPESSA (C. Kocx). 1846. Deriv.: undoubtedly Maeryooe, a mythol. prop. name; the word ought there- fore to be written Marpessa, not Marpissa. Syn.: 1837. Dendryphantes C. Kocn, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 31 (ad partem). 11846. Icelus ID., Die Arachn., XIII, (saltem ad part.:) p. 174. 1846. Marpessa [Marpissa] ID., ibid., p. 56 e£ sequ. 1850. = så ID., Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 47. \ 1861. Attus Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 543 (ad partem). 1861. Salticus BLackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 47 (ad partem). 1864. Attus [Atta]: sub-gen. Dendryphantes Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 310 (ad partem). 1864. Cyrtonota: sub-gen. Phidippus [Phidippia]: "groupe" Plexippus [Plexippa] ID., ibid., p. 324 (ad partem). 1868. Marpessa [Marpissus] ID., Monogr. d. espèces europ. de la fam. Attides, p. 6 (16), ad (Gly); (ad max. part.). 1868. Attus ID., ibid., p. 6 (16), 196 (692) (ad partem). 1868. Menemerus ID., ibid., p. 6 (16), 196 (692) (ad partem). Type: Marpessa muscosa (CLERCK). The lamina of the male’s clava palpalis is not in all the spiders that we assign to this genus ”élargi en palette,” as in the typical species, which feature SIMON however takes as characteristic of the genus. As we have above defined it, it includes among the Attoidæ with which I am acquainted, not only M. muscosa, M. radiata (GRUBE) and JM. hamata C. Koch '), but also Salticus pulchellus HAHN, Menemerus falsificus SIM. and Attus Lucasü SIM., which last-mentioned two species, together with several other European Attoidæ, Simon himself had the kindness to send me. In its general ap- pearance this genus occupies a place between Æpiblemum and Menemerus. M. pulchella (HAHN) seems to form a transition to the former genus. Con- cerning Zcelus C. KocH see p. 206. — The claws are somewhat shorter and stronger than in most other Attoide, at least in JM. muscosa, in which species I have counted about 15 fine teeth on the inner, and from 3 to 6 on the outer claw. 1) Icelus notabilis C. Kocx is the male to his Marpessa hamata; both are stated to be from Naples. I have myself captured them in Rome. Simon has obligingly sent me both c? and © under the name of Attus striatus WALCK. (Attus striatus (CLERCK) is quite another spider). Marpessa hamata Sim. is not identical with C. Kocxs spider of that name. 214 T. THORELL, Gen. 7. MENEMERUS (Simon). 1868. Deriv.: unvn, moon; unoos, thigh. Syn.: 1829. Salticus Haun, Monogr. d. Spinn., 5 (ad part.:) Tab. 3, fig. B. 1868. Menemerus Sim., Monogr. d. espéces europ. de la fam. d. Attides, p. 6 (16), 196 (692) (ad partem). 1868. Attus ID., ibid., p. 6 (16), 14 (24) (ad partem). Type: Menemerus semi-limbatus (HAHN). Of the typical species (= M. vigoratus (C. KocH) Sm.) I have taken several specimens at Naples (whence also HAHNS specimen came), at Rome and at Nice. As the characteristic feature of the genus Menemerus, which distinguishes it from nearly related genera, SIMON states that the pars fe- moralis of the male’s palpus is ”inerme et renflée en massue”. But that character does not apply to all the species, which, according to my defi- nition of the genus, it comprehends, and of the species again, which Simon reckons to Menemerus, I refer e. g. M. falsificus SIN. to Marpessa. In ge- neral appearance Menemerus closely resembles Marpessa: in cases of doubt however Menemerus may be recognized by the distance between the two eyes of the 3" series being somewhat less than that between them and the margin of the cephalothorax, which is not the case in Marpessa. The claws in this genus are quite of the common form, but little sinuated; in the ty- pical species I have found the outer claw without teeth both on the 1* pair, where the inner claw has about 10, and on the 4" pair, where it has about 15 fine teeth. Gen. 8. DENDRYPHANTES (C. Kocx). 1837. Deriv.: óévógov, tree; ögdvrns, weaver. Syn.: 1837. Dendryphantes C. Koch, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 31 (ad partem). 1850. a ID., ibid., 5, p. 60 (saltem ad partem). 1861. Attus WEsTR., Aran. Suec., p. 543 (ad partem). 1864. » [Atta]: sub-gen. Dendryphantes Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 310 (ad partem). 1867. Dendryphantes Out., Preuss. Spinn., p. 149, 156. 1868. Attus Sım., Monogr. d. espèces europ. de la fam. d. Attides, p. 6 (16), 14 (24) | (ad partem). Type: Dendryphantes hastatus (CLERCE). In his Monogr. d. espéces Europ. de la fam. d. Attides, p. 6 (16), SIMON mentions as the the characteristic of his Dendryphantes: ”digital (bulbus ge- On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 215 nitalis) à découvert sous la jambe" (pars tibialis), as distinguishing it from Attus, Marpessa, Yllenus and others, which have the "digital enveloppé en dessus par le tarse” (lamina bulbi or pars tarsalis) The species of Sımon’s Dendryphantes known to me (among which I have however never met with the fullgrown 5), namely D, gesticulator SIM. and D. dorsatus C. Kocn 3), belong to Attus according to our definition of that genus. OHLERT had al- ready previously to SIMON defined the genus Dendryphantes so that D. ha- status must be considered as its type, and this determination, which we adopt, thus has the right of priority in preference to that which SIMON has made for the genus. The claws are of the ordinary form, little sinuated, with numerous teeth on the inner claw. In D. hastatus on the 1* pair of legs I have counted above 20 close-set, very fine comb-teeth, but only 4 coarse and distant teeth on the outer claw. In another specimen the inner claw of the 4" pair had about 18, the outer about 7 teeth. The hairs of the claw-tufts are slightly dilated at the extreme apex. Gen. 9. EUOPHRYS (C. KocH). 1835. Deriv.: ed, well; ogoc, eye-brow. Syn.: 1834 Euophrys C. Koch, in Hznn.-ScHxrr., Deutschl. Ins., 123, (ad part.:) 7, 8. 1831. be ID., Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 33 (ad partem). 1) In specimens, which I look upon as young males of this species, not only is the short tibial joint of the palpus, but also its long tarsal joint enlarged and broader than the preceding joints; the inferior and exterior part of the tibial joint is swelled, but shows no separate bulbus — all just as in the figures of D. bilineatus (WALCK.), which Simon has given loc. cit., Pl. II (VI), fig. 13a, and which therefore appear to me to represent the palpus of a not yet fully developed male. In c ad., accord- ing to SIMON, the tarsal joint is alike in both sexes, small and cylindrieal, only a little longer in the male, whose tibial joint is on the underside incrassated and hol- lowed out, and contains the bulbus genitalis(?). Such a relation would indeed, as SIMON rightly observes, distinguish these spiders from the other species of the fa- mily; it would even separate their from all other spiders, for, as far as we know, the bulbus genitalis in all other cases belongs to the tarsal and not to the tibial joint. — Also in the younger males of some other Attoidæ, e. g. Menemerus semi- limbatus or vigoratus, the palpus has a form like that in the above described species of Dendryphantes Sım.: the tibial joint is very short and only indistinctly sepa- rated from the long palpal joint: both these joints are broader than the preceding, and the tibial joint incrassated on the underside. I suspect that the bulbus genita- lis is here formed within the two last joints of the palpus, though, when freed at the last change of the integument, it adheres to the tarsal joint. 216 T. THORELL, 1848. Attus ID., Die Arachn., XIV, (ad part.:) p. 44—49. 1850. » ID., Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 68 (excl. sub-gen. Ballo). 1861. » . WEsTR., Aran. Suec., p. 543 (ad partem). 1861. Salticus Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., I, p. 47 (ad partem). 1864. Attus [Atta]: "groupe" zd. Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 310. 1868. » ID., Monogr. d. espèces europ. de la fam. d. Attides, p. 6 (16), 14 (24) (ad partem). Type: Euophrys frontalis (W ALCK.). When C. KocH in 1833, in HERR.-SCHAFF., Deutschl. Ins., N:o 119, for the first time mentioned an Attus, it was A. terebratus (CLERCK) that he described under that name. In the same work he, in 1834, described, under the new generic name Æuophrys, two species, which he called £. festiva and E. frontalis. Somewhat later (1837), in Uebers. d. Arachn.- Syst., 1, he endeavoured to give the characteristics which distinguish Attus and Æuophrys: he there registered, as belonging to Attus, A. arcuatus (CLERCK), as also A. terebratus (ID.), the position of the eyes and the male's palpi of which he figured, and which species therefore ought to be con- sidered as the type of the genus. To Æuophrys he refers several species, which are very nearly related to A. terebratus and arcuatus, but moreover also e. g. E. petrensis, which is more nearly related to Æ. frontalis. This latter species is now not mentioned, neither is JE. festiva. Several years later, in Die Arachniden XIII and XIV (1846, 1848), we find that KocH has completely altered his view of the genera Attus and Huophrys: A. tere- bratus and A. arcuatus are now referred to Æuophrys, whereas E. frontalis and E. petrensis are aggregated to Attus. So also lastly in Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5 (1850). From what has now been said it is evident, that KocH at different times has defined the genera Attus and Kuophrys in to- tally different and irreconcileable ways. As he in 1837, when WALCKE- NAER'S great genus Attus was broken up by him, defined the genus, for which he preserved WALCKENAER'S name, so, that A. terebratus was to be the type for Attus (WALCK.) KocH, it is clear, that the name Zuophrys, if not to be absolutely cashiered, must be applied to some one or more of the species described under that name, which can not be referred to the same genus as A. terebratus, and preferentially to that species among them, which was first described under the name Æuophrys: accordingly to E. frontalis. (The contemporaneously described Æ, festiva = E. striata Kocu [non CLERCK] is an Attus (WALCK.) NOB.). — Æuophrys (KOCH) NOB. must accordingly be = sub-gen. Attus KocH 1850. Like Attus, the species of Æuophrys have a high cephalothorax, but as the back of the cephalothorax is as broad as its base, and the hinder- On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 217 most eyes, are situated near the side-edges of the back, the distance be- tween them is greater or at least not less than that between the eye and the border of the cephalothorax (which does not gradually diminish in breadth towards the front). The eye-area occupies a larger proportion of the ce- phalothorax, than in Attus: in E. reticulata (BLACKW.) = E. frontalis Q (WESTR.) the hindermost eyes are situated actually almost in the middle of the cephalothorax. KH. petrensis C. KocH is the only species of this ge- nus known to me, in which the design of the abdomen formed by the di- stribution of its colours depends on a tolerably thick covering of hair; or- dinarily the hair is thin and the markings occasioned by the pigment si- tuated in the skin itself — The claws are long and very slender, with few or no teeth; in Æ. frontalis I have observed on the inner claw of the 1“ pair two very small teeth. The hairs of the claw-tuft are sensibly di- lated at the extremity. Gen. 10. PHILZEUS vx. Deriv.: Dulaïos, proper name. Syn.: 1831. Calliethera C. Koch, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 30 (ad partem). 71846. Philia ID., Die Arachn., XIII, p. 54, 56. 1850. » ID., Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 45. 1861. Attus Wesrr., Aran. Suec., p. 543 (ad partem). 1864. Cyrtonota: sub-gen. Philia Srw., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 324, 327 (saltem ad partem). 1868. Attus ID., Monogr. d. espéces europ. de la fam. d. Attides, p. 6 (16), 14 (24) (ad partem). Type: Phileus sanguinolentus (LINN.). I am not sure that the distinctive features of this genus set forth by me are quite trustworthy, for I have met with the male only of one of its species, Ph. sanguinolentus. The genus however seems to be perfectly well distinguished from Attus and other nearly related forms even by its entire general appearance. — As the name Philia, according to AGassiz’ No- mencl. Zool, was already in 1842 appropriated by SCHIÖDTE to a genus of Hemiptera, I could not preserve it, but have replaced it with the somewhat similar name Philœus. In Ph. sanguinolentus the inner claw of the 1* pair of legs has about 20 close-set teeth gradually and slightly increasing in length, and the outer claw about 6 coarse, sparse teeth. The hairs of the claw-tuft are long, slightly dilated at the extremity. On the 4" pair of legs the number of teeth is respectively about 13 and 5. Nova Aeta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 28 218 T. THORELL, Gen. 11. ATTUS (WaLck.) 1805. Deriv.: drrwo = dioow, move with quick, sudden motion. Syn.: 1805. Attus WALCK., Tabl. d. Aran., p. 22 (ad partem). 1833. „ €. Kocu, in Hnrr.-Scumrr., Deutschl. Ins., 119, 3, 4. 1831. » ID., Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 1, p. 32. 1837. Euophrys ID., ibid., p. 33 (ad partem). 1850. á ID., ibid., 5, p. 60 (ad max. part.). 1861. Attus WEsTR., Aran. Suec., p. 543 (ad partem). 1861. Salticus Buackw., Spid. of Gr. Brit., 1, p. 47 (ad partem). 1864. Attus [Atta]: Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 324 (ad partem). 1868. 5 , ID., Monogr. d. espèces europ. de la fam. d. Attides, p. 6 (16), 14 (24) (ad partem). 1868. Dendryphantes ID., ibid., p. 6 (16), 168 (634) (saltem ad partem). Type: Attus terebratus (CLERCK). When C. Kocx in 1837 (loc. cit.) divided the old genus Attus WALCK. or Salticus LATR. into a number of smaller genera, he preserved the Wale- kenaerian name for a generic group that includes A. terebratus (CLERCK) and A. arcuatus (ID.). Since several species, which Kocu in the same work referred to Euophrys, ought also to be reckoned to the same genus, he some years afterwards transferred that appellation to the genus Attus, and gave the name of Attus to a portion of the species, which he had formerly called Euophrys. Such alterations of names no one of course can have the right of making, and we have accordingly restored the generic name Atéus to the spiders, which KocH first under that name detached from WALOKENAER'S Attus. Of Euophrys we have already treated p. 216. The genus Attus, as we have above defined it, includes the great majority of European Attoidz. Perhaps one or more well defined genera might with advantage still be detached from it; I have not however, pos- sibly for want of sufficient material for examination, been able to do so. As I define this genus, it corresponds to Kocn’s Euophrys 1850, with the ex- clusion of the sub-genera Dia and Parthenia, which I considered might very well be united into one separate genus: Ælurops. The armature of the claws in the genus Attus is tolerably various. Generally speaking the teeth of the inner claw are close-set and far more numerous than those of the outer claw; but occasionally, e. g. on the 4" pair of legs in A. erucifer, the number is small and about equal on both claws. Sometimes the teeth gradually and uniformly increase in length towards the point of the claw, sometimes they are of almost equal length On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 219 throughout; their length as compared with their breadth is also very diffe- rent in different species. In many species the outer claw is toothless, or has but a couple of coarse teeth far apart, while the inner claw is finely and closely pectinated. The hairs of the claw-tufts are usually gradually dilated towards the extremity. Gen. 12. ÆLUROPS vn. Deriv.: alovoos, cat; ww, face. Syn.: 1850. Euophrys: sub-gen. +Dia et }Parthenia C. Kocn, Uebers. d. Arachn.-Syst., 5, p. 60 (saltem ad part.). 1861. Attus WEsTR., Aran. Suec., p. 453 (ad partem). 1864. i [Atta]: sub-gen. öd.: "groupes" Dia et Parthenia Sim., H. N. d. Araignées, p. 310, 312, 313 (saltem ad part.). 1868. ,, Srw., Monogr. d. espèces europ. de la fam. d. Attides, p. 6 (16, 14 (24) (ad partem). Type: Ælurops v-insignitus (CLERCK). To this genus, besides the typical species, I refer e. g. also Salti- cus fasciatus HAHN, both remarkable for the projecting edge of the forehead, which conceals the central eyes of the first row, when the cephalothorax is looked at perpendicularly from above. As the names Dia and Parthenia were both already appropriated before KocH applied them to the two sub- genera, that we here have united into one genus (vid. 36, 37), I have been obliged to form a new generic name for them. — The species of this and the genus immediately following appear to me to be the most highly deve- loped European forms in the whole family. They leap with extraordinary vigour. Their claws are long and sinuated: in El. v-insignitus © the claws of the 4^ pair of legs have, much in front of their middle, about 3 or 4 large, sparse teeth, 7 about 6. On the 1* pair, the claws of which are much shorter and more uniformly curved, the teeth are still fewer in number, at least ing. The claw-tuft is continued as a scopula beneath a part of the tarsus of the 1* pair; and the hairs of it are, nearer the extremity, gradually dilated in the form of tongues. Gen. 13. YLLENUS (Sim). 1868. Deriv.: From some proper name. Syn.: 1868. Yllenus SIM., Monogr. d. espèces europ. de la fam. d. Attides, p. 6 (16), 166 (632). Type: Yllenus arenarius SIM. )). 1) For this species Simon cites ”MEnGE, Schrift. d. Naturforsch. Gesellsch. in Danzig, 1866”; but I have not found it described either there or any where else 220 T. THORELL, Of this genus, which, according to SIMON, is distinguished by the lamina of the palpal clava being "relevé en crête”, I have seen only one in- dividual, a male of the typical species, which SrwoN had the goodness to send me. That spider in its entire appearance agrees most accurately with ZElurops v-insignitus, but it differs not only by the peculiar structure of the palpi, but also by the far greater length of the posterior legs, especially the tibiæ. The claws also are particularly strongly developed: they are very long, even longer than those of Ælurops, slender and sinuated, espe- cially on the hindermost legs, where they have in front of the middle a row of about 12 very long, closely set comb-teeth. The claws of the 1* pair, whose tarsi, like those of the 2™ pair, are on the underside clothed with hairs dilated at the apex, are much shorter than those of the posterior pairs of legs, but still long, slightly and uniformly curved, with about as many teeth of the same form as on the following pairs, but here the row of teeth commences nearer to the base of the claw. The claws, especially on the hinder legs, are so large and visible, that both they and their pectina- tion may be observed with a good single lens. The hairs of the claw-tuft are dilated near the extremity in the posterior legs; in the 1* pair the di- latation is more gradual. Fossil spiders have in the preceding pages not be taken into ac- count, simply because I am not by actual inspection acquainted with any, and I therefore was not in a condition to form from observations of my own an opinion of the relations between them and now existing forms. Some short notices on this subject, with special reference to those extinct genera, Which (as far as I am aware) up to the present time have been published, may however be of interest to some few arachnologists, and I offer them the more readily, because I have not found, that in any work on the classification of spiders proper attention has been paid to the fos- sil forms. These animals, as the usually soft and perishable character of their integuments would lead us to expect, have left but few traces of their exist- previous to Srmon’s description loc. cit. In Kocx and BERENDT, Die im Bernstein befindl. Crust., Myriapod., Arachn. ete., p. 93, MENGE has, it is true, mentioned a Prussian spider under the name of Phidippus arenarius, which perhaps is the same as Yllenus arenarius Sım., but it is not characterized, and accordingly I could not refer to MENGE as authority for the name. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. | 221 ence in the fossiliferous deposits, and it is only in Amber that we meet with them numerously represented. The oldest known spiders belong to the Coal formation, in the strata of which a few specimens have been found in Bohemia?) and Silesia *), and probably also in England ?. Only one species belonging to that period is in sufficiently good preservation to be tolerably well characterized, viz. the Protolycosa anthracophila described by RÔMER, which was discovered in a piece of argillaceous slate at Kattowitz in Upper Silesia. It forms the type of the genus Protolycosa Rom. 1866 *. This spider, which is about 5 lines long, is by Romer placed in the vicinity of Lycosa; but this appears to me not to be right. The eyes and spinners, if indeed these organs ever existed, have unfortunately perished; nor is it possible to form any clear idea of the appearance of the mandibles, and it is therefore impossible to determine with absolute certainty the systematic position of the animal; nevertheless its general appearance and especially its extremely coarse and strong legs and palpi seem to me unequivocally to mark this genus as belonging to the Territelarie, and among these it is that wonderful East Indian genus Liphistius SCHIÖDTE, that Protolycosa most nearly resembles. Not only do these two genera agree in the unusual relative length of the legs — in Liphistius the proportion of the different pairs is 4, 2, 3, 1, in Protolycosa 4, eee 1, and thus in both the 1* pair is the shortest of all; — but in Protolycosa also the dorsal integument of the abdomen is of a horny sub- stance, and, according to RÖMER’S figures, divided into transversal segments, each furnished with a cross-row of tubercles, just as is the case with Zi- phistius SCHIODTE 5). I conceive then that Protolycosa ought to be assigned 1) "Palaranea borassifolia FRI” (!!), Vid. FEISTMANTEL, K., Die Steinkohlen- becken in der Umgebung von Radnie, p. 66, in Archiv f. d. naturwissensch. Landes- durchforschung von Böhmen, Bd I (Prag 1869); Conf. also *REuss, A. E., Kurze Uebersicht der Geognostischen Verhältnisse Bóhmens, p. 59 (Prag 1854), and Rö- MER, F., Protolycosa anthracophila, eine fossile Spinne aus dem Steinkohlengebirge Oberschlesiens, in LEONHARD and Bronn (GEINITZ), Neues Jahrbuch für Mineralogie, Geologie und Palæontologie, Jahrg. 1866, Hft 2, p. 143. (Stuttgard 1866). 2) Romer, loc. cit., p. 136—143, Taf. III, fig. 1—3. 3) Conf. *Luwyp (Lurpius), E., Lithophylacii Britanniei Ichnographia ete., Tab. IV (London 1690); "PARKINSON, J., The Organic Remains of a former world ete., III, Pl. 17, fig. 3—6 (London 1811); as ‘also a citation from Lawyp’s Epist. III, in Bucktann’s Geolog. and Miner., I, p. 406 (of Ed. 2). 4) Deriv.: æowvoc, first, and Lycosa. 5) Conf. Scæiôpre, Om en afvigende Slegt af Spindlernes Orden, p. 6—7. 222 T. THORELL, to the family Liphistioide NOB. (vid. p. 43), unless it be preferred to create a new family especially for it, a proceeding, which perhaps the unusually short femoral joints of the palpi (see RÖMER’S figures), as also two backward- directed spines in the midst of each side of the abdomen might justify. Phalangites MÖNST. 1839 = Palpipes RorH 1851. In the lithographie limestone of Solenhofen in Bavaria, belonging to the Jurassic formation, MUN- STER detected the impression of a previously unknown animal, which, on account of its resemblance to a Phalangium, he called Phalangites priscus ?). RotH 2), who had at his disposal several specimens, which he divides into two species, thought he could clearly perceive the contour of an abdomen separated from the cephalothorax, and observed two long, jointed and cross- ringed organs, attached to the abdomen and united at the base, which he considered to be spinners, and he accordingly aggregated these animals to the Order of Spiders. He named the genus Palpipes, and considered that it ought to be referred to the AMygalides (Territelarie); he characterizes it as follows: "Cephalothorax ab abdomine discretus. Palpi maximi, in pedes mutati. Pedum paria longitudine diversa. Tarsi monomeri, ungui va- lido simplici terminati. Papille textorie dus magne exsertæ, vel aliud quoddam organum bipartitum, cornutum, articulatum, in medio ventre situm, cornubus antice vergentibus." — The figure given by RorH of P. priscus really gives the impression of a spider with uncommonly long and thin legs and very long, leg-like palpi. Examples of still existing spiders with but one tarsal claw are not wanting (Sparassus abnormis BLACKW., Attus (Diolenius) phrynoides WALCK.: See above pp. 170 and 203); very long cross-ringed spinners occur also in another fossil spider, Gerdia myura MENGE, of which we shall speak farther on. Their abnormal position and direction in Phalangites may be a consequence of the animal’s having been crushed and the relative position of the parts thus changed. In the mean time it is maintained by v. MEYER *), that what RorH looked upon as the contour of 1) MÖNSTER, G., Graf zu, Phalangites priscus, in EJusp. Beiträge zur Petre- fakten-kunde, Hft 1, p. 84, Taf. VIII, fig. 3, 4. (Bayreuth 1839). 2) Rotu, J., Ueber fossile Spinnen des lithografischen Schiefers, im Gelehrte Anzeigen, Herausgegeben von Mitgliedern d. K. Bayer. Akademie der Wissenschaf- ten, Bd XXXII, p. 164—167. (München 1851). 3) MEvER, Herm. v., Zu Palpipes priseus aus dem lithographischen Schiefer in Bayern, in EJUSD. Palæontographica, Beiträge zur Naturgeschichte der Vorwelt, Bd X, Lief. 6, p. 299—304, Taf. L, fig. 1—4 (Cassel 1864). — See also a letter from Vv. MEYER to BRONN, in LEONHARD and Bronn’s Neues Jahrbuch f. Min., Geol. ete., 1861, p. 561. Bronx there surmises that Phalangites should be compared with the Pantopoda (Pycnogonoidea). On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 223 an abdomen, is the impression of a 5" pair of short and slender legs, and that accordingly the animal does not belong to the Arachnoidea, neither to the Opiliones, nor to the Aranew, but to the Crustacea. This view appears to me to have but little probability, as giving no satisfactory explanation of the organs observed in many specimens, and by RorH supposed to be spinners. To consider them with v. MEYER as antenne, would seem dan- gerous, as they are always found on or near the abdomen (Conf. RorH, loc. cit). That the contour of the abdomen gives the impression of a pair of jointed and converging extremities, might be explained by considering the abdomen itself to have been segmentated. At all events the animals in question are so peculiar, that they not only form a separate family, Phalangitoide, but even a group of a higher order, which may be cal- led FZLIGRADZE; if, as I suppose, this group belong to the order of Spi- ders, it ought, as a separate sub-order, characterized especially by single- jointed tarsi armed with but one coarse claw, to take a place below both Scytodoide and Filistatoide, uniting them with the Opiliones. Numerous representatives of the order of Spiders from the tertiary formations are already known. They appear all to belong to the miocene, or (the amber spiders) perhaps to a still older period. From the fresh-water formations near Aix in Provence MARCEL DE SERRES !) has produced a ” Ze- genaria", as also a” Phalangium” said to resemble Phalangium phaleratum PANZER, i. e. Asagena phalerata. I imagine it to be this last-named species, that is figured in BUCKLAND’s Geology and Mineralogy 2), and for which the same place of discovery is alleged; it closely resembles a Theridium. I propose to call it TR. Buckland. In the sulphur-impregnated tertiary strata of Radoboj in Croatia several spiders are also said to be found ?). Von HEYDEN describes the remains of two spiders, discovered in the Brown- coal strata of the Siebengebirge on the Rhine, which he calls Gea Krantzü *) and Argyroneta antiqua 5). The first seems to me to be a species of Epeira; the second is certainly no Argyroneta, but represents, if the figure can be relied upon, a peculiar genus, which may be called 1) Notes géologiques sur la Provence, in Actes de la Société Linnéenne de Bor- deaux, T. XIII, p. 34 (Bordeaux 1844). 2) BUCKLAND, W., Geology and Mineralogy considered with reference to Natural Theology (2% Edit.) II, p. 79, Pl. 46", fig. 12. (London 1837). 3) QUENSTEDT, F. A., Handbuch d. Petrefaktenkunde (2% Ed.), p. 268. (Tü- bingen 1867). I do not know whence QUENSTEDT has taken this statement. 4) HEYpEN, C. v., Fossile Insekten aus der Rheinischen Braunkohle (MEvER's Palæontographica, VIII, Lief. I, p. 2, Taf. II, fig. 11. (1859). Syd cu P Taf, 2, fig. 512. 224 T. THORELL, Elvina N.'). This genus appears to be distinguished by the palpi being evidently thicker than the legs. Its nearer relationships it is not possible from v. HEYDENS description and figure to determine: probably it may belong to the Tubitelariæ, aud possibly to the Agalenoide (Argyronetine). In the also miocene fresh-water strata of Œningen (near the Lake of Constance in Switzerland), OSWALD HEER ?) has met with no less than 28 spe- cies of spiders, which it is however difficult to affiliate to any certain genera, as the position of the eyes etc. cannot be distinguished. Herr thinks they may be referred to 10 genera, which, with one exception, are still existing. These spiders are not described, but eleven species have been figured and named: of these one is assigned to Æpeira, 3 to Theridium, 1 to Argyro- neta [-necta], 1 to Clubiona, 1 to Micaria |Macaria] and 3 to " Thomisus”. But scarcely one of these species appears to be in so good a state of pre- servation that the identifications can be considered as fully certain. Zhe- ridium maculipes HEER (loc. cit., p. 356, fig. 219) is more like an Asagena than a Theridium. Thomisus œningensis HEER (fig. 215) would seem to be a Xysticus. Clubiona Eseri HEER, which is stated to be very like CT. la- nata KocH et DER. (of which more hereafter) is assuredly no Clubiona, nor is Argyroneta longipes HEER any Argyroneta. These two species seem to form each its own separate genus. For one species HEER forms, as we have above stated, a new genus: Schellenbergia HEER 1865). Of his S. rotundata (fig.211) HEER says, that it is distinguished by "the short palpi with a large, globular terminal joint, short and almost globular abdomen, pressed close to the breast, and provided with transversal impressions. The third pair of legs is the short- est, all the others being of nearly equal length. The thighs are furnished with a longitudinal rib." The animal (a c7) belongs without doubt to the Retitelariæ, and appears to me to stand between Æpisinus and Ero. In the fossil vegetable resin known under the name of amber, which is met with in various Brown-coal strata, and is copiously thrown by the waves on the southern coasts of the Baltic, especially the coast of Prussia and the Kurische Haaff, and which also belongs to the tertiary ("oligocene") pe- riod, numerous spiders are found, and are, in general, well preserved. The principal work on the subject of these Amber Spiders is that of KocH and BERENDT: Die im Bernstein befindtlichen Crustaceen, Myriapoden, Arachniden 1) Elvina, mythol. proper name. 2) Die Urwelt der Schweitz, p. 355—358. (Zürich 1865). 3) J. R. SCHELLENBERG, a Swiss entomologist. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 225 und Apteren der Vorwelt ), which, after the death of the authors, was published by A. MENGE, and provided by him with many important addi- tions and corrections. The number of Spider-species found in Amber appears, according to Kocn’s and MENGE'S works, to amount to about 130; of these nearly 100 are fully described and figured, for the most part in Koch and BERENDTS above-named work, two others in a lately published paper of MENGE ?. Of several of the remaining species MENGE has, partly in Koch and BERENDTS work, partly in a separate memoir *), given more or less detailed descriptive notices. As we are now about to give a short account of the extinct genera made known by KocH and MENGE in the above-men- tioned works, it will probably be best, in consequence of their somewhat considerable number, to treat each family separately, in the order in which they have been classed in the foregoing pages. It should however be re- marked that the characteristies of many of these genera are by the said authors only touched upon in a few words and cursorily, so that it is not always possible to form a sure judgment of their systematie position. a. Epeiroide. To this family we refer the following genera: Grea N.*) = Gea (KocH et BER) 1854. — The fossil species, which KocH and MENGE reckon to Gea, differ from Epeira by having the anterior central eyes much larger than the posterior, and sitting close to- gether on small protuberances (vid. KocH and BERENDT, p. 22—24; MENGE, Lebenszeichen, p. 6). This is however by no means the case in the now existing, East Indian species of Gea, G. spinipes C. Kocu; for in that spe- cies the posterior central eyes, which are placed uncommonly far backward, are larger than the anterior, according to Kocx himself’). The exstinet spiders in question cannot therefore be affiliated to Gea C. KocH 1843, but form an independent genus, for which we propose the name Grea, with G. epeiroidea (K. et D.) as the type. Antopia MENGE 1854 *) This genus is distinguished by its coni- cally prominent head; the central eyes form a trapezoid, and are larger 1) Also with the title: BERENDT, G. C., Die im Bernstein befindlichen Organischen Reste der Vorwelt, Bd I, Abtheil. II. Berlin 1854. — In Bd I, Abth.I of this work (Berlin 1845) there is a list of the spiders described by C. Kocx in Bd I, Abtheil. II. 2) Ueber einen Scorpion und zwei Spinnen im Bernstein (Schriften der Natur- forschenden Gesellschaft in Danzig, Bd II, Hft 2, 1869). 3) Lebenszeichen vorweltlicher, im Bernstein eingeschlossener Thiere. Danzig [1856]. 4) Toaiac, ai, mythol. name (yeaia, old woman). 5) Die Arachn., X, p. 101, Tab. CCCLII, fig. 823. (1843). 6) dvzwreeos, looking straight forward. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 29 226 T. THEORELL, and placed higher up than the lateral eyes (vid. KocH et BER., p. 43; Le- benszeich., p. 7). — Type: A. punctulata (K. et B.), by KocH described as a Mizalia. Siga MENGE 18541). Is said to be nearly related to Zilla: ” The head is prominent, the posterior central eyes farther apart than the anterior, the palpi of the male provided with an involuted (zusammengerollten) fla- gellum”. — S. crinita MENGE (KocH and BER., p. 27). Androgeus K. et B. 18542). The head is triangularly or conically pointed; the eyes are arranged in two longitudinal rows diverging from the front backwards, and thus occupy a triangular area, the point of which is formed by the anterior central eyes; the hindermost eyes are placed far backwards on the back of the cephalothorax, much as in Hyptiotes and Poltys, which latter genus also in the form of its head resembles Andro- geus. KocH united these three genera in his family Mithraides (Mithracide). Androgeus probably belongs to our Uloborine, and assuredly not to the La- terigrade, with which MENGE thinks it ought to be classed. — Type: A. triqueter K. et B. — Conf. Kocx and BER., p. 27—29; Lebenszeich., p. 9. Of still existing genera, Zpeira and Zilla are said to be represented; the species of Zilla described in KocH and BER. do not however belong to Zila, as we have fixed the limits of that genus, and probably not even to the Epeiroidz, but to the Theridioidæ: they are said by MENGE to resemble " Meta tigrina” (Linyphia socialis SUND.) in the position of the eyes and in the legs (vid. Koch and BER., p. 27). b. Theridioidæ. The following genera appear to belong to this family: Flegia K. et D. 1854 °). Is nearly related to Episinus, according to MENGE, but the eyes are placed on a prominent elevation sloping be- hind. The cephalothorax is rounded, its pars cephalica small; the abdomen ovate, the legs long; the palpi of the male are very long, with a very large clava. The posterior central eyes are larger than the anterior. — Type: F. longimana K. et B. — Conf. KocH and BER., p. 30. Corynitis MENGE 1854 5). Nearly allied with Flegie; it is distin- guished "by its larger anterior central eyes, and by the male's still longer palpi, the fourth joint of which is slender at the base, incrassated in the 1) Sy, proper name. 2) *Avdedyews, Androgeus, proper name. 3) Deriv. to me unknown. (dAeyíac, dàeyóa and ®DAeyvas are proper names; gdeyeos, burning, shining). 4) xoovvn, club. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 227 form of a club at the extremity, with the clava itself almost spherical.” — C. spinosa MENGE. — Vid. KocH and BER., p. 30. Anandrus MENGE 18561). Of this genus MENGE only says that it is "nearly related to Linyphia, but the male’s palpi and organs of copula- tion are very small.” (Lebenszeich., p. 7). Thyelia K. et B. 1854 ?). In the position of the eyes Thyelia ap- proximates to Clubiona: they are placed in two parallel or only slightly converging rows; the four posterior eyes, which are placed at about the same distance from each other, form an almost straight line, as do also the four anterior eyes; the central eyes form a trapezoid broader behind. — From most of the figures (as f. inst. that of the typical species) given in KocH and BER., Thyelia appears to belong to the Theridioidæ, but other species, viz. Th. marginata (Pl. VI, fig. 45) and Th. anomala (Pl. V, fig. 39) more nearly resemble the Agalenoidæ (to which family the genus was referred by KocH), and probably do not belong to Thyelia (Conf. MENGE in KocH et BER., p. 56). — MENGE says loc. cit. that Zhyelia differs from its relations Clubiona and Amaurobius by a "narrower head and laterally pro- jecting spines on the else fine-haired legs”; in Lebenszeich., p. 7, he clas- ses it with the Theridioidæ on account of the short spinners and the arma- ture of the legs. — Type: Thyelia tristis K. et B. — Conf. Koch and BER., p. 50—56. Clya K. et B. 1854 °). — Is considered by KocH to approximate to Æucharia (Steatoda NOB.) in the form of the body, the legs and the palpi. The head is elevated above the rounded pars thoracica; the abdo- men is short, very convex. The eyes of the posterior series are placed on à sharp prominent ridge curved backwards; the central eyes, which are of the same magnitude, form a square; the lateral eyes are nearer together and about half as large as the central eyes. — Type: C. lugubris K. et B. — Vid. KocH and BER., p. 31. As possibly belonging to the Theridioidæ, MENGE mentions: Dielacata MENGE 1854 *. Nothing more is said of this genus, than that it has only two spinners, and two tracheal stigmata before the spin- ners. — D. superba MENGE. (KocH and BER., p. 94; Lebenszeich., p. 9). 1) @ priv., and @vje, man, male (probably with reference to the small sexual organs of c). 2) Perhaps from duydy, victim. 3) Deriv. unknown. 4) dis, twice; qAexérq, distaff. 228 T. THORELL, The following still existing genera are stated to have representatives in the Prussian amber: Ero, Theridium, Erigone, Walckenaera [ Micryphan- tes], Euryopis [-us] and Linyphia. c. Scytodoidæ. MENGE mentions (Lebenszeich., p. 9) a species of Pholcus, as also a new genus, perhaps belonging to this family: Phalangopus MENGE 1854 ?), of which however it is only said, that it is related to Pholcus, with long, slender legs, but with the eyes placed otherwise. — Ph. subtilis MENGE. Vid. KoCH and BER., p. 94; Lebenszeich., p. 9. d. Mizalioidæ N. The curious genus Mizalia, which in KocH and BERENDT is classed among the Z7Aeridioide, but which MENGE (Lebenszeich., p. 8) refers to his Clubionida (= Drassoide + Dysderoide NOB.), appears to me to form the type of a quite peculiar family, perhaps most related to the Urocteoidæ in the sub-order Tubitelariæ. The characters of this family may be seen from those of the only known genus: Mizalia (K. et B.) 1854?). The cephalothorax is in the form of a broad inverted heart; the pars cephalica, which has the same height as the slightly convex, broad pars thoraciea, is drawn out in a kind of snout before the eyes. The eyes are about equal in magnitude and placed in two transversal rows on the superior side of the head: the anterior, shorter row is curved backwards, the posterior row is nearly straight. The legs are rather short and strong (as are also the palpi), their relative length 1, 2, 4, 3; the abdomen is short, ovate; the superior or posterior spinners are slender, conieally pointed, the intermediate spin- ners cylindrical and more than double as long as the inferior (anterior) , which are truncated, conical and thicker. — Type: M. rostrata K. et B. — Conf. KocH and BER., p. 42—45. e. Hersilioide, Besides an Hersilia (of which genus no species is known now to exist in Europe: Conf. p. 115), a new genus belonging to this family has been found in the Prussian amber: Gerdia MENGE 1869 °). This remarkable genus is nearly related to Hersilia; but the head is raised into a high vertical boss, and the legs are destitute of the long, third tarsal joint found in Hersilia (according to MENGE the tarsi are only two-jointed). The very long three-jointed superior spin- ners are curved downwards towards their extremity; their long third joint 1) gdA«yi, joint; wovc, leg (or perhaps Phalangiwm and zov). 2) Deriv. unknown to me. Probably a proper name. 3) "Iéoóua, textrix”: MENGE. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 229 appears to he thickly annulated. — Type: G. myura MENGE. — Conf. MENGE, Ueber einen Scorp. u. zwei Spinn. im Bernstein, p. 8—9. f. Agalenoidæ. The amber fauna contains several species of Amau- robius (Celotes?), Tegenaria and Agalena, but probably not of Textria, to which genus KocH had referred a couple of species. — Conf. MENGE in Kocx et BER., p. 49, 50. g. .Drassoide. The following genera I place in this family: Anatone MENGE 18547). Of this genus MENGE says (in KocH and BER., p. 84) that the eyes are placed as in Philodromus, but the four an- terior eyes are scarcely half as large as the four posterior. In Lebenszeich., p. 8, Anatone is said to differ from Zora only in having the posterior cen- tral and lateral eyes placed nearer together. One species, A. spinipes MENGE is stated to stand very close to Zora spinimana KocH. MENGE refers the genus to the Lycosoide. Sosibius [Sosybius] K. et B. 1854 ?). Is according to MENGE (Le- benszeich., p. 8) so nearly related to Clubiona, as scarcely to be distin- guishable from that genus. — The four anterior eyes are placed near the margin of the clypeus in an almost straight line; the posterior central eyes are very small, almost invisible; the anterior eentral eyes are somewhat smaller than the lateral eyes, which are about equally large. — Type: S. minor K. et B. Vid. MENGE, in KocH and Ber., p. 70. — KocH, who believed that the eyes were arranged in quite another way, united this ge- nus with Æriodon and Selenops (!) into a family, which he called Æriodon- tide (loc. cit., p. 69). Erithus MENGE 1854 3). The lateral and the anterior central eyes, which are all large, flat and close together, are arranged in a single row curved backwards, near the margin of the clypeus; the posterior central eyes are smaller and placed on the superior side of the head. Nothing more is said of this genus. — Æ. applanatus MENGE (KOCH and BER., p. 69). Heteromma MENGE 1856 5. Is said to unite Clubiona and Mela- nophora with Segestria. Six large eyes are placed quite as in Segestria; behind them are two very small eyes (the posterior central eyes), the diame- ter of which is scarcely equal to 1 of that of the anterior central eyes; to this is to be added the peculiarity, that the abdomen is short-petiolated. MENGE Lebenszeich., p. 8. — H. intersecta MENGE. 1) "dvérovoc, sursum tendens": MENGE (dvd, up; reívo, stretch). 2) Zwoifros, proper name; Sosybius ought therefore to be written Sosibius. 3) £or9oc, labourer; also, female weaver. 4) Ereoos, another, dissimilar; Ouue, eye. 230 T. THORELL, The following two genera, which are said to be related to Clubiona (MENGE, Lebenszeich., p. 9), ought perhaps also to be classed among the Drassoidæ : Spheconia MENGE 18541): it is stated to have "a longshafted, fusiform abdomen and long spinners”: — S. brevipes MENGE; and Idmonia MENGE 1854 2): "the ellipsoidally arched pars cephalica is separated from the in front heart-shaped pars thoracica; the eyes enclose an ellipsis.” — I. virgineo MENGE. — Vid. KocH and BER., p. 94. Of the genera Clubiona, Anyphena, Micaria [Macaria] , Drassus, Melanophora and Gnaphosa [Pythonissa] several species are described or mentioned in KocH and BER. and MENGE. Of the genus Clubiona however at least one of the species described by KocH, C. lanata (loe. cit., p. 67, Tab. VII, fig. 60) appears to me to belong to a quite different and pe- culiar genus. h. Dysderoide. To this family belongs: Therea K. et D. 1854 °). The pars cephalica is distinctly separated from and higher than the pars thoracica. Six eyes, all close together; the central eyes occupy a trapezoid-somewhat broader in front, on each side of which is an obliquely placed lateral eye; the posterior central eyes are a little smaller than the others, which are equal in size. The genus is else nearly related to Dysdera. — Type: Therea petiolata K. et B. — Vid. KocH and BER., p. 75. Many other spiders belonging to this family, of the genera Segestria’ and Dysdera (10 species of the former genus!), have been found in amber. i. Theraphosoide. To this family the following genus no doubt belongs: Clostes MENGE 1869 5. C. priscus MENGE, the only known species, resembles, according to MENGE, in the form of its body Clotho and Cieniza, in the spinners, Mygale. The eyes, which are placed on a quadrangular elevation of the head, in two rows, occupy a large, transversal area and are arranged in a manner very unusual in the Theraphosoidæ: the four central eyes form a square, enclosed in a rectangle formed by the four la- teral eyes. The superior spinners are very long, three-jointed; the tarsi 1) opys, wasp. 2) "Ióuov, proper name (/duwy, skilful). — Zdmonea Lamour. [Polypi] 1821. 3) INoeos, ferinus, savage, brutal. 4) ”xAworns, qui stamina digitis torquet": MENGE (xAó9o, spin). On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 231 are armed with three claws, as in Nemesia (Cteniza); the superior claws are pectinated. — Conf. MENGE, Ueber einen Scorp. u. zwei Spinn. im Bern- stein, p. 6, 7. k. Thomisoide. We assign to this family: Clythia K. et B. 1854). The eyes are placed in two parallel rows eurved backwards; the four anterior eyes are small, equal in size, the po- sterior four much larger, also equal in size. The legs are rather strong, not much longer than the body, armed with spines on the underside of the tibia and metatarsi; the tarsi are thick, with long, pectinated claws. — In its general appearance and the structure of the tarsi these spiders are, ac- cording to MENGE (KocH and BER., p. 46), more intimately related to Ocy- pete (Heteropoda, Sparassus) than to the Theridioidæ, to which family he however in Lebenszeich., p. 7, reckons them, as also KocH had done (Kock and BER., p. 94). — Type: C. alma K. et B., 1. c., p. 45. Athera MENGE 1854?. "Long and slender, the anterior central eyes small and close together, the posterior central eyes more than double as large, far apart; on each side of the last are the large lateral eyes. A. exilis. (KOCH and BER., p.94). — Nothing more is known of the genus, which in Lebenszeich., p. 9, is taken up among the Thomisoide. Opisthophylax MENGE 1856?) Of this genus MENGE only says: "Eyes as in Philodromus, but the posterior central eyes are very large and looking forwards, and the posterior lateral eyes placed far backwards. O. exarata." (Lebenszeich., p. 9). Syphax K. et B. 1854 *. This genus is nearly related to Xysticus. The pars cephalica is large and broad; the two anterior central eyes are exceedingly small, the two posterior larger, farther apart; the anterior late- ral eyes are very large. The row formed by the 4 anterior eyes is curved slightly backwards or almost straight, the posterior row is curved more strongly backwards. — Type: S. megacephalus K. et B. — Conf. KocH and BER., p. 77. The now existing genera Heteropoda | Ocypete KoCH, Oxypete MENGE], Artanes [ Artamus], Philodromus and Misumena (? — ” Thomisus” MENGE) have also representatives among the amber spiders. 1) Perhaps = Clytia, mythol. proper name. — Clytia is a name already many times appropriated. [Clytia Lamouroux [Polypi] 1812; Clytia Hien. [Lepidopt.] 1816, etc.]. 2) ”’d-dÿo, non fera et venenata": MENGE. (&9«00c, without chase, game). 3) Omuodev, behind; q/4o£, guard; ”retrospieiens”: MENGE. 4) Svgas, proper name. 232 T. THORELL, L Archæoidæ [Archeide] K. et B. This family has been created by Kocx for the remarkable genus Archea K. et B. 18541). The large head is much and, in gene- ral, spherically elevated above the pars thoracica, which is narrower be- hind. The eyes are arranged in two rhomb-like groups, one on each side of the head. The mandibles are strong, often very elongated, with a long claw. The palpi are uncommonly small and slender, especially in the fe- male. The legs are rather long and slender, prop. 1, 2, 4, 3. — Type: A. paradoxa K. et B. — KocH considered this genus not to be related to any other known spiders; MENGE first (in KocH and BER., p. 22) believed it had most affinity with Tetragnatha: the form of the legs as given in Kocu’s figures, reminds one in fact much of that genus and of Pachygna- tha, which latter genus some species also resemble in their large, diverging mandibles. But in Lebenszeich., p. 9, MENGE refers Archea to the Lateri- grade (Thomisida MENGE), on account of the form and direction of the fore- legs (which is said to be the same as in the Laterigrade) and of the short and slender posterior legs. The position of the eyes is quite the same as in Platythomisus DOLESCH. (vid. sup., p. 170). I therefore place Archæa among the Laterigradæ; but this genus may perhaps for the present best be taken as the type of a separate family, distinguished by its ovate cephalothorax with the curiously formed pars cephalica, by the extraordinarily small palpi, and the large mandibles. — Conf. KocH and BER., p. 19—22. m. Lycosoide, By MENGE the following genus is referred to the Lycosoidæ, of which family no more representatives appear to have been found in amber: Linoptes MENGE 1854?) Nothing more is said of this genus, than that it has a slender body, long legs, long and slender abdomen and eyes resembling those of Lycosa. — L. oculeus MENGE. Vid. KocH and BER., p. 94; Lebenszeich., p. 8. n. Eresoide. Two species of the genus Zresus. o. Attoide. To this family several species belong, which are de- scribed in KocH and BER. under the generic names of Phidippus and Leda. The genus Leda appears to be founded on a damaged specimen, and can- not therefore be retained; moreover the name is already appropriated >). The species which Koch reckons to Phidippus, do not, according to MENGE, 1) doyatos, primitive, ancient. 2) lwônrnc, guarder of a net. 3) Leda Scuum. [Moll] 1817. ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 233 belong to that still existing, exotie genus. MENGE creates for them — with the exception of one species, which he assigns to Æuophrys C. Kocn (Attus (WALCK.) NOB.) — a new genus: Gorgopis MENGE 18541). This genus, which is said to be nearly related to Euophrys C. KocH (Attus NOB.), appears to be characterized prin- cipally by having the small eyes of the 2™ series placed at a very short distance behind the anterior lateral eyes; they are also somewhat less distant from each other than are the two eyes of the 3" row. The fourth pair of legs is longer than the others. — Type: G. frenata (K. et B.). — Conf. KocH and BER., p. 93). Propetes MENGE 1854?) Of this genus MENGE only says that it differs from the genera, into which KocH has resolved WALCKENAER'S Attus, by having the eyes of the 2" row but slightly smaller than those of the 3" row, and larger than in now living species. — Type: P. felinus MENGE. Vid. KocH and BER., p. 93. One species of KocH's exstinet Phidippi, is, as we have already said, by MENGE referred to Attus, or Euophrys MENGE; in Lebenszeich. (p. 9) that name is however not mentioned, but instead of it: ” Salticus 1 sp." Lastly I ought to cite the genus: Mastigusa MENGE 1854 °), whose affinities are entirely unknown: of the only mentioned species, JM. acuminata MENGE, it is stated that the male has on its palpi "flagella which are curved backwards in form of a ram's horn (widderhorn-ähnlich nach hinten gebogenen Geisseln) and are al- most as long as the body.” Vid. KocH and BER., p. 94. Three more genera Onca, Epeiridion and Ocia are mentioned by MENGE (KOCH and BER., p. 8 and 24; Lebenszeichn., p. 8), but they are not at all characterized. The two former are said to belong to the .Epei- roide, the last named is taken up among the 7Aomisoide. I beg here to express my grateful acknowledgement to those Arach- nologists who, since the printing of this treatise was commenced, have as- sisted me by the communication of valuable information or specimens of interesting species. In addition to the gentlemen named in pp. 2 and 3, 1) yooyanıs, fierce-looking. 2) moometyc, rash, hasty. 3) uaoreyow, whip, scourge. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. II. 30 234 T. THORELL, I beg with thankfulness to mention Mr E. SIMON, Prof. A. MENGE, Prof. E. GRUBE, Prof. R. LEUCKART, Prof. J. G. SCHIÔDTE, and more especially the Rev. O. P. CAMBRIDGE, through whose kindness I have had the oppor- tunity of examining a large number of English Spiders. c= (6) ADDENDA. Pag. I—XXIV: 1869. Barra, E., Verzeichniss der Spinnen des nórdlichen Bóhmens. (Archiv für die Naturwissenschaftliche Landesdurchforschung von Böhmen, Bd I) BEnENDT, Vid. Kocx and BERENDT. 1865. BERGS0E, V., lIagttagelser om den Italienske Tarantel og Bidrag til Taran- tismens Historie i Middelalderen og nyere Tid. (Naturhist. Tidskrift, 3 Række, Bd II). 1869. CAMBRIDGE, O. P-, Part I. of Catalogue of a collection of Ceylon Araneidea lately received from Mr J. Nietner, with descriptions of new species and characters of a new genus. (The Linnean Society's Journ., Zool., Vol. X). 1869. —1p.— Descriptions and sketches of two new species of Araneidea, with characters of a new genus. (vbid.). 1868. Henrz, M., and Scupper, S. H., Supplement to the descriptions and figures of the Araneides of the United States by Nicholas Marcellus Hentz. Edited by Samuel H. Scudder (Proceed. of the Boston Society of Natural History, Vol. XI). 1854. Kocu, C. L., and BERENDT, G. C., Die im Bernstein befindlichen Crustaceen, Myriapoden, Arachniden und Apteren der Vorwelt. Berlin 1854. [With ad- ditions by A. MENGE]. — Also with the title: Die im Bernstein befindlichen organischen Reste der Vorwelt, gesammelt, in Verbindung mit Mehreren be- arbeitet und herausgegeben von G. €. Berenpt. Bd I. Abtheil. II: Die im Bernstein befintlichen Crustaceen, Myriapoden, Arachniden und Apteren der Vorwelt. | MENGE in KocH and Ber., Vid. Koch and BERENDT. SCHIÖDTE, J. C., Specimen Faunæ subterraneæ, Vid. (p. xx) rp., Bidrag til den underjordiske Fauna. SCUDDER, Vid. HENTZ and Scupper. 1835. Wesrwoon, J. O., [Gastracanthus:] (Transact. of the Entom. Soc. of London, Vol. I. Proceed.). On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 235 Pag. 54, lin. 25: (The Zilla montana of WESTRING we propose to call Z. Stræmu, in memory of the Norwegian Zoologist H. Strom). Pag. 65 (after Uloborine): In a paper recently published (Deser. and sketches of two new spec. of Aran. ete), CAMBRIDGE has given descriptions and figures of a highly remarkable genus from Ceylon, Miagrammopes CAMBR., which as he, no doubt rightly, thinks, is most nearly related to Uloborus and Hyptiotes (Mi- thras). What in the first place gives this genus a peculiar interest, is the cireumstance of its having only four eyes, placed in a transversal row across the pars cephalica; so that now a veritable four-eyed spider is at last dis- covered! (Conf. p. 28, note 1) But Miagrammopes is still more remark- able by the absence of a separate sternal plate, the legs being simply arti- eulated to the lower side of the cephalothorax, which forms the sternal sur- face. This unique character would perhaps warrant the formation of a spe- cial family within the sub-order Orbitelariæ for the genus in question; but in every other point of systematical importanee it appears to me to agree with the Uloborinæ. — Two species, M. Thwaitesii and M. Ferdinandi, are described and figured. Pag. 81 (in the Syn. of Linyphia): 1845. Meta C. Kocu (ad part.:) Die Arachn., XII, p. 130. Pag. 85 (in the Syn. of Erigone): 1830. Linyphia Sunn., Sv. Spindl. Beskr., zm Vet.-Akad. Handl. f. 1829, p. 211 (ad partem). 1834. Theridium Reuss, Zool. Mise., Arachn., (ad part.:) p. 222 (228). Pag. 86 (in the Syn. of Walckenaera): 1830. Linyphia SuND., Sv. Spindl. Beskr., in Vet.-Akad. Handl. f. 1829, p. 211 (ad partem). 1831. Theridium Hann, Die Arachn. I (ad part.:) saltem p. 91, 92, Tab. XXII, fig. 69, 70. — Monogr. Aran., 6, Tab. IV, fig. C. 236 T. THORELL, INDEX. The names printed in Italics are Synonyms. Acrosoma Actinopus Ælurops . AE ORAN 210: 010208: Agalena [Agelena] 132; 120, 131, 133— 135, 141, . 48, 75.| Argyrodes Argyroneta Argyronetinæ 143, 229.| Ariadne [-a] Agalenoidze 117; 110, 223, 229. | Ariadne Agaleninæ . 127; 120.| Ariamnes Agelena, Vid. Agalena Arkys, Vid. ioe Agelenide, -es . . . . . . . 117.) Arrecerus À Agroea . . . . . . 135; 118, 121.| Artamus [-a] Amaurobiide . . . . 118.) Artanes Amaurobiinæ TION PAL mA Amaurobius 126; 118, 119, 124, 127, 128,| Asagena 131, 229.) Atea Anandrus 227.| Athera Anatone . 229. Attide, -es Androgeus 2 IMASUtG TIS NN: Anetes 186; 170, 172, 175.| Attus [-a] Anetinæ 186; 175.| Atypus [-a] Antopia NEL 225.| Aulonia Antrobia [Anthrobia] - . . 41.| Avieularia Anypheena 143; 139, 145, 230.) Ballus [-a] Apostenus . . . . . 141; 121, 139.| Bathyphantes Arachne . PEE PAL 133.| Bolyphantes Arachnura [Arachnoura] : 39, 48. | Cærostris Aranea Archæa EN LA Archæoidæ [Archeide] Arctosa SURE n WE Arcys [Arkys] . 53, 128, 129, 134, 163. Calliethera [-us| 232.| Cancroides 232. Catadysas Rate] : 192.| Catadysoidæ . 170, 172. | Cavator ) Arcyinæ . 172.) Celænia . Argenna 123; 119.| Cellicolæ Argiope . . NES 49, 52.| Ceratina Argus 85, 86, 96, 107, 122, 131, 141. | Cerceis Argyope, -es, Vid. nenne: Cercidia 38.| Argyronecta, Vid. Argyroneta. 137; 121, 223, 224. 80; 48, 76. . 136; 224, 155; 38, 153. . 37, 63. 37, 63. . . 86, 88. 37, 180, 231. 180; 37, 174, 231. c 33, Hz) 97; 77, 96, 124, 223, 294. . 53, 54, 56, 91. 931. 198, 203. st st 2035 19922 218; 208-—220, 233. 165; 164. 190; 189. 168; 163, 212; 207. 172. . 84, 86. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. Cheiracanthium, Vid. Chiracanthium. Cherside . 419201; Chersis 200, 201. Chiracanthium [Cheiracanthium] 145; 139. Ciniflo . 118, 125, 126. Cirrofera 36, 182. CITIGRADE . 187. Clastes 171. Clostes Lua NERO! Clotho WS ee SS 105, lat, 102% Clubiona 144; 122, 126, 128, 139, 143 Zug, 224, 230. Clubionida 228. Clya 221. Clythia acl apse. Coelotes 128; 118, 120, 229. Coriarachne . 186, 115. Corinna 147. Cornicularia 87. Corynitis 226. Crustulina PHONE 92, 93. Crypheca Reyes) eu 3 ler 108 Cteniza, [-e], 29, 163, 166. Ctenus [-a] 195; 189. Cursores Bio on Wel Cybæus 127; 118, 121. Cyclosa 57. Cyllopodia 65. Cyphagogus . al. Cyphonethis 9T. Cyrtaraehne 5 Jan SRST. Cyrtauchenius 165; 37, 164. Cyrtocephalus [-a] 36, 165 Cyrtogaster : Bile Cyrtonota 36, "205, 911, 213, 217. Cyrtophora . 57; 49, 54. Daradius 170. Deinagnatha, Vid. EUER Deineresus, Vid. Dineresus. Deinopis, Vid. Dinopis. Delena gees ys 175. Deletriz . 158. Dendrolycosa . . 176. 2 an 214; 207, 212, 213, 218. Dia 36, 218, 219. 237 Diæa 184; 37, 175. Diana 36, 182, 184. Dictyna 122; 119. Dicymbium . 87. Dicyphus 87. Dielacata More 227. Dineresus [Deineresus] . 204. Dinognatha [ Deinagnatha] 63. Dinopis [Deinopis] ours’ n MAS; Dinopoidee . 43, 198, 204. Diolenius 203. Diphya 170. Diplura : 161; 164. Dipneumones . . 43. Dipena eru CLS TG Dolomedes 194; 140, 176, 189. Dolophones 3 50, 71. Dorceus "200. Drapetisca 82. Drassidæ, -es 109, 137. Drassina 147. Drassodes Sea. Drassoide . . . - - 137; 109, 229. Drassus 147; 97, 122, 128, 140, 141, 143, 145—149, 230. Drepanodus 87. Dyetion BITS. c. IE Dysdera . 157; ‘re 158, 230. Dysderidæ, -es Casi. Dysderoidze 152; 110, 230. Elaphidium [-on] . 87. Elvina 5 . . 224. .| Enyo 108; 107. Enyoide . ped 105; 12. Epeira 53; 49, 51—62, 223, 224, "226. Epeiride, -es . 47, 51. Epeiridium [-on] 20288. Epeirinæ . 51; 49. Epeiroidæ 2c. 0468225. Epiblemum 210; 204, 206. Episinus [-a] Oued. Eresides . ‚oral. Eresinæ 2992008198: Eresoidæ 199; 198, 232. Eresus [-a] 200; 199, 232. 238 T. THORELL, Ergatis . . . 122.) Heteromma . SN 229. Erigone 85; 16, 81, 84, 86, 228.| Heteropoda E 77; qn, 174, 231. Eriodon 164, 229.| Histopona 133; 120. Eriodontide 292.| Homalattus 204. Eriophora 53.| Hypoplatea ERS ANT Eripus 170.| Hyptiotes [Uptiotes] . . 67; 50. Erithus 20 IMIcehus, a: 206, 213. Ero 89; 76, 92, 228. | Idiops 197. Erygona, Vid. Dens: Idmonia 230. Erythrophora . . + . 200.) Inequitele . u Eucharia |-um] B9, 932204002200 | nor - 36. Eugnatha oh ole 63, 66.| Isacantha maß: Euophrys 215; 201, 212, 218, 219, 233. Janus : 36, 210. Euryopis [-«s] . 96; 77, 92, 298.| Katadysas, Vid. Catadysus. Eurypelma . 168.| Laches ay : 37, 107. Eurycorma 37.| Lachesis . 36, 37, 107. Eurysoma 36, 37.| Lagenicola 205. FILIGRADÆ . . 223.| Lampona BYE Filistata Jus 160; 147—149. | Laqueariæ 71. Filistatoidæ, -tide 158; 110.| Lasiodora Jot Flegia 226.| LATERIGRADE . ie 169; 170. Formicina 78; 75.| Lathrodectus [Latrodectus|. 95; 77, 124. Galena 0 9. sci IVO: | atone 21.» REN. TO S. ©; Gasteracantha . . . . . 4, 48, 172.) Leda . 232. (CAUSAS. S 5 s o o d o c 4.| Leimonia, Vid. mens Gea 223, 225.| Leiocranum, Vid. Liocranum. Gelanor 37.| Lephthyphantes | Leptyphantes] MAO: Gerdia . . . . 228.| Leptorchestes 209; 198, 206. Gnaphosa 149; 140, 230.| Leptothrix 87. Gonatium 86.| Leptyphantes, Vid. Lephthaphantess Gongylidium 87 | Lethia tea) IR 125; 120. Gorgopis 233.| Leucauge c dau 90: Grea 225.| Limonia |Leimonia] 36, 190. Hadites 135; 121.) Linoptes EDEN. 25«m Hahnia 131; 121, 132.| Linyphia 81; 75, 18, 80, 88, 228. Harpaetes 157; 154.| Linyphidæ, -iide sos DT ae Hecaérge UTR Io. ot 140.| Lioeranum 143; 118, 159. Heliophanus [-a] . . . . . 211; 207.| Liphistius [Zipistius] 39, 43, 221. Helophora es 504982; | Liphistioide 0. 2). N'ES pr Hemerarachne |Hemerachne] . 153.| Lipistius, Vid. Liphistius. Herpyllus . . . . 146—149. | Lithyphantes 94; 77. Hersilia 35, 114, 115, 228.| Lophocarenum . mee telo Hersilioidæ 114; 109, 228. | Lophomma , . i ROE Hersiliola 115. | Loxosceles 104; 101. Heterogna{ha 110. | Lucia 107, 108. On EUROPEAN SPIDERS. Lycena 140. Lycodia v PON ESTA! Lycosa 1 90; 189—194. Lycosidæ, -es 187, 188. Lycosina AIO! Lycosoidæ 188; 232. Lycosoides 117, 134, 140. Lyssomanes 198, 204. Macaria . : 146, 224, 230. WMenduculusk e. vus te ons oco ORTE. Marpessa 213; 207, 212. Marpissa, [-us], Vid. Marpessa. Mastigusa 4:993: Megamyrmecium EOD HOD 13: Melanophora 149; 140, 230. Melicertus . 86, 88. Menemerus 214; 207, 213. Meta a Os SOR DD Miagrammopes & NO: Micaria 1 46: 139, 224, 230. Micrathena =. :. ot. «. AA 3r Ne onen. cs Lens SPST Micrommata IREM 173, 176, 177. Micryphantes [-us] 85— 88, 96, 228. Mimetus out am ae "Udo MTD Miranda 51, 1597 54, 56. Missulena 5 161. Misumena 183; 171, 174, 181, 184, 231 Mithracide, Fa 47, 68, 225 MT pias MAPS ER SE ENG TE Mizalia 228 Mizalioidæ à ce DER Monæses 182; 37, 174. Monastes = fe OO 96182 Mygale 29, 36, 161—169. Mygalidæ, -es 162. Mygalodonta SATS 166. PVE ECT NS à Hs N. | Quae Myrmecioidæ 43, 198. Myrmecium . 99,199) Isle.) Wiymmaden EN wo ra. * RES: Nemesia . s 166; 164. VERBOTE Res ete. Un. 2e. VPP NDS: Neoscona 36, 53. Nephila 48, 51. 239 INeottiura nn. ; SMOD: Neriene [-eus] . . 8l, 82, “85, 86, 88. Nesticus',. s s sos +. +) SSO Nops 28, 40, 153. dNuctened + woo ve ots re TTD Nuctobia 60, 62. Nyssus 133. (Orge KV ks 0293 (Ecobüde . 44, 114. Œcobius . 112; 111. Ocyale [-a] . 5 Ula MISO: Ocypete 111—149, 231. Oletera de cu CE} Olios ri a ri Omanoidz . 44, 114. Omanus 44, 114. Omosites, [-a] . 104. Onca Se hide eA, Oonops 158; 154. Oophora . dotes. Operaria : 122. Opisthophylax 231. Orbitelæ 47. QRBITELARIZ +. +. +. +. +. POTERE Orithyia ss =. =, nn + oor. Oe Otiothopoidæ . . . . . . 43, 198. Otiothopse scs c wees .| Oxyopes [-a] 197; 196. .| Oxyopoidæ 196; 188. Oxypete 231. .| Oxyptila One 36, 182, 185. Oxysoma : > (Dt Ozyptila, Vid. ee N EPacivyduaocty Lus 2 2) ur RE RE CE Pachysnatha NEO! Pachygnathide . . 1, TA. Pachyptila 36, 182—184. Palaranea a fa ee LU, 47711 PAles s iow. talks RTE tae PPS GE Palpimaninæ POI TOO Palpimanus 201; 198; 199. Palpipes . a te 1077 Pandora 36, 218, 219. Pardosa : S PAIS: Parthenia 36, 218, 219. 240 Pasithea 37, 196 Pedina 81, 82 Pelecodon 29. Pelecopsis 88. Peniza . à Peucetia ue . 196; 37. Pexionyx |Peziony«] 36, 167, 168. Phalangium . 97, 223. Phalangites . 222. Phalangitoidæ 223. Phalangopus 228. Phalops 6 s yg Phidippus [-ia] . 213, 220, 232. Philzus : 217; 37, 208. Philia . 37, 217. Phillyra 65. Philodromi : 172. Philodromine . 5 6 dire Ie), Philodromus [-a] 180; du, 174, 181, 231. Philæca |Philoica] . 129, 135, 143. Phlæoides 183. Phebe . al. Pholcides 101 Pholcinæ 5 101 Pholcomma 98; 77 Pholcus 101; 102, 228. Phoroncidia . . NCMO? Phrurolithus [-um] 145; 93, 94, 139, 146. Phrynarachne c 91, 182. Phrynoides 37, 182. Phyllonethis 90; 76 Pirata 193; 189. Platyopis . 30996 Platyscelum . s s Oil Platythomisus 170, 182. Pleuromma BMGT corto PIU) Plexippus [-a] 208, 211, 213. Poltys . AT, 69, 225. Potamia 37, 193. Prodidomus . 78. Pronopius 87. Propetes 233. Protolycosa 221 Pyenaeantha à ANT! Pylarus 158, 160. T. THORELL, .| Pyroderes -| Pyrophorus [-a] Pythonissa Rachus Retiarie . RETITELARIÆ Retrograde Rhanis Rhene . Saltatores Salticide . Salticus [-a] 208; 198, 206, 209—290, 233. SALTIGRADA Sarotes Savignia . ; Schellenbergia . Scheenobates Scurria à Scytodes [-a] Seytodoidæ Scytodinæ Selenops .| Segestria .| Sicarius -| Siga Singa . Sosibius (SUE Sparassus [-a] Spermophora Sphasus Spheconia Sphodrus |-os] .| Stalita . .| Steatoda [-wm] Stemonyphantes . .| Stephanopis Storena Stylophora Sylvia . Synæma [Semis] : Synemosyna . Syphax .| Tapinopa . dro Tarentula | Tarantula] Tectriz, Vid. Textrix. . 209. 37, 209. 149, 230. . 28, 99, 102. mmm 177, 178. 86, 87. mE 154; 153. 168. : 103; 61, 101, 104. 98; 72, 228. 103; 101. . . 179; 174. 154; 153, 230. : 29, 111, 170. 226. 58; 49, 57. 029. 116; 171, 174, 177. 102; 28, 101. 197. . 930. 2137, 388 eo. 155; 154. 93; 77, 90—97. 82. | 36, 182, 184. 37, 204, 209. 4281 ec 7. SOLDE 191; 189, 192: ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. 241 Tegenaria 129; 120, 131, 133, 134, 136,| Thysa 151; 140. 223, 229.| Titanceca . 124; 119. Teraphosa, Vid. Theraphosa. Tmeticus r 8587. Teratodes a eo: 160.| Trachelas . 142; 139 Terrestres 161.| Trechalea . xi eA TERRITELARLE 160.| Trechona . 168; 164. Tessarops 28.| Tricantha 36. Tetragnatha 62; 50.| Triclaria . 31. Tetragnathide. 51.) Trithena 75. Tetrapneumones . . . 43, 162.) Trivia 37. Textores 2 : 109.| Troehosa . 192; 189. Textrix [Tecra] 134; 117, 120, 133, 229.| Tubicolæ 117. Thalamia RER: ET EL 109, 224. Thanatus [-a] 181; 174.| Tubitelæ 109. Thaumasia 181.| Typhochlena sy cp mst Theraphosa (rep ieee 161—164, 168.) Uloborinæ 64; 50, 226. T'heraphosce : 162.| Uloborus . 65; 50, 64. Theraphosoidæ . 161; 230.| Uptiotes, Vid. Hyptiotes. Therea KOL Se 230. | Uroctea : : 111; 105. Theridide, -es, -üde . 71, 73.) Urocteoidæ 110; 105. Theridioidæ 73; 12, 226.| Veleda . 64, 65. Theridium [-on, -o] 92; 77, 88—98, 122,| Venatores MP RENTE 124, 146, 223, 224, 228.| Walekenaera . 86; 76, 82, 84, 228. Thlaosoma 59; Wilerius: . +. «ds oo + een BASS! Thomiside, -es . . . 140. Xysticus Fa] 185; 175, 182, 186, 224. Thomisine 181; 174.| Yllenus ay 2198208! Thomisoides 29, 111, 170.) Zilla 59; 49, 226. Thomisoidæ : LT 110; 231.| Zodarium [-on] . . 107. Thomisus [-a] 183; 171, 174, 177, 182, | Zora 140; 139. 184—186, 224, 231. Zosis A cao . 48, 66. Thyelia 9285 i Pia. «s. rc t. whew men 54, 59, 60. is Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Se. Ups. Ser. III. 31 read descrizione segestriformis 1849 as Sphodrus Episinus As a number appropriate and the very basis of this and not TELLKAMPF (15) (12)...(16) Œcobiidæ Marpessa provided notacantha examino Meriane to be 1834 spatio multo minore tenues; 112724091 L. hortensis SunD. (L. pratensis BLACKW.). Eucharia [Eucharium] disproportionately the family 10. BLACKW. Philodrominz (excel. Mi- crommata LATR.) 42 T. THORELL, ON EUROPEAN SPIDERS. ERRATA. v, line 17 from bottom: for descripzione VII» E! » » segestriformes XIV » 15 » » 1848 8) » 16 from top » à ih » 18 » » Spodrus 14 » 3 from bottom » Epesinus » » 15 » » Ar » » 18 » » number 15 » LZ, 18 » » applicable 21 » 18 » » och 28 » 4, 5 from top » this whole system of 30 » 13 from bottom » and the BD 18 » » non 41 » 2,4 » » TELLKAMP 42 » 5, 8 from top » (13) » » Hi » » (10) ... (14) 44 » 6 » » Œcobidie 46 » 8 from bottom » Marpissa 47» 16 from top » previded 50 » 15 » » notacanthas 53 » 8 from bottom » examinor 57 » 2 from top » fusca B. o» 12 » » be 67 » 17 from bottom » 1835 To 9 » » multo minus Wü 3 19 » » tenues 178 » 1 » » 1, 2, 9,4 83 » 10, 11 from top » L. pratensis BLACKW. S5 » 14 from bottom » Steatoda [Steatodum] 98 » 10 » » disproportionably jg » ilii » » family 121 » 4 from top » 9 154 » 4 from bottom » (BLACKW.) 178 » 9 from top » Philodrominæ 210 » 4 » » Luc. (Luc.) PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHIA GEORUM. SCRIPSIT N. JOH. SCHEUTZ. (REG. SOCIETATI SCIENTIARUM UPSALIENSI TRADITUM DIE 18 Dec. 1869.) UPSALIÆ EXCUDIT ED. BERLING REG. ACAD. TYPOGRAPHUS. MDCCCLXX. ^ j dr vs b e gta enius. pages iy, "udi mr ohne it À ugs HOT ON, Ar Ld ‚wahr: itio jid TIU ave sole sh: dno aon emil MOVE 38 siitaloronad jrelirguta -Bra 4ummieeisesfo $9 mink MI x) ma cato tol 169. pads. sisitindod. eid ni este ost 200902 obi dibibeed ‘es 19 wage si vielle tas nina AMruvieul Moe entiashing nox AIT UNS mr mehenliup a nie du auo» bee divgvoldma «nt unis audicotioslfon appo "tits edad aree are Lr 449 una idit HIS TNT ÖT suo. HOP 51901 "n am t oar minos sil qRSONOIR ohsholona d9 nam mig & ort Soar nnt ne stars jin iitearenlo duty AM LL Ml inp. vaan ud. x “Ll konto tel): ET 1 10094.) roma one rit: arc on deerod orsus ra atat “Sig telnet cel ense amade aureo A naar alla aati "niano. mtt pas sithrimag Aust ern ilit kJ RT: moon often” ILU Tiny SU" Ye “RTE nee "i danois aokad dy ECL Hogggtoitt 103. enti m ^gposdioildid. to duros)? , Zonotisallon. arai dL out dup: Wale Heist 19. Er xi un wore imis qx (urs VTA E ota ase oai) bon ox adeb oe Us d qogront iui 4 ^ QC stoner e deo sae iti venin bivio au | AIN ODA ur. 4 vista MERE Ah aan grote rendo | ets ori A.” NE C UE id wingsalaiaas Me asc y “TAA Hn Pes fant: dup d hai po : ‚ale n ol, TPS EE ME fi blue ion einige s mt NS rdi and os vasa sii Meran mihi aliquando ab ELIA FRIES, viro illustrissimo, cujus generis plantarum monographiam potissimum conscriberem, genus Georum commen- davit. Idem singulari benevolentia et favore, quibus nos omnes discipulos amplectitur, collectionem suam Georum ditissimam et elegantissimam exa- minandam mihi tradidit, unde species fere omnes in hortis botanicis cultas atque plurimas exoticas lustrandi occasio mihi est oblata. Sua opera et studio effecit, ut etiam a quibusdam externarum gentium viris Gea rarissima mihi suppeditarentur. Neque collectionibus solum me sublevavit sed consi- liis etiam; quare pergratum mihi sane est gratiam, quam jamdiu habeo maximam, illi pia mente referre. Illus igitur suasu et auctoritate monographiam Georum me paran- tem ali quoque viri clarissimi adjuverunt, quorum nomina reticere non sinit gratus animus. Cel. Professor Dr N. J. ANDERSSON, qui jam per complures annos maxima benevolentia me amplectitur, collectionem Georum, quam possidet museum Academ. scientiarum Holmiensis, transmisit; præ- terea libris, quibus mihi opus fuit, permultis ad hune prodromum conscri- bendum necessariis, suppeditandis sibi me totum devinxit. Neque minorem debeo gratiam clar. viris Cel. Professori D:ri J. LANGE et Bibliothecario D:i F. DipRICHSEN, qui me Hafniam, collectiones Georum et bibliothecas lustrandi causa, visitantem amplexi sunt singulari benevolentia et liberali- tate, cujus semper memor ero. Museum botaniees, quod Christianis floret, variosque libros inspiciendi occasio mihi oblata est a Professore D:re F. SCHÜBELER et Conservatore musei Ax. DLyrT. Prseterea gratiam ago maxi- mam viris celeberrimis, amicissimis D:ri TH. M. FRIES, Adjuncto botanices Upsaliensi, D:ri FR. ARESCHOUG, Adjuncto botanices Lundensi, D:ri C. HART- MAN, Lectori Oerebroénsi et D:ri J. E. ZETTERSTEDT, Lectori Junecopiensi, qui vel vivas plantas vel collectiones Georum mihi obtulerunt. Quum hoe tempore non possim conscribere monographiam comple- tam, quia eas solas, que in museis et herbariis Scandinaviæ inveniuntur, Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 1 2 N. Jon. SCHEUTZ, species et formas inspicere mihi licuit atque facile fingerem plures Georum species servari in museis exterorum, ad que aditus mihi non patuit, opti- mum visum est edere synopsin specierum hactenus cognitarum ?), ut hoc prodromo monographie aditus detur ad illas collectiones, quibus caruisse non possum non dolere. Multa enim in hoe prodromo esse imperfecta, in- telligo. At priusquam species nove proponuntur, utile mihi visum est jam cognitas, ssepe confusas extricare, quare spero, me hoc opus haud frustra suscepisse. Quod si opusculum non plane rejiciendum videbitur, Botanicos quibus accuratior cognitio Georum cordi cureeque est, etiam atque etiam rogatos volo, ut meo operi faveant atque monographiam v. D. olim eden- dam vel speciminibus communicatis vel consiliis sublevent! 1) Omnes species rite cognitas vidi preter G. micropetalum et G. albiflorum. Plurimas in hortis botanicis Upsaliensi, Lundensi, Hafniensi, Christianiensi vivas vidi vel ipse colui. PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLE GEORUM. 3 GENERIS DETERMINATIO. GE U M Linn. Calyeis persistentis tubus turbinatus vel hemispheericus, apice quin- que-bracteolatus, rarissime nudus; laciniæ quinque, imbricate vel valvatæ. Petala quinque, orbicularia vel obovata, laciniis calycinis sæpissime majora. Stamina plurima, sæpissime confertim pluriseriata, filamentis liberis filiformi- bus. Discus tubum ovarii vestiens, levis vel radiatim costatus. Pistilla numerosa, carpophoro brevi vel elongato clavato inserta; stylus filiformis, rectus vel geniculatus, stigmate minuto; ovulum solitarium, adscendens. Carpella parva in calyce sessilia vel toro stipitata, sicca, stylo elongato filiformi vel longe subulato recto vel geniculatim inflexo, nudo vel longe piloso terminata. Semen erectum, testa membranacea; cotyledones oblongæ; radicula infera. — Herbs, rhizomate perenni, interdum stoloniferæ. Folia radicalia conferta, lyrato-vel impari — pinnatipartita vel pinnatisecta, laciniis alternis sæpe minoribus, terminali maxima; caulina pauca, sæpissime trifida vel bracteiformia. Stipulæ basi petioli vaginantis adnate. Flores in scapo vel caule solitarii vel seepius corymbosi, majusculi, ampli, albi, flavi vel rubri. Geum Linn. gen. plant. N:o 636. Benth. et Hook. gen. plant. I pars 2 p. 619: Adamsia Fisch. Buchavea Reich. Calligeum Endl. Caryophyllastrum Ser. Caryophgllata Tournef., Lam., Ser. Laxmannia Fisch. Oreogeum Ser. Sieversia Willd. Stictogeum Ser. Stylipus Raf. Neog. (1825) ex Torr. et Gray flora of North Amer. p. 422. 4 N. Jon. SCHEUTZ, Hoe genus patres botanieorum Caryophyllatam , ab odore radicis dictam, quæ vernali tempore eruta Caryophyllum aromaticum referat, ple- rumque appellabant; quod nomen Linnæus rejecit, commotus rationibus, quas in Horto Cliffortiano et flora Lapponica explicavit. Genus servavi integrum, inclusis Sieversüs et Stylipode. Negare tamen nolo, characteres exsistere, quibus genus Georum in tria distinguatur; quoniam vero, observante Linnæo, genus dabit characterem nec character genus, auctoribus Hookero et Bentham aliisque, Sieversias et Stylipodem cum Geis conjunxi. Preeterea si Sieversiæ separantur, Stylipus distinguatur, necesse est. Unica differentia inter Geum et Sieversiam esse videtur: Geum habere stylos articulatos et Sieversiam continuos (non articulatos); quse qui- dem nota non tanti est, ut me judice ad genera distinguenda valeat. Styli sive geniculati sive continui possunt esse et pilosi et glabri, ut Sieversiæ a Geis non dignoscantur stylis plumosis. De affinitate generis, quod quæritur, hæc pauca afferre liceat. Genus Georum, quod pertinet ad familiam Rosacearum, proxime accedit ad Dryadem, Fallugiam et Cowaniam, que omnes stylis longissimis plumosis gaudent. Genus Dryadis a genere Georum modo calycis laciniis 8—9 æqualibus sine bra- cteolis differt. Hoc igitur e generibus Europæis proximum est Geo. Non dubium est, quin longius distent magisque differant Waldsteinia, Coluria, Fragaria, Potentilla et Chamerrhodus, que omnes stylis post anthesin. non elongatis dignoscuntur. Cercocarpus, quod genus, ut etiam Cowania, Dryas, Fallugia et Geum, habet stylos post anthesin elongatos ssepe plumosos vel genieulatos, defectu quoque petalorum et carpello uno recedit. Hoe modo genera distinguenda: Cowania, Carpella 5—12, stylis longissimis plumosis. Frutices, foliis eu- neatis, floribus solitariis. Geum, Carpella 00, carpophoro elevato inserta; stylis mediocribus rectis vel geniculatis, glabris, pilosis vel villosis. Herbæ, foliis pinna- tipartitis. Dryas, Carpella 00, stylis longissimis plumosis. Suffrutices, foliis simpli- cibus, scapis unifloris. Fallugia, Carpella 00, sessilia, stylis longissimis plumosis. Frutex, foliis integris vel lobatis, floribus paniculatis. GENERIS HISTORIA. Graeciam illam et Romam cultus omnis et humanitatis, qua pollent jamdiu gentes Europææ, patrias esse sedes ac velut incunabula, nemo est, PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHIÆ GEORUM. 5 quin fateatur. Botanices quoque primordia inde repetenda esse, nemo facile negabit. Quod vero ad genus Georum attinet, Græci plane nullam speciem hujus generis commemorare videntur. Inter Romanos autem, quos ut etiam Græcos constat eas in primis distinxisse plantas, que usu quodam singulari vel medico, vel oeconomico vel technico essent insignes, reperimus PLINIUM, virum diligentissimum, in sua Historia naturali commemorare Geum, quod certo est G. urbanum Lin. Deinde tota media ætate, tenebris offusa, stu- dium botaniees plane negleetum est, donee res herbaria una cum literis Grecis Romanisque renatis suos etiam cultores recentiori tempore habere coepit. Sie patres botanieorum plura distinxerunt Gea, que reformatio Linnæana vel neglexit vel oblivioni tradidit. Caspar BAURINUS, qui jure dieitur fecisse initium genera diligentius distinguendi, in Pinace theatri bo- tanici (Basileæ 1623) enumerat IX Caryophyllatas. Quum in illo opere omnes tum cognite plantæ recenseantur, in sectiones secundum externam similitudinem divise, atque omnes botanici ante Tournefortium, generum conditorem clarissimum, uterentur nominibus, que C. Bauhinus plantis im- posuerat, afferendæ visse sunt. Hee sunt Caryophyllatæ C. Bauhini: 1. Caryophyllata vulgaris (= Geum urbanum L.). 2. » vulgaris majore flore (= G. intermedium Ehrh.). 3. i hederæ terrestris. 4. " aquatica nutante flore (- G. rivale L.). 5. h; aquatica altera (= G. hybridum Wulf. 6. m alpina lutea. 7. X alpina minor; in Phytopinace et Prodromo descripta (= G. montanum L.). alpina Apii folio (= G. reptans L.). 9 alpina quinquefolia. Reliquos omnes botanicos, quos setas ante-Linnæana protulit, sin- gillatim celebrare longum est. Quare hos leviter perstrinxi, adumbrans, quot species illi cognoverint, quid in his plantis effecerint. Hee igitur sunt species Georum, quas setas ante-Linnæana distinxerat: Geum urbanum, G. rivale, G. rivale hybridum, G. intermedium, G. reptans, G. montanum, G. coccineum et G. pyrenaicum, quorum G. intermedium jam anno 1542 a FucHsto sub nomine Caryophyllate sylvestris atque G. coccineum et G. pyre- naicum a TOURNEFORTIO descripta Linnæus tamen omisit. Quibus nominibus he species salutatæ fuerint a veteribus botanieis, ex synonymis sub singulis speciebus et in indice allatis faeile perspicitur, quare eadem repetere vix opus est. LinnZ0, Species Plantarum edenti, he quinque species tantum co- gnitæ erant: Geum urbanum, G. rivale, G. virginianum, G. reptans et G. go 6 N. Jou. SCHEUTZ, montanum. Exstat tamen sexta species, que jure referatur ad Geum, quam Linnæus retulit ad Dryadem et in Plantis Camtschatchensibus descriptam Dryadem pentapetalam appellavit. Easdem sex species Murray in Systemate Vegetabilium (1774) ha- bet, qui tamen in Commentationibus Goettingensibus paulo post descripsit Geum canadense, quod deinde anno 1789 ab Arron in Horto Kewensi de- scriptum atque G. strictum est appellatum. Murray descripsit etiam Geum album sub nomine G. virginiani. Ad carpella G. virginiani glaberrima et pilosa G. albi non attendens, effecit, ut confusio harum duarum specierum orta sit. JACQUIN in Collectionibus plantarum rariorum iconum et in Horto Vindobonensi Geum strictum sub nomine Gei aleppici et Geum album ve- rum! (sed nomine Gei canadensis) primus descripsit. Alias species, ut Geum hybridum, quod WULFEN jam antea salutaverat hoc nomine, G. montanum et G. reptans figuris preestantissimis illustravit. WALTER in flora Caroliniana attulit Geum carolinianum, speciem jamdiu dubiam et omnibus saltim hodie ignotam. Referendum credo ad Geum album, quod GMELIN anno 1791 primus sub hoc nomine proposuit. Jacquin tamen jam 1773 Geum album descripserat et sub nomine Gei ca- nadensis tab. 175 delineaverat, quod synonymon etiam Gmelin affert in Linnæi Systemate Nature, a se edito. Idem Gmelin in decima tertia edi- tione Systematis Naturæ enumeravit XI species Georum, quæ omnes antea cognitæ. Revera tamen species non sunt plures quam VII, nam Geum canadense et aleppicum unam eandemque respiciunt speciem, quam Aiton appellaverat G. strictum; Geum hybridum non est nisi monstrositas Gei rivalis, quam CLUSIUS nomine Caryophyllatæ montane III jam distinxerat; Geum earolinianum videtur esse forma Gei albi, quod, ut supra dixi, cum Geo virginiano Lin. Spec. plant. ed. 2 confudisse videtur. Eodem anno, quo hoc opus Gmelini editum est, EHRHART, acutis- simus discipulus Linnei, descripsit Geum intermedium, quod Linnæus non distinxerat, licet a Fuchsio et C. Bauhino jam observatum. WILLDENOW in Species Plantarnm tom. 2 part. 2 (1797) has affert XI species: Geum virginianum, quod est G. album verum, G. strictum, G. urbanum, cujus varietas habetur G. intermedium Ehrh., G. japonicum, G. rivale, eujus varietas affertur G. hybridum, G. pyrenaicum, quam novam speciem tamen Tournefort jam distinxerat, G. atlanticum, quod DESFONTAINES in flora Atlantica primus et PoURRET postea descripserant, G. potentilloi- des, quod e genere excludendum (est enim Coluria geoides R. Brown), G. montanum, Gr. reptans et G. anemonoides, quod Linnæus jam ante annos quadraginta septem descripserat sub nomine Dryadis pentapetalze. PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLE GEORUM. 7 Jam anno 1784 THUNBERG, inter discipulos Linnæi eminentissimus, descripserat Geum japonicum, quod Willdenow deinde (1809) imperfecta deseriptione Thunbergii commotus ut novam speciem descripsit Geumque macrophyllum appellavit. Idem Thunberg anno 1806 eximiam illam speciem Geum capense descripsit in prodromo floræ Capensis. Itaque ad finem sæculi præterlapsi botanici distinxerant hæc Gea, quæ sub nominibus in hoc prodromo usitatis afferre haud alienum videtur: 1. Geum virginianum L. (licet sæpius confusum cum sequente), 2. G. album Gmel. 3. G. strictum Ait, 4. G. urbanum L., 5. G. intermedium Ehrh., 6. G. rivale L. atque hujus monstrositas G. hybridum Wulf, 7. G. japonicum Thunb., 8. G. pyrenaieum Willd., 9. G. sylvaticum Pourr. (sub nomine G. atlantici Desf), 10. G. montanum L., 11. G. reptans L., 12. G. anemo- noides Willd. PERSOON anno 1807 in Synopsi plantarum II p. 56 enumerat XV species, quarum MiCHAUX jam antea (1803) in flora Boreali-Americana distinxerat Geum geniculatum Michx. et G. radiatum Michx. Reliquæ, præter G. involucratum Juss. et G. magellanicum Commers. tum primum fere allata, sunt eædem atque illæ, quas Willdenow in Speciebus Plantarum descripserat. SMITH et SIBTHORP in floræ Græcæ prodromo (1806) descripserunt elegantissimum illud Geum coccineum, quod Tournefort jam noverat sed omnes posteri ad eum diem neglexerant. Anno 1811 WILLDENOW genus Georum in duo divisit: Geum stylis geniculatis distinctum et Sieversiam stylis continuis. Hæc genera Seringe et plurimi botanici Europæ in unum conjunxerunt. Eadem est ratio generis Stylipodis, quod Rafinesgue anno 1825 a Geis separaverat calyce ebracteo- lato. Omnes botaniei recentioris temporis, inter quos nominentur Torrey et Gray, Hooker, C. A. Meyer, existimarunt, hoc Geum (Stylipodem) vernum a ceteris non esse divellendum. LEJEUNE anno 1811 G.rubifoliwm distinxit, quod me judice est sub- species Gei intermedii Ehrh. Plantas Boreali-Americanas hoe sæculo diligentissime a botanicis investigatas esse, inter omnes constat, ut excepta Europa nulla pars orbis terrarum censeatur melius explorata. PURSH, auctor floræ Americæ septen- trionalis, anno 1814 descripsit Geum Peckü, G. agrimonioides, G. triflorum et G. ciliatum. Hoe ultimum forsitan sit idem ac G. triflorum! ErrAS FRIES in flora Hallandica anno 1817 proposuit novam spe- ciem Geum hispidum, quod jam LILJEBLAD in Svensk flora sed sub falsis nominibus attulerat. Idem Geis in horto Upsaliensi cultis maximam dicavit attentionem atque in indice seminum horti Upsaliensis Geum aurantiacum, G. ibericum et G. japonicum vel distinxit vel explicavit. Gea quoque Scan- dinaviæ et Synonyma patrum diligentissime exquisita interpretatus est. 8 N. Jou. SCHEU1Z, Preeterea initio sæculi, quo vivimus, COMMERSON distinxit G. magel- lanicum (vide supra) et Geum parviflorum. LANGSDORFFIO debemus Geum rotundifolium, MENZIEZIO Geum calthifolium, Ros. BROWNIO Geum Rossii, M. F. ADAMSIO Gewm glaciale, LAMARCKIO Geum nutans, SCHLEICHERO Geum inclinatum et WAHLBERGIO Geum hirtum. Geum strietum iterum descriptum est tamquam nova species, quam DESFONTAINES nominavit Geum heterophyl- lum et BESSER Geum intermedium. TRATTINNICK, Rosacearum monographus, annis 1823— 1824 in Sy- nodo botanica exhibuit undetriginta species Georum, "quorum circa plurima dubia et obscuritates observantur" — ex Trattinnickii preef. tomi tertii pag. VII — cirea Geum album, G. virginianum, G. nutans, G. pyrenaicum, Gr. he- deræfolium, G. Peckii, G. triflorum, G. rotundifolium, G. coccineum, G. involucratum, G. magellanicum, G. glaciale, G. geniculatum, G. agrimoni- oides, G. ciliatum et G. radiatum. Dubitare quoque videtur "de legitimitate generis’ cum Gei reptantis et totius seriei quintæ, tum etiam G. agrimo- nioidis et G. radiati. Quid Geum helveticum Schleich., G. hirsutum Miih- lenb. et G. hirtum Wahlb. sint, se "penitus ignorare" fatetur. llle primus descripsit Geum Portenschlagianum, speciem omnibus dubiam, paucis si cuiquam cognitam. — Undetriginta species Georum divisit in V sectiones, minus naturales: quarum prima Murrayana (flores numerosi parvi; aristæ hamatz; folia lyrata) continet G. urbanum L., G. canadense Murr., G. ja- ponieum Thunb., G. macrophyllum Willd., G. Portenschlagianum Tratt., G. album Gmel, G. virginianum L.; secunda Gmeliniana (flores subuntantes, aurantiaci vel rubentes; petala vix patentia, calyce non majora; aristæ pi- lose medio torte,,non hamatæ; folia lyrata) habet G. rivale L., G. inter- medium Willd., G. nutans Poir, G. pyrenaicum Willd. et G. hederæfolium Gmel.; tertia Desfontainiana (villosa, pauciflora, grandiflora, speciosa; foliis lyratis; aristæ plumosæ, non hamatæ) complectitur G. montanum L., G. at- lanticum Desf., G. Peckii Pursh, G. triflorum Pursh, G. rotundifolium Langsd., et G. coccineum Smith et Sibth.; quarta Commersoniana (scapigera, umbel- lata) exhibet Gr. involucratum Pers. et G. magellanicum Pers.; quinta Gert- neriana (pauciflora; foliis pinnatis nee lyratis) habet G. reptans L., G. anemonoides Willd., G. potentilloides Ait., G. hispidum Fr. et G. glaciale Adams. Denique enumerantur species minus cognitæ: G. geniculatum Miehx. G. agrimonioides Pursh, G. ciliatum Pursh, G. radiatum Miehx. Hae dif- usa monographia cognitio Georum non tantum promota est, quantum ex opere tam magno. sperare licuit; pauea enim nova continet, detecta an- tecessorum colligens. SPRENGEL in Systemate Vegetabilium (Pars secunda, 1825) enumerat XVI species Georum et VI Sieversiarum, quibus in parte quarta duas Siever- PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLE GEORUM. 9 sias addidit. Harum XXIV specierum nulla est nova neque Gea hocce opere melius quam antea cognita sunt. In DE CANDOLLEI Prodromi parte II p. 550—555 (Parisiis 1825) recensentur XLI species, quarum complures sunt minus cognite et nonnullæ e genere omnino excludendæ. SERINGE, qui in opere laudato confecit mono- graphiam Georum, eadem disposuit hoe modo: I. Caryophyllastrum Ser. in Mém. soc. genav. 2 p. 138 (flores ad- scendentes; calyces deflexi; styli deflexi geniculati; appendices plerumque stylo breviores). Species: G. canadense Murr., G. macrophyllum Willd., G. heterophyllum Desf, G. intermedium Bess., G. virginianum L., G. al- bum Gmel, G. Portensehlagianum Tratt., G. rubifolium Lej., G. urbanum L., G. coceineum Smith et Sibth., G. hederæfolium Gmel.; G. ranunculoi- des Ser. IL Caryophyllata Ser. in Mém. soc. genav. 2 p. 139. Cariophyllata Tournef. instit. t. 151 (flores erecti vel cernui; calyces erecti; styli deflexi genieulati, appendice stylum æquante). Species: G. rivale L., G. pyrenai- cum Ram., G. rotundifolium Langsd., G. brachypetalum Ser., G. silvaticum Pourr, G. Thomasianum Ser., G. parviflorum Commers., G. calthifolium Menz., G. capense Thunb. IIl. Oreogeum. Ser. in Mém. soc. genav. 2 p. 139. Sieversia Willd. berol mag. 1811 p. 397 (flores calycesque erecti; styli patentes non geni- culati). Species: G. reptans L., G. anemonoides Willd., G. Rossii R. Brown, G. glaciale Adams., G. montanum L., G. triflorum Pursh. IV. Stictogeum. Ser. in Mém. soc. genav. 2 p. 139 (flores adscen- dentes; calyces campanulati; carpella punctato-rugosa; styli elongati non geniculati, glabri. Species: G. Laxmanni Gærtn., G. hispidum Fries, G. Peckii Pursh. Species non satis note: G. agrimonioides Pursh, G. ciliatum Pursh, G. radiatum Michx., G. japonicum Thunb., G. geniculatum Michx., G. ma- gellanicum Commers., G. involucratum Juss., G. carolinianum Walt, G. cercocarpoides Dec. et G. dryadoides Dec. Ex his XLI speciebus sequentes e genere sunt excludendæ: G. Laxmanni Gærtn., G. cercocarpoides Dec. et G. dryadoides Dee. Nove species sunt: G. ranunculoides, G. brachypetalum, G. Thoma- sianum atque excludende, G. cercocarpoides et G. dryadoides, que tamen ex parte sunt aliorum synonyma. Seringe non omnes species optime extri- cavit, quamvis nulla melior quam hac monographia Georum usque ad illud tempus exstitisset, atque eadem omni ratione præstet monographiæ, quam Trattinnick eodem fere tempore edidit. In primis Geum strictum confundi- Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. II. 2 10 N. JoH. SCHEU1Z, tur, quod Seringe sub tribus nominibus descripsit. Neque tamen negatum velim, eos, qui multiplicato numero specierum gaudeant, in plures species divisuros esse G. strictum, quippe quod sit multo magis quam ullum hujus generis varium atque mutabile. In WALPERS Repertorio botanices systematicæ tom. Il, p. 46—48 (Lipsiæ 1843) hee novæ species afferuntur una cum observationibus de spe- ciebus quibusdam antea notis: Geum heterocarpum Bois., qui hanc maxime memorabilem plantam in Hispania detexit et anno 1838 descripsit; G. mi- cropetalum a Gasparrini detectum et descriptum; G. wmbrosum et G. inci- sum, que Du Mortier anno 1827 in florula Belgica descripserat; G. elatum Wall, G. calthifolium Smith, cujus tres formæ sunt a dilatata, B rotundi- folia, y congesta. — Pro Oreogeo et Stictogeo nomen Sieversize usurpatur; prseterea dus subdivisiones a Seringe non receptæ adhibentur, eodem modo ac hodie circumseriptæ: Stylipus Rafinesq., cujus species est G. vernum, et Calligeum Fisch. et Mey., eujus una species a BALBIS jam anno 1824 di- stineta (G. chilense Balb.) a Seringe non commemoratur, altera vero G. coc- cineum jam diu cognitum. — In eodem opere tom. V, p. 567 C. KocH de- scripsit G. grandiflorum, quod non est nisi G. eoecineum Smith et Sibth., atque p. 656 descripta est Sieversia albiflora, quam illustrissimus ille Hooker in flora Antarctica descripsit et pingendam curavit. Torrey et ASA GRAY in flora of North America species septentrio- nali-americanas optime exposuerunt, ut etiam CHAMISSO et SCHLECTENDAL in Linnæa complures Sieversias descripserunt et melius cognitas reddiderunt. LEDEBOUR species imperii Rossici, KocH Germanicas et Helveticas, GRENIER et GoDRON Gallicas optime tractarunt. Neque minore laude digni sunt Hoo- KER, H. A. WEDDEL, WaLLICH, GAY, D. Dow, ROYLE, LINDLEY aliique, qui hoe genus illustrarunt vel eximiis descriptionibus et observationibus vel figuris nitidissimis. Botanicis Rossiæ cognitio hujus generis plura debet quam fere omni- bus aliis. In Indiee tertio seminum horti Petropolitani anno 1837 F. E. L. FISCHER et E. R. TRAUTVETTER communicarunt revisionem specierum rite cognitarum, qua accuratior et subtilior cognitio harum plantarum valde augebatur. Gea a Sieversiis sejunxerunt; tredecim quidem modo species descrip- serunt, sed optime; synonyma attulerunt certa. Nullam præstantiorem de- seriptionem prius editam videre licet. Nulla specie nova proposita, cognitas extricarunt. Fischer et 'Trautvetter reviserunt has species, quas ita dispo- nebant: PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLE GEORUM. 11 I. Caryophyllastrum Ser. in Dec. prodr. 1. Carpella glaberrima. 1. G. virginianum L. 2. Carpella hirsuta. A. Petala basi cuneata. a. Receptaculum pilis longissimis hirsutum. 2. G. album Gmel. 3. G. urbanum L. b. Receptaeulum pubescens vel glabrum. Styli articulus superior hispidus. 4. G. eanadense Murr. (quod forsitan sit G. agrimonioides Pursh, C. A. Meyer, licet synonymon Murrayanum hue non pertineat), 5. G. macrophyllum Willd. B. Petala basi rotundata. 6. G. strictum Ait. IL Calligeum Fisch. et Trautv. 7. G. ehilense Balb. 8. G. coccineum Smith et Sibth. III. Caryophyllata Ser. in Dec. prodr. 1. Carpellorum capitulum intra calycem sessile vel breviter sti- pitatum, earpophoro calyce multo breviore. 9. G. silvaticum Pourr. 10. G. inclinatum Schleicher. 11. G. intermedium Ehrh. (cujus speciei polymorphæ tres afferuntur forme a Ehrhartianum, 8 rubifolium, y dubium). 2. Carpellorum capitulum demum intra calycem stipitatum, car- pophoro calycem subexcedente. 12. G. nutans Lam. 13. G. rivale L. In indice quarto semin. horti Petropolit. eodem anno edito iidem G. rivale et G. nutans species valde affines accuratius distinxerunt. Novem annis præterlapsis C. A. MEYER, vir de cognitione Georum meritissimus, in indice undecimo seminum horti Petropolitani (1846) enume- rationem specierum rite cognitarum edidit. Opus hocce eximium, quo dili- genter usi sumus quodque supplere studuimus, XXIII species rite cognitas exhibet. Sieversias vero e genere Georum (ut etiam Fischer et Trautvetter) exclusit, Geis et Sieversiis eodem modo separatis, quo Willdenow genera circumscripserat. Novæ species sunt quinque: G. spurium, quod proposui- mus formam hybridam Gei stricti, G. hyrcanum, G. Willdenowü, quod a Geo intermedio non distinguendum censemus, G. rubellum et G. pallidum, quod est species maxime memorabilis. Geum agrimonioides quoque a ple- risque vel neglectum vel confusum plenius describitur. A SIEBOLD et ZUCCARINI Geum dryadoides distinctum est, mihi G. ane- monoides. 12 N. Jong. SCHEUTZ, C. F. NYMAN in Sylloge florze Europææ ejusque Supplemento (Œre- broæ 1854—1855, 1865) enumerat in Europa habitantia tres Sieversias et undecim Gea. R. DE Vistanr et J. Pancic in Plantis Serbicis (Venetiis 1862) de- scripserunt Geum molle. ScHUR in Enumerat. plant. Transsilvaniæ (Vindob. 1866) novam pro- posuit speciem Geum robustum, quod mihi ignotum est et Geo urbano vi- detur nimis affine. Denique KERNER in Œsterreich. bot. Zeitschrift Anno 1867 descrip- sit Geum tyrolense, quod opinamur esse plantam hybridam. Eodem loco Geum pyrenaicum, G. silvaticum et G. montanum accuratius describuntur. Species Georum, que jam cognite sunt, in hac historia generis tractavimus. Synonyma omnia repetere longum est. Qui accuratius co- gnoscere velit nomina, quibus aliis alii auctores usi sunt, adeat vel syno- nyma sub singulis speciebus allata vel indicem specierum et synonymorum, quae huie prodromo adjecta est. DISTRIBUTIO GEOGRAPHICA. Genus Georum pertinet ad ea, quorum species in omnibus partibus terrarum habitant: in plurimis Æuwropæ terris; in Africa maxime oceidentali- boreali atque in Promontorio bone spei; im Asia preecipue boreali et in ea, que dieitur Minor, sed etiam in aliis regionibus, excepta media parte atque orientali—australi; in America inde ab Unalaschka et Labrador usque ad fretum Magellanicum, exceptis regno Mexicano, America centrali et Brasilia; in Australia et regionibus Antarcticis nonnullas quoque species invenimus. Quamquam distributio generis geographica tam vasta est atque hoe genus jure refertur ad illa, qua voeantur cosmopolitica, superbit tamen non ita multis speciebus. Plurimorum generum, que sunt omnium terrarum cives, numerus specierum solet esse major vel maximus; que regula ut multas habet exceptiones, sic etiam in genere, de quo quæritur. Genus Georum habet suum centrum in zona frigida et temperata frigidiore, intra tropicos tantum unam offert speciem. Ut universum genus terras frigidiores diligere videtur, ita plurime species sunt alpinæ vel subalpine; sic inter europæas Geum reptans in sum- mis alpium jugis nascitur, G. montanum, G. micropetalum, G. coccineum, G. tyrolense, G. pyrenaicum, .G. inclinatum et G. heterocarpum vel alpina vel subalpina sunt. Quin etiam nonnullæ species extra-europææ eisdem locis PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHIÆ GEORUM. 13 gaudere videntur; sic in America G. magellanicum lectum est altitudine 3500 ped. supra mare, in Asia G. hyrcanum adscendit ad altitudinem 4800— 5400 ped. Summam altitudinem supra mare vel 10,000 ped. G. Rossii attingit in Rocky Mountains Americ. Alize quoque sunt species, ut ex locis infra allatis patet, quz alpes vel montes altiores prsecipue incolunt, sed quam alte supra mare nonnulle, ut G. elatum, G. adnatum, G. ane- monoides, G. radiatum et G. Peckii adscendant, mihi ignotum est. Observandum videtur, species zone frigidæ non late distributas esse; distributionem vero plurium specierum zone temperate vastam esse, unamque speciem zonz calidæ in temperata quoque lectam. Neque hoc loco præter- eundum est, nonnullas species habitare in locis et regionibus longe distan- tibus, desiderari tamen in terris intermediis. Exempla præbent inter alia Geum hispidum in Suecia australi et in Hispania lectum; G. heterocarpum in Hispania, Asia minori et Persia habitans. Plerique hodierni botanici et geologi ejusmodi distributionem explicare volunt, vel fingendis terris jam- dudum submersis, vel ponendo, plantas quasdam tempore, quod geologi appellant glaciale, ad remotiores alpes et terras transmigrasse. Nonne autem proventum plante cujusdam in remotis terris et exsilium regionum interja- centium rectius explices, efficiens, hane vel illam plantam in terris mediis emortuam evanuisse? Utcumque est, nos his rationibus ducti non possumus non statuere plura cujusvis speciei individua originaria et haud seio an plu- res patrias. Est, quod numerum specierum afferamus, que ad unamquamque par- tem orbis terrarum pertinent vel unieuique sunt proprie vel duabus vel tri- bus partibus orbis terrarum sunt communes: In Europa reperiuntur: 17 (21) species, quarum he sunt Europe propriæ: Geum hispidum, G. molle, G. pyrenaicum, G. inclinatum, G. pal- lidum, G. rubifolium, G. micropetalum, G. reptans, G. montanum (G. ty- rolense et minus cognita G. robustum, G. umbrosum et G. incisum). In Asta 15 species, quarum huic parti orbis terrarum proprie: G. ibericum, G. hyrcanum, G. elatum et G. adnatum. In Africa 2 species, quarum G. capense est huic parti orbis terrarum proprium. In America 22 species, quarum hz sunt Americæ septentrionali pro- prie: G. album, G. agrimonioides, G. virginianum, G. oregonense, G. geni- culatum, G. triflorum, G. radiatum, G. Peckü, G. calthifolium, G. vernum, quarum vero Ameriez australi proprie: G. parviflorum, G. involucratum, G. chilense, G. aurantiacum (?). € IBRARY 14 N. JOH. SCHEUTZ, In Australia 2 (3) species, quarum Geum albiflorum Australie est proprium. Horum 4 patria est ignota: Ge nutantis, G. brachypetali, G. rubella, (G. Portenschlagiani). Europe, Asiz et Americe sunt communia: G. strictum, G. japoni- cum, G. rivale. Heee sunt Europe et Asiæ communia: G. heterocarpum, G. coccine- um, G. urbanum, G. intermedium. Europee et Africæ est commune: G. atlanticum. Asiz et Americæ sunt communia: G. Rossii, G. anemonoides, G. glaciale, G. rotundifolium. Ameriez et Australie sunt communia: G. magellanicum, G. strictum (?). Ex omnibus Geis distributio geographica Ge rivalis et G. stricti est vastissima; e reliquis G. japonicum, G. urbanum et G. magellanicum latius dispersa videntur quam cetera. Si distributionem geographicam intra Europam respexerimus, inveni- emus, Hispaniam et Lusitaniam offerre 7 species, Galliam 8, Bataviam et Belgium 3 (5), Britanniam 3, Scandinaviam 5, Germaniam et Helvetiam 7, Austriam eum Galizia 5, Transsilvaniam 8, Hungariam, Croatiam et Ba- natum 4, Italiam 6, Turciam et Graeciam 6, Rossiam europæam 5. Turcia europea cum Grecia et Asia minore sibi vindicant Geum coccineum, cui valde affine G. chilense exstat in America australi G. mi- cropetalum adhue in Italia tantum est indagatum. Geum molle unico loco Serbie lectum; G. robustum in Transsilvania atque G. tyrolense in Tyroli, species dubiæ, inventa sunt. G. montanum, G. reptans, G. pyrenaicum et G. inclinatum Alpes Europe australis vel mediæ incolunt. In tota Africa interiori nulla species lecta est; unum ex iis duobus in Africa lectis, G. sdl- vaticum dico, extra regionem mediterraneam Galliæ, Hispaniam et Lusita- niam non lectum est. G. capense tantum e Promontorio bone spei reporta- tum. Indis orientali propria videntur G. adnatum et G. elatum, que tan- tum in alpibus Himalaya et Gossain than occurrunt. Tertia quoque species (G. urbanum) in India lectum. In omni imperio Rossico (europzo, asiatico et americano) tantum 11 species indicantur a Ledebour. In Japonia alibi- que lectum est G. japonicum — sed in China nulla species hactenus. In Kamtschatka et vicina Unalaschka reperire licet G. japonicum, G. strictum, G. Rossii, G. anemonoides, G. glaciale et G. rotundifolium. Si Americanas species respicimus, Torrey et Gray in flora of North America 13 (unamque dubiam) species ibidem lectas indicant. In Manual of the Botany of the North United States Asa Gray 9 species recepit. In Chlori Andina WED- PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLE GEORUM. 15 DEL duo affert, Geum magellanicum et G. parviflorum. Hooker in flora Antarctica tres descripsit species: G. albiflorum, G. magellanicum et G. in- volucratum (= G. parviflorum Hook), quorum G. albiflorum nisi in insulis Lord Aucklandii non legitur. Patet igitur, species antarcticas esse paucio- res quam arcticas, quarum numerus multiplo major est. Denique numero specierum, qu in hemisphærio boreali et australi habitant, comparato, invenimus, 36 (40) species in boreali lectas esse, tan- tum 6 (8) in australi, nec plures utrique hemisphærio esse communes quam G. magellanicum, quo nulla specierum hemispheerii australis latius distributa est, (et forsitan G. strietum). Probabile etiam videtur, illas 4 species, qua- rum patriam ignoramus, in boreali hemispheerii leetas esse. De universa distributione geographica Rosacearum videas disserta- tionem, quam M. L. FRANKENHEIM in Linnea XVII (1843), p. 549—566 proposuit. GEORUM USUS. Duo precipue sunt Gea, quibus medici usi sunt, Geum urbanum et G. rivale. Utriusque vires sunt adstringentes, tonicæ. Radix G. urbani ex oleo æthereo, principio adstringente, amaro, gummoso et resinoso vim repetit roborantem simul et stimulantem, utramque moderatam quidem, sed qualem ægri sensibiliores desiderant. G. rivalis radix amara et adstringens aro- mate caret. Præter G. urbanum et G. rivale in usu sunt duo alia Gea. Geum virginianum medicis transatlanticis Caryophyllatæ loco est. Radicem Ge montani alpicole rustici pro G. urbano adhibere dicuntur. Horum tamen laus multo minor quam G. urbani et G. rivalis. Jam Patres Botanicorum virtutes Georum celebrant, ut HIERONYMUS Bock, vulgo appellatus TRAGUS, in Newen Kreuterbuch (1546). "Von Be- nedieten-Wurzel" (Herba benedicta: BRUNFELS) quod est nostrum Geum ur- banum, p. 51—52 et "Von Waldbenedict”, quod est Geum rivale, p. 412 auctor agit. THEOD. TABERNJEMONTANUS, discipulus Tragi, seripsit New vol- kommen Kräuterbuch. In cap. XVI libri primi copiose disputatur " Von den Benedieten-Kreutern", quarum quatuor genera esse dicuntur, sed unum modo in medicina adbibitum. Figure trium Caryophyllatarum addite sunt, prima Geum urbanum, secunda G. montanum exprimens. Tertiam rite determinare non potui. Caryophyllate valde laudantur et putantur utiles in compluribus morbis. Eadem ab aliis botanicis et medicis ante Linnæum repetita forsan non opus sit hoe loco afferre. 16 N. Jon. SCHEUTZ, LIiNNÆUS, usum plantarum semper diligentissime observans, in flora Suecica dieit, radicem Ge urban? pellere exanthemata, cerevisiam fragran- tiorem facere et ab acescentia conservare. RETZIUS vero, cujus flora ceco- nomiea Sueciæ optimo jure putatur egregia, negat, eam ab acescentia cere- visiam conservare posse. In Actis Reg. Societ. Medic. Hafniensis 1781, Vol. I leguntur Ob- servationes circa radieis Gei urbani seu Caryophyllate vires in febribus precipue intermittentibus aliisque morbis, institute a Rup. BUCHHAVE, a quo radix inter suecedanea corticis Chinæ seu Peruviani maxime laudatur. Preside C. P. THUNBERG dissertatio botanico-medica de Geo urbano anno 1827 edita est a M. G. Linderholm; ex qua dissertatione colligitur, radicem Gei urbani præcipue efficacem esse in febribus intermittentibus, nervosis et putridis, in dysenteria vel potius in diarrhoea, in amenorrhoa et inde orta chlorosi, in cachexiis variis, in arthritide, in tussi convulsiva. Sed ejus vis pendet magna ex parte, quo tempore sit collecta et quomodo ex- siccata; quo enim major illius odor et sapor, eo majorem quoque vim exserit. Analysin chemicam radicis Gei urbani TROMSDORFF attulit in neues Journ. f d. Pharm. Il: 1. Leipzig 1818. PETRUS Kam, discipulus Linnei, narravit, Canadenses in America boreali uti radice Gei rivalis loco corticis Chine in febribus intermittentibus. Qua narratione commotus P. J. BERGIUS instituit plurima experimenta prae- fica, quæ in Actis Academ. Holmiensis (1757, p. 118—139) relata probant, radicem Gei rivalis sæpe curasse febres intermittentes, etiam protractas, ssepe diarrheeas chronicas, ssepe quoque heemorrhagias. Sed quum adhibita radix interdum non curet febres intermittentes, usum corticis Chine tollere non potuit; quare nostris temporibus usus fere desiit. GLEDITSCH habet Geum rivale in numero earum plantarum, que sint aptæ ad coria conficienda; sed credo, paucos agricolas, si quemquam, ra- dicibus hujus plantæ effodiendis sua prata depravare velle. CLAVIS SYNOPTICA SECTIONUM. Donec exiguus numerus specierum cognitus erat, in sectiones dividere cognitas species non opus erat; crescente vero numero specierum, botanici finxerunt omnino necessarium assumere sectiones quasdam, quo clarior fieret conspectus et descriptio specierum. Alii alias ingressi sunt vias ad species in sectiones distribuendas; nos clarissimos illos SERINGE et MEYER, generis monographos, mutatis mutandis secuti sumus. Num divisio nostra sit na- PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLÆ GEORUM. 17 tur conveniens ideoque servanda, alii dijudicent. In octo sectiones divisi- mus genus, cujus species jam describentur. L Calyx quinque-bracteolatus. A. « Styli articulati. a. Carpellorum arista recta. I. ORTHOSTYLUS. — 1. G. heterocarpwm Boiss. b. Carpellorum arista uneinata. * Calycis laciniæ in flore reflexæ. IL CaLLIGEUM. Styli articuli :equilongi. — 2. G. chilense Balb. 3. G. coccineum Smith et Sibth. III. CaRYOPHYLLASTRUM. Styli articulus superior in- feriori distinete brevior. — 4. G. virginiannm Linn. 5. G. album Gmel. 6. G. urbanum Linn. 7. @. ibericum Bess. 8. G. molle Vis. 9. G. hispidum Fr. 10. G. strictum Ait. 11. G. au- rantiacum Fr. 12. G. japonicum Thunb. 13. G. Agrimonioides C. A. Mey. 14. G. hyrcanum C. A. M. 15. G. magellanicum Commers. 16. G. involucratum Juss. 17. G. parviflorum Comm. ** Calycis laciniæ in flore erecto-patule. a. Carpophorum longe stipitatum. IV. CARYOPHYLLATA. — 18. G. nutans (Lam.). 19. G. rivale Linn. 20. G. pallidum C. A. M. 21. G. geniculatum Michx. B. Carpophorum sessile vel breviter stipitatum. V. PSsEUDO-CARYOPHYLLATA. Styli artieulus iuferior articulum superiorem superans. — 22. G. bra- chypetalum Ser. 23. G. intermedium (Ehrh.). 24. G. rubellum C. A. M. VI. PsEUDO-SIEVERSIA. Styli articulus inferior arti- culum superiorem æquans. — 25. G. silvaticum Pourr. 26. G. pyrenaicum W. 27. G. inch- natum Schleich. 28. G. capense Thunb. B. Styli continut, non articulati. VIT. SIEVERSIA. — Spec. 29—42. Vide p. 50. Il. Calyx ebracteolatus. VIII. SıyLıpus. — 43. G. vernum. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Se. Ups. Ser. III. 3 18 N. JOH. SCHEUTZ, Secr. I. ORTHOSTYLUS Fisch. et Mey. Ind. semin. hort. Petropol. XI:mus, p. 50. Calyx quinque-bracteolatus, erectus. Carpophorum subpunctiforme, stipite elongato, exserto suffultum. Styli recti, articulati: artieulo inferiore recto (apice non uncinato), sub apice retrorsum hispido, superiore caduco. Flores suberecti, subcampanulati, albo-lutescentes. Sectio maxime insignis, a reliquis distinctissima cum carpophori tum stylo- rum natura aliisque notis, includens unam speciem valde memorabilem: G. hetero- carpum. 1. GEUM HETEROCARPUM Boiss. foliis radicalibus interrupte-pinnatiparti- tis; foliis caulinis inferioribus tripartitis, superioribus suborbiculatis; pe- talis albidis obovato-rotundatis, calyce duplo brevioribus; carpellis pau- cis hirtis in capitulum stellatum aggregatis, uno ad basin earpophori satis elongati in calyce plerumque reliquo sessili; styli articulo supe- riore hispidulo, arista seu articulo inferiore vix breviore, caduco; car- pophoro longe stipitato, glabro. Syn. G. heterocarpum Boiss. Voy. bot. dans le midi de l'Espagne p. 201 et tab. 58. Boiss. Bibl. univ. de Généve Fevr. 1838 (sec. Walpers Repert. botan. system. 2, p. 46). — C. A. Meyer Ind. sem. horti Petropol. XI (1846) p. 50. — Nym. Syll. fl. Europ., p: 273. G. umbroswn Boiss. Voy. bot. dans le midi de l'Espagne p. 728. Habit. in Hispanie rupestribus umbrosis, ut Sierra de Sagra "sous les buis- sons de Juniperus Sabina" (E. BovRGEAU plant. d'Espagne in herbb. J. LANGE et C. HARTMAN); Sierra Tejeda et Nevada (Warr. Repert.); in Murcia et Granada (Nw. Syll); in Asia minori, ut Cadmus in Caria (Boss. in herb. mus. Hafniens.) et Ballouklardon prope Elmalu (E. BourGEAU pl. Lyciæ in herb. LANGE); in Persia boreali, ut Elbrus prope Derbend (Korschy in herbb. Frızsır et mus. Holm.), in al- pinis Manschura versus Baalbeck altit. 6000 ped. (herb. WAHLENB. et mus. Holm.). In summis montis Tschosch Dagh alt. 7000 ped. (TuHrop. KorscHY in herbb. mus. Holmiens. et WAHLENB.). — Exstat etiam in herb. Friesii specimen a GRENIER 1853 communicatum, eui adscripsit "une des plus rares et curieuses plantes, trouvées no- vellement en France” (v. v.). Pilosum. Radix crassa, fibrosa. Caules graciles, pilosi, basi adscendentes, erecti, pedales et ultra, inferne aphylli, superne foliosi atque dichotomi, cum pedun- culo in dichotomia. Rami iterum dichotomi, patenter divarieati. Folia omnia pilosa; radicalia interrupte pinnatipartita; laciniæ ovate, lobulato-incisæ; lacinia terminalis maxima, 1—2 poll. lata, reniformi-cordata, 5—7 loba, lobulis obtusis, inciso-erenatis ; PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLE GEORUM. 19 laciniæ laterales multo minores, utrinque 5 v. 6 inæquales; folia eaulina in media parte eaulis duo, subopposita, 3—5 partita; folia ad basin ramorum opposita, sessilia, suborbieulata. Stipule ovate, laciniato-serratæ vel acute incisæ. Peduneuli post an- thesin elongati, 1—2 pollices longi, divarieati. Flores subeampanulati, subaperti, erecti. Calyx persistens, erectus præsertim in fructu, tubo elongato et obconico. Pe- tala obovato-rotundata, albo-lutescentia, ealyce fere duplo breviora. Antheræ luteæ. Carpophorum longe stipitatum, glabrum. Carpella pauea (7—10) hirta vel pubescen- tia, in aristam reetam apice retrorsum hispidam desinentia. Styli retrorsum scabri; appendix antheseos fine decidua, stylo subbrevior, adpresse hirsuta, pilis basilaribus longioribus. Fructus igitur maturi a fructibus reliquorum Georum multum differunt. Obs. Maxime insigne Geum, eum nullo confundendum, primo obtutu potius Geranium quoddam v. e. G. silvatieum floribus minutis albidis referens. — Borsster ante triginta annos detexit. — Specimina in Caria lecta a Boissier dicuntur differre ab hispanicis, earpellis omnibus in capitulum aggregatis nee uno ad basin carpophori reliquo. Hac forma observata, Boissier in Voy. botan. dans le midi de l'Espagne, p. 128 aliud nomen (6G. umbrosum) huie plant: attribuit, quod tamen negligendum est, quia exstat Geum a Du Mortier in fl. Belgie. prodr. G. umbrosum dictum atque no- men heterocarpi preterea est aptissimum. — Specimina in Lycia lecta hispanicis iis- que, qu: culta vidi, similia sunt. SECT. U. CALLIGEUM Fisch. et Mey. Ind. sem. hort. Petropol. XI:mus, p. 32. Calyx quinquebraeteolatus. Carpophorum sessile. Styli annulato- geniculati, articulati: artieulo inferiore in fruetu apice hamato, longitudine articuli superioris decidui. Flores speciosi, erecti, coccinei vel rubri vel crocei, petalis calyce multo longioribus. Ad Calligeum, quod proxime accedit ad Caryophyllastrum, modo duz species pertinent, una G. chilense americana, altera G. coceineum europæo-asiatica. 2. GEUM CHILENSE Balb. foliis radicalibus interrupte-pinnatipartitis , foliis caulinis inferioribus pinnatipartitis, superioribus tripartitis; petalis cocci- neis rubrisve suborbieulatis, emarginatis, calyce multo longioribus; car- pellis pilosissimis; styli articulo superiore hispido, inferiorem æquante; carpophoro pilosissimo sessili. Syn. G. chilense Bars. in litteris 1824? (ex Meyer). Hook. et ARN. in Hook. Bot. Mise. 3, p. 305 (ex Walpers Repert.). — Fisch. et Trautv. Ind. sem. h. Petrop. III, p. 36 et in LrsNzA XII, p. 96. — Meyer |. c., p. 34. — Gay Hist. fisic. y polit. de Chili 2, p. 276. G. coccineum Lindl. Bot. Reg. tab. 1088 (excl. syn. fl. Gree.). G. Quellyon Sweet Brit. flow. gard. 3, t. 292. G. elegans Popp. plant. exs., N:o 700. 20 N. Jon. SCHEU1Z, Habit. in Chili, ut in provincia Valdivia in pratis arenosis (W. LECHLER, pl. exs. chilens. in herbb. mus. Holm. et Bryrri). Cultum adest in herb. FRIES (v. s.). Pubeseenti-pilosum. Caulis inferne hispidus, superne hirtus scaberque, strie- tus, teres, 5—18 poll. altus, minus ramosus quam in G. coccineo. Folia radicalia interrupte-pinnatipartita, crenata; lacinia terminalis rotundata, 3—5 lobulata vel tri- fida, multoties major quam laciniæ laterales, valde inæquales, utrinque sex-decem, suborbieulatæ; folia caulina pinnatipartita, lobis augustis partitis, duo vel tria eujus- que eaulis, lacinia terminalis tripartita. Flores erecti, speciosi, paniculati. Calyx de- flexus, petalis brevior. Petala subrotunda, integra, una cum filamentis et stylis in- tense coccinea. Carpophorum sessile, conicum hirsutissimum. Carpella pilis longis, mollibus tecta, in eapitulum depressum vel hemisphæricum disposita. Variat: p grandiflorum Lindl. Bot. Reg., t. 1348; floribus duplo majoribus. Varietas in hortis cultura orta. Obs. 1. Species C. coccineo maxime affinis ideoque cum hoe sæpius confusa. Obs. 2. Petala intense crocea (bot. reg., t. 1088), coccinea (flow. gard.) vel rubra variant, nune suborbiculata, nune obovato-suborbiculata. 3. GEUM COCCINEUM Smith. et Sibth. foliis radicalibus lyrato-pinnati- partitis, caulinis basi cuneatis, inciso-lobatis vel tripartitis; petalis rubro-aurantiacis suborbiculatis, retusis vel subreniformibus, calyce multo majoribus; carpellis piloso-hirsutis; styli articulo superiore glabro, inferiorem fere superante; carpophoro pilosissimo sessili. Syn. G. coccineum Smith et Sibth. Fl. Grae., t. 485 ex Prodr. 1, p. 354. — Dee. Prodr. 2, p. 551. — Fisch. et Mey. Ind. sem. h. Petrop. III, p. 37 et in Linn. XII, p. 97. — Nym. Syll. fl. Europ., p. 273. — Griseb. Fl. Rumel. et Bithyn. p. 96. — Mey. Ind. sem. hort. Petropol. XI, p. 32. G. Sadleri Frivaldszki in Flora XVIII, p. 332. G. macedonicum Krivald. Iter 2, p. 166 ex Griseb. G. grandiflorum ©. Koch in Linn. XIX, p. 43 (ex Meyero, qui specimina authentica comparavit) — Walp. Rep. bot. 5, p. 657. Caryophyllata orientalis, flore magno coccineo. Tourn. Cor. 20 (ex Trattin. Rosae. Monogr. 3, p. 132). Habit. in Asia minori, ut in Olympo; in Rumelia, Bithynia et Macedonia (see. Frivald. et Griseb.. In regione alpina crescit. — specimina vidi e compluri- bus hortis, quum hoe Geum,. quod jure appellatur Calligeum, haud raro cultum in- veniatur (v. v.). Pubescenti-pilosum, pedale et ultra, floribus coccineis vel reetius rubro-aurantia- cis insigne. Caulis erectus, ramosus, ramis pedunculisque elongatis, apice bi-triflo- rus. Folia radicalia lyrato-pinnatipartita, lacini: inferiores inæquales utrinque septem- decim, parvæ, terminalis maxima, reniformis, rotundata, triloba; omnes laciniæ pro- funde dentate; folia caulina ovata, triloba, minora, basi attenuata. Stipulæ petiolo longiores, dentatz. Flores erecti, speciosi, paniculati. Calyx petalis multo brevior, PRODROMUS MoNoGRAPHUE GEORUM. 21 post anthesin reflexus. Petala suborbiculata, apice retusa, rubro-aurantiaea. Carpo- phorum sessile, pilosum. Filamenta et antheræ croeea. Carpella piloso-hirsutissima, arista uncinata glabra terminata, — Altius et magis ramosum quam G. chilense. Obs. 1. Num sit species a G. chilensi re vera distineta, in dubium vocari po- test; in presenti vix distinguere valeo, nisi styli articulo superiore hispido in G. chi- lensi, glaberrimo in G. coccineo. Quum vero utramque vivam collatam examinare non lieuerit, dijudicare non audeo, utrum una alterius sit varietas, in America enata, necne. — A G. urbano, proxime ad quod Seriuge in Dec. Prodr. collocavit, abunde differt et primo adspectu facillime distinguendum. Obs. 2. €. Koch dieit, suum Gewn (Caryophyllastrum) grandiflorum proxime accedere ad G. maerophyllum Willd. = nostrum G. japonicum. Descriptio Kochii etiam aliquantulum recedit a G. coccineo; sie caules simplicissimi et petala aurea G. grandiflori dieuntur; sed ex Meyero, qui specimina authentica eomparavit, G. grandi- florum referendum ad G. coecineum. Sect. II. CARYOPHYLLASTRUM Seringe in Mém. soc. phys. genay. 2, p. 138. Calyx quinquebracteolatus. Carpophorum sessile vel subsessile. Styli annulato-genieulati, artieulati: articulo inferiore in fruetu persistente apice hamato, longitudine articulum superiorem deciduum multiplo excedente. Flo- res plani (non eampanulati), parvi vel mediocres, albi vel flavi. Sectio diffieillima, plurimas complectens species. Gewm virginianum a cete- ris certissime distinguitur earpophoro et carpellis glaberrimis, ornatur præterea pe- talis albis, que modo in tribus vel quatuor aliis speciebus Caryophyllastri, G. a/bo, G. parvifloro, G. involucrato et plerumque in G. Agrimonioide occurrunt. Reliqua Caryophyllastra petalis flavis ornantur. Omnium maxime proteum est G. strictum, quod tamen petalorum forma facile distinguitur. Etiam G. wrbanum apud exteros variare videtur, quamvis in Scandinavia videatur semper constans. Huie sunt affinia G. ibericum, G. oregonense, G. robustum et mea quidem sententia G. molle. G. hi- spidum a G. stricto: facile distinguitur, cui G. japonicum, G. aurantiacum et G. ma- gellanicum forsitan propius aecedunt, notis tamen allatis dignoscenda. G. hyrcanum ad G. coccineum accedere dicitur. G. parviflorum et G. involucratum, species Ca- ryophyllastri minim, a reliquis Caryophyllastris valde differunt atque habitu G. albi- florum in memoriam quodammodo revocant. — G. Portenschlagianum inter species mi- nus cognitas describetur. 4. GEUM VIRGINIANUM Linn. foliis radiealibus vel cordato-reniformibus, sublobatis vel pinnatipartitis; folis. caulinis inferioribus pinnatipartitis varieque dissectis, superioribus tripartitis; petalis albis oblongis, basi cuneatis, calyce multo brevioribus; carpellis numerosissimis glaberri- D» N. Jon. SCHEUIZ, mis; styli artieulo inferiore artieulum superiorem hispidulum multiplo excedente; carpophoro glaberrimo sessili. Syn. G. virginianum Linn. Spec. plant., 2, p. 716 (excl. plant. Sibir. ex Fisch. et Mey.). — Willd. Spec. plant. 2, p. 1113 (excl. syn. Murr. et ” Trattin. Rosac. Monogr. 3, p. 118. — Fisch. et Trautv. Ind. sem. h. Petrop. III, p. 33 et in Linn. XII, p. 93. — Meyer Ind. sem. hort. Petrop. XI, p. 24. — A. Gray Man. of the Botany of the North Amer. Unit. Stat., p. 152. seminibus pilosis"). — 7. laciniatum Murr. Comment. Goctt. V, p. 30, t. 2. 1. heterophyllum Desf. h. Paris., p. 409 (ex Fisch. et Mey.) Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 550. G. hirsutum Mühlenb. in Link. hort. Berol. (ex Fries, cujus in herb. etiam sub hoe nomiue adest; in horto quoque Lundensi sub hoe nomine olim cultum fuit). Caryophyllata alba Mónch sec. Stud. nom. Caryophyllata virginiana Lam. sec. Steud. — Herm. hort. Lugd. batav. Catal. p. 212, sed figura in Herm. parad. batav., p. 111 potius ad album referenda. Habit. in America septentrionali ut in Virginia (loe. Linnæan.), Cambridge (E. TUCKERMAN in herb. Fries). Ad Novam Eboracum (GRAY ex MEYER). America boreal. (herb. Swartz et RAVN in mus. Hafniens.). Ut loca natalia prseterea affe- renda: Council Grove, Missouri (A. Gray pl. Fendler. Novi-Mexic.); Western Texas (Torr. et Gray Bot. repert. p. 8. — In herbb. interdum adest sub nomine Gei albi; sic in herb. Holmiensi adest specimen inscriptum "Geum album Lin. Amer. septentr. 1833 Asa Gray”, quod ad hane specimen haud dubie pertinet. In hortis botanicis vul- gatum (v. v.). ? , Herba piloso-hirsutissima, pedalis et ultra. Caulis robustus, erectus, ramo- sus, ramis rigidis et robustis. Folia radicalia primaria simplieia magnaque, cordato- reniformia, sublobata, rarius tripartita; folia alia radicalia pinnatipartita, laciniis varie disseetis. Folia eaulina inferiora pinnatipartita varieque dissecta, superiora tripartita; laciniis latis, acutis acuminatisve. Stipulæ ovate, dentatæ, minores. Peduneuli flori- feri et fructiferi breves, rigidi. Flores ut in Geo albo albidi, parvi, declinati. Petala oblonga. Capitulum carpellorum glaberrimum, sphæricum. Carpophorum sessile, gla- berrimum. Carpella plurima, glaberrima, arista paulo breviore apice uncinata ter- minata. Obs. 1. Mira apud auctores confusio specierum G. virginiani et G. albi, que tamen plerumque primo intuitu distinguendæ. Ante Willdenowium complures G. vir- ginianum et album in unam speciem conjunxerunt. — Planta, quam Linnæus in Spec. plant. ed. 1, p. 500 descripsit, est dubia, quare ut synonymon supra non attuli; eam vero in Spee. plant. ed. 2, p. 716 descriptam in nostram quadrare apparet. Obs. 2. Torrey et Gray in Flora of North Amer. 1, p. 421 observant: ” We are not aquainted with any white-flowered American species hat a globrous recep- tacle. Perhaps the G. virginianum of Fischer et Meyer (= G. heterophyllum Desf.) is not a native of this county. It certainly is not the original Linnean plant.” Sed deinde in Manual of the Botany of the North Americ. Unit. Stat. A. Gray observat de hae planta: "Clearly different from the least” (= G. album). Propromus MONOGRAPHLÆ GEORUM. 23 5. GEUM ALBUM Gmel. foliis radicalibus simplicibus vel tripartito-ternatis; foliis eaulinis tripartitis vel trifidis; petalis albis, oblongis, calycem sub- æquantibus; carpellis numerosissimis pubescentibus; styli articulo infe- riore longitudine carpellum subduplo, articulum superiorem hirtum qua- druplo excedente; carpophoro densissime piloso, sessili. Syn. G. album Gmel. Syst. nat. 2, p. 861. — Trattin. Monogr. Rosae. 3, p. 117. — Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 550? Fischer et Trautv. Iud. sem. h. Petrop. III, p. 34 et in Linn. XII, p. 93. — Meyer Ind. sem. hort. Petrop. XI, p. 30. — A. Gray Man. of the Botany of the North Amer. Unit. Stat., p. 152. 7. canadense Jacq. hort. Viud. 2, p. 82, tab. 175 (non Murr.). G. virginianum Murr. Comm. Gœtt. V, p. 32, t. 3 (excl. syn. Linn. spec. plant., ed. 2). — Hook. Fl. Bor. Amer. 1, p. 175. — Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 550. — Tor. et Gray Flor. of North Amer. 1, p. 421 (excl. syn. G. laciniati Murr.). Habit. in America septentrionali, ut Cambridge (TucKERMAN in herb. FRIES), Ohio (= G. virginianum Torr. et Gray, A. GRAY in herb. Fries); sub nomine G. virgi- niani ex Amer. sept. (TORREY in herb. CassTROMIL, nune mus. Holmiens.); Pennsylvania (herb. WAHLENBERGII); Pittsburg (herb. Holmiens.); New-York (Focx in herb. LIEBMANNI sub nomine G. virginiani); in Connecticut Kreps legit (herb. mus. Hafniens.) (v. v.). Variat folis caulinis simplieibus indivisis, sublobatis, dentatis. — Habit. in America septentrionali. Planta gracilis, pube brevi tecta pilisque elongatis raris adspersa, plerumque patenter ramosa, bi-vel tripedalis. Caules ramique graciles. Folia radicalia sim- plicia vel tripartito-ternata; caulina plerumque tripartita, vel basin usque trisecta, la- ciniæ oblongo-cuneatæ, acuminate, rhombeæ vel rhombeo-oblongæ; infima interdum basin versus lacinula una alterave instrueta. Stipulæ oblongo-cuneate , plerumque mi- nores quam in Geo urbano. Flores parvi albidi, plerumque erecti. Petala alba, oblonga. Carpophorum hirsutissimum, sessile. Carpella basi pube adpressa tecta, apice pilis raris patulis hirtula. Obs. 1l. Geo urbano valde affine, observantibus tamen Fischer et Meyer ab eo differt eaulis plerumque ramosioris pube brevi, foliorum caulinorum lobis augustio- ribus, stipulis plerumque cuneatis, petalis oblongis albidis, styli artieulo superiore semper hispido. Obs. 9. Diagnosis C. G. GwELINI in System. nat. hee est: floribus ereetis, seminibus aristæque uncino pilosis, foliis pinnatis; quod afferre utile duxi, quum Gmelin (1791) primus hane plantam appellaverit G. album, quod Jacquin jam antea (1713) distinxerat sub nomine G. canadensis. Obs. 3. Ad hoc potissimum referendum Geum, omnibus jam ignotum, G. ca- voliniamum Walt. Flor. Carol, p. 150; "caule decumbente subramoso, foliis radica- libus obtusis serratis subpinnatis, lobo terminali magno, lateralibus minimis, foliis caulinis ovato-laneeolatis serratis hirsutis subpetiolatis, floribus erectis albis, petalis ovatis, receptaculo piloso. In Carolina." — Specimen hujus forme satis imperfectum in herb. Holmiensi ad hane speciem pertinere videtur. 24 N. Jou. SCHEU1Z, Obs. 4 A Gray in Man. of the Botany of the North Amer. Unit. Stat. (1867) observat, G. album probabile esse formam albifloram Gei urbani. — G. album et G. urbanum ut species analogas potius considerarem. 6. GEUM URBANUM Linn. foliis radicalibus pinnatipartitis; foliis caulinis tripartitis; petalis flavis obovato-elliptieis vel oblongis calycem subæquan- tibus; carpellis numerosissimis pilosis, arista biarticulata glabra; styli articulo inferiore longitudine carpellum subduplo, articulum superiorem hispidum quater superante; carpophoro densissime piloso sessili. Syn. G. urbanum Linn. Spec. plant. ed. 1, p. 501, ed. 2, p. 716; Fl. Suec. ed. 2, n. 460. — Willd. Sp. pl. 2, p. 1113. — Murr. Comm. Goett., p. 33, t. IV. — Trattin. Rosae. Monogr. 3, p. 112. — Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 551. — Engl. bot. t. 1400. Flor. Dan. t. 672. Svensk bot. t. 94 multæque aliz figure (Pritzel enumerat septendecim). — Koch Syn. fl. Germ. et Helvet. ed. 3, p. 182. — Gren. et Godr. Fl. de France 1, p. 519. — Wahlenb. Fl. Suec., p. 342. — Ledeb. Fl. Ross. 2, p. 21. — Fischer et Trautv. Ind. sem. h. Petrop. LIL, p. 34 et in Linn. XII, p. 94. — Meyer Ind. sem. hort. Petrop. XI, p. 31. — Lobel. ic. 693 et obs. 396 ic. (sec. Gren. et Godr.). Caryophyllata vulgaris Bauh. Pin. 321. Caryophyllata Dod. Pempt. 137. Caryophyllata urbana Scop. Cam. 1, p. 364. Caryophyllata officinalis Mónch Meth. 660. Geum caucasicum Hort. ex Meyer. 4 G. intermedium Baumg. Fl. Transsylv. 2, p. 69 (sec. Linn. Litteraturbl. XII, p. 94). 2G. hederwfolium Gmel. (sec. Spreng. Syst. veget. 2, p. 542). Habit. in omni Europa, exceptis Græcia et Rossia septentrionali (specc. Scand., Gall., Hispan., Italie., Transsylvan. et Turcica vidi) atque in Asia, ut in Sibiria Ura- lensi (LEDEB. fl. Ross.) et in regionibus Caucasicis; in Himalaya, bor. occ. reg. temp. alt. 5000—8000 ped. (Hook. fil. et THOMSON in herb. FRIES) (v. v.). Hee in Europa pervulgata et ab antiquissimis temporibus (inter plantas a Plinio commemoratas occurrit) cognita planta sub variis formis invenitur, quarum pri- maris sunt: B) orientale FENZL Cat. bh. Vindob. Glabrescens. Stipulis maximis foliaceis, laciniatis. Foliis caulinis tripartitis, lobis obovatis. — Spece. in horto Upsal. culta vidi. y) simplicifolium, foliis omnibus simplicibus trifidisve. MEYER I. e., p- 31. 0) grandifolium SCHUR Enum. plant. Transsilv. p. 183. Segmentis foliorum stipulisque maximis ineiso-dentatis; floribus majoribus. — Ad Herrmanstadt in Trans- sylvania (n. v.). €) australe Guss. Plant. vase. in insula Inarime, p. 118. Floribus semper erectis, calycibus petala rotundata abrupte in unguem brevissimis attenuata æquantibus, in fruetu reflexis, aristis uncinatis glabris, appendicibus pilosis, seminibus compres- sis ad angulos piloso-hispidis, ad facies puberulis. — Habit. in silvis (n. v.). Syn. Tenore Fl. Neap. 4, p. 299 b. PRODRONUS MONOGRAPHLE GEORUM. 25 Arist purpuraseentes, incurvæ; appendicibus angulo recto ab arista inflexis; habitus a speciei typo nonnihil alienus. C) opulifolium Ser. mss. Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 551. — foliis caulinis apiee tri- lobis parvis dentatis; stipulis ovato-orbiculatis. — Hab. cirea Bernam et Genavam Dee. 1. c. (n. v.) Planta gracilis, pube brevi intermixtis pilis longioribus tecta, caule ramisque graeilibus, plerumque parce ramosa. Radix perennis ut etiam omnium reliquarum specierum generis (excepto forsan G. heterocarpo) primitus simplex et ramosa, cito evanescens, eujus in locum radices adventitiæ crassiores et ramoss ex rhizomate prodeuntes sueeedunt. Pars inferior eaulis sive rhizoma pro state magis minusve longum et erassum, plerumque calami scriptorii crassitie, oblique descendens vel ho- rizontale, simplex sed interdum ramosum, caulibus marcescentibus et squamis nume- rosis preditum, extus brunneo-fuscum, intus albo-luteum et fere lignosum, in medio medulla molli et violacea completum, earyophyllum paullum redolens; ex apice hujus rhizomatis explieantur eaules complures adscendentes, 2— 3 pedes alti, teretes vel obsolete obtusiusculi, ramosi, foliosi, patentes aut parte inferiore declinati, pilosi; hi eaules in apice et in axillis proferunt flores solitarios longeque peduneulatos. Folia radicalia admodum anomala, plerumque interrupte pinnatipartita, laeiniis ovatis, acu- tis, grosse et sspe dupliciter serratis; lacinia terminalis duæque proximæ maxime; laciniz vero inferiores, que omnes sunt multo minores quam lacinia suprema, alter- natim majores minoresve. Petioli carinati, hirsuti, basi dilatata. Folia caulina ple- rumque basin usque trisecta, lobis ellipticis vel rhombeis, acutis. Stipule ovate, plu- rinerves, incisæ vel trilobæ dentatæque, colore et hirsutie similes foliis, magne et a petiolis liberz. Flores erecti parvi, lutei vel flavi, plani, longe pedunculati. Calyx sub florescentia patens, dein reflexus, fructiferus recurvatus. Carpophorum sessile, hirsutissimum. Carpella basi pilis tenuibus patulis, apice pilis rigidioribus tecta, obo- vata. Styli articulus superior brevis, basi hispidulus, subglaber. — Herba tota viri- dis ut etiam pedunculi et calyces. Obs. 1. Ut hujus formam non posssum non considerare, præeunte C. J. HART- MAN, Geum hirtum Wahlberg, Fl. Gothob., p. 60. Specimen enim hujus plante a Wahlbergio ipso lectum C. HARTMAN benévole communicavit, quod vix differt a @. urbano nisi petalis calyce paulo brevioribus et hirsutiore herba. — In Aresch. FI. Gothob., p. 93 G. intermedii "forma litoralis see. detectorem ipsum" esse dicitur. Ut in posterum inquiratur, descriptionem WAHLBERGI in fl. Gothob. addere liceat. Geum hirtum Wahlb. ” Radix fusiformis, caulis bipedalis, ramosus, pilis reflexis. Fo- lia radicalia lyrato-pinnata, hirta, eaulina ternata, glabriuscula. Flores erecti. Caulis pubescens, fusco-purpureus. Petala calyce longiora, eleganter flava, venis rubicundis. Semina hispida; aristis vix semine longioribus, rectis (minime geniculatis) ad medium hispidis, dein glabris, uncinatis. — Habit. in Danmarks Lilja, olim Danaholmen, pareius, prope Gothoburgum in Suecia." Syn. G. urbanum B hirium Hartm. Handb, i Skand. fl. ed. 9, p. 143. — E. Fries in Bot. Notiser 1865, p. 124. Obs. 2. Geum hederafolium Gmel. Fl. Badens. 2, p. 460 est dubia planta, ut synonymon a Sprengel hue relata; sed videtur ultimis temporibus neglecta, quum Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 4 26 N. Jon. SCHEUIZ, neque in Kochii Syn. Fl. Germ. et Helvet. neque in Gren. et Godr. Fl. de France memorata inveniatur. — Dignosci dieitur: "foliis simplicibus subtrilobis, piloso-tomen- tosis, caule erecto, corollis luteis, seminibus albide. papposis?" Gmel. — Sec. Trattin. Rosae. Monogr. 3, p. 125 habitat in Alsatia in sylva saneti Petri inter St. Renig et Lauterburg copiose, teste TABERNÆMONTANO, eujus Caryophyllata quarta esse dici- tur. Videtur species suo loco deleta ex Trattin. L. e. Obs. 3. Si G. Rafinesquianum, quale in horto Upsal. eultum fuit, sit verum , hee species est tantum forma G. urbani. Obs. 4. G. lyratum Mort. Vindob., quale etiam in horto Upsal. cultum, ad G. urbanum est referendum. * GEUM OREGONENSE n. subsp. foliis caulinis tripartitis, laciniis ovatis, inæqualiter serratis; petalis flavis calycem reflexum superantibus; pe- dunculis aureo-hispidis, carpophoro piloso, sessili. f Habit. in regione Oregonensi Americæ septentr. (WÆRNGREN in herb. mus. Holmiens.) (v. s.). Superiorem modo partem plantæ vidi, sed adeo insignis videtur, ut saltim pro tempore proponatur ut subspecies, qu: postero tempore accuratius inquiratur. Quum G. urbanum numquam in America lectum sit, hæc forma eo insignior videtur. — Cau- lis aureo-hispidus præsertim in suprema parte, pilis diametro caulis paulo longiori- bus, superne fere dichotomus, apice pluriflorus. Folia pilosa, duo summa opposita, ubi prodeunt peduneuli, triloba; laciniæ obovate, superne inæqualiter serrate, inferne integerrimse. Stipulæ lanceolate, integerrimse, interdum ovate, sed semper minores et simplieiores quam Gei urbani. Flores erecti, lutei, Petala obovata vel obovato- obeordata, venis evidentibus. Carpella hirsuta, arista biarticulata. GEUM IBERICUM Bess. foliis et radicalibus et caulinis pinnatisectis vel pinnatis; petalis flavis obovatis, calyce paulo longioribus; carpellis pi- losis, arista biarticulata glabra, articulo inferiore superiorem quater su- perante, superiore basi pubescente; carpophoro piloso, sessili. =] Syn. G. ébericum Fries, Index sem. horti Upsal. (introductum ex horto Christian.). Habit. in Ideria, fide nominis. — Specimina herb. Friesiani culta im horto Upsal. (v. s.). Species Geo urbino simillima, sed clare distineta foliis omnibus pinnatisectis vel omnino pinnatis. — Folia radicalia pinnatiseeta, laciniis utrinque plerumque quin- que instructa. Folia caulina inferiora 2—3 laciniis, superiora 1—2 laciniis utrinque instrueta. Flores erecti, plani. Carpophorum hirsutissimum. Obs. Estate anni 1868 hortum botan. Christianiensem visitans, in eodem hoc Geum non inveni, quod considerarem formam Gei urbani polymorphi, nisi folia obstarent. Propromus MONOGRAPHIÆ GEORUM. 27 8. GEUM MOLLE Vis. et Pane. foliis radicalibus lyrato-pinnatipartitis, la- cinia terminali basi cordata; foliis caulinis tripartitis; petalis flavis el- lipticis, obtusis retusisve, calyee paulo longioribus; carpellis pilosis; styli articulo inferiore basi hirto-glanduloso, sursum glabro uncinato, articulum superiorem pilosum contorto-articulatum deciduum superante; carpophoro hirsuto, sessili. Syn. G. molle Visiani et Pancie Pl. Serbie. p. 1, p. 7 et tab. 1. — Nym. Syll. Fl. Europ. suppl., p. 50. Habit. in Serbia, in aprieis montis Javor cireuli Uzicensis ad 3000 ped. supra mare. (A Cel. PANCIC communicatum adest in herb. Friesiano) (v. s.). Radix multiceps. Herba velutina. Caules stricti, erecti, simplices, rarissime bifidi, ramis unifloris, pilis longioribus brevioribusque glauduliferis mollibus una cum foliis stipulisque obsiti. Folia radicalia obtusa, lyrato-pinnatipartita; lacinia termina- lis maxima, basi cordata, rarius e basi cuneata ovata, laciniæ laterales, 1—3 utrin- que, elliptieze aut rotundate, terminali multo minores. Folia eaulina tripartita, laei- niis rhombeis acuminatis, inæqualiter serrato-dentatis, rarius indivisa. Flores solita- ri, erecti. Laciniæ calycine ovato-acuminate, braeteolas lineares duplo superantes, in flore patulæ, in fruetu reflexæ, glauduloso-velutinæ. — Petala elliptica, flava, calyce longiora, quinquenervia, nervis ramosis. Stamina cireiter quadraginta, antheris ellip- ticis. Carpella elliptico-lanceolata, compressa, hirtella, ad basin styli glabri, iisdem subæqualis, glanduloso-pilosa; styli apice artieulato-eontorti, demum uncinati; styli artieulo superiore piloso, deciduo. Carpophorum oblongum, hirsutum, sessile. Obs. Utrum hoe sit magis affine G. urbano, quod differt caule eglanduloso, patule ramoso, petalis obovato-rotundatis ealycem æquantibus, staminibus paueioribus (subviginti), antheris rotundis, stylis longioribus et pube omnino diversa, an G. sil- vatico, a quo recedit petalis elliptieis, multo minoribus (quz in illo obcordata et calyce longiora) atque styli articulo superiore piloso, laciniis foliorum radicalium paucioribus aliisque, ipsi auctores dubitare videntur. Quantum ex specimine et icone a me visis conjicere licet, crederem, hoc in Europa nuper detectum Geum proxime accedere ad G. urbanwm, eujus et habitum et magnitudinem refert. Caulis magis foliosus quam in Geo silvatico; flores non majores quam in Geo urbano hujusque similes. 9. GEUM HISPIDUM Fries foliis radicalibus lyrato-pinnatipartitis, lacinia terminali pinnatifido-incisa; foliis caulinis pinnatifidis vel basi omnino dissectis; petalis flavis obovato-subrotundis, subunguiculatis, calyce re- flexo fere longioribus; carpellis pilosis, styli articulo inferiori glabro, superiori triplo breviori clavato inferne hispido; carpophoro hirsuto, sessili. Syn. G. hispidum Fries Fl. Halland., p. 90. Fries Nov. Fl. Suec. ed. 2, p. 165. Fries Summ. Veg. Scandin., p. 164. — Trattin. Rosae. Monogr. 3, p. 140. — Spreng. Syst. Veg. 2, p. 543. — Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 554. — Reich. Ic., t. 3. — Flor, 28 N. Jon. SCHEUIZ, Dan. suppl. II, t. 78. — Lange Pug. plant. imprimis hispan., p. 338. — Fries Herb. Norm. V, N:o 53. — Hartm. Skand. Fl. ed. 9, p. 143. G. wbanum B hispidum Wahlenb. Fl. Suec., p. 342. Geum foliis agrimoniæ Liljebl. Svensk flora ed. 1—3 (in ed. 1 et 2 sub nomiue G. urbanum A) hybridum, in ed. 3 sub nomine G. urbanum A) intermedium). Habit. in dumetis asperis maritimis Suecie australis, ut in Hallandia rarissi- me, ad mare balticum frequentius in Blekingia, prov. Calmariensi (pluribus locis) et in Ostrogothia; etiam loeis a mari remotis ut ad Jüreda prov. Calmariensis et in Hvetlanda prov. Junecopensis. In pratis Hispanie ad pagum Guadarrama legit Lange (herb. LANGE, mus. Hafn. et FRIES) (v. v.). Indumento hispido maxime insigne, sed exteris fere semper ignotum vel ab iisdem confusum eum G. stricto. — Caulis strietus, pedalis et ultra, paulum ramosus, 2 -4 florus, hispidus, ut etiam relique partes plante. Folia radicalia hispida, sub- æqualiter pinnatipartita, laciniis obovatis, serratis, lacinia terminali plerumque magna, cordata, ineisa serrataque. Folia eaulina pinnatifida vel basi omnino pinnatiseeta, elongata, acuta, infima fere ternata, lacinia terminali pinnatifida. Stipulæ foliorum laciniis conformes, petiolo semi-adnatæ. Et folia et stipulæ sunt minora quam G. urbani. Flores erecti, longissime peduneulati. Carpophorum sessile. — Differt a G. stricto statura gracili, folis caulinis pinnatifidis vel basi omnino pinnatisectis calyce reflexo styloque; a G. urbano foliis stipulisque minoribus, foliornm caulinorum lacinia media elongata et ineisa; ab utroque pedunculis longissimis simplicibus strietis; laei- niis ealyeinis latioribus, petalis et vestitu hispido. Obs. Affinitas hujus plante varie dijudicata fuit. Fries censet in fl. Hal- land., hoe esse proximum G. macrophyllo Ehrh., a quo, jam observante Trattinnick , habitu multum differt. TRATTINNICK vero judicavit hoc intime affine Geo potentilloidi (plante e genere Georum excludendæ) proxime ad quod etiam SerinGe in Decand. Prodr. male collocavit, ad Stictogeum, quod vocatur, referens. In Novit. fl. Suec. ed. 2 Fries observat, G. hispidum esse affine G. urbano, et in Sum. Veg. Scand. simul affirmat, hoe proxime accedere ad Geum strictum. Equidem existimo, G. hispi- dum esse proximum G. stricto. 10. Geum STRICTUM Ait. foliis radicalibus interrupte-pinnatipartitis vel ly- rato-pinnatisectis; foliis caulinis tripartitis vel interrupte pinnatiseetis; petalis aureis suborbiculatis, basi rotundata, calyce longioribus; carpel- lis hirtis, superne pilis longis adspersis; styli articulo superiore hispido vel piloso, dimidio breviore quam articulo inferiote; carpophoro pube densissime obtecto subsessili. Syn. G. strictum. Ait. Hort. Kew. 2, p. 217. — Willd. Sp. plant. 2, p. 1113 (excl. syn. Murr.). — Fisch. et Mey. Ind. sem. hort. Petrop. III, p. 36 et in Linnea XII, p. 95. — Fisch. in Mém. de la Soc. des Nat. de Mosc. II; pa 1855 211057019: — Ledeb. Fl. Ross. 2, p. 22. — Torr. et Gray Fl. Amer. sept. 1, p. 422. — Hook. Fl. Amer. bor. 1, p. 175 (excl. 8). — Meyer Ind. sem. hort. Petrop. XI, Propromus MONOGRAPHLE GEORUM. 29 p. 297. — A. Gray Man. of the Botany of the North Amer. Unit. Stat., p. 152. — Nym. Syll. Fl. Europ., p. 273. — Schur Sert. plant. Transsilv., p. 183. . aleppicum Jacq., Coll. ie. pl. pl. rar. 1, t. 93 (1775). . Bessertanum Fisch. mss. . canadense Murr., Comm. Goett. V, p. 34, t. 4 (1775), non Jacq. (1773). — Cham. in Linn. VI, p. 589. . diversifolüum Mortor. ex Meyer. . Fischert Bess. in litteris ex Linn. XII, p. 95. . Aispidum German. boreal. et Boruss. Auctor. — Garcke, Fl. von Nord Deutschl. aaa . heterophyllum Fischer, non Desf. . japonicum Hortor. nec Thunb. . intermedium Bess. (nor Ehrh.). — M. Bieb. Fl. Taur. caucas. 1, p. 411, 3, p. 360 (excl. syn.). RRAAAQAM G. macrophyllum Hook. Botany of Becchey, p. 113? G. ranunculoides Ser. in Dec. Prodr. (descriptio paululum differt). — Dec., Hort. Genav. 20. G. rugosum Desf. Cat. plant. h. rar. Paris. ed. 3, p. 409 (fide specim. ex horto Paris.). Habit. in Borussia orientali ut ad Tilsit et Lycke (herb. Fries, a v. UECH- TRITZ communicatum); in Rossia media, ut Oranienbaum (KÜüHLEW. in herb. FRIES) et per totum imperium Ruthenicum a Kamtschatka ad Petropolin usque (MEYER), ut in Podolia, in Volhyniæ umbrosis (Dec. Prodr.), in provinciis transcaucasicis (LEDEB.). In omni Sibiria, ut in pratis ad Baikal (Fischer in herb. HORNEM. nune mus. Hafn.), in Davuria; in montibus Altaicis (LEDEB. in herb. HORNEM. sub nomine G. interme- dii Bess.). "Am nutern Ussuri bei Turme und Aua und am mittlern Ussuri bei Kho- fila (Regel tent. fl. Ussur., p. 54 et herb. Frızs). E Transilvania adest in herb. mus. Holmiens., lectum prope Gölzenberg a SCHUR. — In America septentrionali, ut New-England, New-Foundland, Sashatehavan and alpine prairies of the Rocky Moun- tains (ToRR. et Gray). Americana specimina vidi ex Mansfield (E. TuckERM. in herb. Fries), Saskatchavan (var. 8 dissectum) (PALLISERS Brit. N. Amer. expl. exped. in herb. mus. Holmiens.), New-York (herb. mus. Holmiens.), Plainfield et Massachus- setts (herb. mus. Hafniens.) (v. v.). Hoe maxime proteum ex omnibus Geis oceurrit sub variis formis, quarum hz sunt observande: «) foliis caulinis pinnatipartitis, laciniis stipulisque inciso-fissis. B) dissectum Fries (in horto Upsal. introductum sub nomine G. Laxmanni) foliis omnibus pinnato-dissectis et varie incisis; stipulis incisis serratisque, petiolo multo brevioribus. — Forma maxime insignis, quam plures pro specie propria forsan habeant (v. s.). y) G. rugosum Desf. foliis caulinis trilobis, omnibus eximie rugosis. (Hort. Upsal. 1857 ex horto Paris.) (v. 8.) — Caule glabriore, foliis radiealibus hirsutis, caulinis glabrescentibus. 50 N. Jou. SCHEUTZ, 9) G. hirsutum Hort. Par. foliis omnibus pinnatipartitis, floribus majoribus et caule hirsutiore a forma primaria differt. Ex horto Paris. introd. in hort, Ups. (herb. FRIES) (v. S.). é) In hortis enata forma hybrida G. strieti et urbani, que Geum spurium C. A. Meyer. Ex H. Ups. in herb. Fries (v. s.). Planta robusta, ramis elongatis erectiusculis. Caulis hirsutus, bi-tripedalis, erectus, una eum petiolis plerumque hirsutus, fere ab ima basi foliosus. Folia radi- calia lyrato-pinnatisecta vel interrupte pinnatipartita; laciniæ laterales euneiformi- obovate, inciso-lobatæ serratæquæ, sex-octo, inæquales, interdum vario modo dissec- te, lacinia terminalis maxima reniformis; folia eaulina pinnatisecta, plerumque tripar- tita, rarius triloba, laciniis ellipticis oblongisve. Stipule ovatæ, incisæ. Flores ereeti, lutei, numerosi, interdum majusculi, plerumque magnitudine florum Ranuneuli aeris. Petala suborbieulata, basi rotundata. Carpella basi pube adpressa, apice pilis rigi- dis instrueta; arista glabra fere longitudine styli eglandulosi. Carpophorum subses- sile, pilis brevissimis dense pubescens, sphæricum. Obs. 1. Hane plantam Seringe in Dec. Prodr. sub tribus nominibus G. cana- densi, G. intermedio et G. ranunculoide descripsit, que tamen unam speciem G. strictum Ait. respiciunt. Ab auctoribus aliis aliis sub nominibus, ut e synonymia patet, descriptum, sed vel male atque imperfeete cognitum vel eum aliis confusum ut eum (Geo hispido Fries, quod tamen distinetissimum censeo. Ab affinibus G. séric- tum facile distinguitur petalis aureis ovato-orbiculatis, basi rotundatis (non euneatis). — Re vera hine Geo japonico, quo gracilius, illine G. Aispido, vel wrbano, quibus ro- bustius, affine videtur. ; Obs. 2. Plurimis speciminibus et formis non comparatis, characteribus modo respectis, hoc maxime proteum ex Geis quisque facile dividet in plures species. Lon- giore vero et uberiore experientia doctus videbit, has omnes inter se tam dissimiles formas haud dubie pertinere ad unam speciem. Obs. 3. Geum canadense est antiquissimum nomen hujus plantæ, sed jure re- jectum — absolutam legem prioritatis utpote legem anti-Linnæanam non agnosco — quia jam antea a Jacquino adhibitum fuit in aliam plantam. Obs. 4. In herbb. FRIES, mus. Holmiens., Christian. et Hafniens. adsunt spe- cimina Gei cujusdam e musæo Paris. communicata, que lecta esse dicuntur in Nova Hollandia; quum non fructifera sint, dubito, ad quam speciem sint referenda, sed nisi novam constituant speciem, hue potissimum pertinent. 11. GEUM AURANTIACUM Fries foliis radicalibus interrupte lyrato-pinnati- partitis; foliis caulinis tripartitis vel pinnatipartitis; petalis aurantiacis obcordatis, calyce semper reflexo longioribus; carpellis hirsutis, styli artieulo superiore glabro; carpophoro hirsuto, sessili. Syn. G. aurantiacum Fries, Ind. sem. hort. Upsal. 1858. Habit. Patria non satis nota, sed verisimiliter littora Americæ occidentalis. — In horto Upsal. cultum ex seminibus, que Prof. N. J. Andersson reportavit (v. s.). PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLE GEORUM. 31 Simile Geo stricto, a quo tamen evidenter differt petalorum colore et forma, utpote basin versus attenuatorum et apice emarginatorum, atque diverso fructu. — Caulis pubescens, fere stellato-pilosus, erectus, bipedalis et ultra, foliosus, superne divisus in pedunculos erectos, strictos et elongatos. Folia radicalia interrupte lyrato- pinnatipartita, lacinia terminalis maxima, rhomboideo-ovata vel tripartita, laterales 6—8 inæquales, terminali minores. Stipulæ petiolis foliorum caulinorum longiores, ineiso-serratze. Flores ereeti, petalis aurantiacis insignes. Carpophorum hirsutum. 12. GEUM JAPONICUM Thunb. foliis radicalibus lyrato-pinnatipartitis; foliis caulinis subreniformibus, lobatis vel trifidis; petalis flavis obovato-ellip- ticis, basi euneata, calyce sublongioribus; carpellis hirtis; stylis gla- briusculis, arista basi pilosa; styli articulo inferiore longitudine artieu- lum superiorem subhispidum subquadruplo excedente; carpophoro glabro sessili. Syn. G. japonicum Thunb. Fl. Japon., p. 220 (1784). — Fries Catal. horti Upsal. teste herb. Thunbergii, descriptione eximie confirmante. G. macrophyllum Willd. En. hort. Berol. 1, p. 557. — Torr. et Gray Fl. Amer. bor. 1, p. 421. — Chamis. et Schlectend. in Lian. II, p. 5. — Ledeb. Fl. Ross. 2, p. 22. — Fischer et Trautv. Ind. sem. horti Petrop. III, p. 35 et in Linnea XII, p. 95. — Ruprecht in Stirp. Fl. Petrop. diatribe, p. 64. — Bongard Veg. Sitcha, p. 132. — Meyer Ind. sem. hort. Petrop. XI, p. 25. —- A. Gray Mam. of the Botany of the North Unit. Stat., p. 152. G. strictum f Hcok. Fl. boreal. Amer. 1, p. 175 (ex Torr. et Gray). Habit. in Asia boreali-orientali, in regno Japonico, ubi cel. THUNBERG 1776 primus legit. (herb. THUNB.! et mus. Holmiens.) ut ad Yokohama (Maxrwovic it. se- eund. herb. Frizs, communicatum ab Celeberrimo REGEL) et ad Nagesaki (herb. mus. Holmiens.); in Kamtschatka, Unalaschka (LEDER. iu herb. mus. Hafn.) et Sitka (LE- DEB. fl. Ross.); in America septentrionali, Oregon, Lake superior et Canada (Torr. et Gray et in herb. Fries); "Along the banks of Santa Fe Creek (A. Gray Pl. FrxpLER. Novi-Mexie. p. 40); ad radices montium Alborum (Oakes in herb. mus. Hafniens.); in Europa cirea Petropolin, "sponte unico tamen loco (KÜHLEWEIN in herb. FRIES) "an ex hortis aufuga” (LEDEB. fl. Ross.) (v. v.). Tota planta hirsutissima, robusta, pedalis et ultra. Caulis erectus, robustus, inferne ad mediam partem aphyllus, in apice ramosus; ramis erectiusculis, primo ab- breviatis, demum subelongatis. Folia radiealia maxima ssepius pedalia, interrupte lyrato-pinnatipartita; lacini: laterales obovatæ, duplicato-serratee; terminalis maxima, duas vel tres pollices lata longaque, rotundo-cordata, quinqueloba et duplieato-serrata. Folia eaulina latiora quam longiora, triloba vel trifida, lobis apice rotundatis, inæqua- liter serratis. Stipule ovate, vel 3—5 dentate, serratæ. Flores in apice caulis ag- gregati, breve pedunculati, erecti, petalis basi euneatis flavis vel lutescentibus (nee aureis). Calyx reflexus. Carpella præcipue apice pilis longis hirsuta; aristæ carpel- lorum leviter hirsutæ, uniglochines. Styli articulus inferior glandulosus. Carpophorum sessile, glabrum vel obscure pubescens, ovato-orbieulatum. — Pubescentiam plantæ variare atque folia interdum fere glabra reperiri jam observarunt Torrey et Gray- 32 N. Jou. SCHEU1Z, Obs. 1. Hoc speciosum Geum ab omnibus optime dignoscitur habitu robusto et obeso, foliis caulinis subreniformibus, lobatis; a G. stricto, cui proximum est, petalorum forma et carpophoro glabro facile distinguendum. — Specimina tamen ja- ponica vidi et graciliora et robustiora. Obs. 2. G. japonicum Thunb. et G. macrophyllum Willd unam eandemque respicere plantam jam observavit E. FRIES; earum identitatem probant tum deserip- tio Thunbergii eum descriptione Willdenowii comparata, tum speeimina G. japoniei a THUNBERGIO lecta. Hine nullum dubium de harum plantarum identitate; sed nomen Thunbergianum, quod prioritate gaudeat, retinendum, quamquam nomen Willdenowii plant macrophyllæ convenit. — Specimina graciliora THUNBERG in Japonia legit at- que in ea descriptio Thunbergii optime quadrat. Obs. 3. Sub nominibus G. Sieboldii et G. Roylei insuper in hortis botanicis vagat; e seminibus sub hoc nomine missis educatum in hort. Upsal. 13. GEUM AGRIMONOIDES C. A. Meyer foliis pinnatipartitis, laciniis sub- æqualibus, inciso-laciniatis, superioribus sessilibus, inferioribus petio- latis; petalis albis rarius ochroleucis ovalibus, calyce demum subreflexo brevioribus; carpellis pubescentibus, apice hirtis; styli articulo inferiore longitudine articulum superiorem hispidum excedente; carpophoro den- sissime pubescente sessili. Syn. G. Agrimonoides C.A. Mey. Ind. sem. hort. Petrop. XI, p. 29. — Dubium est, num Pursh Fl. Amer. sept. 1, p. 351 (etiam exclusis synonymis), Dee. Prodr. 2, p. 554, Trattin. Monogr. Rosac. 3, p. 144 et Spreng. Syst. Veg. 2, p. 943 ad haue speciem referantur. G. laciniosum Murr. ex Comm. Goett. 5, p. 36 (dubium videtur). Habit. in America septentrionali, ut in Pensylvania ad litora Susquehanne et ad Missourin superiorem, ad Pittsburg (sub nomine G. albi Gmel.? specimen adest in herb. mus. Holmiens. hue referendum). Spec. in horto Upsal. culta e semin. horti Petropol., eum deseriptione C. A. MEvERr convenientia, adsunt in herb. FRIES (v. s.). Hirsutum. Caulis strictus, hirsutus, ab infimo ramosus, ramis strietis, graci- libus, foliosis, bi-vel paucifloris. Flores suberecti, longe pedunculati (saltim post in- floscentiam), albi vel ochroleuei, magnitudine florum Gei urbani. Folia radicalia fere dissecta; caulina inferiora pinnatipartita, superiora tripartita, lacinize foliorum inferio- rum quinque basin versus decrescentes, inciso-dentatæ, laciniæ vero foliorum su- periorum dentate, basi confluentes, stipulæ obovate, incisæ (a Pursh deseribuntur ovate, subintegræ, que descriptio in specimina nostra non quadrat) petiolo adnate. Carpophorum sessile, densissime pubescens. Carpella pubescentia, apice setosa. Obs. Dubium videtur, an hee planta sit eadem, quam Pursx descripsit. Proximum est G. urbano et G. albo, a quibus tamen differt foliis caulinis pinnatipar- titis vel pinnatisectis et carpophoro superne pube brevi tecto. A. G. stricto, quocum foliis et hirsutie quodammodo convenit, longius distat; forma atque colore petalorum ovalium alborumque (petala in G. strieto semper aurea) recedit. Cum G. virginiano PRODROMUS MoNoGRAPHUE GEORUM. 33 nullo modo confundi potest. Neque ex descriptione Fisch. et Trautv. Ind. sem. horti Petrop. tertius p. 35, quantum video, potest esse illo loco commemoratum G. ca- nadense. 14. GEUM HYRCANUM C. A. Meyer foliis radicalibus interdum simplicibus, ssepius pinnatipartitis, lacinia terminali cordato-reniformi, lobata; foliis caulinis simplieibus subreniformibus, sublobatis, infimis basi laciniis dua- bus parvis instructis; petalis flavis suborbiculatis, calyce majoribus; carpellis densissime hirtis, styli articulo inferiore longitudine articulum superiorem hirtulum excedente; carpophoro densissime piloso, sessili. Syn. G. hyrcanum C. A. Meyer Ind. sem. hort. Petrop. XI, p. 32. Habit. in Asia, in altioribus locis herbidis montium Taliisch versus pagum Swant, in altitud. 4800—5400 ped. (Meyer, l. e.) (typum a Meyer d. 22 Jun. 1830 lectum vidi, favore illustr. RUPRECHT, in herb. Acad. Petropol.). Molliter pilosum, graeile, subsimplex. Caulis erectus, pedalis, foliosus, su- perne ramosus. Folia radiealia interdum simplicia, sæpius pinnatipartita, lacinia ter- minalis cordato-subreniformis, rotundata, trifida, lobata, indivisa, laciniis lateralibus inæqualibus multo major. Folia caulina inferiora laeiniz foliorum radicalium termi- nali similia sunt et formam habent reniformem, rotundatam, spe trilobam; interdum folia infima basi laciniis duabus parvis aucta sunt; folia superiora ovata, acuta, tri- loba vel trifida; summa oblongo-lanceolata, acuminata. Stipulæ majuscule, suborbicu- late, incisæ. Flores erecti, parvi. Calycis laciniæ majores una cum bracteolis reflexe, dorso dense pilose, longe acuminate, 3 lin. long; bracteolæ multo minores. Petala flava, suborbiculata, apice rotundata (non emarginata) laciniis calycinis latiora, 3 lin. eireiter longa. Carpophorum Gei urbani, sessile, pilis elongatis densissime obsessum. Obs. Species, concedente ipso detectore, nondum perfecte nota, sed eodem teste certe distincta. — Habitu satis refert G. wrbanum nec ulli speciei pro- pius mihi videtur, sed prster notas paullo infra allatas differt: herba molliter pilosa, forma foliorum caulinorum, petalis suborbiculatis (in Geo urbano oblongis) calyce ma- joribus. Modo crescendi me judice magis ad G. urbanum quam ad G. coccineum ac- cedere videtur. Observante C. A. MEYER paullulum accedit ad Gewm coccineum, sed floribus minoribus flavis et prsesertim styli articulo superiore breviore hirtulo ab illo facile distinguitur. A G. wrbano differt petalis majoribus suborbieulatis, carpellis ab ima basi pilis rigidis densissime hirtis, styli artieulo superiore hirtulo aliisque no- tis; a G. stricto distat indumenti pilis mollibus, foliorum forma, earpophoro pilis elon- gatis obsesso. 15. GEUM MAGELLANICUM Commers. foliis radicalibus interrupte pinnati- partitis, lacinia terminali maxima, basi cordata, sublobata, lateralibus inæqualibus; foliis caulinis tripartitis vel lyrato-pinnatipartitis; petalis flavis subrotundis, calycem superantibus; carpellis molliter pilosis cete- rumque carpellis Gei urbani similibus; styli articulo inferiore superio- rem superante; carpophoro hirsuto, sessili. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 5 34 N. Jou. SCHEUTZ, Syn. G. magellanicum Commers. ex Pers. Syn. 2, p. 57. — Trattin. Rosac. Monogr. 3, p. 135. — Dee. Prodr. 2, p. 554. — Don Encycl. 2, p. 527 ex Hook. — Hook. Fl. Antarct. 2, p. 262. — Wedd. Chlor. Andin. 1, p. 235. Habit. in America australi et media, ut ad fretum Magellanicum, ubi Com- merson detexit et unde N. J. ANDERSSON 1852 specimina reportavit. Prope Sandy Point (W. Lechler in herb. FRIES, BLYTT. et mus. Holmiens.), in Chili, Nova Gra- nada: ” Cordillèras de la province de Fuquerras h. 3000 m." (WEDDELL), Ecuador: "prés du sommet du Pichincha (WEDDELL), Peru: "Huasa-huasi, environs de Caja- marea h. 3500 m." (WEDDELL). In regionibus Antarcticis prseterea lectum ad Port Famine et Cap Negro (Hook. l c.) ut etiam in Australia: "Bay of Islands New- Zealand" (Unit. Stat. expl. exped. 1858—42 botany 1, p. 501) (v. s.). Pubescens. Rhizoma crassitudine digiti, teste Weddell caryophylliodorum. Caulis unum alterumve pedem altus, foliosus, hirsutus vel pubescens, plerumque tri- florus, inferne rubicundus. Folia radicalia plurima irregulariter et interrupte pinnati- partita, pilosa, lacinia terminalis maxima rotundo-reniformis vel basi plus minus cor- data, sublobata serrataque; laterales utrinque 4—6, valde inæquales, ovato-cuneifor- mes, inciso-serrate, nonnullæ integræ. Petioli hirti vel hispidi. Folia caulina tripar- tita vel lyrato-pinnnatipartita, laciniis paucioribus, incisis. Stipule ovate, serrate. Flores erecti, petalis flavis subrotundis, calyce majoribus. Calyx post anthesin re- flexus. Capitulum carpellorum depressum. Obs. Synonyma hujus speciei illustr. J. Hooker in flora Antarctica affert G. coccineum Ser., Lindl. Bot. Reg. t. 1088, G. chilense Balbis, G. chilense Lindl., Bot. Reg., t. 1348, G. Qvellyon Sweet Brit. fl. Garden, Ser. I, vol. 3, t. 292, que tamen me judiee non ad hoe, sed ad G. chilense Balb., plantam a G. magellanico distinctissimam, pertinent. — Idem Hooker, observante A Gray (in Unit. Stat. expl. , exped. l. c.) cum Geo magellanieo complura conjungere videtur, ut ex Flora Antare- tica patet. A. Gray L c. dicit: "to this species Dr Hooker refers the G. ranuneu- loides, G. ehilense, G. Quellyon and intermedium of authors, and likewise our North- Ameriean G. strietum — apparently with reason; but in that ease the plant should bear the latter name. He also strongly inclines to unite the whole of the European G. urbanum." — Tantam conjunctionem specierum, que etiam ad diversas sectiones pertinent et inter se sunt dissimillime, probare vix possumus; his enim in unam speciem redaetis, omnino necessarium videtur conjungere v. e. G. intermedium, G. rubifolium, G. brachypetalum et G. rubellum, quod paucos hodiernos botanicos affir- mare crediderim. Certe G. magellanicum est diversum a G. chilensi (Bot. Reg. 1548), quod fuit eonfusum eum G. coccineo Fl. Gree. 16. GEUM INVOLUCRATUM Juss. foliis radiealibus interrupte pinnatiparti- tis, lacinia terminali maxima, rotundata, obsolete quinqueloba, crenata, lateralibus multoties minoribus; floribus sessilibus nutantibus, folio cau- lino involueratis, petalis albis calycem subzequantibus; carpellis villosis, stylo hamato, curvato; carpophoro sessili. Syn. G. énvolucratum Juss. Herb. in Pers. Syn. 2, p. 57. — Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 552. — Trattin. Rosac. Monogr. 3, p. 134. PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLE GEORUM. 35 @. parviflorum Hook. Fl. Antarct. 2, p. 263. — Gay Hist. fisica y politica de Chili 2, p: 278. G. antareticum herb. mus. Holmiens. (nomen aptissimum, quo confusio G. Znvolucratz et parviflort tolleretur). Habit. in America australi, ut ad fretum Magellanicum (Commers. in herb. mus. Holmiens.), in Chili (Gay 1. e.). — Port Famine (Hook. 1. c.). — Utrum ad G. involueratum an ad G. parviflorum hie loeus: Orange Harbour, Fuegia (Unit. Stat. expl. exped. 1838—42, Botany 1, p. 501) pertineat, dubius sum (v. s.). E minimis speeiebus Gei, vix semipedale. Habitu a plerisque diversum, ad Geum parviflorum accedens. — Velutino-pubescens. Rhizoma erassum pro magnitu- dine plante, interdum pollicis erassitudine. Caulis sive scapus pauciflorus, tomen- tosus, circiter tres uncias altus. Folia fere omnia radicalia interrupte pinnatipartita, patentia, pilis fulvis densis velutina; lacinia terminalis * une. lata, plicata, laterales inciso dentate, 2—5 utrinque, multoties minores. Caules foliis radicalibus breviores, pubescentes, ad basin nudi, apicem versus duo vel tria folia lyrato-pinnatifida geren- tes. Flores 4—5 parvi, ad apicem caulis sessiles, in capitulum fere aggregati fo- lioque caulino involuerati. Petala alba, late elliptico-spathulata, obtusa. Obs. Hane speciem nullo modo esse verum G. parviflorum Commers., sed primarium G. involucratum Pers. vix dubitem, quamvis planta, quam descripsi, a plurimis recentiorum ad @. parviflorum referatur, a quo tamen satis differt, ut non possim non mirari, auctores has duas species sæpissime confudisse. Sie Hooker in Fl. Antaret. G. involucratum et G. parviflorwm putat synonyma. Hookeri G. parvi- Forum FI. Antaret. esse nostrum G. involueratum, apparet ex descriptione convenien- tissima, etiam quod auctor observat, suam plantam esse affinem Geo albifloro (Hook.). 17. GEUM PARVIFLORUM Commers. foliis radicalibus interrupte pinnati- partitis, lacinia terminali maxima orbiculata, basi cordata, lateralibus multoties minoribus; foliis caulinis minimis, incisis, flores non involu- crantibus; floribus parvis erectis, petalis niveis oblongis, calyce longio- ribus; carpellis pilosis (ex Wedd.); carpophoro sessili. Syn. G. parviflorum Commers. ex Smith. — Dee., Prodr. 2, p. 552. — Weddell, Chlor. Andin. (excl. syn. etiam Gay Fl. chil) p. 235. G. magellanicum W. Lechler, Plant. chilens., N:o 2948. Habit. in America australi, ut ad fretum Magellanicum (Commers.). Supra zonam Chusqueæ Cumingii in Cordillera de Ranco. (W. Lecuzer Pl. Chil, N:o 2948 in herb. FRIES) (v. s.). E minimis speciebus Gei, magnitudine et habitu simile Geo involucrato, a quo tamen facile distinguitur. — Pubescens. Rhizoma crassum, brevius. Caulis po- tius seapus dicendus, circiter triflorus, inferne nudus, glaber, erectus, 4—6 pollices altus, foliis radiealibus fere duplo longior (in speciminibus a me visis) nec ut in G. involucrato brevior. Folia radiealia hirsuta, interrupte pinnatipartita; laeinia termina- lis rotundato-reniformis, erenata, obsolete lobata, laterales utrinque quatuor, multo- 36 N. Jon. SCHEUIZ, ties minores, inciso-serratæ, nune aliæ minores integre, nune alie majores crenatæ. Caules apicem versus duobus foliis minimis inciso-serratis nec pinnatisectis, glaber- rimis instructi. Flores in apice caulis fere umbellati, erecti, minimi, peduneulis fere nullis vel brevissimis, a foliis caulinis non involucrati (in spece., que vidi, sed ex Weddell folia eaulina sub inflorescentia approximata interdum flores involucrantia). Petala nivea. Laciniæ calycinæ ovate, obtuse. Obs. 1. A Geo involucrato eximie distinctum caulibus glabris, floribus eree- tis, folio non involucratis, foliorum caulinorum laciniis lateralibus minoribus et pau- cioribus totaque pubescentia, in G. involucrato longe alia. Obs. 9. A Geo magellanico clare differt laciniis calycinis non acuminatis, pe- talis albis, oblongis, constanter niveis totoque habitu. Sect. IV. CARYOPHYLLATA Tournef. Instit., t. 151. — Seringe in Dee. Prodr. et in Mém. soc. phys. gen. 2, p. 139. Calyx quinquebraeteolatus, erectus vel erecto-patulus. Carpophorum longe stipitatum stipite exserto. Styli annulato-geniculati, articulati; articulo inferiore in fructu persistente, apice hamato, superiore deciduo (in G. pallido persistente). Flores campanulati, plerumque nutantes. Ad hane seetionem referuntur: G. nutans, G. rivale, G. pallidum atque G. geniculatum; etiam duæ species minus cognitæ G. umbrosum et G. incisum , que infra describentur inter species minus cognitas. — Geum rivale, ab antiquissimis tempori- bus eognitum, est proximum 6. nutanti. Eximia species est G. geniculatum, quod a ceteris Caryophyllatis satis differre videtur. 18. GEUM NUTANS (Lam.) foliis radiealibus interrupte pinnatipartitis, laci- niis subzequalibus, foliis caulinis pinnatipartitis; petalis flavis retusis, pa- tulis, calyce purpurascente longioribus, sensim angustatis in unguem lamina multo breviorem; carpellis hirsutis, styli articulo superiore juve- nili vix medium usque adpresse pilosulo; styli articulo inferiore longi- tudine carpellum articulumque superiorem plumosum 1} excedente; car- pophoro longe stipitato. Syn. G. nutans Fisch. et Trautv. Ind. sem. horti Petrop. III, p. 39 et in Linn. XII, p. 98 et 158. — Meyer Ind. sem. hort. Petrop. XI, p. 46. — Trattin. Rosac. Monogr. 3, p. 123. — Walp., Repert. 2, p. 47. Caryophyllata nutans Lam. Eneycl. méth. 1, p. 399, suppl. 1, p. 617 (differt aristis apicem versus nudis). Habit. Patria ignota. — Specimina in hortis Upsal., Paris. et Berol. eulta vidi (herbb. Fries et mus. Holmiens.) (v. s.). PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLÆ GEORUM. o Caulis paueiflorus, superne rubicundus, bipedalis, undique pilis mollibus bre- viter reversis tectus. Folia radicalia interrupte pinnatipartita, laciniæ obtusæ 3—5 magne (terminalis reliquis major) laeiniis aliis multo minoribus interjectæ. Flores campanulati, lutei, nutantes. Calyx purpurascens, pubescenti-pilosus, eglandulosus. Petala flava, ealyee longiora. Carpella basi pubescentia, apiee hirta. Obs. Affine Geo rivali, cui etiam habitu simile, sed planta major, elegantior. A G. rivali differt indole carpellorum et forma petalorum. Folia radiealia spec. Upsal. a folis radiealibus G. rivalis satis differre videntur, præcipue hirsutie et lacinia ter- minali quinquepartita, serrata maximaque. Cum G. pallido confundi non potest, atque ab aliis omnibus, exceptis G. pallido et G. rivali, differt carpophoro stipite elongato suffulto. 19. G EUM RIVALE Linn. foliis radicalibus interrupte lyrato-pinnatipartitis , caulinis tripartitis; petalis incarnatis vel rarius luteis conniventibus, ca- lycem atropurpureum semper erectum subzequantibus, subito angustatis in unguem lamina subreniformi abbreviata plerumque breviorem; car- pellis piloso-hirtis; styli articulo superiore juvenili usque ad apicem sum- mum glanduloso et patenter piloso, inferiorem subzequante; carpophoro fere longitudine ealycis. Syn. G. rivale Lin. Sp. plant., p. 717 et Fl. Suec., p. 461. — Willd. Spec. plant. 2, p. 1115. — Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 551 (excl. var. 8). — Spreng. Syst. Veg. 2, p. 542. — Fisch. et Trautv., Ind. sem. horti Petrop. IIT, p. 39 et in Linn. XII, p. 98 et 158. — Koch Syn. fl. Germ. et Helv. 1, p. 183. — Schur Enum. plant. Transsilv., p. 183. — Gren. et Godr. Flore de France 1, p. 520. — Ledeb. Fl. rossic. 2, p. 39. — A. Gray Man. of the Botany of the North. Unit. Stat., p. 152. — Wahlenb. Fl. Lapp., p. 148, Fl. Suec., p. 342. — Lange Haandb. i d. Danske flora, p. 400. — Engl. Bot., t. 106, Fl. Dan., t. 729. Svensk boi., t. 231 aliæque sex figure, quas Pritzel enumerat. G. nutans Crantz Austr., p- 70 (non Lam.). Caryophyllata rivalis Scop. Carn. N:o 629. Caryophyllata aquatica, nutante flore Bauh. Pin. 321. Caryophyllata septentrionalium Lob. Ic. 694. Habit. in pratis humidis Hurope, etiam Islandiæ (herb. J. LANGE), exceptis Lusitania, Italia australi, insulis Italie et Grecia, Asie, in Sibiria et regionibus Caucasicis, atque Americæ septentrionalis (v. v.). Variat 8) strictum Norm. in Nyt Magas. for Natur-Vid. VI, p. 248 — forma altior stricta, foliis radicalibus longissime petiolatis ereetis, caule ealycibusque pilis glanduliferis omnino destitutis. — Lectum cum Saxifraga hieracifolia in Lomseggen Norvegiæ (J. Norman |. c.). y) humile Schur Enum. pl. Transsilv., p. 183. — humile, uniflorum, flore maximo nutante. — Lectum in Arpaser Alpen Transsilv. 6000 ped. supra mare (SCHUR |. e.). 38 N. JOH. SCHEUTZ, 0) grandifolium foliis caulinis lyrato-interrupte pinnatipartitis, foliorum radi- calium laciniæ laterales utrinque 8—9, quarum dus vel tres majores inciso-serrate, laeinia terminali maxima obovata biserrata trifidaque. Syn. G. pictum Hort. In horto Upsal. cultum vidi. — Foliis a forma primaria satis differt. Radix simplex l. ramosa. Caulis inferior pars sive rhizoma fuscum, horizontale, foliis persistentibus squarrosum. Caules ex una radice 1—3 erecti, 1—2 pedales et ultra, simplices apiee paree ramosi, glanduloso-pilosi ut tota herba, in medio viri- des, sed ceterum rubieundi ut etiam totus calyx. Folia radicalia lyrato-pinnatipartita laciniis utrinque 4—6 parvis, obovatis, biserratis, terminali maxima reniformi; folia caulina tripartita. Stipulæ ovate, minute, subcolorate. Flores nutantes campanulati, duo vel tres (rarius plures) terminales, post anthesin erecti. Petala incarnata vel al- bentia venis rubieundis inscripta, rarissime lutea, emarginata, longe-unguiculata. Carpophorum calycem campanulatum subexcedens, pilosissimum. Carpella in eapitu- lum subovatum aggregata, pilosa, arista uncinata basi hirta terminata. — Ab omni- bus hujus generis speciebus distinguitur petalis subito angustatis in unguem lamina plerumque longiorem. Obs. 1. Hujus speciei exstat montrositas ab auctoribus celebrata: Geum hybridum Wulf. caule humiliore, sepalis in folia mutatis. Syn. G. hybridum Wulf. in Jacq. Misc. 2, p. 33 ex Koch. — Jacq. Ic. rar., i. 94. — Willd., Sp. plant. 2, p. 1115. G. rivale luxurians Trattin., Rosac. Monogr. 3, p. 121. — Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 552. Caryophyllata montana flore pleno prolifero, folio Hedere terrestris. Breyn Cent., p. 130, t. 60. Caryophyllata prolifera, flosculis elegantissimis Loes. Pruss. 97, t. 6. Caryophyllata aquatica floribus plenis magis nutantibus. Cam. epit. 726. Hee pulchella forma nullo modo est hybrida, sed monstrosa, quod probatur ex eo, quod e centro floris normalem florem enatum botanici viderunt. Cfr Linnet Iter el. p. 84, ubi uberior descriptio legitur. Obs. 2. Forma hybrida hujus speciei, Gewn urbano-rivale commemoratur a Wimmero (Wildw. Bastardpfl., in Denkschr. d. Schles. Gesellsch. f. Vaterl. Kultur, Breslau 1853) quam ignoro. Forte G. intermedii forma. Obs. 3. In Prolepsi plantarum Linnæi (Upsal. 1760) heee planta affertur osten- dens "folia calycina eadem esse natura ac folia caulina" (p. 12) et "quomodo corolla prorsus evadat viridis et naturam foliaceam calycis induat" (p. 14) atque demonstrans "pistilli mutationem in folia" (p. 18). 20. GEUM PALLIDUM C. A. Meyer foliis radicalibus interrupte pinnatipar- titis; foliis caulinis tripartitis; petalis albis calycem viridem atque pal- lidum (nec rubieundum) æquantibus, vix emarginatis, in unguem lamina subreniformi fere breviorem attenuatis; carpellis piloso-hirtis; styli arti- PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLE GEORUM. 39 culo inferiore longitudine carpellum artieulumque superiorem plumosum (ex Meyer persistentem) duplo excedente; carpophoro longe stipitato. Syn. G. pallidum C. A. Meyer Ind. sem. hort. Petrop. XI, p. 49, ex quo Hort. Ups. G. rivale flore albo. Bernh. Select. sem. horti Erfurt 1842 ex Meyer. Habit. in Norvegia, in Abildsö prope Christianiam, ubi amicus N. WULFS- BERG, studiosus medicine, d. 2 Junii 1869 in apricis legit et speeim. benevole com- munieavit. — Patria MEYERO ignota!, qui in hortis botanieis cultum descripsit (v. v.). Planta fere magnitudine Gei rivalis, sed plerumque humilior atque gracilior; primo adspeetu distinguenda pallido habitu. — Rhizoma satis crassum, fuseum. Cau- lis viridis, pilosus, simplex, striatus. Folia radiealia pauca, lyrato-pinnatipartita vel plerumque interrupte pinnatipartita; laeinie inferiores minimæ distantes, superiores approximatz, lacinia terminalis triloba, ineisa et serrata. Folia caulina tripartita, serrata. Omnia folia sunt glabrescentia. Stipulæ virides, incisæ. Pedunculi floribus longiores, villosi, post authesin ereeti. Flores pauci (vix ultra quatuor) fere umbel- lati. Calycis inferior pars vel tubus rufescens, basi area circulari grisea notatus, su- perior vero vel laciniz pallidus, viridi-albus. Petala alba. Lamina petalorum latitu- dine longitudinem superans. Arista carpellorum deflexa. Carpophorum brevius car- pophoro Gei rivalis. Obs. E semine cultum constans, haud dubie affine G. rivali, a quo tamen notis allatis facile distinguitur, præcipue tota herba calycibusque pallide-viridibus, petalis albis, styli artieulo superiore breviore in fructu persistente. 21. GEUM GENICULATUM Michx. foliis radicalibus .... foliis caulinis tri- partitis, superioribus subsessilibus, inferioribus petiolatis; petalis pallide purpureis, cuneato-obcordatis, calycem viridem subæquantibus vel calyce paulo brevioribus; carpellis piloso-hirtis; styli articulo inferiore glabro longitudine carpelli, articulum superiorem plumosum subeequante; car- pophoro stipitato, calyce breviore. Syn. G. geniculatum Michx. Fl. Amer. bor., p. 300. — Pursh Fl. Amer. sept. ed. 2 I, p. 351. — Torr. et Gray Fl. of North Amer. 1, p. 422. — Pers. Syn. 2, p. 57. — Trattin. Rosae. Monogr. 3, p. 143. G. virginianum Spreng. Syst. Veg. 2, p. 542. Habit. in America septentrionali rarius ut in Canada (MicHaux), Monte Roan Caroline septentrion. (M. A. Curtis et J. CAREY in herb. FRIES) (v. s.). Caulis pluriflorus, bipedalis, erectus, inferne simplex, superne ramosus ramis patentibus, reflexo-hirsutus, in suprema parte fere villosus, viridis ut etiam tota planta calycesque. Folia radicalia deficiunt in speciminibus, que vidi, ut etiam in iis, que A. Gray (Cfr Fl. of North Amer.) examinavit in herbario MicHauxir Folia caulina pilosa præcipue in nervis paginæ inferioris, tripartita, laciniis obovatis, grosse et inæqualiter serratis. Stipulæ lanceolato-ovatæ, integræ vel bifidæ. Flores campanu- lati, fere paniculati, panicula pauciflora (2—8 flora) sub anthesi et post eam erecti, 40 N. JOH. SCHEU1Z, peduneulis uncialibus et ultra, villosis. Calyx piloso-villosus, viridis, in fruetu paul- lum reflexus, laciniis ovatis, bracteolis multoties majoribus. Petala verosimiliter pal- lide purpurea, venis inscripta, fere obovata, breviter-unguiculata, lamina vix emar- p p , , 2 1 ginata. Carpophorum calyce brevius, pilosissimum. Carpella numerosa, piloso-hirta, arista uneinata terminata, styli articulo superiore plumoso apice glabro. — Ab omnibus Caryophyllatis primo intuitu distinguitur habitu longe diverso, floribus foliisque ete. yop p 8 8 , Sect. V. PSEUDO-CARYOPHYLLATA Fisch. et Mey. Ind. sem. hort. Petrop. XI (exclusis variis speciebus ad Pseudo-Sieversiam relatis). Calyx quinquebracteolatus, patulus vel patens. Carpophorum sessile. Styli annulato-geniculati, articulo inferiore carpellum et articulum superiorem superante. Flores campanulati. Petala calycem fere æquantia, ssepe bre- viora. Folia caulina majora trifida vel tripartita. Folia radicalia simplicia vel pinnatipartita; laciniis 3 vel 5 superioribus æqualibus (lacinia terminali paulo vel vix duplo majore), laciniis parvis ad basin paucis vel nullis. Plantæ habitu in memoriam revocantes Caryophyllatas, a quibus tamen facil- lime distinguuntur defectu earpophori perspicui. In duas sectiones dividi possunt, quarum prior habet: Petala suborbieulata vel obovata, basi sensim in unguem lamina multo breviorem attenuata, atque continet G. brachypetalum, G. intermedium atque G. rubifolium. Posterior vero amplectitur unam speciem G. rubellum atque habet petala basi abrupte in unguem lamina subreniformi fere longiorem attenuata. 29. GEUM BRACHYPETALUM Ser. foliis radicalibus interrupte pinnatipar- titis vel tripartitis, laciniis paucis, superioribus tribus vel quinque sub- sequalibus; foliis caulinis tripartitis trifidisve; petalis pallide luteis, obo- vato-subrotundis, calyce plerumque multo brevioribus vel interdum ca- lycem æquantibus; carpellis hirtis; styli articulo inferiore longitudine earpellum duplo, articulum superiorem hispidum quadruplo excedente; carpophoro sessili pilosissimo. Syn. G. brachypetalum Ser. in Mem. soc. phys. genav. 2, p. 139 ex Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 552. — C. A. Meyer Ind. sem. hort. Petrop. XI, p. 40. G. alpinum Hornem. Suppl. horti Hafniens. sec. specimina ex H. Hafn. in herb. Frias. Habit. Patria ignota. — Spec. culta in horto Genavensi SERINGE descrip- sit. — In horto Upsal. eultum, unde specim. herb. FRIES (v. s.). Pilosulum vel pubescenti-pilosum, pedale et ultra. Caulis simplex, erectus, uni-triflorus. Folia radicalia vulgo pinnatipartita, sed interdum reniformia indivisaque. Folia eaulina superiora tripartita vel trifida, laciniis quinque instrueta. Stipulæ in- feriores magnæ suborbiculatæ, grosse serrate. Flores cernui, plerumque axillares. PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLÆ GEORUM. 41 Carpellorum capitulum rotundatum. Carpella basi pubescentia, apice piloso-hirta. Carpophorum earpophoro @. urbani simile. — Flores fere campanulati (non plani); petala pallida, vulgo lutea, lineis roseis notata. Obs. Hee species G. intermedio certe proxima, habitu G. urbani, haud parum variat petalis (in floribus primis) plerumque majoribus et latioribus, suborbiculatis (in floribus serotinis), minoribus, sspe obovatis. Longitudo quoque petalorum variat; petala ealycem nune quant (G. alpinum), nune breviora illo sunt (G. brachypetalum). Herba nune tota late viridis, petalis flavis, nune ramis ealycibusque purpurascentibus, petalis colore purpurascente subtus suffusis (ex Meyer) Carpellorum capitulum et earpophorum ut in G. urbano. — Differt a G. intermedio petalis obovato-suborbicula- tis, basi vie attenuatis et styli articulo superiore hispido (non plumoso-hirto). 23. GEUM INTERMEDIUM (Ehrh. foliis radicalibus lyrato-pinnatipartitis (rarissime tripartitis), laciniis paucis, superioribus 3 vel 5 subæquali- bus; foliis caulinis tripartitis trifidisve; petalis luteis obovatis, basi at- tenuatis in unguem lamina multo breviorem, vel obovato-subrotundis, basi vix attenuatis, calycem rubieundum æquantibus vel paulo superan- tibus; earpellis hirtis; styli articulo inferiore uncinato, longitudine car- pellum sesqui-vel duplo, articulum superiorem basi plumoso-hirtum sub- quadruplo duplove excedente; carpophoro subsessili, pilosissimo. Syn. G. intermedium (Ehrh. Beitr. 6, p. 143). — Fries Nov. fl. Suec., p. 166 et Herb. Norm. VI, N:o 50. — Fl. Dan., t. 1878. — Ledeb. Fl. Ross., II, p. 23 (excl. syn. Bess. atque Heuffl. nec non patria Moscou, Kursk, Volhyn. ex Meyer). — Wimm. Fl. von Sehles. 1, p. 141. — Koch Syn. fl. Germ. et Helv. 1, p. 182. — Gren. et Godr. Fl. de France 1, p. 519. — Hartm. Skand. Flora, p. 143. — Lange Dansk Fl., p. 399. — Schur Enum. plant. Trans., p. 183. — Nym. Syll. Fl. Europ., p. 273. G. ambiguum Schur. herb. Transs. G. rivali-montanum Reich. Fl. Germ. excurs., p. 598. | .G. urbano-rivale Schied. G. urbamum var. intermedium Smith Brit. — Wahlenb. Fl. Suec. 1, p. 342, alio- rumque. G. rivale var. intermedium Ser. in Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 551. Caryophyllata silvestris Fuchs Kreuterb. ed. Bas. 1543, t. 216 (icon bona ex Fries, Nov. fl. Suec.). Caryophyllata montana Cam. hort. 35. Caryophyllata vulgaris majore flore C. Bauh. pin. 321. — Raji hist. plant.. p. 206. Habit. In plurimis regnis Europeis ut in Suecia, Norvegia et Dania pluri- bus loeis sspe copiose, in Germania et Helvetia (Koeh Syn. Fl. Germ. et Helv.) in Gallia rarissime (Gren. et Godr. 1. c.), in Rossia media et australi (Ledeb. Fl. Ross.). — A Nym. Syll Fl. Europ. l. c. indicatur prseterea lectum in Austria, Anglia et Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 6 42 N. JOH. SCHEUTZ, Scotia, Lombardia et Transsilvania. — In Asia lectum in regionibus transcaucasicis atque in Sibiria altaica indicat LepEBourR (Fl. Ross. 1. e.) (v. v.). Hujus speciei polymorphe tres forme distinguuntur: a) typicum, quod haud dubie est forma normalis speciei, una, quam copio- sius legere licet, eademque forma vulgatissima. Syn. plurima supra allata: G. intermedium ß dolichopogon: floribus majoribus, styli articulo superiore longiore plumoso. — C. A. Meyer Ind. sem. hort. Petrop. XI, p. 42. Hoc magis ad G. rivale accedit. B) Ehrharti. Est forma recedens, forsitan hybrida nee ullo modo potest ha- beri pro forma primaria; est rarissima, paucis modo sparsis speciminibus occurrit. Syn. G. intermedium Ehrh. verum! ex C. A. Meyer, qui specim. authent. examinavit. — Rupr. Petrop., p. 64. G. intermedium & brachypogon: floribus minoribus; styli articulo superiore plumoso hirto brevi. — C. A. Mey. I. e. — Hoc magis ad G. urbanum accedit. — Teste Meyer habitat in Germania prope Hannoveram et Berolinum atque in Rossia prope Petropolin. y) Willdenowii (Mey. Ind. hort. Petr. XI, p. 44), quod Meyer dicit esse quasi formam intermediam inter G. strictum et rivale, sed me judice ad G. intermedium nimis aecedit. Patria ejus ignota, tantum in hortis botanicis invenitur. Forte hybri- dum 1. eulturz filia. Syn. G. Willdenowü ©. A. Mey. I. c. — G. intermedium Willd. hort. Berol., t. 69. A G. intermedio a et B differt petalis obovato-subrotundis, subsessilibus, calyce paulo longioribus — in illis petala sunt obovata basi distincte attenuata calyce ple- rumque breviora. — Styli artieulus in @. Wi//denowii Mey. deseribitur basi hirtulus, non plumosus. — Specim. in horto Ups. culta vidi. Hee species, eujus modo forma « in Scandinavia lecta, est aperte inter- media inter G. urbanum et G. rivale, quare a nonnullis putatur hybrida. At non po- test non considerari ut species genuina, quum passim suis locis copiosa; testibus FRIESIO aliisque e semine cultum constans sit, et cum Geo rivali floreat, priusquam G. urba- num florere ineipiat. Reliquæ formæ facile hybrids 1. culturæ filiæ. — Specimina scandinavica deseribam. Planta modo crescendi ad G. rivale multo magis quam ad G. urbanum accedit. Caulis bipedalis et ultra, gracilis, angulatus, inferne virens, superne rubens. Folia pubescentia, radicalia lyrato-pinnatipartita, caulina tripartita vel subternata. Stipulæ subovatæ, incisæ. Et folia et stipulæ magis stipulis et foliis G. urbani quam G. rivalis similia sunt. Flores sæpissime cernui, primo companulati, postea patentes, subrotati. Calyx eglanduloso-villosus, rubieundus, laeiniis longissi- me acuminatis, trinervibus, extus rufescentibns, intus livido-flavescentibus. Petala lutea, obovata, non emarginata, in unguem cuneatum brevissimum attenuata. Carpella pilosa, styli articulo superiore basi piloso vel hirto-plumoso. Carpophorum sessile. Obs. 1. Utrum G. intermedium G. rivali an G. urbano propius sit, inter bo- tanicos semper fuii magna dissensio. Me judice est proximum G. rivali, a quo dif- PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLÆ GEORUM. 43 fert calyce patente, petalis non emarginatis, brevissime unguiculatis, horizontaliter patentibus, capitulo earpellorum sessili atque herba pallidiore. A G. wrbano digno- seitur calyee rubieundo, horizontali nee post anthesin reflexo, petalis in unguem bre- vem subito attenuatis, pilis ad basin articuli superioris styli longioribus, floribus fere semper nutantibus, qui sunt duplo majores quam flores G. urbani. Obs. 2. Magnitudinem florum G. intermedii variam esse, jam observat illustr. KocH, qui e seminibus unius plantz obtinuit varietates floribus magnitudine Gei ri- valis et duplo minoribus. Obs. 3. G. intermedium typieum e seminibus facile educatur nec hybrida pro- les videtur. Sed in hortis botanicis, ubi complures species prope alias una habitant, stirpes hybride faeilius naseuntur; sie in horto Upsal. G. intermedium falsum, teste Prof. FRIES, enatum fuit a typieo G. intermedio et G. urbano. * GEUM RUBIFOLIUM Lej. foliis radiealibus lyrato-interrupte pinnatipar- utis, caulinis tripartitis (rarius pinnatipartitis) petalis fulvis obovato- rotundatis in unguem lamina triplo breviorem abrupte attenuatis, caly- cem suberectum fusco-purpureum superantibus; carpellis et styli Gei intermedii; carpophoro sessili. Syn. G. rubifolium Lejeune in Lej. et Court. Comp. Fl. Belg. 2, p. 150. — Lej. Rev. Fl. Spa, p. 103. — Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 551. G. intermedium B petalis fulvis Koch Syn. Fl. Germ. et Helv. 1, p. 183. Habit. in Belgia (Lej. 1. e); in Germania (Koch I. c.). — In horto bot. Upsa- liensi cultum vidi. Ipse per aliquot annos in meo hortulo colui ex planta viva Upsa- liensi, quam cum aliis Geis amic. TH. M. FRIES misit (v. v.). A Geo intermedio satis differt: petalis latioribus fulvis, basi distinete attenua- tis, laciniis calycinis fusco-purpureis, ovatis, abrupte acutatis, floribus magis campa- nulatis, laeiniis superiorum foliorum eaulinorum aeutis. — Calycis colore magis acce- dit ad G. rivale quum ad G. intermedium, quocum vix conjungi potest. — Ut vero diligentius observetur, addo Lesnunu (Rev. Fl. Spa) diagnosin Gei rubifolii, que hee est: "floribus erectis, petalis longitudine calycis, foliis radicalibus lyrato-pinnatis , superiorum lobis acutis cuneiformibus basi longe auriculatis, aristis primum gyroso- genieulatis dein uncinatis." — Specimina, quotquot vidi, habent pedunculos eurvatos et flores nutantes. 24. GEUM RUBELLUM C. A. Mey. foliis radicalibus pinnatipartitis, laciniis quinque superioribus subæqualibus, terminali triloba; foliis caulinis tri- partitis; petalis rubellis calycem campanulatum fere zequantibus , abrupte in unguem laminam subreniformem equantem attenuatis, non emargi- natis; carpellis hirsutis; styli artieulo inferiore longitudine carpellum subduplo excedente; carpophoro subsessili, pilosissimo. Syn. G. rubellum C. A. Mey. Ind. sem. hort. Petrop. XI, p. 45. 44 N. JOH. SCHEU1Z, Habit. Patria ignota. — Ex horto Petrop. eultum in horto Upsaliensi, unde specc. herb. Fries. Anno 1868 in horto bot. Christian. colebatur (v. v.). Haud dubie maxime affine Geo rivali, precipue forma florum et carpophoro paulum elongato; sed mox distinctum floribus erectis vel erectiusculis, petalis non emarginatis atque foliis elegantioribus. — Caulis et calyx ut in Geo rivali rubieundi. Folia pubescenti-pilosa, radiealia pinnatipartita, laciniis subæqualibus, duabus infimis parvis, terminali triloba. Folia caulina tripartita, petiolata, laeiniis aeutiuseulis. Sti- pul: ovate, incisæ, virides. Flores pauci, duo vel tres, terminales, primo campanu- lati, postea patentes. Laciniæ calycine atropurpureæ, eglanduloso-pubescentes, pa- tentes, petala rubella æquantes. Obs. Species sectionis Pseudo-Caryophyllatz petalis Gei rivalis distineta, — Carpella sunt similia carpellis G. urbani. Sect. VI. PSEUDO-SIEVERSIA €. A. Mey. Ind. sem. hort. Petrop. XI, p. 52 (adjectis variis speciebus). Calyx quinquebracteolatus, erecto-patens. Carpophorum sessile vel breviter stipitatum. Styli annulato-geniculati, articulo inferiore carpellum atque styli articulum superiorem æquante (in G. inclinato styli plumosi, supra mediam partem geniculati). Petala calyce distincte majora. Folia radicalia lyrato-pinnatipartita, laciniis lateralibus plerumque numerosis par- vis, terminali maxima subreniformi. Folia caulina minora, vulgo sim- plieia. Flores speciosi, erecti vel subnutantes, flavi. Plante habitu Sieversiz; accuratius comparatz videntur distinctissimæ, qua- rum quattuor species proponuntur, G. silvaticum, G. pyrenaicum , G. inclinatum et G. capense, jam antea distincta. Harum ultima species est capensis, qua excepta nullum Geum nisi G. silvaticum in Africa lectum est. — Preterea hue pertinet G. tyrolense, quod G. inclinato subjungendum censeo. 25. GEUM SILVATICUM Pourr. foliis radicalibus lyrato-pinnatipartitis, la- ciniis lateralibus minimis, paucis, subrotundis; lacinia terminali maxima ovato-cordata; foliis caulinis parvis tripartitis vel incisis; petalis flavis obeordatis, calyce erecto-patente triplo longioribus, vix unguiculatis; carpellis maximis pubescentibus; styli articulo inferiore longitudine car- pellum atque styli articulum superiorem subhispidum æquante; carpo- phoro elongato pilosissimo. Syn. G. silvatieum Pourr. Act. toul. ex Dec. Fl. Frane. 5, p. 544. — Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 552. — Fischer et Trautv. Ind. sem. hort. Petrop. III, p. 37 et in Linnea XII, p. 96. — Mey. Ind. sem. hort. Petrop. XI, p. 36. — Gren. et Godr. Fl. de France Propromus MoNOGRAPHLE GEORUM. 45 1, p. 520. — Nym. Syll. Fl. Europ., p. 273. — Lange Pug. plant., p. 338. — Kerner in (Esterr. bot. Zeitschr. 1867, p. 106. G. atlantieum Desf. Fl. atl. 1, p. 402. — Willd. Sp. plant. 2, p. 1116. — Pers. Syn. 2, p. 57. — Poiret Enc. suppl. I, p. 617 et 5, p. 574. — Spreng. Syst. Veget. 2, p. 542. — Trattin. Rosae. Monogr. 3, p. 128. ‚ 0G. biflorum Brot. Fl. lusit. 2, p. 553 et Phytogr. lusit., p. 196 et tab. 80. G. montanum Gouan ex Steud. Nomenel. bot. Dec. (Cfr Trattin.). Habit. in Gallia meridionali ad mare mediterraneum, ut Murviel prope Mont- pellier (herbb. FRIES ot LANGE), Narbonne (herb. Fries), in Provence (herb. Holm.), Toulon (GREN. in herb. ZETTERSTEDT) aliisque locis ejusdem regionis (GREN. et GODR. l e), in Hispania, ut Sierra de Alfacar fl. granat. (LANGE, Plant. Hisp. et in herb. Bryrr\, San Isidro prés Leon, Puerto de la inquisicion regn. granat. (herbb. LANGE et BLYTT), in silvis montanis ad Escorial, Castello de Noceda Galleciz orient. (herb. LANGE); in dumetis partis inferioris montis Peña de Oroél prope Jaca in Arragonia super. (WILLKONM in herb. mus. Hafn.); in Pyrenæis orient. prope Illiberim (Mon- TAGNE in herb. FRIES); in Lusitania sec. BRoTERO |. e. In Africa boreali-occiden- tali, ut Djebel Cheliah prov. de Constantine, Algerie (E. Cosson in herbb. FRIES et BLYTT); "páturages vers le sommet de la montagne de Gharrouban, au sud de Lalla- Maghrinia, ouest de la prov. d' Oran" (E. BourGEAU pl. d'Algerie in herb. Hafn.); in monte Atlas prope Tlemsen (WıLLD., TRATTIN aliique) (v. s.). Tota planta pubescenti-pilosa, gracilis, pedalis vel semipedalis. Rhizoma obliquum, cortice fusco, crassitudine penne anserinæ, interdum digiti minimi, subtus radieulis minimis instruetum. Caules fere nudi ob parva folia caulina, pauci ex eadem radice, erecti vel erectiusculi, simplices, uni- vel biflori (ex BROTERO interdum tri- flori. Folia mollia, velutina, radiealia pauca, interrupte-pinnatipartita, serrata, laci- niis lateralibus utrinque 2—5 subrotundis, minimis; lacinia terminali maxima indivisa, sublobata, ovato-cordata, tertia parte longiore quam lata. Folia caulina obovata, in planta spontanea, quæ semper est humilior quam culta, parva, lobata vel laciniata, laciniis acutis. Stipule magne ovate, incisæ. Flores flavi, erecti vel paullulum nu- tantes. Laciniæ calycine virides, petalis + breviores, sub anthesi erecto-patule, dein subreflexæ. Petala patula, latiora quam longiora, basi breviter attenuata, sæpe ci- liata. Carpella stylis deflexis rigidis, glabris instrueta, majora quam in ceteris spe- eiebus (carpella sunt duplo vel triplo majora, quam in Geo rivali), si G. inclinatum exceperis, ideoque minus numerosa, undique dense et adpresse pubescentia, pilis mol- libus brevioribus pilosa, non hirta. Carpophorum stipite 1—3 lin. longo suffultum, pilis rigidulis earpophori diametro vix longioribus hirsutissimum. Obs. Planta habitu Sieversiæ, affinis G. montano, a quo tamen differt aristis contortis nec barbatis; propius accedit ad G. pyrenaicum, quod tamen notis sub eo allatis, differt. — Longitudo earpophori variat; jam brevius, jam longius calyce re- peritur carpophorum. 26. GEUM PYRENAICUM Willd. foliis radiealibus lyrato-pinnatipartitis, la- einiis lateralibus minimis, numerosis, subovatis, lacinia terminali maxi- ma orbiculato-reniformi; foliis caulinis parvis, inciso-dentatis; petalis 46 N. JoH. SCHEUTZ, flavis obcordato-rotundatis, calyce erecto-patente longioribus, brevissime unguiculatis; carpellis valde pilosis; styli articulo inferiore longitudine carpellum atque articulum superiorem hirtum æquante; carpophoro ses- sili pilosissimo. Syn. G. pyrenaicum Willd. Sp. plant. 2, p. 1115. — Dec. Fl. Franc. 4, p. 472. — Dec, - Prodr. 2, p. 552 (excl. Syn. G. inclinat. Schleich.). — Trattin. Rosac. Monogr. 3, p. 124. — Hill. prolif. Bl. 4. — Ramond Bull. phil. 1800 N:o 42 t. X fig. 9. — Romer Fl. Eur. 14, 2 (sec. Pritzel). — Benth. Cat. des plant. des Pyren., p. 81. — Gren. et Godr. Fl. de France 1, p. 520. — Zetterst. Plant. vascul. des Pyren. princ., p. 80. — Kerner in Œsterr. bot. Zeitschr. 1867, p. 106. Caryophyllata pyrenaica amplissimo folio et rotundiore, mutante flore. Tournef. Inst., p. 295. Geum Tourneforti Lap. Hist. abr. des plant. des Pyren., p. 292. Habit. in alpibus Pyrenais, ut mont de Carlitz (GREN. et herb. FRIES), pres de Gèdre. hautes Pyrén. (LAGGER in herbb. FRIES. et Holmiens.), Pyrén. central. ut pie de Gard et Marboné (herb. ZETTERST.) aliisque locis Pyrenæorum (W. P. Scuim- PER in herb. Holmiens.). Couplan audessous d'Arragnouet, vallée d'Aure (Fl. Gall. et Germ. exs. C. BiLLoT in herb. Holmiens.) (v. v.). Caulis erectus, pedalis vel sesquipedalis, pubescenti-pilosus, uni-quadriflorus. Folia dense sericeo-pilosa, radicalia lyrato-pinnatipartita, utrinque pilis tecta, laciniis lateralibus ovatis, numerosis (utrinque sepe 7—8) approximatis, minoribus; lacinia terminali 1—2 uncialis, orbiculato-reniformis, maxima, subtriloba, crenato-dentata. Folia caulina parva cuneiformia, inciso-dentata, acuminata. Stipule oblong, pro- funde dentate. Flores erecti, flavi. Laciniæ calycinæ virides, sub anthesi erecto- patentes, postea reflex. Petala subrotunda, apice emarginata, calyce fere duplo longiora. Carpella hirsutissima, pilis longis hirsuta, ovata, duplo minora quam in G. silvatieo. Carpophorum pilosum, exacte sessile, pilis rigidulis multo longioribus quam pilis earpophori Gei silvatiei densissime pilosum. Obs. 1. Affine Geo silvatico, a quo differt defectu carpophori, carpellis mi- noribus, styli articulo superiore magis piloso, floribus fere duplo majoribus, forma la- cinie terminalis foliorum radicalium ut etiam laeiniis lateralibus numerosioribus. — Ex observatione Boïssrert (Voy. bot. dans l'Europe 2, p. 200) in G. silvaticum trans- ire dieitur, sed nullos transitus Cel. Prof. J. LANGE (ex verbis ipsius) vidit. Speci- mina, qu: examinare mihi lieuit, talem transitum inter G. silvaticum et G. pyrenai- cum non preebent. Obs. 2. Quomodo hsc species villosa, habitu Sieversiæ insignis, a Willde- now. existimari possit affinis G. rivali, a quo longius distat et floribus et stylis et foliis, non intelligo. Obs. 3. Illustr. Koch in Synop. fl. Germ. et Helvet. ed. 3, p. 183 dixit, Geum pyrenaicum esse "speciem dubitationibus obrutam", quum WILLDENOW carpel- lorum aristas nominarit hirsutas, DE CANDOLLE vero eas descripserit glabras, La- PEUROUSE diagnosin Willdenowii receperit immutatam et SERINGE denique in Dec. Prodromo G. inclinatum Schleich. cum signo! sub G. pyrenaieo Dec. induxerit. Hosce PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLE GEORUM. 47 nodos ita solvendos puto; pili superioris articuli styli, seminibus maturescentibus, de- eidunt ante casum articuli, qui deinde descriptus est nune glaber, nune pilosus. Obs. 4. Cel. TImBAL-LAGRAVE in Bulletin de la Soc. Botan. de France 1869, Appendix; session extraord., p. XII—XIV descripsit Geum pyrenaico-rivale, cujus sy- nonymon affertur G. inelinatum Timbal, Baill. et Jeaub. (non G. inclinatum Schleich. , a quo distinetum esse dieitur. Hoe G. pyrenaico-rivale, quod teste deteetore est forma hybrida, characteribus magis ad G. pyrenaicum quam ad G. rivale accedit. Distinguitur quidem defectu earpophori manifesti, foliis amplexicaulibus, petalis flavis; sed petala sunt rubro-striata, sæpe obeordata atque basin versus attenuata; calyx non viridis nee flavescens, sed atropurpureus; flores non erecti sed inclinati vel penduli — quie nota satis indieat transitum ad G. rivale. Habit. in Pyrenæis, "páturages du sommet de Cagire" (TIMBAL-LAGRAVE Mees) niv: 27. GEUM INCLINATUM Schleich. foliis radicalibus lyrato-pinnatipartitis , laciniis lateralibus basin versus decrescentibus numerosis; lacinia termi- nali orbieulata; foliis caulinis tripartitis; petalis flavis subrotundis, vix unguiculatis, calycem erectum æquantibus; carpellis pilosis; styli arti- eulo plumoso supra mediam partem geniculato, articulo inferiore su- periorem bis superante: carpophoro subsessili, pilosissimo. Syn. G. inclinatum Schleich. Cat. plant. in Helv. nasce. 1815 et 1821. — Koch Syn. Fl. Germ. et Helv., p. 183 (excl. synon. omnibus preter Schleicheri). — Gren. et Godr. Fl. de France 1, p. 521. — Schur Enum. plant. Transs., p. 184 (excl. syuon. G. pyrenaicum Willd. et G. Tournefortii Lap.). . pyrenaicum Wimm. Fl. von Schles., p. 152. . rivali-montamun Kittel Taschenb. 2, p. 1075—1076 (ex Schur). . montano-rivale Rehnb. Pl. crit. (ex Schur). . Thomasianum Ser. in Mém. soc. phys. gen. 2, p. 140 et in Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 552? . sudeticum Tausch. Hort. Canal. En., p. 90 et plant. exs. sel. bohem. RDA MWAHR Habit. in Helvetia (herb. mus. Holmiens. spec. a BERNHARDI missum; herb. FRIES, spec. a SCHLEICHERO missa) ut Bonaz sur Bex (LAGGER in herbb. FRIES et ZETTERST.) In Sudetis Germanie (Kock |. e.), in alpibus Transsilvaniæ (Scuur l. e.) et Galliæ (GREN. et Gopr. |. e). In Pyrenæis? (v. s.). Species stylis plumosis insignis atque a reliquis Pseudo-Sieversiis facillime cistineta. — Planta pubescenti-pilosa, pedalis et ultra, habitu Sieversiæ. Folia radi- calia lyrato-pinnatipartita; laciniæ laterales basin versus sensim decrescentes, utrin- que 7 vel 8 parvi; laeinia terminalis orbicularis (basi rotundata vel cuneata nec cordata) Folia caulina trifida vel tripartita. Flores mutantes, flavi, satis magni. Calyx viridi-purpuraseens. Carpella magna atque ob eam causam minus numerosa. Styli geniculato-suberecti (non annulato-geniculati) infra geniculum nudi. Obs. 1. Hoe Geum haud dubie proximum est Geo pyrenaico, quare a bota- nicis quibusdam cum illo eonfunditur; differt tamen forma foliorum, stylis duplo lon- 48 N. Jom. SCHEU1Z, gioribus, plerumque inde a basi usque ad apicem barbato-plumosis, eireiter 2 longi- tudinis articulatis. — Longius distat G. silvaticum, quod et ab hoe et a G. pyrenaico differt carpophoro distineto alique notis. Obs. 9. Geum inclinatum ex opinione cel. KERNER est modo hybrida proge- nies ex G. rivali et G. montano. Hoc vero plurimis locis satis copiose lectum sem- per conforme est et in hortis persistens, quare cum plurimis auctoribus distinetum servavi. — Aliud insuper C. Kerner describit in Œsterr. bot. Zeitung 1867, p. 105, Geum tyrolense, quod a G. inclinato differat (vide infra) et hoe hybridum esse facile credimus, cum paucissima tantum lecta sint exemplaria. Cel. KERNER hoc modo di- stinguit 1. c. G. inclinatum et G. tyrolense: Geum inclinatum, flores expansi; petala patula suborbiculata, in unguiculum brevissimum subito contracta, sepala parum excedentia. Rostri articulus inferior elon- gatus, 12—20 m.m. longus sicuti articulus superior tota longitudine pilis longis tenuis- simis ciliatus. Geum tyrolense (quod etiam KERNER appellat G. superrivale-montanum), flo- res campanulati; petala erecta, obovata in unguem magnum sursum attenuata, sepala æquantia. Rostrum inferius 5—6 m.m. longum sicuti articulus superior apicem ver- sus glaber. Perpauca G. tyrolensis specimina lecta ad rivulum alpinum montis Patschen- kofel prope Œnipontium, altitud. 6000 ped., solo schistoso. Obs. 3. Inter Gea hybrida, que a TrwBAr-LaGRAvE in Bulletin de la Soc. Botan. de France 1869, Appendix; session extraord., p. XII—XIV afferuntur, hee quoque sunt: 1. G. montano-rivale, quod idem esset ae G. hybridum WULF. et JACQ., quocum etiam G. inclinatum SCHLEICH. conjungitur. 9. G. silvatico-rivale, quod est G. Thomasianum SER. TrwBAL-LAGRAVE igitur censet G. Thomasianum Ser. esse distinctum a G. inelinato Schleich. Plu- rimi vero censent, G. inclinatum Sehleich. et G. Thomasianum Ser. esse unam eandemque speciem. Obs. 4. Species, que sunt medi: inter duas alias, plerumque nunc existi- mantur hybridæ, et multe tales forme, easu orte, sunt modo digne, que sub spe- ciebus primariis annotentur. Quod si copiosius leguntur semperque acute limitatz, (hybrid: sine limitibus plerumque confluunt eum parentibus) propria historia vegeta- tionis et distributione geographica gaudent atque e seminibus facile educuntur, pro veris speciebus habeantur; est enim temerarium in genealogia hybridarum exploranda intricari. Species et plantas hybridas ita distinguendas censemus: species ipsæ se- mina producunt, e quibus forme similes plante maternæ oriantur, quum contra se- mina hybridarum abortiunt, nisi feeundata fuerint ab altera parentum, ad quas tem- poris progressu tali modo sensim transeunt et quasi redeunt. 28. GEUM CAPENSE Thunb. foliis radicalibus lyrato-pinnatipartitis , lacinia terminali maxima, ovato-subreniformi; foliis caulinis parvis, simplicibus incisis; petalis flavis rotundato-obovatis, calyce semper erecto fere duplo PRODROMUS MoNocGRAPHLE GEORUM. 49 longioribus; carpellis valde pilosis vel pubescentibus; styli articulo in- feriore carpello et artieulo superiore glanduloso-piloso zequilongis; car- pophoro subsessili, dense pubescente. Syn. G. capense Thunb. Prodr. Fl. capens. 2, p. 91. — Dee. Prodr. 2, p. 553. — Wik- ström in Svenska Vetensk. Akad. handl. 1822, p. 383. — Meyer Ind. sem. horti Petrop. XI, p. 38. — Harvey and Sonder Fl. capens. II, p. 289. Habit. in Promontorio bone spei, ubi noster THUNBERG detexit et ad Riet- valley legit (herbb. THUNB. et mus. Holmiens.); deinde complures legerunt in pro- montorio bone spei ut ECKLON (herbb. HORNEM. nune mus. Hafniens. et mus. Hol- miens.) et DRÈGE (herb. Fries) atque ad Eastern Frontier, Henry Hurron (herb. Fries). — In Cagraria, ut in locis parum humidis apud "Salatkraal" prope Grahams- town (Albany) tum in pascuis graminosis laterum montis ” Chamiberg” haud procul a sedibus ”Tyali” Caffrorum prineipis (herb. mus. Hafniens.) et ad Katrivier (DREGE in herb. LANGE) aliisque locis Albany et Caffraria (Harvey et SOND. |. c.) (v. s.). Eximia species, a ceteris facile distinguenda habitu amceno. — Radix lignosa, fasciculata. Caules pubescentes, pauciflori, erecti, pedales et ultra, inferne subteretes sursum subangulati et foliati, uni-quadriflori, paullum ramosi. Folia eum petiolo pilis elongatis plurimis hirta; radiealia numerosa, hirsuta, longe petiolata, laciniis latera- libus inzequalibus, utrinque tribus-quinque, rotundatis, serratis; lacinia terminali late- ralibus majori, eordato-ovata vel subreniformi, crenata. Folia caulina pauea distan- tia, tripartita vel pinnatifida, subsessilia, minora. Flores erecti vel interdum cernui, post anthesin longe-peduneulati, campanulati. Calyx viridis, hirsutus, laciniis ovatis, bracteolis lanceolatis, semper erectis. Corolla flava. Petala basi sensim angustata, apiee rotundata, non emarginata. Carpella pilis mollibus elongatis pilosissima, nu- merosa. Carpophorum brevissime stipitatum, dense pubescens. Obs. 1. Flores in speciminibus Ecklonianis cernni, in Drégeanis suberecti, in speeiminibus Huttonianis (herb. FRIES) etiam suberecti videntur. Petala in specim. Ecklon. obovata, in specim. Drégean. oblongo-obovata. Obs. 2. Cel. WIKSTRÖM |. c. existimavit hoc Geum esse affine Geo montano, quod tamen longius distat et cum arista earpellorum continua (non articulata), tum foliorum forma aliisque multis notis distinguitur. Secr. VO. SIEVERSIA Willden. Berol. magaz. 1811, p. 397. — OREOGEUM Seringe in Mém. soc. phys. gen. 2, p. 139. Calyx quinquebracteolatus, erectus. Styli post anthesin erecti, pilosi vel interdum glabri, continui (nec ut in præcedentibus sex sectionibus arti- culati). Flores plerumque speciosi, albi, flavi, rarius purpurascentes. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 7 50 N. Jon. SCHEU1Z, Plante hujus subgeneris facilius distinguendæ quam plurimæ sectionum, quæ supra describuntur, quippe que minus variare videantur. Geum calthifolium et G. rotundi- folium fere sunt solæ species, quas distinguere haud ita facile est. — Sieversia, ex- cepta illa sectione Caryophyllastri, plures includit species, quam quævis septem sectio- num ceterarum; quas species ita disponere optimum mihi visum est. A. Stylis non articulatis pilosis. a. Stolonibus reptantibus. G. reptans. b. Stolonibus nullis. * Foliis radiealibus pinnatipartitis. G. montanum, G. glaciale, G. triflorum, G. micropetalum, G. Ane- monoides. ** Woliis radicalibus lyrato-pinnatipartitis, lacinia terminali maxima, late- ralibus parvis, paucis vel deficientibus. G. radiatum, G. Peckii, G. rotundifolium, G. calthifolium, G. albi- florum. B. Stylis non articulatis glabris. G. adnatum, G. Rossi, G. elatum. 29. GEUM REPTANS Linn. stoloniferum, foliis radicalibus interrupte pin- natipartitis superne latioribus, laciniis lateralibus inciso-serratis, serra- turis acutis subtrifidis, terminali 3—5-fida; petalis luteo-aureis calyce virente interdum atrorubente longioribus, breviter unguiculatis; carpellis stylisque villosis. ^ Syn. G. reptans Linn. Spec. plant., p. 717. — Willd. Spec. plant. 2, p. 1117. — Xit. Hort. Kew. 2, p. 219. — Trattin. Rosac. monogr. 3, p. 137. — Jacq. Fl. Austr. 5 app. t. 22. — Sturm Deutschl. Fl. 4, 14. — Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 553. — Bertol. Fl. Ital. 5, p. 294. -— Koch Syn. Fl. Germ. et Helv. 1, p. 183 — Gren. et Godr. Fl. de France 1, p. 521. — Schur Enum. plant. Transs., p. 184. Adamsia reptans Fisch. ex Steud. Nomencl. Caryophyllata reptans Lam. Sieversia reptans Spreng. Syst. Veg. 2, p. 543. — Nym. Syll. Fl. Europ., p. 273. Caryophyllata alpina, apii folio. Bauh. Pin. 322. Caryophyllata alpina tenuifolia incana, flore luteo, longius radicato. Barr. le. rar. 589, tab. 400. — Bocce. Mus. 160, t. 128 (ex Linn. Spec. plant.). Variat macrophyllum (Ser. mss in Dec. Prodr.) toliis stolonibusque maximis, laciniis foliorum grosse subduplicato-serratis. — Ad Gallenstock in Wallesia super. (Dee. Prodr. 2, p. 553). Habit. in jugis, rupibus et loeis glareosis summarum alpium ÆZuropæ medic et australis, ut Helvetiæ (herbb. mus. Hafn., LANGE et ZETTERST.), Austrie et Germanis (herbb. WAHLENB., FRIES, mus. Hafniens. et Holmiens., HARTM. et FR. PRODROMUS MoNOGRAPHLE GEORUM. 51 ARESCHOUG), Galli (herb. Lance, ZETTERST. et mus. Hafniens.), Hispaniæ ut in Pyrenæis (herb. Prins); Pedemontanæ et Lombardiæ ut Monte Viso (herb. WANLENB.), Croatiæ, Hungariæ et Transsylvaniæ (v. s.). Species venustissima, floribus elegantissimis ex auro (petalis) et purpura (calyce) inter nives alpium explieatis! — Tota planta nune hirsuta, nune parce pilosa et fere denudata presertim in foliis. Radix longa, fuseo-nigra, squamis rubido-fuscis superne tecta, unum rarius duo stolones emittens. Stolones pedales, rubri, foliis distantibus instrueti, non radicantes nec floriferi. Caules uniflori, 1—8 cæspitosi, erecti vel decumbenti-adscendentes, flexuosi, subpalmares, stolonibus plerumque bre- viores, foliis vero longiores. Folia radiealia ceespitosa, superne latiora; laciniis late- ralibus numerosis (circiter deeem utrinque) subreniformibus, profunde ineiso-dentatis, serraturis acutis, subtrifidis, basin versus decrescentibus approximatisque, terminali fere eonformi. Petioli basi valde dilatati. Folia caulina pauea, remota, trisecta vel triloba, vix petiolata, minora. Stipulæ ovato-lanceolatæ, acute, fere integræ. Flos erectus, brevissime pedunculatus, pedunculo apice inerassato et longissime villoso. Petala oblongo-obeordata, saturate lutea vel luteo-aurea, calyce longiora (interdum ex Bertoloni ealyeem æquantia). Calyx viridi-rubescens. Carpella sublinearia; styli vil- losi, interdum rubescentes. Carpophorum pilosissimum. Obs. Hane speeiem "corolla, aristis et toto habitu" adeo distinetam Trattin- nick existimavit, "ut forte proprium genus constituere mereretur, cui fortasse G. po- tentilloides subjungendum foret." — Nullas tamen video eaussas, cur hee a ceteris Geis in novum genus rejiciatur. 30. GEUM MONTANUM Liun. foliis radicalibus interrupte-lyrato pinnatipar- titis, laciniis lateralibus inæqualiter crenatis, terminali maxima, sub- cordata obtuse lobata; foliis caulinis minimis, trifidis vel tripartitis; pe- talis luteo-aureis, calyce longioribus, breve unguiculatis; carpellis sty- lisque villosis. Syn. G. montanum Linn. Sp. plant., p. 717. — Willd. Sp. plant. 2, p. 1116. — Ait. Hort. Kew. 2, p. 218. — Trattin. Rosac. Monogr. 3, p. 127. — Jacq. Fl. Austr. 4, > I 5 I 1 . 98, t. 373. — Dee. Prodr. 2, p. 553. — Lam. Encycl. 443. — Sturm Deutschl. P B p à Fl. 4, 14 icon. — Koch Syn. Fl. Germ. et Helv. 1, p. 183. '— Gren. et Godr. Fl. de France 1, p. 521. — Gren. Fl. de Jura, p. 207. — Lapeyr. Abr., p. 292. Zetterst. Pyren., p. 80. — Bertol. Fl. Ital. 5, p. 293. — Kerner in Œsterr. bot. Zeitschr. 1867, p. 107. — Schur Enum. plant. Transsilv., p. 184. Caryophyllata montana Scop. Carn. 1, p. 365. — Camer. epit. 727 (ex Linn.). Caryophyllata pinnis confertioribus extrema subrotunda, tubis vectis. Hall. Helv. 336. Caryophyllata lutea Bauh. Pin. 322. Sieversia montana Spreng. Syst. veg. 2, p. 543. — Nym, Syll. Fl. Europ., p. 273. Variat 8 multicaule (Ser. mss. in Dee. Prodr.) caulibus et floribus plurimis subeæspitosis. Habit. in alpibus Sabaudiæ. y minus (Pers. Ench. 2, p. 57) caule foliisque minoribus. Habit. in summis alpibus. 52 N. Jon. SCHEUTZ, Habit. in alpibus et subalpinis Zurope australis et medie, ut Helvetiæ (herb. WAHLENB. et mus. Hafn.) Austrie et Germaniæ (herb. FRIES, mus. Holmiens. et Hafniens., HARTM. et LANGE); Galliæ (herb. WAHLENB., FRIES, LANGE, ZETTERST. et mus. Hafniens. et Christian.); Hispaniæ (herbb. LANGE et ZETTERST.), Italiæ (herbb. mus. Hafniens. et LANGE), Croatiæ, Hungariæ, Transsilvaniæ et Macedoniæ (v. s.) Tota planta piloso-hirsuta. — Rhizoma fuscum. Caules solitarii vel plures cæspitosi, erecti vel adscendentes, uniflori, simplices, paucifolii, pollieares-pedales et ultra, pilosi, foliis paulo longiores. Folia radicalia ezsespitosa, hirsuta, laciniis utrin- que 8—10, basin versus decrescentibus, subrotundis, fere totum petiolum vestienti- bus; lacinia terminali subrotundo-ovata, crenata et irregulariter lobata. Petioli basi dilatati, striati. Folia eaulina minora, remota, tripartita, suprema simplicia laeiniis incisis vel dentatis. Folia omnia sunt viridia. Stipule semiovatæ, incisæ vel den- tate. Flos magnitudine fere floris Calthze palustris, patens, modo brevius, modo lon- gius peduneulatus, peduneulo fructifero erecto. Laciniæ calycinæ virides, petalis +—+ breviores, sub anthesi erecto-patulæ, postea subreflexæ. Petala patula, obcor- data, calyce fere duplo longiora, brevi-unguiculata, luteo-aurea. Carpella matura mi- nima, ovata, villosa; styli villosi demum sæpe rubescentes. Carpopborum puberulum. 31. GEUM GLACIALE Adams. foliis radicalibus interrupte pinnatipartitis ; laciniis lateralibus ovato-oblongis, summis imisque minimis, mediis ma- joribus subbifidis, terminali eonformi minima; foliis caulinis subtrifidis, petalis flavis suborbiculatis calyce longioribus; stylis villoso-barbatis, sub stigmate glabris. | Syn. G. glaciale Adams. in Mem. de la Soc. imper. de Nat. à Mose. 5, p. 96. — Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 553. — Torr. et Gray El. of North Amer. 1, p. 423. Adainsia glacialis Fisch. ex Steudel. Sieversia glacialis Spreng. Syst. veg. 2, p. 543. — Cham. et Schlecht. in Linn. 2, peo: NEED SRE Ross) 2 p 2D ER NB in Par VOV pM SDN Ledeb.). Habit. in Sibiria orientali ad flumen Lena ejusque ostium (REGEL in herb. Fries); in terra Tschuktehorum ad sinum St. Laurentii (Dr MERTENS in herb. FRIES), ad flumen Taimyr atque ejus ostium ins. Baer (herb. FRIES, ex Acad. Petrop., et Haf- niensi). Porro in America arctica ad Cap Lisburu (LEDER. l.c.) "shores of the arctic sea west of Mackenzie River” (Sir J. FRANKLIN) et ad fretum Behringii (Tor. et A. GRAY |. e.) (v. s.). Affine Geo reptanti, a quo tamen defectu stolonum reptantium semper dif- fert. — Planta tota villo dense vestita. Caulis uniflorus, digitalis, undique foliaque magine dense, in disco parce pilosa; pili molles longissimi, flavieantes. Folia radi- calia ezspitosa; laciniæ subbifidæ vel rarius trifidæ vel quadrifide. Folia caulina distantia, pauea, circiter quatuor, sessilia subtrifida, lobo medio plerumque longiore. Laciniæ foliorum apice callosæ. Flores flavi, majores, erecti. Calyx viridis, sub- erectus, villosus. PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLE GEORUM. 53 32. GEUM TRIFLORUM Pursh, foliis radiealibus interrupte pinnatipartitis , laciniis lateralibus cuneatis, inciso-dentatis, pilosis; foliis caulinis duo- bus supra mediam partem caulis, pinnatifido-laciniatis; petalis oblongis purpureo-albis, calycem atro-purpureum campanulatum | subzeqantibus; carpellis pilosis; stylis continuis villosis. e nA 2 . G. triflorım Pursh Fl. Amer. sept. 2, p. 736. —- Poir. Eneyel. suppl. V, p. 574. — Dec! Prodr 2, p. 553. — Tor. et Gray El. of North Amer. I, p. 423. — A. Gray Man. of the North Unit. Stat., p. 152. G. ciliatum Pursh. Fl. Amer. sept. 1, p. 352. G. Grahami Steud. Nomencl. Sieversia triflora Spreng. Syst. veg. 2, p. 543. — Richs. Appx Frank. jour. ed. p- 21. — Curt Botan. Magaz. vol. 55, t. 2858 Sieversia rosea Grah. New-Edinbg phil. journ. NIT, 193. m" Habit. in America septentrionali, ut in Louisiana superiore, ubi Bradbure de- texit, Wisconsin, Milwaukee (J. A. LAPHAM in herb. FRIES), Labrador, New-Found- land, Saskatehavan ete., Canada, White-Mountains of New-Hampshire, Watertown, New-York, Banks of Ohio, Illinois, Missouri and the vallies of the Rocky-Mountains (Torr. et Gray l.-e.) (v. v.). Puleherrima species, forsitan elegantissima omnium Georum, ab omnibus di- stinctissima, floribus G'ewm rivale in memoriam revocans. — Radix lignosa, subfusi- formis, complures radieulos emittens. Folia radiealia 5 vel 6 uncias longa, rosulata, laciniis basin versus decrescentibus; petioli dilatati, pilosi et suleati. Caulis simplex, triflorus, plerumque pedalis, teres, purpureus, pubescens, supra medium duo folia caulina vel bracteas duplo pinnatifidas, basi eonnatas gerens; umbella triflora termi- nalis. Flores suberecti, duo laterales bracteis duabus in medio pedunculo instrueti, flos vero centralis his caret. Calyx purpureus, erectus, campanulatus; laciniæ ovate, erectæ, bracteolæ angustiores, lanceolate, patentes. Petala oblonga alba, margine purpureo. Styli carpellorum longissimi villosi. Carpophorum conicum sessile, ut etiam in reliquis omnibus Sieversiis. Obs. 1. Quomodo TRATTINNICK hane plantam potuerit fingere affinem Geo montano, non video. Obs. 2. Geum triflorum et G. ciliatum Pursh esse unam eandemque speciem nersuasum habeo nee dubito @. ci/iatum afferre ut synonymon G. triflori, his præcipue nisus rationibus: 1) diaguosis Pursui usque ad singula verba transferri potest in G. trilorum; 2) G. ciliatum dicitur esse species elegantissima floribus Gei rivalis simi- libus; 3) A. Gray observat in Flora of North Amer., in Purshii herb. proprio G. cilia- tum non adesse atque in Purshii herbario canadensi hoc nomen adseriptum esse spe- eiminibus G. triflori! Quare Geum ciliatum, quod dicunt habitare ad ripas fluminis Kooskoosky, speciem jam diu dubiam delendam esse censeo. — Diagnosin G. ciliati videas in Dec. Prodr. et Pursh Fl. Amer. septentr. 54 N. JOH. SCHEUTZ, [2v] 3. GEUM MICROPETALUM Gasparr. foliis radicalibus lyrato-pinnatiparti- tis, laciniis oblongis, acute inciso-dentatis, terminali majore; petalis exiguis subrotundis, sordide flavis, calyce dimidio brevioribus; carpel- lis et stylis ineurvis continuis hirtis. Syn. G. mieropetalum Gasparrini Notizie de Alcune piante etc. II (ex Walp. Repert. bot.). Gasparr. Piante della Lucan. in progress. della Scienz. lett. ed art., p. 171, N:o 13 (teste Bertol.). — Tenore Napol. 4, p. 300 et Syn. in Add. et emend., p. 604. — Bertol. Fl. Ital. 5, p. 291. Sieversia micropetala Nym. Syl. Fl. Europ., p. 273. Geum rivale Tenore Syll. in add. et emend., p. 528 ex auctore (teste Bertol.). Habit. in Jéalia rarissime; ex Apennino Lucaniæ inter Muro et Laviano a Gasparrinio leetum habuit BERTOLONI (n. v.). Hirsutum. Folia et stipulæ G. urbani, sed dentibus acutis. Caules e radice plures, cæspitosi, crassiusculi, decumbentes, superne parce ramosi, palmares-pedales. Pedunculi terminales et alares, brevissimi erecti. Calyces quam in Geo urbano mi- nores, laeiniis alternis linearibus, dimidio et ultra brevioribus. Petala integerrima. — Quum ipse plantam non viderim, deseriptionem cel. Bertolini attuli, qui observat, se meliora ex sieco eruere non potuisse. 34. GEUM ANEMONOIDES Willd. foliis radicalibus pinnatisectis, glaber- rimis, laciniis lateralibus ovato-lanceolatis vel cuneiformibus, apice ser- ratis, basin versus decrescentibus, terminali conformibus; petalis obo- vatis vel late ellipticis albis, calyce viridi duplo longioribus, brevissi- me unguiculatis; carpellis stylisque villosis, sub stigmate glabris. Syn. G. Anemonoides Willd. Sp. plant. 2, p. 1117. — Pers. Syn. 2, p. 57. — Pursh Fl. Amer. sept. 1, p. 382. — Torr. et Gray Fl. of North Amer. 1, p. 423. — Trattin. Rosae. Monogr. 3, p. 138. — Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 553. Geum camtschaticum . Poir. Anemone pusilla Gaertn. Caryophyllata camtschatica Lam. Encycl. 1, p. 400. Dryas anemonoides Pall. It. 3 appx, N:o 92. Dryas pentapetala Linn. Amoen. Acad. ed. 3, II, p. 353. — Sp. plant., p. 717. — Gmel. Sib. 3, p. 187. Sieversia anemonoides Willd. Berl. Mag. 5, p. 398. — Spreng. Syst. Veg. 2, p. 543. — Ledeb. Fl. Ross. 2, p. 24. Steversia dryadoides Sieb. et Zuce. Habit. in Kamtschatka, inque insulis oceani orientalis ut Unalaschka (PALLAS, LEDEB., Torr. et Gray etc.), in insula Sachalin (GLEHN in mus. bot. Acad. Petropol., unde specc. in herb. Fries adsunt); in Nipon prov. Nambu in alpibus altioribus, ubi 1865 TscHawoskr legit (herb. FRIES ex herb. horti Petrop.) (v. s.). PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHIÆ GEORUM. 55 Variat 8 gracile (Regel! et Tiling); gracilius; foliis radicalibus pinnatisectis, laciniis pinnatipartitis serratisque, 7 vel 9. Syn. Sieversia anemonoides B Regel et Tiling. Steversia selinifolia Fischer ex Schmidt Reisen, Botanik 1868, p. 39 (sec. herb. mus. bot. Petrop.). Habit. Ajan ad mare Ochotselticum (herb. FRIES) (v. s.). Planta spithamæa, gracilis, glabra. Seapus vel peduneulus uniflorus foliis radiealibus duplo longior, foliis duobus minimis subintegris interdum instructus. — Graeilitate omnium partium et præcipue forma foliorum recedit. Herba suffrutieosa ut Dryas, cujus flores refert, glaberrima, semipedalis, in- ferne ramosa. — Radix perennis, longe descendens. Caulis inferne lignosus, adscedenti- erectus, superne ramis digitalibus instruetus. Rami petiolis persistentibus squamosi, apiee folia plurima atque in uno alterove ramo peduneulum uniflorum gerentes. Folia omnia ex apiee ramorum prodeunt, fere rosulata, glaberrima, 1—1 une. longa; la- ciniæ fere euneiformes vel obovato-lanceolatæ, utrinque tres, rarius dus, inæqualiter apice acute-serratis, basin versus integerrim:e, omnes conformes. Stipule angustis- sims. Flos circiter unciam latus, erectus; pedunculo unifloro, foliis duplo triplove lon- giore, glaberrimo. Laciniæ calycinæ patentes, ovato-ianceolate, bracteolæ lanceolate, utræque virides, glaberrimæ. Petala 5, patula, alba, staminibus albidis duplo lon- giora. Pistilla numerosa, stylis plumosis apice glabriusculis. — In scapo vel pedun- culo interdum adest folium unum integrum vel trifidum, minimum, bracteiforme. Obs. 1. LixNGUS hoe Geum, quod in plantis Camtschat. anno 1750 editis appellavit //ryadem pentapetalam, foliis pinnatis, descripsit distinetum ” stolonibus decumbentibus, apice frondescentibus, filiformibus lignosis.” Deinde fere omnes ut TRATTINNICK, SERINGE in Dee. Prodr., LEDEBOUR hane plantam utpote stolonibus reptantibus instructam descripserunt (SPRENGEL tamen de stolonibus tacet) — sed re vera nulli adsunt stolones; ex parte enim superiore rhizomatis vel caulis lignosi ori- untur rami breviores suberecti lignosi (qui nullo modo sunt decumbentes vel reptan- tes) valde diserepantes a stolonibus Gei reptantis. Ex apice caulis rarius, sed ex apice ramorum sæpius oritur peduneulus, qui folio uno minimo bracteiformi, foliis radiealibus dissimillimo, seepe est instruetus. Obs. 2. LiNNzEUS de hac planta in Amen. Academ. observat: "Habitus Po- tentille. Flos Fragariæ, fruetus Dryadis. Statura plante et fructus omnino Dryadis, a quo genere differt solo numero floris partium quinario.” — Idem existimavit, floris figuram et carpellorum aristam apice inermem vetare hane speciem associari Geis. Obs. 3. Hæc est species, quam WILLDENOW censuit typum generis Siever- sie, cuique prim: nomen Sieversiæ datum est. WILLDENOW ejus stylum dixit late- ralem, quem errorem R. Brown correxit. 35. GEUM RADIATUM Michx. foliis radicalibus hirsutis lyrato-pinnatiparti- tis; lacinia terminali maxima, late reniformi, profundius cordata (nec ad basin subtruncata); foliis caulinis amplexicaulibus, inciso-laceris; petalis 56 N. Jon. SCHEUIZ, luteis basi flavis, calyce vix duplo longioribus; carpellis pilosis; stylis villosis, superne glabris. Syn. G. radiatum Michx Fl. bor. Amer. 1, p. 300. — Dee. Prodr. 2, p. 554. — Torr. et Gray Fl. of North Amer., p. 423. — A. Gray Manual of the Botany of the North Amer. Unit. Stat., p. 152. Sieversia radiata R. Brown. Habit. in America septentrionali, ut in montibus Caroline (M. A. CURTIS in herb. FRIES, A. Gray in herb. mus. Hafn.) et Georgie (S. B. BuckLEY in herb. Fries et mus. Christian.) (v. S.). Hirsutum. Pedale et ultra, magis pluriflorum, quam G. Peckii eoque robu- stius. Caulis teres, hirsutus vel hispidus, 5—10 florus; superne in peduneulos divi- sus. Folia radiealia longe petiolata, lacinia terminalis maxima, late reniformis, in- ciso-dentata, dentibus inæqualibus sphacelatis; laciniæ laterales minute, plerumque tres utrinque, obovate, serrate. Folia eaulina duo-quatuor, obovata, triplo majora quam in Geo Peckii. Petioli foliorum radiealium hirsutissimi (in Geo Peckii pilosi). Flores brevius pedunculati quam in Geo Peckii, erecti, paniculati, lutei, magnitudine florum G. Peckii. Calyx hirsutus, erectus, fere dimidio brevior quam petala cuneato- obeordata. Petala lutea basique fulva, distinete venosa. Carpella pilosa; styli superne glabri, inferne villosi. Obs. Proxime aecedit ad Geum .Peckii, ut facile assentiar A. Gray (Man. of the Bot. of the North Amer. Unit. Stat.) afferenti G. Peckii ut varietatem G. radiate. Cum vero neutram speciem vivam examinare licuerit, utrum sint species distinetze nee ne, parum consultaneum mihi est dijudicare, quare ut duas proprias species ser- vavi, qnamvis forsitan inter se minus differant quam @. calthifolium et G. rotundi- folium. — @. radiatum differt a G. Peckii lacinia terminali foliorum radicalium pro- fundius cordata, radiatim nervosa, cujus lobi rotundati valde approximantur (nec la- cinia basi subtruncata); foliis eaulinis multo majoribus magisque incisis. Aureo-fulva hirsuties petiolorum radiealium et caulis in siecis est quoque insignis. 36. GEUM PECKII Pursh., foliis radicalibus glabriuseulis lyrato-pinnatipar- titis, lacinia terminali maxima, rotundato-reniformi, basi subtruncata; folis caulinis subnullis sed sub umbella bracteis cordatis, sessilibus; petalis flavis, ealyce duplo longioribus; carpellis pilosis; stylis villosis apice glabris. Syn. G. Peckiti Pursh Fl. bor. Amer. 1, p. 359. — Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 554. — Botan. Magaz., t. 2863. — Torr. et Gray Fl. of North Amer., p. 424. — Bigelow Fl. Boston. ed. 2, p. 208. — Spreng. Syst. Veg. 2, p. 543. G. radiatum B Peckii A. Gray Man. of the Botany of the North Amer. Unit. Stat., p. 152. Habit. in America septentrionali, ut in Nova Anglia in "White Mountains” (E. TuckERMAN in herbb. WAHLENB., FRIES, muss. Holmiens., Hafniens. et Christian, PRODROMUS MoNoGRAPHLE GEORUM. 57 A. Gray in herb. LANGE)”; in eollibus albis in New-Hampshire" (seeundum herb. mus. Holmiens.) (v. 8.). Glabriuseulum. Pedale et ultra, paueiflorum. Caulis teres pilosulus, 12— 18 unc. altus, 1—5-florus, plerumque quattuor floribus ornatus. Folia radicalia longe petiolata, pilosula; lacinia terminalis reniformi-eordata, erenato-dentata, subincisa, maxima, sspe 4—5 uncias lata, interdum palmaris; laciniæ laterales minute, ple- rumque tres utrinque, obovate, serrato-incisæ. Petioli foliorum radicalium pilosi. Folia eaulina duo-quatuor, minuta, sessilia vel potius amplexicaulia, inciso-laciniata. Flores plerumque paniculati, interdum solitarii, longe peduneulati, erecti, flavi, magni- tudine florum G montani. Calyx pilosus, erectus, dimidio brevior petalis flavis, di- stinete venosis, obovatis. Carpella pilosa; styli basi pilosi, supra medium glabri. Obs. Maxime affine G. radiato, ut pro illius forma glabrescente haberi possit; ab hoe tamen distinguendum: herba graciliore, plerumque humiliore, glabrescente, caule foliis minoribus instructo, lacinia denique terminali foliorum radicalium basi subtrun- eata. 37. GEUM ROTUNDIFOLIUM Langsd. foliis radicalibus subpinnatisectis, pilosis, lacinia terminali ampliori, cordata, subrotunda, subseptemloba, crenato-dentata; laciniis lateralibus duabus vel tribus minutissimis, di- stantibus multisve; foliis caulinis inciso-lobatis; petalis flavis calyce lon- gioribus, obovato-orbieulatis; carpellis pilosis, stylis ultra medium pi- losis apice glabris. Syn. G. rotundifolium Fisch. in Mém. de la Soc. des Natur. de Mose. II, fon JO. cm. il fig. 17 (ex Dedeb.),. — Tanesd. im Dec Prodr. 2, p. 552. — Drattin. Rosae. Monogr. 3, p 131. Steversia rotundifolia D. Dou mss. ex Walp. Repert. — Cham. et Schlecht. in Linn. IT, p. 4. — Ledeb. Fl. Ross. 2, p. 24. Adamsia rotundifolia Fisch. ex Steud. nomencl. G. calthifoliun B. votundifolium et y congestum Torr. et Gray Fl. of North Amer. 1 p. 424. — Walp. Repert. bot. i 2 Variat B congestum, humile, magis hirsutum, quod est Sieversia congesta R. Br. — Ex Unalaschka. Habit. in Kamtschatka (LEDEB.) inque insulis Unalaschka (herb. FRIES) et Sitka (herb. mus. Hafniens.) (v. s.). Hirsutum. Caulis pauciflorus. Laeinia terminalis foliorum radicalium cordato- orbiculata vel subreniformis, sinu profundo, duplicato crenato-dentata. Folia caulina amplexicaulia, inciso-lobata. Stipulæ obovate, apice dentate. Petala late obcordata vel obovato-orbiculata. Obs. Hoe a cel. Lancsporrr detectum Geum Trattinnick putavit affine G. montano, a quo tamen longius distat preecipue foliorum forma aliisque. — In Dec. Prodr. SERINGE cel. monographus interrogat "an potius Gei rivalis varietas"? Ab hae vero planta longissime distat. — Me judice affine Geo calthifolio, quod differt Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 8 58 N. Jou. SCHEU1Z, laciniis calycinis lanceolato-ovatis, integris (in G. rotundifolio sæpe lateraliter minute bidentatis), foliis radiealibus longe aliis, caulinis petiolatis floribusque post anthesin longius peduneulatis aliisque notis. — Præterea specimina Gei rotundifolii, que vidi, sunt quatuor — octo uncias alta; Gei vero calthifolii pedalia et ultra. — Eorum sen- tentiam, ut Torrey et A. Gray (in Fl. of North America) sequi non possum, qui suadent conjungere G. rotundifolium eum G. calthifolio. Hee enim species, quantum video, sunt bene distincte. 38. GEUM CALTHIFOLIUM Menz. foliis radicalibus interrupte pinnatiparti- tis, lacinia terminali maxima, reniformi-rotundata, triloba, dentata; la- einiis lateralibus 6—9 utrinque, aliis magnis ovatis serratisque, aliis parvis fere integris, omnibus multo minoribus quam terminali; foliis caulinis tripartitis vel lyrato-pinnatipartitis; petalis flavis, rotundato- ovatis calyee paulo longioribus, carpellis pilosis; stylis longissimis plu- mosis, apice glabris. Syn. G. calthifolium Menzies ex Smith in Rees Cycl. v. 16. — Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 552. Sieversia dilatata W. Br. Sieversia calthifolia D. Don mss. Habit. in America boreali (MENZIES). — Plantam Hafniæ cultam Prof. J. LANGE mihi attulit viventem (v. v.). i Planta piloso-pubescens, pedalis et ultra. Caulis erectus simplex, paucifolia- tus (plerumque quinque foliis instructus), bi-vel triflorus. Folia radicalia spithamæa vel longiora, petiolis sulcatis. Folia caulina petiolata, lyrato-pinnatipartita vel tri- partita, inciso-serrata. Stipule petiolo adnate, incisæ. Flores lutei, erecti, magni fere campanulati, circiter unciam lati, nune brevius, nune longius peduneulati, pedun- culis rufescentibus. Calyx et sub anthesi et post eam erectus, viridi-purpurascens; bracteolæ lanceolate multo minores quam laciniæ calycinæ, late-ovate integerrime. Petala rotundato-ovata, vix emarginata, breviter unguiculata, flava venis distinctis, staminibus longiora. Styli persistentes sive carpellorum aristee duplo longiores quam calyx campanulatus, plumosi, rufescentes. Obs. Hane formosam speciem cum Geo rotundifolio conjungere non possum. Folia enim cum radicalia tum caulina maxime differunt; aliæ etiam differentiæ, ut ex descriptione patet, exstant, quare cum SERINGE aliisque ut duas distinctas species consideratas velim. — Re vera complures species Caryophyllastri et Caryophyllatze minus differunt quam Sieversiz universe. 39. GEUM ALBIFLORUM (Hook. fil.) foliis radicalibus interrupte lyrato- pinnatisectis, laciniis lateralibus minutis grosse dentatis, terminali ma- xima, orbiculari-cordata, obscure lobata, inzequaliter dentata; foliis cau- linis subsessilibus; petalis albis obovatis retusis, extus pilosis; laciniis calycinis patentibus, ciliatis; carpellis in stylum brevem rectum (nec genieulatum) attenuatis. PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLE GEORUM. 59 Syn. Steversia albiflora Hook. Fl. antarct. 1, p. 9 et tab. VII. Habit. in Australia in "Lord Aucklands’ group; rocky places on the hiles, alt. 1000 feet” (Hook. I. e.) (v. ic.). Planta parvula, forsitan species minima Sieversiarum. — Hirsutum. Radix repens, lignosa, subfusiformis, obliqua. Caules vel potius scapi prodeunt ex apice rhizomatis, ramosi, duplo vel triplo longiores quam folia radicalia, parce foliosi, tri- quinqueflori. Pedicelli superne incrassati, unibracteati, bractea sessili trifida. Car- pophorum elongatum, gracile. Obs. lllustr. Hooker observat hane speciem cum arctico Geo Rossii in eo convenire, quod habet "elongated receptacle, hispid as it were with persistent stipi- tes of the carpels." — Habitu videtur simile illis speciebus Americ australis Geo involucrato et G. parvifloro. 40. GEUM ADNATUM Wall. foliis radicalibus interrupte pinnatipartitis, la- ciniis approximatis, crenato-lobatis, supra villosis, subtus glabris, cilia- tis, lateralibus et terminali conformibus; foliis caulinis parvis pinnati- fidis vel trifidis; petalis . . . . calyce erecto puberulo; carpellis pilosis, stylis rectis glabris. Syn. G. adnatum Wall. Cat. 712. Sieversia adnata Don gen. Syst. 2, p. 527. Habit. in India orientali; Gossain than Nepalensium (mus. Holmiens. a WAL- LICH missum) (v. S.). Planta spithamea, vix pedalis, puberula. Caules adscendentes, uniflori, parce foliati, prodeunt ex una radiee complures. Folia radiealia caulibus paulo bre- viora, laeiniis utrinque decem-quindeeim, fere rotundatis, approximatis et petiolo quasi adnatis, basin versus decrescentibus. Laciniæ superiores magis approximate, fere alternæ, inferiores vero distantes opposite; lacinia terminalis similis superiorum laeiniarum lateralium, Laciniæ ealyeinz lato-ovate, puberulæ, braeteolis longe ma- jores. — Petala deficiunt in speciminibus, quæ vidi. 41. Geum Rossı (Rob. Brown) foliis radicalibus interrupte pinnati-parti- tis, laciniis glabris, ciliolatis, numerosis, trilobis vel inciso-serratis , imis nanis indivisis; foliis caulinis pinnatipartitis, laciniis indivisis, ple- rumque duobus; petalis flavis obovatis, calyce sesquilongioribus, venis omnino distinctis; carpellis hirsutis; stylis in fructu non exsertis, glabris. Syn. G. Rossi Ser. in Dec. Prodr. 2, p. 553. — Torr. et Gray Fl. of North Amer. 1, p. 424. Sieversia Rossi R. Brown in Parr. Voyage appx, p. 276, tab. c. — Cham. et Schlecht. in Linn. II, p. 5. — Hook. Fl. bor. Amer. 1, p. 176. — Spreng. Syst. Veg. 4, pars sec. p- 99. —— Pedeb. Bl (Ross: 2, ps) 20% Potentilla nivalis Torr. Ann. Lyc. New-York 1, p. 32, tab. 3 f. 2. 60 N. JOH. SCHEU1Z, Variat 8 humile; subsericeum, demum pubescens, caule 2—3 floro; laciniis foliorum numerosioribus aggregatis. Syn. G. Rossi B Torr. et Gray l. c. Sieversia humilis R. Br. l. e — Cham. et Schlecht. l. c. — Hook. I. c. Habit. in Kamtschatka in montibus altioribus Ganalski Chrebet (L. Baro KirTLITZ in herb. Ac. Petrop.) et in terra 'Tsehutchorum ad sinum St. Laurentii (CHAMIS. in herb. FRIES). In Unalaschka (Dr. Mertens in herb. Fries). In Ame- rica maxime septentrionali, ut in insula Melville (Ross., PARRY); "on James Peak of the Rocky Mountains about lat. 40°, at an elevation of 10,000 feet" (Dr. JAMES sec. TonREY et GRAY (v. S.). Herba plerumque tres, interdum quinque uncias alta. — Folia radicalia con- ferta, duas vel tres uncias longa; laciniis laieralibus utrinque quinque-decem et ter- minali conformibus, trilobis vel inciso-serratis. Caulis erectus, subuniflorus, subdi- phyllus. Flos circiter unciam latus. Calyx obconieus, ad basin hirsutus. 49. GEUM ELATUM Wall. foliis radicalibus interrupte lyrato-pinnatipartitis ; laciniis lateralibus subeuneiformibus dentatis, terminali majore, ovata, subtriloba, dentata; foliis caulinis oblongis, pinnatifidis; petalis flavis obcordatis, calyce campanulato duplo longioribus; carpellis stylisque glabris. f Syn. G. elatum Wall. Cat. 711. — Walp. Repert. bot. 2, p. 48. Sieversia elata Royle Illustr. Him. pl. 207, tab. 39 fie. 1. Geum Sieversii Hort. Upsal. sec. specim. in herb. FRIES. Variat 8 Awmile, caule unifloro, foliisque minoribus. Syn. Sieversia humilis Royle mss. Habit. in a/pibus Himalaye, in Sirmore et Kanaon (ROYLE l. e.). — In mus. Hafniensi adest ab ipso WALLICH communicatum (v. v.). Planta pulehra, ab omnibus Geis distinetissima, proxima Geo adnato, quoeum etiam stylis reetis glabrisque convenit. — Herba spithamæa, interdum pedalis, tota puberula vel inferne pilosa. Folia radiealia rosulata, caule fere longiora (sed ex Royle folia radiealia sæpe pedem longa), laeiniis numerosis instructa, inferne eireiter tertia parte sine laciniis. Laciniæ laterales, utrinque circiter duodecim, ali: majores fere euneiformes, apice (plerumque 5) serratæ vel dentate, aliæ minores integerrimæ. Folia eaulina multo minora quam radicalia, lanceolata, vel ovata vel oblonga. Stipule acute-dentatæ. Caules erectiusculi, pauciflori, in var. humili uniflori. Flores race- moso-paniculati in 3 solitarii, flavi, pedunculis 4—8 uncias longis. Calyx viridis ante florescentiam paullum pilosus, dein glabrescens, infündibuliformis vel fere campanu- latus; laciniæ calycinæ erectæ, integre, triplo saltim majores quam bracteole, omnes virides. Petala flava obovata, calyce fere duplo longiora. Stamina et pistilla ejus- dem coloris, corolla duplo breyiora. Obs. Geum Roylei WALL. ex Steudel mihi ignotum est; nec descriptum nec specimina vidimus. PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLE GEORUM. 61 SECT. VIII. STYLIPUS Rafin. Neog. ex Torr. et Gray. Calyx ebraeteolatus, laciniis reflexis. Carpophorum longe stipitatum, stipite exserto. Styli annulato-geniculati, elongati, artieulo superiore deci- duo. Flores parvi. Folia pinnatipartita, laciniis subæqualibus. Continet hae seetio unam speciem americanam, ab omnibus distinctam calyce ebraeteolato. — Convenit eum Caryophyllastris et Calligeis habitu et characteribus, exceptis ealyce semper atque constanter ebracteolato, carpophoro stipitato — hae nota cum Orthostylo et Caryophyllatis convenit. 43. GEUM VERNUM Torr. et Gray, foliis radicalibus rotundato-cordatis, 3—5-lobis vel pinnatipartitis; foliis caulinis pinnatipartitis, serrato- dentatis, laciniis subæqualibus, vel trisectis, ciliatis; petalis flavis ca- lycem ebracteolatum subæquantibus; carpellis numerosis scabris; stylis glabris, persistentibus, apice uncinato-geniculatis, styli articulo inferiore carpelli longitudine, articulum superiorem duplo excedente. Syn. G. vernum Torr. et Gray Fl. of North Amer. 1, p. 422. — Walp. Repert. bot. 2, p. 47. — Hook. Icon. plant. t. 286. — A. Gray Manual of the bot. of the North Amer. Unit. Stat , p. 152. Stylipus (vel Stilopus) vernus Rafinesque Neog. 3. — Short Suppl. cat. pl. of Ken- tucky, p. 599. Habit. in America septentrionali, ut Texas, Arkansas, Kentucky (C. W. SHORT in herb. mus. Christian.), Ohio ut Columbus (SULLIVANT in herb. FRIES), Illinois (herb. mus. Holmiens. et M. A. Curtis in herb. FRIES), Tennesse (S. B. BuckrEv in herb. mus. Christian.) (v. 8.). Subpubescens, pedale et ultra. — Radix fibris crassiusculis, fuscis instructa. Caules adscendentes plurimi ex eadem radice, simplices vel apice ramis gracilibus instructi, pauei-foliati, superne floribus paniculatis, striati. Folia pilosiuscula, omnia (supremis seu braeteis exceptis) sublonge-petiolata; radicalia cordata, obtusa, crenata, varie ineisa lobataque, eaulina trisecta vel pinnatipartita, laeiniis ovato-cuneatis, in- cisis vel serrato-dentatis, ciliatis, suprema lanceolata, ineisa. Stipule magne, ovate, inciso-dentatz vel serrate. Flores in ramis brevibus terminalibus, demum (post an- thesin) panieulam amplam formantes, erecti, parvi. Calyx obconicus, ultra medium quinquefidus, laciniis ovatis demum reflexis; bracteole nulle. Petala oblonga, lutea vel flava, ealycem fere :equantia, numquam superantia. Stamina plurima ad. oram tubi calycis inserta. Pistilla numerosa in eapitulum globosum brevi-stipitatum intra calycem congesta. Carpella ovata, stylo elongato, apice geniculata longe aristata, n eapitulum longe stipitatum collecta, stipite e calyce longe exserto. 62 N. JOH. SCHEUTZ, Obs. Hæc species primo adspectu a typo et habitu Georum tantum recedit, ut, si characteres respiciantur (in primis natura calycis), in proprium genus distin- guenda sit. Præeuntibus vero illustr. BENTHAM et Hooker, quum genus integrum ser- vaverim, hoe loco recepi, quamquam non minus differt a Geis sensu Endlicheri, quam Dryas a Sieversiis. SPECIES MINUS COGNIT &. GEUM PORTENSCHLAGIANUM Trattin. Rosae. Monogr., 3, p. 116 "caule tereti pubescente, ramis strictis, dichotomis; foliis radiealibus pinnatis , caulinis intermediis dilatato-trilobis, summis lanceolatis grosse dentatis, pubescentibus; peduneulis elongatis erectis, petalis calyce subæquali- bus; germinibus hispidis, aristis glabris, apice glochidiatis." Patria ignota. Affine Geo albo, ex Trattinick, eujus diagnosin attuli. — Si quid video, de- seriptione TRATTINNICKII comparata, vix est nisi. forma Gei albi. GEUM UMBROSUM Dumort. Fl. Belg. prodr., p. 97 "foliis inferioribus sim- plicibus trilobis rotundatis, superioribus ternatis cuneatis acutis; laci- niis calycinis petala excedentibus, lanceolatis, acutis; carpellis apice villosis, aristis hamatis erectis; stylis hirtis." Habit. in Belgia (Dum. 1. e.). GEUM INCISUM Dum. Fl. Belg. prodr., p. 97 "foliis radicalibus inferiori- busque pinnatis, primis lobatis incisis acutis, summis ternatis lanceola- tis acuminatis grandidentatis; petalis calyce longioribus; carpellis nu- merosis hirtis, aristis glabris; stylis hirtis." Habit. in Belgia (Dum. 1. c.). GEUM ROBUSTUM Schur. Transs., p. 183, proximum G. urbano, differt: "Oaulibus robustioribus, 2— 93 ped., patenti-pilosis; folis radicalibus infimisque lyratis, caulinis superioribus tripartitis, segmentis obovatis basi cuneatis, crenato-dentatis, margine subtusque pilosis; stipulis ma- ximis, subrotundis, grosse crenatis; floribus minimis erectis, petalis luteis obovatis calycem æquantibus; carpellis pilosis, aristæ artieulo in- feriori superiorem quater superante, articulo superiori piloso.” Ad mar- gines silvarum et in dumetis Transsilvaniæ. — "An G. stricto-urbanum?”. An hine G. spurium C. A. Mey.? PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLE GEORUM. 63 GEUM DUBIUM Hornem., quod C. A. Meyer existimavit synonymon G. bra- chypetali Ser. — G. alpinum Hornem. a Meyero refertur ad G. inter- medium 2, a nobis, auctore Friesio, ad G. brachypetalum, cujus sy- nonymon igitur G. dubium vix esse potest. GEUM FRANCKII Steud., cujus synonymon affertur G. parviflorum Hochst. ex Amer. septentr. GEUM HELVETICUM Schleich. ex Trattin. Rosac. Monogr. 3, preef. p. VIII. Ubi descriptum? GEUM RAFINESQUIANUM Steud. ex Amer. septentr. cujus synonymon di- citur esse G. nutans Planif. GEUM ROYLEI Wall. ex India orientali. SPECIES E GENERE EXCLUDENDZÆ. Geum cercocarpoides Dec. et Gewm dryadoides Dec. jam observante C. A. MEYER vel ad Cowaniam vel ad Fallugiam pertinent, genera inter se solum laciniarum calycinarum numero (5 in Co- wania, 10 in Fallugia) diversa. Geum Laxmanni Gertn. = Coluria geoides R. Br. Geum potentilloides Ait. = eadem! Geum chamedryfolium Crantz = Dryas octopetala L. Geum obliquum Steud. = Waldsteinia Mönckii Trattin. Geum paradozum Steud. = Fallugia mexicana Walp. 64 N. Jon. SCHEUTZ, SPECIERUM, VARIETATUM ET SYNONYMORUM. Adamsia glacialis Fisch. = Geum glaciale Adams. — réptans Fisch. = Geum reptans. Linn. — rotundifolia Fisch. = Geum rotundifolium Langsd. Anemone pusilla Gertn. = Geum anemonoides Willd. Caryophyllata Dod. Pempt. = Geum urbanum Linn. alba Mönch see. Steud. = Geum virginianum Linn. alpina tenuifolia incana flore luteo, longius radicato. Barr. rar. = Geum rep- tans Linn. aquatica floribus plenis magis nutantibus Cam. Epit. = Geum rivale hybri- dum (Wulf.). aquatica nutante flore Bauh. Pin. = Geum rivale Linn. camtschatica Lam. Eneycl. = Geum anemonoides Willd. lutea Bauh. Pin. = Geum montanum Linn. montana Comm. Hort. = Geum intermedium Ehrh. montana, flore pleno prolifero, folio Hederæ terrestris. Breyn, Cent. = Geum rivale hybridum (Wulf.). montana Scop. Carn. = Geum montanum Linn. nutans Lam. Encyel. = Geum nutans (Lam.) C. A. Mey. nutans Crantz Austr. = Geum rivale Linn. officinalis Ménch Meth. = Geum urbanum Linn. orientalis, flore magno coccineum. Tournef. Cor. = Geum coccineum Smith et Sibth. pinnis confertioribus extrema subrotunda, tubis rectis. Hall. Helv. = Geum montanum Jinn. prolifera, floseulis elegantissimis, Les. pruss. = Geum rivale hybridum (Wulf.). pyrenaica amplissimo folio et rotundiore, nutante flore. Tourn. Inst. = Geum pyrenaicum Willd. reptans Lam. = Geum reptans Linn. rivalis Scop. Carn. = Geum rivale Linn. sylvestris Fuchs Kreuterb. = Geum intermedium Ehrh. urbana Seop. Carn. = Geum urbanum Linn. virginiana Lam. see. Steud. = Geum virginianum Linn. vulgaris Bauh. Pin. = Geum urbanum Linn. Caryophyllata vulgaris majore flore. C. Bauh. et Raji Hist. plant. = PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLE GEORUM. dium Ehrh. yee Anemonoides Pall. It. = Geum Anemonoides Willd. , pentapetala Linn. = Geum Anemonoides Willd. em! adnatum Wall. Cat. . Agrimonioides Mey. Ind. sem. in Bete pl ; - Agrimonioides Pursh = Geum Agrimonioides Mey. ? albiflorum (Hook. fil.) . album Gmel. Syst. veg. SP E, ttacan HSE sr; aleppicum Jacq. Coll. ic. pl. rar. = Geum strictum Ait. alpinum Hornem. H. Hafn. en brachypetalum Ser. atlanticum Desf. Fl. atl. = Gum silvatieum Pourr. ambiguum Schur Herb. Transs. = Geum intermedium Ehrh. Anemonoides Willd. Sp. plant. . Anemonoides v. gracile Regel. sie piene s antareticum Herb. mus. Holm. = G. involucratum Juss. aurantiacum Fries . TIER cin ns: Besserianum Fisch. mss. = Geum strictum Ait. biflorum Brot. Fl. lusit. = Geum silvaticum Pouir. brachypetalum Ser. in Dec. Prodr. calthifolium Menz. ex Smith 65 Geum interme- calthifolium 8 rotundifolium Torr. et Gray = ‘Gam an) et calthifolium y congestum Torr. et Gray = Geum rotundifolium 8 congestum. camtschaticum Poir. = Geum Anemonoides Willd. canadense Jacq. Hort. Vindob. = Geum album Gmel. canadense Murr. Comm. Geett. = Geum strictum Ait. capense Thunb. Cap. JE RP ee hes le carolinianum Walt. Fl. Carol. — Geum album Gmel. caucasicum Hort. ex Mey. = Gers urbanum Linn. chamædryfolium Crantz = Dryas octopetala Linn. chilense Balb. in litt. ‘ cercocarpoides Dec. = Fallugia. ciliatum Pursh = Geum triflorum Pursh. coccineum Lindl. Bot. Reg. = Geum chilense Balb. coccineum yar. grandiflorum Lindl. = Geum chilense var. grandiflorum. coccineum Smith et Sibth. SASSER diversifolium Hort. ex Mey. = Geum strictum Ait. dubium Hornem.. . . . . Dryadoides Dec. = Fallugia. elegans Pópp. pl. exs. = Geum chilense Balb. ClatumuwviallaCate x à à us. ONE eine elatum B. humile Boyle), i - Fischeri Bess. in litt. = Geum ieu ju Franckii Steud. Ven geniculatum Michx Fl. bor. Amer. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. D. get » 58: 3 9922. 254. >» 55r SO! » 40. .» 58. » 48. »# 19. De "Od (Bh » 60. » 60. » 63. » 39. 9 66 N. JOH. SCHEUTZ, Geum glaciale Adams. Grahami Steud. Nom. = Geum triflorum Pursh. grandiflorum C. Koch in Linnæa = Geum coccineum Smith et Sibth. hederæfolium Gmel. = Geum urbanum Linn. helveticum Schleich. ex Trattin. heterocarpum Boiss. Voy. bot. heterophyllum Desf. H. Paris. et Dec. Prodr: = Cam virginianum tius hirsutum Mühlenb. in Link. h. Berol..= Geum virginianum Linn. hirtum Wahlb. = Geum urbanum £ hirtum (Wahlb.). hispidum Fries Fl. Hall. . rame Heu Ln He oJ: hispidum Germ. boreal. et Boruss. = Geum strictum Ait. hybridum Wulf. = Geum rivale monstr. hyrcanum C. A. Mey. . japonicum Thunb. Fl. Japon. japonicum Hort. = Geum strictum Ait. ibericum Bess. incisum Dum. Fl. [Ello inclinatum Schleich. Cat. plant. intermedium. Ehrh. emend. hos intermedium 8 braehypogon Mey. = Gers Wesce ferus 3 Ehrhartis intermedium y doliehopogon Mey. = Geum intermedium c Duy intermedium. B. Ehrharti DANS intermedium $ petalis fulvis Koch Su TL Gem et Hein, = Geum rubifolium Lej. intermedium y Willdenowii (C. A. Mey.) . . . 1 i intermedium Willd. H. Berol. = Geum iem dns y Willdenowii. intermedium Bess. = Geum strictum Ait. intermedium Baumg. Fl. Transs. = Geum urbanum Linn. involucratum Juss. ex Pers. Syn. et Dec. Prodr. laciniatum Murr. Comm. Gott. = Geum virginianum Linn. laciniosum Murr. ex Comm. Goett.? = Geum agrimonioides C. A. Mey. Laxmanni Hort. = Geum strictum f disseetum Fries herb. Laxmanni Gzrtn. = Coluria geoides R. Br. lyratum Hort. Windob. = Geum urbanum Linn. macedonicum Friv. It. ex Griseb. = Geum coccineum Smith et Sibth. maerophyllum Willd. et Ledeb. Fl. Ross. — Geum japonieum Thunb. macrophyllum Hook. bot. of Bechey = Geum strietum Ait. magellanicum Commers. ex Pers. Syn. eis oi Lee Bi magellanicum W. Lechl. pl. chilens. = Gon parviflorum Commers. (non Hook.). micropetalum Gasparr. . molle Vis. et Pane. . montanum Linn. montanum B multicaule Ser. montanum y minus Pers. pag. » » » 52 63. 18. 27. 41. 41. Geum montano-rivale Reich. PI. PRODRONUS MONOGRAPHLE GEORUN. montuno-rivale Timb. Lagr. . FR ttim head: montanum Gouan ex Steud. = Geum silvatieum Pourr. nutans (Lam. Eneyel.) C. A. Mey.. nutans Crantz Austr. = Geum rivale Linn. nutans Planif. = Geum Rafinesquianum Steud. obliquum Sens = Waldsteinia Mönchii Tratt. oregonense m. subsp. pallidum C. A. RON à paradoxum Steud. = Fallugia mexicana “Walp. BEDS bot. parviflorum Commers. ex Smith et Dec. Prodr. . rt parviflorum Hook. Fl. Antaret. = Geum involucratum Juss. parviflorum Hochst. = Geum Franckii Steud. Peckii Pursh. LETS id aod. ce t pietum Hort. = Geum rivale 0 grandifolium. Portenschlagianum "Trattin. . . Potentilloides Ait. = Coluria Geoides R. Um pyrenaicum Willd. Sp. plant. pyrenaicum Wimm. Fl. v. Schles. = 2 Go M Schleich. pyrenaico-rivale Timb. Lagr. AM pastels: Quellyou Sweet Flow. gard. = Geum chilense Balb. radiatum Michx. . radiatum var. Peckii A. char Man. = Geum Peckii Pursh. Rafinesquianum Steud. Nomencl. : Rafinesquianum Hort. = Geum urbanum Linn. Ranunculoides Ser. in Dec. Prodr. = Geum strictum Ait. reptans Linn. Sp. pl. neptans p macnophyllumi s e i) ON rivale Linn. Sp. pl. . rivale B strictum Norm. rivale y humile Schur . rivale 0 grandifolium Scheutz Je thet enis b EU te rivali-montanum Kittel ex Schur = Geum inclinatum Schleich. rivali-montanum Reich. Fl. exeurs. = Geum intermedium Ehrh. emend. rivale flore albo Bernh. — Geum pallidum C. A. Mey. rivale var. luxurians Tratt. = Geum rivale monstr. (Wulf.). rivale Ten. Syll. ex Bertol. = Geum micropetalum Gasparr. Rossii Ser. in Dec. Prodr. Rossii 8 humile KR. Brown robustum Schur rotundifolium Langsd. Roylei Wall. » d dye Us Roylei Hort. = G. japonicum Thunb. rubellum C. "n Mey. : rubifolium Lej. Compl. fl. Bele: erit. ex Schur = Geum inelinatum Schleich. 67 pag. 48. On S (jo SSI NS os C5 O5 C5 Ot 68 Geum rubifolium Schur. = rugosum Desf. Cat. N. Jon. SCHEUTZ, Geum inelinatum Schleich. plant. rar. h. Paris. = Geum strictum Ait. Sadleri Friv. in Flora = Geum coccineum Smith et Sibth. Sieboldii Hort. = Geum japonicum Thunb. Sieversii Hort. = Geum elatum Wall. silvaticum Pourr. silvatico-rivale strictum Ait. Hort. strictum 8 dissectum Fries . strictum 0 hirsutum Hort. Par. strictum y rugosum Desf. strictum € spurium sudetieum Tausch. Thomasianum Ser. = Tournefortii Lap. = triflorum Pursh . tyrolense Kerner . umbrosum Dum. Fl. urbanum Linn. Sp. urbanum & australe Guss. urbanum 0 grandifolium Schur . urbanum © opulifolium Ser. . urbanum B orientale Fenzl. . . . urbanum y simplicifolium Mey. intermedium Ehrh. vernum Torr. et Gray . pag. 44. ec WES CR SES IE BESIDE 2S nc ARES: » 48. spurium Fisch. et Mey. — Geum strietum &) spurium (Mey.). Kew. . SEY ees » 28. » 29. 5 » 30. 4 » 29. (Meyer) . LECCE pur tes E bare 3 » 80. strictum 8 Hook. Fl. bor. Amer. = Geum japonicum Thunb. = Geum inclinatum Schleich. superrivale-montanum Kern. = Geum tyrolense Kern. Geum inclinatum Schleich? Geum pyrenaicum Willd. RU Supe ME » 5L 3 » 48. Bele. RS ks ER ae 7 » 62. umbrosum Boiss. Voy. bot. = Geum heterocarpum Boiss. pl. » 24. . . . . . . . . E . . » 24. urbanum 9 hispidum Wahlenb. = Geum hispidum Fries. SOME ae cow: » 24. » 25, » 24, » 24. urbanum a) hybridum Liljebl. Sv. fl. E 1 et LE ra demie Fries. urbanum a) intermedium Liljebl. Sv. fl. ed. 3 = Geum hispidum Fries. urbanum var. intermedium Smith Brit. et Wahlenb. Suec. = Geum urbano-rivale Schied. = Geum intermedium Ehrh. » 61. il. virginianum Linn. Sp. pl. af 2 oth, RS cape e: virginianum Murr. Comm. Gœtt. = Geum album Gmel. virginianum Spreng. = Geum intermedium y Willdenowii (Meyer). Willdenowii Mey. Syst. Veg. = Geum geniculatum Michx. Potentilla nivalis Torr. Ann. Lye. New-York = Geum Rossii Ser. Sieversia adnata Don. = albiflora Hook. fil. = Anemonoides Willd. Berl. Mag. = Geum Anemonoides Willd. Sp. plant. calthifolia Don mss = congesta R. Br. = Geum adnatum Wall. Geum albiflorum (Hook.). Geum calthifolium Menz. Geum rotundifolium 8 congestum. PRODROMUS MONOGRAPHLE GEORUM. 69 Sieversia dilatata R. Br. = Geum ealtbifolium Menz. — dryadoides Sieb. et Zuce. = Geum anemonoides Willd. — elata Royle Illustr. Himal. pl. = Geum elatum Wall. — humilis Royle mss = Geum elatum 3 humile. — humilis R. Br. in Porr. Voy. = Geum Rossii 8 humile. — micropetala Nym. Syll. fl. Eur. = Geum micropetalum Gasparr. — montana Spreng. = Geum montanum Linn. — radiata R. Br. = Geum radiatum Michx. — reptans Spreng. = Geum reptans Linn. — rosea Grah. New Edinbg phil. journ. = Geum triflorum Pursh. — Rossii R. Br. = Geum hossii Ser. — rotundifolia Don mss = Geum rotundifolium Langsd. — Selinifolia F. Schmidt Reis. = Geum anemonoides fg gracile (Regel). — triflora Spreng. = Geum triflorum Pursh. Stylipus vernus Rafinesq. = Geum vernum Torr. et Gray. SoC ORR CO SS | ss iR ORE cee E cT moe [^s * it s dne El M] nih i baccis wists N N nets Ber uf u aliidind. - 75s gent ID ee Se A ud aL E DE (fit nad manovra | ups qutt : me ’ E lern | i lt ne Hbi BU o ayer DT D ^ is FEL ^ ui ET. Cat UP amable 23 TO ald MAR My Hast aec I ] banus uiact I " Tu tut D iis e | : HAM ; DMLIAOLE A TD ' Wear Fe VI *I Dn i 49 elu, »f Su y Mr M den gef m à | Lie ne Um À ; i indie a Ny crap iiem 5 4 5s 2918 (ns Hs ons: ri u | PE SUR LA SEPARATION DES RACINES D'ÉQUATIONS ALGÉBRIQUES C. F. E. BJORLING. (PnésENTÉ À LA Societé ROYALE DES SCIENCES D'UPSAL LE 12 FÉvm. 1870.) UPSAL, ED. BERLING, IMPRIMEUR DE L'UNIVERSITÉ, IS): . viriAn Bad HOLTAMAMIE Atl äl M ab supie TE dida] Hop pg ip m smoT -supoh asuisst «»b Sls st ma aoméiodt aogplonp dildug ist al soit ewojrot duou mo elsnpash obie'l &. ‚zauprudd pol dnésaisanos ne .9d0n0b noitsupd san b aollor aunioet anb. gunborgrı ob, sang 97 ol oh sl ob Bad donation. iua sl amnb abo Atome bp ‚Asia te Sadao jo «Wee Nes: V m9 (xy Aq i sb. estin ao) 54 An ur Au ] 4 ~ jJ j ne ny UE X. ES e ss apio assure «Yo Wat see 3 IA sy sb kno | ES! E n : v» wa ber duos Ose (4) X. oneuys) sb aastionre aah dots Va 9. MON Sy BON LE WR Mos, 9V ss V = (sx ago sb ET : diuo saone wl eot M ‚Amar Anson sue (3) V, soins, V oh a sub, Q == (x) sb. wine ssh © 2 sosie MO SiON FEO ST SR ETE XS FTO MEUS Aag. ign apio ‚such, | ; | : EX ao Yo m Ms Q = (a) po wb esidon"t ut sa j “aa. ön nsn Moos. De (SY, oly aec: ad. annt LN aM _ hs Ve (9, sor onde NE ST s | a yes (yi, föll —w* ung © = SE aM I ZH Ds. le Tome XLVIII de l'Archiv pour Mathématiques et Physique de M. GRUNERT j'ai publié quelques théorémes sur la réalité des raeines d'équa- tions algébriques, à l’aide desquels on peut toujours trouver le nombre et les places des racines réelles d'une équation donnée, en connaissant les valeurs des racines réelles de la dérivée. Je me permets d'en reproduire iei les cinq premiers, qui seront cités dans la suite. Théor. I. Si toutes les racines de l'équation f(x) = 0 sont réelles et inegales, les racines de l'équ. f(x) = 0 le sont aussi et situées chacune entre une paire de celles-la. Th. IT. Si toutes les racines de l'équation f(x) = 0 sont réelles et inégales, les racines de l'équ. f(x) = 0 ne le sont pas aussi, à moins que tous les minima de la fonction f(x) me soient négatifs, et tous les maxima positifs. Pour chaque maximum ou minimum = 0 deux racines de f(x) = 0 devien- nent égales. Pour chaque minimum positif ou maximum négatif deux racines deviennent imaginaires. Th. III. Si 2m racines de l'équ. f(x) = 0 sont imaginaires, et les autres réelles et inegales, 2m racines de f(x) = 0 sont aussi imaginaires. Les autres n — 2m sont réelles et inegales, si tous les maxima de f(x) sont posi- tifs, et tous les minima négatifs. Pour chaque maximum ou minimum = 0 deux racines deviennent égales. Pour chaque minimum positif ou maximum n gatif deux racines deviennent imaginaires. Th. IV. Une racine 2m?* x =a de l'équation f(x) = 0 diminue le nombre des racines réelles de f(x) = 0 par 2m, à moins que f(a) ne soit = 0; alors a est une racine (2m + I) de l'équ. f(x) = 0. Th. V. Une racine (2m — I) x =a de l'équation f(x) = 0 di- minue le nombre des racines réelles de f(x) = 0 par 2(m— 1), si f(a) est Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 1 2 C. F. E. BJÖRLING, SUR LA SEPARATION un maximum positif ow un minimum négatif, et par 2m, si f(a) est un mi- nimwm positif ou un maximum négatif. Si f(a) est = 0, a est une racine 2m de l'équ. f(x) = 0. Ces théorèmes font entrevoir que les racines complexes d’une équa- tion algébrique sont en général de deux espèces différentes. Les unes, que je veux appeler racines complexes dérivées, doivent leur existence à la na- ture même de la fonction f(x) ou, si l’on veut, à la forme de la courbe qui la représente géométriquement; leur nombre est égal à celui des racines complexes de l'équation dérivée et ne change point, quelle que soit la va- leur de la constante, ajoutée à l'intégration. Les autres dépendent au con- traire de cette constante; en choisissant des valeurs convenables de celle- ci, on peut arbitrairement augmenter ou diminuer leur nombre entre de cer- taines limites. Je propose pour elles la dénomination de racines complexes propres. Quoique les théorémes précédents puissent s'employer avec avantage en quelques cas spéciaux, leur applieation est naturellement trés-limitée. Mais leur intérêt s’accroit beaucoup, depuis qu'il s'est montré qu'ils ne sont en effet que des spécialités de quelques autres, à l'aide desquels on peut en général trouver les places de toutes les racines, complexes ainsi que réelles, d'une équation algébrique du degré n, en connaissant seulement les valeurs des racines réelles de la dérivée et peut-étre celles de quelques autres équations, dont le degré ne surpasse pas n — 3. Ce sont ces derniers théorémes qui forment le sujet du mémoire sui- vant. La méthode que j'y vais proposer pour la séparation des racines d'une équation donnée, se laisse aussi employer avec quelques modifications au cas, où les coëfficients de cette équation sont complexes, mais pour éviter de complieation, je ne m'oecuperai ici que d'équations à coéfficients réels. La démonstration des théorémes, reproduits ci-dessus, se fonde sur la signification géométrique de la dérivée d'une fonction réelle. Ceux qui vont suivre, ont de méme été obtenus moyennant deux propositions sur la signifieation géométrique de la dérivée d'une fonetion complexe. Je vais d'abord exposer celles-ci. DES RACINES D'ÉQUATIONS ALGEBRIQUES. 3 ST M. Cauchy définit, comme on le sait, les fonctions d'une variable complexe de cette manière. Soit 2 ape tla Ji us Din deu te al b. 10D) une quantité complexe; si lon désigne par .X et Y deux fonctions réelles quelconques des variables réelles x et y, la quantité UU SSA AY Gas Oe Se LOS een) est une fonction de z. Nous nous imaginons æ et y comme les coordonnées rectangulaires d'un point, situé dans un plan horizontal; X et Y comme les coordonnées d'un autre point du méme plan. Nous appelons un point queleonque du plan réel ou complexe, selon qu’il est situé sur l'axe des x ou non. Quand le point z se meut sur une courbe, le point w en décrit une correspondante. Nous appelons celle-là la courbe primaire, celle-ci la se- condaire. Nous posons aussi D rer QN POOR UN NER RN FD CE dy dY sumo. s ix = 84. RUE eq AA) æ et À sont par suite les angles que les tangentes des deux courbes for- ment avec l'axe des x. La dérivée de w, prise par rapport à z, est, d’après la définition de M. Cauchy, le quotient dX+idY. "de tidy? nous la désignons par ee*'. De la relation dX-+idY el, BEE) 4 C. F. E. BJÖRLING, SUR LA SEPARATION ou | (dX + id Y)(dx-idy) dXdx+dYdy+i(d Ydx-dXdy) : ge?" — da? + dy? = == da? + dy? D ( ) les deux autres suivent immédiatement dXdx + d Ydy ecos Q = da? + dy? MENSES Ne R dYda—dXdy i esin Q = da? + dy — hii. hate td ce NES (8). En divisant celle-ci par celle-là, on obtient dY dy d Ydx — dXdy dX dme t£ One a yg IT ay magi PS EC Dc qx" da ou, selon (4), | tg A— tga 150) = qui ru ee Cole) Best ees 0 (10), ce qui peut s'écrire = Ata. + ss je Mo. Ne S (il. si l'on observe seulement que les angles A et a sont limités par O et 7, et quil faut par suite, si l'un d'eux excède, en vertu de cette formule, ces bornes, l'y ramener par l'addition ou la soustraction d'un multiple de z. En élevant (7) et (8) au carré et les ajoutant, on obtient aprés une réduction simple d.X?--dyY? Be — da? + dy? as cB Ee tO, cc. o (12). Les formules (11) et (12) peuvent s'exprimer ainsi en mots: L'argument de la dérivée est l'angle entre les tangentes des deux courbes. Le module de la dérivée est l'expression de la vitesse avec laquelle la variable dépendante se meut sur sa courbe, la vitesse de la variable indépen- dante étant constante et prise pour unite. Ces deux théorémes sont peut-étre aussi fécondes en applications que la proposition bien-connue sur la signification géométrique de la dérivée d'une fonction réelle. Il nous faut pourtant ici omettre de telles applications qui ne regardent pas notre sujet, et nous contenter d’énoncer seulement quelques corollaires, qui dérivent immédiatement des théorémes: DES RACINES D'ÉQUATIONS ALGEBRIQUES. 5 Si la dérivée décrit une droite, passant par l'origine, les tangentes des deux courbes forment entre elles un angle constant. Si la dérivée décrit un cercle avec l'origine pour centre, la variable dépendante se meut avec vitesse constante. Si la derivée passe par un point de l'axe des x, les tangentes des deux courbes sont parallèles. Si la dérivée passe par un point de l'axe des y, les tangentes des deux courbes sont perpendiculaires. Si la dérivée passe par l'origine, la variable dépendante reste immobile pour un moment. A ce dernier cas il correspond ordinairement un point singulier de lune des courbes. Ces cinq propositions peuvent s'intervertir, ce qui n'est pas au con- traire le cas de la suivante: Si la variable dépendante se meut sur une droite, elle ne peut tourner, à moins que la dérivée ne passe par l'origine. $ 2. Nous désignons dans la suite par u ou f(z) une fonction algébrique, rationelle et entière du degré n, où le coëfficient de z" est positif, et les autres réels, soit t2" d. bet deem te eene sug ihe -DE Tute. gu (L). Si nous introduisons dans cette expression «+ y? au lieu de z, elle prend la forme EXE POG Cour de A M Ru (25 quand X et Y satisfont aux relations que voici: y M fe) (s fe fees re 9, Y = fe — f" re... z^ SiDaup «op: En introduisant re?‘ pour z, nous obtenons au contraire X = ar" cos npa br" ^ cos (n-1)p+er"—* cos (n-2)p+...+hr eos pk .. (5), Y = ar" sin np+br""! sin (n-1)p4 cr"? sin (n-2)p+...+Arsinp ... (6). 6 C. F. E. BJÖRLING, SUR LA SEPARATION Tous les points du plan dont les coordonnées satisfassent simultané- ment aux deux conditions IX Oyen sy s saei aevi, SV Ge seront appelés points-racines de l'équation as Pb CRT Bs SSO m o (0 ou Si la variable indépendante z se meut sur la courbe dont l'équation en coordonnées rectangulaires est y|f (e) — iP o S (2) —....] N. S. (107 et en coordonnées polaires ar" sin np tbr"-' sin (n —1)p+er"—* sin (n—2)p+...+hrsinp — 0 . . (11), u est toujours = X, et par suite réel. Done en ce cas l'axe des x est la courbe secondaire, (10) ou (11) la primaire. (Celle-ci contient évidemment tous les points-racines. L'équation (10) montre tout d'abord que notre courbe primaire jouit des propriétés suivantes: Elle est symétrique par rapport à l'axe des x; Elle est indépendante de la constante 4; Elle consiste de deux parties, savoir: 1) l'axe des x, 2) la courbe dont l'équation est y” y 4 f(x) — el © c | fm)... . .Sam e ge nous appellerons celle-ci la courbe primaire complexe. Son degré est évi- demment d'une unité inférieur à celui de l'équation proposée (8). Quand « ou X s'annule, z se trouve dans un point-racine. Un are déterminé de la courbe primaire contient un nombre pair (0 incl) ou impair de tels points, selon qu'il correspond à ses deux extrémités des valeurs de X de méme signe ou non. Nous allons maintenant examiner les propriétés géométriques de la courbe primaire. DES RACINES D'ÉQUATIONS ALGEBRIQUES. 7 $ 3. L'équation (2, 11) fait voir que r devient en général infini pour sinnp = 0, c'est à dire, pour NP pe Code y. MOM aie len. oh om s eo? ou 7 27 Ir m, = Or. mE up À ya DOC . * . . . (2). Il y a done lieu d'attendre que la courbe primaire ait n droites asymptotes, dont les angles avec l’axe des æ sont les nommés. Pour nous s Tp en convaincre, nous allons examiner la soustangente polaire qu dont l'expression devient, en vertu de (2, 11), anr"** sin np+6(n-1)r" sin (n-1)p+c(n-2)r" "sin (n-2)p+...+hr?sinp 9 ^ an?" cos np+b(n-1)r"* eos (n- 1)p4 c(n-2)v"- * eos (n-2)p+...+hr cos p (9: On obtient aussi de la méme équation - ar" sin np = -0r" sin (n-1)p-cr^? sin (n-2)p- ...-hrsinp . . . (4), ou anr"*t sin np = -bnr" sin (n- 1)p-cnr"^' sin (n-2)p-...-hnr?sinp . . (5); done l'expression (3) devient par substitution br" sin (n—1)p + 2cr"— sin (n—2)p +...+ h(n—1)r? sinp : an" cos np+ 6(n—1)r*~* cos Rn . I hr cos p MAO): MT ce qui devient, pour p = ——, r=, 3 ( MT sin |mz — m b n SS 22... ss s (7) an COS m 7r ou b MT reor Sn uM MEE San BR an n c'est la distance perpendiculaire de l'origine à la mZ£ asymptote. L’abscisse du point d’intersection de la même droite avec l'axe des b : , æ est par suite — nt Dans ce point toutes les asymptotes coupent l'axe 8 C. F. E. BJÖRLING, SUR LA SEPARATION des x. Elles forment par suite une étoile à 2» rayons, dont le centre est ce point. L'axe des v n'est cependant à compter pour asymptote que dans ce sens qu'il forme lui-méme partie de la courbe. Pour 6 = 0, l'origine est le centre de l'étoile des asymptotes. Nous désignons dans la suite les rayons d'asymptotes, supérieurs à laxe des +, en ordre de droite à gauche par A, B, C, D...; les rayons symétriques, inférieurs au méme axe, par A', B', C', D'.. Cette notation adoptée, il suit de la formule (2, 5) que, si la variable z séloigne infiniment de l'origine, en suivant une branche de la courbe dont le rayon d'asymptote est A, C, E... ou en général d'ordre impair (A ou A’ compté pour le premier), la variable u ou X tend vers l'infinité n gative; mais que cette quantité tend au contraire vers linfinité positive, si le rayon est B, D, F... ou en général d'ordre pair. Si nous posons maintenant PE Lys) yop un oop Fey les deux quantités réelles £ et y sont définies par les formules I y? nt yf 7 E= f(x) — Bor fe — sme eme]... aD. du : , La dérivée 3 étant déjà désignée par ge", on a évidemment: ecosQ = £, PR @.—) % los ARE d’où il s'ensuit BÖR NUMEN. due god gatos ovd RUE Puisque la tangente de notre courbe secondaire coincide avec l'axe des x, l'angle A est toujours zéro, et la formule (1, 10) devient igo = — ga... .. «+. MM ou, en vertu de (13), ill, e o) Ec. quai vM E LA) Tue Donc le coëfficient angulaire i ne peut prendre la forme indéter- minée TE à moins qu'on n'ait à la méme fois £ — y = 0; c'est à dire DES RACINES D'ÉQUATIONS ALGEBRIQUES. 9 que, si la courbe primaire a des points singuliers (autres que des points d'inflexion), il faut qu'ils coincident avec les points-racines de l'équation dérivée. Mais les coordonnées d'un point singulier complexe devant par suite vérifier simultanément les trois équations f) — i/ 0 A AC aah aues ET e neo el HONS 20 " CAO Tex AO eal) fa) — PAC är P9 — e exigir 912 up (004 une telle coincidence ne peut avoir lieu que par exception. A cause de cela nous ajournons la discussion de ce cas au § 8 et supposons dans les pa- ragraphes suivants (4— 7) qu'aucun des points-racines complexes de l'équa- tion dérivée ne soit situé sur la courbe primaire. $ 4 Soit maintenant z = a une racine réelle et simple de l'équation dé- rivée. Au point correspondant la courbe primaire complexe coupe l'axe des & perpendieulairement, car léquation (2, 12) donne par dérivation f) — [sf €) + (sf e) — " - = m SANT: ; Bra En 15/0) AL ite) —... et, pour x» = a, y s'évanouit, mais non f(x). dy _ da 6 Un point-racine réel et simple de l'équation dérivée est par suite un point double de la courbe primaire, mais un point simple de sa partie complexe. Dans l'équation (2, 12) nous posons maintenant z—= a+ (à infiniment petit) . . . (2) et cherchons de quel ordre est alors la quantité infiniment petite y?. De l'égalité 2 4 fet) fe. . 0 Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 2 10 C. F. E. BJÖRLING, SUR LA SEPARATION on obtient par développement / à 11 à? UI de IV LO+ ZI "E (BT E oai adiri | | BA Oe $f + ]+ | x ) VE à + LPO + OR en eco et par suite, puisque /(@) est zéro, en négligeant des quantités d'ordres supérieurs, fe) = E ee ED Nous allons maintenant examiner le signe de l'accroissement qu'ob- tient la variable d Rus u, lorsque z passe du point (a, 0) au point in- finiment voisin (2 +0, y?) Cet accroissement est, en vertu de (2, 3), = FG) Bret) ++ EE 12) - ©. ou, après nen 72 yt y? 2 à 72 r des + af 9) + ish (a) 4... al 1f CRM db E >. et par suite, puisque f(a) est zéro, et y? infiniment petit de premier ordre, de signe contraire à f'(a). Soient maintenant 2, 8, y trois racines consécutives, réelles et sim- ples de l'équ. f(z) = 0, et soit f"(8) < 0, et par suite f’(2) et fro) > 0. Donc on a, puisque /(8) est un maximum, f(a) et f(y) deux minima, f(a) < f(@) > f(y) Par chacun des trois points a, 6, y il passe une branche de la courbe primaire complexe. Ces trois branches me peuvent se rencontrer. La branche du point 8 ne peut en effet aller au point a. Car si la variable z part de /2, en suivant cette branche, l'accroissement de « est positif, puisque /”(@) est — 0. La variable indépendante s’avancant sur cette branche, la dépendante croit toujours, puisqu'il n'y a pas de point-racine complexe de l'équation dérivée sur la courbe. Done si z pouvait parvenir par ce chemin au point #, la variable « y obtiendrait une valeur /(z), qui DES RACINES D'ÉQUATIONS ALGEBRIQUES. 11 fût > f(8). Mais nous avons déjà supposé f(a) < (8), et la fonction w, étant monodrome, ne peut avoir deux valeurs différentes dans un même point. On démontre de la même manière que la branche du point 8 ne peut aller à y. La branche de a ne peut non plus aller à +. Car alors elle cou- perait la branche 8, ce qui donnerait lieu à un point multiple complexe. Il faut done que chacune des trois branches s’approche de deux rayons d'asymptotes, symétriques par rapport à l'axe des a. Puisque la variable dépendante croit le long de la moyenne branche et décroit le long des deux autres, celle-là doit évidemment s'approcher de rayons d'ordre pair, celles-ci de rayons d'ordre impair. Nous appelons une telle branche qui coupe l'axe des æ dans un seul point et qui va de ses deux cótés s'approcher de rayons symétriques, une branche éransversale. Nous en désignons chacune par les mêmes lettres que ses deux rayons. Supposons maintenant que toutes les n— 1 racines de l'équation f'(:) = 0 soient réelles et inégales. Nous les désignons, en ordre de droite agoducne, par ©, 8, &,...0.,. La courbe primaire complexe consiste de n — 1 branches transver- sales, la première desquelles, AA’, passe par le point a. Si f(a) est > 0, un seul point-racine de l'équation f(z) = 0 se trouve nécessairement sur chaque moitié de cette branche, puisque w tend vers —oo à ses deux ex- trémités et que cette variable n'a qu'un seul maximum, f(&), pendant que z parcourt toute la branche. Plus la quantité /(&) décroit, plus ces deux points-racines s'approchent du point a; pour f(a) = O ils y coincident, et z — & devient une racine double. Pour f(a) < 0 il n'y a évidemment aucun point-racine sur la branche AA’. Mais alors il y en a un sur l'axe des x à droite de &, puisque « tend vers + oo à l'extrémité droite de cet axe. Il y en a alors aussi un autre entre & et @, supposé pourtant que /(&) soit > 0. Si f(@) devient — 0, ce point-ci s'unit avec un autre, situé auparavant à gauche, à un point-racine double = &. Enfin, pour f(&) < 0, ces deux points-racines s'éloignent le long de chaque moitié de la branche BB’, qui passe par &. Pour chacune des branches transversales la méme conclusion peut se répéter, et le résultat s'exprimer ainsi: 12 C. F. E. BJÖRLING, SUR LA SÉPARATION Si toutes les m — 1 racines de l'équation derivée sont réelles et inégales, la courbe primaire complexe consiste d'autant de branches transversales. St toutes les valeurs de f(z) qui correspondent aux points-racines im- pairs de la dérivée, sont négatives, et celles qui correspondent aux points-racines pairs, sont positives, toutes les racines de l'équation f(z) = 0 sont réelles et alternent avec celles de la dérivée. Si f(z) sannule dans un point-racine de la dérivée, deux racines de f(z) = 0 s'unissent dans ce point a une double. Pour chaque valeur positive de f(z), qui correspond à un point-racine impair de la dérivée, et pour chaque valeur négative de f(z), correspondant à un point-racine pair, un point-racine complexe de f(z) = O est situé sur chaque moitié de la branche transversale qui passe par ce point-racine de la dérivée. S'il ne s'agit que des racines réelles, cette proposition est identique au théorème II, reproduit ci-dessus. $ 6. Nous supposons maintenant que deux racines de l'équation dérivée soient complexes, les autres » — 3 réelles et inégales. La courbe primaire complexe coupe l'axe des x dans n —3 points divers, et il y a par suite de deux cótés du méme axe deux rayons d'asymptotes dont les branches ne le rencontrent pas. Ces deux branches doivent done se raccorder entre elles, puisque la courbe n’a pas de point singulier complexe. Les deux rayons dont il s'agit, sont nécessairement consécutifs. Car s'il n'était pas ainsi, leur branche commune couperait la courbe, ce qui don- nerait lieu à un point multiple complexe. Done l'un des deux rayons est pair, l'autre impair. Nous appelons une telle branche de la courbe, qui ne coupe pas laxe des x, mais qui va d'un côté de lui s'approcher de deux rayons, dont Yun est pair, l'autre impair, une branche latérale. A cause de la symétrie elles existent toujours par paires. Nous en désignons chacune par les mémes lettres que ses deux rayons. Sur chaque branche latérale il y a nécessairement un seul point- racine. Car à l'une de ses extrémités w tend vers — co, à l'autre vers + oo, et cette variable n'a pas de maximum, ni de minimum, pendant que z par- court toute la branche. Dans le cas ici supposé l'équation f(z) = 0 a donc toujours au moins deux points-racines complexes, situés chacun sur sa branche latérale. Ces racines sont évidemment dérivées. DES RACINES D'ÉQUATIONS ALGEBRIQUES. 13 Par chacun des n— 3 points-racines réels de l'équation dérivée il passe une branche transversale. Les branches dont les intersections avec laxe des x sont d'ordre impair, vont aussi s'approcher de rayons de tel ordre, et inversement. Donc les places des autres » — 2 points-racines de l'équation f(z) = 0 peuvent se déterminer par un raisonnement, analogue à celui que nous avons employé au paragraphe précédent. Il n'est pas difficile de généraliser ces résultats. En examinant tour à tour les cas où l'équation dérivée admet 4, 6, 8... racines complexes, on parvient à cette proposition: St 2m(3X m — 1) racines de l'équation dérivée sont complexes, les autres réelles et inégales, la courbe primaire complexe consiste de m paires de branches latérales et de n — 2m — 1 branches transversales. Sur chacune de celles-la il y a toujours un seul point-racine complexe (dérivé) de l'équation f(z) = 0. j Si toutes les valeurs de f(z) qui correspondent aux points-racines réels impairs de la dérivée, sont négatives, et celles qui correspondent aux points- racines pairs, sont positives, les autres n — 2m racines de l'équation f(z) = 0 sont réelles et alternent avec celles de la dérivée. Si f(z) sannule dans un point-racine réel de la dérivée, deux racines de f(z) = 0 s'unissent dans ce point à une double. Pour chaque valeur positive de f(z), qui correspond à un point-racine réel impair de la dérivée, et pour chaque valeur négative de f(z), correspon- dant à un point-racine pair, un point-racine complexe (propre) de f(z) = 0 est situé sur chaque moitié de la branche transversale qui passe par ce point- racine de la dérivée. Cette proposition renferme comme un cas spécial le théorème III de ci-dessus. 6 7. Soit maintenant z — 4 une racine réelle m2 de l'équation dérivée. Puisque alors AG) =f (C= ICO ee re D) d la formule (4, 1) montre que E prend au point correspondant la forme indéterminée et que la courbe primaire complexe y présente par suite 0 0 , quelque singularité. Afin de l'examiner de plus prés, nous y transportons l'origine, en remplaçant z par z+a. L'équation (2, 9) devient alors uz DR LCR EE cb RT sd aS OL ne): 14 C. F. E. BJÖRLING, SUR LA SÉPARATION si nous désignons par qM BURN CPM R UC had DO PEREGRINI, les résultats de substitution f" Pa) Fe) fe") [n ? et ee EES Le) + a le) On obtient aussi par la méme transformation X= a'r" eos np+b'r""" cos (n-1)p+cr"* cos (n-2) p+... i"! eos (m+1)p+k (5), et l'équation de la courbe primaire en coordonnées polaires devient ar" sin np + br" sin(n-1)p4 er’? sin (n-2)p+...+hr”"'sin(m+1)p=0 (6). Celle-ci montre que la courbe primaire a dans l’origine m + 1 tan- gentes, dont les angles avec l'axe des x sont T 27 dT MT M3 mcd as RES tu mee one St ie ae (0); et que l'origine est par suite un point multiple à m + 1 branches ou, si l'on veut, à 2(m-+-1) demi-branches. La moitié positive de Taxe des x en est évidemment une. Si on la compte pour la première, il suit de la for- mule (5) que l'aeeroissement qu'obtient X, lorsque + part de l'origine, en suivant une demi-branche, est de même signe que k ou feta), ou de signe contraire, selon que cette demi-branche est de nombre impair ou pair. On démontre de la méme maniére comme ci-dessus que les branches du point multiple ne peuvent se raccorder ni entre elles ni avec d'autres branches de la courbe; qu'elles vont par suite s'approcher chacune de son rayon, et que w ou .X ne peut avoir ni maximum ni minimum, pendant que 2 parcourt une demi-branche. On obtient ainsi la proposition suivante: Si z — «e est une racine réelle m?* de l'équation dérivée, le point cor- respondant est un point multiple à 2(m-+ 1) demi-branches de la courbe primaire. Si f(a) s'évanouit, z — a est une racine (m 4- 1)? de l'équation f(z) = 0. Si f(a) ne s'évanouit pas, il y a un point-racine de l'équation f(z) = 0 sur chaque demi-branche d'ordre pair ow impair, selon que f(a) est de méme signe que f "*P(z) ou non. Si m est nombre pair, la moitié négative de l'axe des x est une demi-branche d'ordre pair. Donc si f(«) ne s'évanouit pas, un seul des m + 1 points-racines est toujours réel Voir le théor. IV ci-dessus. DES RACINES D'ÉQUATIONS ALGEBRIQUES. 15 Si m est nombre impair, la moitié négative de l'axe des « est une demi-branche d'ordre impair. Done si f(#) ne s'évanouit pas, deux des m + 1 points-racines sont situés sur laxe des æ, si f(a) et f'"*"(z) sont de signes contraires, mais aucun, s'ils sont de méme signe. Voir le théor. V. 030 Reste encore à examiner le cas où quelqu'un des points-racines com- plexes de la dérivée est situé sur la courbe primaire. Soit done 8 une quantité complexe, telle que /'(8) s'annule, mais non f'(8), et que les coordonnées du point correspondant vérifient l'équation (2, 12). Nous allons montrer que 6 est un point double de la courbe primaire. Car soit d'abord /(/) = 0. Alors deux points-racines complexes de l'équation f(z) = 0 coincident dans ce point. Si f(8) est positif et infini- ment petit, ces deux points-racines s'éloignent infiniment peu du point 6, en suivant chacun sa demi-branche. Si /(@) est négatif et infiniment petit, ils s'éloignent aussi infiniment peu de 8, mais sur deux autres demi-branches, car « ou X croît le long de celles-ci, décroit le long de celles-là. Donc il faut qu'au moins quatre demi-branches de la courbe s'unis- sent dans ce point. Or je dis que leur nombre ne peut surpasser quatre. Car sil était ainsi, il est évident que, pour f(8) = 0, & serait une racine triple de l'équation f(z) — 0, ce qui est contraire à notre supposition. Done un point-racine complexe simple de l'équation dérivée, situé sur la courbe primaire, est un point double de celle-ci. On démontre de la méme maniére qu'un point-racine complexe double de l'équation dérivée, situé sur la courbe primaire, en est un point triple, et ainsi de suite. Du reste il s'entend facilement que de tels points multiples ne peu- vent exister que par paires, à cause de la symétrie. On voit done que, si la courbe primaire d'une équation f(z) — 0 a une paire de tels points multiples, il est toujours possible de choisir une telle valeur de la constante & que léquation admet une paire de racines complexes multiples. L'ordre de ces racines est égal au nombre des branches de la courbe qui passent par chacun des points en question. Done, sil y a lieu de supposer que la courbe primaire d'une équa- tion proposée f(z) = 0 ait des points multiples complexes, on peut procéder ainsi pour les découvrir. S'il s'agit de points doubles, on divisera f(z) par le carré du trinóme 2^ GS in Ln ae ca pads aus Ee oe 16 C. F. E. BJÖRLING, SUR LA SEPARATION c'est à dire, par 2*-F 2az? (a? + 2021 + 2abz 4 ba, Days le reste étant une fonction de z du troisième degré, où les coéfficients des trois dignités de z sont dépendants de a et 6, mais indépendants de k, il faut évidemment que a et 6 satisfassent simultanément aux trois équations qu'on forme en égalant ces trois coéfficients à zéro. Les quantités a et b étant ainsi déterminées, les points doubles cherchés Sont les points-racines de l'équation 2’ a, ie ne aa S (n supposé qu'on ait aussi 4b > a? Pour découvrir des points complexes triples, on divisera de méme f(z) par le cube du trinôme (1); le reste étant une fonction de z du cin- quième degré, on obtient cinq conditions auxquelles doivent satisfaire a et 5. Il s'ensuit aussi de ce qui précéde que le degré d'une équation dont la courbe primaire puisse avoir une paire de points complexes multiples à m branches, doit étre au moins 2m. | $ 9. Quand on veut employer la théorie précédente à la séparation des racines complexes d'une équation proposée, la construction de la courbe pri- maire complexe constitue la principale — ou plutót la seule — difficulté. Les racines réelles de l'équation dérivée indiquent les points d’intersection de la courbe avec l'axe des v, ainsi que sa constitution générale. Quant aux détails de la construction il suffit ordinairement, comme le montreront les exemples suivants, de connaitre ses intersections avec les rayons d'asymp- totes. Les rayons vecteurs de ces points sont des racines réelles d'équa- tions du (n — 3)" degré, supposé qu'on ait fait d'abord disparaître le se- cond terme de l'équation proposée. Pour désigner les racines réelles de l'équation dérivée nous emploie- rons dans la suite la méme notation comme dans le § 5. Les racines réelles de l'équation proposée seront désignées, en ordre de droite à gauche, par VQ, 1%, TQ... les rayons vecteurs des points d’intersection de la courbe primaire avec le rayon A, en ordre de l'origine, par a, ad, @,...; ceux des points du rayon B par b,, by, b,..., ete. Nous supprimerons pourtant les indices, quand ils ne seront pas nécessaires. Les signes des résultats de substitution FQ nal Paese vr m SEE DES RACINES D'ÉQUATIONS ALGEBRIQUES. IM. que nous désignerons, pour abréger, par (Dig ee (2), indiquent le nombre des racines réelles de l'équation proposée, ainsi que les branches de la courbe sur lesquelles sont situés des points-racines complexes. Pour trouver les places de ces points relativement aux rayons d’asymp- totes. il faut enfin déterminer les signes des valeurs de f(z) qui correspon- dent aux points d'intersection. Nous désignerons les résultats de la substitution des coordonnées des points — qu. tay, Ont Me DROITE E) dans wu ou X par (4), (42), (as), = +5 (OM (73) RR (002) ne. (A) respectivement. $ 10. Nous nous proposons pour premiére application le probléme suivant: Ex. 1) Trouver les places des racines de l'équation 5 An dit Pe Eb 0. N (1) pour des valeurs diverses de k. La dérivée 2* — 523—402 24 OR ee (2) admet les racines réelles & — À, & — 1, & = — 2, £ = — 3. DRS? (3). Donc l'équation proposée n’a pas de racines complexes dérivées. L’équation de la courbe primaire est ^5 sin 5 SSP 576 sin 3p — Dr? sin 2p + 24r sin p = 0 push ule); sa partie complexe consiste de quatre branches transversales. Pour trouver . . . 7 ses intersections avec les rayons A et D, nous faisons p — F dans (4) et obtenons ainsi: er ir 2954 D CLEC My) es u fö OO): Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. 3 18 C. F. E. BJÖRLING, SUR LA SEPARATION ANS 27 On trouve de méme, en posant p = p. que la courbe ne coupe pas les rayons B et C. Done elle a la forme indiquée dans la fig. 1. On obtient maintenant par substitution (1)=k— 999; (2)— k--142; (8)—£k— 344; (4A—k— 306 . . (6); (a) = k + 25,149; (d) =k— 58,606 . . . 2 . (0t), et la solution du probléme est contenue dans le tableau suivant. TABLEAU I. zo Places d. rac. complexes. Conditions. E 3 Places des racines réelles. = 255 Branches. | Intervalles. --25,149 > k 1 0,, 1| BB, DD|AB, DX k = —25,149| 1 0,, "BB, DD) a DX —149 >k>-25149| 1 06, r, |BB, DD'XA, DX’ k= -142 | 3(2) Toon, DD' DX *906 >k> —142 3 035 73, Oo, 72, Ory Ti DD DX k = +30,6 5(2) Ps = 01 = T4, 03, T35 9, Tor Q1, Vi 34,4 >k> 30,6 D Ty, Q4, Ta, 035 Tas 02, Toy Ory Ty k= 34,4 5(2) | 75, Qi T,— Q5 — 35; 027 Ta, Ory T 58,606 >k> 344 9 | 7s, & 02, Ta, 045 7, cc’ DX k= 58,0000 3 | 75, & 02, Ta, 9, My cc d 99,2 >k> 58,606; 3 |r,, Oc Q25 T2, Q15 74 cc CD k= 99,2 | 32) rs, 0, Uy Gh — 85 cc CD k=" 992 I so @a AA, CC'| XA, CD Ce tableau s’entend facilement. Par la notation AB dans la derniére colonne nous désignons l'intervalle des rayons A et B; par a, le point d'in- tersection de la courbe avec le premier rayon. Ainsi on trouve p. ex., pour k = 40, que l'équation 25 — 9523 — 25z* + 1202+ 200 = 0 admet les racines réelles T, — 4,820423 , T, = 2,076832 , py = — 9,632845 , et deux complexes, dont le module est 2.06556 , DES RACINES D'ÉQUATIONS ALGEBRIQUES. 19 et les arguments + 159° 17’ 56" , ce qui verifie le précédent. duis Nous allons maintenant examiner sous le méme rapport l'équation Ex. 2) 26 +2§—327+k=0. La dérivée 225 4 27 22 UN NE OMR comcs or Wap) admet les trois racines réelles & = 0,867528 , & —0, Que ligga oe A: et une paire de complexes. La partie complexe de la courbe primaire, dont l'équation est »$ sin 6p + r° sin 3p — år? sin 2p = O0 ... . . «> (8) consiste par suite de trois branches transversales et de deux latérales. Elle coupe le premier rayon au point © =12,598076 =.) > fylke cher Fal MO); mais aucun des autres. Sa forme peut se déterminer par le raisonnement suivant. La troisième branche transversale est renfermée dans l'intervalle des rayons E et EL’, car il n'y a d’intersection sur aucun d'eux. Cette branche sera done désignée par EE". En vertu de (4, 5) la seconde branche transversale, qui touche l'axe des y, est située à sa gauche. Donc elle sera appelée DD’. Puisquil n'y a pas dintersection aux rayons B et C, et que celui-ci n'a pas de branche asymptotique à sa gauche, il y a une branche latérale dans lintervalle BC. Enfin la premiére branche transversale est AA’, et la forme de la courbe est celle que montre la fig. 2. La substitution donne (2 —E—13178; (2) — b; (3) k— 9,494; (a) = k — 317,671 .. (5), et la discussion de l'équation proposée est contenue dans le 20 C. F. E. BJÖRLING, SUR LA SEPARATION TABLEAU II. E $ Rac. complexes propres. e ana Conditions. $.2| Places des racines réelles. +. a = Branches. | Intervalles. Brats es 0-k 2 |v., Os Q,,; | DD CD BO | BC k= 9 4(2)T., 05, Ta, 025 Ta, Orr T's BC | BC 1ig>k> 0 4 |r,, Cs, Tay Ory To €, Tr BC | BC k= 1,178/4(2)ir,, 0, Ts, 09, T2=C1="1 BC | BC 9,194 — I. > 1178)! 2 m, Osh) Tray 0 AA AA BC | BC k= 3,19412(2)\7,=0,— 75 AA XA BC | BC 317,671 >k> 3194 O AA, EE' XA, EX | BC | BC k = 317,671| O (AA, EE | a, EX | BC | BC k > 317,671! O AA, EE'| AB, EX | BC | BC 6 12 Ex. 3) 22° — 19524 — 120025 — 28562? — 28802 +k = 0. La dérivée 25 — 652? — 3002? — 4762 — 240 = 0 admet les racines réelles a — 105 Ne ME OU — a oe la courbe primaire complexe consiste par suite de cinq branches transver- sales, et l'on trouve les intersections suivantes: 6, = 4,256306 ; c, — 1,549193; d, = 1,099044 ; dy — 3,157262. 5 4 = 0,996151; € = 2,176142; ¢ = 3,933568. La courbe est tracée dans la fig. 3. Une droite verticale par & ne la rencontre pas en d'autres points; cette ligne divise l'intervalle LX’ en deux parties, dont nous désignons celle qui avoisine l'origine par (EX), l'autre par (EX). On trouve maintenant par substitution (1) = k- 1464400; (2) = &+1031; (3) =%k+944; (4) = 54999; (5) = £896; (b) = %+156160,2; (a) =%+5703,6; (d,) = k+1860,2; (d,) =k-7316,7; _()—=#+1161,5; (5) = k+639,3; (&) = k+3649,2; et la discussion de l'équation est contenue dans le 21 DES RACINES D'ÉQUATIONS ALGEBRIQUES. TABLEAU III. = $ Places des racines complexes. Conditions. 28 Places des racines réelles. 3 > Branches. Intervalles. —156160,2>k 2 | ri Os Oye. 7 BB, DID! AB, DE k=-1561602| 2 |», 0, 0,, r, | BB, DD’ b,, DE -5703,6>k<-156160,2| 2 |»,, 0, 0,, 7,| BB, DD BC, DE k=— 51036| 2 m, 4, |BB, DD a, DE —3649,2>k>— 5703,6| 2 |r,, 0, Qo," BB, DD CD, DE k=— 36492 2 |n, Oc a, 7,| BB, DD CD, e, —1860,2>k>-— 3649,2) 2 |», Qs 06, | BB, DD CD, (EX), k-— 18602! 2 |n, 0, 96,7", BB, DD di, (HX), —1161,5>k>— 18602! 2 |r,, o, 0, 7,| BB, DD' D E, (EX), k>— W61,5| 2 m» 0, |, DD ey, (HX), -1031 >k>- 1161,5| 2 |n, Os 4, n|BB, DD (EX), (EX), k=-- 1081 |4(2)|r,, & Ute Soy (ap Ui DD (EX), — 999 >k>- 1031 4 |rs, 0s "3, Oar Toy O15 T DD (EX), (== ER OO) ag Cry en Car 3, Qn, Yo, Qi % — 944 >k>-- 999 6 rs, Os; Ts; Os» Tey 03) May On; Ton Ory T, == DEED 6(2) To, Qs, Ter Q4) Ta = Q3 = Ta 02, Vay 0i, V = 896 >k>- 944 4 Ts, Os) "s, Os 9, 725. 015. 71 CC (EX?) == 896 |4(2) Tg — Qs 7 75 Qo, Ya, 9, % CC (EX?) — 639,3-k>— 896 2 Bry Pig Org 771 CC', EE (EX), (EX), == 639,3) 2 02, Vos Ory M CC, EE %, (EX), +7316,7>k>- 6393| 2 Go (y 2 CC, EE' DE, (EX), k=+ 1316,7| 2 hi Wn iy dä CC, EE di, (EX), 1464400 >k> 7316,7| 9 ny iy Oey Oh CC, EE CD, (EX), k=1464400 | 2(2) - 73:0] — 75 CC, EE’ CD, (EX), k> 1464400 0 AA, CO", EE |.XA, CD, (EX), 23 Ex. 4) La dérivée $ 13. 25 — 221 2z -- b — 0. C. F. E. BJÖRLING, SUR LA SÉPARATION 827 — 52*-- 2 — 0 n'admet d'autres racines réelles que & = — 0,710127 On trouve les intersections a= g = 0,954033; La substitution donne d= V2 = 1,189207 d'où il s'ensuit que la courbe primaire a la forme indiquée dans la fig. 4. (1) (2). (3), (1) = £—1,750; (a) = k4-1,35789; (d) = k+4; (9) = &—2,7515 . . (5). TABLEAU IV. = = | Far copier Racines complexes dérivées. o > =| Places des rac. [MOREE Conditions. ae ler > Branches| Interv. Branches. Intervalles. —4>k PAW GS, (Oe RU AB, CD, EF|AB, DE, EF k = —4 Oa n Co te AB, CD, EF AB, d, EF —1,3789 > k > —4 a Rage Ory AB, CD, EF|AB, CD, EF k= LAS) | AN Aag OT 7, AB, CD, EF| a, CD, EF +1,1750 > k> —1,3789| 2 | vm, 0,, m, AB, CD, EF XA, CD, EF k= +1,1750 |2(2)| r,=0,=7, AB, CD, EF\XA, CD, EF +2,7515 > k > +1,1750| 0 GG | GX’ AB, CD, EF|XA, CD, EF k= 2,7515| 0 GG 9 |AB, CD, EF\XA, CD, EF k> 2,7515| 0 GG | FG |AB, CD, EF|XA, CD, EF $ 14. Ex. 5) 25— 82°? — 242? — 282 + k = 0. La dérivée DA — 487 — 28 = 0 (1) DES RACINES D'ÉQUATIONS ALGEBRIQUES. 22 n'admet d'autres racines réelles que & — 2,949358; pz 9693589 we «+ NC) On trouve les intersections: 6 = 4313091; ¢ = 1,813021; d, = 1,205240; d, = 1,794759 . . (3). Quant à la forme de la courbe on ne peut encore rien conclure, si ce n'est que la premiére branche transversale est toute renfermée dans l'in- tervalle AA’. Pour trouver, s'il existe de points multiples complexes, nous divisons le premier membre de l'équation proposée par 2*t 2a25 + (a? + 2b)2? + 2abz2+6? . . . . . . (à. Le reste devient (3a?- 2b-8)2?+(2ab 4-2a?- 24)2? - (4a?b -0?-28)z-- une constante . . (5); par suite les équations pour déterminer a et 6 sont 3a5— 25— 8, | a? tabs 12 SEE M SNC 4a35. 93 —.98 || Ces équations n'admettent d'autres racines réelles communes que DVD Sm M es," MD done là courbe primaire a une paire de points doubles dans les points- racines de l'équation 2? lagen gol bar old om un ne) nous les désignons par p et p. La courbe primaire a donc la forme que montre la fig. 5. Une droite P, tracée par l’origine et le point p, ne rencontre la courbe en d'autres points que celui-ci; elle sépare donc les deux demi-branches » B et p C des deux autres, p.D et py’. On trouve enfin par substitution: (1) = k— 273,495; (2) =k+11,026; (p —k-4-16 . . (9) (6) = k+2335,615; (c)=k+26,981; (d,)=h4+14,743; (d,)=k+21,096 (10). 24 CQ. F. E. BJÖRLING, SUR LA SEPARATION TABLEAU V. B $ Places des rac. complexes. Conditions. a Places des racines réelles. 3 Ey Branches. Intervalles. — 2335,615 > k 1 Ay. TÅ Bp, Dp | AB, DX’ k = — 2335,615 1 Oy PF, Bp, Dp b, DX' — 26,281 > k > — 2335,615 | 1 One Biol Do GD Eee k=— 260280 1l 9, Ti Bp, Dp | Nc DAS — 21,096 > k > — 26,81) 1 DIN) Bp, Dp | CP, DX k=- 21,006 | 1 a, ^ | Bp, Dp | CP, d, —16 >k>— 21,096 1 OM EP Bp, Dp | CP, PD k-— 16 1 Or, 7 ((p)) | ((p)) —-14,743 > k > — 16 I Ada Cp, pp CP, PD k=— 14,743 1 Gh. "m Cp, pp CP, d, —11026 > k>— 1473 1 (bi Pa (Up pp | CR SD k=- 11,0% 30) | r-20-7^, 06, ^ Cp CP + 273,425 > k > — 11,026 3 T3; Qo, Vas 9, NM Cp CP k = 213,405, \ 3(2) Nr More lo a Cp CP k>+ 213,495 | 1 Pay Os AA, Cp | XA, CP $ 15. Ex. 6) z°+62+122?+k=0. La dérivée g5 7I. ARME À 0 à HT (ID) n'admet qu'une seule racine réelle, savoir re angl ode. re La courbe primaire, dont l'équation est r°sin 6p-6r*si4p-Li2r*"sm2p — Q0 OO) contient évidemment les deux axes. On trouve les intersections b= di ga sat ates Gree RES Pour déterminer la forme de la courbe nous divisons le premier mem- bre de l'équation proposée par 24+ 2az*--- (a2 + 25) 235-20 3-03 1. Lg ER by ( (5) DES RACINES D'ÉQUATIONS ALGEBRIQUES. Nous obtenons ainsi pour quotient 2? — 2az + 3a?— 2b + 6 et les équations de condition deviennent 3ab = 6a - 2a? | 4+6? = 2a? + at+ 46 ab? = 2ab + a*b | qui n'admettent d'autres solutions réelles que gem. Demi Par la substitution de ces valeurs le quotient (6) d 2*--2 done les deux points-racines de l'équation EP Jk 2 = () sont une paire de points triples de la courbe primaire. par p et p, et l'origine par 0. ZOD devient (8). (9); (10) Nous les désignons La courbe est tracée dans la fig. 6. La substitution donne (1) =; O©=@=k—16; (p—)=k—8 (11). TABLEAU VI. 32 : | 5 8 Places des racines complexes. | Conditions. da | Places des racines reelle.) —_ _ | 5 g Branches. Intervalles. | | J | | O>k 2 23, 150; Mor Bp, Dp BC, CD | k= 0 | 2(2) Us = (n c Bp, Dp | BC, CD | te = (fa SO) LU 3 23 200 0) Opes |e Cn 0 DE 0) be 3 | 0 ((p))) ((» | |16>k> 8 0 Ap, Cp, Ep| BC, C, CD | k = 16 0 Ap, Cp, Ep DANCE k>16 | 0 Ap, Cp, Ep | AB, ©, DE | Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. IH. 4 26 C. F. E. BJÖRLING, SUR LA SEPARATION $ 16. Ex. 7) L'équation générale du troisième degré. Le degré de la courbe primaire complexe étant toujours inférieur d'une unité à celui de l'équation proposée, on reconnait à priori que la courbe est dans ce cas une hyper- bole, dont les asymptotes forment entre elles un angle de 60°. Nous écrivons l'équation générale du troisiéme degré sous la forme 29 9823.0 —— SS wre SE et distinguons trois cas. 1. Les racines de la dérivée réelles et inégales (a > 0). à | — + ]/a. L'axe réel de l'hyperbole est horizontal. 2 (1) (2) 2. ‘Les racines de la dérivée égales (a — 0). & — 6, — 0. L’hyperbole se réduit à ses asymptotes. (1) = (2) = 5. —-bTF2aVa. 3. Les racines de la dérivée complexes (a < 0). L'axe réel de l'hyperbole est vertical. TABLEAU VII. 3 $ Rac. compl. propres. Rae. compl. dérivées. Conditions. ag Places des racines réelles. 52 Branches. |Intervalles| Branches. | Intervalles i; @> —2a,/a > b 1 0,> 7) BB | BX DE = Mua HD) ,=9=n, 0, 7, +2a/a > b > — 2a Va | 3 T3 05, 25 015 71 b= + 2aJa| 3(2) | r,, @, ==" b>+2a/a} 1 Py On or AA’ XA 2, Qe. 0-6 1 Qu B B b 20 AO) | "ym mU m mh b 0 1 (55 Oe A A DRE E AB | AB DES RACINES D'ÉQUATIONS ALGEBRIQUES. 27 Sr L’equation générale du cinquième degré. Puisque l'emploi de notre méthode n'exige de solution d'équations de plus haut degré que » — 1, on pourrait à l'aide delle déterminer les places des racines d'une équation quel- conque du 5*"* degré. Les calculs seraient pourtant presque impossibles à exécuter, vu leur complication, si l'on ne faisait d'abord disparaître quelques termes de l'équation proposée. La célèbre méthode BRING-JERRARD, moyennant laquelle on peut faire évanouir le second, le troisième et le quatrième terme d'une équation quel- conque, ne se laisse pas employer pour notre but, puisque les coéfficients de l'équation simplifiée, qui doivent se déterminer de trois équations, du premier, du second, et du troisième degré respectivement, peuvent devenir complexes. Mais on ne risque pas cela, si lon se contente de ne faire disparaitre que le second et le quatriéme terme, car les coéfficients de l'équation réduite sont alors des fonctions des racines de deux équations, dont l'une du premier, l'autre du troisiéme degré, et l'on peut par suite . toujours choisir de telles solutions que ces coéfficients deviennent réels. L'équation générale du cinquième degré peut done être réduite à 21002792 kV... TL); dans laquelle les quantités a, 5, & sont réelles. Nous allons l'examiner sous cette forme. La dérivée p5 ll nos Lb == (ie I ES ul admet les racines a= V dame ga? mb ONE EG) On a aussi X = r*eos 5p — 10ar? eos 3p + 5breosp+k .. . (4), et l'équation de la courbe primaire devient r5 sin 5p — 10ar sin 8p “+ 5br smp—0 . . . . (5). Nous distinguons d'abord trois cas. 1. Toutes les racines de la derivée réelles et inégales. (Conditions: 9a7>b>0, a>d). 28 C. F. E. BJÖRLING, SUR LA SEPARATION Ces racines sont e| = dE V 9a + VI, i| o x Vis — Ha, et les points d'intersection MUNI aD a La courbe dans la fig. 7. La substitution donne (1) (4) (2) (3) (a) | b : Quant à la grandeur comparative de ces quantités, il faut remarquer: Puisque (1) et (3) sont des minima, (2) et (4) des maxima, on a toujours = k + 4(6 — 3a3 —aV/9a* — t) V/ 3a + V 9a’ 5; |— Ed 4(L— 30? + aV de — D Va — 0e 5; (5 — 1) SEA. (1) < (2) > (3) < (4); done si nous désignons, pour abréger, une relation d'inégalité, telle que (1) < (2) < (3) < (2) (1) (2) =O -&) il est évident que, parmi les vingt-quatre permutations quon peut former de ces quatre quantités, cing seules sont possibles, savoir: (1), G9» @), (4 (1), @), @, (3 3), Q0. Q» (9 3)) (), (4, @ (3), (4, Q0» Q. par Mais puisque (1) + (4) = (2) + (8), il est évident que (1) 2 (8) à la même fois que (2) = (4). DES RACINES D'ÉQUATIONS ALGEBRIQUES. 29 Donc la seconde et la troisième de ces cinq permutations sont aussi impossibles, et il ne reste à considérer que les trois autres, auxquelles nous ajoutons deux cas d'égalité: (1), 6» Q» (4 VENTO IE 3), (D, 4, © 3), (020, © @), à @), (2): Nous faisons en passant la remarque que ces cinq cas correspondent en ordre aux einq positions: 4a?> b > 0 (oem du 5a? > b > 4a? (Nee PU Ja? > b > 5a?. comme on peut le vérifier facilement. Puisqu’on a aussi toujours (a) > (2), @<(3), ainsi que () + (d) = (1) +), et par suite (a) = (4), & la même fois que (1) = (d), il sensuit que les six résultats de la substitution ne peuvent être arrangés par rapport à leur grandeur qu'en sept façons, savoir: 1) 1) (4, (3. (2), @, (5 2) d)=@, (3, (2), .(0— (4) 3) 4) (1, @) Q» & (9 4) a4) (1)-—G, (2—G. © 5) 4), 3), (1), © Q» (a) 6) @, (3, G=(4), 2, (9 7) 4), (3), @, (1), (2), (9. 30 C. F. E. BJÖRLING, SUR LA SEPARATION Pour faciliter la révision de la premiére partie du tableau ci-dessous, nous y avons indiqué le numéro de l'arrangement qui correspond à chaque cas spécial. 2. Deux racines de la dérivée ou plusieurs égales; les autres réelles. CE (GSS = Op Les racines de la dérivée sont dl + Vea; & — 6 = 0. & Il n'y a aucun point d’intersection sur les rayons. La courbe dans la fig. 8. La substitution donne: 1 Ew " i = hae 24a?// 6a ; (2) = ©) = ». B. & = 4; QE D. (ORNE a > 0). Les racines de la dérivée sont e = 6 = 4 V3a; Gy = Se les points d'intersection: 9a(]/5 — 1 a, = d, = yy La courbe dans la fig. 9. La substitution donne (1) = Al ee yt 27a? _ NM (3) = (4) —k-24a?]/3a; (ONT k+ Ag (13+9Y5)V a(p4 5 — 1). C &$—6—6-—8. (a = b = 0). & = & = 6; — 6, — 0. La courbe primaire consiste des asymptotes. Pour & =O les cinq racines coincident dans l'origine. » &>0 elles sont situées sur les rayons A, A, C, C', X’- 21 k < 0 ” » » ” )?) 1 X, B, p D, D’: 3. Deux racines de la dérivée ou plusieurs complexes ?). A. Deux racines de la dérivée complexes; les autres réelles et inegales. ‘) Pour éviter de complication nous nous restreignons dans cette partie a n'indiquer que les branches des racines complexes. DES RACINES D'ÉQUATIONS ALGEBRIQUES. 31 Nous distinguons trois cas. les ee OY b < 0. Nous posons 6 = — B. Les racines réelles de la dérivée sont EET + V 9a? + B les points d’intersection 2. y 1 A (En La courbe dans la fig. 10. La substitution donne el =k 4(B + 8a? + al 9a? + B)V 3a + /9a? + B. A, a OM 9a?. Bigs 15: b > 0. Fig. 16. SUR LA SÉPARATION La courbe primaire complexe consiste dans ces trois cas de quatre branches latérales, à chacune desquelles il y a toujours une racine. TABLEAU VIIL 1. Toutes les racines de la dérivée réelles et incgales. (da? > b > 0, a> 0). E A E $ Racines complexes. Conditions. E = ao Places des racines réelles. S 2 Se Branches. | Intervalles. (1)(3)<0, (2)(4)>0 1-5| 5 |n, 04, Ty 05, Tar 0, Ter Ory s | (1)=0, (3)<0, (2)(4)>0 DM 5(2) 75> O45 Tay 03, Vas Q9, To QT (2)=0, (1)(3)<0, (4)>0 1—3 | 5(2) | v Ts 0,5 Vas O5, Ta = Q2 — Toy Q5 T, (3)=0, (1)«0, (2)(4)>0 1—9|5(2) |f, 015174 0s S 55, 025 Ta, Org PA (4)=0, (1)(3)«0, (2)>0 5 5 (2) Tg 0: Vi 05; T35 05; Tay 01, Ty (1)=(8)=0, (2)(4)>0 4 522) rs, Os, T;— 05 — 5, 0», To == (1)=(4)=0, (2)>0, (3)«0 6 502,2) r,—Q,— T4, 05, Ty Cry 72701771 (2)=(4)=0, (1)(3)«0 4 |5(292) r,—0,— "4, Os, 5705775, Ory Tr (0)? ee (3)<0 5-7 ELM Unc (Pyth (ERO lag Ca A4 XA (1) (2)(3)<0 >» (4)(a)>0 1—3| 3 |7,, Con Tar Os 01, 7, BB XA (1)(2)(3)< 0, (a)=0, (4-0 1 3 (Ts, Car Tar Os Q,,, BB a (1)2)3)@)-0, (4-0 1 9 Tg, Oss Tar Os en" BB AB (1)(d)«0, (2)(3)(4)>0 1-3 2 Ts Ox 05, Tay 04, Ti CC DAX (1)«0, (d)=0, (2)(8)(4)>0 Si fees Då 05; T5, O1, Ti CC’ d (1)<0, (d)(2)(3)(4) - 0 3 Ts 04 03, Far 01 My CC 2 CD ; (1)(8)(4)<9, (2)>0 5-7, 3 035. Fag Osan tay 1 O19 ane DX (1)(2)(4)+0, B)= DV SG) Iro 045 7403 75 AA XA (1)(2)> 0, (3) <0, = 0 7 3(2) | Ts =Qs= Tir Oar Tay Qo AA XA (1)(2)(8)<0, (4)=0, (@)>0| 3 | 3(2) |r,=0,=7, Qi | BB | XA DES RACINES D'ÉQUATIONS ALGEBRIQUES. 38 HA 3 | "Ur IE Ee EB Racines complexes. Conditions. 3 E | ae | Places des racines réelles. BE | 3 Branches. | Intervalles. (1)(2)(3)<0, (4)=(a)=0 2 | 3(2)) ==" a, 7 BB a (1)(2)(3)(a@)>0, (4)=0 1 | 3(2)|r,=0,=7, ov ,| BB AB (1)=0, (2(3)(4)20, (d)<0| 3 |3(2)|,, o, T,=0,=7, | CC’ DX , |H=@=9, (2)(3)(4)>0 2 |3(2) v, 0, 7. =Q=7, | CC d (1)=0, (a)(2)(3)(4)- 0 1 |3(2) |", @ r=Q= 0 | CC CD (2)=0, (1)(8)(4)<0 5-7] 32) n-6-n, 0, n|DD |DX (1)=0, (2)>0, (3)(4)<0 1 | 3(2) 03, Ta, 09, T= =7,| DD DX mem (d)<0 Hoe dy Ww) Os AA, CC | XA, DX' (1)(2)(8)(4)=0, (d)20 3-7| 1 |r;, 0, AA’, CC'| XA, d NER Ile AA BO RAR. CD (1)(2)>0, (8)(4)<0 Cy al 055 735 Qs AA, DD XA, DX KQGGD-0, (9-0 — |s-T| 1 a, | BB, DD| XA, DX (1)(2)(8)(4)<0, (a)=0 3-7} 1 Ons c RIB, IDIDN Gig IDK (1)(2)(8)(4)(@) <0 Teer ae 0, 7| BB, DD AB, DX 2. Deux racines de la dérivée ou plusieurs égales: les autres réelles. ACT SR CN) | 3 2 | E | © g | Racines complexes. | Conditions. Ex Places des racines réelles. | | ai | Branches. Intervalles. | (2)=0, (1)«0, (4)>0} 5(3) |, Q,, 7,7057 75702772, 01 Ti | (1)(2)<0, (4)>0 3 | Copan @ 0, 71 | BB AB | (1)<0, (2)(4)>0 3 Ts. 0} 95, Tar Q1, 71 | CC CD (1)(2)<0, (4)=0 3(2) r,20,7 r, Q, BB AB (D-0, 300-0 — 13) |n, e, r,=0,= "1, | CC CD (1)(2)(4)<0 1 01, 7,| BB, DD' AB, DX (1)(2)(4)>0 TL mss» AA, CC’ | XA, CD Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Se. Ups. Ser. III. 5 34 C. F. E. BJÖRLING, SUR LA SEPARATION JE Cron yg ec ne (ae da ERR Oy B $ Racines complexes. Conditions. iz Places des racines réelles. = 5 & Branches. Intervalles. (1)=0, (3)-0 3(3) r,=0,= 1.=0,= 1, DD DE (1)>0, (33-0 3(9) | 20,7 "4 =03=7"3 AA XA (1)>0, (3)<0 1 (Dc 025 05 AA, DD'XA, DX’ (1)(8)«0, (a)>0 1 0, r, BB, DD|XA, DX| (1)(3)<0, (a)=0 1 0, "+ | BB DD| a, DX (1)(3)(a)<0O 1 ov, TT) BB, DD AB; DX (1)(3)>0, (d)<0 ro AA’, CC |XA, DX’ (1)(3)>0, (d)=0 ld. Thay On AA, CC’ | XA, d | (D3)(4)-0 anu ger AA’, CC raie 3. Deux racines de la dérivée ou plusieurs complexes. A. Deux racines de la dérivée complexes; les autres réelles et inégales. (b < 0). | 5 Zi Rac. compl. | Rac. compl. = propres. derivees. Conditions. $= | Places des racines réelles. s g Branches. (0«0, (2)>0 3 Vas 09; To, Q1, Ty BC (1) = 0, (2)>0 3(2) | Ts, 09$, P2 = 07 = 7; BC (1) <0, @)=0 3(2)| Ts =O. = Toy 06, % BC (1)(2) > 0 1 Pay Or AA BC (1)(2) < 0 1 (us fm DD BC B. Deux racines de la dérivée complexes; les autres réelles et égales. @<0, b—0). Rac. compl. | Rac. compl. SZ m E xus oS propres. derivées. Conditions. $z Places des racines réelles. 5 = Branches. (1) 2 0 3(3) | n=O = 7, = 01 = % BC (1) > 0 1 ane CE AA' BC (1) « 0 1 Quo Fr DD BC DES RACINES D'ÉQUATIONS ALGÉBRIQUES. 35 $ 18. Parmi d'autres équations générales auxquelles notre méthode s'ap- plique trés-facilement, nous citons les équations trinómes, telles que ng «perte ie eos metiri t ewe]. eee Mh ea c M EA et méme de la forme encore plus générale ye gat Li s bbs 399 3003819): Nous croyons cependant avoir déjà. donné assez d'exemples. Une étude plus détaillée des courbes primaires et des formes diver- ses, qu'elles peuvent présenter, conduira peut-étre à une classification ratio- nelle des équations algébriques; elle facilitera beaucoup la séparation des racines, surtout dans le cas où il s'agit de découvrir l'existence de points multiples complexes. Nous espérons revenir sur ce sujet. eS | LA Orr dod ACCEDER 02 | BE MU , Dnf n. ado (nd i I | tM E v m : & j NM au MTS i; ; f | s4lllat5h gm NPR Bela add | d ich (aq ipe Iovi viandes ai canne asilo HÉSITER HEURE hb nedan Shoot Al de ROU ane ae TNA | ; ionique 800". KOON Ji ! \ | uk À i 1 x "-—— ^ n f - Mee à wd fue "ws Er y lim » tr h, Schlachter & Seedo: INDEX HUJUS FASCICULI: I T. THORELL: On European Spiders I. 11. IL N. J. SCHEUTZ: Prodromus Monographie Georumy ee III. C.-F.-E. BJÖRLING: Sur la séparation des ra- cines d'équations algé- briques ee © © © © + © © © pagg. 109—242. NS „ 1-35. Tab. I. Y STAAT WUT à ie eae eit ttm ine et - RE aoe Sg Tur OO TI ROA AO DX LOGER. TN p Vans P AU RE fö fa kt a ve INDEX ACTORUM. „STEITDEEND. su ned E ET BR öre pagg. I—xIII. I J. E. ZETTERSTEDT: Musci et Hypaticæ Œlan- GIO piti dece ad cid „ 147. IL A.-G. THEORELL: Description dun Météoro- graphe enregistreur.... „ 1—18. Tab. I et II. II. V. B. Wirrrock: Anteckningar om Skandina- viens; Wesmidiaccer 25... 5, 0129: le IV. C.-E. Lunpstrém: Distinction des Maxima et desaMinima eae er „ 1—939. V. T. THORELL: On European Spiders.... „ 1—242. , I. deitterature EN. ae » I—XXIV. VI. N. J. ScHEUTZ: Prodromus Monographie Geo- TUES LE Oca cage s ius » 1—609. VIL C.-F.-E. BJÖRLING: Sur la séparation des raci- nes d'équations algébriques „ 1—35. ,, I 61195 tr pats IL p "S OU 2 | MG il ae cele NE ce Jt 4 eae | diassfeiigel “atin Are SKOLE TAS i i T iat cal ME- " "un 7 di PROS TN LT D se "MARS, iu EIN Seat vas. Xetra S E | aa 19e AT ee FAP ioi RED D hod, ^o ED 7 | emis APR - UN m - pistes) i Hn IRSE ue 5 T S MUN. iuinpaHl isis 7 s ! Mio + ^ iu i "^ sweeten, exam RA S oui. ead CL ET ET i zd addamul adds 208 PU ML ma i anna Lana TE id is. ui PNE E N' INTRODUCTIO. I. Proximo biennio, quod post Acta Regie Societatis Scientiarum Up- saliensis anno 1868 mense Septembri edita preeteriit, hi Soeii mortui sunt Honorarü: STJERNELD, Gustavus N. A. A., Rerum externarum a. h. Mi- nister supremus . . BESKOW, Bernhardus, errant See Bean REUTERDAHL, Henricus, Ecclesiæ Sviogothicæ Angiratiaeaane ERICSON, ical: in cae Mechan. Classis tae a. h. Tri- bunus D OIG! ae d TEU cu TORRES EDAM MR ae PRE Re Ordinarii Svecani: BOHEMAN, Carol. Henricus, Zoologie Professor Holmiensis . ERDMANN, Axel Joach., Professor Geologie Holmiensis . : SELANDER, Nicolaus Haquin., Academiz Scient. Holmiensis Astronomus et Professor . SECTIO Wena dinner aay SE Ordinarii Ewteri: MARTIUS, C. Fr. P., Botanices Prof. Monacensis emeritus COPLAND, Iacobus, Med. Dr, Reg. Soc. Sc. Londin. Membrum STEINHEIL, C. A., a. h. Physices Professor Monacensis Litterarum commercio junctus: SARS, Mathias, Zoologiæ Prof. Christianiensis . Adscriptus. 1848 1849 1854 1859 1861 1856 1844 1860 1846 1859 1865 Mortuus. 1868. 1868. 1870. 1870. 1868. 1869. 1870. 1869. 1870. 1870. 1869. II Novi Socii adscripti sunt Ordinarii Svecani: Adscriptus. LOVEN, Sveno, Zoologiæ Professor Holmiensis . . . 2 epee 1800! ALMEN, Augustus, Chemiæ Medicinalis et Physiologie Brenn Wiel 1870. Ordinarius Exterus: MULLER, Max., Professor Taylorianus Oxoniensis. . . . . . . . . 1869. NOVA ACTA REGIAE SOCIETATIS SC TEN TTA R UM, UPSALIENSIS. SERIEL TERTIAE. | VOL. VII. FASC. I. 1869. (Un noe Uni It vg li DA n Moscou T TCI ! ih E j i i = \ À s * | i E | N | i ee, um I ü | i I \ i Å NT | / DD i ' 1 I I I 1 uy i i NUT NN | ee pnt i) oe i M UU y "or Å n i 1 lj i 1 T U ii 1 I u t | 1 n | mes 15 an i NEXT TATEM [ (CU TUM a MET I m in ye Man it) na m n i ql i TIU ITM A 5 WHSE 04131 t1 pn Mull i THEE d t TT een — + T | NAN [| u M ! | HV 1343 i [4 I et MIL DOE ALIE | bri Inn MANN Hi i iH Spit i 1 i ia PERLE ET FREIE ulti "T il IN un 1 1 MENU TE 1 uti inn i i THEME i n H | Ni hi |